Complete Guide PDF

BTicino SpA
www.bticino.it
Via Messina, 38
20154 Milano - Italia
BTicino SpA reserves at any time the right to modify the contents of this booklet and to
AD-ITMH12GT - Edition 04/2012 communicate, in any form and modality, the changes brought to the same.
Technical guide 2012 MY HOME

MY HOME
GUIDE
AND INSTALLATION
DESIGN
INTRODUCTION – Project guidelines
Radio System
AUTOMATION
Burglar alarm
Energy management Temperature Control – Air Conditioning

Consumption Display – Load control management
Sound system
Video door entry and home video surveillance system
Structured cabling system for the home sector
System integration and control
SOFTWARE AND SERVICES – CATALOGUE
TECHNICAL SHEETS - GLOSSARY
General Contents MY HOME

MY HOME General Contents
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
MY HOME - Build on it. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The MY HOME system technologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
An interface for every need. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Select the look that meets your taste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MY HOME functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
MY HOME WEB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Project guidelines
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Functional diagram of a MY HOME system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Creation of the home automation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
YouProject software for the sizing of MY HOME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Devices configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Virtual configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Additional functions that can be performed with the virtual configuration. . . 26
Virtual Configurator software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
System layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installation of a BuS system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Type of wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Selection and positioning of the electric distribution board. . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
MY HOME flatWall for all basic or advanced system needs. . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Aesthetic and functional value with minimum space requirements. . . . . . . . 44
MY HOME flatWall 240 - 270 switchboard composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
MY HOME FLATWALL 150 switchboard composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Installation heights for every need. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Device-holder supports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Installation solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Electric distribution board position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Plug-in boxes position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Indications for the installation of aXOlutE EtÈrIS device holder boxes . . . . . 56
Local control device position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Grouping cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Selection of the cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Selection of the conduits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Positioning of conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Radio System
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Wireless freedom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
The functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Installation features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Control devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Actuators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Configuration - general rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
How to modify the configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Configuration of the functions: the main control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configuration of the functions: the scenario. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Distances and maximum number of devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Application examples and wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
AUTOMATION
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Introduction to the Automation system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Actuator devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Wire Automation extension with ZigBee radio devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
General concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Addressing levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Main operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Examples of configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Maximum distances and absorptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Maximum number of devices which can be configured. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Logical expansion of the addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Lighting management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Management of different loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Window and shutter management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Management of dimmer lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Lighting and shutter management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Burglar alarm
Professional safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Advanced functions: the safety of the home and of people . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Advanced functions: integration with other MY HOME functions . . . . . . . . 178
System devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Control and protection devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Devices for radio expansion and technical alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
System selection criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Project approach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
System measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Example: apartment burglar-alarm system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Example: apartment burglar-alarm system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Installation of modular devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Modular power supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Central unit with display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
IR detectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Various sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Outdoor siren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Use of the Youproject program for the configuration of the system . . . . . . . 206
Technical alarms: shop burglar-alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Technical alarms: anti-panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Technical alarms: flooding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Technical alarms: gas leak alarm with burglar-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Technical alarms: telephone signalling of the tripping of the
general circuit breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Advanced applications: switching on the lights because of an alarm. . . . . . 214
Advanced applications: remote assistance request with telephone call . . . . 215
Start-up and testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Start-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Programming of 4050 infrared remote controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Programming of 3530S and 3540 transponders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Programming a remote control or a transponder for several systems . . . . . . . 220
System activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
System test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
System test: two line contact interfaces check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Configuration or system modifications - Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Energy management
Saving energy has never been this easy.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
To ensure energy efficiency with MY HOME is easy.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Energy efficiency management devices overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Temperature control
MY HOME temperature control can be used:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Device selection criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Maximum number of devices, maximum distances and absorptions. . . . . . 244
Combining with other functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Correct mode of installation for 4 zone control unit, probes and
magnetic contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Disposition of solenoid valves and actuators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Legend of symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4 zone villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
4 zone villa - Climaveneta fan-coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
3 zone villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
6 zone villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
8 zone villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Service sector, 12 zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Several homes, 4 zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
MY HOME integration devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
consumption display
Instantaneous power, water and gas consumption data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Displaying consumptions and the production data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Measurement and display devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Energy data logger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Portal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Load control management

The end of the black-out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Device selection criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Load control management and consumption display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Display of electricity, water and gas consumptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Display of electric consumptions on several lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Display of produced and consumed energy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Display of produced and consumed energy in exchange mode on location. . . . 317
Display of the consumption of thermal power/hot water by individual home. . . 318
Load control management with total consumption display. . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Load control management with total display, of loads and diagnostics. . . . . 320
Three-phase and one-phase load control management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Sound system
Sound system 2 wire stereo HI-FI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..324
Wide range of solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Integration with other MY HOME applications and the 2 wire video
door entry system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Installing a system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Installation examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Maximum distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
System consumption calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
General rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Residential sector - apartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Residential sector - small house 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Residential sector - villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Service sector - doctor’s surgery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Service sector - restaurant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Service sector - supermarket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Service sector - hotel room 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Service sector - hotel room 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Residential sector: villa with automation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Residential sector: villa with 2 wire video door entry system. . . . . . . . . . . . 378
System expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Video door entry and home video

surveillance system
System composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Simple installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Example 1 - Villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Example 2 - Villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Example 3 - Apartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Example 4 - Complexes of small houses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
System functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
System composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
The wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Installation of entrance panels, handsets and interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
System performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
One-family system with 1 EP and 5 intercommunicating video handsets. . . . 422
Two-family systems with 1 EP, 3 handsets per home
and intercom between apartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
One-family system with 2 EP and 2 outdoor cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

One-family system with 5 video handsets in simultaneous switching on. . . . . . 425
One-family system with max 16 cameras or entrance panels. . . . . . . . . . . 426
Structured cabling system

for the home sector
What is the structured cabling system for the home sector?. . . . . . . . . . . . 430
The devices for the distribution of data, telephone and tv . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Application examples: telephone, data, TV/SaT, iPTV and
video door entry system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Application examples: telephone, data and integration
with MY HOME for local and remote function control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Cabling structure and components for the home sector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Main requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Creation of the communication area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Positioning of the user sockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
User socket wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
System with 3 active telephone jacks and 4 active data sockets . . . . . . . . . 450
System with 6 active telephone jacks and 6 active data sockets . . . . . . . . . 451
System with Gateway access, 6 telephone jacks, 4 data sockets,
1 IPTV jack, and 6 TV/SAT jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
System for distribution of telephone system, data network, TV/SAT signal. . . 454
System with Wireless router modem external to the distribution
board for the management of 4 data sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Integration of the data and telephone system network
with the MY HOME system, for local or remote function control. . . . . . . . . 457
Expansion of the number of data sockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
System integration and control

System integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Mode of integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Integration and interfacing devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Integration among MY HOME systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Integration between MY HOME and systems with different protocols. . . . . . 469
System control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Local control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Remote control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
MY HOME WEB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
MY HOME WEB - Installer Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
MY HOME WEB - Customer Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
System layout for the use of the MY HOME WEB services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
MY HOME WEB - Creation and configuration of the Customer Area. . . . . . . 504
MY HOME WEB - Creation of the customer area: operations to be
performed in the Installer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

MY HOME WEB - Creation of the customer area: operations to be
performed on the control devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Open WEB nET language and MY OPEn Community. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Integration of the Automation system with the
Temperature Control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Integration of the Video door entry system with the Sound system . . . . . . . . 511
Integration of the Burglar-alarm system with the Automation
and Temperature Control systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Integration of the Burglar-alarm system with the Video door entry
system and the Sound system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Integration of the Automation system with the Video door entry system
(with Web server for remote control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Total integration of the MY HOME systems with remote function control . . . 516
Software and services

YouProject preparing estimates and designing MY HOME
home automation systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Virtual Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
YouDiagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
BTicino responds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
CATALOGUE
RADIO SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
AXOLUTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
LIVINGLIGHT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Màtix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
FLATWALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Technical sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Burglar alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Load control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
Temperature control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Sound system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
Video door entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
Structured cabling system for the home sector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
Control and integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
GLOSSARY
Extended descriptions and operating modes of Automation devices
with virtual configuration.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126

Progressive index of items
ITEM CATALOGUE TECHNICAL SHEET ITEM CATALOGUE TECHNICAL SHEET
502NPA 552 579 604 3522 547 575 600 958
502PA 552 579 604 3523 547 575 600
3440 544 572 862 3526 677
3442 544 572 864 3526/10 677
3444 544 572 867 3526/16 677
3445 544 572 870 3527N 530 678
3448 544 572 873 3528N 530 681
3455 546 574 972 3528N 530 629
3456 546 574 976 3529 536 564 590 682
3456 599 3530S 535 563 590
3457 546 574 3540 535 563 590
3470 668 3545 551 578 603
3475 538 566 592 670 3549 542 570 596
3476 538 566 592 671 3550 546 574 599 978
3477 535 563 590 672 3559 551 578 603
3479 544 572 598 875 3571 530 630
3480 546 574 599 877 3572 530 631
3480V12 543 571 597 881 3573 530 632
3481 544 572 598 885 3574 530 633
3482 544 572 598 3575 530 634
3483 541 569 595 3576 530 635
3484 541 569 595 3577 530 639
3485 533 541 561 887 3578 530 641
3485B 541 569 595 890 3579 530 643
3486 533 541 561 892 3581 530 646
3495 548 576 601 1010 3750 608
3496 532 549 560 1011 3751 608
3499 550 577 602 3756 608
3501/.... 552 579 604 3757 609
3504 552 579 604 3759 609
3505/12 545 573 598 3761 609
3506 545 573 598 3771 609
3507/6 545 573 598 3785 609
3508BUS 547 575 600 3786 609
3508U2 547 575 600 3787 608
3508U3 547 575 600 3788 608
3510 543 571 597 895 3789 608
3510M 543 571 597 895 3790 608
3510PB 543 571 597 895 3791 609
3511 543 571 597 895 3792 609
3512 543 571 597 895 3793 609
3513 543 571 597 895 3794 609
3514 543 571 597 897 3795 609
3515 551 578 603 3796 609
3516 543 571 597 898 3797 609
3518 543 571 597 899 3798 609
3518/50 543 571 597 899 3799 609
3518/150 543 571 597 899 3801 608
3519 543 571 597 899 3802 608

3803 608 346833 1068
3804 608 346841 550 577 602 1070
3805 608 346850 550 577 602 1071
3823 608 346851 550 577 602 1073
3825 609 348200 558
3828 608 347400 1075
3829 609 348201 558
3831 608 348202 558
4050 545 573 902 348203 558
4070 573 348204 558
4072A 545 573 598 903 348205 558
4072L 545 545 545 903 348206 558
4911TDM 562 348220 542 570 905
32754 555 583 348402 558
32871 555 583 349140 558 1078
32872 555 583 349210 557
335919 551 578 349211 557
335919 603 349212 557
336904 552 579 604 1028 349310 557 1082
336982 577 349311 557 1084
336983 577 349312 557 1084
336984 577 349313 557 1084
336985 602 349320 557 1086
339213 558 349321 557 1086
339223 558 349340 1088
339313 558 349414 550
342170 1029 349415 550
342200 1032 349418 550
342550 1033 391647 585
342560 1034 391648 585
342991 1036 391649 585
342992 1036 391657 585 1090
343001 1038 391658 585 1090
343002 1038 391659 585 1090
344082 1040 391661 557 1090
344163 1050 391662 557 1090
344165 1052 391663 557 1090
344400 585 391670 1092
344401 585 A5006 606
344411 585 A5460 606
344412 585 A5765 606
344413 585 AM4890 588
346000 551 578 603 1053 AM5006 606
346020 533 578 603 1054 AM5052H 606
346030 548 576 601 1055 AM5064VH 606
346230 1061 AM5460 606
346250 1063 AM5658 591 838
346260 1064 AM5659 591 843
346830 548 576 601 1067 AM5731/12 598

AM5732/12 598 AM5915BC 605
AM5740 601 1017 AM5915BD 605
AM5742 601 1020 AM5915BE 605
AM5765 606 AM5915BF 605
AM5783/8 595 933 AM5915BH 605
AM5785 596 936 BMDI1001 540 568 594 684
AM5786 595 937 BMSE1001 537 565 591 687
AM5787 590 596 940 BMSE2001 537 565 591 692
AM5787/4 590 595 938 BMSE2002 537 565 591 698
AM5790 596 946 BMSE2003 537 565 591 704
AM5791 596 949 BMSE2004 537 565 591 710
AM5791B 596 952 BMSE2005 537 565 591 716
AM5831M2 590 601 BMSW1001 539 567 593 722
AM5832/2 590 794 BMSW1002 539 567 593 725
AM5832/3 590 797 BMSW1003 539 567 593 728
AM5834 590 602 829 C9451 533 561 589
AM5851/1 592 799 E46ADCN 551 578 603 731
AM5851M2 592 801 E47/12 551 578 603 907
AM5872 599 993 E47ADCN 551 578 603 908
AM5875 599 1002 E49 551 578 603
AM5911 605 F80AL 578
AM5911/2 605 F80CMD 918
AM5911/2AF 605 F115/8A 552 579 604
AM5911/2AG 605 F115/8B 552 579 604
AM5911/2AH 605 F400A 578
AM5911/2AI 605 F411/1N 539 567 593 732
AM5911AF 605 F411/1NC 539 567 593 734
AM5911AG 605 F411/2 539 567 593 735
AM5911AH 605 F411/2NC 539 567 593 738
AM5911AI 605 F411/4 539 567 593 739
AM5911BE 605 F413N 540 568 594 742
AM5911BF (*) 605 F414 540 568 594 745
AM5915/2AA 605 F415 540 568 594 745
AM5915/2AB 605 F416U1 540 568 594 748
AM5915/2AC 605 F417U2 540 568 594 752
AM5915/2AD 605 F420 533 561 589 755
AM5915/2BA 605 F422 532 560 588 756
AM5915/2BB 605 F425 535 563 590 766
AM5915/2BC 605 F426 532 560 588
AM5915/2BD 605 F428 535 563 590 767
AM5915/2BE 605 F429 532 560 588 772
AM5915/2BF 605 F430/2 546 574 599 983
AM5915/2BH 605 F430/4 546 574 599 987
AM5915AA 605 F441 548 576 601 1093
AM5915AB 605 F441M 548 576 601 1094
AM5915AC 605 F454 533 561 589 1112
AM5915AD 605 F461/2 533 561 589 1113
AM5915BA 605 F462 533 561 589 1116
AM5915BB 605 F481 544 572 598 909

F482 543 571 597 911 HA4690LTK 532
F482V12 543 571 597 913 HA4690VBB 532
F483 544 572 598 916 HA4690VNB 532
F500N 548 576 601 1012 HA4690VSW 532
F502 577 601 1013 HA4690XC 532
F503 548 577 601 1014 HB4572 808
F520 547 575 600 960 HB4572SB 810
F521 547 575 600 962 HB4589 528 649
F522 547 575 600 965 HB4596 528 659
F523 547 575 600 778 HB4597 528 660
F524 547 575 600 969 HB4598 528 661
F550C6 555 583 1098 HB4599 528 662
F551 555 583 589 1100 HB4619 544 922
F552 555 583 1102 HC4033 556
F553 555 583 1103 HC4070 545 929
F555 555 583 1105 HC4177 556
F558 555 583 1107 HC4202D 555
H4372V230H 556 HC4210D 555
H4548 556 HC4214D 555
H4549 556 HC4269F 555
H4562 548 1020 HC4279C6A 555
H4570 550 577 602 1016 HC4511/12 544
H4586 528 647 HC4512/12 544
H4587 528 648 HC4547 556
H4588 528 HC4560 548 1017
H4590 528 650 HC4563 535 815
H4591 528 651 HC4563 549
H4592 528 652 HC4563/2 549
H4593 528 653 HC4565 550 1018
H4594 528 654 HC4575 817
H4595 528 655 HC4577 546
H4648 556 786 HC4578 528 665
H4649 556 786 HC4601 541 920
H4651M2 534 549 788 HC4603/4 545 932
H4652/2 534 794 HC4603/8 541 933
H4652/3 534 797 HC4604 545 934
H4671/1 538 799 HC4605 542 936
H4671M2 538 801 HC4606 541 937
H4678 538 806 HC4607 535 542 940
H4687 532 560 588 HC4607/4 535 541 938
H4890 532 1122 HC4608 541 944
HA4572 808 HC4610 542 946
HA4572SB 810 HC4611 542 949
HA4589 528 649 HC4611B 542
HA4596 528 659 HC4613 542 954
HA4597 528 660 HC4618 544 956
HA4598 528 661 HC4653/2 534 827
HA4599 528 662 HC4653/3 534 549 827
HA4619 544 922 HC4654 536 550 829

HC4657M3 534 549 833 HC4915BB 554
HC4657M4 534 549 833 HC4915BC 554
HC4658 536 838 HC4915BC 554
HC4659 536 843 HC4915BE 554
HC4672N 547 811 HC4915BF 554
HC4673 547 HC4915BG 554
HC4680 535 848 HC4915BH 554
HC4690 532 1118 HC4915BL 554
HC4692 546 993 HC4915BL 556
HC4692FAN 546 996 HC4915DD 554
HC4693 546 999 HC4915DD 556
HC4695 546 1002 HC4915M2BL 554
HC4891 532 851 HC4915M2BL 556
HC4911 553 HC4915MR 554
HC4911/2 553 HC4915MR 556
HC4911/2AF 554 HC4919 544
HC4911/2AG 554 HC4921BL 556
HC4911/2AH 554 HC4921DD 556
HC4911/2AI 554 HC4921MR 556
HC4911/2BA 554 HD4033 556
HC4911/2BC 554 HD4070 545 929
HC4911/2BE 554 HD4177 556
HC4911AD 554 HD4202D 555
HC4911AF 554 HD4210D 555
HC4911AG 554 HD4214D 555
HC4911AH 554 HD4269F 555
HC4911AI 554 HD4279C6A 555
HC4911BA 554 HD4511V12 544
HC4911BC 554 HD4512V12 544
HC4911BE 554 HD4547 556
HC4915 553 HD4560 548 1017
HC4915/2 553 HD4563 535 549 815
HC4915/2AA 554 HD4563M2 549
HC4915/2AB 554 HD4565 550 1018
HC4915/2AC 554 HD4575 817
HC4915/2AD 554 HD4577 546
HC4915/2BA 554 HD4578 528 665
HC4915/2BB 554 HD4601 541 920
HC4915/2BC 554 HD4603/4 545 932
HC4915/2BD 554 HD4603/8 541 933
HC4915/2BE 554 HD4604 545 934
HC4915/2BF 554 HD4605 542 936
HC4915/2BG 554 HD4606 541 937
HC4915/2BH 554 HD4607 535 940
HC4915AA 554 HD4607 542
HC4915AB 554 HD4607/4 535 541 938
HC4915AC 554 HD4608 541 944
HC4915AD 554 HD4610 542 946
HC4915BA 554 HD4611 542 949

HD4611B 542 HD4915BL 554 556
HD4613 542 954 HD4915DD 554 556
HD4618 544 956 HD4915M2 553
HD4653M2 534 827 HD4915M2AA 554
HD4653M3 534 549 827 HD4915M2AB 554
HD4654 536 550 829 HD4915M2AC 554
HD4657M3 534 549 833 HD4915M2AD 554
HD4657M4 534 549 833 HD4915M2BA 554
HD4658 536 838 HD4915M2BB 554
HD4659 536 843 HD4915M2BC 554
HD4672N 547 818 HD4915M2BD 554
HD4673 547 HD4915M2BE 554
HD4680 535 848 HD4915M2BF 554
HD4690 532 HD4915M2BG 554
HD4692 546 993 HD4915M2BH 554
HD4692FAN 546 996 HD4915M2BL 554
HD4693 546 999 HD4915M2BL 556
HD4695 546 1002 HD4915MR 554
HD4891 532 546 549 851 HD4915MR 556
HD4911 553 HD4919 544
HD4911AD 554 HD4921BL 556
HD4911AF 554 HD4921DD 556
HD4911AG 554 HD4921MR 556
HD4911AH 554 HS4033 556
HD4911AI 554 HS4070 545 929
HD4911BA 554 HS4177 556
HD4911BC 554 HS4202D 555
HD4911BE 554 HS4210D 555
HD4911M2 553 HS4214D 555
HD4911M2AF 554 HS4269F 555
HD4911M2AG 554 HS4279C6A 555
HD4911M2AH 554 HS4511/12 544
HD4911M2AI 554 HS4512/12 544
HD4911M2BA 554 HS4547 556
HD4911M2BC 554 HS4560 548 1017
HD4911M2BE 554 HS4563 535 549 815
HD4915 553 HS4563/2 549
HD4915AA 554 HS4565 550 1018
HD4915AB 554 HS4575 817
HD4915AC 554 HS4577 546
HD4915AD 554 HS4578 528 665
HD4915BA 554 HS4601 541 920
HD4915BB 554 HS4603/4 545 932
HD4915BC 554 HS4603/8 541 933
HD4915BD 554 HS4604 545 934
HD4915BE 554 HS4605 542 936
HD4915BF 554 HS4606 541 937
HD4915BG 554 HS4607 535 542 940
HD4915BH 554 HS4607/4 535 541 938

HS4608 541 944 HS4915/2BE 554
HS4610 542 946 HS4915/2BF 554
HS4611 542 949 HS4915/2BG 554
HS4611B 542 HS4915/2BH 554
HS4613 542 954 HS4915AA 554
HS4618 544 956 HS4915AB 554
HS4653/2 534 827 HS4915AC 554
HS4653/3 534 549 827 HS4915AD 554
HS4654 536 550 829 HS4915BA 554
HS4657M3 534 833 HS4915BB 554
HS4657M4 534 549 833 HS4915BC 554
HS4658 536 838 HS4915BC 554
HS4659 536 HS4915BE 554
HS4672N 547 811 HS4915BF 554
HS4673 547 HS4915BG 554
HS4680 535 848 HS4915BH 554
HS4690 532 1118 HS4915BL 554
HS4692 546 993 HS4915BL 556
HS4692FAN 546 996 HS4915DD 554
HS4693 546 999 HS4915DD 556
HS4695 546 1002 HS4915M2BL 554
HS4891 532 546 549 851 HS4915M2BL 556
HS4911 553 HS4915MR 554
HS4911/2 553 HS4915MR 556
HS4911/2AF 554 HS4919 544
HS4911/2AG 554 HS4921BL 556
HS4911/2AH 554 HS4921DD 556
HS4911/2AI 554 HS4921MR 556
HS4911/2BA 554 HW4890 532 1122
HS4911/2BC 554 L4033 584
HS4911/2BE 554 L4177 584
HS4911AD 554 L4202D 583
HS4911AF 554 L4210D 583
HS4911AG 554 L4214D 583
HS4911AH 554 L4269F 583
HS4911AI 554 L4279C6A 583
HS4911BA 554 L4373H 584
HS4911BC 554 L4380/B 545
HS4911BE 554 L4380/B 573
HS4915 553 L4511/12 572
HS4915/2 553 L4512/12 572
HS4915/2AA 554 L4546 606
HS4915/2AB 554 L4547 584
HS4915/2AC 554 L4560 576 1017
HS4915/2AD 554 L4561N 548 576 601 1019
HS4915/2BA 554 L4562 577 1020
HS4915/2BB 554 L4563 563 576 815
HS4915/2BC 554 L4565 577 1018
HS4915/2BD 554 L4566 550 577 602 1022

L4566/10 550 577 602 1021 L4669S 552 579 604 924
L4567 550 577 602 1023 L4671/1 566 799
L4568 550 577 602 1024 L4672N 575 811
L4569 550 577 602 1025 L4673 575
L4572 808 L4678 566 806
L4572SB 810 L4680 563 848
L4575N 817 L4692 574 993
L4575SB 821 L4692FAN 574 996
L4576N 826 L4693 574 999
L4577 574 992 L4695 574 1002
L4578N 529 665 L4891 560 574 576 851
L4589N 529 649 L4911ADN 581
L4596N 529 659 L4911AFN 581
L4597N 529 660 L4911AGN 581
L4598N 529 661 L4911AHN 581
L4599N 529 662 L4911AIN 581
L4600/4 573 930 L4911BFN 581
L4601 569 920 L4911M2AFN 581
L4603/4 573 932 L4911M2AGN 581
L4603/8 569 933 L4911M2AHN 581
L4604 573 934 L4911M2AIN 581
L4605 570 936 L4911M2N 581
L4606 569 937 L4911M2TN 582
L4607 563 570 940 L4911N 581
L4607/4 563 569 938 L4911TN 582
L4608 569 944 L4915AN 580
L4610 570 946 L4915BN 580
L4611 570 949 L4915DD 580 584
L4611B 570 952 L4915DN 580
L4613 570 954 L4915FN 580
L4618 572 956 L4915KIT 582
L4619 572 L4915KIT1 582
L4630 573 598 L4915M2ADN 580
L4630 545 L4915M2AN 580
L4651M2 562 576 788 L4915M2BN 580
L4652/2 562 794 L4915M2DN 580
L4652/3 562 797 L4915M2FN 580
L4654N 564 577 829 L4915M2N 580
L4658N 564 838 L4915M2TN 582
L4659N 564 843 L4915MR 580
L4664 555 583 L4915MR 584
L4665L20 555 583 L4915N 580
L4665L40 555 L4915SETBL 582
L4665L40 583 L4915SETBL 584
L4668BUS/35 548 577 601 L4915TN 582
L4668BUS/60 548 577 601 L4915TN 584
L4669 552 579 604 858 L4919 572
L4669/500 552 579 604 858 LN4548 584
L4669HF 552 579 604 859 LN4549 584

LN4586 529 647 N4605 570 936
LN4587 529 648 N4606 569 937
LN4588 529 N4607 563 570 940
LN4590 529 650 N4607/4 563 569 938
LN4591 529 651 N4608 569 944
LN4592 529 652 N4610 570 946
LN4593 529 653 N4611 570 949
LN4594 529 654 N4611B 570 952
LN4595 529 655 N4613 570 954
LN4648 584 786 N4618 572 956
LN4649 584 786 N4640 542 570 596 925
LN4671M2 566 801 N4640B 542 570 596 925
LN4890 560 1122 N4654N 564 829
LN4890A 560 1122 N4658N 564 838
MH200N 533 561 589 1124 N4659N 564 843
MHKIT10N 563 N4672N 575 811
MHKIT85N 570 596 N4673 575
MHVISUAL 532 560 588 N4680 563 848
N4033 584 N4692 574 993
N4070 573 598 929 N4692FAN 574 996
N4177 584 N4693 574 999
N4202D 583 N4695 574 1002
N4210D 583 N4891 560 574 576 851
N4214D 583 N4911ADN 581
N4269F 583 N4911AFN 581
N4279C6A 583 N4911AGN 581
N4373H 584 N4911AHN 581
N4511/12 572 N4911AIN 581
N4512/12 572 N4911BFN 581
N4547 584 N4911M2AFN 581
N4560 576 1017 N4911M2AGN 581
N4563 563 576 815 N4911M2AHN 581
N4565 577 602 1018 N4911M2AIN 581
N4575SB 821 N4911M2N 581
N4576N 826 N4911M2TN 582
N4577 992 N4911N 581
N4575N 817 N4911TN 582
N4577 574 N4915AN 580
N4578N 529 665 N4915BN 580
N4589N 529 649 N4915DD 580 584
N4596N 529 659 N4915DN 580
N4597N 529 660 N4915FN 580
N4598N 529 661 N4915KIT 582
N4599N 529 662 N4915KIT1 582
N4600/4 573 930 N4915LN 580
N4601 569 920 N4915M2ADN 580
N4603/4 573 932 N4915M2AN 580
N4603/8 569 933 N4915M2BN 580
N4604 573 934 N4915M2DN 580

N4915M2FN 580 NT4692FAN 574 996
N4915M2LN 580 NT4693 574 999
N4915M2TN 582 NT4695 574 1002
N4915MR 580 NT4891 560 574 576 851
N4915MR 584 NT4911ADN 581
N4915SETBL 582 584 NT4911AFN 581
N4915TN 582 584 NT4911AGN 581
N4919 572 NT4911AHN 581
NT4033 584 NT4911AIN 581
NT4070 573 929 NT4911BFN 581
NT4177 584 NT4911M2AFN 581
NT4202D 583 NT4911M2AGN 581
NT4210D 583 NT4911M2AHN 581
NT4214D 583 NT4911M2AIN 581
NT4269F 583 NT4911M2N 581
NT4279C6A 583 NT4911M2TN 582
NT4373H 584 NT4911N 581
NT4511/12 572 NT4911TN 582
NT4547 584 NT4915AN 580
NT4560 576 1017 NT4915BN 580
NT4563 563 576 815 NT4915DD 580 584
NT4565 577 1018 NT4915DN 580
NT4575N 817 NT4915FN 580
NT4575SB 821 NT4915KIT 582
NT4576N 826 NT4915KIT1 582
NT4577 574 992 NT4915M2ADN 580
NT4578N 529 665 NT4915M2AN 580
NT4600/4 573 930 NT4915M2BN 580
NT4601 569 920 NT4915M2DN 580
NT4603/4 573 932 NT4915M2FN 580
NT4603/8 569 933 NT4915M2N 580
NT4604 573 934 NT4915M2TN 582
NT4605 570 936 NT4915MR 580 584
NT4606 569 937 NT4915N 580
NT4607 563 570 940 NT4915SETBL 582 584
NT4607/4 563 569 938 NT4915TN 582 584
NT4608 569 944 NT4919 572
NT4610 570 946
NT4611 570 949
NT4611B 570 952
NT4613 570 954
NT4618 572 956
NT4654N 564 577 829
NT4658N 564 838
NT4659N 564 843
NT4672N 575 811
NT4673 575
NT4680 563 848
NT4692 574 993

MY HOME Introduction
CONTENTS
MY HOME – INTRODUCTION
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Introduction MY HOME 1
GENERAL FEATURES
MY HOME - Build on it
MY HOME is the BTicino home automation system, the solution for the design of the electric system of the house.
ADVANCED ELECTRIC SYSTEMS SELECTION OF

Thanks to the MY HOME technology, THE FUNCTIONS
it is possible to design electric A system made using MY HOME
systems with new, and more can be expanded at any time,
advanced features in new or existing with minimum, cost effective
buildings. interventions: during the design
stage, one can select which functions
shall be included immediately, and
which ones at a later date.
COMFORT SAFETY ENERGY MANAGEMENT AUDIO VIDEO

Light automation
Burglar alarm
Temperature control
COMMUNICATION
Management of shutters
Technical alarms
Air conditioning
Digital video door entry system

and automations Remote assistance
Load management
Video handset answering

Scenario activation
Automatic rearming
Consumption display
machine
Sound system
after black-out Integrated telephone system

Video monitoring systems

2 MY HOME Introduction
2 TECHNOLOGIES
Simple design and installation,
thanks to radio or digital BUS
communication among the
AN OPEN SYSTEM LOOK CAPABLE OF
components.
MY HOME is an open system allowing MEETING ALL TASTES
both integration with products of
MY HOME is available is several
other brands, and communication
finishes: AXOLUTE, AXOLUTE ETÈRIS,
with the outside world using the
LIVINGLIGHT and MATIX.
TCP/IP protocol.
MY HOME portal
INTEGRATION AND CONTROL

Function integration through the Touch Screen user interface
Remote management using the

tem Local management through PC
MY HOME WEB service
The MY HOME system technologies
BUS technology
TYPE OF DEVICES
L
N
Control
Actuator SCS BUS
FEATURES
The SCS BUS technology is based on the use of devices connected to each other by a cable (BUS) with two conductors,
used for the transfer of information and the low voltage (27 Vdc) power supply.
Using appropriate interfaces, MY HOME BUS systems can be easily integrated to BUS systems with different communication
protocols, like Konnex and DALI standards, etc., and extended using ZigBee control devices.
Lighting
Temperature control

Shutter automation
Load management and consumption display

Scenario management
Video door entry system

FUNCTIONS
Burglar alarm
Home structured cabling

Technical alarms (gas and/or water leak)
Local and remote control of one or more

Sound system
integrated functions
WHEN SHOULD IT BE USED When there is the possibility of installing a new system, or refurbishing an old one with BUS wiring
TV/SAT
DEVICE
CONFIGURATION
Web Server
TV/SAT IPTV
Ethernet cable
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan
Physical configuration using plug-in

Configuration using thecontrollo
programming
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia lan controllo carichi energia luci devicestvcccalled configurators.
www irrigazione
software
BUS cable
Radio ZigBee® technology
L
N
Radio control Actuator
FEATURES
The Radio Zigbee technology is based on the use of battery powered control devices, and actuator devices powered by the
electric power supply, and connected to the load to be controlled, communicating via radio signals at a 2.4 GHz frequency.
Thanks to these features, it is possible to realise with extreme easy new electric systems, or to modify existing ones, with
reduced cable connections and minimum masonry wall interventions. Using a specific interface, ZigBee radio control
devices can be integrated to a BUS technology system (i.e. the Automation system).
Lighting

Shutter automation

Scenario management

Technical alarms (gas and/or water leak)

When it is not possible to extend/modify a system with BUS wiring
Push and Learn mode; without using tools and software

Legrand is a
member of
the executive
board
An interface for every need
A wide range of controls providing the most suitable solution for each need.
From basic controls to scenario controls, from room controls to local and remote
supervision.
TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLS

To control all the MY HOME functions
from one single point, in a simple and
logic manner.
TOUCH CONTROLS
A simple touch will activate any
actuation or regulation function.
WEB SERVER
For remote control of all home automation
functions, using a PC or a hand-held computer,
through internet and WEB pages.
DIGITAL CONTROLS
A simple click for function control.
VIDEO HANDSETS
Video handsets also become versatile
control and management multimedia
stations of the MY HOME system.
MULTIMEDIA TOUCH SCREEN

It can be used to control and display the
MY HOME system on the screen, with a
simple touch of the icons shown on the
large 10” display.
It can also act as a video handset, and
enables monitoring the rooms through
the cameras installed around the home.
The device is also capable of reading
and displaying multimedia contents
available through WEB connections or
saved in USB Pen drives, or SD cards.
Select the look that meets your taste
A wide range of finishes, to “dress” the MY HOME system with colours and finishes to one’s personal taste .
The MY HOME devices are completed with the colours and materials of
the cover plates of the AXOLUTE, NIGHTER AND WHICE, AXOLUTE ETERIS,
LIVINGLIGHT AND MÀTIX, civil series, available in all modularities.
LIVINGLIGHT
MÀTIX
AXOLUTE
WHITE SOLUTION
AXOLUTE
AXOLUTE
NIGHTER E WHICE
AXOLUTE ETÈRIS
MY HOME functions
TOUCH SCREEN, to intuitively
activate, using an icon
menu, all home automation
functions.
COMFORT
MY HOME improves and simplifies
the quality of domestic living.
For example, it provides automation
LOCAL DISPLAY
of curtains and shutters, light control
Touch screen control for the
simultaneous control of 4 functions: centralisation, centralised sound
Scenarios, Temperature control,
Sound system, Consumption system control for the whole house,
display, and Load management temperature control, watering and
activation of several automations.
TOUCH SCREEN configured for real time

display and management of electricity, gas
ENERGY SAVING and water consumption levels.
MY HOME pays a lot of attention

to the respect of the environment
and the intelligent use of energy Temperature control central unit
for zone control of the various
resources. temperatures inside the home.
It enables monitoring consumption
levels and managing the air
conditioning system across the whole
house, adjusting the temperature
according to the zone.
CENTRAL UNITS
For the management of the burglar alarm system.
Various solutions available, for each and every type
SAFETY of requirement: from the one-bedroom apartment
to the villa.
MY HOME makes the home
safer and more protected, even
when the owner is out. It helps
preventing intrusions and protecting FLUSH MOUNTED CAMERA
For video monitoring across
against domestic dangers and the home.
inconveniences, such as gas leaks,
flooding, electric power cuts,
activating any countermeasures as
necessary.
NIGHTER E WHICE HANDSETS
Large 8” colour display
8 mm thick glass surface COMMUNICATION
Touch control keypad, a simple touch of the
icon will activate the function. MY HOME can be used to manage
images, data, and music inside the
home. It ensures valid video handset
call reception and forwarding
solutions, facilitating access control,
VIDEO DISPLAY and provides local video monitoring.
2.5” colour display
Icon menu
CONTROL AND INTEGRATION INTERFACES

Devices for the integration of the various MY HOME functions with
SCS technology, and for the integration of the MY HOME system
The BTicino MY HOME Control system with standard DALI systems
provides supervision and monitoring

of the home in total safety and
discretion.
Control can be local and remote.
Local using a simple control, or an
advanced device like MULTIMEDIA
TOUCH SCREEN, or an iPad with
the My Home BTicino application
installed, which can be downloaded
MULTIMEDIA TOUCH SCREEN
free of charge from iTunes. Remote Video handset and control device for all the MY
HOME functions.
control is through a PC, hand held It also works as a multimedia station with
computer, telephone or mobile USB port, SD card reader connector, and WEB
connection for RSS, IP radio and webcam
phone, using the Internet connection
and the potentialities of the Web
Platform.
IPAD
iPad with My Home BTicino application for
local function control.
MY HOME WEB
MY HOME Web is a virtual platform Customer area:

In order to take advantage of the MY
designed by BTicino, divided into two solely intended for customers HOME WEB services, the system of
areas: interested in the remote the customer must be fitted with at
Installer area:
management of their system. least one of the following:
intended for the My Home This service, active since 2003, Web server, for FLAT type ADSL

installers which can register their enables remote control of all the line communication, using the
own systems. Following customer’s home automation functions of BTicino router modem;
request, it is also possible to the MY HOME system, making Burglar alarm central unit with

activate the Remote Assistance available exclusive services that communicator, for connection to
service, which gives the possibility are only possible through the web the public telephone network.
of remotely monitoring the home portal (danger notifications, web
of the customer, and receive real scenarios, etc.).
time notifications in case of faults.
Burglar-alarm
central unit
Web server
ADSL modem
CONNECTION SAFETY AND
PROTECTION
In developing the MY HOME WEB Integrity: safeguard of the

portal, BTicino has paid special accuracy and completeness of the
attention to ensuring high levels of information;
protection of the data transferred Accessibility: guarantee that both

through the network from unwanted data and information will be
access. available when required.
In particular, stringent protection For the described features, BTicino
measures have been implemented has obtained the ISO27001
to ensure high levels of protection in “Information technology – Security
terms of: management systems” certification.
Privacy: protection of data from

unauthorised access;
PSTN
ADSL
Internet
Mobile access Voice an≠d SMS
message access
14 MY HOME Project guidelines
CONTENTS
MY HOME – Project guidelines
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Project guidelines MY HOME 15

GEnEral fEaturES
functional diagram of a MY HOME system

the creation of a MY HOME the home converge in a general automation BuS (grey cable) is the
automation system does not entail distribution board that contains the same as for the Energy management
many changes when compared with usual system sectioning devices, the and temperature control systems
a traditional system the energy, BuS power supplies for the various the burglar-alarm BuS (red cable), is
telephone/data line and Video door systems, and all DIn modularity the same as the one for the technical
entry system sources that reach devices the lights/shutter alarms TV/SAT
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
ENERGY SUPPLY
FLATWALL
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo
Telephone line Grey cable (BUS)

TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT IPTV
REMOTE
CONTROL
one videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione Red cable (BUS)
zione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www
ADSL line TV/SAT
(Internet) IPTV
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
SYSTEM
arichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
Video door entry system call
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc ww
White cable (BUS)
LAN

the 2 wire video door entry system or can be integrated with each other
BuS (white cable) is the same as the using specific interfaces lOCal
one for the sound system, and offers COntrOl devices enable centralising
the possibility of implementing the the supervision and the control of the
video surveillance system function systems from one single point of the
the systems can be set individually, home TV/SAT
IPTV TV/SAT IPTV LIGHT/SHUTTER AUTOMATION
ENERGY MANAGEMENT
TV/SAT IPTV

LOCAL CONTROL
termoregolazione
controllo carichi videocitofonia
energia controllo luci lan tvcc controllo carichi
www energia
irrigazione luci tvcc www irrigazione
TV/SAT IPTV
BURGLAR ALARM
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi
TV/SAT IPT
TECHNICAL ALARMS
mazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www
TV/SAT automazione
IPTV
diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione TV/SAT
videocitofonia controllo
IPTVlan controllo
VIDEO DOOR
ENTRY SYTEM SOUND SYSTEM
TV/SAT IPTV
LOCAL CONTROL
rto termoregolazione videocitofonia automazione
controllo diffusione sonora
lan antifurto
controllo carichi termoregolazione
energia videocitofonia
luci tvcc controllo www lan controllo carichi
irrigazione energi
TV/SAT IPTV
DATA NETWORK
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto
TV/SATvideocitofonia
termoregolazione controllo
IPTV
lan controllo carichi energia l
LOCAL CONTROL
lazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc

GEnEral fEaturES
System integration
In order to ensure advanced home
automation functions and enable the
central management of the
MY HOME system, the BuS of the
various systems are integrated with
each other using particular interfaces 1 2
that can be installed inside the
flatWall distribution board, near
other DIn modularity devices (power
supplies, actuators, etc )
the following image shows the main
devices for the above setup 3 4 5
6
7
Video door entry system entrance panel
8 9
10

TV/SAT IPTV
IPTV Light/shutter automation
LEGEND
1. E46aDCn power supply for 3. f422 interface for the integration
TV/SAT the poweringIPTV
of the automation, of the burglar-alarm and automation
controllo carichi energia luci tvcc

temperature
www
control and Energy
irrigazione
systems
Temperature control management systems 4. f422 interface for the integration
IPTV
2. E46aDCn power supply for the of the video door entry system and
Energy management powering of the burglar-alarm the automation system

TV/SAT
system 5. f454 web IPTV
server for local and
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luciremote control
tvcc using thewww
internet irrigazione
Burglar alarm
and the lan network of the home
automation functions
lan controllo carichi
TV/SAT
energia luci
IPTV
tvcc www irrigazione
6. 346000 power supply for the
SCS/DALI interface powering of the video door entry
Video door automazione
entry sytem diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci
system and the sound system
TV/SAT IPTV
7. f441M audio/video multichannel
matrix for the distribution of the
Sound system
signals of the video door entry
rmoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
system and the sound system
8. f551 switch for the distribution
of a data line to four different rJ45
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci t
sockets
9. f552 power supply for the
TV/SAT IPTV
SCS/Konnex interface
powering of the switch
Telephone line 10. aDSl modem/router for the

connection to the internet network of
the MY HOME system using the web
server item f454
In addition to the devices described,
controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
the MY HOME system can also be
integrated with systems of a different
technology and communication
protocol, such as Konnex and EIB,
IPTV
using the devices shown for more
Data network ADSL line (Internet) details refer to the section “SYStEM
IntEGratIOn anD COntrOl" of this
TV/SAT guide
IPTV
controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
GEnEral fEaturES
Creation of the home automation system

the creation of the MY HOME SYSTEM DESIGN AND
automation system follows the CONFIGURATION OF THE
following stages: DEVICES:
for this operation Bticino provides
1. 1. DEFINITION OF THE two tools:
REQUIREMENTS this technical Guide with technical

Definition of the home automation sheets
functions to implement inside the the Youproject software for

home, based on the requirements of preparing the necessary estimates
the user and designing the integrated
home automation system
2. PROJECT the application is preset to
selection of the types of devices automatically perform all the
needed, configuration, operation size and electrical calculations, as
mode, and development of the well as the configuration of the
electric diagram products, giving the installer full
freedom to make the necessary
3. INSTALLATION changes and customisations
wiring of the devices inside their at the design stage for more
conduits and the distribution board, information see the section
with operational test "Software and Services"

YouProject software
for the sizing of MY HOME
WHEN AND WHY SHOULD YOU

USE YOUPROJECT
YouProject is an extremely useful and from the design to the installation
the diagram below shows the
versatile software that Bticino has of the system (system absorption range of information generated by
designed to simplify and speed up check, number of DIn modules, YouProject during the three different
the sizing of a MY HOME system in dissipated power, map of physical stages required for the realisation of
order to: and logic links for the installation, the system:
Produce an estimate of the
confi DEfInItIOn Of rEQuIrEMEntS

offer (General description and guration, Cat service report) DESIGn

advantages, bill of quantities, list of InStallatIOn

items required);
1st STAGE – DEFINITION OF REQUIREMENTS Entering of the data for the definition of the functions
2nd STAGE - DESIGN

Report:
- General description and advantages,
- Bill of quantities;
TiPre
- List of Items required; Software for preparing
- Time estimate;
- System absorption check; estimates
- Number of DIN modules and dissipated power.
YouProject
3rd STAGE - INSTALLATION
Report: XML file
- Map of physical and logic installation links;
- Configuration;
- CAT service report
Multimedia Touch Screen

Device configuration software: My Home Web services
- TiDisplay
- Virtual configurator MY HOME portal
- TiMH200N
- MHVisual
- TiMultimediatouch
Touch Screen

GEnEral fEaturES
YouProject software
for the sizing of MY HOME
If the MY HOME system is not the filled system booklet will then Configure devices such as touch

designed using YouProject, it will become a useful and necessary Screen, Multimedia touch Screen,
be necessary to fill at least a system document for the installer, as it MH200n scenario programmer,
Booklet (1) in Excel format, with the represents the “ID card” of the system using the corresponding
description and configuration of the installed programming software etc
systems (automation, temperature Having a booklet in Excel format will activate the My Home Web

control, burglar-alarm, etc ) be useful to create the XMl file to: services
the file is created using the
YouProject software, by importing
the xls file of the system booklet
YouProject
Installation
File XML

Device configuration software: My Home Web services
- TiDisplay
- Virtual configurator MY HOME portal
- TiMH200N
- MHVisual
- TiMultimediatouch
MH200N
NOTE (1): the file in Excel format of the “System booklet” and the YouProject software are available with the CD supplied with the present guide, or by visiting the “Installers”
area of the MY HOME section of the www.BTicino.it website.
Devices configuration
Based on the type of products, this
operation may be performed in three
different ways: Example of main screen of the
software for the definition
Device configuration using the
of the scenarios using the
programming software: TiMH200N program
devices such as Wen server,

Scenario programmer, touch
screen, Video station, Multimedia
touch screen etc , are supplied
with appropriate software for the
configuration of the operating
parameters and the management
of the web pages or graphic icons
of the MY HOME functions
Physical configuration:

Flush mounted device configuration
this is done by connecting to the
appropriate socket of each device,
using pliers, special activation
components (3501/ ) called
configurators Each configurator is
identified with its number, letter,
colour or graphic
Virtual configurator:

In automation and temperature
control systems with several
devices, it is possible to greatly to the system through the Web the VIrtual COnfIGuratOr
simplify the configuration server thanks to the virtual software installed in the PC; this
operations using the virtual configuration, it is possible to solution is particularly suited
configuration, as an alternative to configure each device without to large systems, where the
the physical configuration using the standard alphanumerical configuration may be changed
the virtual configuration is configurators at any time without the need
performed using a PC connected the address and the operating for manual intervention on each
mode of the device are set using individual device
Virtual configuration
TV/SA
Web Server
Ethernet cable
BUS
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia contro
PC with Virtual Configurator 2.1 software

GEnEral fEaturES
It is possible to greatly simplify configurators With the virtual 4. Obtain the diagnostics of the
the configuration operations configuration it is possible to: automation and temperature
using, as an alternative to the 1. Create a new device control systems: in this way the PC
physical configuration, the Virtual configuration: to assign the address interrogates all the devices of the
Configuration software (Virtual and the mode of operation of each system and supplies a summary of
Configurator), which manages the system device the status of each of them, using
addresses and the operating modes 2. Change the pre-existing three different colours:
of the devices configuration: to change the address green for correct operation

the software installed in the PC and the operating mode of each yellow when the device is not

communicates with the system system device already virtually present, or has not been detected
through the new 3503n Kit, configured by the system
connected to the BuS, or using the 3. Test the actuators: it enables red for faulty device

web server; the Virtual configuration driving an already configured 5. Knowing the status of a single
is therefore particularly useful as actuator directly from the PC to device: it is possible to individually
it offers new modes and gives ensure that it is operating correctly interrogate all the system devices to
the possibility of changing the (for example switching on a light check that they are working correctly
configuration at any time, without point controlled by the actuator)
using the normal alphanumeric
PC with VIRTUAL
CONFIGURATOR program
Ethernet cable

there are two possible types of
virtual configuration:
THE VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION THE PROJECT&DOWNLOAD
that can be applied to all types
CONFIGURATION
of automation and temperature Dedicated for the lighting

control systems, both in the case Management system
of individual systems or systems new modes of configuration

integrated with each other in (ID COnfIGuratIOn +
“logical expansion” mode this COnfIGuratIOn WItH XMl) for
follows the addressing laws, with more information see the lighting
the corresponding limits as shown Management System technical
in the diagrams of the following guide for BuS systems
sections
new virtual configuration

procedures through extended
description (1) and extended
addresses
new functions available: contacts

and CEn PluS
NotE 1): For more information of the extended
descriptions, see the “Glossary” section of this Guide.
TV/SAT
BUS connector
automazione diffusione sonora automazione

antifurto diffusione sonora
termoregolazione antifurto
videocitofonia termoregolazione
controllo
Power supply
connector

General features
Additional functions that can be performed

with the virtual configuration
In some critical cases, the virtual status of a contact and has been different types of pressures
configuration enables exceeding the conceived for the management of (short pressure, start of extended
existing addressing limits, thanks to the integration among different pressure, extended pressure,
the use of virtual addresses, which do systems (e.g. if a window is release after extended pressure).
not use any of the addresses of the opened, the central heating goes The devices can be configured
automation system. off ). Using the virtual configuration with virtual address from 0 to
The functions enabling the use of software, it is possible to configure 2047, an address from 0 to 31
virtual addresses are: the contact function with can be associated to each device
CONTACTS (available for the
addresses from 1 to 201. pushbutton.
contact interface, Item F428 and CEN PLUS: the function enables
PLUS SCENARIOS: function

3477): the function enables the configuring the device as CEN only intended for the Lighting
transmission of information on the control, capable of managing Management System.
LIST OF TEMPERATURE CONTROL DEVICES PRESET FOR VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION

Item Description
F430/2 2 DIN relay actuator
F430/4 4 DIN relay actuator
HC/HS4695 – L/N/NT4695 – AM5874 4 zone temperature control central unit
HC/HS4692 L/N/NT4692 – AM5872 probe with selector
HC/HS4693 – L/N/NT4693 probe without selector
HC/HS4692FAN – L/N/NT4692FAN probe with selector for Fan-Coil
34561) splitter management interface
Note 1): the management of the device is only possible when using version 2.2 or later of Virtual Configurator.
LIST OF AUTOMATION DEVICES PRESET FOR VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION
Item Description
3476 basic actuator
3477 basic contact interface1)
BMSE1001 passive IR ceiling sensor1)
BMSE2001 wide band wall/ceiling sensor1)
BMSE2002 narrow band wall/ceiling sensor1)
BMSE2003 sbidirectional narrow band wall/ceiling sensor1)
BMSE2004 one-way narrow band wall/ceiling sensor1)
BMSE2005 double technology wall/ceiling sensor1)
BMSW1001 230 Vac 1 DIN relay actuator 1)
F411/1N 1 DIN relay actuator 1)

LIST OF AUTOMATION DEVICES PRESET FOR VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION
Item Description
F411/1NC 1 DIN NC relay actuator 1)
F411/2NC 2 DIN NC relay actuator 1)
F411/2 2 DIN relay actuator 1)
F411/4 4 DIN relay actuator 1)
F413N DIN ballast dimmer 1)
F414 1000 VA DIN dimmer 1)
F415 DIN electronic transformer dimmer 1)
F416U1 DIN multi load 1000 W dimmer 1)
F417U2 DIN multi load 2x400 W dimmer 1)
F429 DIN SCS/DALI interface1)
HD/HC/HS4563 – L/N/NT4563 Knob control
HD/HC/HS4575 – L/N/NT4575N Receiving radio interface
F420 DIN scenario module
F422 SCS-SCS interface
F425 DIN memoty module 1)
HD/HC/HS4657M3 – HC/HS4657M4 NIGHTER and WHICE control
HD/HC/HS4891 – L/N/NT4891 Local Display
HD/HC/HS4575SB – L/N/NT4575SB Receiving radio interface
HD/HC/HS4576 – L/N/NT4576N Receiving radio interface
HD/HC/HS4680 – L/N/NT 4680 Scenario control 1)
H/L4651M2 – AM5831M2 2 module special control 1)
H/L4652/2– AM5832/2 2 module base control 1)
H/L4652/3 – AM5831/3 3 module base control 1)
H/L4671/1 – AM5851/1 2 module 1 relay actuator
H/LN4671M2 – AM5851M2 2 module 2 relay control/actuator
H/L4678 ferromagnetic transformer dimmer
HC-HS4653/2 - HD4653M2 Soft Touch control
HC-HS4653/3-HD4653M3 Soft Touch control
HD/HC/HS4654 – L/N/NT4654N – AM5834 IR receiver
BMDI1001 Dimmer 1/10 V actuator1)
F428 DIN contact interface 1)
Note 1): the devices show an extended description of the function and are identified in the software with the message “Virtual – Advanced”.
These item also have extended addresses (A=0-10, PL=0-15), and ID solely intended for the Lighting Management System.

GEnEral fEaturES
Virtual Configurator software
the Virtual Configurator Software for more information refer to the select the operating mode, using
had been designed to be used on a software user manual numbers and letters (following the
PC with Windows Xp 32 bit, Windows Below are some screenshots of logics of the physical configurators),
Vista 32 bit, and Windows 7 32 bit Virtual Configurator Depending on or through an extended description
operating system the devices, it will be possible to of the function
Single device configuration screen

Device description
Device item
Configurator
selection window
actuator test screen

Actuator test action selection window

Summarisation screen listing the devices installed in the system

Device item
Device state
Configuration set in the device
Below some screenshots relating to the automation system, where it is possible

to select the operating mode through an extended Description of the function
Single device configuration screen

Function selection window
Mode selection window

GEnEral fEaturES
Screen for the identification of the devices in the system

Project name
List of devices
Single device screen

Device description
Device item
Device with
advanced functions
Pushbutton for accessing

the device configuration

Below are some examples of the connection may also be
connections between the PC and the completed without using the
system to be configured using the configuration kit, provided that the
3504 kit Web Server, item f454, is installed in
the system
TV/SAT TV/SAT
IPTV IPTV
AUTOMATION/TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM WITH KIT 3504
Temperature
control central unit
diffusione sonora automazione

controllo videocitofonia
lan controllo
controllo carichi lan
energia controllo
lucicarichi energia
tvcc luci
www irriga
Shutter Dimmer Shutter Probe with

control control control CLEAR
OK
selector
1 2 3
ON ABC DEF
Power supply 4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
7
PQRS
8
YUV
9
WXVZ
OFF
0
DIN dimmer DIN actuator DIN actuator
Flush mounted L
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
actuator
T5H 250V
ART. F411/2 ART. F411/2

0245 06
C1 C2 C1 C2
F414
230V~ 50Hz 60 1000VA
¤
A PL M G
Kit 3504
ETHERNET
SCS AI SCS AV
WiFi
BUS
PC
ETHERNET
230 Vac
SCS AI SCS AV
BUS connector
Power supply
connector

GEnEral fEaturES

TV/SAT TV/SAT
IPTV IPTV
AUTOMATION/TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM WITH WEB SERVER
e diffusione sonora automazione

lan controllo
energia controllo
lucicarichi energia
tvcc luci
www
Temperature
control central unit
Shutter Dimmer Shutter Probe with

control control control CLEAR
OK
selector
1 2 3
ON ABC DEF
Power supply 4
GHI
7
5
JKL
8
6
MNO
9
PQRS YUV WXVZ
OFF
0
DIN dimmer DIN actuator DIN actuator
L
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
T5H 250V
ART. F411/2 ART. F411/2

0245 06
C1 C2 C1 C2
F414
230V~ 50Hz 60 1000VA
¤
A PL M G
Flush
mounted
actuator
Crossed cable
Ethernet
PC
ETHERNET
Web Server
F454
SCS AI SCS AV

INTEGRATED SYSTEMS
Configuration of the devices of all the Warning: remember that in order to configure all the M position and configuring the address of position
systems belonging both to the Local devices of the system it is necessary to configure I4 using configurators from 1 to 9.
BUS and the Main riser. this can be the F422 interfaces for “logic expansion"
ensured by connecting the Kit or the operating mode, connecting configurator no. 2 to the
Web Server to the main riser
Local BUS
Automation system No. 1 PC for the configuration
Main raiser of the devices of the
Interface Crossed cable system.
OUT Ethernet
F422 OUT
ART.F422
Local BUS IN
Automation system No. 2
Web Server
ETHERNET
F454
Interface OUT
F422 OUT
ART.F422
SCS AI SCS AV
IN
If on the other hand, the local BuS, only the devices of that must be disconnected from the riser
configuration kit or the Web Server system can be configured In this by removing the connection to the
are connected to one of the two case the system to be configured corresponding f422 interface
Local BUS
Main
Crossed
raiser
cable
Ethernet OUT
Local BUS OUT
ART.F422
Interface
Automation system No. 2 F422
PC for the configuration
of the devices of system no. 2 IN
cable
disconnected
Web Server
ETHERNET
OUT
F454
OUT
ART.F422
Interface
F422
SCS AI SCS AV
IN
BUS
cable

General features
The installation of a ZigBee radio system
RADIO SYSTEM
The installation of a Zigbee® radio installation of a domestic electric
system does not have any special system, and with the instructions of
requirements; It is enough to comply this page.
with the current regulations for the
Actuator
Junction box
All the actuator devices are connected to the electric power line; for their installation, the installation requirements of
traditional devices apply.
All the radio controls are battery powered and are independent from the electric wiring. They can therefore be installed
anywhere, in flush mounted or wall mounted boxes.

Switch
Junction box
The existing electric system can be easily modified by adding radio devices, using already existing junction boxes and
conduits.
Radio
Radio control control
Radio
actuator
Junction box

SYStEM laYOut
Installation of a BuS system
WARNING:
The design and installation of the MY HOME system must only be performed by qualified personnel, in accordance with
current local regulations. BTicino SPA rejects all responsibility for any consequence resulting from the non-compliance
with such regulations.
the first step towards the installation different from that of a traditional In a traditional system, all the control
of a home automation system is electric power system, particularly in devices are connected to the user
to design and ensure a good basic terms of: load using a more or less complex
installation setup the selection and position of the
wiring setup
In fact, an accurate setup of cables, distribution boards; Each function therefore requires
trunking, boxes, equipment rooms the position of the junction boxes;
electric connection; the more
and control points, enables to follow the position of plug-in boxes;
functions are included in the system,
in a much simpler way the evolution the definition and position of
the more the circuits and the
of the devices already installed inside loads/users complexity of the wiring
the home and include new ones in In creating a home automation as an example, shown here is the
the future system it will be necessary to take electric diagram of an electric circuit
Irrespective of the type of system into account other factors based on used for switching on a lamp using 4
and the required home automation the installation features of a “BuS” control devices (two 4 way switches
applications, it is necessary that the system, such as the Bticino MY HOME and two 2 way switches) as it can be
layout of the house and a general system: seen, rather simple functions require
furniture plan, are made available to the layout of the conduits;
a complex type of wiring, difficult
the installer the type of wiring;
to modify over the time without
It is also important that a check is the coexistence of cables inside
having to rewire most of the circuit
carried out, to ensure that the initial the same conduit (for example in order to reach a new
estimate is in line with the actual site: In order to understand these control point)
number of rooms and their use (living requirements, extensively outlined in
room, bedroom, bathroom etc ) the following pages, it is important to
On a design and installation point understand the difference between a
of view, the installation of a home traditional and a BuS type system
automation system is not much
Two-way Four-way Four-way Two-way

switch switch switch switch
L
T
N
Junction box Junction box Junction box Junction box

In a BUS system, the power line for this system configuration offers clear changing the position of the
the powering of the load is separated advantages: control points through the
from the control line, which is also an important simplification of the
connection of the device in any
independent from the functional wiring of the various control points point of the BuS;
wiring offered by the use of one single a simplification of the installation

With reference to the diagram shown cable (pair); of the conduits for the powering of
here, instead of traditional 2 way and the possibility of adding or
the loads
4 way switches, we have electronic L
T
devices connected to actuator
N Switchboard actuators
devices for the control of the lamp
Lamp
through a telephone pair (BuS line)
In the diagram the actuators are
shown inside an electric distribution
BUS
board of the apartment, although
they can also be positioned inside
junction boxes, or, for some types, Control Control Actuator
device device
can also be installed inside the device
holder boxes, together with the
control devices Junction box Junction box
BUS
By sharing the same BuS pair, some of the temperature control system system without requiring specific
MY HOME systems can perform and the automation system; the additional wiring
different functions based on common central unit and the probes connect also the actuator for the control of
wiring this is the case, for example, to the BuS line of the automation the heating system solenoid valve is
connected to the automation BuS
L
T
and shares the house switchboard
Switchboard actuators Temperature control central unit
N with the other actuators of the home
automation system
Lamp
BUS
Control Control Actuator

device device
Sonda
Temperature control
Junction box
Junction box

SYStEM laYOut
type of wiring
Systems may be installed using two FREE STRUCTURE WIRING

different types of structures or modes this type of wiring is normally used
of distribution: in traditional distribution systems these for the sheathed BuS pair
free structure
However, in order to integrate MY supplied by Bticino, characterised
Star structure
HOME systems, it will be important by an insulation voltage of 300/500
the choice is based on installation to take into account the following V In general, the conduits must be
needs, functions required indications during the design stage: selected with a suitable diameter to
(installation of the applications; the BuS path may be the same as
meet any current and future system
lighting, automation, burglar-alarm, the power line, using traditional requirements
video surveillance system, etc ), covered trunking, surface mounted the indications also apply to the

wall limitation, and whether we are trunking, under floor systems, or installation of junction boxes,
talking of refurbishments or new trunking installed behind the false which must be sized and placed in
buildings With these modes it is ceiling " positions that facilitate “parallel”
possible to cover and create all the this solution provides a reduction connection of the pair in more
types of MY HOME systems of both installation times and sections of the system In case of
masonry works If the building motorised windows and shutters,
already has power system conduits ensure that the power services
with diameter of no less than and the automation BuS pair also
20 mm, it will be possible to use reach the shutter boxes
Device
Junction box
Power supply

STAR STRUCTURE WIRING
this wiring is recommended when
there is a requirement for integration
the sizing of the star wiring system
of the data transmission system,
must take into account the following:
video door entry system, video
In accordance with the structure

surveillance system, sound system,
of the building, position the “star
telephone system, and tV/Sat
centre” in the barycentre position
system inside one single conduit
in relation to the system If
the structure of the star wiring
possible, install the switchboard
consists of a central point called “star
in an appropriate service room or
centre” to which all the peripheral
inside a storage, in order to avoid
branches of the various wiring
compromising the look of the room
systems converge as a rule, the “star
Install the conduits with junction

centre” is made using a switchboard,
boxes every 10 metres, for pulling
a flush or wall mounted distribution
the cable or for installing any
board that groups all the active and
required signal amplifiers
passive devices for the management
for the power system use
of the services, which, from the urban
dedicated conduits, the EDP/
and building networks are taken
telephone/tV services may share
inside the apartment
the same conduits, which must
have a minimum internal diameter
of 18 mm (recommended 20 mm)
Device
Junction box
Power supply

SYStEM laYOut
Selection and positioning of the electric distribution board
the integration of the various MY Bticino offers a wide range of the calculation of the dissipated
HOME systems in the building entails switchboards suitable for types of power, all Bticino switchboards
the need for grouping in one central needs, with different capacities and and distribution boards meet
point all the active (power supplies, installation solutions (flush mounted, the requirements of CEI 23-51
interfaces, telephone switchboards, or wall mounted) standards
etc ) or passive devices for the control a useful selection criteria in terms of for installation in one floor

and the management of all the installation of the MY HOME system is new buildings and apartments
functions the following: where an equipment room for
this location is effectively the "brain" for one-floor or multi-floor
the integration of the MY HOME
of the whole home automation installations in new or existing system is not available, Bticino
system of the building Its size shall (refurbished) buildings where an offers MY HOME flatWall, an
be defined taking into account the equipment room will be installed innovative solution for central
following general requirements: for the electric distribution board installation of electric and
allow for extra space for expansion
of the home, it is possible to select electronic devices and user
using new devices that may be among the various wall mounted interfaces in full respect of the
needed for future requirements or flush mounted distribution decor of the home
install the power supplies in the
board or switchboard solutions
lower position of the switchboard belonging to the Multiboard and
in order to facilitate thermal Idroboard series for the integration
dissipation; of the MY HOME system for
the switchboard must be capable

of dissipating a power higher than
the sum of the powers dissipated
by all the devices it will hose Overview of wall mounted and flush
mounted switchboards

available in two versions: MY HOME flatWall meets two
- with variable height from 240 cm types of installation requirements:
to 270 cm - inside the homes, as innovative
- with height 150 cm centralised installation solution for
this type of unit can contain up all electric and multimedia services
MY HOME FLATWALL 240 - 270
to 288 DIn modules, and features in harmony with the decor of the
sections that can only be accessed home
by the installer (e g actuators and - on the building riser, as a solution

power supplies, for maintenance/ for the distribution of the main
updating purposes), as well as wiring of the whole building
sections that can be accessed by
the final user (burglar-alarm central
unit, flush mounted video handset,
etc )
MY HOME FLATWALL 150

SYStEM laYOut
MY HOME flatWall
for all basic or advanced system needs
1. SWITCHBOARD TYPE SOLUTION 2. ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION BOARD TYPE SOLUTION

Configuration providing interaction with the My Home Configuration ensuring the containment of all DIn
system through room control (touch Screen), video actuators and power supplies of the My Home system,
handset (Video Display) and burglar-alarm central unit making them easily accessible
It also enables intervention on the earth leakage and
thermal magnetic electrical safety and protection devices
inside the corresponding switchboard
Switchboard type solution
1
EXAMPLE OF FLATWALL H150 INSTALLATION:
small households or home automation systems with basic functions.
Electric distribution board type solution

Switchboard type solution
3. FLOOR RISER TYPE SOLUTION
Building floor crossing configuration, for distribution using
common service cables (only possible with flatwall 240–270)
1
All these solution can be fully integrated with the room design thanks to the finishing
panels, supplied in white, and which can be painted using standard masonry paints.
EXAMPLE OF FLATWALL 240 - 270 INSTALLATION
1
2
3
2 3
Electric distribution board type solution Floor riser type solution

SYStEM laYOut
aesthetic and functional value with minimum space requirements
MY HOME flatWall features a sophisticated design and thanks to the protrusion from the wall, 2 cm only, the
extreme functionality of all its components the type of paintable front cover panels, and the side surround plates
accessibility to the devices installed depends on their use: in anodised aluminium, MY HOME flatWall provides
some sections are only accessible to the installer, to
maximum integration with the residential environment
perform the required maintenance operations on the
installed devices;
other sections are accessible to the end user for

interaction with the system
MY HOME FLATWALL 240–270

available in the switchboard, distribution panel, and floor
riser version, it offers management of the distribution for all
electric services inside modern houses
It can be installed in both masonry walls (supporting and
partition walls) and in plasterboard walls

MY HOME flatWall 150 is the ideal solution for contai-
ning together all the devices required for a basic home au-
tomation system (up to 180 DIn modules) with minimum
space requirement the aesthetic and functional features
of the new version are similar to the well-known flatwall
240-270 version Most of the complements and accessories
used are the same for the two versions, with the exception
of the cable entry in the bottom section, which does not
require a conduit securing place, therefore allowing more
space for housing devices
Installation is possible in both masonry and plasterboard
walls

new in the flatwall range, is a box for the installation this results in a further concentration of electric devices,
of multimedia devices (router, modem, etc ) used in and the disappearance from around the home of the
Home network systems, promoted by all main telephone unsightly cables needed for connecting these kinds of
providers devices Bticino offers its own range of Home network
the new flatwall accessory creates a dedicated area for devices, and the flatwall multimedia box is one of its
multimedia devices integral parts
Dedicated box for the installation of multimedia devices like ADSL

modems or routers. The installation requires a 36 DIN module support
(3787).
Devices for interaction with the MY HOME system that can be operated by
the end user (Touch Screen, burglar alarm central unit, Video Display).
Switchboard for electrical safety and protection devices accessible to the

end user. Available in three versions (glass, metal and plastic), featuring
installation reversibility. The hinged side can in fact be attached to the
right or the left, so that the door can be opened from the most suitable
and functional side.
Zone accessed by the installer only, housing power supply risers,

actuators and other DIN devices (up to 288 modules), for the operation
of the MY HOME system. The installation is completed by the white front
cover panels.
SYStEM laYOut
MY HOME flatWall 240 - 270 switchboard composition
MY HOME flatWall consists of:

1. ONE TELESCOPIC BASE MODULE 2. A SERIES OF MODULAR DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS
(adjustable on two heights: 270 and 240 cm), which for the installation of all types of DIn electric devices, with
constitutes the metal back to be fitted in the wall; the plastic trunkings fitted on the sides, for easy passage and
adjustable feet provide better positioning of the back securing of wiring cables
the supports can also accept appropriate brackets for the
installation of MY HOME devices
1 INSTALLATION OF 2 INSTALLATION OF
Bracket with
BASE MODULE adjustable feet DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS
Upper
cover
Back of
telescopic module
Device-holder
support with
DIN rails
Back of base
module
Bracket with
adjustable feet
Duct fastener plate
Concrete mesh

3. FRONT COVER PANELS AND SURROUND PLATES
Meeting design and functional requirements
the panels are available with a white finish (ral 9003)
to meet the design requirements of the user they can be
painted with standard masonry paints
3 INSTALLATION OF
FINISHING ELEMENTS
Upper
end cap
Brackets for
MY HOME devices and
video door entry system
Front cover panel

for the installation
of MY HOME devices
and video door entry
system h 120 cm
Switchboard
for DIN devices
h 30 cm
Blanking module
h 90 cm
Multimedia box to
be completed with
F496/MF clips and
3829 cover
Lower
end cap
Side surround plates with
opening handle (pair)

SYStEM laYOut
MY HOME flatWall 150 switchboard composition
MY HOME flatWall consists of:

1. A BASIC MODULE 2. A SERIES OF MODULAR DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS
metal, 150 cm high, flush mounted inside masonry and for the installation of all types of DIn electric devices, with
plasterboard walls Differently from flatwall 240 – 270, plastic trunkings fitted on the sides, for easy passage and
there is no conduit securing plate securing of wiring cables
In case of need, remove the first DIn guide in the bottom the supports can also accept appropriate brackets for the
section, to make cable entry easier installation of MY HOME devices, and specific accessories
such as the multimedia box dedicated to the installation of
modems, routers, etc
1 INSTALLATION OF 2 INSTALLATION OF
BASE MODULE DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS
Device-holder
support with
DIN rails
h 60 cm
Back of base
module
Device-holder
support with
DIN rails
h 30 cm
Concrete mesh

3. FRONT COVER PANELS AND SURROUND PLATES
Meeting design and functional requirements
the panels are available with a white finish (ral 9003)
to meet the design requirements of the user they can be
painted with standard masonry paints
3 INSTALLATION OF
FINISHING ELEMENTS
Brackets for
MY HOME devices and
Upper
end cap
Front cover panel

h 30 cm
Front cover panel for

the installation of MY
HOME devices and video
door entry system
h 30 cm
Switchboard
for DIN devices
h 30 cm
Blanking module
h 90 cm
Multimedia box to Side surround

Side surround plates
be completed with plates
F496/MF clips and
3829 cover

SYStEM laYOut
Installation heights for every need
the flatwall 150 solution, specifically designed for small thanks to its exclusive sliding hooxking adjustment system,
households, gives the possibility of installing up to 180 DIn flatwall 240-270 makes it possible to adjust on <site the
modules (a capacity higher than the average number of height of the column based on the height of the room
devices used in a basic home automation system) It can be used for installing up to 288 DIn modules (ca-
pacity normally higher than the number of devices used
in a whole home automation system), centralising all the
devices within one single location of the home By using
the appropriate accessory, it is possible to use MY HOME
flatWall as riser for apartment complex services, or insi-
de apartments and villas on several floors
150 cm flush mounted back adjustable flush mounted back, 240 or 270 cm
Max. 252 DIN modules

150 cm
270 cm
240 cm
56 cm
56 cm 56 cm

Device-holder supports
three types of device-holder supports are available, Irrespective of the MY HOME flatWall solution chosen,
offering the advantage that they can be wired in the the front cover panels are always secured to the device-
workshop and then taken to the installation site, where holder supports with screws
they are secured to the metal back already installed in the Therefore, when assembling MY HOME FLATWALL, it is
wall, making the whole installation process much simpler always necessary to install the device-holder supports
and quicker for the installer across the whole height of the unit.
72 MODULES 36 MODULES CABLE FIXING
3787 3788
3789
Height: 60 cm Height: 30 cm Height: 30 cm

Max capacity: 72 DIn modules Max capacity: 36 DIn modules Holes for fixing the cables with
DIn rails and side trunkings for DIn rails and side trunkings for wiring* clamps
wiring* Holes for fixing the cables with clamps Holes for the installation of the
to be used in switchboard Holes for brackets for the vertical partition (3804)
and electric distribution board installation of non modular GSM It can be equipped with DIn kit
solutions burglar-alarm and temperature and trunkings (3790)
control units to be always used in the floor
Note: DIN rails and PVC trunkings are fixed and
to be used in switchboard riser type solution or as universal
cannot be removed.
and electric distribution board plate for free installation in other
solutions configurations
required for the installation of the
multimedia box
Note: DIN rails and PVC channels can be removed,

providing maximum configuration flexibility
* Side trunkings for wiring, sizes 60 x 60 mm, subject to CEI-64-8 Standard for compliance with a 50% fill factor.

SYStEM laYOut
Installation solutions
the small thickness of the flush mounted back, only 8.5 cm, workshop and then installed inside the metal back already
makes MY HOME flatWall suitable for installation using fitted in the wall
the same procedure as for sliding doors In order to preserve integrity, the finishing elements can be
When installed while the wall is being built, the metal back installed after the completion of masonry operations
also ensure savings in building materials the page on the side shows a typical installation in a
the device-holder supports can be assembled at the masonry wall
Partition walls Plasterboard walls Supporting walls
Note: For installation inside supporting walls, a 60 cm wide recess must be obtained in the wall from the floor to the ceiling. For partition or plasterboard walls leave an
opening of approximately 60 cm during the construction of the wall.
Area for accessible and visible
devices operated by the end
user
Side entry for corrugated ducts
Dedicated box for the installation of multimedia devices (routers, modems, etc.). The metal
basket, which can only be fitted on 36 module device holder supports, has cut-out marks on
all sides, providing flexibility during the management of the cable passage areas. Supplied
as standard are 4 rubber cable glands, required for ensuring the protection of data and
power cables. For multimedia device installations requiring a large number of cables, a
specific kit with 8 cable glands is also available (3831). The installation of the devices is
completed using appropriate clips (F496/MF). *
Wall fixing bracket

Area intended for protection Area for My Home
devices (stop&go, thermal devices
magnetic devices etc.)
Duct fastener plate

In order to facilitate the entry of cables, MY HOME FLATWALL (for the 240-270 h version)
has been designed to allow the entry of several corrugated ducts, both through the bottom
section, where they can be easily secured thanks to the duct fastener plate, and from the
sides, through knockout holes. This operation is not required for the Flatwall h150 version.
* The Flatwall metal structure screens the Wi-Fi signal. Therefore, the installation of an external antenna must be allowed for at the design stage.
SYSTEM LAYOUT
Electric distribution board position
The positioning of the electric distribution board(s) must be decided based on the type of building. The most suitable position of the distribution
board should be agreed with the installer (unless already preset).
SERVICE SECTOR More than 3 rooms + bathroom & BUILDING ON SEVERAL FLOORS
Install a dedicated distribution board kitchen Install the main distribution board
inside an equipment room for the only include one distribution board, in an equipment room, or under the
centralisation of all the devices on at a central position. stairs. Install another distribution
DIN rail. Part of the DIN rail devices will be board on each floor, in a barycentre
installed on the board, while part of position. DIN rail devices will
ONE FLOOR BUILDING
them will be distributed. be partly centralised, and partly
1, 2 or 3 rooms + bathroom &
distributed.
kitchen: arrange only one distribution
board in a barycentre position, for the
centralisation of all DIN devices.
Service sector Several floor building

Flush mounted
device
Distribution
board
Distribution
board 1
1
2
2
3 4
3 4
038 42
C1 C2
3rd FLOOR
Equipment
room
One floor building: 1, 2, or 3 rooms + bathroom & kitchen 2nd floor
Flush mounted
Distribution device
board
1st FLOOR
Equipment
room
One floor building: more than 3 rooms + bathroom & kitchen
Distribution DIN modularity 1
1
2
2
3 4
3 4
board device
1 2 3 4 038 42
1 2 3 4
038 42
C1 C2
C1 C2
Flush mounted
device
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
038 42
C1 C2 Flush mounted
device

Plug-in boxes position
the positioning and the quantity of plug-in boxes needed must be assessed based on the type of home let's now consider
the following types of homes:
1 FLOOR APARTMENT APARTMENT ON SEVERAL SERVICE SECTOR

1, 2 or 3 rooms + bathroom &
FLOORS Install plug-in boxes in the false
kitchen: minimum number of Install one plug-in box under each ceiling, or under the floor
plug-in boxes, for cable joints only electric distribution board, as well as all DIn devices are centralised
all DIn devices are centralised other boxes distributed around the
more than 3 bedrooms +
system, to house the DIn devices of
bathroom & kitchen: plug-in boxes the home automation system
are used also for housing the DIn DIn devices are both centralised and
devices of the home automation distributed
system DIn devices are both as an alternative, where appropriate,
Main plug-in box
centralised and distributed install MY HOME flatWall, for the
centralisation of all DIn devices
30 cm
Note: For the installation of the boxes refer to the CEI 64-50 guide.
The Guide recommends a minimum height of 17.5 cm from the floor. We suggest a height of 30 cm approximately.
Installation: It is also recommended that the

Plug-in boxes should be installed, boxes are nOt positioned:
based on the floor plan, including the behind large pieces of furniture or

possible distribution of the furniture: wardrobes;
in easily accessible locations, for
behind flush mounted appliances;

maintenance purposes; in particularly visible areas

Solenoid valve
in passage areas (e g hall) or areas
actuator 1 2 3 4
1 2 3
C1 C2
4
ART.F430/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
C1 C2
4
ART.F430/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
C1 C2
4
ART.F430/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
C1 C2
4
ART.F430/2
Plug-in box
that are not used very often (e g

storage rooms);
nearby the hydraulic collector of
Hydraulic
the temperature control system collector
(see drawing) Zone solenoid

valve
Box

SYStEM laYOut
Indications for the installation

of aXOlutE EtÈrIS device holder boxes
to combine the MY HOME system

with the new cover plates of the New dedicated flush
aXOlutE EtÈrIS series, it will be mounted boxes
necessary to use dedicated flush

mounted boxes, supports and cover New dedicated supports
plates
for more information refer to the
AXOLUTE devices
aXOlutE Catalogue already listed in the
catalogue
FEATURES OF THE NEW

DEDICATED BOXES FOR
AXOLUTE ETÈRIS
2 new modularities (2 and 8 mod );
New dedicated cover plates
More depth to ensure minimum

protrusion of the light point from
the wall;
Can be installed in masonry walls

and plasterboard/cavity walls
Deeper than traditional boxes

PLASTERBOARD WALLS
Screw sockets reinforced
with steel blades
(10 to 45 mm thick boards)
8 modules
2 modules
Mortar protection cover included

(for flush mounted boxes)
MASONRY WALLS
8 modules
The covers are fitted with appropriate

spirit level housings.
2 modules
Note: Etèris boxes are deeper than standard boxes. When designing the system, ensure that their positioning is adapted to the type of wall.
E.g. with standard partition walls with thicknesses of approx. 10 cm, it will not be possible to install 2 boxes opposite to each other (one each side of the wall) because the
overall space required of 12 cm would exceed the thickness of the wall.

Example with 2 and 3 module devices
Example with several 2 module devices
Example with 2 module control
Example of vertical configuration
Depending on needs and look Once the installation is completed,

requirements, Etèris can be used to the cover plates will be perfectly
create a light point using several 2 aligned and joined
module boxes joined together
Example of horizontal configuration
JOINING THE BOXES TOGETHER

Coupler (502WA)
this operation is performed both for
masonry and plasterboard boxes,
using the appropriate coupler (item
502Wa) the boxes will be perfectly
joined and level with each other,
making the subsequent steps much
easier
Cable Cable entry knockouts

entry space to be removed

SYStEM laYOut
local control device position
In addition to the controls for the

individual loads, further devices may
be included for centralised control of
the MY HOME functions for correct
positioning follow the indications
below
4
3
Scenario control
2. SCENARIO CONTROL
2 It is recommended that this device is
installed nearby the main house entrance,
and at the points from where the whole
house must be controlled from. For
example, installation in the bedroom
makes it easy to lower all shutters and
switch all lights off before going to bed.
NIGHT AREA control 3. GROUP

1 (switches all bedroom lights on or off) CONTROLS
Local Display Group controls may be used to
1. LOCAL DISPLAY control a range of actuators.
Depending on the configured They should be installed by
operating mode, the device the entrance of the room to be
controls the lights, the sound controlled.
system, or the scenarios;
therefore, it can be placed in any
zone of the home.

6 6. VIDEO HANDSETS AND
MULTIMEDIA TOUCH SCREENS.
It is recommended that video handset are installed in areas
of the home that can be easily reached, both during the day
and the night. They have a double function, as they enable
receiving calls from the entrance panels and also control of the
MY HOME applications installed inside the home.
Touch Screen
5
5. TOUCH SCREEN
The TOUCH SCREEN must be installed in a central position, so
that it is visible and easily accessible from any room of the
house. The TOUCH SCREEN provides control and management
of all MY HOME applications.
Shutter general controls

4. GENERAL CONTROLS
4 It is preferable to install the general controls
for SHUTTERS and LIGHTS nearby the main
entry of the house, so that lights may be
switched on and off, and shutters may be
opened or closed, from a single point, before
going out, or when returning to the house.

SYStEM laYOut
Grouping cables
although the construction of refurbishment, the cables for some the following table shows the
the cables guarantees 300/500V applications may be installed inside systems/MY HOME applications for
electric insulation, it does not the same conduits or pipes of the which the cables may be grouped
however guarantee immunity from traditional electric power supply in the same conduits as the power
disturbances that may occur if system this solution results in supply lines (however, under no
they are installed inside the same important SaVInGS, both in terms of circumstances they should be
conduits as the 230V power supply masonry work and costs installed in the same conduits as 380
cables This type of installation is not Vac power supply cables)
recommended However, in case of
mY Home AppLIcAtIon GroUpInG WItH poWer cABLes

Lighting / Automation YES
Comfort
Sound system NO
Burglar alarm YES

Sicurezza
Video surveillance system *1
Risparmio Energy management YES
Video door entry sytem *1

Comunicazione
Integrated telephone system/ Data network NO
Note: * If the recommended cables are used for these systems, i.e. BTicino items, SAFETY is guaranteed in terms of electrical insulation. However, no guarantee is
provided for correct operation, due to possible disturbance that may occur if the MY HOME system cable is grouped with the electric power cables.
the light automation, shutters the separation of electric power

automation, temperature control, supply cables from signal cables
and energy management l4669 (or MuSt also be ensured inside the
l4669Hf and l4669/500) GrEY BuS junction boxes and the electric
MaY be placed in the same conduit distribution board
CABLE L4669 as the l4669S rED BuS of the burglar attention must therefore be paid
alarm system (in lEVEl 1 classified when presetting the conduit
CABLE 336904 systems) together, they can also entrances of the junction boxes and
share the same conduits and boxes as the electric distribution board
the electric power cables
the video door entry system and

sound system 336904 WHItE BuS
may be placed in the same conduit
with the data transmission, telephone
system and tV-Sat signal cables, but
must be separated from the electric
power supply cables
Selection of the cable
BTICINO CABLE 336904 BTICINO CABLE L4669, L4669HF BTICINO CABLE L4669S
for video systems, Btcino produces AND L4669/500 this cable has been specifically
a dedicated cable, 336904, made this cable has been designed for the designed for the installation of MY
of two twisted conductors with installation of BuS systems for the HOME burglar-alarm systems
a section of 0 50 mm2 each this following applications: this cable can be used for the
cable ensures the best performance automation, Energy management distribution of power supplies and
of the video system (greater and temperature control this cable operating signals When using the
distance between Entrance Panel can be used for the distribution 300/500 insulated BuS cable, and the
and Handset, when compared to of power supplies and operating clamp protection cover, with which
other cables) In addition, contrarily signals When using the 300/500 all devices are fitted, Bticino systems
to standard cables, which are not insulated BuS cable, and the clamp may also be installed in the same
suitable for underground installation, protection cover, with which all boxes and conduits as the electric
item 336904 may be installed devices are fitted, Bticino systems power supply lines (230 Vac) lEVEl 1
underground in suitable conduits, may also be installed in the same classified systems
as it complies with CEI 20-11 boxes and conduits as the electric Technical features
standards on cables for underground power supply lines (230 Vac) SCS sheathed pair made up of

installation Item l4669Hf is a low toxicity cable 2 flexible conductors, sheathed,
Technical features without halogens, to be used in twisted, unshielded for burglar-
SCS sheathed pair made up of
rooms where more attention to alarm system
2 flexible conductors, sheathed, safety is required in case of fire Insulation voltage: 300/500 V

twisted, unshielded Technical features Compliant to CEI 46-5 and CEI 20-

Insulation voltage: 450/750V
SCS sheathed pair made up of
20 standards
Compliant to En60811, En50289,
2 flexible conductors, sheathed, Coil length: 100 metres

En60228, 50265-2-1, En50395, twisted, unshielded
En50396 Insulation voltage: 300/500 V

Coil length: 200 metres
Compliant to CEI 46-5 and CEI 20-

20 standards
Coil length: - 100 metres ( l4669) -

500 metres (l4669/500) -
200 metres (l4669Hf)
GREY CABLE
L4669
L4669/500 RED CABLE
L4669S
WHITE CABLE
336904

SYStEM laYOut
Selection of the cable
MY HOME APPLICATIONS
the following table enables selecting the right cable based on the MY HOME application
mY Home AppLIcAtIons
TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT comFort IPTV TV/SAT

TV/SAT
sAFetY
TV/SAT
IPTV
IPTV
sAVInG
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
TV/SAT
IPTV TV/SAT
IPTV IPTV
IPTV
commUnIcAtIon
TV/SAT
IPTV IPTV
controL
TV/SAT
TV/SAT IPTV
IPTV
diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia automazione

controllo diffusione
lan sonora controllo antifurto
carichi termoregolazione
automazione
energiaautomazione videocitofonia
diffusione
diffusionesonora
luci controllo
tvcc antifurto
sonora automazione
antifurto termoregolazione
www lan sonora
diffusione automazione
controllo
videocitofonia
irrigazione
termoregolazione
automazione
automazione carichi
antifurto
videocitofonia
diffusione diffusione sonora
energia
controllo
termoregolazione
diffusione
sonora sonoracontrollo
antifurto antifurto
luci lan
videocitofonia
automazione
tvcc
controllo
diffusione sonora
lantermoregolazione
controllocarichi videocitofonia
automazione
videocitofonia
carichi
videocitofonia www
energia
lan
antifurto diffusione
energia
controllo controllo
irrigazione
sonora
controllo
controllo luci
carichi
luci lan lan controllo
lan energiatvcc
videocitofonia tvcc controllo
termoregolazione
controllo carichi
luci www
controllo
carichicarichi www
energia energia
energia lanirrigazione
videocitofonia tvcc luci luci
irrigazionecontrollo
controllo
luci www
carichi tvcclantvcc tvcc
irrigazione
energia controllo wwwwww
wwwcarichi
luci irrigazione irrigazione
energia
irrigazione tvcc luci www tvcc
irriga
Video surveillance
telephone system
Web Server video

Video door entry
Sound system
management
Data network
Temperature
Wire burglar
Automation
Integrated
Lighting
automazione
automazione diffusione
diffusione
sonora
sonora antifurto
termoregolazione videocitofonia
videocitofonia controllo
controllo lan lan controllo
controllo
carichi
carichi energia
energia luci luci tvcc tvcc
TV/SAT
system
control
Energy
sytem
alarm
BTicino 336904
(white)
(*) (*) (*) (*) (*)
BTicino L4669,
L4669HF and
L4669/500
(grey)
BTicino L4669S
(red)
BTicino L4668CM
UTP 5
BTicino C9881U/5E
C9882U/5E UTP 5E
multi-pair
Telephone pair
RG6 cable
Cables recommended by BTicino(in accordance with installation regulations). Cables that may be used (for each system, the current installation regulations must be checked).
NOTE (*): Compulsory for the underground sections of the individual systems

Selection of the conduits
Inside the home, cables must be REQUIREMENTS OF THE CEI 306-

placed inside protective conduits 2 STANDARDS (*)
made of insulating material, In the planning and sizing of the 2. 1 piping with minimum diameter
embedded in floors, walls or ceilings conduits the CEI 306-2 standards of 18 mm for the conduits connecting
for garages and cellars, due to recommend to allow for any future the star centre to the device holding
the difficulty in embedding the requirements of advanced wiring boxes In the case of "exposed"
components in the walls (garage walls systems conduits, trunkings of similar capacity
normally made of solid concrete, and for the realisation of conduits to may also be used
often less than 10 cm wall thickness and from the star centre the said 3. 1 piping of suitable diameter for
in cellars), it is preferable to leave Standards recommend that the the installation of 1 cable for the
conduits and boxes exposed the path following is installed : terrestrial tV system and up to 8
of the conduits must take into account 1. 1 piping with minimum diameter cables for the connection of the star
the possibility of cables connecting 38 mm for the connection of the centre to the terrestrial tV antennas
different systems for the installation Star centre to the infrastructure of and satellite tV dishes
of flush mounted components, the common section of the building,
corrugated tubes of different colours or the access point of the various
should be used this will make services (telephone system, power
installation and individuation of the supply, central tV antenna)
system easier It is recommended 1

that only conduits with a minimum
Ø ≥ 38 mm
diameter of 25 mm are used
Automation
Energy
Temperature control Telephone system
Energy management Energy
TV Star centre distribution board
Burglar alarm
2
Ø ≥ 18 mm
Telephone system
Data network
TV/SAT Star centre distribution board
Video door entry sytem
Sound system
3
Data network
TV/SAT
Note (*): CEI 306-2. Guide for telecommunication

and multimedia distribution wiring inside residential
TV Star centre distribution board
buildings.
SYStEM laYOut
Positioning of conduits
this electric SYStEM laYOut is as far as the conduits are concerned, 3. any exposed wires may follow the
defined by marking the walls with irrespective of the type of MY HOME shortest path
the paths of the connection conduits application , it is recommended 4. any wires installed inside ceilings
these paths shall be vertical or that the following requirements are or under the floor may follow the
horizontal complied with: shortest path
Diagonal paths must be avoided 1. the bending radiuses of the “main”
unless they follow an inclination of paths must be such that all risks of
the wall or ceiling Inside the ceiling damage to conduits and cables are
and under the floor, conduits may be avoided
installed as desired 2. all conduits embedded in the walls
the distribution between junction must be horizontal, vertical or parallel
boxes and loads/users depends on to the wall edges Diagonal path are
the type of room and the type of load only allowed for VErY short sections
to be connected
OK
OK
NO
NO OK
OK
OK
OK
DISTRIBUTION BETWEEN
DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND
PLUG-IN BOXES
the distribution between the electric use a number of conduits suitable Install additional conduits, even if
distribution board and the plug-in for the systems / services being empty, for future system expansions
boxes must be of the star type distributed It is recommended that 32 mm
conduits are used
DISTRIBUTION BETWEEN PLUG-IN

BOXES AND WALL MOUNTED BOXES
the distribution between plug-in boxes use a number of conduits suitable conduits with a diameter of at least
and junction boxes must be of the free for the systems / services being 20 mm are used
system type distributed It is recommended that

SYStEM laYOut
LIGHT AUTOMATION SYSTEM

Comply with the following 2. if a load with light intensity 4. in case of a load connected to
installation requirements: adjustment is required (DIMMEr), a controlled socket (e g bedside
1. if the requirement for the room the actuator will be positioned in the cabinet lamp or floor lamp in the
is that the load is controlled from electric distribution board and the living room) with Basic actuator, the
one point only (flush mounted conduit will be as above conduit will go through the actuation
actuator with control), the conduit 3. if the requirement for the room is and control junction boxes
will be directed from the junction box that there should be various loads
towards the load controlled from several points (DIn
actuator in plug-in box or distribution
board
Light automation system
1 2 M
Power cable
Dimmer actuator in the
electric distribution board
Power and Automation

BUS cables

BUS cables
3 Power and Automation 4

BUS cables
BUS Control box

Automazione
Actuation box

SHUTTER AUTOMATION SYSTEM ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SOUND SYSTEM
If a shutter automation system is for the connection of nOn-flush for the connection of a flush
required, the conduit will go from the mounted appliances, install the mounted DIn amplifier, allow for two
junction box to the load flush mounted actuator for the separate dedicated conduits
management of the load at the side
of the power socket the conduit will RESIDENTIAL STRUCTURED
go from the junction box and the CABLING
nearest junction allow for star wiring between the
switchboard or electric distribution
board of the communication area
Shutter automation system Energy management system

BUS cables

BUS cables
BUS cables
Sound system Residential structured cabling
Electric
distribution
board
Bus
Sound system
Power
cable
It is recommended that power sockets are ALWAYS installed near data

transmission sockets.
SYStEM laYOut
BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM
Comply with the following
installation requirements:
1. for the connection between the 2. for the connection of the burglar- 3. for the connection of the
electric distribution board (burglar- alarm central unit to the telephone magnetic contacts (windows), install
alarm power supply) and the outdoor communicator install two separate separate conduits going to separate
siren install a dedicated conduit conduits, one for the burglar-alarm boxes where the contact interface
BuS and the other for the telephone must be housed (DIn or BaSIC)
cable
Burglar-alarm system
1 2
Electric Outdoor
distribution siren
board
Telephone cable
Burglar-alarm BUS
Burglar-alarm
BUS

Flush mounted contact interface
2 pair cable for

magnetic contacts
2 pair
cable for
magnetic contacts
Burglar-alarm BUS
DIN contacts
interface
BASIC contact
interface
70 MY HOME Radio system
contents
MY HOME – Radio System
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Radio system MY HOME 71

GeneRAL FeAtURes
Wireless freedom
MY HOME radio system: for simple and flexible

home automation systems
The MY HOME radio system, available with AXOLUTE and Thanks to the radio transmission and the battery
LIVINGLIGHT looks, gives the possibility of very easily powering of controls, the devices easily integrate with the
creating advanced electric systems to manage: infrastructure of the traditional electric system, without the
 Lighting; need for any additional wiring
 The automation of lights and shutters; The use of the ZigBee® technology for the communication
 The protection of the home from gas leaks and of devices makes it possible to use the MY HOME system
fl ooding. also in large spaces with obstacles and partition walls
ACTUATORS
Devices connected to the load to
manage and the power line
L
N
Dimmer actuator Shutter actuator
Dimmer radio control Scenario radio control Shutter radio control

RADIO CONTROLS
Battery powered devices
communicating via radio with the
actuators

 THe AdVANTAGeS IN A NeW SYSTeM:  THe AdVANTAGeS oF INTeGrATIoN:
Creation of new systems with home automation functions Use of radio control devices to extend the BUS Automation
using the infrastructure of the traditional electric system system to rooms without twisted pair
 THe AdVANTAGeS IN THe reFurBISHMeNT:

Evolution of a traditional electric system: from the
addition of a new control system without the need
for masonry walls, to the realisation of basic home
automation functions
BuS AuToMATIoN SYSTeM
Light control
ON/OFF
actuator
Power supply
SCS/ZigBee interface
TV/SAT IPTV
Light actuator
Light radio control
mazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www

GeneRAL FeAtURes
The functions
Lighting and shutter automation

 Lighting control with ON/OFF mode and Dimmer
 Shutter control with Preset setting (recalling of a
preset position)
LIGHTING
energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
L
N
Light radio control Light actuator Dimmer actuator Dimmer radio control
TV/SAT IPTV
SHuTTer AuToMATIoN
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci
L
N
Shutter radio control Shutter actuator
74 MY HOME Radio System

MANAGING SceNArIoS
Simultaneous activation of several loads (lamps and shutters) for the creation of comfort situations
Example: lamp on and shutter half way down for watching the TV; diffused light and shutter fully open for
reading
L
N
Dimmer actuator Shutter actuator
TV/SAT IPTV Radio remote

Scenario radio control control
TecHNIcAL ALArMS
Home safe from water or gas leaks The system will notify the danger event, and automatically intervene to
limit any damage (e g closing the gas or water mains)
ffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazion
Solenoid valve
Gas detector Radio interface Radio actuator

GeneRAL FeAtURes
Installation features
The devices
The range is split into:
 Devices for the control of the load, integrated in the
electric system;
Shutter actuator
 Battery powered control devices, installable in any
location in full freedom;
 Devices for interfacing with the MY HOME BUS and the
management of technical alarms
Shutter control
automazione diffusione sono
L N N
The use of radio devices greatly simplifies the installation In addition, some actuator devices do not require the
of the electric system; all the control devices are in fact neutral conductor for their operation, and can therefore be
battery powered, and independent from the wiring easily installed in existing systems, in place of traditional
devices
N
N N
Traditional wiring Wiring with MY HOME radio system

L
N
N N
L
N
N N N
L N
N L
L N
L
N N
N N
N
L
N
Actuator devices
Radio control devices

PROCEDURE FOR THE INSTALLATION OF ZIGBEE® DEVICES
INSTALLATION SUPPORT DEVICE KEY COVER COVER PLATE
Installation with box
Actuator
(*)
Adapter Control without

LN4588 original
H4588 support
Wall installation Control with support
(*) Note: The device is sold inclusive of mounting support. For installation in flush mounted boxes, the control device must be removed from its support and
attached to the LN4588 - H4588 adapter.

GeneRAL FeAtURes
Control devices
The range includes the following products:
SINGLE AND DOUBLE

ON/OFF LIGHT CONTROLS
For the management of one, two, or a
group of light actuators
Double control
Single control
DIMMER LIGHT CONTROL
For the management of one, or a
group of Dimmer actuators
Shutter radio control
Dimmer radio control
SHUTTER CONTROL
For the management of one, or a
group of shutter actuators
SCENARIO CONTROL
For the management of up to 4
scenarios
Scenario 1 Scenario 2
Scenario 3 Scenario 4
Note: these devices require one module key covers.

See the following pages for more information.
Scenario radio control

RADIO REMOTE CONTROLS
Available with 4 and 5 pushbuttons,
to recall the scenarios saved by the Radio remote control
scenario Control device
INFRARED CONTROL (IR)

It can be used to activate one or more actuators
when someone walks in the area monitored by
the IR sensor of the device
The device also includes a light sensor that
enables operation during the evening hours, or
when the light levels are too low
Fresnell lens
with IR sensor
IR control
TEMPERATURE PROBE
Wall installation device with temperature
sensor with measurement range from -10 to
+40 °C
When the two temperature thresholds set are
reached (minimum and maximum), the probe
activates the two corresponding scenarios

GeneRAL FeAtURes
Control devices
MY HOME - Build on it
Devices preset for:
 The integration of traditional devices with the ZigBee
radio system, for the Automation and Safety functions
(technical alarms);
 Extending a BUS Automation system using radio control
devices
TRANSMITTER AND ACTUATOR

FOR TECHNICAL ALARMS
The transmitter for technical alarms can be used to Transmitting interface and gas detector
generate and send to the radio system a danger signal,
generated by safety devices, like the gas, smoke, or
water detectors connected to its clamps
The device must be used with one or more actuators for

the activation of the alarm signal (siren and/or flashing
unit), and for ensuring the safety of the room (e g :
activation of solenoid valve to close the water and gas
mains)
CONTACT INTERFACE Actuator

Featuring two contacts for the connection of two
switches, or one two-way switch, this device can
be used to control two groups of light actuators,
or one group of shutter actuators
The interface has basic modularity for flush
mounted box installation
Contact interface
TV/SAT IPTV Solenoid valve
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc
automazione diffusionewww
sonora irrigazione
antifurto termoregola

SCS/ZIGBEE INTERFACE FOR THE EXTENSION
OF THE BUS AUTOMATION SYSTEM
This device is required for the extension of the BUS
Automation system using ZigBee radio control devices
To be used for easy reach of one or more wired system
control points, in positions that cannot be reached by
the BUS wiring
The interface ensures the transfer of information

between the radio control devices and the Bus
automation system actuators; it is not possible to
manage the actuator of the ZigBee radio system using
Automation BUS control devices
Ligth control
Power supply
Light actuator
SCS/ZigBee® interface
IPTV
OPEN/ZIGBEE INTERFACE
This particular device also belongs to the interface
group; it is used to interface the radio system
to a Personal Computer to be used for central
function management through the Open Web Net
communication protocol
ontrollo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione

GENERAL FEATURES
Control devices
Selection of the device based on the functions to manage
LIGHTING AND ON/OFF LOADS
TYPE OF CONTROL AXOLUTE KEY COVERS LIVINGLIGHT KEY COVERS
HA4596 L4596N
SINGLE RADIO CONTROL HC/HD/HS4915BA L/N/NT4915AN
HB4596 N4596N
HA4597 L4597N
DOUBLE RADIO CONTROL 2 x HC/HD/HS4915BA 2 X L/N/NT4915AN
HB4597 N4597N
TRANSMITTER FOR TECHNICAL ALARMs H4586 LN4586
CONTACT INTERFACE 3577
wall movement sensor 3579
lighting with adjustment (DIMMER)
HA4598 HC/HD/HS4915BA + L4598N L/N/NT4915AN +

dimmer SINGLE RADIO CONTROL
HB4598 HC/HD/HS4911AD N4598N L/N/NT4911ADN
lighting with adjustment (DIMMER)
HA4599 HC/HD/HS4911AH L4599N L/N/NT4911AHN +

radio CONTROL FOR SHUTTERS
HB4599 + HC/HD/HS4915 N4599N L/N/NT4915N o N4915LN

Actuators
Powered by the electric power line and connected to the devices, to be completed with key covers, and devices
load to manage, these devices process the information for installation in shutter boxes, junction boxes, and false
received by the control devices and operate as “repeaters”, ceilings
forwarding the radio signal to other actuators belonging
to the ZigBee network The range includes flush mounted
ON/OFF actuator without neutral

Flush mounted device for the control of a group of N
lamps and generic loads with maximum power 300 W L
This device is the ideal solution to replace traditional
system devices like switches and two way switches,
as its operation does not require connection to the
neutral conductor
ON/OFF actuator without neutral
ON/OFF actuator for false

ceiling installation
Device for the control of one, or one
group of lamps and generic loads with
maximum power 2500 W
ON/OFF actuator
Actuator for two groups
of lamps
ON/OFF actuator for one or two

groups of lamps
Flush mounted devices for the control of lamps and
Actuator for one group of lamps
generic loads with maximum power:
 2500 W for the management of a group of lamps;
 2x1000 W for the management of two groups of
lamps

GeneRAL FeAtURes
Actuators
ON/OFF actuator for one or two Local control

ON/OFF mobile socket
groups of lamps pushbutton
Conceived as a mobile socket, with German standard

plug and socket, for the connection to a power socket
of the system, this actuator is suitable for the control
of lamps and generic loads with maximum absorption
10 A
Power socket
Dimmer actuators for

light automation
Flush mounted devices available in the following
versions:
 for the control of lamps and generic loads with
maximum power 400 W;
 for the control of 0-10 V ballasts with maximum
power 1000 W
N
L
Ballast actuator
Ballast

Dimmer actuator for false
ceiling installation
Available in the following versions:
 for the control of lamps and generic
loads with maximum power 600 W;
 for the control of 0-10 V ballasts with
maximum power 1000 W
Dimmer mobile socket

Local control
pushbutton
Mobile dimmer actuator

False ceiling mounted
dimmer actuator Also this device has German standard plug
and socket, for connection to a power
socket of the system
Suitable for dimmer control of lamps and
generic loads with maximum power 500 W
SHUTTER AUTOMATION
ACTUATORS
Available in two versions, for the control of
motorised shutter and shutter motors with
maximum power 500 VA:
 flush mounted
 for installation inside shutter boxes
In both cases the shutter position can be
saved, and then recalled using the appropriate
control device
Shutter box actuator
Flush mounted actuator

GENERAL FEATURES
Actuators
Device selection table
TYPE OF ACTUATOR AXOLUTE KEY COVERS LIVINGLIGHT KEY COVERS
300 W ON/OFF H4590 HC/HD/HS4915BA LN4590 L/N/NT4915AN
2500 W ON/OFF H4591 HC/HD/HS4915BA LN4591 L/N/NT4915AN
L/N/NT4915AN +
2 x 1000 W ON/OFF H4592 2 x HC/HD/HS4915BA LN4592
L/N/NT4915AN
HC/HD/HS4915BA + L/N/NT4915AN +
2 x 300 W ON/OFF H4593 LN4593
HC/HD/HS4911AD L/N/NT4911ADN
HC/HD/HS4915BA + L/N/NT4915AN +
Dimmer FOR 0-10 v ballast H4594 LN4594
HC/HD/HS4911AD L/N/NT4911ADN
ON/OFF FOR TECHNICAL ALARMs H4587 – LN4587 –
2500 W ON/OFF 3571
600 W DIMMER 3572
DIMMER FOR 0-10 v ballast 3573
500 w dimmer mobile socket 3574
2500 w on/off mobile socket 3575
HC/HD/HS4911AH + L/N/NT4911AHN +
FOR SHUTTERS H4595 LN4595
HC/HD/HS4915 L/NT4915N o N4915LN
FOR SHUTTERS 3576

Table of loads (1)
COMPACT
INCANDESCENT FLUORESCENT FERROMAGNETIC ELECTRONIC
HALOGEN LAMPS FLUORESCENT LED LAMPS MOTORS
LAMPS LAMPS TRANSFORMERS TRANSFORMERS
LAMPS
(2)
60 –400 W 60 –400 W – 60 –400 W 60 –400 W – – –
2500 W 2500 W 1250 W 2500 W 2500 W 1250 W 1250 W 250 VA
2 x 1000 W 2 x 1000 W 2 x 500 W 2 x 100 VA 2 x 1000 W 2 x 500 W 2 x 500 W 2 x 100 VA
60 – 300 W 60 – 300 W – 60 – 300 VA 60 – 300 W – – –
– – 1000 W (3) – – – – –
2500 W 2500 W 2500 W 2500 VA 2500 W 2500 W 1250 W 2500 VA
2500 W 2500 W 2500 W 2500 VA 2500 W 1250 W 1250 W 250 VA
60 – 600 W 60 – 600 W – 60 – 450 VA 60 – 600 W – – –
– – 1000 W (3) – – – – –
50 – 500 W 50 – 500 W – 60 – 500 VA 60 – 500 VA – – –
2500 W 2500 W 1250 W 2500 VA 2500 W 1250 W 1250 W –
– – – – – – – 500 VA
– – – – – – – 500 VA
Note (1): for system with 110 Vac power line supply, the maximum power values
listed are halved.
Note (2): – For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60% higher than
their rated power must be connected.
– For the calculation of the controllable power take into account the efficiency of
standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50 W lamp with an efficiency of 0.78
=> power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)
Note (3): 0-10 V ballast for fluorescent lamps

GENERAL FEATURES
Configuration - general rules

Structure of the MY HOME radio system
The MY HOME radio system is based on a network of This particular mode of transmission ensures high reliability
devices that communicate using a radio signal with and efficiency; in fact, if the signal path is interrupted by
frequency of 2.4 GHz and the ZigBee® protocol, defined by a faulty device, the other existing devices will create an
international standard IEEE 802-15 4. alternative path for the signal to reach its destination.
As shown in the drawing below, the information sent by
a control device reaches the recipient actuator passing
through other devices on the network.
Device that sends the Interruption

command
Recipient actuator
Control device Signal path
Router actuator Path with communication problems
Coordinator Actuator (*) New alternative path
The MY HOME radio system can be used in any type of room or home none of the system devices interfere with wireless
devices present, like burglar alarm, computer, Wi-Fi data network, etc.

How is the ZigBee® radio network installed
The international IEEE 802 15 4 standard defines the
interconnection protocol between radio communication,
and the type of devices that constitute a ZigBee network
With reference to the drawing in the previous page, in a
ZigBee network it is possible to identify 3 types of devices:
DESCRIPTION FUNCTION NETwORK DEVICE
Battery powered control devices, remote controls, contact interfaces, and

Control device Forwarding of the radio signal for actuators
technical alarm transmitters
Actuation of the control intended for same, and forwarding of

router device Actuator devices, connected to the electric power line
the radio signal to other network devices
Only one actuator device of the system, selected and defined during the
configuration of the network.
Control and management of communication within the
Coordinator device if the ZigBee® network is integrated with the BUS Automation system,
network and actuation of the control intended for the same
the “coordinator” function must be assigned to the SCS/ZigBee® interface
device®
Simple and quick system configuration

The system configuration does not require tools or
software To include and associate all the devices
of the ZigBee® network, a simple pressure of the
appropriate pushbutton on the front of each device
itself is enough
Note : Zigbee® Certified Product - Manufacturer Specific Profile.

CONFIGURATION
The configuration of radio ZigBee® devices is performed in 1 - Selection of the coordinator device and
three stages: network creation
1. Selection of the coordinator device and network creation This is the first operation that must be completed after
2. Adding the devices to the network wiring the devices. After its definition, the coordinator will
store all information relating to all the devices making up
3. Association of the devices
the network, and will manage the transfer of information
among the devices.
To help the reader, below is a legend of the symbols used
in the next pages to indicate the status of the LEDs of the
devices.
ProcedurE:
1. Remove any key covers present.
LED status 2. Select the actuator device that will act as a Coordinator,
and press the corresponding network key for 4 seconds.
OFF
ON STEADY
FLASHING SLOWNLY (1 s)
4s
FLASHING QUICKLY (0.25 s)
FLASHING (60 ms)
FLASHING 3 TIMES (3 s)
Coordinator
LEDS AND KEYS REQUIRED FOR THE CONFIGURATION

3. The NETWORK LED (yellow) will come on steady, and
after a few instants will start flashing quickly.
NETWORK key NETWORK

indicator LED
LEARNING key LEARNING

indicator LED
Coordinator
ON/OFF control 4. Create the network by setting the devices that will be
key
included, as indicated in the following page.

2 - Adding the devices to the network
1. Press the NETWORK KEY of the first device to include. 3. To complete the procedure press the NETWORK
The NETWORK LED (yellow) turns on steady during KEY of the Coordinator device; the corresponding
the “network search” stage. Once the stage has been NETWORK LED will FLASH THREE TIMES, while the
completed, it will start flashing slowly. NETWORK LEDs of all other devices will switch off.
3s Coordinator
Device
2. Repeat the above procedure for all devices to include

in the network.
Device
CHECKING THE DEVICES BELONGING TO THE NETWORK

To check the devices belonging to a common network The radio control must be checked individually.
press the NETWORK KEY of any actuator device, or the Press the NETWORK KEY of the first Control: the NETWORK
NETWORK KEY of the Coordinator device: the NETWORK LED (yellow) of the Control will flash slowly, while the
LED (yellow) of the Coordinator device will flash slowly, NETWORK LEDs (yellow) of all the actuators in the system
while the NETWORK LEDs (yellow) of the other Actuator will flash quickly. Repeat the operation also for the other
devices will flash quickly. radio controls.
A PL
Device Coordinator Device Device

CONFIGURATION
3 - Association of the devices

After installing the Zigbee® system, the actuator devices must be associated to the corresponding control devices.
HOW TO ASSOCIATE A CONTROL DEVICE TO AN

ACTUATOR
1. If fitted, remove the key covers of the involved devices. 5. Press the ON KEY on the ACTUATOR. The load
2. Press the learning Key of the rAdio conTrol, the connected turns on, the LEARNING LED (green) change
leArning led (green) will flash slowly. flashing mode, from slow to quick.
A PL
Control Actuator
3. Wait at least 1 second, press then the ON KEY; the
LEARNING LED (green) will flash quickly.
Note: repeat the procedure described at points 2 and 3 for each command to be 6. Press the LEARNING KEY on the RADIO CONTROL.
associated to the actuator. The LEARNING LEDs (green) of all associated devices will
go off
A PL
A PL
Control Control
4. Press the ACTUATOR to associate to the LEARNING KEY.
The LEARNING LED (green) will flash slowly.
Actuator
Actuator
7. The devices are now associated: to check that the
configuration procedure has been performed correctly
press the OFF KEY on the radio control; the load
connected to the actuator should go off Otherwise
repeat the association procedure described
A PL
Control Actuator
HoW To ASSocIATe AN AcTuATor To ANoTHer

AcTuATor
The procedure described for associating the control device
to the actuator can also be used to associate an actuator to
another actuator This gives the possibility of controlling
loads connected to several actuators from one actuator
only, like in the example shown below
1. Press the ON KEY on actuator no 1, to activate the load 2. Press the ON KEY on actuator no 2 to activate the load
connected to this actuator connected to this actuator, and also to send via radio a
switch on command to actuator no 1
Actuator No.1 Actuator No.2

CONFIGURATION
HOW TO ASSOCIATE A RADIO CONTROL TO A NEW

ACTUATOR
1. If fitted, remove the key covers of the involved devices. 5. Press the LEARNING KEY of the new actuator to
2. Press the ON KEY of the Radio control, the associate, il LEARNING LED (green) will flash slowly.
associated loads come on.
3. Press the leArning Key of the radio conTrol, the
learning led (green) will flash slowly.
A PL
Control Actuator
6. Press the ON KEY on the new ACTUATOR. The LEARNING

4. Press the ON KEY on the Radio control, the LED (green) will flash quickly and the load switches on.
LEARNING LED (green) will start flashing quickly.
Also the LEARNING LEDs (green) of the associated
actuators will flash quickly.
A PL
Control
Actuator
Actuator

7. Press the LEARNING KEY ont the rAdIo coNTroL
The LEARNING LEDs of all devices will go off
A PL
Control
Actuator
8. Press the ON KEY on the radio control, the associated

devices will go off
A PL
Actuator
Control
Actuator
Each individual actuator manages the corresponding load connected, while the radio control is capable of managing both
actuators at the same time

CONFIGURATION
How to modify the configuration
It is possible to change at any time the system configuration, by removing the current association between the Radio
control and one or more actuators, to create new associations.
HOW TO REMOVE THE ASSOCIATION BETWEEN A

RADIO CONTROL AND AN ACTUATOR
1. If fitted, remove the key covers of the involved devices. 5. Press the LEARNING KEY on the Radio control, all
2. Press the LEARNING KEY on the radio CONTROL, the LEARNING LEDs (green) will go off.
LEARNING LED (green) will flash slowly.
A PL
A PL
Control
Control
6. Check that the Radio control is disconnected from
the ACTUATOR. When the ON key of the radio control
3. Now press the ON KEY, the LEARNING LED (green) will is pressed, the load connected to the disconnected
start flashing quickly. actuator must not activate. Otherwise repeat the
At the same time, also the LEARNING LEDs (green) of described procedure.
all the actuators associated to the radio control will start
flashing quickly. HOW TO REMOVE A DEVICE FROM THE NETWORK
1. Press the NETWORK KEY on the device to be removed.
The corresponding NETWORK LED (yellow) will start
flashing quickly.
A PL
Control
4. Identify the actuator to disconnect and press the

corresponding LEARNING KEY. The LEARNING LED
(green) will go off.
Device
2. Press the NETWORK KEY again. The NETWORK LED

(yellow) will switch off for 10 seconds, and then will start
flashing slowly.
3. Remove the device from the system.
Actuator
Configuration of the functions: the main control
1. If fitted, remove the key covers of the involved devices. 5. Press the ON KEY on the ACTUATORS, the load activates,
2. Select the radio control that will manage all the the LEARNING LED (green) will go from flashing slowly to
actuators. Press the LEARNING KEY; the LEARNING LED flashing quickly.
(green) will flash slowly.
A PL
A PL
Control
Actuator
3. Press the ON KEY on the Radio control, the

LEARNING LED (green) will start flashing quickly.
6. Press the LEARNING KEY on the radio CONTROL, the
learning LEDs (green) of all devices will go off.
A PL
A PL
Control
4. Press on all the ACTUATORS the LEARNING KEY. All the

LEARNING LEDs (green) will flash slowly. Control
Actuator
Actuator

CONFIGURATION
Configuration of the functions: the scenario
The scenario consists of the simultaneous activation of several loads, with the objective of creating a specific comfort
situation. As an example, below is a description of the procedure for creating a scenario for switching ON a light point in
dimmer mode, and open a shutter.
ProcedurE:
5. Press the ON KEY on the Dimmer actuator.
1. If fitted, remove the key covers of the involved devices. To set the brightness at the desired level, use the + and –
2. Press the LEARNING KEY on the scenariO CONTROL, keys. The LEARNING LED (green) will flash quickly.
the LEARNING LED (green) will flash slowly.
Scenario control
3. Press KEY 1; the LEARNING LED (green) will start flashing Dimmer actuator
quickly. 6. Press the LEARNING KEY on the SHUTTER ACTUATOR,
Scenario control
4. Press the LEARNING KEY on the DIMMER ACTUATOR,

Shutter actuator
7. Press the “UP” KEY of the Shutter actuator, the

LEARNING LED (green) will flash quickly.
Dimmer actuator
Shutter actuator
8. Press the LEARNING KEY on the SCENARIO CONTROL.
The LEARNING LED (green) of the Dimmer actuator,
of the SHUTTER ACTUATOR and of the SCENARIO
CONTROL will go off.
Dimmer actuator
Scenario control
Shutter actuator
9. Check the created scenario using key No. 1 of the

SCENARIO CONTROL. At the same time as the light
switches on in dimmer mode, also the shutter will open.
Otherwise repeat the described procedure.

GeneRAL RULes FoR InstALLAtIon
Distances and maximum number of devices

The installation of a Zigbee® radio system does not have any special requirements; it is enough to comply with the current
regulations for the installation of a domestic electric system, and with the instructions of this page
MAXIMuM NuMBer oF deVIceS
The maximum number of devices that can be
TV/SAT
configured as part of a network is 65000
IPTV TV/SAT IPTV
MAXIMuM dISTANceS
The maximum distance between 2 device is:
 150 metres on free field
automazione antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc 15 metres for closed areas (the presence of masonry or
automazione www irrigazione
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc w
metal walls greatly reduces the signal strength)
N N
L L
Wall
150 metres
15 metres
Radio control Actuator Radio control Actuator
dISTANceS eXceedING THe PerMITTed LIMIT TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT IPTV
If the distance among the devices exceeds the permitted limits, the network will use the Router function of the actuators,
which will then receive the command and send it to other similar devices, until it reaches the destination
The maximum number of actuators that can be used wit the “Router” function is 30
automazione antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia automazione
controllo lan antifurto
luci controllo
tvcc lan
www controllo carichi
irrigazione energia luci tvcc
Example: in the room shown, the signal sent by the light control device (A) is unable to reach the corresponding actuator (B)
if this is installed at a distance of 30 m or more
N
L
A Wall Wall B
Light control Shutter actuator TV/SAT IPTV Light actuator TV/SAT IPTV
Signal
30 metres
The shutter actuator (C), installed in an intermediate position, operates as a “Router”, receiving the signal from the control
automazione antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia automazione
controllo lan antifurto
luci controllo
tvcc lan
www controllo carichi
irrigazione energia luci tvcc
device (A), and sending it to the light actuator (B)
N
L
A Wall C Wall B
Signal Signal
Light control Shutter actuator Light actuator
15 metres 15 metres

CONTENTS
APPLICATION EXAMPLES AND WIRING DIAGRAMS
1. Adding a light point for lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
2. Managing the lighting from 3 positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3. Addition of a third light point and dimmer management
of the lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
4. Automatic switching on of the light in the night zone . . . . . . . . . . 108
5. Central shutter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6. Simplified shutter and lighting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
7. Light control with scenario management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
8. Methane gas leak with automatic isolation of the pipes
and optical-acoustic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

WIRInG DIAGRAMs
Application examples and wiring diagrams

1. ADDING A LIGHT POINT FOR LIGHTING CONTROL
Without performing expensive masonry work, or any wiring operations, the user wants to add a new light point for the
management of the lighting inside the room
Switch
The standard switch is replaced by a radio actuator; this The new light point consists of a control installed on the
operation is carried out without any modifications of the wall surface
wiring, because the device operation does not require the It is possible to add to this device one or more controls,
use of the neutral conductor (see wiring diagram) providing a more flexible control of the lighting from other
areas of the room
Actuator
Radio control

WIRING DIAGRAM
Actuator
Radio control
MATERIAL
description item quantitY
AXOLUTE LIVINGLIGHT
Actuator H4590 LN4590 1
Radio control HA/HB4596 L/N4596N 1
Note: complete the devices with support, 2 module cover plate and key covers,
depending on the desired finish (see the specific catalogue).

WIRING DIAGRAMS

2. MANAGING THE LIGHTING FROM 3 POSITIONS
The lighting system of the bedroom shown consists of a ceiling light fitting controlled by a switch at the entrance of the
room, and two table lamps connected to two power sockets.
The idea is to modify the system to make it possible to manage all lights from the bed.
Switch
Socket
Socket
Without any changes to the current system, the traditional The management of the lamps is ensured by fitting on
switch at the entrance of the room is replaced with a radio the side of the bed two radio controls configured for the
actuator. Two mobile sockets for the management of the management of the radio actuator and the two mobile
two table lamps are connected to the power sockets. sockets.
Radio control Radio control

Actuator
Mobile socket
Mobile socket

WIRING DIAGRAM
L 230 Vac 230 Vac

socket socket
Actuator
Mobile socket Mobile socket
Radio control Radio control
MATERIAL

AXOLUTE LIVINGLIGHT
Radio control HA/HB4597 L/N4597N 2
Mobile socket 3575 3575 2

WIRING DIAGRAMS

3. ADDITION OF A THIRD LIGHT POINT AND DIMMER MANAGEMENT OF THE
LIGHTING
In the room shown, the lamp is controlled by two two-way switches. The user wants to manage the lamp from a third control
point and wants to be able to adjust the light intensity using the dimmer function.
Two-way switch at the

entrance of the room
Two-way switch
To achieve what described, a simple modification of the second in the most comfortable position for use. Using the
electric system is required. The two-way switch connected pushbuttons of the three new devices, it will be possible to
to the lamp is replaced by a dimmer radio actuator. Two switch the lamp on and adjust its intensity.
radio controls are then installed; the first one to replace
the two-way switch at the entrance of the room, and the
Dimmer actuator

WIRING DIAGRAM
Dimmer actuator
Dimmer radio control Dimmer radio control
MATERIAL

AXOLUTE LIVINGLIGHT
Dimmer actuator H4593 LN4593 1
Dimmer radio control HA/HB4598 L/N4598N 2
Flush mounted box
H4588 LN4588 2
adapter (*)
(*) Accessory required for the installation of the radio control in the flush mounted
box, instead of the two-way switch.

WIRING DIAGRAMS
4. AUTOMATIC SWITCHING ON OF THE LIGHT IN THE NIGHT ZONE

The automatic switching on of the lighting during the The automatic switching on of the lighting is performed
night, when the user crosses the area, is without any doubt by two infrared controls, located respectively in the room,
a useful function. near the floor beside the bed, and in the hallway.
This function can be realised easily in both new systems During the night and when there is no light, the infrared
and in systems being refurbished, thanks to infrared radio controls will automatically switch on the lights of the two
controls, and without any wiring operations. rooms when the user gets up to reach the bathroom.
The drawing shows the night zone of a home with a The lights are then switched off manually using the
lighting system consisting of control devices and radio corresponding actuators and radio controls.
actuators (see wiring diagram).
BEDROOM
Radio control
Actuator
IR radio control
HALLWAY
Actuator
IR radio control

WIRING DIAGRAM
IR radio control IR radio control
L L L
Actuator Actuator Actuator
Hallway lamp Bedroom lamp Bathroom lamp
Hallway lamp radio control Bedroom lamp radio control
MATERIAL

AXOLUTE LIVINGLIGHT
300W actuator H4590 LN4590 3
Single radio control HA/HB4596 L/N4596N 2
IR radio control 3579 3579 2

WIRING DIAGRAMS

5. CENTRAL SHUTTER CONTROL
The room shown has three motorized shutters, individually controlled by the corresponding traditional control devices.
The user wants to add a general control at the entrance, to manage all shutters at the same time, without carrying out any
masonry work, or wiring modifications.
Changeover switch Changeover switch
Changeover switch
To achieve what described, the traditional devices are easily replaced by radio actuators, without changing the existing
wiring system. The new general control consists of a surface mounted radio control located at the entrance of the room.
Shutter actuator Shutter actuator
Shutter actuator
Shutter radio control

WIRING DIAGRAM
N L N L
Motorised shutter Motorised shutter

Actuator Actuator
N L
Motorised shutter
Actuator
MATERIAL
General radio control
AXOLUTE LIVINGLIGHT
Shutter actuator H4595 LN4595 3
Shutter radio control HA/HB4599 L/N4599N 1

WIRING DIAGRAMS

6. SIMPLIFIED SHUTTER AND LIGHTING SYSTEM
By using false ceiling mounted actuators and reduced shutter boxes, and are connected to the power network,
size actuators instead of similar flush mounted devices, it required for operation of the load.
is possible to obtain a lighting and shutter management The drawing shows an example of the electric system for
system with extreme ease, without the need for wiring, or the management of lights and shutters, using both the
flush mounted device holding boxes. devices described and radio controls.
Thanks to their reduced sizes, these actuators can be
installed near the loads to be controlled, or inside the
Light
actuator
Shutter
Shutter
Shutter actuator
actuator
actuator
Shutter
radio control
Shutter
Light radio control Shutter
radio control
radio control
MATERIAL
DESCRIPTION ITEM QUANTITY

AXOLUTE LIVINGLIGHT
Shutter actuator 3576 3576 3
Light radio actuator 3572 3572 1
Shutter radio control HA/HB4599 L/N4599N 3
Light radio control HA/HB4596 L/N4596N 1

WIRING DIAGRAM
Motorised shutter
Light actuator Shutter actuator
Light radio control Shutter radio control
Motorised shutter Motorised shutter
Shutter actuator Shutter actuator
Shutter radio control Shutter radio control

WIRING DIAGRAMS

7. LIGHT CONTROL WITH SCENARIO MANAGEMENT
The living room shown contains three lamps managed by  TV watching scenario: when selected, the main ceiling
dimmer actuators. Without any wiring intervention, it is light and the table lamps are switched off , and the stem
possible to integrate the scenario control with the system. lamp is switched on at 30% of its power;
This will be useful for setting, by pressing the control key,  Reading scenario: when selected, the main ceiling light
the ambiance scenario of the room, based on particular and the stem lamp are switched off , and the table lamps
situations and on the life style of the user, like: are switched on.
The scenario control is capable of saving up to 4 scenarios
maximum.
TV WATCHING SCENARIO
Scenario radio
control
Dimmer actuator
Dimmer actuator Remote control for the

Dimmer actuator
management of scenarios
READING SCENARIO
Scenario radio
control
Dimmer actuator
Dimmer actuator Remote control for the

management of scenarios Dimmer actuator
In the system described it is also possible to add a remote control, for easier management of the scenarios.

WIRING DIAGRAM
Ceiling light Ceiling light Ceiling light

L L L
Dimmer actuator Dimmer actuator Dimmer actuator
Scenario radio control
Radio remote control
MATERIAL

AXOLUTE LIVINGLIGHT
Dimmer actuator H4593 LN4593 3
Scenario radio control HA/HB4589 LN4589N 1
Radio remote control 3528N 3528N 1

WIRInG DIAGRAMs

8. METHANE GAS LEAK WITH AUTOMATIC ISOLATION OF THE PIPES AND
OPTICAL-ACOUSTIC ALARM
As it is well known, the protection of the home from gas In case of danger, the gas detector will emit an audible
leaks can be easily obtained by integrating a methane gas signal; at the same time, the interface will transmit a signal
detector with the electric system to the actuator that will order the solenoid valve to seal the
The highest protection level can be obtained by combining gas conduit
the gas detector with a radio interface, and an actuator The operating principle also applies for protection against
connected to a solenoid valve flooding, by replacing the gas detector with a water sensor,
and using the actuator to control the water conduit
Transmitting interface
and gas detector
Siren or
flashing device
Radio actuator
Solenoid valve
Radio actuator

WIRING DIAGRAM
Actuator Technical alarm transmitter Actuator
L N Aux2 Aux1 + – L N
Siren and/or flashing A + Solenoid valve

device
12 Vac/dc
MATERIAL

AXOLUTE LIVINGLIGHT
HD4511V12 L/N/NT4511/12
Methane gas detector (*) 1
HC/HS4511/12 L/N/NT4512/12
Technical alarm transmitter H4586 LN4586 1
Note*: ensure that the detector is powered by a power supply with 12 Vac/dc
output voltage.

118 MY HOME Automation
CONTENTS
MY HOME – Automation
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
General rules for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Automation MY HOME 119

GEnErAl fEAturEs
introduction to the Automation system

the MY HOME Automation system a programmable logic and are if it is not possible to achieve a Bus
allows you to manage functions in connected in parallel with a system or if you want to expand a
a simultaneous and integrated way 2-conductor Bus cable for sending pre-existing system without any
to date, these functions have been information and with low voltage masonry work, the Automation
performed with special and complex (27V d c ) electric power there are system can be expanded with special
electrical devices such as: two types of devices in the system: wire/radio interfaces and radio
lighting control
controls, connected only to the
control devices characterised by high
control for shutters and/or electric
Bus cable; installation flexibility
curtains, fans, exhausters, etc actuators, connected both to

Compared to the devices the Bus cable and to the 230V
of a conventional electrical a c power line for managing the
system, Automation devices connected load
have an electronic circuit with
Wire system
Basic contact General Touch control

interface control Local Display (SOFT TOUCH)
Traditional
device
Power supply
230 Vac
TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT
DIN module DIN module TV/SAT Shutter actuator
IPTV
actuator dimmer actuator control
TV/SAT automazione diffusione sonora

IPTV
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia automazione
luci diffusione
tvcc
sonora antifurto
www termoregolazione
irrigazione videocitofonia controllo
TV/SAT IPTV
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
Shutters Light Shutters
The MY HOME Automation system devices are IMQ certified, as they comply with the CEI EN 50428 standard “non-automatic control devices for fixed electrical home
installations and similar uses”.

When the Automation system it is also possible to carry out special control device or by using the touch
devices are configured properly, it functions - which can hardly be screen menu if the Automation
is possible to manage the load as achieved with conventional electrical system is integrated with the 2 wire
follows: systems sound system and temperature
Control for a single load (lamp,
these functions are called scenarios, control system, the scenario can also
shutters, etc ); which consist of a set of simultaneous set up a room with background music
Control for one or more load
controls used for arranging the room and with the required temperature
groups (for example, only the according to the user’s lifestyle
shutters on the first floor, north An example of a scenario can be
side, etc ); represented by the simultaneous
simultaneous management of
activation of lights, shutters, etc ,
all loads (for example, general which can be set by the user after
deactivation of all lamps in the getting home by using one single
house and/or closing of all rolling
shutters)
radio/wire interfaces radio system
SCS/ZigBee GATEWAY Radio

Local control Touch Screen radio interface control
Basic TV/SAT IPTV

actuator TV/SAT IPTV
IPTV
TV/SAT IPTV
Shutter
n controllo carichi energia luci tvcc
actuator
www irrigazione
control
Light Shutters

GEnErAl fEAturEs
Control devices
Control devices allow you to control is separated from the mechanical two types of keys and key covers can
the state of the actuators, thus operating part so that one can be used:
executing different functions: On, choose the type, number and size of 1 function key cover, one or two

Off, timing, etc , which depend the control pushbuttons modules, to be used with the grey
on the functioning mode that has the device can be modular, thus control key;
been assigned to them through an meeting the different installation 2 function key cover, one or two

appropriate configuration requirements and different functions modules, to be used with the black
the electronic part of these devices required by the user control key;
Upper pushbutton
Lower pushbutton
LED
Control key Control key Control key
Key cover Key cover Key cover Key cover

1 function 2 functions 1 function 2 functions
1 module 1 module 2 modules 2 modules
The control with the single key cover can become integrated The double key cover (tilting) can become integrated with a traditional exchanging contact.
with a traditional closing contact (pushbutton or switch). NOTE: control keys are supplied with the device as standard.

lowered controls speciAl control
these devices are consist of two in addition to the standard functions
lowered flush mounted modules it also enables performing all
this reduces depth, leaving more the special functions, normally
room inside the box for the housing performed by three different controls:
of cables, or for basic modularity the special function control, the
devices extended control, and the timer
control
lowered 2 Module control the special control features 4
the single and double load control pushbuttons and 2 green/red control stAtus indicAtors
performs the same functions of the bicolour lEDs (in the liVinGliGHt All the controls feature lEDs, which
previously released item the only and MÀtiX version) or 4 blue/red indicate their status (enabled or
differences are: bicolour lEDs (AXOlutE version) disabled), and make them easier to
it has been lowered to reduce the
find in the dark the intensity of the
size inside the box; selected load status signalling lED
it features two green/red bicolour
may be adjusted or turned off using
lEDs (in the liVinGliGHt and the pushbutton on the control itself
MÀtiX version), or 4 blue/red
bicolour lEDs (AXOlutE version)
Lowered 2 module
control
Special control
Upper pushbutton
more space available
LED
Lower pushbutton

GEnErAl fEAturEs
Control devices:
controls/key covers - quick matching guide
Key-coVers aXolUTe liVinglighT
WiThoUT silK-screen prinTing 1 ModUle 2 ModUles 1 ModUle 2 ModUles
1 Function 2 Functions 1 Function 2 Functions 1 Function 2 Functions 1 Function 2 Functions
conTrols
H4651M2 HD4915 HD4911 HC4911 HD4915M2 HD4911M2 L4915N L4911N L4915M2N L4911M2N
L4651M2 HC4915 HS4911 HC4915/2 HC4911/2 N4915LN N4911N N4915M2N N4911M2N
Special control
AM5831M2 HS4915 HS4915/2 HS4911/2 NT4915N NT4911N NT4915M2LN NT4911M2N
H4652/2 HD4915 HD4911 HC4911 HD4915M2 HD4911M2 L4915N L4911N L4915M2N L4911M2N
L4652/2 HC4915 HS4915 HS4911 HC4915/2 HC4911/2 N4915LN N4911N N4915M2N N4911M2N
independent loads
Controls for 2
AM5832/2 HS4915/2 HS4911/2 NT4915N NT4911N NT4915M2LN NT4911M2N
H4652/3 HD4915 HD4911 HC4911 HD4915M2 HD4911M2 L4915N L4911N L4915M2N L4911M2N
L4652/3 HC4915 HS4915 HS4911 HC4915/2 HC4911/2 N4915LN N4911N N4915M2N N4911M2N
independent loads
Controls for 3
AM5832/3 HS4915/2 HS4911/2 NT4915N NT4911N NT4915M2LN NT4911M2N
HD = WHITE, HC = TECH, HS = ANTHRACITE, L = ANTHRACITE, N = WHITE, NT = TECH
aXolUTe liVinglighT
Key-coVers
WiTh silK-screen prinTing*
1 ModUle 2 ModUles 1 ModUle 2 ModUles
Controls
H4651M2 HD4915... HD4911... HD4915M2... HD4911M2... L4915... N4915... L4911... N4915... L4915M2... L4911M2...
L4651M2 HC4915... HC4911... HC4915/2... HC4911/2... NT4915... NT4915... N4915M2... N4915M2...
Special control
AM5831M2 HS4915... HS4911... HS4915/2... HS4911/2... NT4915M2... NT4915M2...
H4652/2 HD4915... HD4911... HD4915M2... HD4911M2... L4915... N4915... L4911... N4915... L4915M2... L4911M2...
L4652/2 HC4915... HC4911... HC4915/2... HC4911/2... NT4915... NT4915... N4915M2... N4915M2...
independent loads
Controls for 2
AM5832/2 HS4915... HS4911... HS4915/2... HS4911/2... NT4915M2... NT4915M2...
H4652/3 L4652/3 HD4915... HD4911... HD4915M2... HD4911M2... L4915... N4915... L4911... N4915... L4915M2... L4911M2...
AM5832/3 HC4915... HC4911... HC4915/2... HC4911/2... NT4915... NT4915... N4915M2... N4915M2...
independent loads
Controls for 3
HS4915... HS4911... HS4915/2... HS4911/2... NT4915M2... NT4915M2...

* Complete the Key cover code with the letters corresponding to the required screen printing (see table). For the complete range of LIVINGLIGHT key covers see the “Catalogue” section.

MàTiX selecTion of Key coVers WiTh silK- screen prinTing
aXolUTe silK-screen silK-screen prinTing
1 ModUle 2 ModUles liVinglighT
MaTiX prinTing descripTion
1 Function 2 Functions 1 Function 2 Functions 1 FUNCTION
DD DO NOT DISTURB
BN STAIRCASE LIGHT
AM5911 AM5911 AM5911/2 AM5911/2

MR MAKE THE ROOM
AA OFF
AB ON
AC GEN
AM5911 AM5911 AM5911/2 AM5911/2
AD ADN DIMMER
BA AN LIGHT
BB DN BELL
AM5911 AM5911 AM5911/2 AM5911/2

BC EXHAUST FAN
BD FN KEY
BE TREBLE CLEF
BF NURSE
BG 1) ROOM
MàTiX
BH ALARMS
1 ModUle 2 ModUles
2 FUNCTIONS
1 Function 2 Functions 1 Function 2 Functions
AF AFN ON/OFF/GEN
AG AGN ON/OFF
AM5915... AM5911... AM5915/2... AM5911/2...
AH AHN UP/DOWN
AM5915... AM5911... AM5915/2... AM5911/2... AI AIN ON/OFF DIMMER
BA 1) LIGHT
BC 1) EXHAUST FAN
AM5915... AM5911... AM5915/2... AM5911/2...

BE 1) TREBLE CLEF
BF 2) BFN SOUND SYSTEM FUNCTION
ADN + + UP
- - DOWN
1) Key cover not available for the MÀTIX series
2) Key cover not available for the 1 and 2 module AXOLUTE series, and for the 2 module MÀTIX, LIVINGLIGHT series

GEnErAl fEAturEs
Control devices
2 module Soft Touch control
two or three Module
Axolute soft touch
controls
this device is capable of sending
actuation and adjustment commands
for the automation, sound system
and video door entry system
functions, with the simple touch of
the control
Axolute nighter, whice And

white glAss controls Each zone corresponding to a key is
the nighter and Whice control marked at the centre by a light blue this effect gives the user the feeling
is a control where the traditional lED of activating the control using the
pushbuttons are replaced by When the user moves a finger close, appropriate configurator it is possible
capacitive sensors its intensity increases sensibly, and to select different intensity levels
Moving the finger close to a sensor is remains so until the finger is moved
the same as pressing a pushbutton away again
the device can therefore be used to
control single or group loads (e g
lights and shutters), sound system,
scenarios, and basic video door entry
Nighter 3 module control
system functions
it’s produced in the versions with 3
and 4 flush mounted modules, with 6
and 8 keys respectively
Whice 4 module control

infrAred controls
ir receiver and new ir remote intended for 1 relay actuators for
IR receiver
control: single loads, 2 relays actuators for
With the receiver, the manual control double loads (shutter motor etc ), for
can be complemented or replaced by the management of scenarios, as well
a remote control, using the infrared as manage both sound systems and
remote control unit, 3529 video door entry systems
to the remote control pushbuttons,
it is possible to associate controls
IR remote control
MoVeMent And lighting

sensors
thanks to the new Green Comfort and wellbeing

switch sensors and the lighting the new sensors also allow
Management system sensors, it is increasing the level of comfort
possible to manage, in a My Home of the users, with the automatic
system, the lighting depending on switching on of the light when
the presence of people, and the level entering the room, and the
of natural light, ensuring: preservation of the desired
Energy efficiency
lighting level based on external
With the new sensors it is possible conditions
to eliminate energy waste through
an intelligent management of
the lights, ensuring the necessary
lighting levels, at the right time
and in the right place the various
operating modes that can be set
with the configuration enable the
user to obtain different levels of
energy efficiency

GEnErAl fEAturEs
Control devices
scenArio MAnAgeMent
systeMs a certain level, and positioning some scenario that can be set using
these devices can be used to create shutters for watching the television, the various integrated MY HOME
particular and advanced comfort or reading a book, following the life systems is the activation of a certain
situations called scenarios, for style of the user background music, the setting of the
example, by activating some lights to Another example of an advanced temperature and the light level of the
house, when entertaining friends
Lighting/movement sensor Scenario programmers MH200N
Touch Screen
TV/SAT
Nighter & Whice control


the described scenarios are managed 2 Din modules f420 scenario
MH200n scenario programmer for

from particular devices capable of module for saving 16 scenarios the creation and management of
saving in the memory all the Controls for automation, sound system, advanced scenarios, also linked
that define the scenario, and which temperature control, and video to time events, system status, and
the user can recall simultaneously by door entry applications more
pressing one single pushbutton
the devices capable of saving and
programming these functions are the
following:
TV/SAT IPTV Special control
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc w
Video Station (*)
Scenario module F420
Soft Touch control
Local display
IPTV
Protected scenario control with transponder (*)
controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione

Scenario control
NOTE (*): at the moment these devices cannot activate scenarios managed by the MH200N scenario programmer.

GEnErAl fEAturEs
Control devices
control selection BAsed on the function to Be MAnAged
on/off lighTing and loads lighTing WiTh adJUsTMenT (diMMer)

Type of conTrol
aXolUTe liVinglighT MàTiX aXolUTe liVinglighT MàTiX
2/3 module single and double load H4652/2 L4652/2 L4652/3 AM5832/2 AM5832/3 H4652/2 L4652/2 L4652/3 AM5832/2 AM5832/3
control (*) H4652/3 H4652/3
2 module special control (*) H4651M2 L4651M2 AM5831M2 H4651M2 L4651M2 AM5831M2
Knob control HD4563 L4563

HC4563 N4563
HS4563 NT4563
Infrared receiver + IR remote control HD4654 L4654N AM5834 HD4654 L4654N AM5834
HC4654 N4654N HC4654 N4654N
HS4654 NT4654N HS4654 NT4654N
Scenario control
2/3 module Soft Touch control HD4653M2 HD4653M3 HD4653M2 HD4653M3

HC4653/2 HC4653/3 HC4653/2 HC4653/3
HS4653/2 HS4653/3 HS4653/2 HS4653/3
3/4 module Nighter and Whice controls HD4657M3 HD4657M4 HD4657M3 HD4657M4
HC4657M3 HC4657M3
HC4657M4 HC4657M4
HS4657M3 HS4657M3
HS4657M4 HS4657M4
Touch Screen - Local display H4890 LN4890 AM5890 H4890 LN4890 AM5890
HW4890 LN4890A HW4890 LN4890A
Green Switch control and PIR sensor HC4659 L4659N AM5659 HC4659 L4659N AM5659
HC4658 L4658N AM5658 HC4658 L4658N AM5658
HD4659 N4659N HD4659 N4659N
HD4658 N4658N HD4658 N4658N
HS4659 NT4659N HS4659 NT4659N
HS4658 NT4658N HS4658 NT4658N
Key card switches H4648 LN4648
H4649 LN4649
* To be completed with key cover

MANAGEMENT OF AUTOMATISMS (E.G. CURTAINS AND SHUTTERS) SCENARIO MANAGEMENT USING F420 AND MH200N
AXOLUTE LIVINGLIGHT MàTIX AXOLUTE LIVINGLIGHT MàTIX
H4652/2 L4652/2 AM5832/2
H4652/3 L4652/3 AM5832/3
H4651M2 L4651M2 AM5831M2 H4651M2 L4651M2 AM5831M2
HD4654 L4654N AM5834 HD4654 L4654N AM5834

HC4654 N4654N HC4654 N4654N
HS4654 NT4654N HS4654 NT4654N
HD4680 L4680
HC4680 N4680
HS4680 NT4680
HD4653M2
HD4653M3
HC4653/2
HC4653/3
HS4653/2
HS4653/3
HD4657M3 HD4657M3
HD4657M4 HD4657M4
HC4657M3 HC4657M3
HC4657M4 HC4657M4
HS4657M3 HS4657M3
HS4657M4 HS4657M4
H4890 LN4890 AM5890 H4890 LN4890 AM5890
HW4890 LN4890A HW4890 LN4890A
HC4891 L4891
HD4891 N4891
HS4891 NT4891
HC4659 L4659N AM5659

HC4658 L4658N AM5658
HD4659 N4659N
HD4658 N4658N
HS4659 NT4659N
HS4658 NT4658N
H4648 LN4648
H4649 LN4649

GEnErAl fEAturEs
Actuator devices
these devices execute direct controls flush-Mounting ActuAtor
and control the connected load in the with 2 Modules
same way as an electromechanical they are available with 1 and 2
Shutters up-down
relay interlocked relays: control for 1 single
for this reason, they must be load (lamp or motor) or 1 double load
connected to the Bus cable using the (motor for shutters)
removable terminals as well as to the these actuators can be TV/SAT
230V a c supply line of the load advantageously used as a control automazione diffusione sonora antifur
there are different types of actuators: point, as they are provided with
they can differ by shape, size, control pushbuttons at the front side
installation features and by their operated by key covers
controlled power
the range includes:
Example of installation of a flush mounted
flush mounted two module
actuator (with 2 interlocked relays) for the
control of the shutters.
actuators;
Basic modularity actuators with

reduced profile;
Din module actuators

Upper pushbutton
Lower pushbutton
LED
Control key Control key
Key cover Key cover

1 function 2 functions
2 modules 2 modules
NOTE: the control keys are supplied with the device as standard.

BAsic Module ActuAtor
Basic actuators are characterized
Example of installation in flush mounted box
by extremely compact dimensions:
width = 40 5 mm, height = 40 5 mm, Box Side-by-side
Basic items
depth = 18 mm these dimensions
allow the actuators to be installed
in junction boxes or inside the load
to be controlled (for example in the
bowl of a chandelier, in the structure
of a lampstand, etc )
it is also possible to place the
control for two light points with
their Basic actuators in a 503E
box; the installation can otherwise
Input for
be achieved with a 504E box or traditional
devices Support
by finding new spaces for the BUS BUS Control
positioning of the actuators
new flush Mounted Flush mounted

actuator/control
ActuAtor/control
this device is fitted with 2
independent relays for the
management of:
- 2 loads or 2 groups of loads,
independent;
- 1 single load (rolling shutter motor)
the actuator may also be configured
for the management of the
connected load, whilst at the same
time operating as a “control device”
for the management of one or more
remote actuators, with operating Light Remote actuator “control”
management key cover
modes typical of control device item “actuator” key
H/l4652/2 cover

GEnErAl fEAturEs
Actuator devices:
controls/key covers quick matching guide
aXolUTe liVinglighT
Key-coVers WiThoUT
silK-screen prinTing
2 ModUles 1 ModUle 2 ModUles 1 ModUle
acTUaTors
H4671/1 HD4915M2 HD4911M2 L4915M2N L4911M2N

Actuator with 1 relay
L4671/1 HC4915/2 HC4911/2 N4915M2N N4911M2N

AM5851/1 HS4915/2 HS4911/2 NT4915M2LN NT4911M2N
H4671M2 HD4911M2 HD4915 HD4911 HC4911 L4911M2N L4915N L4911N

Actuator/control with
L4671M2 HC4911/2 HC4915 HS4911 N4911M2N N4915LN N4911N

2 interlocked relays
AM5851M2 HS4911/2 HS4915 NT4911M2N NT4915N NT4911N
H4678 HD4915M2 HD4911M2 L4915M2N L4911M2N

Dimmer actuator
L4678 HC4915/2 HC4911/2 N4915M2N N4911M2N

HS4915/2 HS4911/2 NT4915M2LN NT4911M2N
aXolUTe liVinglighT
Key-coVers WiTh
silK-screen prinTing*
2 ModUles 1 ModUle 2 ModUles 1 ModUle
acTUaTors
H4671/1 HD4915M2... HD4911M2... L4915M2 L4911M2

Actuator with 1 relay
L4671/1 HC4915/2... HC4911/2... L4915M2 N4915M2

AM5851/1 HS4915/2... HS4911/2... NT4915M2 NT4915M2
H4671/1 HD4911M2... HD4915... HD4911... L4911M2 L4915... N4915... L4911... N4915...

Actuator/control with
L4671/1 HC4911/2... HC4915... HC4911... N4915M2 NT4915... NT4915...

2 interlocked relays
AM5851/1 HS4911/2... HS4915... HS4911... NT4915M2
H4678 HD4915M2... HD4911M2... L4915M2 L4911M2

Dimmer actuator
L4678 HC4915/2... HC4911/2... N4915M2 N4915M2

HS4915/2... HS4911/2... NT4915M2 NT4915M2

* Complete the Key cover code with the letters corresponding to the required screen printing (see table).

MàTiX selecTion of Key coVers WiTh silK-screen prinTing
aXolUTe silK-screen silK-screen prinTing
2 ModUles 1 ModUle liVinglighT
MaTiX prinTing descripTion
1 FUNCTION
DD DO NOT DISTURB
BN STAIRCASE LIGHT
AM5911/2 AM5911/2
MR MAKE THE ROOM
AA OFF
AB ON
AC GEN
AM5911/2 AM5911 AM5911
AD ADN DIMMER
BA AN LIGHT
BB DN BELL
BC EXHAUST FAN
BD FN KEY
BE TREBLE CLEF
BF NURSE
BG 1) ROOM
MàTiX
BH ALARMS
2 ModUles 1 ModUle
2 FUNCTIONS
AF AFN ON/OFF/GEN
AM5915/2... AM5911/2... AG AGN ON/OFF
AH AHN UP – DOWN
AM5911/2... AM5915... AM5911... AI AIN ON/OFF DIMMER
BA 1) LIGHT
BC 1) EXHAUST FAN
BE 1) TREBLE CLEF
BF 2) BFN SOUND SYSTEM FUNCTION
ADN + + UP
- - DOWN
1) Key cover not available for the MÀTIX series
2) Key cover not available for the 1 and 2 module AXOLUTE series, and for the 2 module MÀTIX, LIVINGLIGHT series

GEnErAl fEAturEs
Actuator devices
din Moduel ActuAtors
these devices are suitable for cover so as to reduce the overall
Switchboard installation example
centralised installations in boards dimensions, thus allowing them to
and switchboards (2 Din modules) be installed in raceways, junction
Available in versions with 1, 2 and 4 boxes, false ceilings, boxes for rolling
relays for controlling single loads or shutters, etc
double loads (motor for shutters); With centralised installations, for
these devices are also provided with example, Din switchboards E215/ ,
load control keys for carrying out an MultiBOX or with the innovative
operational test installation solution MY HOME
these actuators are characterised by flAtWAll*, the Din adapter and the
having the advantage of removing front cover enable you to align the
the rear Din adapter and the front profile of the adapter to that of the
other Din modular devices
DIN actuator
for installation in switchboards
Load
connection
terminals
Load control
pushbutton
Example of installation
inside a junction box
Configurator
housing
Removable adapter
for installation on DIN rail
in switchboards
Removable
front cover

ActuAtors And diMMers 4 relay actuator in
DIN module BMSW1003
with power line supply
new actuators and dimmers, part
of the lighting Management offer
range, which, thanks to the power
Multi load dimmer actuator in
supply from the power line, provide DIN module with one output F416U1
control of the load connected even
when no power is received from the
Bus in this case, control is ensured
using the keys found on the device
itself in this case, control is ensured
using the keys found on the device
itself; they also absorb an extremely
limited amount of current from
the power supply of the Bus, and new ActuAtors
therefore only have a marginal some devices of the Energy the exception of the management
impact on the maximum number of Management offer may also be used of the shutters the connection with
devices that may be installed on the in the automation system the power line enables zero crossing,
Bus itself DIN actuators: which makes the devices compatible
the catalogue offers actuators in two actuator devices capable with the new energy saving lamps
the 1, 2, and 4 relay versions with of performing both energy (compact fluorescent and lED)
independent outputs for lighting management and automation Flush mounted actuator:
devices only; functions; one in the basic version Actuator conceived for installation
the power supply enables zero and one fitted with an integrated in liVinGliGHt and AXOlutE flush
crossing and allows them to current sensor for the measurement mounted supports, intended for
be particularly suitable for the of the consumption of the controlled the automation and/or energy
management of the new energy load (instantaneous consumption management functions
saving lamps, such as compact and 2 energy totalizers that can be
fluorescent lamps and lED lamps reset independently) DIN actuator
there are also dimmers with 0/10 Configured in automation mode, they
V output, and two new “multi load” enable performing all the operations
dimmers with 1 or 2 outputs, which available on the Control devices, with
can control any type of load (with the
Flush mounted
exception of compact fluorescent actuator
and lED lamps), and which enable

the user to install the dimmer on the
system, postponing the selection of
the lamp to a later date

GEnErAl fEAturEs
Actuator devices
ActuAtor selection BAsed on the function to Be MAnAged
on/off lighTing and loads
Type of acTUaTor
aXolUTe liVinglighT MàTiX
Flush mounted 2 module (*) 1 relay actuator H4671/1 L4671/1 AM5851/1
Flush mounted, 2 relays, 2 MODULES (*), actuator/control H4671M2 L4671M2 AM5851M2
Flush mounted 2 MODULE (*) dimmer actuator
Basic actuator 3475
Basic Actuator/Control 3476
1, 2, 4 relay DIN actuators F411/1N (1 relay)

F411/2 (2 independent relays)
F411/4 (4 independent relays with one common clamp)
F411/1NC
F411/2NC
BMSW1001
BMSW1002
BMSW1003
DIN Dimmer actuators
* To be completed with key cover

LIGHTING WITH ADJUSTMENT (DIMMER) MANAGEMENT OF AUTOMATISMS (E.G. CURTAINS AND SHUTTERS)
AXOLUTE LIVINGLIGHT MàTIX AXOLUTE LIVINGLIGHT MàTIX
H4671M2 LN4671M2 AM5851M2
H4678 L4678
F411/1N (1 relay - e.g.to control a solenoid valve) -)

F411/2 (2 relays - ex. for 230 Vac motors -)
F411/4 (4 independent relays with one common clamp)
F413N (for electronic ballasts and LED lamps)

F414 (for 60 - 1000 VA resistive loads and ferromagnetic transformers)
F415 (for 60 - 400 VA Electronic transformers)
F416U1
F417U2
BMDI1001

General features
Actuator devices:
selection of the actuators depending on the type of load
The table allows identification of the actuator device depending on what it is to be used for, the electrical features of the load
to be controlled and the installation features.
Warning: Unless otherwise specified in the instruction leaflet, a 10 A thermal magnetic protection must be fitted on the power line to the actuators.
Table of the loads

Power supply
Actuators Modules Controllable loads
of the device
Incandescent and halogen LED lamps Linear fluorescent Compact Electronic Ferromagnetic Reducer motor for
lamps lamps 1) fluorescent transformers 3) transformers 2) 3) shutters 4)
lamps
3475 Basic BUS SCS 2A 40 W @ 230 Vac - 40 W @ 230 Vac - 2 A cosφ 0.5 -
3476 460 W @ 230 Vac 20 W @ 110 Vac - 20 W @ 110 Vac - 460 VA @ 230 Vac -
220 W @ 110 Vac 1 lamp maximum 1 lamp maximum 220 VA @ 110 Vac
F411/1N 2 DIN BUS SCS 10 A 500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A 500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A 4 A cosφ 0.5 -
2300 W @ 230 Vac 250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac 250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac 920 VA @ 230 Vac
1100 W @ 110 Vac 10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac 10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac 440 VA @ 110 Vac
F411/2 2 DIN BUS SCS 6A 250 W @ 230 Vac 1 A 250 W @ 230 Vac 1 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A
1380 W @ 230 Vac 120 W @ 110 Vac 230 W @ 230 Vac 120 W @ 110 Vac 230 W @ 230 Vac 460 VA @ 230 Vac 460 W @ 230 Vac
660 W @ 110 Vac 4 lamps maximum 110 W @ 230 Vac 4 lamps maximum 110 W @ 230 Vac 220 VA @ 110 Vac 220 W @ 110 Vac
F411/4 2 DIN BUS SCS 2A 70 W @ 230 Vac 0.3 A 70 W @ 230 Vac 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A
460 W @ 230 Vac 35 W @ 110 Vac 70 W @ 230 Vac 35 W @ 110 Vac 70 W @ 230 Vac 460 VA @ 230 Vac 460 W @ 230 Vac
F413N 2 DIN BUS SCS - - 2A - - - -

- - 460 W @ 230 Vac 5) - - - -
220 W @ 110 Vac 5)
MAX. 10 ballast
type T5, T8, compact
or driver for LED
F414 4 DIN BUS SCS 0.25 – 4.3A - - - - 0.25 – 4.3A -

60 – 1000 W @ 230 Vac - 50 Hz - - - - 60 – 1000 VA @ 230 Vac - 50 Hz -
0.25 – 3.5A 0.25 – 3.5A
60 – 800 W @ 230 Vac - 60 Hz 60 – 800 VA @ 230 Vac - 60 Hz
F415 4 DIN BUS SCS - - - - 0.25 – 1.7A - -

- - - - 60 – 400 VA - -
@ 230 Vac - 50 Hz
H/L4671/1 2 flush BUS SCS 6A 150 W @ 230 Vac 0.65 A 150 W @ 230 Vac 0.65 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 -
AM5851/1 mounting 1380 W @ 230 Vac 70 W @ 110 Vac 150 W @ 230 Vac 70 W @ 110 Vac 150 W @ 230 Vac 460 VA @ 230 Vac -
H/LN4671M2 2 flush BUS SCS 2A 70 W @ 230 Vac 0.3 A 70 W @ 230 Vac 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A
AM5851M2 mounting 460 W @ 230 Vac 35 W @ 110 Vac 70 W @ 230 Vac 35 W @ 110 Vac 70 W @ 230 Vac 460 VA @ 230 Vac 460 W @ 230 Vac
F411/1NC 2 DIN BUS SCS 10 A 500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A 500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A 4 A cosφ 0.5 -
2300 W @ 230 Vac 250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac 250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac 920 VA @ 230 Vac -
F411/2NC 2 DIN BUS SCS 6A - 0.65 A - 0.65 A 1 A cosφ 0.5 -

1380 W @ 230 Vac - 150 W @ 230 Vac - 150 W @ 230 Vac 230 VA @ 230 Vac -
660 W @ 110 Vac 70 W @ 110 Vac 70 W @ 110 Vac 110 Vac @ 110 Vac
H/L4678 2 flush BUS SCS 0.25 – 1.30 A - - 0.25 – 1.3 A -

mounting 60 – 300 W @ 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz - - 60–300 VA @ 230 Vac- -
50/60 Hz

Table of the loads
Power supply of the
Actuators Modules Controllable loads
device
Incandescent and halogen LED lamps Linear fluorescent Compact Electronic Ferromagnetic Reducer motor
lamps lamps 1) fluorescent transformers 3) transformers 2) 3) for shutters 4)
lamps
F522 1 DIN BUS SCS 10 A 500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A 500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A 4 A cosφ 0.5 -
F523 1 DIN BUS SCS 10 A 500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A 500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A 4 A cosφ 0.5 -
HD/HC/ 2 flush BUS SCS 10 A 500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A 500 W @ 230 Vac 4 A 4 A cosφ 0,5 -
HS/L/N/ mounting 2300 W @ 230 Vac 250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac 250 W @ 110 Vac 920 W @ 230 Vac 920 VA @ 230 Vac -
NT4672N 1100 W @ 110 Vac 10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac 10 lamps maximum 440 W @ 110 Vac 440 VA @ 110 Vac
F416U1 6 DIN 100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 4.3 A - - 4.3 A 4.3 A -

40 – 1000 W @ 230 Vac - - 40 – 1000 W @ 230 Vac 40 – 1000 VA @ 230 Vac -
40 – 500 W @ 110 Vac 40 – 500W@110Vac 40 – 500 VA @ 110 Vac
F417U2 6 DIN 100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 1.7 A - 1.7 A 1.7 A -

40 – 400 W @ 230 Vac - 40 – 400 W @ 230 Vac 40 – 400 W @ 230 Vac -
40 – 200 W @ 110 Vac 40 – 200 W @ 110 Vac 20 – 200 W @ 110 Vac
BMDI1001 6 DIN 100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 4.3 A - 4.3 A 4.3 A - - -

1000 VA @ 230 Vac - 1000 VA @ 230 Vac 1000 VA @ 230 Vac - - -
500 VA @ 110 Vac 500 VA @ 110 Vac 500 VA @ 110 Vac
BMSW1001 4 DIN 100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 16 A 2.1 A 4.3 A 5A 16 A 16 A -

3680 W @ 230 Vac 500 VA @ 230 Vac 10x(2x36 W) @ 230 Vac 1150 VA @ 230 Vac 3680 VA @ 230 Vac 3680 VA @ 230 Vac -
1760 W @ 110 Vac 250 VA @ 110 Vac 5x(2x36 W) @ 110 Vac 550 VA @ 110 Vac 1760 VA @ 110 Vac 1760 VA @ 110 Vac


Notes:
1) fluorescent lamps with corrected power factor, energy saving lamps, discharge lamps.
2) it is necessary to consider the efficiency of the transformer in order to calculate the effective power of the actuator load. For instance, if you connect a dimmer to a 100VA
ferromagnetic transformer with efficiency 0.8, the effective power of the load will be 125VA.
3) the transformer must be loaded at its rated power and, in any case, never below 90% of that power. It is recommended to use one transformer rather than several transformers in
parallel. For instance, it is preferred to use one 250VA transformer with 5 50W spotlights connected rather than 5 50VA transformers in parallel, each with a 50W spotlight.
4) the symbol shown of the actuators refers to a reducer motor for shutters.
5) only compatible with the selected lamps with Ballast 1/10 V.

GEnErAl fEAturEs
interfaces
contAct interfAce in din contAct interfAce in BAsic
Module Module
With this device it is possible to the essential feature of this
connect traditional devices to the Bus, device, due to the reduced overall
such as switches and pushbuttons, dimensions, is the rear-device
thus extending the use of the Bus to installation mode As a result, it is
traditional pre-existing systems possible to install the interface in a
it is also possible to interface 503E box right behind the traditional
thermostats, control devices, humidity devices (e g switch, pushbutton) or
detectors, wind detectors etc behind electronic shallow devices
(e g controls, detectors)
it is also possible to interface
thermostats, humidity detectors,
wind detectors etc this installation
solution simplifies the conversion of
traditional electric systems into home
DIN module contact automation systems, as it makes it
interface
possible to keep the existing flush
mounted boxes, without the need for
masonry work
Basic module
contact interface
External devices Prestige switch

(reuse of historical devices)

Wire Automation extension
with ZigBee radio devices
the wired automation system controlling the users from positions moving walls and with false ceiling
described in the previous pages that cannot be reached by the Bus mounted Bus actuators, the radio
can be expanded at any time by wiring the “wireless” connection controls are the ideal solution for
extending the wiring or adding new among these devices and the wired installing flexible light points, easy to
control devices ones is ensured by a special radio reposition in case of modification in
However, this is not always easy interface connected to the Bus the arrangement of the offices, or the
to do; in some buildings, either the integration between the two furniture
historic and/or valuable buildings, technologies, radio and wired, for more information and for the
the extension of the system entails enables therefore the installer to range of control devices see the
unavoidable and costly interventions select each time the best solution specific radio system chapter of this
on the building work that meets the requirements of guide
these problems can be easily the customer, both in terms of
resolved using the radio controls functionality, and in relation to the possiBle functions
included in the ZigBee radio system homes shutter and rolling shutter

range; being battery powered and this solution can also be extended, automation
independent from the system wiring, with some advantages, to new lighting

these devices give the possibility of buildings; for example in offices with scenario management

Radio control for

the management
Light Shutter of lights
control control
Power supply
SCS/Zigbee
gateway
TV/SAT IPTV
230 Vac
TV/SAT IPTV
Light Shutter
actuator actuator
TV/SAT IPTV
TV/SAT IPTV
termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
Radio Remote control

for the management
of scenarios
Lights Shutters

Configuration
General concepts
This chapter describes the general Actuator address -
concepts for the “physical” and Physical Configuration
“virtual” configuration of the MY The address of each actuator is positions (G1, G2 and G3) as they can
HOME automation devices. For defined uniquely by assigning the belong to several different groups at
each item, the “Technical Sheets” numeric configurators 1 to 9 in the same time.
chapter describes the functions that positions A (Room) and PL (Light
can be realised depending on the Point inside the Room). Example: The actuator configured with A = 1, PL = 3
configurators used. A maximum of 9 addresses can be and G = 4 is device 3 of room 1 belonging to group 4.
defined for each room; a maximum of
Actuators: 9 rooms can be defined in a system.
address and type of The group of belonging is defined by
control inserting a third numeric configurator
To understand the addressing logical in the housing identified with G
it is useful to define some terms (Group).
which will occur frequently in this Some actuators have several G
guide.
Room (A) Physical Configuration
Set of devices belonging to a logical
area (in a home, for example, the ROOM 9
living room, the bedroom, etc.). A =9 A =9 A =9 A =9
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 2 PL = 9
Light Point (PL)
Numeric identification of the single A =9 A =9 A =9
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 9
actuators inside the Room.
Group (G)
Set of devices also belonging to ROOM...
different rooms but which must be ROOM 2
controlled at the same time (e.g. the 1–9
ROOM 1
rolling shutters of the North side of
A =1 A =1 A =1 A =1
PL = 9
the home, the lighting of the day PL = 1 PL = 1 PL = 2
area, etc.).
A =1 A =1 A =0
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 9
GROUP 9
1–9
GROUP 1
A = GR
PL = 1
1–9

Actuator address - logical extension
Virtual configuration For special applications such as
A maximum of 16 addresses can be extended systems in houses or
defined for each room(PL=0-15); service/industrial rooms, where the
a maximum of 16 rooms can be use of many devices may exceed
defined in a system. (A=0 -10). the configuration limits mentioned
above, interface F422 can be used,
configured in the “logical expansion”
mode.
This mode can make an extended
system made up of several individual
systems (see “General rules for
installation” section).
ROOM 10
A = 10 A = 10 A = 10 A = 10
PL = 0 PL = 1 PL = 1 PL = 15
A = 10 A = 10 A = 10
PL = 0 PL = 1 PL = 15
ROOM ...
ROOM 1
0 – 15
ROOM 0
A =0 A =0 A =0 A =0
PL = 1 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 15
A =0 A =0 A =0
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 15
GROUP 255
1 – 15
GROUP 1
A = GR
PL = 1
1 – 255

COnfiGurAtiOn
General concepts
controls: Address And type

of control
the control devices also have configurators with graphics which
positions A and Pl to define the enable the device to send the control
addresses of the devices which with the various ways listed in the
receive the control (actuators) table below
for these positions there are numeric
Mode for addressing the devices using the Physical Configuration Mode for addressing the devices using the Virtual Configuration
Type of conTrol conTrol deVice Type of conTrol conTrol deVice
configurator socket value of the configurator Configurable address Configuration
A 1-9 A 0-10
Point-point Point-point
PL 1-9 PL 0-15
A AMB A AMB
Room Room
PL 1-9 PL 0-10
A GR A GR
Group Group
PL 1-9 PL 1-255
A GEN A GEN
General General
PL - PL -

exAMples of configurAtion
Point-point control Group control
if the no 3 control is configured with if the no 7 control is configured identified with G = 1 (thus belonging
A = 2 and Pl = 3, this device sends with A = Gr and Pl = 1, this device to group 1)
the control to the actuator identified sends the control to the actuator
with A = 2 and Pl = 3
poinT-poinT rooM groUp conTrols general

conTrol conTrols conTrols
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = AMB A = AMB A = GR A = GR
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 1 PL = 2
A = GEN
PL = –
BUS
actuators A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
G = 1 G = 1 G = 2 G = 2 G = 1 G = 1
= Point-point control 1 2 3 4 5 6
= Group control

COnfiGurAtiOn
Addressing levels
for a better understanding of the Example: control for a single load (lamp, fan, rolling shutter, etc.)
concepts described in the previous
rooM 1 rooM 2
page, the four addressing modes are
described below
the control devices (senders) can
activate the actuators (receivers) with
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 2
the following modes PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
point-point control
Direct control to one actuator
TV/SAT TV/SAT
IPTV TV/SATIPTV IPTV TV/SAT TV/SAT
IPTV IPTV
identified by a “room number” and a

“light point number”
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
Control device: A = n* Pl = n*
Actuator: A = n* Pl = n*
rooM control
Direct control to all the actuators Example: control for all the lamps of a room
identified by the same room number
rooM 1 rooM 2
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
A = AMB A = AMB
PL = 1 PL = 2
Control device: A = AMB Pl = n*

n* = any numeric configurator from 1 to 9 Actuator: A = n* Pl = n*

group control
Direct control to all the actuators
which perform particular functions
even if they belong to different
rooms and are identified by the same
“group number”
Example: control of all the lamps of a floor, on the North side of the building
rooM 1 rooM 2
A = GR
PL = 1
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
A = GR
PL = 2
A =1 A =1 A =1 A =2 A =2 A =2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
G =1 G =1 G =2 G =2 G =1 G =1
A = AMB A = AMB
PL = 1 PL = 2
Control device: A = Gr Pl = n*
Actuator: A = n* Pl = n* G = n*

COnfiGurAtiOn
Addressing levels
generAl control
Direct control to all the system actuators
Example: control of all the lamps of the building
rooM 1 rooM 2
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 2
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
A = GR
PL = 1
A = GR A =1 A =1 A =1 A =2 A =2 A =2
PL = 2 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3
G =1 G =1 G =2 G =2 G =1 G =1
A = GEN
PL = -
A = AMB A = AMB
PL = 1 PL = 2
Control device: A = GEn Pl = /

Actuator: A = n* Pl = n* G = n* n* = any numeric configurator from 1 to 9

Main operating modes
The devices in the automation system The function performed, i.e. what the are flush mounted). The table below
can perform different functions, such device must do, is defined by putting lists the various operating modes as a
as setting the brightness, switching configurators into the housings function of the configurator and type
lamps on/off or opening/closing marked with M of the control devices of key cover used in the device.
rolling shutters. and completing the devices with
keys and key covers (if the devices
Control TABLE
Key covers Configurator value (M) Function performed
1 function
Cyclical ON-OFF control
M M M
Repeatedly pressing the relay actuators device key cover, ON and OFF controls will be sent in a cyclical way.
M M M
With dimmer actuators, keep the pushbutton pressed to adjust the load power.
M M M
M M M
no configurator
M 1√4 M 1√8
M ON
M
SPE
ON
1√8 M ON1√4control M 1√8
SPE 1√8
M When pressing the corresponding

M
key
M
cover, the device sends the ON control.
M 1√4 M 1√8
M ON
SPE 1√8
M 1√4 M 1√8
M ON
SPE 1√8
M
M OFF configurator ON 1√8 M
M OFF 1√8
M 1√4 M 1√8
M ON OFF control M
SPE 1√8
M OFF 1√8
When pressing the corresponding
M key cover, the device sends the OFF control.
M OFF 1√8
M SLA
M O/I M SLA
configurator
M O/I
OFF M
M SLA
M OFF 1√8
M O/I
M
Monostable ON-OFF control (pushbutton)
SLA
M O/I
This mode can perform an ON/OFF control similar to the control of a traditional point-point pushbutton, thus
M PUL
intended just for one address.
M M PUL
M M SLA
M PUL
M
configurator
M
PUL O/I
M PUL
M
2 FUNCTIONS
M
Bistable controlMwith hold (UP-DOWN for rolling shutters)
M
M
Pressing the key cover (lower or Pupper)
UL
sends the UP-DOWN control to the rolling shutter motor. After the con-
M
trol has been sent, press the lower or upper key cover again, to stop the rolling shutter in the required position.
M 1√4 M 1√8
configurator
M ON
SPE 1√8
Monostable control (UP-DOWN for rolling shutters)

M M M
The device sends an UP-DOWN control for a rolling shutter motor as long as the lower or upper key cover is
pressed. When the key cover is released, the motor STOPS.
M
M OFF 1√8
configurator M
M 1√4 M 1√8
M ON
SPE 1√8
ON/OFF control
M O/I
Used with relayMactuators, when the upper key cover is pressed the device sends an ON control; when the lower
SLA
key cover is pressed the device sends an OFF control.With dimmer actuators, pressing the upper and lower key
cover adjusts the load power.
M
M OFF 1√8
configurator O/I M PUL
M SLA
M O/I
Configuration
Main operating modes

Cen operating mode with the CEN configurator in the M AM5831M2, by pressing the T1
This particular mode is used to position. The key (upper or lower) of (upper) and T2 (lower) pushbuttons.
manage scenario programmer the control device and the scenario For the correspondence between
devices MH200N. to be activated are linked through the control keys and the scenarios to
As described in the pages of this the TiMH200 program written to activate see the table:
guide, the device can manage create the scenarios and then saving
even complex scenarios activated them in the MH200N device.
automatically after events in the For example, two independent
system or manually by pressing a scenarios can be activated using
key of a control device configured the special control H/L4651M2,
Type of control Configuration Identification of scenario activation keys

Special control A=0–9; PL=0–9; M=CEN; LIV1/AUX=0; LIV2=0; SPE=0; I=0 T1
H/L4651M2 and AM5831M2
T2
Basic control for 2 independent loads A1=0–9; PL1=0–9; M1=CEN; A2=0; PL2=0; M2=0 T1
H/L4652/2 and AM5832/2
T2
A1=0–9; PL1=0–9; M1=CEN; A2=0; PL2=0; M2=CEN T1 T2
T3 T4
Basic control for 3 independent loads A1=0–9; PL1=0–9; A2=0; PL2=0; A3=0; PL3=0; M=CEN T1 T2 T3
H/L4652/3 and AM5832/3
T4 T5 T6
M M
M M
Main actuator operating modes

The actuators can be configured for the following operating modes:
M M
M 1√4 M 1√8
M 1√4
SPE
M
1√8
1√8
ACTUATOR TABLE
SPE 1√8
Configurator value (M) Function performed
M 1√4 M 1√8
Special functions
ON
SPE
M
1√8
This mode can perform special functions (OFF delayed, STOP timed) on the basis of the type of actuator used (single or double) and the numeric
1√8
M configurator inserted.
1√8
configurator 1÷4
M Slave
OFF M SLA 1√8
This mode can perform a control with two or more actuators. In practice the actuators with the SLA (Slave) configurator repeat the function
M SLA
performed by another actuator which acts as Master.
The actuators must have the same addresses and must be of the same type (either all light actuators or all rolling shutter actuators).
configurator SLA
M SLA
O/I
M PUL
M PUL
PUL
The device does not operate with the Room and General controls.
configurator PUL
M PUL

Examples of configuration
the drawing shows a system for Group control receiving the control (one only, a
the management of three lamps Group control 7 marked with A=Gr group or several room actuators) and
and three shutters Each actuator is and Pl=1, controls actuators 1 and 2 from the configurators in position
identified by three numbers: room marked with G=1 M to define the function (On/Off or
number (A), device progressive General control On/DOWn)
number (Pl for light actuators and the devices identified A=GEn and
Pl1 and Pl2 for shutter actuators) Pl= - (no configurator) send a general control operAting Mode
and Group (G) of belonging control to all the actuators, for the the configurator inserted in position
defining the Addresses lights and for the shutters, in the M of each control device identifies
Point-point control system the operating mode
Control 1 (A = 1, Pl = 1) controls the O/i configurator specifies a lamp
actuators 1 (A = 1, Pl = 1 and G = 1) NOTE: The actuators which manage the shutters, switching on control which is given
in the same way control 2 (A = 1, unlike those for the lights, are configured in the same by pressing the upper key cover (On)
Pl = 2) controls actuator 2 (A = 1, way in the two positions PL1 and PL2. and the lower key cover (Off)
Pl = 2 and G = 1) etc
Room control the control devices are instead the configurators and M in
room control 8 (A=AMB, Pl=2) distinguished from the configurators position M instead specify a control
controls actuators 4 and 5 marked in positions A and Pl which specify to manage the rolling shutters
with A=2 the addresses of the actuators intended for actuators 4, 5 and 6
poinT-poinT groUp rooM general

conTrol conTrols conTrols conTrols
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A =1 A =1 A =1 A =2 A =2 A =3 A = GR A = AMB A = GEN A = GEN

PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 1 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = – PL = –
M = O/I M = O/I M = O/I M = M M = M M = M M = O/I M = M M = O/I M = M
BUS
1 2 3 4 5 6
actuators A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 3
PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 3 PL = 1 PL = 2 PL = 1
G = 1 G = 1 G = 2 G = 1 G = 2 G = 1

GEnErAl rulEs fOr instAllAtiOn
Maximum distances and absorptions

this chapter outlines the details for for the purpose of the above availability of current according to
ensuring a correct realisation of a MY calculations, refer to the tECHniCAl the length of the cable
HOME automation system: DAtA shown in the technical sheets When setting up, please observe the
selv classification
chapter following rules:
Maximum distances and
When calculating the absorptions,
absorptions it is also necessary to consider the
Maximum number of devices

which can be configured
1 The connection between the power supply and the furthest away device must not be longer than 250m.
selV clAssificAtion
Power supply Device Junction box
the automation system is sElV
(safety Extra low Voltage) classified
due to the fact that it is powered
using double safety insulation
independent devices, not connected
to the earth, and with maximum
operating voltage of 27 Vdc, non-
undulated, in accordance with CEi En
600065 it is therefore comparable
to a sElV source as described in
point 411 125 of CEi 64-8-4 the
conformity to sElV classification
is only guaranteed subject to full
compliance with current installation
regulations, and with the general
rules for installation for each single 2 The total length of the connections must not be more than 500 metres (extended cable).
device and cable making up the
system recommended by Bticino Power supply Device Junction box
MAxiMuM distAnces of the

Bus cABle And ABsorptions
the maximum number of devices
that can be connected to the Bus
depends on their total absorption
and on the distance between the
connection point and the power
supply the power supply unit can
deliver up to 1200 mA or 600 mA;
ihence, the maximum number of
devices will be determined by the
sum of the absorptions of the single
devices you need to install

3 For optimum division of the currents on the BUS line power supply should be positioned in the middle.
ON ON
OFF OFF
A PRI
A
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
B SCS B
E46ADCN
E49
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
With Power supply E46ADCn: With Power supply E49:

A = 250 m max A = 250 m max
B = 250 m max B = 250 m max
A + B = 500 m A + B = 500 m
Maximum current supplied from Maximum current supplied from
the power supply 1200 mA the power supply 600 mA
NOTE: If a UTP5 cable is used instead of a BUS L4669 cable, distances must halved.


MAxiMuM distAnces for the
connection of ActuAtors Example of connection with F411/1N
depending on the loAd N
in order to manage some types of L
loads correctly, it is necessary to

observe the installation specifications
1 2 3
for all actuators used F411/1N 1 2 3 L N

fluorescent lamps: the length of
MIN 3 m
C1
the connecting cable between the

actuator and the load must not
be less than 3m Do not connect
more than 15 actuators controlling
this type of lamp on the same line
Warning: Refer to the technical data shown on the technical sheets for each actuator
Metallic iodide and sodium-

vapor lamps: in addition to
the indications given for the
fluorescent lamps, please pay
attention to the operating
instructions of these lamps (for
example, avoid switching on when
hot), do not connect dimmers to
the same line of these lamps, keep
the bus line and the power line of
these lamps separated from each
other (at least 1 metre)
three-phase networks: when using

three-phase networks, check the
balance of the phases as well as Maximum distances for connecting the contact interface
the quality of the network 50 m
non-compliance of the above
A
regulations may affect proper PL1

PL2
M
SPE
operation of the devices

PL1 PL2 C
MAxiMuM distAnce for

Prestige switch
connecting the contAct (reuse of historical
interfAce devices)
the connection between the

BUS
interface (basic or Din module) and
the traditional type device must not
exceed 50 metres in length several
pushbuttons may be connected to
the interface inputs

ABSORPTIONs, SIZE AND DISSIPATIONS
Item Description Absorption from Bus Size Dissipation
(power supply 27 Vcc) Dissipated power Max. load
with max. load
3475 actuator 13 mA Basic module
3476 control actuator 13 mA Basic module
3477 contact interface 3.5 mA Basic module
E46ADCN power supply 8 DIN modules 11 W 1.2 A
6W 0.5 A
E49 mini power supply 2 DIN modules 5.3 W
F411/1N 1) 1-relay actuator 22 mA 2 DIN modules 1.5 W
F411/2 1) 2-relay actuator 28 mA (single loads) 2 DIN modules 1.7 W
15.5 mA (interlock)
F411/4 1) 4-relay actuator 40 mA (single loads) 2 DIN modules 3.2 W
22 mA (interlock)
F412 1) 1-relay NC/NA actuator 20 mA 2 DIN modules 1.5 W
F413N 1) output 1 to 10 for ballast 30 mA 2 DIN modules 0.5 W
F414 DIN dimmer 9 mA 4 DIN modules 11W 1000W
5W 500W
F415 DIN dimmer 9 mA 4 DIN modules 11 W 400W
F522 actuator 16A with current sensor 30 mA 1 DIN module
F523 actuator 16A 10 mA 1 DIN module
F420 scenario module 20 mA 2 DIN modules 0.6 W
F422 SCS/SCS interface IN: 25 mA 2 DIN modules 1W
OUT: 2mA
F425 memory module 5 mA 2 DIN modules 0.1 W
F426 SCS/EIB interface 30 mA 6 DIN modules
F427 OPEN KNX interface 6 DIN modules
F428 contact interface 9 mA 2 DIN modules 0.2 W
F429 SCS/DALI interface 5 mA 6 DIN modules
H/L4651M2 AM5831M2 special control 6 mA for H4651M2 2 flush-mounting mod.
8.5 mA for L4651M2 and AM5831M2
H/L4652/2 AM5832/2 control for 2 actuators 9 mA 2 flush-mounting mod.
H/L4652/3 AM5832/3 control for 3 actuators 9 mA 3 flush-mounting mod.
H/L4671/1 AM5851/1 1-relay actuator 16.5 mA 2 flush-mounting mod. 0.9 W
H/LN4671M2 AM5851M2 control/actuator 14 mA 2 flush-mounting mod.
H/L4678 flush-mounting dimmer 9 mA 2 flush-mounting mod. 3W 300 W
H/L4684 colour Touch Screen 80 mA 3+3 flush-mounting mod.
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB SB receiving radio interface 33 mA 2 flush-mounting mod.
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4607 protected control 15 mA 2 flush-mounting mod.
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4607/4 protected scenario control 12 mA 2 flush-mounting mod.
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4610 fixed IR detector 4.5 mA 2 flush-mounting mod.
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4611 swivel IR detector 4.5 mA 2 flush-mounting mod.
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4672N 16 A flush mounted 2 module actuator 10 mA 2 flush-mounting mod.
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4680 scenario control 9 mA 2 flush-mounting mod.
BMSE1001 passive infrared ceiling sensor 10 mA l=75/p=40/h=20
BMSE2001 wide band wall/ceiling sensor 12 mA l=115.86/p=69.6/h=91
BMSE2002 narrow band wall/ceiling sensor 12 mA l=115.86/p=69.6/h=92
BMSE2003 two-way narrow band wall/ceiling sensor 12 mA l=115.86/p=69.6/h=93
BMSE2004 one-way narrow band wall/ceiling sensor 12 mA l=115.86/p=69.6/h=94
BMSE2005 double technology band wall/ceiling sensor 17 mA l=115.86/p=69.6/h=95
F416U1 dimmer actuator1000W TC 5 mA 6 DIN modules 8W 1000 W
F417U2 dimmer actuator1000W 2x400 W TC 5 mA 6 DIN modules 8W 2 X 400 W
BMDI1001 dimmer actuator1000W 1/10 V 5 mA 6 DIN modules
BMSW1001 1-relay 230 Vac actuator 5 mA 4 DIN modules 1.2 W
NOTE:
1) the power dissipated indicated is that corresponding to the device with all the relays loaded at the load maximum. If the load is less the dissipated power is less and may be calculated
by means of the following formula: P[mW]=140+400*N+10*[I12+I22+...IN2]
P: dissipated power in mW,
N: no. of loaded relays
IN: load current corresponding to the N relay.
Install the items with greater dissipated power (in special power supplies and dimmers) in lower positions in the switchboard for easier heat dissipation.
Do not place devices which dissipate a power greater than 5W side by side, but leave an empty module between them.

General rules for installation

If the absorption of the whole system PHYSICAL EXPANSION MODE Positions I3 and I4 shall be configured
is less than 600 mA, the E49 compact Limit systems shall be applied to according to the configuration of
power supply can be used. If the each bus in terms of absorption and the Automation devices in the two
absorption is between 600 and 1200 maximum wiring distance, as shown systems connected to each other.
mA, use the E46ADCN power supply. in the previous page. Therefore, it With reference to the picture, let us
For extended systems with current is not possible to supply a system suppose, for example, that I3=2, I4=7:
absorption over 1200 mA or 600 consisting of two or more buses with on the input bus (IN), the addresses

mA powered by power supplies only one power supply unit E46ADCN of Automation devices No. 1 must
E46ADCN and E49, it will be or E49, connected to each other by be between A=1 / PL=1 and A=2 /
necessary to split the system into interfaces configured in “physical PL=6;
several lines, each powered by its expansion” mode even if the number on the output bus (OUT), the

own power supply and connected and type of components connected addresses of Automation devices
to each other using interface F422 to the system do not exceed the set No. 2 must be between A=2 /
configured in “Physical expansion” maximum absorption (1200 mA). PL=8 to the address of the next
mode. interface.
A/PL = 28 53
230 Vac
F422 OUT F422
OUT OUT
F422 F422
C C
I1 = – I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = –
IN IN
I3 = 2 I3 = 5
I4 = 7 I4 = 4
MOD = 1 IN MOD = 1
230 Vac 230 Vac
A/PL = 11 26 A/PL = 55 99

Installation rules
When setting up the system, consider It is possible to use up to 4

the following recommendations: interfaces in series, which divide
The buses, connected to the
the system into 5 separate
interface input and output, must sections.
be supplied with their own power The F420 scenario module, the

supply unit; additionally, the F425 memory module, and the
system limits apply for each of devices that can be configured
them, in terms of absorption and using the self-learning mode must
maximum distance. be installed on the bus section
Therefore, it is not possible to
corresponding to their own
supply a system consisting of local address. For example if the
two or more buses with only one scenario module is configured
power supply unit (E46ADCN or as A=0 (no configurator), PL=1, it
E49) connected to each other will have to be placed on section
by various interfaces configured 1 of the system. The energy
in physical expansion mode management system central unit
even if the number and type of F421 and the control panel N4682
components connected to the must be installed on the BUS with
system do not exceed the set the highest addresses (system no.
maximum absorption (1200 mA). 3 in the example).
It is not possible to connect two

interfaces in parallel to the same
BUS

Maximum number of devices which can be configured

physicAlly configured
single systeM
A single system can manage up to 9 points (Pl), for a total of 81 addresses it is also possible to have several
rooms (A) for each room, it will then to these addresses, any inclusion in devices with the same address
be possible to manage up to 9 light one or more groups must be added
Basic contact Shutter Dimmer

interface control control
81 addresses MaX.
A
ON ON
3 31
Power supply
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
ART. 3477
OFF OFF
PL1 PL2 C
230 Vac BUS cable
L
DIN
dimmer
Basic Flush-mounting
T5H 250V
0245 06
A
3 31
PL1
PL2
M
actuator actuator
SPE
F414
230V~ 50Hz 60 1000V A
ART. 3477 ¤
A PL M G
PL1 PL2 C
VirtuAlly configured
single systeM
A single system can manage up to 11 light points (Pl=0-15), for a total of
rooms (A=0-10) for each room it will 175 addresses (the address A=0, Pl=0
then be possible to manage up to 16 is not permitted)
Basic contact Shutter Dimmer 230 Vac

175 addresses MaX.
interface control control Web server

A
ON ON Extra
3 31
Power supply
PL1
PL2
power supply
M
SPE
ART. 3477
PRI: 220 – 240 V~

175 – 165 mA
OFF OFF 47/63 Hz
PL1 PL2 C
F453
1 2 1 SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
Ethernet
230 Vac
cross-over cable BUS cable
DIN Pc
dimmer
L
T5H 250V
Basic Flush-mounting
0245 06
A
3 31
PL1
PL2
M
actuator actuator
SPE
F414
230V~ 50Hz 60 1000V A
ART. 3477 ¤
A PL M G
PL1 PL2 C

logical expansion of the addresses
VirtuAlly configured
extended systeM with one
f422 interfAce
in larger homes, or in the service using interface f422 configured in
sector, there might be the need for the “logic expansion” mode: with
Automation systems with a higher configurator n0 2 in position M, and
number of functions than the above no 1 in i4
in this case, it is possible to create
an extended Automation system
Basic contact Shutter Dimmer Fan Shutter

175 addresses MaX.
Power supply interface control control control control

A
ON ON ON
3 31
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
ART. 3477
OFF OFF OFF

PL1 PL2 C
230 Vac
DIN
L
actuator 1
1 2
2
3
3 L N
T5H 250V
AUTOMATION
0245 06 AR T.F470/2
A A
3 31
3 31
PL1 PL1
PL2 PL2
M M
SPE SPE
SYSTEM NO. 2
F414
230V~ 50Hz 60 1000V A
ART. 3477 ART. 3477
Interface
¤
A PL M G
(Local BUS) F422
349 addresses MaX.

PL1 PL2 C PL1 PL2 C
Basic Flush-mounting DIN Basic OUT

I1 =–
actuator actuator dimmer actuator I2 =–
OUT
AR T.F422
I3 =–
Basic contact Shutter Dimmer Fan Shutter I4 =1
174 addresses MaX.
interface control control control control M =2 IN

Power supply
A
ON ON ON
3 31
PL1
PL2
M
SPE
ART. 3477
OFF OFF OFF

PL1 PL2 C
230 Vac
L
DIN
actuator
1 2 3 L N
1 2 3
T5H 250V
0245 06 AR T.F470/2
A A
3 31
3 31
PL1 PL1
AUTOMATION
PL2 PL2
M M
SPE SPE
F414
230V~ 50Hz 60 1000V A
ART. 3477 ¤
ART. 3477
SYSTEM NO. 1 A PL M G
PL1 PL2 C PL1 PL2 C
(MAIN RISER)
Basic Flush-mounting DIN Basic
actuator actuator dimmer actuator
Pc 230 Vac Extra

Web server power supply
ETHERNET
PRI: 220 – 240 V~

175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS AI SCS AV
Ethernet Cross-over Cable

logical expansion of the addresses

VirtuAlly configured If you need to control and execute the centralised

extended systeM with management of the system with Web Server,
seVerAl f422 interfAces Touch screen and Energy Management Control
if three or more systems (up to a Unit, these devices will have to be installed in the
maximum of 9) must be combined, main riser.
these must be connected by means
of interfaces f422 with a common
Main riser
bus, which from now on we will 166 addresses MaX.
call “riser”, on which the control, LOCAL BUS
activation and management (for 174 addresses MaX. Automation system No. 1
example touch screen) devices can I1 = – OUT

I2 = –
also be installed because they belong I3 = –
OUT
ART.F422
I4 = 1 Interface
to the Automation system the riser M= 2 F422
cannot be made, for example, with
IN
a Burglar-alarm or 2 wire Video door
entry system the f422 interfaces
are configured for operation in LOCAL BUS
174 addresses MaX.
“logic expansion” mode, connecting Automation system No. 2
configurator no 2 to the M position I1 = – OUT

I2 = –
and configuring the address of
addresses MaX.: 174x9+166 (Main riser) = 1732

OUT
I3 = –
I4 = 2
ART.F422
Interface
position i4 with configurators from M = 2 F422
1 to 9, as per the following diagram
for each of the 9 systems there will IN
be 174 configuration addresses

LOCAL BUS
available, excluding the interface
174 addresses MaX.
address, as well as 166 addresses on

the riser, for a total of 1732 addresses I1 = – OUT
I2 = –
OUT
I3 = –
Interface
ART.F422
I4 = 3
M = 2 F422
Warnings: IN
In the main riser it is possible to install control

devices configured to send GROUP or GENERAL LOCAL BUS
controls to some or all of the actuators situated in Automation system No. 4
174 addresses MaX.
the single systems and in the same main riser.

I1 = – OUT
I2 = –
POINT-POINT controls generated inside each
OUT
I3 = –
Interface
ART.F422
single system and on the main riser can reach I4 = 4

M = 2 F422
the actuators situated in the whole system only
IN
if they are sent from the appropriately configured
SPECIAL control device H/L4651M2, AM5831M2
situated on the main riser or on one of the single
systems (max 9) connected. Automation system No. 9

extended systeM with
interfAce f422 And weB
serVer
special systems for which the using one or more Web servers f454 case the extended system is made up
availability of more than 1739 and a lAn network which forms the of two or more systems for each of
addresses is required can be made connection infrastructure which a maximum of 1739 addresses
referring to the picture below, in this can be configured the centralised
control of the functions is obtained
LOCAL BUS through Personal Computer,
Automation system No. 1 Main riser connecting directly to the Web server
OUT
1739 addresses MaX.
Control
OUT
ART.F422
Interface fixed iP address and working on Web

F422 pages with preconfigured icons
IN
LOCAL BUS
OUT
OUT
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
ART.F422
Interface
C1 C2 F422
IN Web Server
ETHERNET
F454
SYSTEM 1
SCS AI SCS AV
BUS
PC
LOCAL BUS
Automation system No. 1 Main riser
OUT
1739 addresses MaX.
OUT
Control ART.F422
Interface
F422
IN
LOCAL BUS
OUT
OUT
1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2
ART.F422
Interface
C1 C2 F422
IN
Web Server
ETHERNET
F454
SYSTEM 2
LAN
SCS AI SCS AV
network
BUS
LOCAL BUS
Automation system No. 1 Main riser
OUT
1739 addresses MaX.
OUT
Control ART.F422
Interface
F422
IN
LOCAL BUS
OUT
OUT
1 2 3 4
ART.F422
Interface ETHERNET
Web Server
F422
ART. F411/2
C1 C2
F454
IN
SYSTEM 3
SCS AI SCS AV
BUS

Wiring diagrams
Lighting management
Diagram 1 SWITCHING ON/OFF OF 2 LAMPS FROM 4 LIGHT POINTS WITH GENERAL ON/OFF CONTROL
N
230 Vac
L
L1 L2
L4671/1 ON
A = 1 L4671/1 ON
A = 1
PL = 1 PL = 2
M = O/I M = O/I
E46ADCN G1 = – G1 = –
OFF G2 = – OFF G2 = –
230 Vac BUS BUS

To other devices
L4652/2 ON
A = GEN L4652/2 A = 1
ON ON
PL1 = – PL1 = 1
GEN M = O/I M1 = O/I
A2 = 1
OFF OFF OFF PL2 = 2
M = O/I
Diagram 2 automatic switching on of the light with passive infrared ceiling sensor
N
230 Vac
L
3475 L L1
A = 1
1 1
PL = 1
E46ADCN ART. 3475
230V ˜ M = –
2A cosϕ = 0,6
2A G = –
230 Vac BUS

To other devices
A = 1 L4652/2 For other

BMSE1001 PL = 1
ON
M = –
functions
A1 = 1
S = 1 PL1 = 1
T = 6 M1 = O/I
OFF
The device controls the load with the address indicated in A and PL. When a movement is detected, if the lighting level is lower than the set level, the device switches the assigned load on,
and keeps it on until the time set with the configurator connected to T expires. The PIR movement sensor sensitivity is set with the configurator connected to S. For correct operation the
sensor Lighting set point must be defined (see procedure). If the user switches the light off manually with a control device, the movement sensor is disabled until a presence is detected, for
a time set in T.

diAgrAM 3 switching on And off of one lAMp And rolling shutter control using An ActuAtor control
N
230 Vac
L
L1
L2
A1 = 1 A = 1 ON
E46ADCN PL1
M1
=
=
1

M PL
M
=
=
2
O/I
N
A2 = 1 G1 = –
PL2 = 2 L2 G2 = – OFF
M2 = O/I
L4671M2(*) L4671/1
230 Vac BUS
To other
devices
*Complete the device with key covers as per the drawing: ON
Shutter Light
control control
OFF
diAgrAM 4 wire systeM extension with rAdio control to MAnAge two lAMps
230 V ac N
L
F411/1N A = 1 F411/1N A = 1
PL = 1 L1 PL = 2 L2
M = – M = –
E46ADCN 1 2 3
F411/1N G1 = –
1 2 3
F411/1N G1 = –
G2 = – G2 = –
C1
G3 = – C1
G3 = –
230 Vac To other

devices of the
Wire Automation
system
L4578 (*) A = 9
PL = 8
M = –
L4597N A =1
PL1 = 1
PL2 = 2
Note: Replacing actuator F411/1N with actuator dimmer F414 and F414/127 the lamp brightness can be adjusted as well
Note (*): assign an address not used for other Automation devices. The interface can manage up to 36 radio control devices.

Wiring diagrams
Management of different loads

Diagram 5 SWITCHING-ON control for bathroom light and fan with delayed SWITCHING-OFF
230 Vac N
L
Bathroom
M fan
Bathroom
light
F411/1N A = 3 F411/1N A = 3
PL = 1 PL = 1
1 2 3 M = 2 1 2 3
M = SLA
F411/1N G1 = – F411/1N G1 = –
G2 = – G2 = –
E46ADCN C1
G3 = –
C1
G3 = –
230 Vac
BUS To other
devices
L4652/2 ON
A = 3
PL = 1
The ON control turns on the light and the fan at the same time. M = O/I
The OFF control turns off the light whereas the fan turns off after 2 OFF
minutes (configurator in M=2 of the Master actuator)
Diagram 6 motor control in direct current for motorised curtains (example 24 V d.c.)
24 Vdc M
+ +
F411/2 A = 3 F411/2 A = 3
PL1 = 1 PL1 = 1
1 2 3 4
PL2 = 1 1 2 3 4
PL2 = 1
ART. F411/2
G = – ART. F411/2
G = –
M = – M = SLA
C1 C2 C1 C2
E46ADCN 230 Vac
BUS
230 Vac
To other
devices
L4652/2 For other

functions
A = 3
It is possible to use direct current motors with other features (12 - 24 - 48 V d.c.) by replacing PL = 1
the compatible power supply unit with the features of the motor (voltage and current), thus M = 
verifying the absorptions of the motor with the actuator relay capacity (F411/2).

Window and shutter management
Diagram 7 motor control in alternated current for rolling shutters, curtains or motorised shutters
N
230 Vac N N N
L
L1-N = clockwise rotation M1 M2 M3

L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
L2-N = anticlockwise rotation
M = AC motor F411/2 A = 2 F411/2 A = 2 F411/2 A = 2
PL1 = 1 PL1 = 2 PL1 = 3
with 2 windings PL2 = 1 PL2 = 2 PL2 = 3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART. F411/2 G = – ART. F411/2 G = – ART. F411/2 G = –

M = – M = – M = –
E46ADCN C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2
230 Vac
BUS To other
devices
L4652/3 A = 2 L4652/2 A = GEN

PL1 = 1 PL = –
A2 = 2 GEN M = 
PL2 = 2
A3 = 2
PL3 = 3
M = 
Diagram 8 motor control in alternated current for opening/closing motorised shutters
M1 M2
N Ap C ˜ Ch Ap C ˜ Ch
230 Vac
L
F411/4 A = 2
PL1 = 1
1 2 3 4 5 PL2 = 1
PL3 = 1
E46ADCN
ART. F411/4
PL4 = 1
C1 C2 C3 C4
M = 1
230 Vac
BUS To other
devices
M1 = motor controlling the internal rabbet shutter

M2 = motor controlling the external rabbet shutter
PL1 and PL2 = contacts: must be interlocked to each other and must always be fitted to L4652/2 For other
the internal rabbet shutter
functions
PL3 and PL4 = contacts: must be interlocked to each other and must always be fitted to A = 2
the external rabbet shutter PL = 1
M = 

Wiring diagrams
Management of dimmer lamps

Diagram 9 SWITCHING ON AND OFF AND brightness ADJUSTMENT OF fluorescent lamps
By means of the “ballast”
N N
230 Vac
L L
+
F413 A = 2
PL1 = 1
M = –
Ballast 1 2 NC 3 4
-+
0-10V
G = –
ART. F413N
N L - + C1
E46ADCN
230 Vac To other

BUS devices
For other
L4652/2 ON
functions
A1 = 2
PL1 = 1
OFF
M1 = O/I
Diagram 10 SWITCHING ON AND OFF AND brightness ADJUSTMENT OF incandescence lamps,

halogen and ferromagnetic transformers
N
230 Vac
L
Incandescence lamps,
DIN halogen and ferromagnetic
dimmer transformer
actuator L
T5H 250V
0245 06
E46ADCN
F414
230V~ 50Hz 60 1000VA
A = 1
PL = 2
¤
A PL M G
M = –
G = –
230 Vac
BUS To other
devices
For other
L4652/2 ON functions
A1 = 1
PL1 = 2
OFF
M1 = O/I

Lighting and shutter management
Diagram 11 LIGHTING AND SHUTTER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM – 100 M2 HOME
The following pages give a Functions performed by the system: Dimmer light control point in the

description of an Automation Light general control.
living room and the bedrooms.
system used for lighting and Shutters general control.
Central control using the Touch

shutter management in a home of Control of light points in each
Screen installed in the living room.
approximately 100 m2, consisting of room. Recalling of scenarios with Local

living room, kitchen, two bedrooms Control of shutters in each room.
Display in the two bedrooms.
and two bathrooms.
Distribution components in the single rooms ITEM

1 lighting general control (1) H4652/2
1 shutter general control (2) H4652/2
Hall
1 ceiling light point controlled by flush mounted actuator (3) H4671/1
1 control (4) for the corridor light point H4652/2
Corridor 2 ceiling light points controlled by flush mounted actuator and 8 other points (4 - 6 - 7 - 9 - 13 - 22 - 28) H4671/1
1 ceiling light point controlled from one point (7) and by H4652/2
a 1 relay actuator in the DIN module (*) F411/1N
KITCHEN
1 motorised shutter controlled from 1 point (8) and by H4652/2
a 2 relay actuator in the DIN module (*) F411/2
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (11) with light intensity adjustment and by H4652/2
1 dimmer actuator in DIN module (*) F415
1 ceiling light point controlled from two points (9 - 11) and by H4652/2
LIVING ROOM a 1 relay actuator in the DIN module (*) F411/1N
1 Touch Screen (12) H4890
1 ceiling light point controlled from one point (13) and by H4652/2
a 1 relay actuator in the DIN module (*) F411/1N
BATHROOM 1
1 ceiling light point controlled from 3 points (16 - 17 - 18) with light intensity adjustment and by H4652/2
ROOM 1 1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (17) H4652/2
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (18) and by H4652/2
1 control (20) for the Corridor Light Point H4652/2
1 Local Display (19) HS4891
1 ceiling light point controlled from 3 points (22 - 23 - 24) with light intensity adjustment and by H4652/2
ROOM 2 1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (23) H4652/2
1 wall light point controlled from 1 point (24) and by H4652/2
1 control (26) for the Corridor Light Point H4652/2
1 Local Display (25) HC4685
NOTE: All the controls must be completed with support, cover plate and key covers for the desired civil series. These can be found in the BTicino General Installation catalogue.
For this specific example products of the AXOLUTE civil series have been used.
NOTE (*): All the actuators in DIN module are installed on the 54 module home automation panel in the hall.
Home automation panel DIN MODULES Home automation panel DIN MODULES
1 SCS power supply 3 DIN dimmer
8 12
12 DIN actuators 1 scenario module

24 2
Total 46

WirinG DiAGrAMs
lighting and shutter management
HALL CORRIDOR KITCHEN
F420 F411/1N
A1 = – H4671/1 H4671/1 A = 3
E46ADCN PL = 1 ART.F411/1
PL = 1
ART.F420 ON A1 = 1 ON A1 = 2
PL = 1 PL = 1
M1 = O/I M1 = O/I
OFF OFF
3 5
230 Vac
H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2

A1 = GEN A = GEN A1 = 2 A1 = 2 ON ON
A1 = 3
ON ON ON
M = O/I M =  PL1 = 1 PL1 = 1 PL1 = 1
GEN
M = O/I M = O/I M1 = O/I
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
A2 = 2
PL2 = 1
1 2 4 6 7 M2 = O/I
ROOM 2
F415 F411/2 F411/2

L A = 8 A = 8 1 2 3 4 A = 8
PL = 1 PL1 = 2 PL1 = 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART.F415 1 2 3 4 ART.F411/2
PL2 = 3 PL2 = 4
ART.F411/2
H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2

ON A = 2 A = – ON ON A1 = 8 ON ON A1 = 8 ON A = 8 A = 8
PL1 = 1 PL1 = 1 PL1 = 3 PL1 = 2 PL1 = 1 PL1 = 4
M = O/I M = 4 M1 = O/I M1 = O/I M1 = O/I M1 = 
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
FUN = 1 A2 = 8 A2 = 8
26 25 24 PL2 = 1 23 PL2 = 1 22 21
M2 = O/I M2 = O/I
NOTE: for the configuration of bathroom 2 refer to bathroom 1, configuring for all the devices room A=6

KITCHEN LIVING ROOM BATHROOM
M M M
F411/2 F411/1N F415 F411/2 F411/1N F411/2

1 2 3 4 A = 3 A = 4 L A = 4 1 2 3 4 A = 4 A = 5 1 2 3 4 A = 5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
PL = 1
1 2 3 4
ART.F411/2 PL1 = 2 ART.F411/1

PL = 1 ART.F415
PL = 2 ART.F411/2
PL1 = 3 ART.F411/1 ART.F411/2 PL1 = 2
PL2 = 2 PL2 = 3 PL2 = 2
H4890 H4652/2
H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2
A1 = 3 ON ON A1 = 4 A1 = 4 ON
ON A1 = 4 ON ON A1 = 5 A1 = 5
PL1 = 2 PL1 = 1 PL1 = 3 PL1 = 2 PL1 = 1 PL1 = 2
M =  M1 = O/I M =  M1 = O/I M1 = O/I M = 
A2 = 2 A2 = 4 A2 = 2
PL2 = 1 PL2 = 1 PL2 = 1
8 9 M2 = O/I 10 11 M2 = O/I
13 M2 = O/I
14
12
ROOM 1
F415 F411/2 F411/2

A = 7
L
A = 7
1 2 3 4
A = 7
PL = 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
PL1 = 4
1 2 3 4
PL1 = 2
ART.F415 ART.F411/2
ART.F411/2
PL2 = 3 PL2 = 4
H4652/2 HS4891 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2

ON A1 = 2 A = – ON ON A1 = 7 ON ON A1 = 7 ON A = 7 A = 7
PL1 = 1 PL1 = 1 PL1 = 3 PL1 = 2 PL1 = 1 PL1 = 4
M = O/I M = 4 M1 = O/I M1 = O/I M1 = O/I M1 = 
FUN = 1 A2 = 7 A2 = 7
20 19 18 PL2 = 1 17 PL2 = 1 16 15
M2 = O/I M2 = O/I

172 MY HOME Burglar alarm
CONTENTS
MY HOME – Burglar alarm
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Start-up and testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Burglar alarm MY HOME 173

GEnEral fEaturES
Professional safety
the MY HOME burglar-alarm as for all the MY HOME system, the RADIO EXPANSION
system is a safe and effective alarm wiring of the of the burglar-alarm By integrating the radio interface
system for the protection of people system is based on BuS technology with the BuS system it is possible to
and their belongings, capable of all the devices are therefore expand the burglar-alarm system
detecting any intrusions, promptly connected using a non-polarised 2 with radio detection and control
notifying the event by means of wire cable this features allows to devices a range of optional functions
sound and visual alarms, and by share information with the other MY also become available:
sending telephone messages the HOME BuS functions, and obtain technical alarms - using a specific

system includes a central unit that advanced applications sensor, it is possible to perform
can be programmed for control flood control of the room
and supervision of the system, WIDE RANGE OF SOLUTIONS remote assistance - to assure

management and control devices, Central unit with integrated PStn
peace of mind and prompt
volumetric sensors (ir technology or GSM communicator, managing assistance for people in difficulties
or dual ir+MW technology), for the up to 72 sensors in 8 areas radio control – it is also possible to

internal protection of the house, and transponder connectors, radio
integrate a radio remote control, for
perimeter sensors for the protection of wave connectors, infrared and radio arming and disarming
doors and windows numeric code connectors
By integrating special devices, the Wired or radio devices

system can also perform "safety" technical alarm management

functions, such as remote assistance ademco Contact iD communication

for old people, and the protection of protocol management
the house from gas or water leaks
Outdoor siren Central unit with PSTN or gSM communicator
Power supply
230 Vac
BuS
Basic contact Magnetic

IR+MW sensor IR sensor interface contacts

INTEGRATION WITH OTHER MY
RADIO DEVICES BuS MY HOME SYSTEM
HOME SYSTEMS
using a special interface, the burglar- Remote control
Automation
alarm system can be easily integrated
with other MY HOME systems, to
obtain the following:
advanced applications resulting

from the synergy among the
individual systems (for example Radio perimeter
detector
automatic switch-on of the lights
following a burglar-alarm event);
local central management or

remote central management via
the internet, using the MY HOME
WEB portal of the system
IMQ ALARM CERTIFICATION FOR Central management

LEvEL 2 DEvICES Radio volumetric
the Bticino burglar- presence detector
alarm system
offers solutions for each protection
requirement: from the minimum
protection limit required in an
apartment, to the most stringent
levels offered by professional systems
Keypad connector with display
Radio receiver
SCS/SCS
interface
BuS
To any other systems
Key ring badge

transponder
Badge transponder Transponder connector Keypad connector

GEnEral fEaturES
advanced functions: the safety of the home and of people

the burglar-alarm system WATER OR GAS LEAK ALARM REMOTE ASSISTANCE
represents the basic infrastructure Water or gas leak detection with Forwarding of assistance request by
for alarm management, but the message forwarding and immediate calling personal numbers.
set of applications which can shut-off of the water or gas piping. Old, disabled or recovering people
be implemented can easily be By integrating a water or gas sensor may send an assistance request
expanded in fact the burglar-alarm with the burglar-alarm system, using a portable remote control
system can be used to ensure the in case of such a danger event the signal transmitted is detected
protection of people and their occurring, the burglar-alarm system by a radio receiver connected to the
belonging from dangerous events activates a solenoid valve that orders burglar-alarm system, which activates
such as gas leaks, flooding, etc with the shutting-off of the water or gas an indoor siren, and the telephone
alarm notifications (also remotely distribution network at the same communicator of the central unit,
through telephone messages) time an indoor siren will be activated, which forwards the assistance
Below are some examples: while a burglar-alarm central unit request to the set number(s)
communicator will forward a
telephone alarm message
TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT

WATER OR gAS LEAK ALARM REMOTE ASSISTANCE
Indoor siren
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia automazione
lan controllo
antifurto carichi termoregolazione
luci controllo
tv
Indoor siren
(optional)
Relay actuator
Radio receiver
Radio receiver
Flooding
detector
Radio control for

remote assistance

PANIC ALARM ANTI-BURGLARY ALARM
in case of suspected noises inside in case of danger, it is possible to
the home, the owner can manually activate the burglar-alarm system
activate the burglar-alarm system for sending a remote assistance
to generate an alarm signal if the request through the central unit
system is armed all the sirens will communicator the activation does
activate to confuse any intruders not generate a sound alarm, thus
at the same time, the telephone allowing the police force to surprise
communicator of the central unit will the burglar, who is not aware that the
also send a remote assistance request call has been made
if the system is not armed only the
indoor siren will activate (if present),
while the communicator will forward
TV/SAT IPTV
the request for assistance ANTI-BuRgLARY ALARM
Indoor siren (optional)
PANIC ALARM
TV/SAT IPTV
Technical alarm Technical alarm
interface interface
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia
N.C. pushbutton
N.C. pushbutton
STOP & GO: TELEPHONE

SIGNALLING OF TRIPPING OF
THE GENERAL CIRCUIT BREAKER
By connecting SalVaVita StOP&GO the SalVaVita StOP&GO device the burglar-alarm system will no
to the burglar-alarm system using a automatically closes the tripped longer try to reinstate the power
special interface, it is possible to receive circuit breaker, reinstating the power supply, but will forward a message
a telephone message in case of tripping supply in fully safe conditions
Stop & go circuit breaker
of the circuit breaker due to storm, However, if the fault remains, due to
electric disturbance, or system fault an insulation defect or line overload,
TV/SAT IPTV
STOP & gO
Technical alarm
interface
Control interface
diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www

GEnEral fEaturES
advanced functions:
integration with other MY HOME functions
By sharing the same means of therefore be managed also using a the house in practice, when the
information transmission (BuS pair), remote PC and the internet Below doors or windows of a room are
the MY HOME applications can be are some examples: opened, the heating system of
easily integrated with each other to By integrating the burglar-alarm
the temperature control zone of
optimise functions and to generate system to the automation system that room is automatically turned
new ones, thus meeting new it is possible to automatically off the opening and closing of
requirements switch on all the lights of the home doors and windows is detected by
in this respect, the Burglar-alarm following an intrusion event the burglar-alarm system contact
system can be easily integrated with automatic disabling of the heating
interface, which reads the status
the automation or Video door entry system of the nC contact installed on the
system using a special interface f422 By integrating the burglar-alarm door or window, and sends the
Of course by using several interfaces system with the heating system, information to the temperature
it will be possible to create fairly it is possible to set a particularly control system for the appropriate
complex systems, through the useful function, which can bring actions
integration of the burglar-alarm in important energy savings, by
system with other systems with avoiding unwanted dispersion of
different functions (sound system, heat to the outside, for example
temperature control, etc ), which can when changing the air inside
COuRTESY LIgHTS MANAgEMENT TV/SAT

AuTOMATIC DISABLINg OF THE HEATINg
IPTV SYSTEM
Magnetic contact
diffusione sonora antifurto Interface

TV/SAT IPTV
Opening of
TV/SAT IPTV
window
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione Interface

videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia
general TV/SAT IPTV

light control
Control interface

System devices
the pages that follow show the main Customisation of users

Managing scenarios

devices making up the MY HOME the central unit can be programmed it is possible to define up to 16
burglar alarm system for the full list, to allow access inside the house scenarios to activate, with one single
refer to the “Catalogue” section based on two criteria that can be operation, the burglar-alarm system
customised by the user; by time for the areas of the home that need
BURGLAR-ALARM CENTRAL UNIT band, and by type of area protecting
available in two versions: time band: access in protected areas it is also possible to associate a
With telephone communicator,
is only allowed at certain times for certain scenario to each individual
PStn or PStn/GSM; example, the maid is given a key that key
Without telephone
disables the burglar-alarm system
communicator each tuesday between 9 00 o'clock
this is the device at the heart of and 12 00 o'clock Base central unit
the burglar-alarm system, capable area: access inside the house is
of managing up to 72 sensors in 8 only permitted in some areas for
areas, and recognise up to 50 keys example, the gardener is given a key
for the arming/disarming of the that only gives him access to the tool
system using the large display, the room
user can control the system status,
set advanced operating modes,
such as user customisation, scenario
Central unit with PSTN or gSM telephone communicator
management and activation of
Protected areas
advanced functions resulting from
the integration with other MY HOME
systems
it's also preset for the ademco
Contact iD function, for forwarding
telephone messages to vigilance
System state
bodies following a burglar-alarm or
technical alarm event
Night scenario: total protection of the day area and perimeter protection of the house. Work scenario: complete protection of the house.
LEgEND
Perimeter protection
Day area IR protection
Night area IR protection

GEnEral fEaturES
Control and protection devices
ACTIvATORS Keypad connector with display
these devices can be used to arm/

disarm the system by entering a
numeric code or using a transponder
key
using the keypad connector with Transponder key reader
display it is also possible to select
the areas of the house that need
protecting (separation), and to
know the system status through the
information shown on the display
Radio remote control with built-in

CONTACT INTERFACES transformer
for the connection to the burglar-
alarm system of normally closed (nC)
or normally open (nO) magnetic
contacts for the protection of doors
and windows
DIN contact
interface
IR barriers
IR SENSOR
for the protection of the areas of the
house
BASIC contact
available in two versions:
interface With ir sensor

With ir sensor and MW
IR+MW sensor
(microwave) sensor
for the protection of doors and
windows, ir barriers are also
available, in lengths between 0 5
and 2 metres
Note: For the full list of all the available devices refer to the “Catalogue” section.

Devices for radio expansion and technical alarms
IR SENSOR AND RADIO Window-breaking
radio detectors
MAGNETIC CONTACT
Battery powered, these devices can
be used to protect rooms where no
BUS wiring is present.
Radio IR sensor
WIRE-RADIO INTERFACE Wire-radio

It allows integration with the wired interface
burglar-alarm system of radio
technology devices, such as the radio
remote control in the previous page,
and the devices listed below.
DEVICES FOR TECHNICAL

ALARMS
This family includes devices such as:
 The radio control, to send an
assistance request;
 The radio sensor, to detect the
Radio control
presence of water; for Remote assistance
 The Auxiliary channel interface, for
integrating gas and water sensors Radio water sensor
with the burglar-alarm system;
 The Basic module contact
interface.

GEnEral fEaturES
System selection criteria

today the wire burglar-alarm system of structure to be made safe and the area to be protected

can satisfy any installation needs in functions required alarm modes

the home the criteria should thus be four factors are to be considered Protections

indicated for a correct choice of the when choosing a system System control

components, depending on the type
AREA TO bE PROTECTED
AVAILAbLE CENTRAL UNIT WITH PSTN CENTRAL UNIT WITH PSTN/

bASE CENTRAL UNIT
FUNCTIONS COMMUNICATOR gSM COMMUNICATOR
L/N/NT4600/4
Polyx Alarm Polyx Alarm

3485B HC/HD/HS4601 3485 3486
L/N/NT4601
Maximum number of
36 36 36 72 72
sensors
Maximum division
4 4 4 8 8
into zones (areas)
SYSTEM CONTROL
WITH IR REMOTE CONTROL (ONLY WITH

WITH RADIO REMOTE CONTROL WITH TRANSPONDER WITH NUMERIC CODE
CENTRAL UNIT L/N/NT4600/4 AND 3486)
HC/HD/HS4604, L/N/
HC/HD/HS/L/N/ HC/HD/HS4607, L/N/ HC/HD/HS4606, L/N/
NT4604
NT4618 NT4607, AM5787 NT4606, AM5786
Activator
Radio receiver Transponder reader Keypad connector
HC/HD/HS4603/4 HC/HD/HS4607/4
348220 Radio remote L/N/NT4603/4 L/N/NT4607/4
control IR divider AM5787/4
Divider transponder
4050 3530S, 3540

Remote control Badge, key-ring
HC/HD/HS4608
L/N/NT4608
Keypad connector with
display

PROTECTIONS
AREA CONTROL PERIMETER CONTROL
Fixed sensitivity Variable sensitivity Sensors + Barriers Detectors
3510 FLUSH mounted magnetic

detector
Swivel IR Fixed IR (distance 3 – 9m)

(distance 6 m) HC/HD/HS4610
L/N/NT4611B L/N/NT4610 3516 Window breaking detectors
AM5791B AM5790 3514 Cable detector for shutters
3511 Visibly
magnetic detector
3513 Magnetic detector for metal

main doors
Wall mounting IR Wall mounting

Wall mounting IR 3444 Window-breaking radio 3445 Cable radio detector for rolling
(distance 3 – IR (distance 4 –
(distance 6 m) detectors shutters
9 m) 12 m)
N4640B
N4640 3440
3512 Magnetic detector for swing
doors
3510M Brass FLUSH mounted

magnetic detector
Dual-technology (distance 10 m) Swivel IR (distance 3 – 9 m)

3442 Radio opening detector
HC/HD/HS4613 HC/HD/HS4611 3518, 3518/50, 3518/150, 3519
L/N/NT4613 L/N/NT4611 IR barriers for windows
AM5791
Brass FLUSH mounted magnetic
detector 3510PB

GEnEral fEaturES
ALARM MODES
OPTION1 – back-up battery in the outdoor siren Option2 - back-up battery in the switchboard
POWER SUPPLY OUTDOOR SIREN INDOOR SIREN POWER SUPPLY OUTDOOR SIREN INDOOR SIREN
E46ADCN HC/HD/HS/ E47ADCN HC/HD/HS/

4072L N/NT4070 4072A N/NT4070
Only outdoor siren
Outdoor and Indoor siren
Only indoor siren
Central unit with

communicator
No siren
Polyx Alarm
3486 3485
Warning: if both internal and external sirens are installed, tampering with the system when disarmed will only cause the indoor siren to go off.
ACTIVATION OF THE ALARM DEVICES DEPENDINg ON THE STATUS OF THE SYSTEM AND THE DANgER EVENT
SYSTEM ARMED
Alarm event Indoor siren Outdoor siren 4072A Outdoor siren 4072L Relay actuator 3479 and Telephone communicator of Internal relay of the 3485B
(without internal back-up (with internal back-up F481 (1) the 3485 and 3486 central and L/N/NT4601 central
battery) battery) units units (2)
Burglar Rings Rings Rings Activates Calls Activates
Tamper Rings Rings Rings Activates Calls Activates
Tamptest Rings Rings Rings Activates Calls Activates
Anti-panic Rings Rings Rings Activates Calls Activates
Silence (burglar alarm) Does not ring Does not ring Does not ring Does not Calls Does not
activate activate
Note (1): configure the device in MOD=0 (siren status repetition) to enable the operation described in the table.
Note (2): The relay contacts can be used to connect a third party optical/luminous alarm diffuser, or a telephone communicator.

SYSTEM DISARMED
Alarm event Indoor siren Outdoor siren 4072A Outdoor siren 4072L Relay actuator 3479 and Telephone communicator of Internal relay of the 3485B
(without internal back-up (with internal back-up F481 (1) the 3485 and 3486 central and L/N/NT4601 central
battery) battery) units units (2)
Tamper Rings Does not ring Does not ring Activates Forwarding of event Activates
notification message
Tamptest Does not ring Does not ring Does not ring Does not activate Forwarding of event Does not activate
Notification Notification Notification notification message
in central units with display, in central units with display, in central units with display,
or LED notification in central or LED notification in central or LED notification in central
unit L/N/NT4601 unit L/N/NT4601 unit L/N/NT4601
Tampering (disconnection Rings Does not ring Does not ring Activates Forwarding of event Activates
of the central unit from the notification message
system)
Tampering (disconnection of Rings Rings Does not ring Does not activate Forwarding of event Does not activate
the siren from the system) notification message
Anti-panic Rings Does not ring Does not ring Activates Forwarding of assistance Activates
request message
Silence (burglar alarm) Does not ring Does not ring Does not ring Does not activate Forwarding of assistance Does not activate
It rings if the L/N/NT4600/4 It rings if the L/N/NT4600/4 It rings if the L/N/NT4600/4 request message
central unit is installed central unit is installed central unit is installed
Note (1): configure the device in MOD=0 (siren status repetition) to enable the operation described in the table.
Note (2): The relay contacts can be used to connect a third party optical/luminous alarm diffuser, or a telephone communicator.

GEnEral fEaturES

CENTRAL UNIT FUNCTION
in addition to the criteria explained in AUTOMATION WITH CENTRAL
entrusted with a key, which during
the previous pages, the selection of UNIT 3486 OR 3485. Switching on the above times deactivates the
the central unit can be made taking of all home lights. if the burglar- burglar-alarm system of the cellar
into account the possible available alarm system is integrated with the all other areas of the house are still
functions, such as: automation system, it can be set protected by the burglar-alarm
KEYS ONLY OPERATING DURING
in such a way that if burglar-alarm system, armed by the owner when
CERTAIN TIME BANDS event occurs, some or all the lights leaving the home for work
Enabling for the cleaning staff in of the house will come on, inducing AUTOMATION WITH CENTRAL

order to be able to do her job, the the burglar to leave UNIT 3485B. Activation of
maid has been given a key for the KEYS ONLY OPERATING IN
division scenario. Each time the
disarming of the burglar-alarm CERTAIN AREAS. Enabling access key is used (transponder, radio
system across the whole house, for the gardener. the cellar is remote control or numeric key)
but only between 9 00 o’clock and used to store gardening tools and to activate the system, a specific
12 00 o’clock, on normal working is made accessible by the owner division scenario will be activated
days During all other times and of the house every tuesday from
holidays the key does not operate 2 00 to 6 00 pm in order to do
his job, the gardener has been
CENTRAL UNIT FUNCTION

AVAILAbLE CENTRAL UNIT WITH PSTN CENTRAL UNIT WITH PSTN/
4 ZONE FLUSH-MOUNTED CENTRAL UNIT
FUNCTIONS COMMUNICATOR gSM COMMUNICATOR
L/N/NT4600/4
Polyx Alarm HC/HD/HS4601 Polyx Alarm 3486

3485B L/N/NT4601 3485
Max. no. of keys that
30 20 50 50
can be saved (1)
Key constraints (day/
NO NO SI SI
zone/time) (2)
Max. no. of scenarios NO 4 16 16
Max. no. of
NO 10 (see note 4) 20 (see note 3) 20 (see note 3)
automations
TiSecurity POLYX for the TiSecurity GSM for the
PC programming with
NO TiSecurity Basic for firmware update programming of parameters and programming of parameters and
software
firmware update firmware update
NOTE: (1) Keys are any control devices such as IR remote control, radio remote control, transponder key, and numeric key. (2) Each key can be set to only operate certain days of
the week, in certain areas, or during certain time bands. (3) If the system is integrated with other MY HOME systems, for example lights automation, it is possible to switch all
the lights of the house on, if a burglar-alarm system event occurs. (4) Of the 10 possible automations, one is activated using an auxiliary relay inside the central unit. The other
9 are combined to Arming, disarming, Date and Time events.

GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION
Project approach
The project of setting up a new MY ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS
HOME BURGLAR-ALARM system can Once the above information is Division into zones
be completed in two ways: available, the following must be For a better management of the

Functional – this is a good
agreed: sensors needed to protect the
compromise between cost and Selection of the protection: property, it is recommended that the
safety. The main priority is selecting Volumetric protection is normally
system is divided in at least 2 ZONES:
which functions to include, and the basic protection. This decision a perimeter and a volumetric zone
the possibility of making the must be made taking into account (up to 9 sensors per zone)
system ready for future expansion various aspects, with the main In properties with more than 2 rooms,

is also taken into account. This one being the actual location of the system should be divided into at
solution includes, for example, the property. For properties on least 4 ZONES:
both volumetric and perimeter the ground or 1st floor, perimeter 2 Perimeter ZONES (day/night areas) 2
protection. Advantages: high level protection and/or protection of the Volumetric ZONES (day/night areas)
of flexibility and increase in the rolling shutters, is recommended. In properties with several rooms,

value of the property. Perimeter protection is also or in villas, the system should be
Economical – based on an
recommended if “external” access divided into 4 ZONES or more.
economic, low cost installation It points near balconies are also If the system does not include an

does not exclude the use of the present (e.g. rain water pipes, external burglar-alarm arming /
different features offered by the gutters, nearby balconies or disarming device, a time delay
system, although it only calls for terraces). With perimeter protection, should fitted on the sensors
the use of one type of protection the system can also be armed when protecting the main entry.
(volumetric), and does not take into people or animals are inside the Otherwise, the “entrance” area
account future system expansions. property. should be kept as part ZONE 1, on
Advantages: low cost installation. which a time delay can be set as
In order to ensure a good work setup, standard.
the following elements are needed: Example of house split into 4 zones
Planimetry (absolutely necessary),

of the living unit, so that the
locations where the system Zone 4 - bedroom
elements are to be installed can be

defined beforehand. It would also
be appropriate to have a furniture
plan.
Definition of the protections,

necessary to define which system
Zone 3 - living room
devices to include (volumetric,
perimeter or combined protection),
and check that the protecting
devices actually cover the Zone 1 - entrance
Zone 2 - kitchen
appropriate areas.

System measurement
MAXIMUM REACHABLE
DISTANCES
The maximum number of devices availability of current based on the The maximum length of the

that can be connected to the BUS length of the cable. connections between the two
depends on the total absorption of During sizing ensure that the furthest-away devices must not be
the same and the distance between following rules are complied with: more than 175 metres.
the point of connection and the When two outdoor sirens are
The maximum length of the

power supply. installed the connection lines connections must not be more
The power supply can supply up to between siren and power than 350 metres
1.2 A (E46ADCN) or 1 A (E47ADCN); supply must be separate and the
the maximum number of devices will maximum length of each should
therefore be determined by the sum not be more than 100 metres,
of the absorptions of the individual while the sum of the two should
devices to be installed. not be more than 175 metres.
In calculating the absorptions it will
also be necessary to consider the
MAXIMUM BUS CABLE LENGTHS
A+ B = 175 m max
A = 100 m max
A+C = 175 m max
B = 100 m max
A + B + C = 350 m max
+ - C1 COM C2
12V
C1 C2
Note: During this check do not consider the connection between NC (normally closed) contacts and the corresponding interface module.

SYSTEMS WITH AND WITHOUT
Outdoor siren
Traditional burglar-alarm systems - The power supply unit and the
which require an outdoor siren as it battery are installed in wall mounted
is equipped with the back-up battery enclosures F115/8A and F115/8B
of the whole system - can sometimes which guarantee protection against
cause inconvenience to neighbours tampering attempts thanks to special
in case of an alarm, especially in self-protection systems.
condominium flats. BTicino gives The outdoor siren is now considered
you the opportunity to avoid this optional: However, if you want to
drawback by using a specific power install it, use siren 4072A.
supply unit instead of the power Warning: in order to install the devices and assure
supply E46ADCN. This power supply level 2 protection according to CEI 79-22 standard
unit can be used for connecting a use wall mounted boxes fitted with tampering and
back-up battery (not supplied). It tearing protection devices(to prevent units being
is easily available and necessary to pulled away).
power the system in case of power These boxes are also needed when installing Power supply
E47ADCN
failure from the mains. The battery contact interfaces F482, or batteries with sizes not
to be used with it must have the compatible with switchboards F115/8A.
following features: 12 V, 7,2 – 24 Ah.
TYPE OF SYSTEM
WITH OUTDOOR SIREN

REQUIRED
Power supply E46ADCN
Battery inside the siren
Siren 4072L 3505/12
WITH OUTDOOR SIREN

OPTIONAL
Power supply E47ADCN Battery 12 V
7.2/12/24 Ah
Siren 4072A
Note: the table summarises the combinations implement based on the type of system to create.

System measurement
CHECK ELECTRICAL
CONSUMPTIONS
After checking the length of the if you use the E46ADCN power
if you use the E47ADCN power

connections, it is necessary to supply unit and the absorption supply unit, you will only need
determine the sum of the total is less than 150mA, you will only to install a 7.2 Ah, 12 Ah or 24
currents absorbed by the devices need to install a siren 4072L; if the Ah battery. The following chart
installed. This verification will absorption is higher than 150mA, indicates the maximum absorption
determine whether it is necessary to it will be necessary to install 2 required by the system, according
equip the system with 1 or 2 outdoor sirens 4072L; However, the total to the battery installed and to
sirens or the type of battery to use. absorption must not exceed the level of autonomy required.
This is necessary in order to provide 300mA. For both cases, a 24 hour However, the maximum absorption
the most complex system with a duration is guaranteed. must not exceed 700 mA. The
minimum required autonomy of 24 maximum consumptions of the
hours, at a temperature of –25°C in self-powered devices have already
case of power failure from the mains. been deducted from the maximum
current that can be supplied by the
power supply unit.
MAXIMUM CURRENT DELIVERED TO THE DEVICES ON THE BUS WITH POWER Tables of unit absorptions
SUPPLY E47ADCN DEVICE Absorbed current
AUTONOMY IN CASE OF 4 zone central unit 25 mA
Type of battery installed
LACK OF NETWORK Central unit 3486 50 mA (stand-by) – max 120 mA
Central unit 3485 55 mA (stand-by) – max 90 mA
7.2 Ah 12 Ah 24 Ah
Central unit 3485B; HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601 50 mA
24 h 110 mA (*) 190 mA (*) 380 mA Activator 8 mA
Transponder reader 12 mA
15 h 180 mA 300 mA 600 mA
Zone divider 1 – 4; Zone divider 1 to 4 transponder 15 mA
8h 340 mA 560 mA 700 mA
5 - 8 zone expander 10 mA
(*) In this case the system complies with level 2 of the CEI 79-2 standard.
Disconnector with key 5 mA
Keypad connector with display 28 mA
Keypad connector 5.5 mA
Fixed sensitivity IR detector; Passive IR detector;
4.5 mA
Passive IR articulated detector
MAXIMUM CURRENT DELIVERED TO 12 V DEVICES WITH POWER SUPPLY E47/12
Dual-technology detector 5 mA – 35 mA **
(This power supply is used, for example, in IR barriers)
IR barriers 50 mA
AUTONOMY IN CASE OF Type of battery installed Contact interface 5 mA
LACK OF NETWORK
Contact interface - 12 V 5 mA *
7.2 Ah 12 Ah 24 Ah Contact interface - 2 DIN mod. 6 mA
Interface 3480 5 mA
24 h 300 mA (*) 500 mA (*) 1A Relay actuator 20 mA
15 h 480 mA 800 mA 1,6 A Technical alarm interface 6 mA

Radio receiver 15 mA
8h 900 mA 1.5 A 2A Indoor siren 8 mA
(*) In this case the system complies with level 1 of the CEI 79-2 standard. Outdoor siren 4072A 5 mA
Note: in order to ensure level 2 performances according to CEI 79-2 standard in case of lack of Interface F422 2 mA
network power supply, use batteries capable of ensuring system autonomy for at least 24 hours. Note:* Plus the absorption of the detector connected to it
** Consider: - 35mA for the first detector installed; 5 mA for all the others.

Each system can be made up of a minimum and maximum number of devices as shown in the following tables.
CENTRAL UNIT FOR MAX. 36 SENSORS
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9 C OK
0 P
L/N/NT4600/4, AM4600/4
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601 3485B
Minimum No. Maximum No. Minimum No. Maximum No. Minimum No. Maximum No.
KEYS
IR remote control 1 Not managed Not managed Not managed Not managed
Radio remote control 0 0 0
Transponder 0 MAX 30 in total 0 MAX 20 in total 0 MAX 20 in total
Numeric code 0 0 0
Activators and dividers

Keypad connector with display 0 0 0
Keypad connector 0 9 for each zone 0 – 4 0 9 for each zone 0 – 4 0 9 for each zone 0-4(total
(total 45) (total 45) 45)
Transponder reader or
0 0 0
Divider transponder
IR activator, zone 1-4 divider 0 9 (in total) Not managed Not managed Not managed Not managed
Disconnector with key 0 1 0 1 0 1
Detectors
9 for each zone 1-4 9 for each zone 1-4 9 for each zone 1-4
(IR and contact interface) 1 1 1
(total 36) (total 36) (total 36)
Technical alarm interface and actuator relay 0 9 0 9 0 9
9 for each zone 0-4 9 for each zone 0-4 9 for each zone 0-4
Radio receiver 0 0 0
(total 45) (total 45) (total 45)

System measurement
CENTRAL UNIT FOR MAX. 72 SENSORS
OK
CLEAR
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
3485 3486
Minimum No. Maximum No. Minimum No. Maximum No.
KEYS
IR remote control Not managed Not managed
Radio remote control 0
Transponder 0 MAX 50 in total 0 MAX 50 in total
Numeric code 0
Activators and dividers:

Keypad connector with display 0 0
Keypad connector 0 0
9 for each zone 0 – 8 (total 81) 9 for each zone 0 – 8 (total 81)
Transponder reader or
0 0
Divider transponder
IR activator, zone 1-4 divider

Not managed Not managed 0 9 in total
with 5-8 expansion unit
Disconnector with key 0 1 0 1
Detectors
9 for each zone 1 – 8 9 for each zone 1 – 8
(IR and contact interface) 1 1
(total 72) (total 72)
9 for each zone 1 – 8 9 for each zone 1 – 8

Technical alarm interface and actuator relay 0 0
(total 72) (total 72)
NUMBER OF SIRENS
Indoor siren
Outdoor siren
Minimum No. Maximum No. Minimum No. Maximum No.
3 (2 if a central unit with display is

E46ADCN Not managed Not managed 2 ( 4072L)
installed)
E47ADCN 0 3 (1) 0 2 ( 4072A)
NOTE (1): the total number of internal/outdoor sirens must not exceed 3. Example: 2 indoor sirens and one outdoor siren.

Example: apartment burglar-alarm system
100 m2 apartment on the ground through the physical barriers (rolling to ensure this flexibility, the
floor of an apartment complex, with shutters/window glass) without various sensors should be grouped
balcony and continuous vertical actually opening the door or window appropriately
protection parapet on one side in this case, the magnetic detector on in this case, the system can be
the main entry consists of a door, the opening would in fact be unable divided as follows:
while all french windows can be to generate the alarm magnetic contact and volumetric

considered as alternative accesses this type of setup would also give the detector for the living room: zone 1;
these access ways are all controlled user the possibility to customise the magnetic contacts for doors and

by magnetic contacts system to meet personal needs windows: zone 2;
in view of the position, it is this gives clear advantages on a daytime area volumetric detectors

recommended that volumetric management point of view (kitchen, studio): zone 3;
detectors are installed in all rooms, for example: sleeping area volumetric detector

thus increasing the level of safety perimeter protection can be used
(bedrooms, hallways, service
this will also make the system easier during the night; bathroom); zone 4;
to manage volumetric sensors can be armed,

it is recommended that volumetric whilst leaving perimeter sensors
systems are always installed, as disarmed, during short absences
the intruder may be able to break
Arrangement of the components and wiring layout
Study Bedroom
Kitchen
SYMBOL LEgEND
Activator
Bathroom C Burglar-alarm central unit
Hallway
Contact interface
Living room
IR sensor
Second Balcony
Magnetic contact
bathroom
Children Indoor siren
bedroom
Outdoor siren

Example: apartment burglar-alarm system

The power supply unit can be disturbed, and will be unable to hear During the installation of the system,
installed in the area of the electric the police force approaching. the job of the installer can be made
distribution board. An outdoor siren with optic diffuser easier by filling a “system card”,
The central u-itnit must be installed in shall also be installed outside on the including all the configuration
a protected area, that can be reached balcony, for easy identification from information in one document, as well
easily by the user. the outside, of the system in alarm as consumptions and positioning
In order to facilitate arming of the state. of the devices. The card will also
system, an auxiliary transponder When positioning the volumetric be useful after installation should,
arming device should also be sensors, it will be necessary to check for example the system need
included. the coverage area and comply extending. Detailed information on
If installation of the arming device with the recommendations of the the compiling and use of the “system
on the outside of the property is not following pages. card” can be found in the system
possible or desired, the activation of Using the system diagram, ensure manuals.
the volumetric sensor of the living that 24 hour autonomy is guaranteed
room should be delayed. On the with only one outdoor siren.
other hand, if the arming device
is installed outside, zone 1 will be
activated without delay.
The system will be completed by the
installation of an indoor siren in the
hallway area, so that the intruder will
be confused by the high noise, and
List of Items required

Description ITEM Consumption QuantitY
Central unit with dialling device 3486 50 mA 1
Transponder activator L4607 12 mA 2
Transponder 3540 4
Power supply E46ADCN 1
Jointed pass. IR detector L4611 4.5 mA 7
Contact interface 3480 5 mA 2
Outdoor siren 4072L 1
Indoor siren 4070 5 mA 1
Outdoor siren storage battery 3505/12 1
Indoor siren storage battery 3505/6 1
Anti-tamper device L4630 13
Magnetic contact * 8
Configurators 3501K 1
* item to be selected based on the doors and windows characteristics

installation of modular devices
IN FLUSH MOUNTED BOXES IN WALL MOUNTED BOXES
the wire burglar-alarm system is if the flush mounted box is different this series of boxes already has a
compatible with systems made using from the Bticino standard (box with supporting frame for the devices and
the axOlutE, liVinGliGHt and reduced depth, less than 52 mm), the liVinGliGHt boxes have white
MÀtix series and therefore uses the proceed as follows: completely cover plate When installing modular
same boxes, supporting frames and remove the tamper rod devices inside wall mounted boxes or
cover plates When using standard corner boxes proceed as follows:
flush mounted boxes (depth 52 mm) remove the cap (A) from the

embedded in the mortar level with bottom of the devices by rotating
the plaster/tile, or in any case where it 90°;
the maximum depth from the bottom Do not fit the clear protection

of the box to the finished wall is less < 52 mm cover (B)
than 60 mm, cut the tamper rod (1) fit the devices inside the wall
at the first reference notch, insert it in mounted (or corner) boxes
the appropriate housing, rotate it 90° in this case, the anti-tamper
Place the tip to the bottom of the box
and then remove it completely protection (C) is already on the box
without pushing too hard and cut the
Pay attention to ensure that the
rod level with the box insert the rod
tamper rod of the box fits perfectly
500 - 503E - 504E - 506L (1) protection device (tamper) in the
in the preset hole at the back of the
appropriate housing, rotate 90°, and
device
remove completely
90°
2
Warning: BTicino wall mounted boxes are suitable
ON
for installation of devices with level 1 performance.
IMPIANT O
1
OF F
52 mm < 60 mm For level 2 performance (CEI 79-2 standard) use the
1 90° box 502PA for angle installation.
2
1
ON
IMPIANT O
1
OF F
However, if the maximum depth from
< 52 mm
the bottom of the box to the finished B
wall plane is 60 mm, insert the 2
90°
appropriate rod protection device
fix the devices to the flush mounted
1
(tamper) in its housing (1), rotate it
boxes
90°, and remove it completely A
500 - 503E - 504E - 506L Warning: the use of the tamper rod for the protection
of FLuSH MOuNTED BOXES devices with BTicino C
1 supports is a necessary requirement to assure level

90°
2 protection in accordance with CEI 79-2 standard.
2
ON
For the selection of the flush mounted boxes see the
IMPIANT O
1
OF F general Installation Catalogue.
60 mm
3
Check that there is no damage at the bottom of
the box in the tamper rod working area. Take the
necessary measures to solve any problems.

Modular power supplies

All the power supplies are sold with Installation of power supply E47ADCN - Installation of power supply E46ADCN
“Tamper” device against the opening E47/12 These devices are installed inside
of the switchboard. These devices are installed inside the standard flush mounted or wall
Depending on the power supply switchboard F115/8A. mounted switchboards.
being used, two types of installations If required, install the back-up Warning: In order to assure level 2 performance
are possible. battery(ies) in the appropriate in accordance with CEI 79-2 standard, it will be
housing of the 7.2 Ah enclosure necessary to use flush mounted switchboards with
F115/8B. opening protection, or wall mounted switchboards
For batteries of higher capacity check with opening and tear protection. If the power
the compatibility with the F115/8B supply is installed in switchboards without door,
enclosure. When the N.C. contact is also ensure that it is not subjected to water sprays.
being used for additional tampering Ensure that the vents are not obstructed. A two-pole
protection of the battery, connect the thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact
90° contact on the F115/8B enclosure to a separation of at least 3 mm must be used, positioned
2
tamper line of the system. near the power supply. The function of the circuit
1
Warning: for batteries of sizes not compatible breaker is to disconnect and protect the power
90°
with F115/8B enclosures use the required DIN supply.

switchboard in the general BTicino catalogue. NOTE: For more information and for the wiring
In order to assure level 2 performance in accordance requirements refer to the instructions supplied with
with CEI 79-2 standard, it will be necessary to use the power supplies.
wall mounted switchboards with opening and
tear protection. If the power supply is installed in
switchboards without door, ensure that it is not
subjected to water sprays.
Battery
N.C. contact

Central unit with display
WALL MOUNTED INSTALLATION
after fixing the base and performing
all connections, install the central OF F
unit ensuring that the cables are ON
BUS
arranged in a way that they will not

be damaged NOTE Before installing
1
the burglar-alarm central unit
ensure that the sliding switch on the
back is in the ON position.
WARNINGS FOR ALL CENTRAL

UNITS 2
Warning: both in wall mounted

installation and in MultiBOx
switchboards, in order to ensure Wall mounted installation of 3485 or 3485B central units. This same method is also used for the installation of the
3486 central unit.
compliance with level 2 of CEi 79-2
standard, it will be necessary to use
the 3484 tamper for the protection of
the GSM antenna, as explained in the
installation manual of the central unit 1
impianto
on off
PROTECTION OF PSTN CENTRAL

UNITS FROM LIGHTNING 3
it is good practice to protect the
system from lightning by using surge
2
protective devices, SPD, belonging to
3
class ii
4
for the protection of burglar-alarm
central units 3485 and 3486 from 1
surges from the telephone line, the use

of the Plt1 device is recommended, impianto
connecting the corresponding earth Installation of the 3486 central unit inside a
on off
MuLTIBOX switchboard.
clamp to the "earth" reference of the
SPD limiter installed in the apartment
switchboard for further details refer
to the instructions supplied with the
central units or the relevant tECHniCal
SHEEtS
Local tamper T1
NOTE: the central units are supplied with the tamper line clamps (-/T1) circuited for the use of the local
tamper T1 (wall mounted installation with metal base). This is compulsory to ensure that the central
unit complies with level 2 of CEI 79-2 standards in terms of possible tampering (tear protection). For Tamper line (see note)
installations inside MuLTIBOX boxes ensure the connection of a NC circuit breaker to the -/T1 clamps for
the tamper function. For further information see the central unit installation manual.

IR detectors
ADJUSTABLE IR DETECTOR radio ir detector 3440 IR MINI DETECTOR N4640
HC/HS/L/N/NT4611 AND N4640B
In addition to the indications shown Two installation modes are possible: The base of the detector has a
for the installation of modular Wall mounted installation
particular shape that enables wall
devices, also take into account Angle installation
mounted installation in 4 different
that before installing the swivel IR modes:
Before permanently securing the object ensure that
sensor the adjustment fixing screw Wall mounted installation

the radio communication with the HC/HD/HS/L/N/
(1) at the back of the detector must Angle installation

NT4618 receiver is working correctly.
be loosened in order to allow the Front angle installation

detector to turn. Tilted angular installation

Note: the screw will be tightened after the “System
test” and protected zone check, thus setting the
central unit in “maintenance” mode.
Wall mounted installation Wall mounted installation
1 molla
tamper
Angle installation Angle installation
MOD
Note: for other installation modes see the instruction

leaflet.

Various sensors
LAYOUT FOR MAGNETIC FLOODING DETECTOR HA/ DETECTOR FOR SHUTTERS
CONTACTS HB/L/4619
During the installation of the Fix the device to the wall using Place the rope contact preferably
magnetic contacts, if a specific double sided adhesive tape or screws in the middle of the rolling shutter
underground conduit is not being and plugs. After completing the box and then fasten it. Then fasten
installed, ensure appropriate surface configuration fit the key covers using the end of the rope to the rolling
trunking up to the jambs of doors the spacers supplied. shutter with a screw. The rope can be
and windows. The wires of the Note: If the sensor cable needs shortening, cut the extended up to 3.4 m.
contacts will then have to be run to excess off and connect to the probe terminals. NOTE: The rope must be set between the window
the point on the door or window, and the rolling shutter. Check condition of rope and
where the sensor is being installed. its sliding movement periodically.
The contact wires have a reduced In order to prevent the rope from rubbing against
section, which will not cause any a sharp part of the rolling shutter, you can glue a
problems when refitting the jambs. square (not supplied) using double-sided adhesive
tape.
Magnetic
contacts
Key-cover
L/N/NT4919
Reset
Test
Led

Various sensors
piezoelectric window- RADIO MAGNETIC CONTACT 3442
breaking detector 3516/3444 The device must be installed inside
The detector must be applied to the the house, on doors and windows,
glazed part to be protected using the including sliding ones, and similar
special double-sided adhesive tape openings, as shown in the figure;
(supplied). the magnetic contact must be
The glazed part must be between 1.5 fixed in place using the appropriate
and 6 mm thick; the diagonal length position adjustment spacers, in order
must not exceed 3 m (Fig. 1). to activate the alarm as soon as the
movable part of the door or window
starts to move away.
1
Reference
tab
25 mm
min.
25 mm
min.
mm
3 m to 6
AX .5
M m1
f r o
ss
ne
ick
Th 3
4
Note: Clean and dry glasses before applying the detector. Note: To ensure correct positioning align the reference notches of the magnetic
Press hard to ensure optimum adhesion. contact of the transmitter

IR BARRIERS 3518 – 3518/50
3518/150 – 3519
the two columns must be installed Each column consists of: open (break) the cable passage
one in front of the other (fig 1) in the aluminium section bar
hole at the base of the unit
same direction (both terminal boards top terminal (base + cover + screw)
the terminal strips can be

placed at the top side or bottom side) Bottom terminal (base + cover +
temporarily removed to help cable
(fig 2); the height must be as close screw) connection
as possible to the ground or to the 4 screws + 4 screw anchors for wall
for the electric connection, refer to

lower part of the window (fig 3), with mounted the “Connection diagrams” section
no fixed or removable obstructions installation WARNINg: Do not use a shielded cable when
that may interfere with the rays follow the instructions on the connecting the barriers to the contact interface.
(fig 4) so that the receivers are not instructions leaflet, taking into
directly exposed to sunrays (fig 5) account the following requirements:
and are not exposed to the rays of the cable can be inserted from the

other transmitted, either directly or bottom (inside the wall), or from
by reflection the outside (exposed) in this case
fig. 1 fig. 2 fig. 3
fig. 4 fig. 5
RX
Note: for further information see the instruction leaflet supplied with the barriers

Outdoor siren
1. Remove the two screws (1) and take 4. Insert the screw plastic plugs into the 7. Put the battery (1) or 12V-12Ah
off the external cover (2). holes and partly tighten the top screws battery - into the special housing
(1) and the “tamper” screw (2). without connecting the Faston
terminals. Connect the electronic
1 card as shown in the instruction leaflet
2 supplied with the siren.
1
2 1
2. Remove the four screws (1) and pull

out the internal protection cover (2).
5. Adjust the “tamper” screw by using
1 the notch (1) on the drilling template,
as shown in the picture.
Warning: If the installation or the adjustment of
the tamper screw is carried out incorrectly, the
2 system will not work.
1
TEMPLATE
3. By using the drilling template (1),

position the hole (2) near the wire-
outlet pipe and scribe the 5 holes.
NOTE: use a Ø 6 mm bit for drilling the holes.
6. Attach the siren to the two top

screws (1). Tighten the two bottom
screws (2). Tighten the four screws
completely.
2
1
1

CONFIGURATION
General concepts
Configuring the devices of the perform special functions such as the CONNECTION / REMOVAL OF
burglar-alarm system means management of technical alarms (gas CONFIGURATORS
assigning them their respective leaks, floods, etc.) or alarm signalling Before configuring the devices
addresses and operating modes by means of auxiliary channels. remove the clear protection cover (1).
The address allows you to solely The address of the device is To facilitate connection or removal of
identify each device within the determined by assigning a value to the configurators use the appropriate
system; conversely, the operating the positions: tool (2).
modes are the specific functions Z to specify the number of the
performed by each device (central assigned zone (compulsory) of the
unit, detectors, sirens, etc.). device, if this belongs to the group
In addition to the typical functions of detectors. If the device belongs to
of any burglar-alarm system, such as the group of connectors, this position
the tripping delay of a detector or the must not be configured;
management of a balanced contact N to specify the progressive number
line, it is possible – through the (compulsory) of the device within the
configuration of the operating mode above-mentioned zone.
– to enable the devices in order to
1 2
Activator device Auxiliary devices

ZONE 0 ZONE 9
1 2 3
Z =0 Z =0 4 5 6 N = 1 N = 9
N =1 N =2 7 8 9
AUX = - AUX = -
0 P
MOD = - MOD = -
Central unit
1 – 9 max 1 – 9 max
BUS
Sensors
OK
CLEAR
1 2 3
4
7
5
8
6
9
ZONE 8
0
ZONE ...
ZONE 1
Z =1 Z =1
N =1 N =9
72 devices max.
1 – 9 max

Z
N°
AUX
Configuration
General concepts
Z
N°
AUX
Example of IR detector configuration. AUXILIARY CHANNELS

First sensor belonging to zone 2, with In addition to the typical functions, the three lanes and act accordingly,
pulse count function enabled. the devices of the My Home Burglar- based on their configuration.
alarm system can also perform a If the there is any information
range of functions independent connected to intrusion events, the
Configurator
Z position VALUE from the status of the burglar-alarm devices activate local signallings
N°
Z AUX
2 system itself (armed or disarmed). (sirens), or remote signallings
No. 1 This is possible thanks to a particular (telephone dialling devices); if on
MOD 1 communication channel of the the other hand the information
AUX none
burglar-alarm and automation relates to technical alarms, based
bus, called auxiliary channel, used on the set operating parameters,
by some devices (such as the the devices activate to generate
2 auxiliary channel interface or the alarm or prealarm signals, or to
Z
N° 1 radio receiver) for the transmission reinstate safety within the controlled
MOD
AUX
1 of information such as health environment. Some typical examples
emergency, robbery emergency etc. are the application for the automatic
In order to better clarify this concept, shutting off of the gas piping
the burglar-alarm system may be following the detection of natural
compared to a 3 lane road, with gas leaks, described in this guide, and
Example of contact interface the first one used for the transit of the operation of the burglar-alarm
configuration. Fourth sensor of zone police cars (information connected central unit in ADEMCO protocol
3, with balanced protection of the to intrusions or burglary), while the mode (forwarding of telephone
contact line. second is for service cars (information calls to vigilance bodies following a
connected with the operation of burglar-alarm or a technical alarm
Configurator position VALUE the system), and the third lane is for event).
emergency services (information In this case, when configuring the
Z1 3
connected with auxiliary alarms or 3486 central unit, the use of the
N1 4
events). auxiliary channel with the type of
MOD1 1
Auxiliary devices are capable of technical alarm that generates the
handling the sets of information from call is already set, as shown in the
N.C. N.C.
following table.
Tamper line Balance resistance

10 KΩ – 5 % 1/4 W
TYPE OF TECHNICAL ALARM COMBINED AUXILIARY CHANNEL
T - C1 - C2 Gas leak 1
AR T .F482 Freezer 2
Flooding 3
Anti-panico 4
T C2 C1
General technical alarms 5-6-7
Fire 8
Remote assistance 9

Configuration example
the following drawing shows Zone 2 – house perimeter:
Zone 4 – bedrooms, hallway,

the example of the configuration protected by magnetic contacts bathroom: protected by volumetric
of the burglar-alarm system of on the french windows and the detectors configured with Z=4 and
the apartment described in the windows, connected to three n=1 – 4
section "GEnEral rulES fOr interfaces configured with Z=2 and Devices such as the indoor siren,
inStallatiOn" the configuration of n=1 - 3; the transponder connector, and the
the devices depending on the area to Zone 3 – Kitchen and studio:
separator, are only configured in
be protected is the following: protected by volumetric detectors the n socket corresponding to the
Zone 1 – living room: protected by
configured with Z=3 and n=1, and number of the device within the
a magnetic contact with interface Z=3 and n=2; system
configured with Z=1 and n=2 on
the entrance door and a volumetric
detector configured with Z=1 and
n=1; Balcony Siren
4072L
3510 3511 3510

Bedroom
BuS
3510 Z=4
N=2 Z =2
Z=2
N=2 N=3
Second
Contact Transponder L4611
interface activator bathroom
L4607 IR sensor
3510 Z =2
Z=2
N=2 F482 Children's
bedroom
Z=4 Z=4 Z=4
N=1 IR sensor N=3 N=4
L4611
L4611 L4611
F482 IR sensor IR sensor
Hallway
3
6
3586
9
Kitchen Bathroom
3510 Z=3 N=1
N=2
Indoor siren
L4611 4070
IR sensor
N=1
Study
02
Z=3 Z=1 L4607
N=1 N=1
Z1
Z1=2
=2 Z1 =1
Z1=1
N1=1 N1=2 3511
Transponder
3510 IR sensor L4611 L4611 Living room
activator
IR sensor
T - C1 - C2 T - C1 - C2
AR T .F482 AR T .F482
T C2 C1 T C2 C1
F482 F482
Contact interface Contact interface

COnfiGuratiOn
use of the Youproject program

for the configuration of the system
the configuration of the system can the software produces a paper report
be performed using the appropriate with technical information for the
design program called Youproject, installation of the system, which also
conceived to automatically perform includes the configuration, and the
all the specific and predictable list of the necessary materials
functions inside the home
automation system (placement of
devices, dimensional and electrical
calculation, allocation of addresses,
configuration of tables )
Youproject program screen with the data of the system

to be configured
Report generated by the program with

the configuration and the list of devices

technical alarms: shop burglar-alarm
if there is a robbery, the assistant can means of: local sound alarm, so that the robber
press a hidden pushbutton which one or more telephone calls
can be surprised, as he does not
activates the burglar-alarm central one or more sms (using the MY
know that the call has been made
unit telephone communicator which HOME portal) Suspend the call by means of the
sends a request for assistance to the one or more e-mail (using the MY
remote control on the burglar-alarm
My Home Portal this will warn the HOME portal) central unit
owner or people indicated by him, by TV/SAT IPTVa
the activation does not generate
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
Burglar-alarm
central unit
diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione SCS/SCS
videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci Technical
tvcc alarm www irriga
TV/SAT interface IPTV interface
OUT
ART.F422
OK
CLEAR
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
9
N.C. pushbutton
Telephone line
CONNECTIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS

technical alarm interface 3481
TV/SAT
NOTE*: the auxiliary channel number 7 must also be entered at IPTV central unit, for coupling with the signalling message of the
the programming stage, on the burglar-alarm
telephone communicator.
BURGLAR ALARM BuS
diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia
1 luci 1st AuX devicetvcc www irrig
7 No. of auxiliary channel *
1 Anti-burglary mode
N.C.
pushbutton

COnfiGuratiOn
technical alarms: anti-panic alarm

if the owner hears strange noises the burglar-alarm central unit one or more e-mail (using the

in the home, he presses a special telephone communicator sends a MY HOME portal)
pushbutton to activate all the request for assistance to the My Home this function can be activated with
Burglar-alarm system sirens (only Portal, which warns the owner or the burglar-alarm system switched on
with the system armed, otherwise people indicated by him, by means of: or off and in any division condition
only the indoor siren activates) to one or more telephone calls;

confuse any intruder with the intense one or more sms (using the

sound MY HOME portal);
Indoor siren
TV/SAT IPTV
(optional)
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
Burglar-alarm
central unit
diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia
SCS/SCS controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc Technical alarm www irr
TV/SAT interface
IPTV interface
OUT
ART.F422
OK
CLEAR
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9 N.C. pushbutton
0
Telephone line

technical alarm interface 3481 TV/SAT indoor siren HC/HD/HS/4070 - n/nt4070
IPTV
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irri
1 1st AuX device
1 1° Indoor siren
no configurator
N°
MOD
no configurator
2 anti-panic mode
N.C. N°
MOD
pushbutton

technical alarms: flooding control
a water pipe leak, or a tap left open, alarm system, which can activate request to the MY HOME portal, which
may cause serious damage if not an actuator that controls a solenoid will in turn warn the owner, or any
immediately detected With MY valve in addition, it will also activate nominated individual, by means of:
HOME, the signal transmitted by an indoor siren and the telephone one or more telephone calls;

the sensor is received by a radio communicator of the burglar-alarm one or more sms messages;

receiver connected to the burglar- unit, which sends the assistance one or more e-mails

TV/SAT IPTV
Indoor Radio
siren receiver
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
Burglar-alarm
SCS interface central unit
usione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc Relay www irrigazione
TV/SAT IPTV actuator
OUT
ART.F422
OK
CLEAR
1 2 3
4 5 6
Flooding
7 8 9
Solenoid valve
0 detector
Telephone line
videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione

relay actuator 3479
TV/SAT IPTV radio receiver. Configuration for manual reset solenoid valve. When
NOTE*: the number 4 of the auxiliary channel is the one shown in the AuX socket of the HC/HS/L/N/NT4618
using a different solenoid valve connect configurator no. 3 to the MOD socket (bistable mode).
BURGLAR ALARM BuS
1 1st AuX device

diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazio
6 monostable contact
Transformer
Solenoid valve

COnfiGuratiOn
technical alarms: flooding control

radio receiver HC/HD/HS/l/n/nt4618
NOTE*: The number of the auxiliary channel must also be indicated during the programming of the burglar-alarm central unit, for coupling to the signalling message of the
telephone communicator, as well as in the configuration of the relay actuator that controls the electrovalve.
The coupling between the flood detector and the radio receiver must be completed before installing the detector itself. To save the detection device see the “Configuration” section.
9 zona 9
Z
N° 1 1st detector device in zone 9
AUX
TV/SAT IPTV
BuS
BURGLAR ALARM
ne diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www
indoor siren HC/HD/HS/4070-n/nt4070
in alternative to the radio flood

TV/SAT IPTV detector, contact interface 3480,
together with sensor 3482, can also
BURGLAR ALARM be used
BuS
ne diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www
N°
MOD
NC
Alarm reset
N°
Tamper line
MOD
3482
1 1st Indoor siren Z1= 1–9 Interface address
no configurator
N1= 1–9 Interface address
Z2= No configurator
N2= No configurator
MOD1= 8 NO contact technical alarm
MOD2= 4 No. of auxiliary channel (see note above)

technical alarms: gas leak alarm with burglar-alarm system
the application shows the use of the a “technical alarm” signal managed owner or people indicated by him,
methane gas detector combined in by the burglar-alarm system to close by means of:
the burglar-alarm system by means the solenoid valve and at the same One or more telephone calls;

of an auxiliary channel interface time, makes a telephone call via the One or more sms;

When the detector detects gas, by central unit/dialling device to the One or more e-mail

means of the interface it generates TV/SAT
My Home Portal which warnsIPTV
the
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
diffusione sonora antifurto

SCS/SCS
termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo Burglar-alarm
lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrig
Technical alarm Relay actuator
TV/SAT interface
IPTV central unit interface
OUT
ART.F422
OK
CLEAR
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
Methane gas Solenoid valve
0
Bticino MET ANO

detector (*)
Telephone line
Transformer
12 Vdc
Note: (*) maximum 3 devices with transformer F91/12E

maximum 2 devices with transformer HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4541

Gas detector HC/HD/HS/l/n/nt4511/12 technical alarm interface 3481
Note: No configuration Note*: auxiliary channel number 1 must
TV/SATalso be indicated while programming
IPTV
the burglar-alarm central unit to link it to the telephone communicator signalling
message.
BURGLAR ALARM BuS
1 1st AuX device
A + 1 No. of auxiliary channel *
4 technical alarm
To transformer
F91/12E
To the auxiliary channel

From methane gas
interface
detector

CONFIGURATION
Technical alarms: gas leak alarm with burglar-alarm system

Relay actuator 3479 Indoor siren HC/HD/HS/4070-N/NT4070 (optional)
Note*: the auxiliary channel number 1 is that given in the AUX housing of the Note*: The audible signal of the indoor siren does not activate for technical alarms.
technical alarm interface 3481. TV/SAT This function
IPTV is performed by the natural gas detector.
BURGLAR ALARM BUS
diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irr
2 2nd AUX device

1st Indoor siren
1 No. of auxiliary channel * 1
N°
1o 5 technical alarm
Transformer 6
MOD
monostable contact deactivation *

F91/12E
N°
MOD
Solenoid valve
L4525/12NO

technical alarms: telephone signalling of the
tripping of the general circuit breaker
With home switchboards fitted with a breaker as soon as one of the above the MY HOME WEB portal, which will
SalVaVita StOP&GO circuit breaker, problems occur, the SalaVaVita then send an alarm message by SMS
it is possible to be notified when StOP&GO device automatically and/or e-mail
the main circuit breaker trips, due closes the tripped circuit breaker and this function is only valid with 3485
to lightning, electric disturbance or reinstates power supply in full safety and 3486 central units fitted with
system fault if however the fault remains, due to telephone communicator
the main condition for this useful an insulation defect, or line overload,
function, is that the SalVaVita the burglar-alarm system will send
StOP&GO device is connected to an SMS telephone message or a
the burglar-alarm system through pre-recorded message, to notify the
an interface, for the detection of the user of the problem the telephone
status of the earth leakage circuit message can also be forwarded to
b
a
b
ART.3485 _
T1
OFF
ON
BUS
BURGLAR
STOP&gO Central unit
ALARM
BuS
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia
Technical alarm
interface 1 1st AuX device
Control interface
6 5 4
ART. F80CMD
4 technical alarm with normally closed contact
1 2 3
A
select mode 3 ( fault

NOTA*: auxiliary channel number 3 must
notification) by operating also be indicated in the burglar-alarm central
the selector with a flat head
unit programming to link it to the telephone
screwdriver.
communicator signalling message.
Auxiliary channels between 1 and 9 can be selected.

COnfiGuratiOn
advanced applications: switching on the lights

because of an alarm
an interesting application is the risk of immediate identification device devices to dialogue

possibility of automatically switching will induce the thief to leave this Obviously the lights can also be
on all the lights, or a group of them, function is obtained by connecting switched on and off by means
inside the home, for a preset time the automation device and burglar- of the local control device in the
following an intrusion this adds an alarm systems with an interface automation system
element of confusion to the sound which allows the burglar-alarm
TV/SAT IPTV
signal emitted by the siren and the central unit and the automation
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
SCS/SCS
diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irr
interface
OUT
ART.F422
ON general control
of the lights
GEN TV/SAT IPTV
OFF
AUTOMATION
BuS

SCS/SCS interface f422 TV/SAT General control of the lights H/l4652/2
IPTV
BURGLAR ALARM
BuS
SCS/SCS
diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione interface
videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irr
OUT
GEN general configurator
I1/I2/I3= A1
ART.F422
No
PL1
M1
No configuration
A2
Configuration PL2 ON control (upper key)
M2 O/I and OFF control
(lower key)
TV/SAT IPTV
1 I4= interfacing mode
AUTOMATION
4 MOD= burglar-alarm
BuS

Advanced applications:
remote assistance request with telephone call
Old or disabled people can send sends the assistance request to the MY This function can be activated with
an assistance request, using a HOME portal, which will then warn the the burglar-alarm armed or disarmed,
portable remote control. The signal owner or any nominated individuals, with any type of division.
sent is captured by a radio receiver by means of:
connected to the burglar-alarm. The one or more telephone calls;

burglar-alarm activates an indoor siren one or more sms;

and the telephone communicator of one or more e-mail.
Indoor siren
TV/SAT IPTV (optional)
the burglar-alarm central unit, which
BURGLAR ALARM
BUS
SCS/SCS Burglar-alarm
usione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
TV/SAT interface
IPTV
central unit Radio receiver
OUT
ART.F422
OK
CLEAR
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 Radio control for
Remote assistance
Telephone line
ermoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione

Radio receiver HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4618 Indoor siren HC/HD/HS/4070-N/NT4070 (optional)
NOTE*: If the configurator is not present, auxiliary channel no. 9 is allocated NOTA*: The audible signalling of the indoor siren does not activate for technical
automatically. This auxiliary channel number must be indicated also at the alarms. This function is performed by the natural gas detector.
programming stage on the burglar-alarm central unit, for coupling with the
signalling message of the telephone communicator.
1 1° Indoor siren
1 zone 1
N°
Z
MOD
technical alarm deactivation *
N° 1 1st receiver device
AUX
No. of auxiliary channel *
TV/SAT IPTV N°
MOD
BURGLAR ALARM BUS
usione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione

Start-up and testing
Start-up
Note: this operation must be carried out after go back to the maintenance menu;
CENTRAL UNIT 3485/B AND HC/
configuring the system. check the reception level of the
HD/HS/L/N/NT4601
In order to startup the system, all devices must be GSM signal; When the central unit is switched on
connected and installed properly into their supports. program any scenarios as needed;
for the first time, the Maintenance
Program an IR remote control, a
menu is shown; the slide switch on
transponder key, or a Numeric the back is in OFF position.
CENTRAL UNIT 3486 code as shown in the following To activate the central unit and make
When the central unit is switched on pages; it operational:
for the first time, the Maintenance enter time and date;
choose the language;

menu is shown; the slide switch on edit the names of the zones and
use the central unit to start the

the back is in OFF position. devices and the division scenarios. system tutorial;
To activate the central unit and make WARNING: If the central unit battery is exhausted, move the slide switch to ON;

it operational proceed as follows: the GSM module does not operate. press © twice to exit the

choose the language;
maintenance menu (1)
use the central unit to start the
Central UNIT l/n/nt4600/4 return to the maintenance menu;

tutorial; Remove the support from the box program a transponder key or a

move the slide switch to ON;
(if already installed) and move the numeric code;
press CLEAR twice to exit the
changeover switch (1) at the back enter time and date;

maintenance menu; of the device to the OFF position customize zone, device and

select Communication - GSM
(maintenance). division scenario names.
Management menu and enter the Power the system and check that the
PIN code; central unit is in maintenance mode.
go to the main screen by holding
This is confirmed by the “AUX” (2)
down CLEAR, switch off the central and “24h” (3) red LEDs flashing in
unit; succession.
disconnect the battery;

insert the SIM card;

connect the battery again and

switch the central unit back on 4-zone central unit Central unit 3485 / 3485B
again; wait for the battery to fully ALLARME

ZONA 1
charge (icon OFF);

ON
make sure there is a line 1
IMPIANTO
1 OFF
connection;
wait about one minute; during this

PIN
time, the ERROR or icons might
be displayed. 3 24h
TEST 1 2
ALLARME
After one minute, both icons should ZONA
S 1 PROG 3 4
disappear; if they do not disappear, AUXON P

2
IMPIANTO
check the PIN code or check if the OFF
SIM card is disabled by inserting it in

a mobile phone. Warning: with the system in “Maintenance” mode, the batteries of the system are not charged. If the system
remains in this mode for an extended amount of time, the batteries may be damaged.

Common operations for all
central units
Check if the red LED is on the siren the polarity (red +, black -). If central unit L/N/NT4600/4 is
control card. Warning: when there is a installed, move the changeover
If it is lit, reverse the connection of connection with an inversion of switch (3) at the back of the unit to
the Bus pair. polarity, the card will be protected the “ON” position (active).
Warning: Furthermore, make sure with 4A fuses placed inside the cable Fit the central unit inside the box
the yellow LED is off; when it is lit, it (2). Install the two siren protection correctly.
indicates the alarm condition, hence covers.
an abnormal condition in the system. NOTE: in case a second siren is installed, make sure
in this case, eliminate the anomaly. to repeat the LED check after its installation. The J1
Now connect the two faston terminals jumper of the second siren must be cut (see the siren
(1) to the battery paying attention to technical sheet).
Indoor siren card
A 2
J1 1
Yellow LED Red LED

3
A = BUS
B = BATTERY (RED+, BLACK -)
C = SOUND SIGNALLER Burglar-alarm central unit
L/N/NT 4600/4

Programming of 4050 infrared remote controls

Central UNIT 3486, 3485/B Pairing of RADIO remote
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601 controls 348220
Programming remote controls is Press the transmission pushbutton 1. Switch the system to “maintenance”
facilitated by the information given (5) and hold it down until the tone is mode.
by the display (see the installation emitted. 2. Press the Radio receiver HC/HD/
manual of the central unit supplied A tone lasting about half a second HS/L/N/NT4618 programming
with the device). means that the programming process pushbutton for five seconds, until the
Flush mounted central has been executed correctly. red LED comes on.
units L/N/NT4600/4 NOTE: A tone lasting about 4 seconds means that 3. Press the connection pushbutton for
After putting the batteries into the the programming process has not been executed 5 seconds.
remote controls, with the central unit correctly. hence it will be necessary to repeat the 4. If the pairing of the device has been
in maintenance mode (switch on operation. performed correctly, the red LED
the back in OFF position), press the When the remote control of the radio receiver will go off.If
“P” pushbutton (1) using a pencil or programming has been completed, this does not happen, repeat the
similar object. repeat the operation for all supplied procedure from step 3. If the LED
Make sure that the yellow LED remote controls (maximum 30). flashes, it means that the device
“PROG” (2) is lit and that a short tone NOTE: in this stage, it is possible to program remote memory is full.
is emitted. controls for other systems. 5. To save other devices in the radio
Place the remote control After programming the last remote receiver repeat step 2.
transmission lens (3) against the control, press the “S” pushbutton (6). 6. Perform self learning of the system
central unit receiving lens (4) in order Make sure the yellow LED “PROG” (7) from the central unit.
to keep it perfectly aligned (cover the is off. 7. Program the remote controls on the
lens in case of interferences with the central unit, if this is of a type "with
infrared, e.g. due to the direct light of display”.
lamps or spotlights). 8. Exit “maintenance” mode.
2
4-zone central unit
24h
TEST 1 2
S PROG 3 4
Arming Disarming
AUX P 5 3 4
1
24h
~
TEST
7 S
1
2
PROG
4-zone central unit AUX

P
3
4
24h
TEST 1 2
S PROG 3 4
Key-ring
AUX P

Programming of 3530S and 3540 transponders
CENTRAL UNIT 3486, 3485/B Procedure: DELETING OR ADDING A
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601 1. With central unit in maintenance TRANSPONDER
programming transponders is mode, press the P key and check if When using central units 3486,
facilitated by the information given the yellow lED PrOG lights up 3485/B and HC/HD/HS/l/n/nt4601
by the display (see Central unit 2. re-program the ir remote controls the deletion of transponders is
installer manual) first (see chapter rEMOtE COntrOl facilitated by the information given
PrOGraMMinG) by the display (see Central unit
FLUSH MOUNTED CENTRAL 3. now, move the badges towards the installer manual)
UNITS L/N/NT4600/4 transponder reader (figure at bottom in systems with fluSH mounted
the transponder (badge) programming left) central units l/n/nt4600/4, a
operation is necessary in order for it 4. Make sure that two short tones are new programming process is
to work as a normal infrared remote emitted: the first is emitted from the required to delete previously stored
control 4050 Please keep in mind that transponder reader, the second is transponders or to add new ones
when the transponder-reader is used emitted from the central unit follow the procedure described
as a activator, it will almost always be 5. repeat points 3 and 4 for all available in section “rEMOtE COntrOl
installed in places different from the badges PrOGraMMinG” (of course, during
one in which the central unit is located 6. Whenyouhavefinishedprogramming this procedure, the badge will have
therefore, it is recommended to the last badge, press the S pushbutton to be moved near the transponder
temporarily connect it near the central on the central unit (the yellow PrOG reader instead of the central unit)
unit lED turns off) and move the back this procedure will delete all stored
the initial programming - which selector switch to On - dwg a transponders (partial deletion is not
is carried out when installing the possible)
transponder reader – shall be
carried out with the central unit in
MaintEnanCE mode (selector switch
located on the back in Off position)
LUMINOUS AND AUDIbLE INDICATORS bUZZER LED

ON
IMPIANTO
SYSTEM ENABLED 0.5 sec OFF

4-zone central unit OFF SYSTEM DISABLED 0.5 sec Fixed green
24h
INCORRECT ACTIVATION 4 sec Flashing green
1 2
TEST
ALARM OCCURRED - Fixed red
S 3 4
PROG
DEACTIVATION AFTER ALARM OCCURRED
0.5 sec Fixed orange
AUX P (allows you to check the zone in which the alarm occurred)
IMPORTANT: the central unit can save up to 30 system arming/disarming devices. If a

transponder is used as a remote control, only 29 devices can be saved. This is because an IR
bip
remote control (4050) must always be present.
tra
nsp
cod
35 on
30
de
HIG
HS
r
EC
UR
IT Y R

Start-uP anD tEStinG
Programming a remote control or a transponder

for several systems
CENTRAL UNIT 3486, 3485/B FLUSH MOUNTED CENTRAL
AND HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601 UNITS L/N/NT4600/4
Programming is facilitated by the if you have two or more burglar-alarm it will be possible to program one or
information given by the display systems with a flush mounted central more remote controls able to interact
(see Central unit installer manual) unit (for example, home and office), with all systems
Remote control
(transponder)
common to the
two system
1ST SYSTEM (OFFICE) 2ND SYSTEM (HOME)
24h
24h
TEST 1 2 1 2
TEST
S PROG 3 4 S 3 4
PROG
AUX P P
AUX
Office remote Home remote

control control
(transponder) (transponder)
Note: carry out these operations with the two systems already activated: both central units with rear selector switch in ON position.
Press the “S” pushbutton on the Warning: When programming a newly-purchased Note: all previously stored codes of the remote
central unit of the second system (2) remote control, first of all do the programming controls are now deleted and can no longer be
and hold it down Send an impulse described in chapter “REMOTE CONTROL recognised by the central unit. Hence, it will be
using a previously-enabled remote PROgRAMMINg” (user manual). necessary to re-program all remote controls and
control (keep it at a maximum NOTE: make sure the system is disabled - green LED transponders which will need to act on this system
distance of 50 cm from the central (1) on. by following the descriptions in chapter “REMOTE
unit) CONTROL PROgRAMMINg” (user manual).
Make sure the yellow lED “tESt” (3)
is on Send a second impulse Make
sure the yellow lED “PrOG” (4) is on 4 4-zone central unit
release the “S” pushbutton (2) 24h
TEST 1 2
Press the “P” pushbutton (5) by using
S PROG 3 4
a pencil or a similar object
P
Make sure a short tone is emitted AUX
3 2 5 1

Direct the remote control previously wait for the beep sound after completing the programming
programmed on the first system from now on, the remote control operations, press the “S” pushbutton
towards a 1 to 4 zone divider or code for the first system will also be (1) and make sure the yellow lED
connector of the second system recognised by the second system “PrOG” (2) is off
Press the remote control pushbutton When the remote control
as if it were a normal enabling programming has been completed,
process repeat the operation for all remote
if a transponder is used, move it controls requiring this function (30
towards the transponder reader and altogether)
Activator Divider zone 1 to 4

max 50 cm max 50 cm
1 2
3 4
4-zone central unit
24h
er 1 2
nd
TEST
o
nsp
tra transponder S PROG 3 4
cod3530
AUX P
IT Y
0
53
d3
co UR
EC
HS HIGH SECURITY
HIG
1 2

System activation
SYSTEM WITH central UNIT SYSTEM WITH central UNIT
3486, 3485/B – HC/HD/HS/L/N/ l/n/nt4600/4
NT4601 First of all, set the central unit to NOTE: if the two LEDs continue to flash, it means
After completing the operation ON. To activate the system, direct that the selector switch at the back of the central
described in the chapter "Putting into the remote control (1) towards the unit has not been set to ON. If the 24h LED is steadily
operation" of the system, the central receiving lens (2) of the central unit at on, it means that one of the devices is producing a
unit becomes operational. a maximum distance of 50 cm. 24h alarm. Check if the installation has been carried
Perform a system test as described Activate the remote control by out properly (see problems/causes/solutions table).
below. pressing the pushbutton (3) once Make sure the green LED “~” (7) is on.
or twice with a time interval of 5 In this condition, the system is activated and
ON OFF seconds between the first and the disabled.
slide switch
second time, until the green LED (4)
lights up.
3 1 6 2 7
impianto
Activate the remote control with the
on off a pushbutton (3), thus making sure
b
LU
a that the green LED (4) turns off. 24h
b TEST
~
Activate the remote control again S
1
2
PROG
with the pushbutton (3), thus making

3
AUX 4
P
Central unit (3486) rear view sure that the green LED (4) turns on.
Make sure that the red LEDs “AUX” (5)
and “24h” (6) are off. 4
T1
5
T1
Tamper T2 Now test the system as indicated in the
•
next pages.

System test
CENTRAL UNIT 3486, 3485/B TEST PROCEDURE
AND HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601 1. infrared detector check
access the “Maintenance” menu and the red lED should light up when
select “tESt”, as described in the passing through the area protected
installer manual supplied with the by the detector
central unit
1. When the system is disabled (led
on) press S and hold it down
2. Press the pushbutton of one of the
enabled remote controls; the TEST lED
turns on, hence you can now release
the S key
3. after carrying out the verifications
2. Contact check
described in the following
the red lED of the contact interface
paragraphs (“test procedure”), press
should light up when opening the
S to end the test; Make sure the TEST
windows or entrance door
lED turns off
Central units L/N/NT4600/4
24h
TEST 1 2
1 S PROG 3 4
AUX P
24h
1 2 Warning : when testing, the central unit L/N/
2 TEST
NT/4600/4 does not recognize the remote controls

S PROG 3 4
When the rolling shutter controlled
AUX P
by the rope sensor is raised or
lowered, the red lED of the interface
comes on after the number of pulses
set, and will go off again after 4
seconds
Central units L/N/NT4600/4
24h
TEST 1 2
3 S PROG 3 4
AUX P

System test:
two line contact interfaces check
The interfaces 3480 and F482 are paragraph 4.4); if it stays on, make 4.3 Make sure the LED is on when
equipped with LED indicators for sure that the contacts of the two opening the various contacts:
properly start-up the system. lines are closed (e.g. windows when the contact is closed (e.g.
During the startup procedure, the closed). window closed), the LED must
central unit must not be powered. If it 4.4 Make sure the LED is on when be off,
is, it must be in test mode. opening the various contacts: when the contact is open (e.g.
1. Connect the interface to the SCS bus when the contact is closed (e.g. window open) the LED must
and the wires of the contacts and window closed), the LED must be on.
tamper to their terminals. be off,
COMPLETION OF THE TEST
2. Insert the required configurators when the contact is open (e.g.
STAGE
and close again using the transparent window open) the LED must
3486, 3485/B and HC/HD/HS/L/N/

shell (interface 3480). be on.
NT4601 central units
3. Close all contacts, including the
Procedure for 3480 Exit the “Maintenance" menu
Tamper.
following the procedure described in
4. Power the item.
the installation manual supplied with
Procedure for F482 the central unit.
Tamper contact,
line 1, line 2 LED L/N/NT4600/4 central units

indicator activated Once the checks have been
completed press pushbutton (1),
check that the “TEST” LED (2) has
T - C1 - C2 4.1 If the LEDs start flashing, check
gone off and move the ON-OFF
ART.F482 the configuration and repeat
the startup procedure. If the selector (3) to the OFF position.
Tamper contact Line 2 LED
LED indicator indicator LED flashes quickly, only 5/6 Remove the swivel IR detectors
activated
T C2 C1
activated times before stopping, go on to from the box and tighten the screw
paragraph 4.2). locking the adjustments.
Line 1 LED
indicator 4.2 If the LED is now off, go on to
4-zone central unit
activated paragraph 4.3); if it stays on, make
sure: 24h
4.1 If the LEDs start flashing, check 1 2

that the tamper line is short- TEST
the configuration and repeat the S 3 4

circuited and then repeat the PROG
startup procedure. If the LEDs P

procedure from paragraph 4) AUX
flash quickly, only 5/6 times before

the enclosure of the interface is
stopping, go on to the following 2 1
well closed and then repeat the
paragraph.
procedure from paragraph 4)
4.2 If the “tamper contact” LED is
after switching the power off.
ALLARME
now off, go on to paragraph 4.3); ZONA 1
the contacts of the two lines
if it stays on, make sure that the
are closed (e.g. windows ON
IMPIANTO
tamper line is short-circuited and 3

closed) and then repeat the OFF
then repeat the procedure from
procedure from paragraph 4.2)
paragraph 4).
4.3 If the “line contact 1 / line contact
2” LEDs are now off, go on to
ALLARME
224 MY HOME Burglar alarm ZONA 1
ON
NTO
Configuration or system modifications -
Maintenance
If it is necessary to modify the

4-zone central unit
configuration of the system after
starting it up, follow the procedure ALLARME
ZONA 1
below after disabling the system:
ON
IMPIANTO
1
OFF
Central UNITS 3486, 3485/B
AND HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601
Go to the “Maintenance" menu

NOTE: for normal operation of the system, please Warning: If you are going to install a device next
following the procedure described
refer to the guidelines specified in the “User to the central unit, do not place the tamper rod in
in the installation manual supplied
manual”. ALLARME
the new device as the system would produce a 24h
with the central unit; ZONA 1
alarm. The anti-tampering protection is guaranteed
Disconnect the power supply from
ON by the tamper rod installed on the central unit.
IMPIANTO
the system; OFF
Replace or add the configurators to

the devices;
Connect the power supply;

Ensure that the central unit

performs the system self-learning
procedure;
Perform the system test.
ORDINARY MAINTENANCE OF
THE BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM
It is recommended that a test is
Central UNITS L/N/NT4600/4
performerd regularly to check that
after disabling the system, remove

the system i working correctly, that
the central unit from the box and
the system back-up batteries are
set the selector (1) to “OFF” within
charged, as well as the condition of
30 seconds, otherwise a 24h alarm
any radio devices.
signal will be produced, if the
tamper rod has been installed;
switch off the system;

replace or add the configurators to

the devices;
switch on the system;

flip the selector switch (1) to “ON”;

install the central unit in the box;

activate the system by sending one

or two impulses with the remote
control.

226 MY HOME Energy management
CONTENTS
MY HOME – Energy management
Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Energy consumption display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Load control management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Energy management MY HOME 227

GENERAL FEATUREs
saving energy has never been this easy
MY HOME, the winning

combination
Displaying information on energy very much more aware of their
consumption and managing and energy use, be it to meet their “green
controlling energy loads; this is aspirations” or their desire to make
whAT THE NEw My Home solutions financial savings
deliver to end users - making them
Visibility drives savings

An aware user is one that saves changing there (bad) routines or
with resulting benefits for the correcting faults which result in
environment and in reduced costs savings of 10 to 15%
studies have shown that displaying
energy consumption results in users

My Home enables you to:
Create a living space with

maximum comfort, only using the
necessary energy and heat
Improve the energy class of the

building, and therefore also of its
economic value
Touch Screen

GENERAL FEATUREs
To ensure energy efficiency

with MY HOME is easy
BUS-SCS MY HOME
TV/SAT IPTV
Heating only when

and where needed
Using this function, the user can decide the
antifurto Zone temperature
control
temperature of each individual room based on its
use and the time of day It is also possible to select
the rooms that are not being used, and therefore
don’t need to be heated
The activation of the system also takes into account uP to
the heat produced by the sun
30% sAVings
switch lights off, switch

savings on uP to
energia
Light automation
luci
management
Management
tvcc
of www
lighting depending
irrigazione
on the 75%
sAVings
presence of people and the level of natural light:
this provides maximum visual comfort for the
users and greatly contributing to energy savings
Depending on the space, savings of 55% to 75%
are possible
BUS-SCS MY HOME

TV/SAT IPTV
A complete consumption and energy

production check-up
The user can display on the touch screen not only the
ne videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi Consumption
energia consumptions
luci inside their home
tvcc www (power, water and gas1)),
irrigazione
display
but also the energy and hot water ouput obtained using
photovoltaic or solar panels
With a few simple steps, the user can select the type of
uP to
15%
consumption that needs to be checked, the type of display
(instantaneous or graphs), and the period (day, month,
sAVings
year) Extremely useful information, for using one’s own
systems at their best, reducing waste and faults
TV/SAT NOTE: 1) subject to type of meters installed for gas and water.
IPTV
New heading required

This function can be used to manage the maximum
Management
power to be used, and automatically disconnect the least
of loads important appliances in case of overload
Using the Touch screens, the user can check the total
consumption of the individual circuit, and decide if the
priorities need changing
The user can also decide to delay the activation of a
particular load

GENERAL FEATUREs
Energy efficiency management devices overview
Splitter
Probe Local Display
Splitter
management
interface
99 zone central unit

Distribution board
Room-by-room temperature control

Zone temperature control Air conditioning
Splitter management Splitter

interface
Probe
Touch Screen

Washing machine
Photovoltaic Thermal
panel solar panels
Microwave
Flush mounted
16A actuator
Bus meter with
toroids
Pulse counter
interface
Pulse counter Pulse counter

interface interface
Touch Screen
Water meter
with pulse output
Gas meter
with pulse output
Automatic switching off of heating when windows are Irrigation management

Consumption and production
opened Load control management
display
m3/€
m3/€
KWh/€
Touch Screen KWh

Central unit for load management
Kcal
CONTENTS
MY HOME – Temperature control
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

GENERAL FEATUREs
MY HOME temperature control can be used:
WHEN THE SYSTEM IS PRESET

Bathroom
FOR ZONE MANAgEMENT
A system is preset for zone Kitchen
Bedroom
management when the solenoid
valves for the management of
each zone can be installed on the
distribution collector
Hall
Living room
A system is divided into Zones with radiant panel heating

Solenoid valve Collector
Bedroom
Kitchen Collector
Bathroom Living room
Box
WHEN THE SOLENOID vALvES

USED ARE:
The solenoid valves that manage the The MY HOME temperature from the MY HOME temperature
zones can be of two types: control system can also manage control system; they need an
1. with ON/OFF contacts the circulation pumps (see Fig 3) external control unit, supplied by
2. With open/close contacts WARNING: The proportional mixing the manufacturer of radiant heating
valves cannot be managed directly panel systems
1 2 3 4
YEs YEs YEs

M
236 MY HOME
IN SYSTEMS WITH:
Radiators Fan-coil Radiant panels
WITH SYSTEMS OF:
Bathroom
Heating Cooling Both
Kitchen Bedroom
IN CENTRAL HEATINg
SYSTEMS WITH DISTRIbUTION
COLLECTOR FOR EACH HOME
In central heating systems where
Hall
each Home is fitted with its own
distribution collector, it is possible to: Living room
by installing a meter on the

collector input, measure the
amount of heat used;
by installing solenoid valves, to
Bathroom
manage the different zones of the
Kitchen Bedroom
Home
Hall
Distribution
collector
Living room
Zone solenoid
valve
Example of central heating system split into zones, for several apartments.
Meter
Main boiler

GENERAL FEATUREs
Devices
The MY HOME temperature control

system consists of the following
devices:
Power supply

Temperature central unit

Probes:
Probes

they must be installed in each zone,
Actuators

so that the temperature of the rooms
Contact interface (OPTIONAL)

can be detected and if necessary
locally changed, in relation to the
temperature set on the control unit
Power supply
99 zone central unit Zone 1 probe
Power supply: Temperature control unit: 2 relay

actuator
for MY HOME systems this is the unit used for system
configuration, program
customisation, and the display of
information This is available in
the catalogue in the 4 zone flush-
mounting version or in the 99 zone
wall-mounting version
Actuators:
activate the solenoid valves and
the circulation pumps
The number and type of actuators
depends on the type of solenoid
valves installed, and their
positioning within the system

External temperature radio probe:
it measures the external temperature
and sends the information, through
radio waves, to the receiving interface,
Outdoor
and therefore to the control unit radio probe
Zone 2 probe External Zone 99 Local

radio probe probe Display
interface
BUS
4 relay Contact interface

actuator
Actuators: Contact interface:

For the ON/OFF control of the this optional device detects the open are open With this function one can
solenoid valves only one contact is or closed position of windows and make the most of each energy saving
used, while for open/close solenoid doors by assessing the status of their opportunity, avoiding unwanted
valves the interlocking of two relays magnetic contact The information dispersion of heat to the outside,
is used By using the 4 relay actuator, obtained is then used by the MY for example when the air inside the
it is possible to control both the HOME temperature control system to house is being changed
activation of the fan-coils and the switch off the zones corresponding to
automatic selection of the 3 speeds the rooms where windows and doors

GENERAL FEATUREs
Devices
Adjustable probe
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
CENTRAL UNITS
The two temperature control Local Display
units ensure simple management/
programming of the whole system; in
this way, thanks to a guided menu, it
will be possible to select the operating
mode, display the temperatures of
the various zones, and change the possibility of managing the

daily and weekly programs Inside the operating mode (OFF; antifreeze/
4 zone control unit is a probe This thermal protection, and automatic)
is a zone in itself, and it is therefore possibility of controlling the speed

possible to connect three more of the FAN-COILs
LOCAL CONTROL
probes, before the maximum number All these functions may also be
A probe is installed in each room, for
of probs that can be managed by the performed using Local Display,
the measurement of the temperature
device is reached a recently launched Oled Touch
Probe models fitted with a knob also
In addition to being able to manage screen technology control device,
provide easy system control:
temperature control systems, both connected to a probe
possibility of changing the

in heating and cooling mode, the
temperature by ±3° C compared
99 zone control unit is also capable,
with the value set on the control
thanks to the scenarioso mode, of PC PROgRAMMINg
unit
setting different temperatures in TiThermo and TiThermo Basic are
the different zones of the system, by programs that enable the user to
means of a single control (e g maid program and configure the control
scenarioso) 16 scenariosos for the 4 zone central unit units, by setting and customising
winter and 16 scenariosos for the the parameters connected with the
summer can be set temperature control system Thanks
to a dedicated function, the software
can also be used to update the
firmware of the control unit
Bticino software

Video Station
PERFECT INTEgRATION WITH

THE MY HOME SYSTEM
Example of integration between (e g weekly mode, external probe
Temperature Control and Automation scenarioso mode, etc ) For further
The temperature control system information see the User Manual
can be integrated with MY HOME supplied as standard with Touch
Automation, for the management screen IP
of the temperature in the different
zones of the house, using Touch Touch Screen
screen, Videostation, and Video
Display In particular, using Touch
screen IP it is possible to manage
not only the temperature in the
different zones, but also those
functions that up to now have always
been managed by the control unit
Example of integration between house is being changed In practical Alarm system, which reads the
Temperature Control and Automation terms, when doors or windows of condition of the NC contact installed
The integration between MY HOME a room are opened, the heating on the door or window, and transfers
Burglar-Alarm and Temperature system of the temperature control the information to the Temperature
Control systems allows the set-up of zone corresponding to that room is Control system for the appropriate
a particularly useful function in terms automatically turned off actions
of energy saving, avoiding unwanted The opening or closing of doors and
escape of energy to the outside, windows is detected by the contact
for example when the air inside the interface module of the Burglar-
Magnetic contact
Contact interface Radiator off
Temperature control unit

Opening of window
GENERAL FEATUREs
Device selection criteria
gUIDE TO THE SELECTION OF

THE CONTROL UNIT
The following table shows the the number of zones of the hydraulic
functions provided by the two system Other selection parameters
control units The selection must be may be the management of magnetic
based on the features of the system contacts, remote control, etc
It is fundamental that the selection of
the control unit should be based on
available funCtionS 4 Zone Central unit 99 Zone Central unit
HC/HS/L/N/NT4695, AM5875
3550
Maximum number of zones 4 99
Remote control
Local control (Touch Screen)
Programming with TiThermo Basic
Programming with TiThermo
Magnetic contacts management
Scenarios
Climaveneta Chiller Management

gUIDE TO THE SELECTION OF
THE DEvICES
The following table summarizes
the various types of systems,
and the devices needed for their
management, based on their
features
type of SyStem aCtuator probe
HC/HS4692 HC/HS4692FAN HC/HS4685

L/N/NT4692 L/N/NT4692FAN L/N/NT4685
In conjunction with
F430/2 F430/4 Gateway probe item HC/
HS4693, L/N/ NT4693,
or with external probe
HC/HS4693
item 3457
L/N/NT4693
Radiators or Radiant panels
Combined system with radiant panels and fan-coils
Normal Fan-coil
CLIMAVENETA Fan-coil
WARNING: protect the outputs of the relay actuators using a 10 A thermal magnetic circuit breaker, included in the BTDIN catalogue with item no. F881NA/10.

GENERAL RULEs FOR INsTALLATION
Maximum number of devices,

maximum distances and absorptions
A system can manage up to 99 zone the items and making sure that the the total length of the connections

addresses Up to nine addresses total does not exceed the capacity must not be more than 500m;
dedicated to the actuators can of the power supply For the for best division of the currents

be managed for each zone The calculations mentioned above, refer on the BUs line the power supply
maximum number of devices which to the TECHNICAL DATA listed in the should be installed in the middle
can be connected to the BUs also Technical sheets section of this guide
depends on their total absorption When calculating the absorptions the
and the distance between the availability of current as a function
connection point and the power of the length of the BUs cable must
supply The power supply can also be considered During the sizing
supply up to 1200 mA (E46ADCN) therefore respect the following rules:
or 600 mA (E49) and the maximum the connection between the power

number of devices which can be supply and the furthest device
connected to the BUs is determined must not be more than 250 m long;
by summing the absorption of all
MAXIMUM DISTANCES OF THE bUS CAbLE
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
OK
-2 -1
-2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OF
F +1 OF 1 2 3
+2
F
+3
4
+2
5 6
+3
7 8 9
0
A PRI
A
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
b SCS
b
E46ADCN
-2 -1
E49 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OF 1 2 3 4
F +1 OF
F 1 2 3 4
+2
+3
+2
+3
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
With power supply E46ADCN: With power supply E49:

A =250 m max A =250 m max
b =250 m max b =250 m max
A + b =500 m A + b =500 m
Maximum current supplied Maximum current supplied
by the power supply: 1200 mA by the power supply: 600 mA

PHYSICAL EXPANSION MODE
In large systems or systems which use of the interface itself as indicated on the input bus (IN) the

have current absorption greater than below: Automation device addresses must
the limit of 1200 mA supplied by the If a bus system with only
be between A = 1 / PL = 1 and A =
power supply E46ADCN or 600 mA temperature control devices must 3 / PL = 1;
supplied by the E49 compact power be extended, positions I3 and I4 of on the output bus (OUT) the

supply, split the system into several the interface must be configured addresses must be between A = 3 /
sections connected to each other with addresses I3 = 1 – 9 and I4 = PL = 3 and A = 9 / PL = 9 or the
using the F422 interface configured 1 – 9 completely independent from address of the next interface. It
in “physical expansion” mode. It the Temperature control device should be stressed that all the
is important to remember that addresses; temperature control devices on the
each line must be powered by its If a bus system with Automation
system section must be configured
own power supply. To produce the and temperature control devices totally independently of the
“physical expansion” mode interface must be extended, positions I3 Automation device configuration.
item F422 must be configured by and I4 must be configured as a In any case no automation device
inserting numeric configurator 1 in function of the configuration of must be configured with the same
the MOD position. Positions I3 and I4 the Automation devices in the two address (A, PL) as interface F422
of the interface must be configured connected systems. Referring to (I3, I4).
as a function of the two modes of the illustration, let us suppose that
I3 = 3, I4 = 2:
A/PL = 33 53
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
OK
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF 1 2 3
F
4
+2
5 6
+3
7 8 9
0
F422 OUT I1 = – F422 I1 = –

OUT
I2 = – OUT
I2 = –
AR T.F422
IN I3 = 3 AR T.F422
I3 = 5
I4 = 2 I4 = 4
MOD = 1 MOD = 1
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
A/PL = 55 99
+1 OF +1 OF
F F
+2
+2
+3
+3
A/PL = 11 31

Combining with other functions
The Temperature control function The above is also valid if the this document. For systems which
devices can share the same BUS pre-existing MY HOME system also have the burglar-alarm function,
cable as other MY HOME automation has several Automation systems the Temperature control must not
and emergency management connected using interfaces item F422 be installed on the same bus as the
applications (grey cable). If there configured in the “logical expansion” burglar-alarm, but there must be
is already a stable cable with the mode. an F422 interface between the two
automation or power management For systems with “logical expansion” buses.
BUS the Temperature control items there is no installation limitation for
can be added at any point in the the Temperature control devices,
system, after installing a box item which can be installed at any point
503E for the control units, one or in the system.Thus, for correct
more boxes positioned at a height system sizing, one only need check
of 1.5 m for each temperature probe the length of the connections made
and a unit with enough room for the with the BUS cable and the total
DIN actuators. device absorptions as specified in
A/PL = 11
99
OUT I1 = –
OUT I2 = –
AR T.F422
I3 = –
ZA = 1 ZA = 1 I4 = 1
-2 -1
ZB = 1 -2 -1
ZB = 1 MOD = 2
-3
-3
+1 OF +1 OF
F F
+2
+2
+3
+3
OK
IN 1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
A/PL = 11
99
ZA = 3
OUT I1 = – -2 -1
ZB = 2
I2 = –
-3
+1 OF
F
OUT
+2
+3
AR T.F422 I3 = –
ZA = 2 I4 = 2
-2 -1
ZB = 1 MOD = 2
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
IN
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
OUT I1 = –
I2 = –
OUT
OUT
24h
˜2
AR T.F422
I3 = –
1
I4 = 1
TEST
S PROG 3 4
AUX P MOD = 4
IN

Correct mode of installation
for 4 zone control unit, probes and magnetic contacts
The 4 ZONE CONTROL UNIT and wall-mounting boxes (LIVING, LIGHT, with pre-existing BUS systems that
the Probes LIGHT TECH only); Surface installation cannot be expanded.
must be installed at a height of may be useful for resolving issues
approximately 1.5 m, away from areas
that may affect the reading of the
room temperature, such as nearby
windows, fan-coils, or radiators. -2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
-2 -1
-3
-2 -1
The probes may be installed both

+1 OFF
+2
-3
+3
+1 OFF
+2
+3
inside standard flush-mounting, or 1,5m
CALIBRATION OF THE 4 ZONE

CENTRAL UNIT AND THE
PROBES
The probes and the 4 zone central function, which can be found in the room temperature (e.g. by opening
unit do not normally need calibration; central unit menu. or closing windows, doors, etc.)
however, in particular installation Before performing the calibration and avoid standing near them;
situations (perimeter walls, north operation, ensure the following: for the calibration use a calibrated

or south facing walls, when close to Leave the probes connected and
sample thermometer, correctly
heat sources, etc.), the temperature powered with the hydraulic system placed inside the room.
value measured may be corrected off for at least two hours. During For more details on the calibration
using the appropriate calibration this time, avoid any changes in the procedure, refer to the central unit
installation manuals.
Magnetic contacts
are generally installed in the upper protection line generally not used If the contact interface is correctly
part of the window frames and in in temperature control. It is mainly configured it can support both
the point furthest away from the useful for preventing tampering applications. When the temperature
hinges. In this way small openings such as cutting the wires in burglar- control system is being installed the
cause the magnet to move away alarm systems. If the same MY HOME protection line should be installed
from the contact reed and the system has temperature control and and wired as well, so that the burglar-
contact itself consequently opens. burglar-alarm applications the same alarm can be installed as well.
The models in the catalogue magnetic contacts can be used for
are of NC type and also have a both functions at the same time.
For flush-mounting installation 3510, 3510M, 3510PB For visible installation 3511
Magnet Contact
Magnet Contact
Magnet
Magnet
Contact
Contact Protection
Protection
line
line
NC contact
NC contact
GENERAL RULEs FOR INsTALLATION
Disposition of solenoid valves and actuators
The typical installation requires the

Solenoid valve
positioning of all solenoid valves on actuators 1 2 3 4
1 2 3
C1 C2
4
ART.F430/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
C1 C2
4
ART.F430/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
C1 C2
4
ART.F430/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
C1 C2
4
ART.F430/2 Plug-in box
the collector, grouped inside a box

in the boiler room In this case it is
recommended that also all actuators Hydraulic
are grouped, inside a control unit, collector
installed nearby the box itself In Zone solenoid

multi-floor buildings, this solution valve
may be repeated at every floor

Box
FAN-COIL SYSTEMS
In fan-coil systems, the solenoid valve
Installation of the solenoid valve inside 2 pipe fan-coils Installation of the solenoid valve inside 4 pipe fan-coils
may be installed inside the fan-coil
itself In 2 pipe systems, the same
solenoid valve is used both for the
heating and the cooling functions In
4 pipe systems, 2 separate solenoid
M M
valves are used, one for the heating

and the other for the cooling
function
RADIANT PANEL SYSTEMS

In radiant panel systems it will be
Actuators
Three-way Zone
necessary to install, after the pump,
mixing valve solenoid valve Circuit breaker
a three-way mixing valve capable
of mixing the water, so that the
maximum temperature limit set is
not exceeded The mixing valve is
managed by a central unit supplied
by the manufacturer of the radiant M
panel system
To the zone radiant panels 230 Vac
To other Power supply
devices
Circulation Mixing valve
pump management central unit

Wiring diagrams
Legend of symbols
To make the reading of the diagrams shown in the following pages easier, the various symbols and their functions are summarised.
General valve symbol
Radiators Electric radiator Boiler
ON/OFF solenoid valve
Open/close solenoid valve
Radiant panels Fan-coil Chiller
Non-return valve
M
Pump Three-way mixing valve (*)
(*) NOTE: In radiant heating panel systems this valve has the function of mixing water, to ensure that the water itself, and therefore also the floor, remain below a certain
temperature limit. For this reason, the mixing valve must be controlled by a control unit supplied by the radiant heating panel system supplier.

Wiring diagrams
4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 1 HEATING WITH RADIATORS
C4 C3 C2 C1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
F430/4
ZONE 4
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
Solenoid valve
4692
-2 -1
-3
ZONE 3 OF
+1
F
+2
+3
Solenoid valve
4692
BUS
-2 -1
ZONE 2
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
E46ADCN
Solenoid valve
4692
18.0°C
23.7°C
ZONE 1 13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
C OK
Solenoid valve
4695
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
F430/2
L
N
C1
Circulation pump
Boiler

Central unit/probe configuration
The 4 zone control unit item HD/HC/ the system configuration operations
18.0°C
23.7 °C
HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875, correctly.
as well as managing the whole of the As an alternative the TiThermo Basic
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
C OK
temperature control system, contains application dedicated to this version

a temperature probe which must of control unit can be used.
be configured physically like the For these operations refer to the
other system probes. Interact with manual supplied with the products.
the “Configure zones” menu to end
Zone 1 Central unit/probe

[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 1 -
PROBES configuration
Zone 2 probe
-2 -1
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 2 -
Zone 3 probe
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 3 -
Zone 4 probe
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 4 -
Actuators configuration
Zone actuator
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2 0 1 2 3 4 1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2
Circulation pump actuator

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 0 1 OFF -

Wiring diagrams
4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 2 Heating with Radiant panels
C4 C3 C2 C1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
-2 -1
C1 C2 C3 C4
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
ZONE 4
4692 F430/4
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
ZONE 3 +3
4692
BUS
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
ZONE 2 E46ADCN
4692
18.0°C
23.7°C
ZONE 1 13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
C OK
4695
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
F430/2
Mixing valve
L
management central
unit
C1 N
M Circulation
pump
Boiler
Distribution collector with

solenoid valves

The 4 zone control unit item HD/HC/ correctly. As an alternative the
18.0°C
23.7°C HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875, TiThermo Basic application dedicated

13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
as well as managing the whole of the to this version of control unit can
C OK
temperature control system, contains be used. For these operations refer

a temperature probe which must to the manual supplied with the
be configured physically like the products.
other system probes. Interact with
the system configuration operations

[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 1 -
Zone 2 probe
-2 -1
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 2 -
Zone 3 probe
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 3 -
Zone 4 probe
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 4 -
Zone actuator
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2 0 1 2 3 4 1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 0 1 OFF -

Wiring diagrams
4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 3 Heating with Radiant panels and heating units
C1 C2 C3 C4
ZONE 1 4695 1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4 5
ART. F430/4
18.0°C
23.7 °C
C1 C2 C3 C4
13
38
: Ven 07 Gen
C OK
F430/4
ZONE 2 4692
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
BUS
4692
ZONE 3
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
E46ADCN
F
+2
+3
ZONE 4 4692
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2
C1 C2 C1 C2
Mixing valve management

central unit F430/2 F430/2
L
C2 C1
N
Heating units distribution
collector
M
Circulation
pumps Boiler
Distribution collector with

solenoid valves
C1 C2

The 4 zone control unit item HD/HC/ correctly. As an alternative the
18.0°C
23.7 °C
HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875, TiThermo Basic application dedicated
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
as well as managing the whole of the to this version of control unit can
C OK
temperature control system, contains be used. For these operations refer

a temperature probe which must to the manual supplied with the
be configured physically like the products.
other system probes. Interact with
the system configuration operations

[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 1 -
Zone 2 probe
-2 -1
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 2 -
Zone 3 probe
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 3 -
Zone 4 probe
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 4 -
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C1 C2
Zone actuator Circulation pump actuator HEATING UNITS actuator

[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N] [ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2] [ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 1 2 3 4 1 0 0 1 0 2 0 2 1 4 1

Wiring diagrams
4 zone villa - Climaveneta fan-coil
DIAGRAM 4 HEATING AND COOLING WITH CLIMAVENETA FAN-COIL
(*) ZONE 4 (*) NOTE: the Gateway is fitted inside the FAN-COIL
during manufacturing, and is already connected to the
FAN-COIL itself through the collector found at the top on
-2 -1
the front. Therefore, once the hydraulic connection has
-3
+1 OF
F
4692FAN been completed, all that is needed is to connect the BUS.

+2
+3
GATEWAY
(*) ZONE 3
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692FAN
GATEWAY
(*) ZONE 2
-2 -1
BUS
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692FAN
GATEWAY
(*) ZONE 1 FAN-COIL connection
-2 -1
3550
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692FAN
GATEWAY E46ADCN
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
GATEWAY
CHILLER

99 zone central unit configuration
The 99 zone control unit item 3550 As an alternative the TiThermo
does not need physical configurators application can be used. For these
but, to end the system configuration operations refer to the manual
operations, interact with the supplied with the products.
OK
1 2 3
“Configure zones” menu.
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
Configuration of probes for fan-coil
Zone 1 probe Zone 3 probe

-2 -1
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA] [ZA] [ZB] [SLA]

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 3 -

0 2 - 0 4 -
HEATING AND COOLING WITH

CLIMAVENETA FAN-COIL
Electric diagram and configuration all other zones, perform the same
of the GATEWAY installed inside the type of connection, ensuring correct
Climaveneta fan-coil for the heating- configuration of the actuator for
cooling of zone 2. the specific zone, as shown in the
In order to control the fan-coils of configuration tables.
Zone 1 gateway Zone 3 gateway

[ZA] [ZB] [N] [TYPE] [ZA] [ZB] [N] [TYPE]
M Gateway
0 1 1 0 0 3 1 0

BUS 0 2 1 0 0 4 1 0
climaveneta CHILLER Wiring diagram and configuration chiller. With one chiller, a system
of the gateway which controls the can be slaved and operate both as
a heating system and as a cooling
system. The Gateway is connected
to the CLIMAVENETA chiller through
Climaveneta the collector found at the top on the
CHILLER front, and to the BUS through the

draw-out connection terminal.
Gateway Gateway chiller

[ZA] [ZB] [N] [TYPE]
BUS 0 0 1 1

Wiring diagrams
4 zone villa
DIAGRAM 5 HEATING AND COOLING WITH CLIMAVENETA AIR CONDITIONING AND COMBINATION BOILER
(*) ZONE 4 FAN-COIL connection
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692FAN
GATEWAY
(*) ZONE 3
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692FAN
GATEWAY (*) NOTE: the Gateway is fitted inside the FAN-COIL during
manufacturing, and is already connected to the FAN-COIL itself
through the collector found at the top on the front. Therefore,
(*) ZONE 2 once the hydraulic connection has been completed, all that is
needed is to connect the BUS.
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
4692FAN
GATEWAY
3550
(*) ZONE 1 E46ADCN

OK
1 2 3
-2 -1 4 5 6
-3
+1 OF 7 8 9
F
+2
+3
4692FAN
GATEWAY
F430/2 GATEWAY
C2 C1
ART. F430/2
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
Combination boiler
3 way
solenoid valve CHILLER

next >>
Heating and cooling with

CLIMAVENETA FAN-COIL
Electric diagram and configuration Correctly configures the gateway
of the GATEWAY installed inside the corresponding to the zone as
heating/cooling Climaveneta fan-coil. indicated in the configuration tables
of the following pages.
GATEWAY
M
BUS
CLIMAVENETA CHILLER
Wiring diagram of the gateway which There is thus no need to install The Gateway is connected to the
controls the chiller. A single chiller radio probe item 3455 with its CLIMAVENETA chiller through the
serves a system which can work interface. The temperature datum collector found at the top on the
both as heating and as cooling. The is made available to the MY HOME front, and to the BUS through the
attached outside temperature probe temperature control system by draw-out connection terminal.
is a device normally present in a means of the gateway.
Climaveneta system of this type.
Climaveneta
5° C
CHILLER
GATEWAY
BUS

WIRING DIAGRAMs
4 zone villa
< previous
DIAgRAM DESCRIPTION
This diagram represents an example Using TiThermo set the Outside ON, Boiler OFF, valve open towards
of a heating and cooling system Temperature (OT) value below which the Chiller To sum up, the Chiller
made with Climaveneta unit and the Boiler starts to work: for example continues to work until the OT drops
Combination boiler set 5°C below 5°C; at this point the Boiler
By means of the TiThermo software When OT is higher than 5°C the starts to work
the 99 zone control unit item 3550 Chiller manages the system When It will stay on until the OT rises above
can be programmed to use the OT is lower than 5°C the following 7°C, when the Chiller switches on
reading of the outside temperature actions take place: Chiller OFF, Boiler again
from the Climaveneta system to ON and valve open towards the
manage systems with combination Boiler NOTE: for the TiThermo software setting details
boilers The Boiler continues to work until consult the documentation supplied with the product
Depending on the outside OT rises above a value higher than itself.
temperature the control unit 5°C This selection is made to avoid
activates the most suitable and device state oscillation phenomena
convenient heating system If for example 7°C is set as threshold
depending on the heat yield value, when OT is higher than 7°C the
During the spring and autumn following actions take place: Chiller
rooms can be heated using the heat
generated by the Chiller This heat is
however not suffi cient in the winter
when a Combination boiler, generally TiThermo: example of an application window, indispensable for programming
supplied by gas, must be used and setting the temperature thresholds and the automations.
The MY HOME temperature control
system switches between the
two sources of heat, using the
outside temperature as parameter
to discriminate between spring
and autumn and winter Actuator
F430/2 manages the switching ON
or OFF of the Boiler and changes
the valve state, while the Gateway
manages the Climaveneta Chiller In
the example given here the Chiller
continues to work as long as the
outside temperature (measured
by the Climaveneta outside
probe) remains higher than a set
threshold value; below this value the
Combination boiler starts to work

The 99 zone control unit item 3350 This device does not need physical
must be used to manage systems configurators but, to end the system
with combination boiler. The configuration operations, interact
function is not in fact available on with the “Configure zones” menu
OK
1 2 3
the 4 zone control unit item HC/ and with TiThermo applications. For
4 5 6
7 8
0
9 HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875. these operations refer to the manual
supplied with the products.

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 3 -

0 2 - 0 4 -
GATEWAY FAN-COIL configuration
Zonef1 gateway Zone 3 gateway

0 1 1 0 0 3 1 0

0 2 1 0 0 4 1 0
GATEWAY CHILLER configuration
Gateway chiller
6° C
[ZA] [ZB] [N] [TYPE]
0 0 1 1
Boiler and solenoid valve actuator configuration
Boiler/solenoid valve actuator

1 2 3 4 [ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 0 5 1 6 1
C1 C2
RISCALDAMENTO

Wiring diagrams
3 zone villa
DIAGRAM 6 Heating with Radiant panels WITH WINDOW CONTACT MANAGEMENT
C4 C3 C2 C1
(*) F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
C1 T - C1 - C2
4692 ART. F430/4
ART.F482
C1 C2 C3 C4
-2 -1
-3
+1 OF
T C2 C1 F
+2
+3
ZONE 3 F482
(*) 4692
-2 -1
C2
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
BUS
3550
ZONE 2
(*) E46ADCN
4692
C1
OK
T - C1 - C2
ART.F482 1 2 3
4 5 6
-2 -1 7 8 9
-3
+1 OF 0
T C2 C1 F
+2
+3
ZONE 1 F482
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
Mixing valve management

central unit
F430/2
C1 N
M Circulation
pump
Boiler
(*) NOTE: the maximum length of the connections to the magnetic
contacts must not exceed 50 metres.

next >>
99 ZONE CENTRAL UNIT

CONFIgURATION
The 99 zone control unit item 3350 configurators but, to end the system When setting the parameters for
must be used to use the magnetic configuration operations, interact the management of the magnetic
contact management function The with the “Configure zones” menu contacts, the TiThermo application
function is not in fact available on As an alternative the TiThermo must be used Two parameters may
the 4 zone control unit item HC/ application can be used For these be set: the reaction time, and the
Hs/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875 operations refer to the manual reactivation time
This device does not need physical supplied with the products
REACTION
TIME
OK
1 2 3
REACTIvATION 4 5 6
7 8 9
TIME
0

TiThermo screen item 3550
REACTION TIME
The reaction time can be set from frame avoiding switching the needed for the changes of air, for
0 to 2 minutes and is a sort of corresponding temperature control example opening a window to close
delay to the deactivation of the zone OFF setting 0 minutes or open the shutters, or opening the
temperature control zone During deactivation is practically instant entrance door to welcome a person
this time the system completely This function is suitable for short
ignores the opening of the window openings of windows or doors not
WINDOW WINDOW WINDOW WINDOW

CLOsED OPENING CLOsING CLOsED
t = 0÷2
time can be set from

0 to 2 minutes
radiant panel ON radiant panel radiant panel radiant panel ON

kept ON kept ON

Wiring diagrams
3 zone villa
< previous
Reactivation time
The reactivation time can be set from Even if it goes against the concept of When the reactivation time is set on
5 to 55 minutes, or on unlimited. energy saving this function is useful unlimited the function is not active.
When the time set has elapsed the when the windows have been left
system reactivates the temperature open and the temperature set in the
control zone even if windows or room must be kept the same.
doors are still open.
WINDOW WINDOW WINDOW

CLOSED OPENING LEFT OPEN
t = 5÷∞
time can be set from 5
minutes to unlimited
radiant panel ON radiant panel OFF radiant panel

back ON automatically
Contact interface
configuration
The contact interface is directly Follow by connecting the AUX address 1 to 99 of the device, within
connected to the temperature configurator to the MOD1 and/or the system. The coupling between
control bus. It autonomously and MOD2 housings, for the activation the interface contact line and the
independently manages the two of the operating mode with temperature control zone must
C1 and C2 lines. It is necessary to temperature control system only. be performed using the TiThermo
configure only the line used, and not Then configure the Z1/2 and N1/2 application.
both of them. housings, in order to assign the
Contact interface of zone 1 windows

T - C1 - C2
[Z1] [N1] [MOD1] [Z2] [N2] [MOD2]
ART.F482
0 1 AUX - - -
T C2 C1
Contact interface of zone 2 and 3 windows
[Z1] [N1] [MOD1] [Z2] [N2] [MOD2]
0 2 AUX 0 3 AUX


-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 3 -
Zone 2 probe
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 2 -
Zone actuator
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2

0 1 2 3 OFF 1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2
[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 0 1 OFF -

Wiring diagrams
3 zone villa
DIAGRAM 7 Heating with Radiant panels WITH WINDOW CONTACT MANAGEMENT

FROM THE BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM
C4 C3 C2 C1
F482 F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
4692
1 2 3 4 5
C1
ART. F430/4
T - C 1 - C2
ART.F482
(*)
C1 C2 C3 C4
-2 -1
-3
+1 OFF
T C2 C 1
+2
+3
ZONE 3
4692
-2 -1
(*) C2
-3
+1 OFF
+2
+3
3550
ZONE 2
E46ADCN
4692
C1 T - C 1 - C2
ART.F482
OK
1 2 3
(*) -2 -1
4
7
5
8
6
9
-3
OFF
0
+1
T C2 C 1
+2
+3
F482
ZONE 2
F422 F430/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
(*) NOTE: the maximum length of the connections to ART.F422

C1 C2
the magnetic contacts must not exceed 50 metres. OUT
It is recommended that the balancing resistance is

installed nearby the last line contact.
3486
BUS
E46ADCN
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
Mixing valve
management central 4607
unit
C1 N
M Circulation
pump
Boiler

next >>
99 ZONE CENTRAL UNIT

CONFIgURATION
In this case the contact interface is In order to use the function for performed using the “Configuration”
connected to the burglar-alarm bus the management of the magnetic menu or the TiThermo application
only and communicates with the contacts installed in the Burglar- When setting the parameters for
temperature control bus by means of Alarm system, item 3550 must be the management of the magnetic
interface F422 The door or window used in the contacts, the TiThermo application
opening or closing signal is sent both 99 zone control unit temperature must be used Two parameters may
to the burglar-alarm system and to control system This device does be set: the reaction time and the
the temperature control system, and not require physical configurators reactivation time
is used both for safety and energy Configuration operations must be
saving purposes
REACTION
TIME
OK
REACTIvATION
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
TIME 0

TiThermo screen item 3550
REACTION TIME
The reaction time can be set from frame avoiding switching the needed for the changes of air, for
0 to 2 minutes and is a sort of corresponding temperature control example opening a window to close
delay to the deactivation of the zone OFF setting 0 minutes or open the shutters, or opening the
temperature control zone During deactivation is practically instant entrance door to welcome a person
this time the system completely This function is suitable for short
ignores the opening of the window openings of windows or doors not
WINDOW WINDOW WINDOW WINDOW

CLOsED OPENING CLOsING CLOsED
t = 0÷2
time can be set from

0 to 2 minutes
radiant panel ON radiant panel radiant panel radiant panel ON

kept ON kept ON
Wiring diagrams
3 zone villa
< previous
Reactivation time
The reactivation time can be set from Even if it goes against the concept of When the reactivation time is set on
5 to 55 minutes, or on unlimited. energy saving this function is useful unlimited the function is not active.
When the time set has elapsed the when the windows have been left
system reactivates the temperature open and the temperature set in
control zone even if windows or the room must be kept the same.
doors are still open.
WINDOW WINDOW WINDOW

CLOSED OPENING LEFT OPEN
t = 5÷∞
time can be set from 5
minutes to unlimited
radiant panel ON radiant panel OFF radiant panel

back ON automatically
Contact interface
configuration
Then configure housings Z1/2 and
N1/2 depending on the requirements Contact interface of zone 1 windows
[Z1] [N1] [MOD1] [Z2] [N2] [MOD2]
and features of the burglar-alarm
(*) (*) 4 (*) (*) (*)
system (see the burglar-alarm
technical guide). Contact interface of zone 2 and 3 windows
The coupling between the interface [Z1] [N1] [MOD1] [Z2] [N2] [MOD2]
contact line and the temperature (*) (*) 4 (*) (*) (*)
control zone must be performed

(*) NOTE: The involved contacts are C1 and C2. Only the housings of the lines used must be configured; configure
using the TiThermo application.
housings MOD1 and/or MOD2 based on the type of contact an the operating mode to be used. See table.
T - C1 - C2
ART.F482
MOD1/MOD2 Type of contact and mode
4 NC
T C2 C1 5 Balanced
6 NC - delayed
7 NC - Balanced - delayed


-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 3 -
Zone 2 probe
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 2 -
Zone actuator
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2

0 1 2 3 OFF 1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2
[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 0 1 OFF -

Wiring diagrams
6 zone villa
DIAGRAM 8 Heating with Radiant panels
F430/4 F430/4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
4692 4692
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
ZONE 4 ZONE 3
BUS
4692 4692
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
ZONE 5 ZONE 2
4692 4692
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
ZONE 6 ZONE 1
3550
F430/2 F430/2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2

E46ADCN
C1 C2 C1 C2
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
Mixing valve Mixing valve

management central unit management central unit
C1 C2
M Secondary circulation pumps M
C1
Main circulation
pump
L
Boiler
N

does not need physical configurators application can be used. For these
but, to end the system configuration operations refer to the manual
OK
1 2 3
“Configure zones” menu.
4 5 6
7 8 9
0

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 4 -

0 2 - 0 5 -

0 3 - 0 6 -
Zone actuator 1, 2, 3
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2

0 1 2 3 OFF 1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]

0 4 5 6 OFF 1
MAIN Circulation pump actuator

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 0 1 OFF -
Secondary circulation pumps actuator

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 2 1 3 1

Wiring diagrams
6 zone villa
DIAGRAM 9 RADIANT PANELS HEATING AND COOLING AND DEHUMIDIFIER FAN-COIL
F430/4 F430/4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
ZONE 4 ZONE 3
4692 4692
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
ZONE 5 ZONE 2
4692 BUS 4692
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
4692 4692
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
Humidistat 1* ZONE 6 ZONE 1 Humidistat 1*
3550
F430/2 F430/2
E46ADCN
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2
OK
C1 C2 C1 C2
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
Mixing valve 1* Mixing valve

management central unit management central unit
M C1 C2 M
Secondary Secondary
circulation circulation
pump C1 C2 pump
1*
L
Main circulation
pump
Chiller
N
NOTE: 1* the dehumidifier system is not managed through the MY HOME system.

OK
1 2 3
“Configure zones” menu.
4 5 6
7 8 9
0

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 4 -

0 2 - 0 5 -

0 3 - 0 6 -
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/2

0 1 2 3 OFF 1
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]

0 4 5 6 OFF 1
MAIN Circulation pump actuator

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 0 1 OFF -
Secondary circulation pumps actuator

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 0 2 0 3

Wiring diagrams
8 zone villa
DIAGRAM 10 HEATING WITH RADIATORS AND fan-coil COOLING
F430/4 F430/4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
BUS
4692 4692
C4 -2 -1 -2 -1
C4
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 1 2 3 4 5
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
ZONE 7 ZONE 8
4692 4692
C3 -2 -1 -2 -1 C3
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 1 2 3 4 5
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
ZONE 5 ZONE 6
4692 4692
C2 -2 -1 -2 -1
C2
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
F430/4 F430/4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
ZONE 3 ZONE 4
4692 4692
C1 -2 -1 -2 -1
C1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
F430/4 F430/4
1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4 5
ART. F430/4
1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4
ART. F430/4
5
3550
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4
E46ADCN
OK
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 1
4
2
5
3
6
7 8 9
0
C2
C1 F430/2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
Circulation C1 C2
CHILLER pump
RISCALDAMENTO
Boiler

next >>
HEATING
Wiring diagram for connecting the valves and the corresponding to be controlled. In the example
solenoid valves of zones 2, 4, 6 and actuator. The configuration must given here, zone 2 is controlled by
8 to the heating actuator. To control be made correctly, maintaining the contact C1 configured with [ZA] = 0
zones 1, 3, 5 and 7 replicate the same correlation between the actuator and [ZB] = 2.
connection between the solenoid contact and the address of the zone
C4 F430/4
C3 1 2 3 4 5
ZONE 8 ZONE 6 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C2
C1 C2 C3 C4
C1
ZONE 2 L
ZONE 4
N
COOLING
Wiring diagram for connecting the To control the fan-coils belonging correctly configuring the actuator
fan-coil to the actuator for zone 6 to zones 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 and 8 corresponding to the zone as
cooling. replicate the same connection, indicated in the configuration tables.
ZONE 6 C4 F430/4
C3 1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C2
C1 C2 C3 C4
C1= fan-coil solenoid valve
C1 C2= minimum ventilation speed
C3= average ventilation speed
M C4= maximum ventilation speed
N L
CIRCULATION PUMP
Wiring diagram for connecting
COOLING CIRCULATION the circulation pumps to the
F430/2
PUMP corresponding actuator.
1 2 3 4
C2
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 The pumps of the two systems,

HEATING CIRCULATION
C1 C2
heating and cooling, are controlled
PUMP
by a single actuator.
C1
L N

Wiring diagrams
8 zone villa
< previous

does not need physical configurators application can be used.
but, to end the system configuration For these operations refer to the
OK
operations, interact with the manual supplied with the products.
1 2 3 “Configure zones” menu.
4 5 6
7 8 9
0

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 5 -

0 2 - 0 6 -

0 3 - 0 7 -

0 4 - 0 8 -
Heating system actuator configuration
Zone 1, 3, 5 and 7 actuator

1 2
1 2 3 4 5
3 4 5 [ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
ART. F430/4
0 1 3 5 7 1
C1 C2 C3 C4
Zone 2, 4, 6 and 8 actuator

[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
0 2 4 6 8 1

Cooling system actuator configuration
Zone 1 cooling actuator Zone 5 cooling actuator

1 2 3 4 5
[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N] [ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N]
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 0 1 1 1 1 2 0 5 5 5 5 2
C1 C2 C3 C4
0 2 2 2 2 2 0 6 6 6 6 2

0 3 3 3 3 2 0 7 7 7 7 2

0 4 4 4 4 2 0 8 8 8 8 2
Circulation pump actuator configuration

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
0 0 1 0 2
ART. F430/2
C1 C2

Wiring diagrams
Service sector, 12 zones
DIAGRAM 11 2 PIPE, 3 SPEED FAN-COIL, SINGLE HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM
BUS
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
-2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
-3
+1 OF +1 OF +1 OF
F F F
1 2 3 4 5
+2
+2
+2
+3
+3
+3
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
ZONE 10 ZONE 11 ZONE 12
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
-2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
-3
1 2 3 4 5 +1 OF
F
+1 OF
F
+1 OF
F
+2
+2
+2
+3
+3
+3
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
ZONE 7 ZONE 8 ZONA 9
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
-2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
-3
1 2 3 4 5 +1 OF
F
+1 OF
F
+1 OF
F
+2
+2
+2
+3
+3
+3
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
-2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
-3
1 2 3 4 5 +1 OF
F
+1 OF
F
+1 OF
F
+2
+2
+2
1 2 3 4 5
+3
+3
+3
F430/4 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
Circulation pump
3550 1 2 3 4
C1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
E46ADCN
C1 C2
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
CHILLER

next >>
HEATING AND COOLING

Wiring diagram for connecting the zones replicate the same connection,
fan-coil to the actuator for zone correctly configuring the actuator
12 heating/cooling. To control the corresponding to the zone as
fan-coils belonging to all the other indicated in the configuration tables.
ZONE 12 C4
F430/4
C3 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
C2
ART. F430/4
C1= fan-coil solenoid valve

C1 C2 C3 C4
C2= minimum ventilation speed
C1
C3= average ventilation speed
M C4= maximum ventilation speed
N L
Circulation pump
Wiring diagram for connecting A system which can provide both
the circulation pumps to the heating and cooling is controlled by a
corresponding actuator. single pump.
F430/2
C2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
SINGLE CIRCULATION
C1 C2
C1 PUMP
L N

Wiring diagrams
Service sector, 12 zones

< previous

OK
1 2 3 “Configure zones” menu.
4 5 6
7 8 9
0

-2 -1

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 1 - 0 7 -

0 2 - 0 8 -

0 3 - 0 9 -

0 4 - 1 0 -

0 5 - 1 1 -

0 6 - 1 2 -

Heating/cooling fan-coil actuator configuration
Zone 1 actuator Zone 7 actuator

1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 7 7 7 7 1
C1 C2 C3 C4
0 2 2 2 2 1 0 8 8 8 8 1

0 3 3 3 3 1 0 9 9 9 9 1

0 4 4 4 4 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

0 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 6 6 6 6 1 1 2 2 2 2 1
Circulation pump actuator configuration

[ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
0 0 1 OFF -
ART. F430/2
C1 C2

Wiring diagrams
Several homes, 4 zones
DIAGRAM 12 RADIATOR CENTRAL HEATING SYSTEM WITH Radiant panels OF Several homes, 4 zones
Home n
-2 -1 -2 -1
ZONE 3 ZONE 2
-3
-3
+1 OF +1 OF
F F
+2
+2
+3
+3
4692 4692
18.0°C
ZONE 4 -2 -1 23.7°C ZONE 1

-3
+1 OF
F 13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
+2
+3
C OK
4692 4695
Home 2
ZONE 3 -2 -1 -2 -1
ZONE 2
-3
-3
+1 OF +1 OF
F F
+2
+2
+3
+3
4692 4692
18.0°C
ZONE 4 -2 -1 23.7°C ZONE 1

-3
+1 OF
F 13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
+2
+3
C OK
4692 4695
Home 1
Central boiler

next >>
Connection of the distribution collector and temperature control BUS system of home 2
C1 C2 C3 C4
Solenoid valve Solenoid valve
F430/4
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4

Meter
Mixing valve
Mixing valve
M management
central unit
4 zone
control unit
F430/2 18.0°C
23.7°C
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
1 2 3 4
C OK
E46ADCN
1 2 3 4
Main ART. F430/2
Solenoid valve C1 C2
C1
L
N
4692 4692 4692
-2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
-3
+1 OF +1 OF +1 OF
F F F
+2
+2
+2
+3
+3
+3
The meter is used to measure the amount of heat consumed by each home.
NOTE: The temperature control BUS system, the connection of the solenoid valve, and the meter, are the same for all homes.

Wiring diagrams
Several homes, 4 zones

< previous

The 4 zone control unit item HD/HC/ the system configuration operations
18.0°C
23.7 °C
HS/L/N/NT4695 and item AM5875, correctly. As an alternative the
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
as well as managing the whole of the TiThermo Basic application dedicated
C OK
temperature control system, contains to this version of control unit can

a temperature probe which must be used. For these operations refer
be configured physically like the to the manual supplied with the
other system probes. Interact with products.

[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 1 -
Zone 2 probe
-2 -1
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]

-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
0 2 -
Zone 3 probe
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 3 -
Zone 4 probe
[ZA] [ZB] [SLA]
0 4 -
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/4
ART. F430/2
C1 C2 C3 C4
C1 C2
Zone actuator 1, 2, 3 and 4 Main solenoid valve actuator

[ZA] [ZB1] [ZB2] [ZB3] [ZB4] [N] [ZA] [ZB1] [N1] [ZB2] [N2]
0 1 2 3 4 1 0 0 1 OFF -

TEMPERATURE CONTROL - ConfiguraTion
General concepts
The Temperature control system Zone ZA and ZB Probes address

must be appropriately configured so Address of the devices belonging The probes also have positions ZA
that it can work properly and so that to a logical zone; as an example in and ZB to define the address of the
each item can perform the required a dwelling one can talk about night devices which will receive the control
function. area, day area and cellar. (actuators). These positions have
Configuring basically means numeric configurators which enable
interacting with the unit and actuator Progressive zone number N the device to send the control.
probes, thus defining: Numeric identification of the single
For the probes and the 4 zone
actuator inside the same zone.
control unit:
a) the zone of belonging Actuator address
b) any slave probes managed The address of each actuator is
For the probes:
uniquely defined by inserting the
a) “Master” or “Slave” mode numeric configurators from 0 to 9 in
(if necessary) positions ZA and ZB. For each zone
For the actuators:
a maximum of 9 addresses can be
a) the zone of belonging defined by inserting the numeric
b) the type of load to manage configurators from 1 to 9 in position
c) the number of actuators N; a maximum of 4 or 99 zones can be
belonging to the same zone defined in a system, according to the
For the central units:
control unit used.
a) the zones of the system and Up to 99 zones can be managed in a
their name system; 2 configurators will thus be
b) the functioning mode of the needed to define the zone number.
actuators (heating, cooling, ecc.)
c) the type of load to be controlled
(solenoid valves, fan-coil, etc.)
d) the pumps in the system
e) the control mode of the pumps
(heating, cooling, etc.)
f ) the startup delay of the pumps
(if necessary)

Configurazione
General concepts
The probe which controls zone 1 is combined in the 4 zone control unit.
ZONE 4
ZONE 3
ZONE 1 ZONE 2
23.7°C
18.0°C
ZA = 0 -2 -1
ZA = 0
ZB = 1 ZB = 2
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
C OK
4 zone central unit

ZA = 0 ZA = 0 ZA = 0 ZA = 0 ZA = 0 ZA = 0
18.0°C
1 2 3 4
ZB = 1 1 2 3 4
ZB = 1 1 2 3 4
ZB = 1 1 2 3 4
ZB = 2 1 2 3 4
ZB = 2 1 2 3 4
ZB = 2
23.7°C 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
N =1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
N =2
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
N =3
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
N =1
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
N =2
1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2
N =3
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2
C OK
1 ÷ 9 max 1 ÷ 9 max
BUS
The temperature control function can manage up to 99 zone addresses. For each zone up to 9 addresses dedicated to the actuators can be managed.
ZONE ... ZONE 99
ZONE 2 -2 -1
ZA = 9
ZB = 9
-3
+1 OF
F
ZONE 1
+2
+3

-2 -1
ZA = 0
ZB = 1
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
ZA = 9 ZA = 9 ZA = 9
1 2 3 4
ZB = 9 1 2 3 4
ZB = 9 1 2 3 4
ZB = 9
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 N =1 ART. F430/2 N =2 ART. F430/2 N =3
ZA = 0 ZA = 0 ZA = 0 C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2
1 2 3 4
ZB = 1 1 2 3 4
ZB = 1 1 2 3 4
ZB = 1
N =1 N =2 N =3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
OK
ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2
1 2 3 C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 1 ÷ 9 max
1 ÷ 9 max
BUS

CONTENTS
MY HOME – Air conditioning

GENERAL FEATUREs
Air Conditioning
Integrating the MY HOME system functions, which up to now were If a probe configured as sLAVE of
with the management of the performed using the remote control the Temperature control system is
splitter air conditioning system supplied with the device, to the installed in a room, it will be possible
is now possible using the splitter Touch screen or the Multimedia to read the room temperature and
management interface, item 3456 Touch screen of the MY HOME set the splitter operation
The interface transfers all the splitter system
Touch Screen
Zone probe configured

as SLAVE
SCS/BUS
a antifurto termoregolazione automazione

videocitofonia diffusione
controllo
sonora antifurto
lan termoregolazione
controllo carichi videocitofonia
energia controllo
luci lan
tvcc controllowww
carichi irrigazione
energia
Splitter Splitter
management management
interface interface
Splitter
Splitter

MY HOME integration devices
SPLITTER MANAgEMENT TOUCH SCREEN H4684 L4684 Advanced mode

INTERFACE, ITEM 3456 AM5864 AND MULTIMEDIA Adjust the temperature

The splitter control interface is a TOUCH SCREEN HD/HC/HS4690 (sETPOINT);
device capable of controlling the Using the Touch screens, it is possible Adjust the oscillation and/or the

air conditioning system splitters to send the following commands position of the ventilation fins
by sending infrared commands, based on the interface configuration (sWING)
replacing the remote control of the mode: set the splitter speed (VEL);

splitter itself Base Mode select the operating MODE (OFF,

The association between the device Recall up to 20 favourite controls,
winter, summer, fan, dehumidifier,
and the splitter remote control, previously set during the etc )
must be performed by connecting association between the interface All these controls may be included in
the interface to the programming and the splitter In this mode, an automation scenario saved on the
software PC the controls can be recalled, as if scenario module of the system (e g
The device may be installed inside they were a scenario (without the Exit for when one goes out: switching
flush mounted boxes, behind need for being associated to the of all the lights and splitters of the
traditional devices, in distribution scenario module), also by other home)
boards, without using a DIN rail space devices, such as Local Display or The advanced mode may also be
inside the splitter scenario control This mode can be used for the splitters included in the
It is fitted with an IR transmitter with used with splitters of any brands software database list
a two metre wire, for connection to
the splitter receiver
Touch Screen
Splitter
management
interface

CONTENTS
MY HOME – Energy consumption display

GENERAL FEATURES
Instantaneous power, water and gas consumption data
Using the My Home measurement It is also possible to display the energy format to make interpretation easy
devices it is possible to display on produced on site from solar thermal By setting tariff values it is pOssible to
several user interfaces (e g Local and photovoltaic systems display the data in the form of costs
Display, 3 5” and 10” Touch Screen, The consumption can be displayed on
PC, or smartphone) not only the the touch screen as instantaneous or
electric consumptions, but also water cumulative data in graphical or table
and gas consumptions, as well as
the data from the heating central
accounting system
Dedicated icon on display

of the Touch Screen

Energy selection screen Power consumption screen
(instantaneous / cumulative)
Monthly power consumption graph Daily power consumption graph

GENERAL FEATURES
Displaying consumptions and the production data
The devices for the display of the Thanks to the use of pulse counter Using the power meters and the
consumptions can be integrated interfaces and BUS meters with 3 pulse counter interfaces, it is possible,
directly on the bus of the inputs for toroids, with the My Home when a photovoltaic or a thermal
Automation/Temperature control consumption display system it is solar system is installed, to monitor
system, or be part of a dedicated possible to display on the interfaces how much power is being generated
system, as shown in the diagram the consumptions for electricity, gas, and how much water is being heated
below In this case, a power supply and water, as well as the data from
will be necessary for the powering of the heating accounting system
the BUS, as well as a display interface
(e g Local Display, Touch Screen,
Energy Data Logger, Webserver)
Touch Screen
Compact Bus meter

power supply with toroids
Pulse counter Pulse counter

interface interface
Local Display
Water meter
with pulse output
Gas meter
with pulse output

Photovoltaic Thermal solar
panel panels
Hot water meter with

Inverter LAN network pulse output
Bus meter
with toroids Energy
Data Logger
Pulse counter
interface

GENERAL FEATURES
Measurement and display devices
PULSE COUNTER INTERFACE BUS METER WITH 3 INPUTS FOR

ITEM 3522 TOROIDS - ITEM F520
The device detects, counts, and The device measures up to three The above described functions are
processes the information (water, separate circuits, by connecting up also valid to save the data coming
gas, etc ) received from meters with to three toroids to the appropriate from solar thermal and photovoltaic
pulse outputs; the data is then made inputs systems
available to the SCS bus, and displayed The data is displayed on the Touch The device is supplied with 1 toroid
on the Touch Screens The processing Screens through the SCS Bus The and corresponding connection
and accounting functions are: processing and accounting functions cable (item 3523); it is suitable for
 instantaneous consumption are: installation inside distribution boards
(calculated as the average of 2  instantaneous consumption of 3 and switchboards and requires the
pulses received during the time lines maximum; space of 1 DIN module
unit);  cumulative hourly consumptions
 hourly, daily, and monthly for the last 12 months, daily
consumption (one year memory) consumptions for the last 2 years,
The device may be installed in monthly consumptions for the last
flush mounted boxes, behind 12 years
traditional type devices, or also
inside distribution boards, but
without taking up any DIN rail Bus meter with 3 inputs
for toroids
space
Data deletion
pushbutton
Pulse counter interface
230 Vac
connection
SCS/BUS Pulse input

connection
Device
Opto isolated status
Configurator repetition LED
socket (pulse input)
SCS/BUS
Toroid with
connection
connection cable
Configurator
socket door
DISPLAY DEVICES SYSTEM INTERFACES Central unit for load management, or
My Home offers several user Local Display, 3 5”, and 10” Touch preventively force the load
interfaces for the display of Screens are devices commonly used The Touch Screen and Multimedia
consumption/production data: for the control of the My Home Touch Screen display can also be
 System interfaces: (Local Display, functions, but can also be used to used to display consumption and
3 5” and 10” Touch Screen) display energy consumptions, and to production data for the last 12 years,
 Energy data logger control the loads Local Display can in in chart or table format (hourly,
 Portal fact be used to display consumption daily, or monthly representation)
 Each interface is capable of and production data for several Using all the previous interfaces, it
meeting several needs energies It is possible to manage up is also possible to associate several
to 10 lines, displaying on each line measurement units (m3, l, kWh, etc )
the instantaneous, cumulative daily, to the individual line/pulse counter
monthly, and annual consumptions, interface, and the corresponding
including the corresponding currency (Euro, $, £, etc )
economic values It is also possible
to operate the controlled loads,
reactivating a load disabled by the
Touch Screen
Local Display
GENERAL FEATURES
Energy data logger
The energy data logger is a device  Have a more detailed recording of The web pages of the devices
that can be used to: electric data: for each electric line, show for each individual electric
 Display on the PC or other device the user can download an excel file line or pulse counter interface the
(e g Smartphone) consumption/ every 15 minutes instantaneous consumption, the
production data, recalling the web  Set several time bands for a more daily consumption, the monthly
pages using an Internet Browser detailed conversion of the electric consumption, the average daily
 Concentrate and save data power value into an economic consumption for each month, the
consisting of 10 separate energy value (e g two-hourly, three-hourly total consumption for the last 12
lines maximum The lines can tariff ) For water and gas lines years, in a chart or table format
be the electric power lines, by there are monetary conversion
Ethernet cable
connecting F520 meters, or values without time bands (single connection
an F521 Central unit for load one-hour tariff )
management, or lines for water,  Export the data for each line/pulse
gas, or heat consumption, by counter interface in individual
Power line/device
connecting 3522 pulse counter excel files split by day, month, year status LED
interfaces  Have a simple data backup: the Pushbutton
device features a housing for
an SD memory card, on which SD memory card
housing door
consumption details for each
individual line are saved daily
SCS/BUS
connection

Portal
MY HOME WEB is a virtual platform  Fixed IP: in case of fixed IP ADSL  The My Home portal is capable of
that can be used to control all the MY subscription saving the electric consumption
HOME functions relating to comfort,  Variable IP: in case of variable IP data on an hourly basis and, thanks
safety, savings, and communication ADSL subscription to the time bands settings, convert
in your own home In developing the  Web Server Active Connection the energy value into economic
MY HOME WEB portal, BTicino has (W A C ): in case of private network value For water and gas lines there
paid special attention to ensuring connection, where the system are monetary conversion values
high levels of protection of the data cannot be directly reached by the without time bands Thanks to
transferred through the network Internet (e g Fastweb), or of non- the calculation capabilities of the
from unwanted access The most configurable router portal it is possible to save and
stringent protection criteria have display the consumption data
therefore been implemented, like: For the energy management without any limitations in terms
The use of the special https protocol, functions the Portal gives the of time and maximum number of
which makes it impossible to read at possibility of monitoring the lines The data saved are available
the origin any information transiting controlled loads (load management), for consultation as charts on
through the network, and the use of and of displaying energy web interface, inside the Energy
the 128 bit SSL (Secure Socket Layer) consumptions Using the web pages Management section of the Portal
protocol certified by the VerySign of the portal, it is in fact possible to:  Export an excel file after selecting
Certification Authority Through the  Force a load disabled by the central the time period the data should
portal, the user can control all the unit for load management, or refer to The generated export file
home automation functions installed preventive forcing, as well as to contains the consumption data
inside the home, including the display the consumptions of the and the corresponding economic
Energy Management function, from controlled load (using item F522) values
one single application, and remotely  Display the consumption/
using a PC or smartphone The production data
service is compatible with all types of
connections:

CONTENTS
MY HOME – Load control management
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

GENERAL FEATURES
The end of the black-out

The My Home load control  It gives the possibility of disabling  Its devices (central unit and
management system manages or re-enabling, using the display actuators) only require the space
the maximum power used, by interfaces, the priorities configured of one DIN module This ensure
automatically disconnecting the based on the changed needs of optimisation of spaces inside the
least important appliances in case of the customer distribution boards
overload  It gives the possibility of checking  By configuring the actuators of the
The system: on the display interfaces the load control system in automation
 Manages up to 63 loads correct operation of the load using mode, it is possible to use display
 Displays on the display interfaces the measurement of the earth interfaces to set the time delays for
(e g Local Display, Touch Screen, leakage current absorbed by the the activation of the loads at set
Webserver) the instantaneous same times
and cumulative consumption on
hourly, daily, and monthly basis, of
the controlled phase In addition,
thanks to the actuator with sensor,
it is possible to measure the actual
consumption of the controlled
load
Dedicated icon on the screen

of the touch screen

Power consumption screen Monthly power consumption graph
(instantaneous / cumulative)
Controlled loads screen Controlled load consumption display

screen (with item F522)
Diagnostic icon
Energy consumption Load control

display icon management icon

GENERAL FEATURES
Operation
Using the external toroid, the central and a number of devices depending has configurator no 3 This load
unit measures the power used by on the available supply current therefore only disconnects after the
the loads connected and compares it In the example shown, the oven, the oven and the washing machine
with the value preselected during the microwave oven, and the washing The user can reactivate the
installation (using the configurators it machine represent the loads disconnected device at any time
is possible to select powers between controlled using actuators, while using the actuator pushbutton or
1 5 and 18 kW, with tolerances up to the refrigerator, which operation is the touch screen In this case, if
+/- 20%) An actuator is associated imperative that is not interrupted, the overload condition still exists,
to each appliance being controlled is connected to his socket without the central unit will enable the
The actuator receives the information actuator operation of the selected load, but
from the central unit and disconnects In case of overload, the first will disconnect the subsequent loads
the load from the network in case of device that disconnects is the one starting from the least important,
overload considered the least important by until the overload situation is
The disconnection sequence of the user, in the example the oven, resolved
the actuators is defined during which actuator has configurator no The operating status of the loads is
the installation using a simple 1 The microwave is on the other notified both by the actuators and
configuration operation to be carried hand the most important device, the touch screens
out on the devices themselves and the corresponding actuator By configuring the actuators of the
The central unit gives the possibility load control management system
of managing up to 63 priority levels, Central unit for also in automation mode, it is
load management
possible to use the touch screen to
set the time delays for the activation
Power meter Electric distribution
board
of the loads at set times
BUS SCS
230 Vac
Non-controlled Flush mounted Flush mounted Flush mounted

socket actuator actuator actuator
230 Vac
Non-controlled load Controlled load Controlled load Controlled load

with priority 1 with priority 2 with priority 3
NOTE: inside the electric distribution board it is installed the central unit for load management

DISPLAY FUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
The central unit for load Thanks to the actuator with probe
management is capable of measuring (Item F522), it is possible to display,
the consumption of the controlled in addition to consumptions, also the
line using the toroid supplied The diagnostic, using the additional toroid
information is displayed on the touch (item 3523) of the controlled load
screens, local displays, and on the
web pages of the web server and the
energy data logger
The processing and accounting

functions are:
 instantaneous consumption of the
controlled line;
 hourly, daily, monthly and last 12
months cumulative consumptions
Controlled loads
diagnostic display screen
Diagnostic
icon
Load OK
Load near the earth leakage

disconnection limit
Load problems
(e.g. device earth connection problems)

GENERAL FEATURES
Device selection criteria
CENTRAL UNIT FOR LOAD ACTUATOR 16 A WITH CURRENT

MANAGEMENT F521 PROBE - ITEM F522
The device is capable of measuring The processing and accounting The device is an actuator with an
the input power from the electric functions are: integrated current probe for the
system and to control the status  instantaneous consumption of the measurement of controlled load
of the actuators of the load controlled line; consumptions (instantaneous
management system, to prevent the  cumulative hourly consumptions consumption and 2 independently
risk of tripping of the power meter for the last 12 months, daily resettable energy totalizers), and is
The central unit manages up to consumptions for the last 2 years, capable of performing both ENERGY
63 appliances or electric loads per monthly consumptions for the last MANAGEMENT and automation
each phase, measures currents 12 years functions
and voltages, and processes these The central unit is suitable for When configured in ENERGY
data to provide energy and power installation inside distribution boards MANAGEMENT mode, it gives the
information and switchboards and requires the possibility of measuring the load
space of 1 DIN module input power, the power and the
earth leakage current (through the
Actuator 16A
with current probe
connection of an external toroid, item
3523)
230 Vac The actuator is suitable for
connection
installation inside distribution boards
and switchboards and requires the
space of 1 DIN module
Central unit for load Device status

management LED 16A actuator
Load forcing
pushbutton
230 Vac 230 Vac

connection Configurator socket connection
door
Device status Load forcing Device status

LED pushbutton LED
Load forcing
pushbutton
SCS/BUS connection
Configurator socket Configurator socket
door door
SCS/BUS connection SCS/BUS connection

ACTUATOR 16A F523 FLUSH MOUNTED ACTUATOR 16 A LOAD CONTROL PANEL
The device is an actuator capable ITEMHC/HS/HD/L/N/NT4672N HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4673
of performing both energy Actuator conceived for installation in The load control panel is a device that
management and automation Living, Light, Light Tech and Axolute enables displaying the status of the
functions The actuator is suitable for flush mounted supports, intended loads controlled by the load control
installation inside distribution boards for the automation and/or ENERGY central unit, item F521, and force
and switchboards and requires the MANAGEMENT functions their operation independently from
space of 1 DIN module The device has: the central unit itself It is therefore
 a local load forcing pushbutton; possible to:
 a red/green two-colour LED for  Force the priority of the load
the notification of the status of the during normal operation In this
actuator; case the central unit cannot
 central unit for load management disable the load for 4 hours
red disabling signalling LED  Re-enable a load disabled by
the central unit, the duration of
this operation lasts for 4 hours,
unless the disabling key is pressed
manually
The functions that can be performed
by the load control panel can also be
performed by Local Display
Local pushbutton for load (HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4685) With Local
Load status red LED forcing/local control Display it is however possible to
Device status two-colour LED manage up to 20 loads
Flush mounted 16 A actuator
Forced load key
Local Display
Load/programming status
notification LED
Load control panel

Load control management and consumption display
BUILDING LAYOUT PHYSICAL LIMIT MAXIMUM NUMBER OF

The BUS system layout for the The maximum number of devices ACTUATORS
installation of Load Control that can be connected to the BUS The Central Unit for Load
Management System and the Display (central unit for load management, Management can control up to 63
of Consumptions System offers the actuator, power meter, and pulse actuators (appliances or electric
following advantages: counter interface) depends on the loads)
 Both for new systems, and total absorption of the same, and on If the system is solely dedicated to
installation in existing electric the distance between the connection Load Management, or if it shares the
systems, the BUS line can use point and the power supply same BUS line of the Automation/
the same conduits of the energy Temperature control system, the
system used for the wiring of If the system uses the same cable number of actuators shall depend on
power sockets However, this is as the Automation/temperature the limit of the available current
only possible when using the BUS control system, the calculation of the
cable, Item L4669, with insulation maximum number of devices must
voltage 300/500 Vdc be performed taking into account the
 Depending on the needs of the general absorption of the same
user and the type of building, the For the purpose of the above
load control actuators may be calculations, the table shows the
installed: current absorbed by each device
1. in DIN distribution board, if it is not
required to display and reactivate
the load directly in the room where
the load is located;
2. near each current socket for the
load to be controlled, to ensure the
possibility of controlling the status
and/or forcing the load
ITEM DEVICE ABSORPTION FROM BUS

F521 Central unit for load management 28 mA
F522 Actuator with probe 30 mA
F523 Basic actuator 10 mA
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4672N Flush mounted actuator 10 mA
H4684 - L4684 - AM5864 Touch screen 3.5’’ 80 mA
HD/HC/HS4690 Multimedia Touch screen 10’’ 50 mA
F520 Bus meter with toroids 35 mA
3522 Pulse counter interface 7.5 mA
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4673 Load control panel 7 mA
HD/HC/HS/L/N/NT4685 Local Display 60 mA
F524 Energy data logger 30 mA

1. The length of the connection
between the power supply and the
furthest device cannot exceed 250 m
Actuator
Junction box
Home automation distribution

board
Furthest device
2. The total length of the connections

must not exceed 500 m (extended
cable)
Actuator
Junction box
Home automation distribution

board

In order to ensure optimum distribution

of the currents on the BUS line, it is
recommended to position the power
supply in an intermediate position
A PRI
A
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
B SCS B
With E46ADCN power supply: With E49 power supply:

A =250 m max A =250 m max
B =250 m max B =250 m max
A + B =500 m A + B =500 m
The maximum current supplied The maximum current supplied
by the power supply is: 1200 mA by the power supply is: 600 mA

CONFIGURATION
The load management control and control actuators (Item F522, F523, The products may be split in two
consumption display systems must L/N/NT/HC/HS/ HD4672N) – and classes:
be correctly configured to ensure consists in physically connecting 1. Pulse counter interface (item
that they can operate correctly, the connection components, called 3522), Bus meter with 3 inputs for
and that each item can perform configurators to the appropriate toroids (item F520), Central unit for
the desired function The mode of housings of the devices load management (item F521) All
configuration must be the physical The configurators have different these devices have an address from
one The physical configuration numbers, letters, colours, or graphics 1 to 127
entails interaction with the devices
- pulse counter interface (Item
3522), bus meter with 3 inputs for
toroids (Item F520), central unit for CONFIGURATOR SOCKET CONFIGURATORS USED
load management (Item F521), load A1 is the configurator indicating the hundreds 0, 1
A2 is the configurator indicating the tens From 0 to 9
A3 is the configurator indicating the units From 1 to 9
A3-Ta From 1 to 9 (a configurator must be in this housing)
A3-Tb From 1 to 9
A3-Tc From 1 to 9
WARNING: The 0 configurator in A3-Tb, A3-Tc indicates that the toroid input is not being used. A3 or A3Ta cannot
be equal to 0. In the case of the bus meter with 3 inputs for toroids, item F520, if only one toroid is used, this must
be connected to A3-Ta.
Configuration examples:
For bus meter with three inputs for toroids, item F520, and pulse counter interface, item 3522:
WARNING: The devices in this class must be a different

VALUE OF CONFIGURATORS ADDRESSES
address from each other: for example, there cannot be
A1 0 a pulse counter interface and a bus meter with three

Toroid connected to Ta with address 001
A2 0
Toroid connected to Tb with address 002 inputs for toroids with the same address. Also two
A3-Ta 1
Toroid connected to Tc with address 003
A3-Tb 2 toroids cannot have the same address.
Bus meter with toroids
A3-Tc 3
In case two consumption/load control devices are
installed on an automation or temperature control
A1 1 bus, the configured addresses are not in conflict with
Toroid connected to Ta with address 126
A2 2
6
Toroid connected to Tb with address 127 the other devices on the system: a temperature control
A3-Ta
7 No toroid connected to Tc
A3-Tb probe configured with address 11 is not in conflict with
A3-Tc 0
a bus meter with 3 inputs for toroids with address 11.
It is possible to manage up to 20 lines (toroids)
Pulse counter interface
A1 0 maximum per power supply. Example: 6 meters for 3

A2 0
A3 4 lines plus 1 meter for 2 lines (total 20).
Pulse counter interface address 004
G
M
SM

CONFIGURATION

2. Load control actuators:
The actuators may be used both as mode requires a progressive address programs in the touch screens, and
automation actuators and ENERGY from 1 to 63 define the disconnection priorities for
MANAGEMENT actuators The These addresses are used in the the controlled load
configuration in automation mode appropriate configuration software
follows the same rules outlined
in the automation guide (see the
device TECHNICAL SHEETS); the
configuration in Energy Management CONFIGURATOR SOCKET CONFIGURATORS USED
P1 is the configurator indicating the tens From 0 to 6
P2 is the configurator indicating the units From 0 to 9
Configuration examples:
For actuator 16 A with probe Item F522 and actuator 16 A Item F523:
VALUE OF CONFIGURATORS ADDRESSES WARNING: In the case of consumption display/

load control actuators installed on an automation
Actuator 16 A with probe
A
PL
or temperature control bus, and configured also in
M automation mode
Address priority 01
P1 0
P2 1 (A, PL...), the load control actuator must not have
PF
the same address as another actuator on the
automation bus. Example: if actuator F411/1N A =
A
PL 1 PL = 1, then actuator F522 cannot be configured
Actuator 16A
M with PL=1.
Address priority 10
G
P1 1
P2 0
SYSTEM EXPANSIONS
CONSUMPTION DISPLAY LOAD CONTROL SYSTEM The “energy management” system is a
CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION very flexible system, for the installation
After installing the devices (Pulse After installing the devices and of the devices on the automation/
counter interface, item 3522, bus configuring the actuators, it is temperature control bus, or for
meter with 3 inputs for toroids, necessary that the central unit creating a system solely dedicated to
Item F520, central unit for load for load management acquires energy management, with dedicated
management, Item F521), an address the actuators on the bus, and the power supply in general, all energy
must be assigned using physical corresponding priorities configured management devices may be installed
configurators (A1, A2, A3) This For more information see the on each bus
address will then be used in the technical sheet of the central unit branch and on each expansion,
software for the configuration of for load management, item F521, provided this is allowed by the
the user interfaces (e g software for and the TECHNICAL SHEET for the absorption calculations The only
the configuration of the 3 5” touch actuators exceptions are the actuators, which,
screen) when configured in automation mode,
For more information see the during system expansions follow the
relevant product technical sheet same rules of the automation bus
(automation technical guide)
AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS DEVICES
Power bus meter with Central unit for Actuator 16 A Actuator 16A Flush mounted Pulse counter Load management
3 inputs for toroids load management with current probe Actuator 16 A interface panel
SCS IN
A1
A2
A3
G
M
3522
SM OUT
Visualisation
Load control
Diagnostic 1)
NOTE 1): in combination with additional toroid, item 3523
AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS DEVICES

Local display Touch screen 3,5 Touch screen 10 Energy data logger Webserver
Visualisation
Load control
Diagnostic 1)

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Display of electricity, water and gas consumptions
ITEM DESCRIPTION WARNING

RCCD General switch The following Touch Screens may be installed:
MCB1 4 A MCB switch
E49 Compact power supply - H4684 AXOLUTE
F520 Bus meter with three inputs for toroids - L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
3523 Toroid - AM5864 MÀTIX
Touch Screen Touch Screen 3.5”/ Multimedia Touch Screen 10” - Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
3522 Pulse counter interface
Each F520 is supplied as standard with one toroid, item 3523
The general switch RCCD must be selected depending

on general absorption. For better safety and comfort,
the installation of an additional STOP&GO device is also
recommended.
N
To the other users
L N
230 Vac
L
IG MGT1
4A
3523 Modem Router/

Switch
Touch Screen
E49 F520 F524
PRI
E49
A1 =0
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
A2 =0
A3TA =1
600 mA
SCS A3TB =0
A3TC =0
BUS/SCS
Switchboard or distribution board
A1 =0 A1 =0
A2 =0 A2 =0
A3 =2 A3 =3
3522 SCS IN
G =0 3522 SCS IN
G =0
A1
A2
A3
M =1 A1
A2
A3
M =3
G
3522 G
3522
SM =0 SM =0
M M
SM OUT SM OUT
Zener Barrier/Galvanic
insulation Barrier 1)
NOTES: 1) the barrier must meet the Atex requirements Gas meter with Water meter with
and must be installed outside the Atex area. pulse output pulse output

Display of electric consumptions on several lines

E49 Compact power supply
The following Touch Screens may be installed:
F520 Bus meter with three inputs for toroids
3523 Toroid - H4684 AXOLUTE
Touch Screen Touch Screen 3.5”/ Multimedia Touch Screen 10” - L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
RCCD General switch - AM5864 MÀTIX
MCB1-5 Linear protection switch - Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
MCB6 4 A MCB switch
General MCB switches must be selected depending on
load absorption
Each F520 is supplied as standard with one toroid, item 3523

N N on general absorption. For better safety and comfort,
L L the installation of an additional STOP&GO device is also
230 Vac
recommended.
IG
MGT1 MGT2 MGT3 MGT4 MGT5
3523
3523
Socket line 1
3523
Socket line 2
3523
Line 3
lighting
3523
Line 4
appliances
3523
Line 5
Temperature
control
(hot and cold)
Touch Screen
MGT6 E49 F520 F520
F881NA/4 PRI
A1 =0 A1 =0
A2 =0 A2 =0
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
A3TA =4
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
A3TA =1
SCS A3TB =2 A3TB =5
A3TC =3 A3TC =6
BUS/SCS
Switchboard or
To other devices if present
distribution board
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Display of produced and consumed energy

WARNING
ITEM DESCRIPTION If a photovoltaic system and a thermal solar system for The following Touch Screens may be installed:
the production of energy and hot water are installed,
E49 Compact power supply by using energy measurement devices and the pulse - H4684 AXOLUTE
counter interface the user can display the energy
produced, or the amount of heated water on the touch
3522 Pulse counter interface - Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
Touch Screen Touch Screen 3.5”/ Multimedia Touch Screen 10”
screen.
RCCD General switch General MCB switches must be selected depending on
MCB1-2 MCB protection switch load absorption
Each F520 is supplied as standard with one toroid, item

3523, for current reading

recommended.
230 Vac
L N Photovoltaic generator string L N 230 Vac
Input/output
Wh meter
Wh
MGT1
IG
Inverter String distribution board

3523
– –
+ +
L 3523
MGT2
Touch Screen
E49 F520 F520
PRI
A1 =0 A1 =0
A2 =0
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
A2 =0
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
A3TA =1 A3TA =2
SCS
A3TB =0 A3TB =0
A3TC =0 A3TC =0
BUS/SCS To other devices if present
A1 = 0
A2 = 0
A3 = 3 Water meter with
G = 0 pulse outout
M = 3
SM = 0
SCS IN Storage battery
A1
A2
A3
G
M
3522
3522
SM OUT

Display of produced and consumed energy
in exchange mode on location
WARNING
ITEM DESCRIPTION In the presence of a photovoltaic panels system

The following Touch Screens may be installed:
configured for a delivery of energy in “local exchange”
E49 Compact power supply - H4684 AXOLUTE
mode, the bus meter with 3 inputs for toroids can be
installed as shown in the figure: one toroid measures
Touch Screen Touch Screen 3.5”/ Multimedia Touch Screen 10”
the current produced by the photovoltaic panels, the
other the home consumption. - Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
RCCD General switch
MCB1-3 MCB protection switch WARNING: avoid fitting the measuring toroid directly
on the main bidirectional meter.
load absorption
recommended
Photovoltaic generator string 230 Vac

L N
Production Input/
meter output
meter Wh
Wh
MGT1 Inverter String distribution board MGT2
– –
+ +
3523
IG
3523
L
N
MGT3
Touch Screen
E49 F520
PRI
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
A1 = 0
A2 = 0
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
A3TA = 1
A3TB = 2
A3TC = 0
BUS SCS To other devices if present

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Display of the consumption of thermal power /

hot water by individual home
In an establishment with central heating, by connecting a WARNING

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Pulse counter interface to the pulse output of the meter of
E46ADCN Power supply a My Home system, it is possible to display on the touch The following Touch Screens may be installed:
...4695 4 zone central units screen the data made available by the meter (water
...4692 probe with adjustment knob - H4684 AXOLUTE
consumption of the individual home, thermal power). - L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
F430/2 2 relay DIN actuator
The meter must be have pulse outputs, and must be - AM5864 MÀTIX
F430/4 4 relay DIN actuator
3522 Pulse counter interface installed at the input of the distribution manifold. - Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
Touch Screen Touch Screen 3.5” / Multimedia Touch
Screen 10” The following 4 zone central units may be installed:
- HC/HS4695 AXOLUTE
- L/N/NT4695 LIVING/LIGHT/LIGHTECH
- AM5875 MATIX
Home n The following probes with knob may be installed:
ZONE 3
- HC/HS4692 AXOLUTE
ZONE 2
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
- L/N/NT4692 LIVING/LIGHT/LIGHTECH
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
4692 4692
- AM5872 MATIX
ZONE 4 ZONE 1
18.0°C
-2 -1 23.7°C
-3
+1 OFF
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
+2
+3
C OK
4692 4695
Home 2
ZONE 3 ZONE 2
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3
-3
+1 OFF +1 OFF
+2
+2
+3
+3
4692 4692
ZONE 4 -2 -1 23.7°C
18.0°C
ZONE 1 Meter
-3
+1 OFF
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
+2
+3
OK
Mixing valve
C
4692 4695
M management
Home 1 Mixing central unit
valve
Main solenoid
Central boiler
valve
F430/2 F430/4 Touch Screen
E46ADCN ...4695
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
ART. F430/2 ART. F430/4
C1 C2 C1 C2 C3 C4
C OK
230 Vac BUS/SCS
A1 = 0
-2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1
A2 = 0
A3 = 1
-3
-3
-3
+1 OF +1 OF +1 OF
F F F
+2
+2
+2
+3
+3
+3
G = 0
M = 2
...4692 ...4692 ...4692 SM = 0
SCS
A1
A2
IN
A3
G
M
3522
3522
SM OUT
NOTE: the pulse counter interface is recommended (M=2) to detect the thermal power

Load control management
with total consumption display

E49 Compact power supply The following Touch Screens may be installed:
F521 Central unit for load management
F523 16 A 1 M DIN basic actuator - H4684 AXOLUTE
3523 Toroid - L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
Touch Screen Touch Screen 3.5” / Multimedia Touch 10” - AM5864 MÀTIX
RCCD General switch - Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
MCB1 4 A MCB switch
...4672N Flush mounted actuator The following 2 module flush mounted 16 A actuators
may be installed
- HC/HS/HD4672N AXOLUTE
- L/N/NT4672N LIVING/LIGHT/LIGHTECH

load absorption
N
L N The general switch RCCD must be selected depending
230 Vac on general absorption. For better safety and comfort,
L the installation of an additional STOP&GO device is also
recommended
MGT1 MGT2 Each F520 is supplied as standard with one toroid,

item 3523, for current reading
IG
N
L
3523
Load Load Load
...4672N Touch
L N
Screen
E49 F521 F523 F523
PRI
A = 0 A = 0 A = 0
A1 = 0
E49
PL = 0 PL = 0 PL = 0
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
A2 = 0
G = 0 G = 0 G = 0
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
A3 = 1
600 mA
M = 0 M = 0 M = 0
SCS P = 0
P1 = 0 P1 = 0 P1 = 0
TOL = 5
P2 = 2 P2 = 1 P2 = 3
BUS/SCS

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Load control management with total display,

of loads and diagnostics

E49 Compact power supply The following Touch Screens may be installed:
F521 Central unit for load management
F523 16 A 1 M DIN basic actuator - H4684 AXOLUTE
F522 Actuator 16 A with probe - L4684 LIVING / LIGHT / LIGHT TECH
Touch Screen Touch Screen 3.5” / Multimedia Touch Screen 10” - Multimedia Touch Screen HD/HC/HS4690
RCCD General switch
MCB1 4 A MCB switch General MCB switches must be selected depending on
load absorption


N the installation of an additional STOP&GO device is also
recommended
L N
230 Vac
L F522 actuator 16 A with integrated current probe,
capable of measuring the consumptions of the controlled
load. By connecting a toroid, item 3523 to the device,
MGT1 MGT2 it is possible to measure the earth leakage current and
display the load status on the Touch screen.
IG
N
L
3523
Load Load Load Load
L N
Touch Screen
E49 F521 F522 F523 F522 F522
PRI
A1 = 0 A = 0 A = 0 A = 0 A = 0
A2 = 0 PL = 0 PL = 0 PL = 0 PL = 0
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
M = 0 G = 0 M = 0 M = 0
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
A3 = 1
SCS P = 0 P1 = 0 M = 0 P1 = 0 P1 = 0
TOL = 5 P2 = 2 P1 = 0 P2 = 3 P2 = 4
PF = 5 P2 = 1 PF = 0 PF = 0
BUS/SCS

Three-phase and one-phase load control management

E49 Compact power supply General MCB switches must be selected depending on
F521 Central unit for load management load absorption
F523 16 A 1 M DIN basic actuator
3523 Toroid The contactor must be selected depending on the
MCB MCB switch absorption of the load
FC4A... AC contactor The three-phase line must be balanced
380 Vac
R R
S S
T T
N N
MGT1 MGT2
Single-phase
R N
load
E49 F521 F523 F523

PRI
A = 0 A = 0
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
A1 = 0 PL = 0 PL = 0
A2 = 0 G = 0 G = 0
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
A3 = 1 M = 0 M = 0
P = 1) P1 = 0 P1 = 0
TOL = 1) P2 = 1 P2 = 2
BUS/SCS 1
E49 F521 F523

PRI
A = 0
A1 = 0
PL = 0 R N
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
A2 = 0
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
G = 0
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
A3 = 1
M = 0
SCS
P = 1) FC4A...
P1 = 0
TOL = 1)
P2 = 1
BUS/SCS 2
E49 F521 F523

PRI
A = 0 Three-phase load
E49
A1 = 0
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
PL = 0
A2 = 0
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
G = 0
600 mA
A3 = 1
SCS M = 0
P = 1)
TOL = 1)
P1 = 0 NOTE: 1) the configurators must be selected depending on the rated power
P2 = 1
BUS/SCS 3

CONTENTS
MY HOME – Sound system
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
GENERAL FEATURES
Sound system 2 wire stereo HI-FI
The stereo Sound System provides audio/video mixers, it will be possible perfectly integrated with the electric
sound selection and control, so that to choose between mono and system, that enable listening both to
high quality sound may be sent to multichannel systems the HI-FI system and the integrated
several rooms at the same time The Sound System consists of FM radio source
Thanks to the various available amplifiers and loudspeakers,
Flush mounted diffuser Flush mounted diffuser
Flush mounted
amplifier
Hi-Fi stereo system
Line terminator
stereo control
8-contact connector
324 MY HOME Sound system

Thanks to its complete range and the of expansion of the system, and environments, such as general
many functions that it provides, it the sound quality, mean in fact that practitioners or dentist nurseries,
represents the ideal solution for both it can be used both in domestic shop, bars, restaurants and
home and service sector applications environments (from the apartment supermarkets
The performance, the possibilities to the villa), and in service sector
Flush mounted diffuser Flush mounted diffuser
Flush mounted
amplifier
Power supply
Audio/Video node Line terminator
230 Vac
Bus
Sound system MY HOME 325

GENERAL FEATURES
Wide range of solutions
fOR THE RESIDENTIAL SEcTOR fOR THE SERVIcE SEcTOR

Mono/multichannel sound system
Extendable to up to 140

Wide range of loudspeakers
loudspeakers
Elegant and refined designs
Possibility of using the

loudspeakers for intercom
purposes
Flush mounted diffuser
Possibility of also creating

monophonic systems
Management through PC

Ceiling mounted diffuser
Flush mounted amplifier
stereo amplifier
MULTIcHANNEL SETUP: IN EAcH

ROOM IT WILL BE POSSIBLE TO
LISTEN TO THE DESIRED MUSIc
In total freedom and with full control
The multichannel setup will in will listen to the radio, while, in their
fact give the possibility to listen to own bedroom, the parents will enjoy
different music in each room at the a cd from the stereo system located
same time: in their bedroom, children in the living room
up to 4 sound sources different music for each room
multichannel matrix
otHer sourCes
note: the multichannel matrix has four more inputs, for the connection of entrance panels, video door entry systems, and/or cameras.

Integration with other MY HOME applications
and the 2 wire video door entry system
The Sound System can be integrated with

other MY HOME applications and with
the 2 wire video door entry system, for
the creation of useful scenarios, such as:
1. With the simple pressure of one 2. Automatically lower the 3. Make a call from the video
key it will be possible to rise the music volume to better hear handset, with the voice carried
rolling shutter, and switch the radio communications from the handset, or through the loudspeakers, to look for
or the stereo on, to have the desired the video door entry systems people, or for verbal communication
music playing in the background in general
example of implementation of scenario 1

Automation system: sCs/sCs interface: sound system
lights and shutters to integrate the sound system with automation
= white BUS cable (for sound system) = grey BUS cable (for automation)
example of implementation of scenarios 2 and 3
Video door entry system Audio/video node or multichannel matrix: sound system
common for video door entry system and sound system
= white BUS cable (common for video door entry system and sound system)
TWO WIRE SIMPLIcITY

The installation of the sound system applications, also this system may be The Sound System uses the same
is simple and accessible easily expanded and modified at a power supply and cable of the 2 wire
Just like all other MY HOME later date door entry system

GENERAL FEATURES
Installing a system
Irrespective of the solution selected, To them, it will then be necessary

when installing a sound system the to add all those devices, common
following components will always be to every system, that enable the
required: application to function: power
1. Audio/video mixers; supply, sheathed pair, configurators,
2. Sound sources; line terminals etc
3. Sound Amplifiers;
4. Control device;
5. Loudspeakers
1 AUDIO/VIDEO MIXERS multichannel matrix:

for single channel systems with several sound sources used at the
The choice of one of the four audio/ same time.
video mixers depends on the type of
system being installed These devices
enable the distribution of the sound
from the sound sources through
the amplifiers located in the various Audio/Video node:
rooms for single channel systems
with several sound sources
used one at the time.
Video adapter:
for basic systems with only one
sound source.
Compact power supply:

this is a Video AdAPter integrated inside a power
supply. single device performing the audio/video mixer
and power supply functions. suitable for basic systems
with only one sound sources (max available current
600 mA). see dedicated diagram 1 in the section.
installation examples.

2 SOUND SOURcES
Sound sources are devices interfaces for connection of external

generating a stereo audio signal sound sources (e g HI-FI system,
BTicino offers radio synthetisers and IPOD with dock-station)
rCA input
radio tuner
source insulator
to be used with rCA input only,
when the sound source is not
battery powered
stereo control
3 AMPLIfIERS
Devices that amplify the audio
signal form the sound sources to the stereo amplifier da incasso:
permette l’amplificazione del segnale oltre a
loudspeakers found throughout the tutte le funzioni di comando on/off, volume,
system selez. sorgente, stazione o brano Cd
din stereo amplifier:

directly powered at 230 Vac, it enables the
creation of extended systems (up to 140
loudspeakers). suitable for service sector
environments, such as offices, restaurants,
supermarkets, etc...
Power amplifier:
enables to faithfully reproduce the sound signal.
Fitted with oLed display, for the displaying of all the
parameters. 10 settable equalisation levels, and 10
preset ones.

GENERAL FEATURES
Installing a system
multimedia touch:
4 cONTROL DEVIcE multimedia station providing control of
the sound system and of all the my Home
These devices are available in applications, as well as the Bticino video
several versions: from simple ones, systems.
capable of managing ON/OFF and touch screen:

a simple touch of the screen
volume adjustment controls from will be enough to manage the
the amplifiers that can be found in sound system and all existing
my home applications
the various rooms, to more advanced
products, for radio channel and
sound source selection, up to the
possibility of remote control of the
whole system
radio control:
management of all control
functions: useful for system
expansion
touch keys:
For stereo loudspeakers
Local display: on/off control and volume
comando a touch display per gestione adjustment
amplificatori, on/off, volume, selez. stazione
nighter e whice soft touch control:

for stereo loudspeakers on/off
special control: control and volume adjustment
management of amplifiers, on/off
control, volume, radio station and Cd
track selection; design complemented
by appropriate key covers
Knob control:
on/off, volume, radio
station and cd track ir remote control (infrared):
radio remote control:
selection for the management of all control
management of all control functions.
functions
Preset for use by disabled people

muLtiBoX flush mounted box:
5 LOUDSPEAKERS suitable for the residential sector
The sound system can be used

with all 8 and 16 ohm loudspeakers
available on the market wall-mounted, slimline:
35 mm thickness, for
BTicino offers solutions that meet indoor use
the needs of all main installation
environments
Ceiling mounted 240 mm:

for the service sector
Ceiling mounted 100 mm:

Ceiling mounted,
60x60 mm panel:
Flush mounted box item 506e:

suitable for the residential sector

GENERAL FEATURES
Installation examples
This section of the guide shows some 3. With multichannel matrix - 8. Integration of the video door
examples of wire systems, providing multichannel stereo system entry system on the same branch -
some general information on the 4. Expansion with audio/video node with flush mounted amplifiers
various types of installations that or multichannel matrix - several inputs 9. Installation of monophonic
can be obtained Detailed wiring 5. Expansion with audio/video systems
diagrams can be found later on, in a node or multichannel matrix - several 10. Example with independent power
specific section of this guide outputs with DIN amplifiers amplifier - without My Home Bus
6. Expansion with audio/video 11. System with audio/video node
LIST Of SUGGESTED node or multichannel matrix - and floor distribution block
INSTALLATION EXAMPLES several outputs with flush mounted
1. With compact power supply - amplifiers
basic stereo system 7. Integration of the video door
2. With audio/video node - entry system on the same branch -
single channel stereo system with DIN amplifiers
1 EXAMPLE WITH cOMPAcT POWER SUPPLY - BASIc STEREO SYSTEM
Using the compact power supply sound source in the system and flush To assess the maximum number of
item 346030 you can build a basic mounted or DIN rail amplifiers can be amplifiers that can be installed, use
Sound system connected in output (on one branch the calculation method starting from
This solution lets you have just one only) 600 mA
Loudspeaker Loudspeaker Loudspeaker Loudspeaker
Amplifier Amplifier
2 Bus
Line terminator sound sources

Audio/video
mixer
Bus with star wiring

Compact
power supply Bus with in-out wiring
2 Bus Bus
Bus with free wiring
radio tuner
2 EXAMPLE WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE - SINGLE cHANNEL STEREO SYSTEM
With the audio/video node, the The example proposed includes: Integrated video door entry

sound sources can be mixed on its 2 sound sources (radio and RCA
entrance panel and handset (the
4 outputs The node is suitable both input for the connection of a stereo volume of the music source is
for service sector environments and system) that can only play music automatically lowered in case of
small domestic environments one source at the time call, sending of voice messages
through the loudspeakers)
Loudspeaker Loudspeaker
Amplifier Amplifier
Bus Handset
2
on
2
Line terminator Line terminator
Bus
Bus 2
sound sourCes
sorGenti sonore Audio/video Audio/video
node mixer Power supply
Bus 2 2
Bus
2 Bus
radio tuner 2
source insulator rCA input

stereo

GENERAL FEATURES
3 EXAMPLE WITH MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX - MULTIcHANNEL STEREO SYSTEM
The multichannel matrix is the ideal is particularly suited for residential source) that may play music at the
solution for anyone who wants to installations, such as villas, homes same time;
have various sound sources active and large apartments, where Video door entry system including

in different rooms at the same integration with the 2 WIRE video integrated entrance panel, handset
time, guaranteeing full freedom door entry system and other MY and cameras for cctv functions
of listening and control With the HOME applications is required (the volume of the music source
multichannel matrix, the sound The example proposed includes: is automatically lowered in case
sources can be mixed on its 8 3 sound sources (radio, stereo
of call, sending of voice messages
outputs The multichannel matrix control, and RCA input for external through the loudspeakers)
room 1 room 2
Amplifier Amplifier
Handset
on
2 2
2
Audio/video
Bus
Bus Bus mixer
Power supply
multichannel
matrix
2 Bus
2 2
Bus 2 sound sourCes
2 2 Bus
Bus 2
Bus Bus
2
Bus
Bus
entrance panel Cameras radio tuner stereo control rCA input source insulator

4 EXAMPLE Of EXPANSION WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE OR MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX - SEVERAL INPUTS
The Sound System can be integrated be connected to an additional audio/ Sound sources may not be installed
with the 2 wire video door entry video node It is possible to connect on the node connected in cascade
system This integration may cause one additional audio/video node for This solution gives the possibility of
the complete saturation of the mixers each input of the audio/video node, installing up to 16 entrance panels or
inputs If it is necessary to increase or the main multichannel matrix (only cameras, when a matrix is used as the
the number of inputs for cameras or inputs dedicated to the video door main mixer
entrance panels, these devices may entry system)
Amplifier Amplifier
Handset
Bus 2
on
Loudspeaker
Loudspeaker
Line terminator
2
Line terminator
Bus 2
Bus
Power supply
Audio/video
node
or multichannel
matrix
2 Bus
Bus 2
2 Audio/Video node
Bus
only cameras or
Bus
entrance panels may
radio tuner 2 be connected in this
branch
2
Bus 2
Bus
source insulator rCA input 4
stereo
entrance panel
instALLAtion note: only audio/video nodes may be installed in cascade to the main mixer
Cameras
wArninGs: if the addition of additional sources is when performing a cascade connection, the following extend the system with 3 or more nodes installed in
required (particularly cameras), or if the outputs of must be taken into account: cascade);
the audio/video node (item F441), or the multichannel • Cascade connection of the multichannel matrix is • Only 2 wire entrance panels and cameras may be
matrix (item F441m) are not enough, the system not possible; connected to the node installed in cascade. sound
can be expanded. these expansions are obtained by • Only one connection in cascade, providing more sources cannot be connected.
cascade connection of an additional audio/video node. inputs and outputs, is possible (it is not possible to Above are some examples that are normally possible.
GENERAL FEATURES
5 EXAMPLE Of EXPANSION WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE OR MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX - SEVERAL INPUTS WITH
DIN AMPLIfIERS
By connecting an audio/video node module (item 346851), it is possible only) Thanks to this solution, useful
on the output to another mixer, to expand the system to up to 70 for service sector environments, up to
combining it to the system expansion amplifiers (DIN amplifiers, item F502, 140 loudspeakers may be installed
Ceiling mounted loudspeakers Ceiling mounted loudspeakers Ceiling mounted loudspeakers Ceiling mounted loudspeakers
* * * *
Amplifier Amplifier
Line terminator Line terminator Line terminator Line terminator

Ceiling mounted Ceiling mounted Ceiling mounted Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers loudspeakers loudspeakers loudspeakers
* * * *
Amplifier Amplifier
2 2
Audio/video
2 2 node Power supply
Patch cord
system
radio tuner
expansion Patch
Audio/video
module cord
node
or
multichannel
matrix Power supply
2
2
Bus
2
Bus
source rCA input

stereo insulator * din amplifiers, item F502, are powered by 230 Vac
6 EXAMPLE Of EXPANSION WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE OR MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX - SEVERAL INPUTS WITH
fLUSH MOUNTED AMPLIfIERS
By exploiting the setup shown above to expand the system, enabling 8 flush mounted amplifiers with 16Ω
and replacing the main audio/video the installation of 4 flush mounted ohm loudspeakers on the output of
node with a matrix, it is possible amplifiers with 8Ω loudspeakers, or the matrix and the audio/video node
Amplifier Amplifier
Line terminator Line terminator Line terminator Line terminator
Amplifier Amplifier
2
Audio/video
node Power supply
2
system
expansion Patch cord
matrix or
module
Audio/Video node
2 2
2
Bus
radio tuner rCA input source stereo

insulator
GENERAL FEATURES
7 EXAMPLE Of INTEGRATION Of THE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM ON THE SAME BRANcH - WITH DIN AMPLIfIERS
The diagram below shows the In the example, DIN rail amplifiers, Maximum 10 DIN rail amplifiers

possibility of connecting both item F502, are used for each output of the audio/video
amplifiers and audio/video handsets The calculation of consumptions mixer
to the output of a mixer branch remains unchanged:
Ceiling mounted loudspeakers Ceiling mounted loudspeakers

Handset
on
* *
Amplifier
Line terminator
Ceiling mounted Ceiling mounted Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers loudspeakers loudspeakers
* * *
Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier
2
2
2
Audio/video
node
or multichannel
Power supply
matrix
Bus
2
2
Bus 2
radio tuner
* din amplifiers, item F502, are powered by 230 Vac
entrance panel

8 EXAMPLE Of INTEGRATION Of THE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM ON THE SAME BRANcH - WITH DIN AMPLIfIERS
The integration on the same output If an output branch is fitted with

If an output branch is fitted with

branches of the mixers between a flush mounted amplifier and more than one flush mounted
amplifiers and handsets can also be a handset, the installation of an amplifier, it will be necessary to
performed with a flush mounted
additional power supply is not install an additional power supply
amplifier
necessary for each handset installed (any 2
When calculating consumptions, the
following must be taken into account: wire handset)
Loudspeakers
Handset
Handset extra
power supply
on
on
Amplifier
Loudspeakers Loudspeakers
Amplifier Amplifier
2 2
matrix or Power supply

Audio/Video node
2
2
2 2
radio tuner
rCA input source stereo
entrance panel insulator

GENERAL FEATURES
9 EXAMPLE Of INSTALLATION Of MONOPHONIc SYSTEMS
The Sound system has been mainly The wiring of amplifiers remains
When a flush mounted amplifier

conceived for stereo systems unchanged, following standard is used, the sound system must be
However, should it become installation requirements connected to the “+” terminal of
necessary to install monophonic When the item F502 DIN rail
one channel and to the “-” terminal
systems, for example for the service amplifier is used, it will be necessary of another channel
sector (supermarkets, shopping to connect configurator 3 to the M3 When choosing these installation

centres, etc ), installation will still be housing, and it will only be possible solutions, it will only possible to
possible, by following some simple to connect one loudspeaker, or connect the range of loudspeaker
precautions: two mono loudspeakers, on the included in the BTicino catalogue
amplifier outputs
Loudspeaker Loudspeaker Loudspeaker

note: use 8Ω or 16Ω
loudspeakers only
Amplifier note: it is possible to connect a

Amplifier (rear view)
loudspeaker, or use both outputs by
installing two monophonic loudspeakers
Bus 2
(Configurator m3 = 3)
Bus
Power supply
Audio/video
node
2
2
radio tuner
stereo
stereo control
10 EXAMPLE WITH INDEPENDENT POWER AMPLIfIER – WITHOUT MY HOME BUS
Due to its qualities that ensure high This use is suitable for broadcasting DIN switchboards powered with
performances in terms of faithful the sound signal from an MP3 reader, 110 - 230 Vac power line voltage,
reproduction of the signal, the F503 a CD, or similar device, in a small with the sound signal connected
power amplifier may also be used environments (individual rooms) to the AUX audio input, through a
independently from the MY HOME The installation requires that the standard 3 5 mm stereo jack
BUS amplifier is placed inside suitable

GENERAL FEATURES
11 EXAMPLE Of SYSTEM WITH AUDIO/VIDEO NODE AND fLOOR DISTRIBUTION BLOcK
By using this particular setup, it is the item F441 audio/video node and up to 40 DIN rail amplifiers in total,
possible to fully saturate the Sound DIN rail amplifiers, item F520 (item with up to 10 of them connected to
System using only one output of the F502 amplifiers must be powered by each individual output of the floor
audio/video node This particular 230 Vac power supply) distribution block, item 346841
solution can only be achieved using The solution proposed includes
Line terminator
Floor
distribution
Ceiling mounted loudspeakers block
Amplifier
din
Line terminator
Ceiling mounted loudspeakers
Amplifier
din
Line terminator
Amplifier Amplifier
din din
Line terminator
Floor
distribution
radio tuner block
Audio/video
node
Bus 2
2

Line terminator
Floor
distribution
block Ceiling mounted loudspeakers
Amplifier
din
Line terminator
Amplifier
din
Line terminator
Amplifier Amplifier
din din
Floor
distribution Line terminator
block
stereo control
Power supply
2
Bus stereo
Wiring
WIRING WITH AUDIO/VIDEO

NODE remember some installation general where the signals from the external
When wiring the sound system, by rules: the distribution system is stereo sources and the wirings from
means of the audio/video node, made by means of star wiring, the control devices and amplifiers
converge
in/out wiring.
- the outputs are connected to the audio/video node by means of in-out wiring.
- the audio/video used node outputs must be closed with the line terminator.
Line
terminator
Amplifier ON
special ON ON
Amplifier
control
OFF OFF
Local OFF
display
Line
terminator
outputs
Bus with star wiring

BUS
Audio/video star centre Bus with in-out wiring
node
inputs
SCS
Free wiring
- the Bus is connected with free wiring
- on this line it can connect the special controls and the sCs/sCs interfaces for combination with
the other my Home systems.
touch screen
Power supply
ON
special control
BUS
sound sourCes
OFF
OUT
F422
3495
IN
L L
ON
R R
IN OUT sCs/sCs interface

star wiring OFF
- the sound sources are connected by means of star wiring

special control
- one source per input.

WIRING WITH MATRIX
The wiring of the multichannel matrix The first 4 inputs are dedicated to 2
The rooms must be connected in

has a star topology where all the wire entrance panels and cameras increasing order (output 1 - room 1,
signals of the sound system devices The subsequent 4 inputs are
output 2 - room t, etc )
converge to During the wiring dedicated to the sound sources It is not possible to have two rooms

procedure, the following must be Each output can only manage one
on the same output
taken into account: room
in/out wiring. room 1 room 2

- the matrix outputs must be closed using the line terminal
- each output can only have one room
- the rooms must be in increasing order
Line terminator
terminatore
di linea
Amplifier special
ON Amplifier
ON
control ON
Local Line terminator

OFF OFF
display OFF
room 3
room 4
room 8
outputs Bus with star wiring
BUS
multichannel star centre Bus with in-out wiring
matrix
inputs
Free wiring
- the Bus is connected with free wiring
- on this line it can connect the special controls and the sCs/sCs interfaces for combination with
the other my home systems.
touch screen
Power supply
ON
special
BUS
control
sound sourCes
OFF
OUT
F422
IN
ON
sCs/sCs
star wiring OFF interface
- the first 4 inputs are dedicated to 2 wire entrance panels and cameras.
- the subsequent 4 inputs are dedicated to stereo sound sources special control
- only one source per input.

Maximum distances
When sizing the system remember the wiring of the BUS 2 wire Sound/ with suitable insulation (e g item
the following system limits as a Video door entry System and 336904)
function of the type of amplifier the accessory wirings (cables for Failure to respect the above
installed and the impedance features loudspeakers etc ) in separate piping provisions may affect the quality of
of the loudspeaker used from the power cables (230V line) the audio signal reproduced
To keep the fidelity of the audio The above wirings can only share
signal reproduced unaltered, lay inside junction boxes using cables
230 Vac
Amplifier
Amplifier
ON
- max. 30 m with cable 1.5 mm2
- max. 15 m with cable 0.5 mm2
max. 10 m
OFF
Loudspeakers A Loudspeakers
max. 300 m
Power supply
max. 200 m
max. 300 m
Audio/Video node or
multichannel matrix
SCS
max. 200 m max. 5 m
Generic audio source
MAX. DISTANcE BETWEEN THE DEVIcES (A)

Maximum cable length on the basis of the number of flush mounted amplifiers installed along an output of the audio/video Node
loudspeaKer wiTh no. 1 wiTh no. 2 wiTh no. 3 wiTh no. 4

impedance amplifier amplifiers amplifiers amplifiers
Using cable item 336904 8Ω 160 m 60 m - -
16 Ω 200 m 160 m 100 m 60 m
Using cable item UTP cat.5E 8Ω 80 m 30 m - -
16 Ω 160 m 80 m 50 m 30 m
NOTE: - using amplifiers DIN item F502, a maximum of 10 amplifiers can be cabled for each audio/video node output,
- for the lengths of the Video door entry wirings, rfer to the Technical Communication Guide,
- total stretched cable max 800 m.
System consumption calculation
The system absorption is always System with multichannel matrix:

The maximum number of DIN

calculated whenever the diagrams add together the maximum rail amplifiers, item F502, can be
shown afterwards in the guide are consumption of all sources (they 40 when the audio/video node is
not followed. When calculating may all be on at the same time). used, and 80 if the multichannel
the current absorbed by the B) Calculation of the current matrix is used. In any case, the
components, remember that the consumed by flush mounted maximum number will depend
maximum current which can be amplifiers: item H4562, item L4562 on the consumption of the input
supplied by the power supply: 1200 and item AM5742 consider the sources.
mA (600 mA if using item 346030). consumption in the “ON” position The maximum current of each

REQUIREMENTS: for each type of load connected (see output of the mixers must be below
A) Calculation of the current table B on the following page). 600 mA continuous ma (example:
absorbed by the sound sources C) When building a basic system maximum 2 flush mounted
Systems with audio/video node:
(without expansions) remember that: amplifiers with 8 ohm loudspeakers,
add together the source with the there must be a maximum of 100
or 4 flush mounted amplifiers with
highest consumption in the “on” scs devices. 16 ohm loudspeakers.
position, and the consumption of The maximum number of

all other sources during standby amplifiers item H/L4562 and
AM5742 must not exceed 8.
2 wire sound system
Use the “2 wire System” guide *

Sound system combined with the 2 wire video door YES
entry system?
* For quick reference see tables C and D
NO
You have 1200 mA available
System with multi-channel matrix item f441m System with audio/video node item F441
Subtract the total absorption of the sources, Subtract the maximum absorption of the source
they could work simultaneously which absorbs most and subtract the absorption
(see table A) In stand-by of the other sources in the system
(see table A)
When calculating the absorptions consider the amplifiers as well:

• Flush mounted amplifiers item h/l4562 - am5742 (see table b)
• DIN guide amplifiers item F502 subtract 5 mA for each amplifier
IF THE RESULT IS >=0 mA and at the output to the audio/video mixers the current is less than 600 mA continuous (for each branch) THE SYSTEM CAN BE CONSTRUCTED.
If not look at the system again using more DIN rail amplifiers and making each system expansion following the layout examples in this guide.
System consumption calculation
Table A – 2 wire Sound system component absorptions

Item Description Absorption Item Description Absorption
F441M Multichannel matrix 60 mA H4651M2 Special control 6 mA
F441 Audio/Video node 20 mA L4651M2 - AM5831M2 Special control 8.5 mA
346830 - 346030 Video adapter 0 mA HC/HD/HS4575 Radio interfaces 22 mA
Compact power supply L/N/NT4575N
F500 - F500COAX Radio tuner 12 mA (stand-by) HC/HD/HS 4575SB Radio interfaces 33 mA
50 mA (in ON) L/N/NT4575SB
F500 N 5 mA (stand-by)
20mA (in ON)
L4561N Stereo control 12 mA (stand-by) HC/HD/HS4653/2/3 Soft Touch 15 mA
40 mA (in ON)
HC/HD/HS4560 - RCA input 12 mA (stand-by) HC/HD/HS4563 Knob control 5 mA
L/N/NT4560 - 30 mA (in ON) L/N/NT4563
AM5740
F502 DIN amplifier Max. 10 amplifiers HC/HD/HS4654 IR receiver 8.5 mA
for each mixer output L/N/NT4654N - AM5834
H4562 - L4562 - AM5742 Flush mounted amplifier See table B HC/HD/HS4657M3 White glass controls, Nighter, 30 mA (3 mod.)
HC/HD/HS4657M4 Whice 40 mA (4 mod.)
HW/H/L4684 - AM5864 Colour TOUCH SCREEN 80 mA HC/HD/HS4685 - L/N/NT4685 Local display 60 mA
Table B – absorptions of the Flush mounted amplifiers H/L4562 - AM5742

Item Description Absorption
H4562 AXOLUTE flush mounted amplifier Stand-by 6 mA
L4562 LIVING, LIGHT and LIGHT TECH flush mounted amplifier ON 250 mA with 8 ohm loudspeakers on 2 L-R outputs
AM5742 Màtix flush mounted amplifier 130 mA with 8 ohm loudspeaker on 1 L-R output
130 mA with 16 ohm loudspeakers on 2 L-R outputs
90 mA with 16 ohm loudspeaker on 1 L-R output
40 mA (MUTE)
NOTE: when the 2 wire Sound system is combined with the 2 wire system calculate the absorption of the amplifiers in MUTE (40mA)
EXAMPLE 1
A calculation example considering The layout is made with the multi- sources must be considered as all
the diagram called Small house channel matrix and in this case, to active.
(diagram 2) is proposed below. calculate the absorptions, the sound
Items which absorb current QuantitY Absorption (mA)

F500 Tuner 1 1 x 50 (in “ON)
L4561N Stereo control 1 1 x 40 (in “ON)
L4562 Flush mounted amplifier 6 (10 x 16 ohm Loudspeakers and 2 x 8 ohm Loudspeakers) 5 x 130 + 250
F441M Multichannel matrix 1 1 x 60
L4575N Radio interface 1 1 x 22
TOTALE 1072
EXAMPLE 2
To better understand the calculation the small house but using the
of the absorptions using the multi- audio/video node instead of the
channel matrix or the audio/video multi-channel matrix.
node, we give the same example of
Items which absorb current QuantitY Absorption (mA)

F500 Tuner 1 1 x 50 (in “ON)
L4561N Stereo control 1 1 x 12 (in “stand-by)
L4562 Flush mounted amplifier 6 (10 x 16 ohm Loudspeakers and 2 x 8 ohm Loudspeakers) 5 x 130 + 250
F441 Audio/Video node 1 1 x 20
L4575N Radio interface 1 1 x 22
TOTAL 1004
INTEGRATION WITH VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
The tables below show the consumption data for video door entry system devices
Table C - Audio/video source absorption

Item Description Absorption Item Description Absorption
342150 SFERA Speaker module 30 mA 342704 MINISFERA keys 30 mA
342170 SFERA Speaker module 30 mA 342911 Audio LINEA 2000 30 mA
342921
342931
342941
342971
342972
342200 SFERA Nameplate module 15 mA 342951 B/W and Colour Video LINEA 2000 30mA
342961
342981 B/W and Colour LINEA 2000 METAL 30 mA
342982
342991
342992
342240 SFERA 4-key module 15 mA 346150 8/2 WIRE interface 110 mA
342510 SFERA B/W Camera module 15 mA 346200 Actuator for generic loads
342550 SFERA colour Camera module 15 mA 346230 Door lock actuator 10 mA
342600 SFERA Alphanumeric Pulse-dialling 110 mA 346810 2 WIRE PABX interface
342610 SFERA Numeric Pulse-dialling 15 mA 346850 Apartment Interface (INT terminal) 15 mA
342630 Speaker module with call SFERA graphics 110 mA 346851 Expansion module in MOD=5 (OUT terminal) 15 mA
342640 Keypad for Pulse-dialling SFERA graphics 15 mA 346851 Expansion module in MOD=0 (OUT terminal) 50 mA
346991 Universal Speaker module 30 mA 347400 COAX/2 WIRE interface 15 mA
346992 Pushbutton extender 15 mA
342708 MINISFERA video 30 mA
342702 MINISFERA audio 30 mA
The absorption values for the individual source have been approximated to multiples of 5 mA
NOTE: The locally supplied entrance panels must not be considered in the absorption calculation.
Table D - Audio/video receiver absorption

Description Absorption Description Absorption
PIVOT audio handset/ Video handset 5 mA Floor distribution block 15 mA
SWING audio handset/ Video handset 5 mA Audio/Video node 20 mA
SPRINT audio handset/ Video handset 5 mA Apartment interface (EXT terminal) 5 mA
AXOLUTE VIDEO STATION 10 mA* Expansion module in MOD=5 (IN terminal) 5 mA
AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY 10 mA* Expansion module in MOD=0 (IN terminal) 30 mA
POLYX VIDEO STATION 10 mA* Door lock actuator 15 mA
POLYX VIDEO STATION 10 mA* Door lock actuator 15 mA
POLYX DISPLAY 10 mA* Light Actuator 15 mA
Sound System Amplifier H4562 or L4562 5 mA
* If they are locally supplied they absorb 5 mA
The absorption values for the individual receiver have been approximated to multiples of 5 mA

CONFIGURATION
General rules
2
To ensure that each device of the This operation is completed by
Sound System performs the correct connecting to the appropriate housings
1
function, it is necessary that it is of the devices configurators identified
A
PF
M
correctly configured The following by a number or a letter

must be set:
Legend 3
the device address within the
1. configurato socket
system (device id); 2. description of the configurator socket
3. tool for the connection of the configurator
the operating mode (what does it

need to do) note: for the specific configuration of each individual item refer to its technical data sheet (see the technical sheets section).
ADDRESSING Of DEVIcES USING

THE MULTIcHANNEL MATRIX,
ITEM f441M
The use of the multichannel matrix configured on output 1 (OUT 1), The subsequent 4 inputs are for

entails a specific addressing order the second room on output 2 (OUT the connection of stereo sound
for the rooms It must be taken into 2), up to the eight room (OUT 8) sources
account that in order to ensure It is not possible to have several
Taking into account these
multichannel performance it is rooms on the same matrix output requirements, the configuration of
necessary that: branch the devices (function of the devices,
The order of the rooms must be
The first 4 inputs are for the
single configuration, master-slave,
from 1 to 8, with the first room connection of 2 wire entrance POint-point, etc ) remain unchanged
panels and cameras in accordance with the indications on
cORREcT MODE the following pages
A = 2 A = 2
ON
PF = 1 PF = 9 OFF
room 2
A = 1 A = 1 ON
A = 3 A = 3
PF = 9 PF = 1 PF = 1 PF = 9
room 4
OFF OFF OFF OFF
room 5
room 1 room 3
room 6
room 7
room 8
OK
s=4
s=3
s=2
S = 1
2 wire video door entry system and cameras sound sources

WRONG MODE
one room per output
NO
one room per output
OFF OFF
room 2 room 3
ON
OFF
room 1 room 2 room 8
room 3 (out 3) room 8 is in out 8
sources sources
the first 4 inputs are for to 2 wire entrance panels and cameras the last 4 are for sound sources
ADDRESSING Of DEVIcES
USING THE AUDIO/VIDEO NODE,
ITEM f441
The configuration of the devices Configure the sources in

using the audio/video node does chronological order
not require special attention, as Taking into account these

shown on the matrix It is however requirements, the configuration
recommended to follow these of the devices (function of the
precautions: devices, single configuration,
Separate the rooms (one room per
master-slave, POint-point, etc )
output) remain unchanged in accordance
If possible, maintain a chronological
with the indications on the
order of the rooms (room 1 output following pages
1, room 2 output 2, etc )
CONFIGURATION
General instructions
In order to understand the addressing logic of the devices, it is deemed appropriate to clarify some of the terms that occur
regularly in this guide.
Address of the local

amplifiers (H4562, L4562,
AM5742) (PF) Loudspeakers

(A) = room
Numeric identification (0-9) of the Modes for the addressing
Group of amplifiers belonging to a single amplifier inside the Room. of amplifiers
logic zone (in a home, for example, Type of control Amplifiers
(M1 and M2) = mode

Configurator socket Value of the
the living room, the bedroom, etc.) housings for special configurations configurators
Point-point A 1–9
PL/PF 1–9
Address of the special

controls (H4651M2, L4651M2,
AM5831M2)
(A) = room
(PF/PL) = Loudspeakers/light point
Procedure for the addressing
If correctly configured, it can numeric indicator (0 - 9) of the of special controls
control either one single amplifier Type of control Special control
individual amplifier inside the Room
(configurator 1 - 9), or a group Configurator socket Value of the
(A). When configured in a different configurators
of amplifiers (AMB configurator), way it can control the switching Point-point A 1–9
or become a general switch-on PL/PF 1–9
on of all amplifiers of the whole
control (GEN configurator) for all Room A ROOM
room (the room is identified by the PL/PF 1–9
amplifiers, even when these have number from 1 to 9 connected to General A GEN
been configured for different PL/PF
housing “A” of the amplifier).
rooms. (SPE)

To ensure operation of the Sound
System, number 8 must be
configured.
ADDRESS OF SOUND SOURCES

(S) = Source

Numeric identification (1-4) of the
individual sound source within the
Sound system.

SINGLE CONFIGURATION
When the amplifiers only are used,
not controlled by special controls or
by Touch Screen, the configuration
of the devices is performed on the A
and PF housings.
ROOM 1 ROOM 2
ON
A = 1 ON
A = 1 ON
A = 2 ON
A = 2
OFF
PF = 1 OFF
PF = 2 OFF
PF = 1 OFF
PF = 2
Amplifiers
Single control
Master/Slave ROOM 1
CONFIGURATION
Using 2 amplifiers configured with: ON
A = 1 ON
A = 1
1 amplifier: A=1, PF=1
st PF = 1 PF = 1
M1 = SLA
OFF OFF
2nd amplifier: A=1, PF=1, M1=SLA

Amplifiers
Master/Slave
If the volume is adjusted on one
amplifier, it will also automatically
adjust on the other one. Any control
performed on one amplifier, will also
apply to the other one.
This function only applies to flush
mounted amplifiers.

CONFIGURATION
General instructions
POint-point CONFIGURATION
This configuration is achieved using By configuring the special control:
special controls, or a Touch Screen for A=1

remote control of the amplifiers. PL/PF=1

SPE=8 sound system mode)

when the special control is used,
the device will send its own control
to the amplifier configured:
A=1
PF=1
ROOM 1 ROOM 2
ON
A = 1 ON
A = 1 ON
A = 2 ON
A = 2
Point-point control
ON ON
PL/PF = 1 PL/PF = 2 OFF

PL/PF = 1 OFF
PL/PF = 2
SPE = 8 SPE = 8 SPE = 8 SPE = 8
OFF OFF OFF OFF
A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2
PF = 1 PF = 2 PF = 1 PF = 2
Amplifiers

room control
configuration
Configuration performed only Configuring the device:
on special controls, or during the A=ROOM
By pressing the device keys, all
programming of the TOUCH SCREEN. PL/PF=1
amplifiers configured with “A” equal
All management controls found on SPE=8
to the number of the configurator on
flush mounted amplifiers can be “PL/PF” of the device will be affected
performed. (in this case all amplifiers with A=1)
ROOM 1 ROOM 2
ROOM ON
A = AMB ROOM ON
A = AMB
control 1 PL/PF = 1 control 2 OFF
PL/PF = 2
SPE = 8 SPE = 8
OFF
ON A = 1 ON A = 1 ON
A = 2 ON
A = 2
Point-point control PL/PF = 1 PL/PF = 2 PL/PF = 1 PL/PF = 2
SPE = 8 SPE = 8 SPE = 8 SPE = 8
OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON
A = 1 ON
A = 1 ON
A = 2 ON
A = 2
Amplifiers PF = 1 PF = 2 PF = 1 PF = 2
OFF OFF OFF OFF
CONFIGURATION FOR GENERAL

CONTROL
Configuration performed only Configuring the device: This configuration enables the
on special controls, or during the A=GEN
device to control the operation
programming of the TOUCH SCREEN. PL/PF=(in this configuration pl/pf
of all amplifiers within the
It is possible to perform all controls is not configured) room, irrespective of the type of
as for the room control configuration, SPE=8
configuration of the amplifier itself.
with the exception of volume control.

CONTENTS
MY HOME – Wiring diagrams
1 - Residential sector - apartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
2 - Residential sector - small house 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
3 - Residential sector - small house 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
4 - Residential sector - villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
5 - Service sector: doctor’s surgery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
6 - Service sector: restaurant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
7 - Service sector: supermarket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
8 - Service sector: hotel room 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
9 - Service sector: hotel room 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
10 - Residential sector: villa with automation system . . . . . . . . 376
11 - Residential sector: with 2 wire video door entry system. . . 378
12 - System expansion:
sound system / 2 wire video door entry system integration. . 380
13 - System expansion:
system with interface item 346851 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
14 -Integration with multimedia interface:
System with multimedia interface and LAN network . . . 384
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Residential sector - apartment
Below is shown an apartment, on a An amplifier with 4 pushbuttons is track or choose the favourite radio
single floor, with four rooms where installed in each room This amplifier station from those saved
the music is to be played with the can switch the loudspeakers on and Two flush mounted loudspeakers
2 wire Sound System The stereo off, adjust the volume, cycle the with 8 Ohm impedance are
control can play the music from the sound sources available (if there is connected to the amplifier
Hi-Fi stereo inside the apartment more than one) and change the CD
iTem descripTion QuanTiTY

346000 Power supply 1
F441 Audio video node 1
L4561N Stereo control 1
L4562 Flush mounted amplifier 4
L4567 Wall mounted loudspeakers 8
L4911BF Right pushbutton cover 4
L4911AI Left pushbutton cover 4
3499 Line terminator 4
33698...(2/3/4) 8-contact connector 1
note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH
and mÀtiX series
DIAGRAM 1 apartment - 4 Flush mounted amplifier - 8 X 8 ohm LOUDSPEAKERS
L4567 L4567 L4567 L4567
ON L4562 ON L4562 ON L4562 ON L4562

A =1 A =2 A =3 A =4
OFF
PF = 1 OFF
PF = 1 OFF
PF = 1 OFF
PF = 1
3499 3499 3499 3499
Hi-Fi stereo system

Cables supplied
346000
L4561 F441
S =1
SCS
230 Vac BUS

Patch cord
supplied
230 Vac
33698...(2/3/4)

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Residential sector - small house 1
The example gives an AXOLUTE The system is also managed by a activate and the loudspeakers will
system but it can also be made with colour TOUCH SCREEN and special switch on, first with a low sound
items of the other domestic series configured controls: one to activate level then increasing Touching the
For the Sound system inside a house the whole system (general control) TOUCH SCREEN or the amplifier “OFF”
you can position an amplifier in each and the other to activate all the pushbutton, the alarm clock switches
room and by using the multi-channel amplifiers of a room (room control), off
matrix you can listen to up to 4 sound such as the living room amplifiers
sources simultaneously Remember Thanks to a TOUCH SCREEN function
that when using the matrix each the Sound system can be used as
output is a separate room Flush an alarm clock In fact by setting the
mounted and DIN rail amplifiers are time on the TOUCH SCREEN to the
used to make the system set time the sound source set will

F441M Multichannel matrix 1
F500 Radio tuner 1
HS4560 RCA input 1
H4562 Flush mounted amplifier 4
H4651M2 Special control 2
F502 DIN amplifier 2
H4684 Colour TOUCH SCREEN 1
HS4565 Flush mounted loudspeaker 6
H4570 Flush mounted loudspeaker 4
16104 MULTIBOX boxes for H4570 4
L4569 Outdoor loudspeaker 2
HS4911BF Right pushbutton cover 6
HS4911AI Left pushbutton cover 6
3494...(14/15) 8-contact connector 1
336904 Twisted cable with 2 conductors 1
and mÀtiX series
DIAGRAM 2 small house - 3 Flush mounted AMPLIFIERS AND 2 DIN RAIL AMPLIFIERS - 6 X 16 ohm
AND 6 X 8 ohm LOUDSPEAKERS
NOTE: the DIN amplifiers item F502 are supplied with 230 Vac
F502
A =1 ROOM 1 L4569
F502 PF = 2
BUS
A =1
PF = 1
H4651M2 H4651M2
230 Vac 230 Vac
A = GEN A = AMB
SPE = 8 PF = 1
SPE = 8
ON ON ON H4562
A =1
OFF OFF OFF
PF = 3
3499
HS4565 H4570 H4570
ROOM 2
H4562
ON
A =2
OFF
PF = 1
3499
Room 4
HS4565
HS4565
ROOM 3
H4684
ON H4562
A =3
PF = 1 ON
H4562
OFF
A =4
PF = 1
OFF
3499
3499
F441M 346000
F500N
Hi-Fi stereo system
S =1
230 Vac BUS
L4561N
S =2
HS4560
Patch cord supplied S =3
3494...(14/15)
230 Vac
Cables supplied
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Residential sector - small house 2
The example shown is the same as

the previous page, but with the use,
in room 1, of three power amplifiers,
to ensure a detailed and optimum
management of sound levels, for
comfortable listening

F500 Radio tuner 1
HS4560 RCA input 1
H4651M2 Special control 5
F502 DIN amplifier 2
H4684 Colour TOUCH SCREEN 1
HS4911BF Right pushbutton cover 8
HS4911AI Left pushbutton cover 8
and mÀtiX series
DIAGRAM 3 small house - 3 Flush mounted amplifier AND 3 POWER AMPLIFIERS - 6 x 16 ohm and 6
x 8 ohm loudspeakerS ROOM 1
L4569 L4569 L4569 L4569 L4569 L4569
H4651M2
PRI + LEFT − + RIGHT − AUX
A = AMB PRI + LEFT − + RIGHT − AUX
F503 F503 PF = 1
OUT OUT OUT
F503
A =1 SPE = 8
A =1 A =1
PF = 1
ON
PF = 2
OK C OK C OK C
PF = 3
OFF
AUX AUX AUX
SCS IN SCS IN SCS IN
HS4565
ROOM 2 H4651M2 H4651M2 H4651M2 H4651M2

A = GEN A =1 A =1 A =1
PF = – PF = 1 PF = 2 PF = 3
SPE = 1 SPE = 8 SPE = 8 SPE = 8
ON
H4562 ON ON ON ON
A =2
OFF PF = 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF
3499 3499
HS565
HS4565
ROOM 3 Room 4 H4684
ON
H4562
A =3
OFF PF = 1 ON
H4562
A =4
OFF PF = 1
3499
BUS
3499
F441M 346000
Hi-Fi stereo system F500N
S =1
230 Vac
Patch cord supplied

HS4560
S =3
L4561N
3494...(14/15)
230 Vac S =2

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Residential sector - villa
The example given in the following This solution uses the multi-channel manage the HI-FI system, (or an IPod
layout refers to a villa where the matrix as main audio/video mixer and with dock-station) and an RCA input
Sound system absorption limits must the audio/video nodes are secondary to connect a further sound source
be exceeded Thanks to this solution mixers which, used with item 346851, The radio tuner must be installed in
several stretches can be made can expand the system a zone with enough signal to receive
and the whole house covered in a The sound sources installed are the the radiophonic emitters
capillary way FM RDS ratio tuner, a stereo control to

F441 Audio/Video node 2
346851 System expansion module 2
L/N/NT4560 RCA input 1
F500 Radio tuner 1
L4562 Flush mounted amplifier* 16
L/N/NT4565 Flush mounted loudspeaker 32
and mÀtiX series
* to be completed with corresponding key covers
DIAGRAM 4 VILLA - SYSTEM USING THE INTERfAcE ITEM 346851
L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565
L4562 L4562 L4562 L4562 L4562 L4562 ON

L4562 L4562
A =1 A =1 A =1 A =1 A =2 A =2 A =2 A =2
PF = 1 PF = 2 PF = 5 PF = 6 PF = 1 PF = 2 PF = 5 PF = 6
OFF
3499 3499 3499 3499
L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565
L4562 L4562 L4562 L4562 L4562 ON

L4562 ON
L4562 L4562
A =1 A =1 A =1 A =1 A =2 OFF
A =2 OFF
A =2 A =2
3499 PF = 4 PF = 3 PF = 7 PF = 8 PF = 4 PF = 3 PF = 7 PF = 8
3499
3499 3499
Line 2 - room 1 Line 3 - room 2
Line 4 Line 5
346851 F441 346000 346851 F441 346000 346851 346851
346851 346851 346851 346851
ON ON ON ON
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
SCS SCS
M =1 230 Vac M =2 230 Vac M =3 M =4
Line 1
Hi-Fi stereo system
F500n
S =1 F441m 346000
230 Vac
230 Vac
L4561n
S =2 L4560
S =3
33698... (2/3/4)
GENERAL LIMITS
Total length of stretched wire first stretch is 800m
Maximum length of wire between system expansion
module and last amplifier:
• 200 m con flush mounted amplifier
• 300 m with amplifiers on DIN rail
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Service sector - doctor’s surgery
This solution is ideal in surroundings An amplifier on DIN rail is used in in general mode to activate all the
where the amplifiers and sound the waiting room, the Hi-Fi system loudspeakers of the doctor’s surgery,
sources should only be controlled by is positioned in the reception the other configured to control the
authorised personnel The example (so that the source is directly loudspeakers in the waiting room
shows a doctor’s surgery with a controlled by the secretary or In the visiting rooms there are two
waiting room, the reception and two doctor) and there are two special flush mounted amplifiers for local
visiting rooms controls: one control configured management of the amplifiers

L4562 Flush mounted amplifier 2
F502 Amplifier per Service sector 1
L4651M2 Special control 2
3495 Source insulator 1
L/N/NT4911BF Right pushbutton cover 4
L/N/NT4911AI Left pushbutton cover 4
and mÀtiX series
DIAGRAM 5 DOcTOR’S SURGERY - 2 fLUSH MOUNTED AMPLIfIERS+ 1 DIN AMPLIfIER - 3 ROOMS
doCtor’s surGery no. 1 doCtor’s surGery no. 2

L4567 L4567
ON L4562 ON L4562
A = 2 A = 3
OFF
PF = 1 OFF
PF = 1
3499 3499
wAitinG room
L4567
230 Vac
F502
A = 1
PF = 1
3499
L4651m2 ON ON L4651m2
A = GEN A = 1
SPE = 8 PF/PL = 1 346000
Hi-Fi stereo system OFF OFF
SPE = 8 F441
SCS
L4560
230 Vac
S = 1
Bus
Cable supplied 3495
230 Vac reCePtion

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Service sector - restaurant
The example has two rooms, a bar amplifiers), two loudspeakers in the Various scenarios can be saved using
area and bathrooms for men and bar area and four loudspeakers in the a scenario module (programmed by
women A sound system can be bathrooms The system is managed the TOUCH SCREEN): for example the
constructed inside a restaurant by by a TOUCH SCREEN and 3 special loudspeakers can be switched on in
installing Wall mounted loudspeakers controls the rooms with different sound levels
for each room (connected to DIN

F502 Amplifier per Service sector 9
L4651M2 Special control 3
L4684 TOUCH SCREEN 1
F420 Scenario module 1
L/N/NT4911BF Right pushbutton cover 3
L/N/NT4911AI Left pushbutton cover 3
L/N/NT4575SB Radio interface 1
L4572SB Radio control 1
L/N/NT4919SB Pushbutton covers 2
note: the above system can also be achieved with AXoLute, LiVinG, LiGHt, LiGHt teCH and mÀtiX
series
DIAGRAM 6 RESTAURANT - 9 AMPLIfIERS ON DIN RAIL - 18 X 8 OHM LOUDSPEAKERS
L4567 * NOTE: the din amplifiers item F502 are supplied with 230 Vac
BAr
L4575sB L4651m2 L4651m2 L4651m2
A = 4 A = AMB A = AMB A = GEN
L4684
* PF = 1 PF/PL = 1 PF/PL = 2 SPE = 8
F502 M1 = 1 SPE = 8 SPE = 8
A = 4 SPE = 8
PF = 1 ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF
L4572sB
3499
L4567 L4567 L4567 L4567
* * * *
F502 F502 F502 F502
A = 1 A = 1 A = 1 A = 3
PF = 1 PF = 2 PF = 3 PF = 2
LAdies’
BAtHroom
room 1
3499 3499
L4567 L4567 L4567 L4567
* F502 * F502 * F502 * F502

A = 2 A = 2 A = 2 A = 3
PF = 1 PF = 2 PF = 3 PF = 1
GentLemen’s
BAtHroom
3499
room 2
Hi-Fi stereo system 346000

F420
A = 0
L4561n PL = 1
S = 1
F441
230 Vac
Bus
L4560
S = 2
Patch cord
230 Vac reCePtion
supplied
33698...(2/3/4)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Service sector - supermarket
The sound system inside a loudspeakers) can be reached manage all the amplifiers, an RCA
supermarket (large area) can be The configuration of the amplifiers is input to play the audio signal from a
made using a maximum of 40 DIN done monophonically Hi-Fi system and one or more PIVOT
amplifiers (80 ceiling-mounting Thus, this configuration can be handsets (using key 4 of the handset)
loudspeakers) with just one audio/ achieved by placing configurator 3 in to call personnel by means of the
video node Using the system the M3 socket of the amplifier loudspeakers inside the supermarket
expansion module up to 70 DIN The solution presented is made or installed near the cash desks
amplifiers (140 ceiling-mounting by installing a TOUCH SCREEN to

346851 System expansion module 1
F502 DIN amplifier 40+30
L4566 Ceiling mounted loudspeakers 80+60
L4684 TOUCH SCREEN 1
344082 Polyx audio handset 1
3499 Line terminator 4+3
and mÀtiX series
DIAGRAM 7 SUPERMARKET - 2 NODES IN cAScADE AND UP TO 140 LOUDSPEAKERS – MONOPHONIc
TRANSMISSION
* NOTE: the din amplifiers item F502 are supplied with 230 Vac
L4566
* F502 * F502 * F502 * F502

A = 3 A = 3 A = 6 A = 6
PF = 9 PF = 1 PF = 9 PF = 1
M3 = 3 M3 = 3 M3 = 3 M3 = 3
3499
3499
L4566 L4566
* F502 * F502 * F502 * F502

A = 1 A = 1 A = 4 A = 4
PF = 1 PF = 9 PF = 1 PF = 9
M3 = 3 M3 = 3 M3 = 3 M3 = 3
3499 3499
L4566 L4566
* F502 * F502 * F502 * F502

A = 2 A = 2 A = 5 A = 5
PF = 1 PF = 9 PF = 1 PF = 9
M3 = 3 M3 = 3 M3 = 3 M3 = 3
3499 3499
L4684
Hi-Fi stereo system 346000 346000
F441 230 Vac F441 230 Vac

344082
Bus M = 43
346851
346851
M = 1
230 Vac L4560
S = 1
Cable
supplied

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Service sector - hotel room 1
The example consists of hotel rooms, and the bathroom) with four flush Display and the flush mounted
each with a basic sound system, with mounted loudspeakers connected to amplifier, bathroom through the
the radio tuner as the only source two flush mounted amplifiers flush mounted amplifier
From the Video adapter extends one The system is managed as follows:
single branch (both for the bedroom bedroom and hall through Local

N4562 Flush mounted amplifier* 2
N4685 Local display 1
N4565 Flush mounted loudspeaker 4
346830 Video adapter 1
F500 Radio tuner 1
346904 Twisted cable with 2 conductors
and mÀtiX series
DIAGRAM 8 HOTEL ROOM- TWO ROOMS: BEDROOM AND BATHROOM - VIDEO ADAPTER AND POWER SUPPLY
Bedroom BAtHroom
n4565 n4565
ON n4562 ON n4562
A = 1 A = 1
PF = 1 PF = 2
OFF OFF
3499
F500n
s1 = 1
346000
346830
BUS BUS
TK PI n4685
A = 1
PF =
ON
PS RDS
106.70
2
FUN = 2
OFF
230 Vac

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Service sector - hotel room 2
The example consists of hotel rooms, supply, with four flush mounted is no longer required, saving 8 DIN
each with a basic sound system, loudspeakers connected to flush modules The system is managed
with the radio tuner as the only mounted amplifiers, means that the through the two amplifiers
source The use of the 2 DIN power 10 DIN power supply, item 346000,

N4562 Flush mounted amplifier* 2
N4565 Flush mounted loudspeaker 4
346030 Compact power supply 1
F500 Radio tuner 1
and mÀtiX series
DIAGRAM 9 HOTEL ROOM - TWO ROOMS: BEDROOM AND BATHROOM - cOMPAcT POWER SUPPLY
Bedroom BAtHroom
n4565 n4565
ON n4562 ON n4562
A = 1 A = 1
PF = 1 PF = 2
OFF OFF
3499
230 Vac
F500n
s1 = 1
346030
PRI
346030
PRI: 220 - 240V~
185-175mA
50/60Hz
SCS A-V 27Vdc
SCS 600mA
SCS A-V SCS

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Residential sector: villa with automation system
The two wire sound system can also Both the sound system and the The system proposed has automation
be used with MY HOME automation automation system can be managed controls, a series of amplifiers and
This is brought about by using an by the innovative TOUCH SCREEN loudspeakers, a stereo control to
SCS/SCS interface item F422, where Video (15” touch monitor) which control a Hi-Fi system, a radio tuner
the sound system BUS is connected reproduces the home layout on and an RCA input Using a scenario
in output (OUT) and the automation the monitor and, by means of icons module you can: save the switching
BUS is connected in input (IN) which can be customised, controls all on of the sound system, switch
(the interface does not require the devices on the lights and raise the rolling
configurations) shutters with just one pushbutton

F500 Radio tuner 1
H4687 Video Touch Screen 1
F422 SCS/SCS interface 1
and mÀtiX series
DIAGRAM 10 VILLA - SOUND SYSTEM cOMBINED WITH 2 WIRE AUTOMATION SYSTEM
Video AutomAtion
touCH sCreen
L4651m2
e46AdCn For the
F454 A = AMB
Video touCH sCreen ETHERNET
PF/PL = 3
connection SPE = 8
please refer to the ON
“system integration
and control” section OFF
SCS AI SCS AV
346020
230 Vac
L4565 L4565 L4565

2 wire sound system
L4562 L4562 ON L4262

A = 1 A = 2
A = 2
PF = 1 PF = 2
OFF PF = 1 OFF OFF
3499
L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565
L4562 ON L4562 ON L4562 L4562
A = 3 A = 3 A = 3 A = 3
PF = 1 OFF
PF = 2 OFF PF = 3 PF = 4
3499
Hi-Fi stereo system 346000 out
SCS
F441 230 Vac in

Bus
Patch cord supplied
F422
F500n I4 = 1
L4561n S = 2
230 Vac
S = 1
33698...
(2/3/4)
L4560
S = 3
Cables supplied

WIRING DIAGRAMS
Residential sector:
villa with 2 wire video door entry system
The two wire sound system can means of the multichannel matrix, The audio will return to its original
be combined with the two wire are installed in the system When volume when the handset is
video door entry system A colour the entrance panel is activated, the replaced Using the 4-pushbutton
TOUCH SCREEN and flush mounted sound system reduces the volume of block installed in the video door
amplifiers, 1 entrance panel and the stereo sources so that the sound entry units the loudspeakers in the
2 PIVOT handsets, combined by of the bell can be heard home can be used to page people

F500 Radio tuner 1
L4684 Colour TOUCH SCREEN 1
343001 Linea 2000 Metal Entrance Panel 1
344163 Polyx memory station 2
342510 Camera Entrance panel 1
342170 One-family speaker unit 1
and mÀtiX series
DIAGRAM 11 Villa - SOUND SYSTEM COMBINED WITH 2 wire VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM AND TOUCH
SCREEN
344163
N = 2
P = –
M = –
L4565 L4565 L4565 ON
L4684
ON L4562 ON L4562 ON L4562

A = 1 A = 1 A = 1
OFF
PF = 1 OFF
PF = 2 OFF
PF = 2
M1 = SLA
3499
344163
L4565 L4565 L4565 N = 1
P = –
M = –
OFF
ON L4562 ON L4562 ON L4562

A = 2 A = 2 A = 3
PF = 1 PF = 2 PF = 1
OFF OFF OFF
3499 3499
F441M 346000
=– 343001
P
=–
=–
N
=–
T =–
S =9
230 Vac BUS
F500N L4561N
S = 1
S = 2
33698...
(2/3/4)
L4560
S = 3
Cables supplied
Hi-Fi stereo system
230 Vac
NOTE: configure the video handsets using the software supplied

WIRING DIAGRAMS
System expansion
DIAGRAM 12 sound system / 2 wire video door entry system integration
L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565
ON L4562 ON L4562 ON L4562 ON L4562 ON L4562 ON L4562

A =1 A =1 A =1 A =1 A =1 A = 1
OFF PF = 1 OFF PF = 2 OFF PF = 3 OFF PF = 4 OFF PF = 5 OFF PF = 6
3499 3499 3499
349310
N =1 230 Vac
A =2
PF = 1
346020
346851 F441 346000

OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
OUT
ON
IN
ON OFF
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SCS
M = 1 230 Vac
To others 346850 346850 346000 F422

F441
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
OUT
I4 = 1
ON
IN
ON OFF
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SCS SCS automation

MOD= 5 230 Vac
343001 N =–
P = 1
S = 9
391657
33698...
(2/3/4)
L4561N
S = 1
Hi-Fi stereo system

L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565 L4565
ON L4562 ON L4562 ON L4562 ON L4562 ON L4562 ON L4562

A = 3 A = 3 A = 3 A =3 A = 3 A =3
OFF PF = 1 OFF PF = 2 OFF PF = 3 OFF PF = 4 OFF PF = 5 OFF PF = 6
3499 3499 3499
349310
N =2 230 Vac
A =4
PF = 1 346020
346851 F441 346000 346851 346851

OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
OUT
OUT OUT
ON
ON ON IN
IN IN
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SSC

CSS
M = 2 230 Vac M = 3 M = 4
Rif. Description
346000 Power supply
346020 Additional power supply WARNING
F422 SCS interface • Sound sources cannot be connected to the inputs of
F441 Audio/Video node the audio/video nodes used to expand the system.
L4561N Stereo control • For a video door entry system add an additional
33698...(2/3/4) 8-contact connector power supply on each VIDEO STATION monitor
346851 System expansion module allowing best management of the Sound system.
346850 Apartment interface
• More than 3 interfaces or system expansion modules
cannot be connected consecutively.
L4562 Flush mounted amplifier
• This type of system does not provide for operation of
391657 Camera
the intercom.
343001 Linea 200 metal Entrance Panel
349310 Axolute Video Station
3499 Line terminator
NOTE: the above system can also be achieved with AXOLUTE,

LIVING, LIGHT, LIGHT TECH and MÀTIX series
WIRING DIAGRAMS
System expansion
DIAGRAM 13 system with interface item 346851 for 2 wire video door entry system
integration
Using this type of system the 2 systems, 2 wire Sound system and 2 wire system, can be combined, also at different
moments. In fact this solution has two separate circuits which are combined using module item 346851. The advantage of
using a system made in this way is that of performing the differentiated calculation of the limits for single systems.
349310 349310 349310 349310

230 Vac 230 Vac 230 Vac 230 Vac
346020 346020 346020
346020
N = 1 N = 2 N = 3 N = 4
A = 4 A = 4 A = 4 A = 4
PF = 1 PF = 2 PF = 3 PF = 4
MOD = 5
N = XX
F441 346000
346850
346850
INT
ON
EXT
ON OFF
SCS
230 Vac
F422
P = 2
P
N = 1 391662
P = 1
S = 9
343001
XX = No. of apartment

HC4565 HC4565 HC4565 HC4565 HC4565
ON HC4562 ON HC4562 ON HC4562 ON HC4562 ON HC4562 ON HC4562

A = 1 A = 1 A = 2 A = 2 A = 3 A = 3
OFF
PF = 1 OFF
PF = 2 OFF
PF = 1 OFF
PF = 2 OFF
PF = 1 OFF
PF = 2
3499 3499 3499
346851 F441 346000

M = 1
346851
ON
ON OFF
SCS
230 Vac
F500N HC4560
S = 1 S = 3
HC4560*
S = 2
Rif. Description
346000 Power supply * intended for battery powered devices
346020 Additional power supply
F422 SCS interface
WARNING
F441 Audio/Video node
F500N Radio tuner FM • For the system limits of the sound system, see the
HC4560 RCA input
section General rules for installation.
346851 System expansion module
346850 Apartment interface • For a video door entry system add an additional
HC4562 Flush mounted amplifier power supply on each VIDEO STATION monitor
391662 Camera Entrance panel
allowing best management of the Sound system.
343001 Linea 2000 metal Entrance Panel
349310 Axolute Video Station NOTE: the above system can also be achieved with AXOLUTE,
3499 Line terminator LIVING, LIGHT, LIGHT TECH and MÀTIX series
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Integration with multimedia interface
DIAGRAM 14 SYSTEM WITH MULTIMEDIA INTERfAcE AND LAN NETWORK

This connection DIAGRAM shows a sound system with multichannel matrix, integrated with a multimedia interface and
home LAN network
L4569 L4569
room 1
Hd4565 Hd4565 Hd4565 Hd4565

room 2 room 3
ON H4562
A = 1
OFF
PF = 1
ON H4562 ON
H4562
3499 A = 2 A = 3
OFF
PF = 1 OFF PF = 1
3499
3499
Hd4565 Hd4565
room 4
ON
H4562
A = 4
OFF PF = 1
3499
Hi-Fi stereo system

F441m 346000
343001
P = 1
S = 2
230 Vac
F500n
S = 1
mP3 reader
mP3
Cables supplied Hd4560
S = 2

H4684 Touch screen 1
F500 Radio tuner 1
HS4560 RCA input 1
3465 Multimedia interface 1
and mÀtiX series
www
PC modem
PC
etHernet
switCH
Bus
H4684 Hd4690
3496 230 Vac
346020
sCs
Audio
out

386 MY HOME Video door entry and home video surveillance system
CONTENTS
MY HOME - Video door entry and home video
surveillance system
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Video door entry and home video surveillance system MY HOME 387
GENERAL FEATURES
System composition
The 2 wire video door entry system safety level, it is possible to connect of trespassing, both the camera
uses the same SCS BUS technology of 2 wire indoor and outdoor cameras, and the video handset will activate
all the MY HOME applications the which images will be displayed automatically In order to complete
Regardless of system complexity, the directly on the video handsets (home a 2 wire video door entry system, in
functions needed, and the number video surveillance function) If a addition to the Outdoor pushbutton
of video handsets, all the devices are higher level of safety is required, it panel and the handsets, a few
connected using the same 2 wire will be possible to associate an IR accessory will be needed, connected
cable, and are configured univocally sensor of the burglar-alarm system to the 2 wire BUS
In order to increase the system to each sensor In this way, in case
3
riser (2 WirES)
2 4
Electric distribution board or My Home Flatwall
2
Floor shunt
2
1
System expansion module
Entrance panel
1. ENTrANCE pANEL:
2
rOOM 1 sends the call to the video handset(s)
(available in various look and
installation models)
2. SYSTEM EXpANSION MODuLE:
it can be used to increase the
performance of the system, for
example to increase the distance
Polyx Memory display 6
Video handset between the outdoor pushbutton
2
rOOM 2 panel and the video handsets
3. ELECTrIC DISTrIBuTION
BOArD Or MY HOME
FLATWALL:
It enables the user to install DIN
2 rOOM 3 devices:
SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY: powers the
BUS and all the devices
5 AUDIO/VIDEO NODE: mixes the
audio and video signals from external
2 rOOM 4
sources (entrance panels, cameras,
sound sources ) and retransmits
them on the 2 WIRE riser (in
Apartment interface alternative the audio/video matrix
can also be used)
2
4. FLOOr SHuNT:
used for star-connecting 4
apartments, hence saving a lot of
Axolute Eteris Video display
cable In addition, it lets you reach the
The apartment interface enables creating an independent maximum extension of the system
system inside the apartment. 5. ApArTMENT INTErFACE:
in this way, it is possible to install apartment handsets with
simultaneous switching on, entrance panels and dedicated used for isolating the apartment
cameras. from the riser In this way, inside
the apartment it will be possible
Axolute Nighter video station
to install an independent system
6 with the corresponding MY HOME
6 applications
6. VIDEO HANDSETS:
audio-video terminal which enables
you to receive calls and to see who
is calling Using the icons of the
2
OSD menu it is possible to manage
and control MY HOME applications
(Available in various look and
installation models)
GENERAL FEATURES
Simple installation
The 2 wire system can be used to Furthest handset
create any type of systems, both for

the villa and the apartment complex
Entrance panel
600 metres
THE SYSTEM MAY INCLuDE:
Apartment video
3900 Apartments 3900 entrance panel
Handsets risers with indepedent

5 for apartment 39 sound mode
96 Video entrance panel
Devices
ENTrANCE pANEL
Wall
Outdoor video pushbutton panel entrance panel outdoor Axolute
with colour camera It can be used entrance panel
to call the video handsets and

to activate the associated door
lock Available in various look and
installation models
Flush mounted
entrance panel
Axolute Nighter & Whice

Video Station
Polyx memory display

VIDEO HANDSETS
Video handsets for the audio and
video reception of entrance panel
calls Their icons allow the user
to manage the video door entry
system, and the MY HOME functions
Available in various look and
installation models
Axolute video display
cameras with
INDOOr CAMErAS
front cover plates
2 WIRE indoor colour camera that can
be connected directly to the system
SCS BUS Microphone for the room
monitoring function Available in the
AXOLUTE, LIVING, LIGHT and LIGHT
TECH versions To be completed with
the corresponding front cover plates
GENERAL FEATURES
Devices Apartment interface
SYSTEM EXpANSION MODuLE

Used to increase the number of video
handsets connected to the system
and to achieve maximum installation
distance
System expansion module
ApArTMENT INTErFACE
To create a dedicated system inside
the Apartment, separate from the
apartment complex riser
In the apartment, it will therefore be
possible to create a video door entry
system with dedicated entrance
panels and cameras, integrated with
outdoor camera
the other MY HOME systems
ACTuATOrS
Used for the control of electric locks, door lock actuator
or the management of generic loads
(e g staircase lights, call repetition,
OuTDOOr CAMErA etc )
2 WIRE outdoor colour camera with
6 mm fixed optics to be connected
directly to the SCS BUS
Protection index: IP65
Actuator
FLOOr SHuNT for generic loads
The floor shunt can be used to

Floor shunt
create star wiring systems Its use
is compulsory for installation in
simultaneous switching on systems
Audio/video node
AuDIO/VIDEO NODE AND VIDEO

ADApTEr
Video adapter They perform the function of audio/
video mixers, for the connection to
the system of entrance panels and
video handsets
The audio/video node can be used
to connect up to 4 entrance panels /
cameras and up to 4 risers
The video adapter on the other hand
can be used to connect 2 entrance
panels and 1 riser (or 1 entrance
panel and 2 risers)
during presetting, the inclusion of the
audio/video node is recommended,
to allow for future system expansions.
MuLTICHANNEL MATrIX
Multichannel matrix
It functions is that of an advanced
audio/video mixing device
It has 4 sound source inputs and 4
inputs for video door entry system/
cameras, which can be distributed
simultaneously
To be used in alternative to the
audio/video node, in MY HOME
systems with integrated video door
entry system and sound system
MuLTIMEDIA TOuCH SCrEEN

10" Touch Screen display for the
management and the control of MY
HOME applications
It can be used to answer video door
entry system calls, and to display
images from the cameras connected
to the system It manages audio,
video, and WEB multimedia contents
through the USB connection It has
an SD card slot, and LAN connection
To be completed with the surround
plate Multimedia Touch Screen
GENERAL FEATURES
Example 1 - Villa
ONE-FAMILY VIDEO DOOr-ENTrY SYSTEM WITH INTErCOM BETWEEN VIDEO HANDSETS
Nighter Video Station
Whice Video Station
Audio/video node Power supply
Entrance panel
LiViNg rooM
349320
oN =–
N
=5
P =–
M =–
rooM 1
349321
=–
N
BUS =4 OFF
P =–
M =–
rooM 2 349320
=–
OFF N
=2 BUS
P =–
M =–
KiTcHEN
349321
=–
N
BUS =3 OFF
P =–
M =–
rEcEPTioN rooM 349320
=–
OFF N
=1
BUS
P =–
M =–
BUS
F441 346000
OUT1 OUT 2 O UT3 OUT 4
OUT
343001 IN
=–
P BUS 2 1
=– IN 1 I N2 IN 3 IN 4 SC S
N =–
T =– 230 Vac
S =9
BUS

Max. 5 handsets
Item DescrIptIon QUAntIty
Max. 200 metres between the entrance panel and the last handset
343001 Entrance panel 1 S = Electric door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current
F441 Audio/video node 1
346000 Power supply 1 NoTE 1: We recommend that the video handsets are configured using the software supplied with the product
349320 Nighter Video Station 3 NoTE 2: When a call is received, only the handset configured with n=1 comes on
349321 Whice Video Station 2
S Electrical door lock 1
GENERAL FEATURES
Example 2 - Villa
ONE-FAMILY VIDEO DOOr-ENTrY SYSTEM WITH OuTDOOr CAMErAS
Whice Video Station
Polyx Memory display
Audio/video node Power supply
outdoor camera
Entrance panel
Linving room 344163
=–
ON N
=1
P =– ROOM 1
349321
M =–
=–
N OFF
BUS =4
P =–
M =–
Room 2
349320
=–
OFF N
=2 BUS
P =–
M =–
KITCHEN
349321
=–
N
BUS =3 OFF
P =–
M =–
Reception room
349320
=–
OFF N
=5 BUS
P =–
M =–
BUS
BUS 342991 F441 346000

=–
P
=– OUT
=–
N IN
=–
T =–
S =9 IN 1 I N2 IN 3 IN 4 SC S
BUS 2 1
230 V
391670 391670
=– =–
P P
=1 =2
N =– N =–
Z =– Z =–
M =– M =–
A =– A =–
PL =– PL =–
Item Description QUANTITy

342991 Entrance panel 1

Max. 5 handsets
391670 Outdoor camera 2

Max. 200 metres between the entrance panel and the last handset
S = Electric door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current
349320 Video Station Nighter 2
NotE 1: We recommend that the video handsets are configured using the software supplied with the product
349321 Whice Video Station 2
Nota 2: The answering machine function is available only using the 344163 video handset, and can only be
344163 Polyx Memory Display 1
activated on 1 video handset (the one configured with N=1)
Nota 3: When a call is received, only the Handset configured with N=1 comes on
GENERAL FEATURES
Example 3 - Apartment
ApArTMENT WITH DEDICATED ENTrANCE pANEL AND prIVATE CAMErAS
outdoor camera
indoor camera
Axolute Eteris Video display

Apartment Audio/video node Power supply
interface
Polyx Memory display
344163 Apartment extension
=–
ON N
=5
P =1
M =–
BUS 344163
ON
=–
N
349340 =2
BUS P =1
=– M =–
OFF N
=4
P =1
M =–
C OK
BUS 344163
OFF
=–
N
=1
344163 BUS P =1
=– M =–
N
=3
OFF
P =1
M =–
BUS
F441 346000
OUT
IN
IN 1 I N2 IN 3 IN 4 SC S BUS 2 1
230 Vac
391661
=–
P
=3
N =–
Z =–
M =–
Building =– A =–
riser P PL =–
=1
BUS N =–
T =–
346850 S =9
ON
391670 =–
P
=2
N =–
=–
OUT
342991 Z =–
N
=5 S M =–
M =3
ON
ON OFF
IN
A =–
PL =–

342991 L2000 Entrance panel 1
Max 5 video handsets, 1 apartment EP and 2 apartment cameras
391670 Outdoor camera 1
391661 Axolute indoor camera 1
Note 1: We recommend that the video handsets are configured using
the software supplied with the product
NOTE 2: Configure the entrance panels and the apartment cameras
346850 Apartment interface 1
starting from (P=1)
344163 Polyx memory display 4
NOTE 3: The audio/video answering machine can only be activated on
349340 Eteris Video Display 1
Building one 344163 video handset (the one configured with N=-1)
riser
GENERAL FEATURES
Example 4 - Complexes of small houses

MuLTI-FAMILY SYSTEM WITH SINGLE INDEpENDENT DWELLINGS AND AT LEAST ONE COMMON ACCESS pOINT
Entrance panel
Apartment interface Audio/video node Power supply
Inside of the apartment – Inside of the apartment –
see previous diagram see previous diagram
SMALL HOUSE 35 SMALL HOUSE 99
346850 346850
=3 =9 ON
N N
OFF =5 =9
M =3 M =3
OUT OUT
ON ON
IN IN
ON OFF ON OFF
BUS BUS
Inside of the apartment – Inside of the apartment –

see previous diagram see previous diagram
SMALL HOUSE 1 SMALL HOUSE 26
346850 346850
=– =2
OFF N N OFF
=1 =6
M =3 M =3
OUT OUT
ON ON
IN IN
ON OFF ON OFF
BUS BUS
S
F441 346000 346260
= –
P
TMP PL RC C NC NO/S+ S−
= –
T = –
M = –
JMP
SCS
SCS
JMP
BUS 2 1
max 50 m
230 Vac
BUS
=–
P
=–
S =–
The EP must be configured and
programmed using the software
supplied with the product
349140
349140 Axolute entrance panel 1
339213 Front cover plate 1
339313 Flush mounted box 1
346850 Apartment interface 1 - 99
Max 99 apartment interfaces and 1 apartment complex entrance panel
346260 Door lock actuator 1
Max 50 metres between entrance panel and audio/video node
GENERAL FEATURES
System functions
Call Communication Call
Apartment 1 Apartment 2
The handset rings and the The conversation All the handsets, on the same call, ring and switch
monitor switches on cannot be heard on the monitor.
THE CALL CONVErSATION SECrECY SIMuLTANEOuS SWITCHING ON

Pressing the call pushbutton on the During the conversation between With video handsets, simultaneous
entrance panel, the system generates the entrance panel and the video switching on of the monitor is also
a signal that is only recognised by the handsets, all external panels and possible: upon arrival of the call, all
video handsets the call is addressed handsets that are not involved in handsets ring and the monitors of all
to (the call will have to be answered the conversation are temporarily video handsets switch on When the
within 30 seconds from the moment excluded in order to guarantee call is answered, only the monitor of
the pushbutton is pressed) the privacy of video door entry the video handset communicating with
Each VIDEO handset is configured in conversations When calling from an the entrance panel will remain on
a unique specific way When the call entrance panel that is temporarily In order to set this function, all the
is received, the video handset rings excluded, a time-out tone will be video handsets but one must be
and the monitor switches on heard, to indicate that the extension powered locally using an additional
Press the pushbutton to line is momentarily busy power supply, item 346020
establish the communication
(maximum duration of the
communication is 1 minute) with the
entrance panel Press again to
stop the communication and switch
the monitor off
Call
AK
CL
Pressing the door lock key will open the gate associated The staircase light function will switch on the system Each time the self-switching on key is pressed
with the handset. lights connected to a special actuator the images displayed change.
DOOr LOCK puSHBuTTON THE STAIrCASE LIGHT SELF-SWITCHING ON

The video handsets are fitted with a FuNCTION puSHBuTTON
door lock pushbutton Pressing this The video handsets are equipped By pressing the self-switching on
pushbutton will open of one of the with an icons menu pushbutton while the videohandset
door locks of the system This function activates a relay for the is at rest, a connection will be
With the system at rest, the pressure timed switching on of lights and the established with the entrance panel
of the pushbutton will cause the opening of the gate associated with the handset during
opening of the door lock of the The function can be performed by the P configuration of the handset
entrance panel associated with the installing the actuator item 346200, itself
handset during the P configuration of appropriately configured Pressing repeatedly on the self-
the handset itself On the other hand, switching on pushbutton, will scroll
if the pushbutton is pressed during through the various entrance panels
the call, the door lock associated to and the cameras connected to the
the entrance panel making the call system
will be opened
GENERAL FEATURES
System functions
Apartment 1
item 346850 apartment interface enables the iNTErcoM

Call INTeRCOM function between the devices within the one apartment and
call the various apartments
2 2 2
Master Slave
Apartment 2
When a call is received, the MASTEr comes on, while the

SLAVE will only ring. APArTMENT 2
MASTEr-SLAVE FuNCTION INTErCOM

For multi-family installations the The system offers an intercom
MASTER-SLAVE function is available: function, with up to 3 minutes APArTMENT 1
when the call is received, all the communications between

apartment handsets ring, but only videohandsets:
the monitor of the video handset From different apartments

configured as master comes on Within the same apartment

When the auto-switching on key of If the apartment has an apartment
a SLAVE is pressed, the monitor of interface - item 346850 - or is
the MASTER handset turns off, while a one- family apartment, each
the monitor of the SLAVE itself turns videohandset of the apartment can
on (without necessarily establishing be called individually The INTERCOM
communication with the entrance connection can be established at
panel) If the connection key the same time as other external
of a SLAVE is pressed, the MASTER connections The INTERCOM
monitor turns off and communication connection can be simultaneous to
with the audio-video entrance panel other connections external to the
is established apartment If the apartment does not
have an apartment interface - item
346850 - any apartment handset can
call all other apartment handsets
The INTERCOM connection will not
occur at the same time as external
connections Any call received by an
EP, even to any other apartment, will
terminate the INTERCOM connection
We are currently out.....
Answering machine active
MESSAGGIO 1
MESSAGGIO 2
MESSAGGIO 3
MESSAGGIO 1
MESSAGGIO 2
MESSAGGIO 3
MESSAGGIO 1
MESSAGGIO 1 MESSAGGIO 1
MESSAGGIO 2
MESSAGGIO 3
Playback of sounds and images recorded by the answering machine
VIDEO DOOr ENTrY SYSTEM

ANSWErING MACHINE
FuNCTION
Function available only using the
POLYX MEMORY DISPLAY video
handset, item 344163 It is possible
to record voice and images of a call
from an entrance panel
It is also possible to record an audio
message to play back on the entrance
panel following an unanswered call
The video door entry system message
can be recorded in 2 ways:
STILLS: the message includes

a picture of the visitor and the
recorded audio message (160
messages max)
VIDEOS: the message includes a

video feed (duration 16 seconds)
and the recorded audio message
(18 messages max)
Each message will be given a
progressive number, which will be
displayed on the video handset,
together with the date and time
information
GENERAL FEATURES
System functions
ir detector
and associated cameras
dinner
is served!
oN uP
pAGEr FuNCTION IN SYSTEMS SCENArIO CONTrOL FuNCTION SWITCHING ON CAMErA

INTEGrATED WITH SOuND IN SYSTEMS INTEGrATED WITH FuNCTION IN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM AuTOMATION SYSTEM INTEGrATED WITH THE
By pressing the conversation From the video handsets, it is possible BurGLAr ALArM SYSTEM
pushbutton on the video to recall the scenarios saved in the It is possible to associate a zone of the
handsets, it is possible to broadcast F420 scenarios burglar alarm to the cameras When
a message through all the an alarm situation is detected, the
loudspeakers of the sound system NoTE: function possible by configuring the video images recorded by the camera are
The involved video handsets must be handsets using the software supplied with the displayed on the video handset
powered locally product.
Using the appropriate icons of the
From the video handset menu it menu of the video handset, it is
is possible to control and display possible to monitor the status of the
the functions of the sound system burglar-alarm system: for example,
through the icons of the menu itself the status of the burglar-alarm
(armed/disarmed), active zones,
NoTE: function possible by configuring the video alarms occurred
handsets using the software supplied with the
product. NoTE: function possible by configuring the video
product.
CUCINA
20.5 °C + A –
off + 22.5 (+2)
18.5°C –
CUCINA
20.5 °C + A –
off + 22.5 (+2)
18.5°C –
SupErVISION FuNCTION IN
SYSTEMS INTEGrATED WITH
THE TEMpErATurE CONTrOL
SYSTEM
From the video handset menu, it is
possible to display the status of the
temperature control system
Using the appropriate icons it is
possible, for example, to change the
temperature parameters, and display
the status of the probes
NoTE: function possible by configuring the video

product.
System composition
The system is classed as SELV (Safety The conformity to SELV classification BASIC ELEMENTS OF THE VIDEO
Extra – Low Voltage) due to the fact is only guaranteed only subject to SYSTEM
that it is powered by non grounded FULL COMPLIANCE with current In order to install a system it is
safety double insulation independent installation regulations and with the necessary to purchase, in addition to
power supplies with a max. voltage GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION the entrance panel and the handset,
of 25 Vac (effective) or 60Vdc non- relating to each single device and also the 346830 video adapter, or
inverted voltage. cable, making up the installation. the F441 audio/video node, and the
In addition, all BTicino devices are 346841 floor shunt with the function
double insulated. of distributing the video signal.
Video adapter
The video adapter is used to connect Video adapter
entrance panels and handsets to a 2

wire video system
2 2
A maximum of 3 connections are Power supply
allowed on the video adapter.
Video handset
BUS BUS
TK PI
PS
Video adapter
Video entrance
panel Entrance Handsets
panels
BUS BUS
TK PI
PS
Power supply 346000

A maximum of 3 connections are allowed on the video adapter.
(*) Entrance panels Handsets Entrance panel Handsets
BUS BUS BUS BUS

TK PI TK PI
PS PS
Connection of 2 entrance panels and a riser Connection of 1 entrance panel and 2 risers
for the handsets for the handsets
(*) If either an interface is connected to the entrance panel, only one connection on the TK BUS terminal of the
video adapter is possible.
AuDIO/VIDEO NODE
Audio/VidEo NodE
Or VIDEO MATrIX
The F441 audio/video node and the
F441M video matrix must be used in
2
alternative to the video adapter when
more than 2 entrance panels must be
Video handset
installed in the system, or when more SCS
Power supply
than 2 risers are needed
The use of the audio/video node
or the video matrix is however Video entrance
recommended, to allow for future panel To the handsets
mY HOme integrations, system Power supply

expansions, and/or addition of Audio/video node
cameras.
Allow for one output of the audio/
video node, or the video matrix, for
SCS
each video door entry system video

handset with table-top installation To the entrance
panels/cameras
FLOOr SHuNT
FLoor SHuNT
When creating video systems, the
use of the floor shunt, item 346841
is recommended This will provide Apartment 2 Apartment 3
important savings on the cable to Apartment 1 Apartment 4
be used This is particularly suitable

for multi-family systems, when more
than one living unit on the same floor ART. 346841
riser
or in multi-family systems, where
max distance between the entrance
panel and all handsets is needed The
Floor shunt enables star connection 2 wire riser
of up to 4 apartments with a max
of 3 handsets for Apartment (max
1 handset per output, if set in For each output:
max. 3 video handsets or bells in the same apartment
simultaneous switching on) max. 1 video handset in simultaneous switching on
One output of the audio/video node max. 1 table-mounted video handset
should be dedicated to each table-

mounted video handset installed
System composition
346851 IN MOD = 0
(SYSTEM EXpANSION MODE)
To be used for system expansion, in
order to:
Regenerate the video signal and have

a further 200 m available after the
interface (using the 336904 cable)
Increase the number of devices

connected to the BUS
Use a max of 3 modules, configured

using the MOD = 0 in cascade
As far as the system composition,
distances and topology are Mod = 0
concerned, within the system 1
section, the system expansion
module item 346851 must be
considered as a handset On the
other side, within the system 2
section it should be considered as an
entrance panel
Entrance panel System 1 section System 2 section
2 2
2 2
F441 346000 346851 F441 346000
OUT
ON
IN
ON OFF
SC S
SC S
2 2
200 m 200 m
max. 1 item 346851

with Mod = 0 for each output
346851 346851 346851 346851
346000
OUT OUT OUT OUT
ON ON ON ON
IN IN IN IN
Entrance panel
SC S
2 F441
2
2
2
346000
The iN clamp of the system expansion modules configured with Mod = 0 must be
connected to a dedicated output of the F441 audio/video node or the 346841 floor
SC S
shunt (as a handset with local power supply).
F441 2
2
ITEM 346851 IN MOD = 5
(INDEpENDENT rISEr MODE)
This is used in buildings to have
risers with riser entrance panels
and independent audio and video
functions
Mod = 5
riser 1 system section (with independent audio) riser 2 system section (with independent audio)
riser 1 riser 2
2 2
F441 346000 F441 346000
SC S SC S
2 2
2 2
riser entrance riser entrance

2 panel 2 panel
346851 346851
OUT OUT
ON ON
IN IN
common system section ON OFF ON OFF
Entrance panel
F441 346000
in the common system section, for the purpose of system composition, distances and layout, the system
expansion modules must be treated as a handsets. on the other hand, in the riser system sections they must
SC S
be treated as entrance panels.
The building entrance panel must be made with alphanumeric or numeric call module
System composition
ApArTMENT INTErFACE
ITEM 346850
This is used to have an apartment
system independent from the
building In this way, the apartment
system can have private cameras
and entrance panels and can be
integrated with all the MY HOME
applications
As far as the system composition,

distances and topology are
concerned, within the building
system, the interface item 346850
must be treated as a handset On
the other side, within the apartment
system, it should be treated as an
entrance panel configured with P = 0
Apartment block system section Apartment system section

Handset
346850 2
For the completion of the system, any type of cable OUT F441 346000
can be used (including existing cables). Maximum ON
IN
performance and distances are achieved using the

ON OFF
SC S
336904 cable. 2 2
Entrance panel 2
2
2
F441 346000 Apartment
entrance panel
Apartment camera
SC S
Configuration
To configure means to program the
system. This occurs assigning an The configurators can be purchased in a case
identification and operational mode

number to the devices.
This operation is made inserting II
in the appropriate seats some 0-9
configurators (numbered from 0 3501K
to 9), using a clamp provided with or individually

the power supply or contained in 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
the case of the configurators or
3501/1 3501/2 3501/3 3501/4 3501/5
using the configuration software
S
S
(recommended). 6
6 7
7 8
8 9
9 0
0
L
L
A
A
3501/6 3501/7 3501/8 3501/9 3501/0 3501/SLA

A seat is left empty corresponds to
the configuration of a zero.
Example of configured system and its operation

In the system exist two different
numerations to identify respectively
the entrance panels (EP) and the
=– =2
handsets. N
=1
N
=5
P =– P =1
The numeration of the EP (0-96) is
generally identified by P, while the
address of the handsets (0-99) is
identified by N.
On the EP, in addition to the P
controls in pause from apartment 25
address it is necessary to configure

Door lock and auto-switching ON
controls in pause from apartment 1
Door lock and auto-switching ON
also the N address relating to the

handset from which we would start
Call apartment 25
Call apartment
to call.
On the handsets in addition to the N
address, it is necessary to configure
in P the EP associated to the same
handset, or the entrance panel
on which the door lock and auto- P
=–
P
=–
=– =1
switching ON controls work when the S =– S =–
handset is switched OFF.
Should occur the need to modify the configuration

of a device, it is necessary, in addition to change the
configurators, take off the power supply to the whole
system, wait 1 minute, and then provide voltage again.
For each device exist also particular configurations
which will be detailed in the product technical sheet.
Configuration

ITEM 346851 MOD = 0 for system expansion
The system expansion module can be M = specific progressive number for interface
configured in 2 different ways: 346851

Mod = 0
(the addresses in M with MOD = 0 346851
M =2
and MOD = 5 do not conflict with ON OFF
ON
each other)
2 Video handset
2
Video handset
Entrance
panel
Mod = 0
346851
M =1
ON
ON OFF
346851
Mod = 0 Mod = 0 Mod = 0 Mod = 0

M =1 M =2 M =3 M =4
346851 346851 346851 346851
ON ON ON ON
346851 346851 346851 346851
F441
SCS
Entrance
panel
MOD = 5 for independent audio risers
M = specific progressive number indicating the riser number
common entrance
iNdEPENdENT iNdEPENdENT iNdEPENdENT
panel
2 WirE riSEr 2 WirE riSEr 2 WirE riSEr
Mod = 5 Mod = 5 Mod = 5

M =2 M = 39
346851 346851
M =1
346851
ON ON
ON
ON OFF ON OFF
ON OFF
346851 346851 346851

2 2 2
For the common entrance panel, the handsets have address M (riser number) x 100 + N (handset for the riser).
Es. Handset N = 20 of the riser 12 for the common EP = 12 x 100 + 20 = 1220
ApArTMENT INTErFACE 346850

The apartment interface is configured correct configuration Wrong configuration
as a normal handset The interface

must be configured in a specific
2 2
N =7 N =6
unique way No other handset can
be configured in N using the same
address, in the same system or on the
2 2
same riser with independent audio
N =6 N =5
The factory device is configured with
M=3
2 2
N =5 N =5
346850
INT
346850
INT
EXT
ON
SYSTEM EXT
ON SYSTEM
ON OFF
ON OFF
2 WirE BuS 346850 2 WirE BuS 346850
The wiring
SYSTEM WIRING STAR wiring

The systems can also be wired in 2 The star wiring is made connecting
modes: the individual apartment to an
in-out wiring
output of the floor distribution block
STAR wiring with floor shunt
Item 346841.
346841 (recommended).
Each line must be terminated by
positioning the micro switch of the
In-out wiring
last appliance to ON.
In-out wiring is connected directly
STAR wiring is particularly suitable
on the terminal of the appliances
for multi-family systems, when more
which are connected to the system.
than one living unit on the same floor
Each riser must be terminated by
or in multi-family systems, where
positioning the micro switch of the
max. distance between the entrance
last handset to ON.
panel and all handsets is needed.
In-out wiring is particularly
On each output of the shunt it will be
indicated for one and two-family
possible to connect up to 3 handsets
systems and for vertical or horizontal
maximum.
multi-family systems (with the homes
in rows).
An output of the floor distribution
block must be dedicated to
each handset with simultaneous
switching on or table-top base
installation.
In-out wiring STAR wiring
ON ON ON
Apartment n Handsets BUS Apartment 1 Apartment 5
ON ON
OFF Apartment 2 ON ON
OFF ON ON
Apartment 3
OFF Apartment 4
2 wire BUS
346841 346841
2 wire BUS
COMBINED WIrING ON
Apartment n
Both wiring methods described
previously can be used together, for
the realization of more articulated
OFF
systems
The combined wiring (IN-OUT ON
and Star) allows to execute wiring

systems in order to satisfy the OFF
greatest quantity of requests
OFF
Floor distribution blocks outputs
can be used to connect a single
device or to generate an apartment
line (on which max 3 devices can
be connected, without using the
apartment interface item 346850)
Apartment 1
To the Bus handset can be connected
in IN-OUT floor distribution blocks or ON
handsets 346841
ON
The assignation of the handsets Entrance panel BuS

to the apartments occurs through
configuration (for further information
see technical sheets for the individual
devices)
ON
OFF OFF
2 2 2
200 m
ON
OFF Floor shunt
2 2
Video entrance
panel 2
Installation of entrance panels, handsets and interfaces
INT 346850
160 – 165 cm
ON
EXT 346850
INT
ON OF F
ON INT 346850
EXT
ON OF F
ON
EXT
160 – 165 cm
ON OF F
346851
ON
346851 346851
ON OF F
ON
ON
ON OF F
ON OF F
NO
HEIGHT OF THE HANDSET INTErFACES ITEM 346850 AND HEIGHT OF THE ENTrANCE
When installing the handsets, including 346851 pANEL
standard or video handsets, it is The interfaces item 346850 When installing the Entrance
recommended that the devices are (apartment interface) and item panel, it is recommended that the
positioned at a height of 160 – 165 cm 346851 (system expansion module) pushbutton panel is installed at a
(top edge) cannot be installed in a manhole For height of 160 – 165 cm (top edge)
their installation, a sealed electric The camera must not be installed in
Note: recommended installation heights, unless cabin with DIN rail must be used (DIN front of light sources, or in places
otherwise required by local regulations. switchboard) where the subject being filmed is in
the shadow
If this condition cannot be respected,
the picture will not have much
contrast in the darker areas This
is because the brightness is self-
regulated on the lighter part of the
picture
To solve these problems change the
camera installation height, normally
160 – 165 cm, to a height of 180 cm
and direct the lens downwards to
improve the quality of the shots
In scarcely lit areas, the installation
of an additional light source is
recommended
System performance
The following information provides MAXIMUM DISTANCE LINE A ENTRANCE PANEL - FURTHEST HANDSET
general parameters on the maximum
multi-pair data cable,

Cable section mm2
twisted telephone
2 normal cables >
0.2 mm2 or L4669
distances that can be achieved, and
item C9881U/5E
one pair of the
pair 0.28 mm2
the features of the cables to be used.
336904
The type of system considered is a
single family system or system below 5 HANDSETS in/out 50 m 200 m 140 m 140 m
5 one-fam Handsets/OUTDOOR EP 50 m 200 m 100 m 70 m
an apartment interface.
5 one-fam Handsets/EP with local 50 m 200 m 140 m 170 m
power supply
WARNING: For installation solutions or types other than those shown,
the distances and the current absorptions can be calculated using the You
Diagram software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the
website www.professionisti.BTicino.it – technical service – software and
MAXIMUM DISTANCE LINE C POWER SUPPLY – FURTHEST HANDSET
diagrams). Also refer to the specific technical documentation

(2 wire system Technical Guide).
Cable section mm2
twisted telephone
2 normal cables >
0.2 mm2 or L4669
item C9881U/5E
one pair of the
pair 0.28 mm2
Furthest video
336904
handset
346850 346851
MOD = 0 5 Handsets in/out 50 m 110 m 70 m 50 m
346850
INT 346851
EXT
ON
e 5 Handsets (with shunts) 50 m 110 m 70 m 50 m
ON
MOD = 5
ON OFF
ON OFF
MAXIMUM DISTANCE LINE B ENTRANCE PANEL – POWER SUPPLY

LINE C*

Cable section mm2
twisted telephone
2 normal cables >
0.2 mm2 or L4669
item C9881U/5E
one pair of the
pair 0.28 mm2
346000 346830 346000 F441

336904
LINE A*
BUS BUS
TK PI
O 2 pushbuttons 50 m 200 m 115 m 90 m

PS
OUTDOOR EP 20 m 50 m 30 m 20 m
SCS
Entrance panel with local power supply 50 m 200 m 140 m 120

LINE B *
Entrance panel MAXIMUM DISTANCE LINE D ENTRANCE PANEL – DOOR LOCK

346850 346851
INT 346850
MOD = 0
346851
e
BTicino SCS cable -
BTicino SCS cable -

Cable section mm2
EXT
ON
ON
ON OFF
ON OFF
MOD = 5
item 336904
item L4669
0.28
S+ S- clamps 30 m 30 m 50 m 100 m
(*) Max. variable distance.

Note: in systems with apartment interfaces only (in/out connection) the distance of
LINE C to be taken into account is 200 m (with BTicino cable 336904)
LINE D*
Door lock
System performance
SYSTEM WITH ApArTMENT

INTErFACE AND SYSTEM Audio/video connection
EXpANSION MODuLE between the entrance panel
and the video handset
Up to 3 interfaces, items 346850 (3 passages maximum) = oK
and 346851 may be installed in
cascade Cascade interfaces are
those “crossed” by an audio/video
connection (Entrance panel –
Video entrance
HANDSET) or (HANDSET – HANDSET, panel
max 200 m
e g INTERCOM) Only 2 of these
interfaces (selected by the user)
346851
retransmit the signal for 200 metres
346851
ON
The maximum distance between max. 200 m ON OFF
EP and the furthest handset is 600

2 2
metres Each LINE (EP – INTERFACE),
346851
(INTERFACE – INTERFACE) and 346851
(INTERFACE – H) must be 200 metres ON OFF

ON
maximum (with BTicino cable max. 200 m

336904) 2
The IN end cap of the system
expansion module configured with
M=0 MUST be wired and considered max. 200 m
as a H with local power supply
2
346850
INT
It must also be connected to an ON OFF

EXT
ON
output of the Audio/video node 346850

F441, or the Floor shunt 346841
CONNECTION OF 16 AUDIO /VIDEO Entrance panels Or cameras
Video door entry system/apartment interface risers
F441 346000
OUT
IN
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SC S BUS 2 1
F441 F441 F441 F441

OUT1 OUT 2 O UT3 OUT 4 OUT1 OUT 2 O UT3 OUT 4 OUT1 OUT 2 O UT3 OUT 4 OUT1 OUT 2 O UT3 OUT 4
OUT OUT OUT OUT
IN IN IN IN
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SC S IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SC S IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SC S IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SC S
3499 3499 3499 3499
4 entrance panels or cameras 4 entrance panels or cameras 4 entrance panels or cameras 4 entrance panels or cameras
WIRING DIAGRAMS
One-family system with 1 EP

and 5 intercommunicating video handsets
WArNiNg
dEVicE 3

configure the handsets starting from N = 1

configure and insert the Jumpers with the system
ON SWiTcHEd oFF. Also every time the configuration is
=– c dEVicE 5
N
=3
modified the power supply to the system must be switched
P =– off and on again, waiting about 1 minute.
M =– BUS OFF
The intercom function is operating even with a lack of
entrance panel connection.
344163 =–
N
=5
We recommend that the video handsets are configured
dEVicE 2 P =– using the software supplied with the product.
344163 M =–
BUS
=–
N
=2 OFF A use of the actuator is necessary for the staircase light
P =– dEVicE 4 service or generic actuations.
M =–
B For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the 2
344163 BUS OFF wire range can be used
=–
N
=4 c Move the micro switch of the last video or audio handset
dEVicE 1 P =– at the end of the line to the oN position
344163 M =–
BUS d Fit a “9” configurator to be inserted in S on the
=– OFF speaker module for the general call; do not insert any
N
=1 configurator in N.
e P =–
M =–
e The audio video answering machine can only be used on
344163 BUS 1 video handset (the one configured with N=1)
Nota 3: When a call is received, only the Handset configured

with N=1 comes on

F441 346000
BUS PL S+ S- OUT1 OUT 2 O UT3 OUT 4
346200
OUT
PS
IN
S1 A
PE IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SC S
BUS 2 1
5 6 7 8 NC C NO
230 Vac 1 2 3 4
L
343001 230 Vac
B
=–
P
=–
=–
N
=–
T =–
S =9
Item DescrIptIon
d 343001 Linea 2000 Metal EP
344163 Polyx Memory Display video handset
346200 Staircase light actuator (optional)
346000 Power supply
F441 Audio/video node
L Staircase light
EP Entrance panel
PS Door lock release pushbutton (optional)
S1 Electric door lock 18V 4A impulsive 250mA holding current
Two-family systems with 1 EP,
3 handsets per home and intercom between apartments
HoME 2 A
WArNiNg
ON

=–
N SWiTcHEd oFF. Also every time the configuration is
=2
P =– SLAVE modified the power supply to the system must be switched
HoME 1 M =– off and on again, waiting about 1 minute.
344163

it is possible to install a maximum of 3 video handsets for
BUS apartment.
ON
A
=–
N using the software supplied with the product
=1
P =– SLAVE
configure Master and Slave devices using the software
M =– When a call is received, the MASTEr rings and switches on,
BUS while the SLAVE will only ring. if the call is answered from
344163 =– OFF
N
=2
c a SLAVE unit, the master unit switches off again, while
P =– SLAVE the monitor of the SLAVE from where the call is answered
M =– comes on."
OFF BUS 344163

=–
N
=1 A Move the micro switch at the back of the last video or
P =– SLAVE audio handset at the end of the line to the oN position
M =–
B For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the 2
344163 BUS
=– OFF wire range can be used.
N
=2
P =– MASTEr c The audio video answering machine can only be used on
M =– 1 video handset (the MASTEr video handset)
OFF BUS 344163

=–
N
=1
P =– MASTEr
M =–
344163 BUS
c
F441 346000
BUS PL S+ S- OUT1 OUT 2 O UT3 OUT 4
OUT
PS
IN
S1
PE IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SC S
BUS 2 1
230 Vac
343002
= –
P
= –
= –
N
= 1
T = –
S = –
Item DescrIptIon
343002 Two-family Linea 2000 Metal entrance panel
344163 Polyx Memory Display video handset
346000 Power supply
EP Entrance panel (main)
S1 Electric door lock 18V 4A impulsive 250mA holding current
WIRING DIAGRAMS
One-family system with 2 EP and 2 outdoor cameras
349321 dEVicE 2
WArNiNg
BuS Pi
OFF

(5 handsets
SWiTcHEd oFF. Also every time the configuration is
max.)
modified the power supply to the system must be switched
=–
N
=2 off and on again, waiting about 1 minute.
P =–
M =– BUS using the software supplied with the product.

End with the micro switch of the last line/riser handset in
the oN position.
349321 dEVicE 1
A For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the

OFF 2 wire range can be used.
N
=– B Fit a “9” configurator to be inserted in S on the Entrance
=1 panel to make a general call.
P =– BUS
M =–
Nota: When a call is received, only the Handset configured with
N=1 comes on
Electric distribution board or

My Home Flatwall
F441 346000
OUT
IN
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SC S BUS 2 1
230 Vac
A A
PE PE1 391670 391670
cam.1 cam. 2
BUS PL S+ S- BUS PL S+ S-
PS PS1 =– =–
P P
S1 S2 =– =2 =3
=– P
P =1 N =– N =–
=–
342991 342991 =– Z =– Z =–
=– N
N =1 M =– M =–
=1
T =– A =– A =–
T =–
S =9 PL =– PL =–
S =9 B
B
Item DescrIptIon
342991 Linea 2000 Metal entrance panel
349321 Whice Axolute Video Station
391670 2 wire outdoor camera
346000 Power supply
PE-PE1 Entrance panel
PS-PS1 Door lock release pushbutton (optional)
S1-S2 Electric door lock 18V 4A impulsive 250mA holding current
Cam.1-Cam.2 2 wire outdoor camera
One-family system with 5 video handsets
in simultaneous switching on
230 Vac
WArNiNg
344163
346020 ON
PRI
configure the handsets starting from N = 1
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz

SWiTcHEd oFF. Also every time the configuration is
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
=–
1- 2
N modified the power supply to the system must be switched

=5
off and on again, waiting about 1 minute.
1 P =–
2 M =–

using the software supplied with the product
BUS
use of the actuator is necessary for the staircase light
service or generic actuations.
230 Vac For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the 2
344163 wire range can be used.
346020 ON
Move to oN the microswitch, on the Video handset or
PRI
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
audio handset, which ends the line.

175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
1- 2
=–
N Fit a “9” configurator to be inserted in S on the
=4
1 P =– speaker module for the general call; do not insert any
2 M =– configurator in N.
BUS
The audio video answering machine can only be used on
1 video handset item 344163
230 Vac
344163
346020 ON
PRI
230 Vac
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
344163
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
=– 346020
1- 2
N ON
=3 PRI
1 P =–
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
2
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
M =– 1- 2
BUS =–
N
1 =2
2 P =–
M =–
BUS
F441 346000
346200 230 Vac

344163
OUT
346020
IN PRI
OFF
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
BUS 2 1
600 mA
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SC S

1- 2
6 8
5 7 NC C NO
=–
230 Vac 1 2 3 4
N
1 =1
2 P =–
L M =–
230 Vac BUS
343001
Item DescrIptIon
BUS PL S+ S- PE
343001 Flush mounted Linea 2000 Metal
entrance panel
PS =–
S1 P 344163 Polyx Memory Display video handset
=–
=– 346000 System power supply
N 346020 Additional power supply
=–
T =– F441 Audio/video node
B S =9 346200 Staircase light actuator (optional)
d
PS Door lock release pushbutton panel
S1 Electrical door lock
WIRING DIAGRAMS
One-family system with max 16 cameras

or entrance panels
dEVicE 1
To other handsets / apartment interfaces
=–
N
=1
P =–
OFF
M =–
To other handsets / apartment interfaces

349320 BUS
d B
F441 346000
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
OUT
IN
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SCS BUS 2 1
230 Vac
F441
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
OUT
IN c
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SCS
=–
P
=3
3499 N =–
=– Z =–
P M =– 391670
=–
=– A =–
N PL =–
=1
T =–
S =9 =– =–
P P
=1 =2
PE 342991
N =– N =–
Z =– Z =–
M = – 391670 M =– 391670 cam.3
A =– A =–
BUS PL S+ S- PL =– PL =–
Item DescrIptIon
S1
PS 3499 Line terminator
349320 Axolute Video Station Nighter
cam.1 cam.2 F441 Audio/video node
346000 Power supply
342991 Linea 2000 Metal EP
391670 2 wire outdoor camera
EP Entrance panel
S1 Electrical door lock
Cam1-Cam3 Outdoor camera
Cam4-Cam7 Indoor camera
WArNiNg
When the nodes are used in cascade, the distances of the
various lines are halved.
For the Entrance Panel, all the pushbutton panels of the 2

wire range can be used.
All the advanced video handsets of the 2 wire range may

be installed.
only use one output for each node and allow for a
terminator item 3499 to be connected to the ScS clamp
configure advanced handsets using a Pc and Software

supplied.
By entering oFF in the first seats of the P configurators,

the microphone of the 2 wire cameras is excluded
(this function is only possible for cameras 0 to 9. The
microphone cannot be excluded on the other cameras).
F441 F441 F441

OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
OUT OUT OUT
IN IN IN
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SCS IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SCS IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SCS
3499
3499 3499
To other entrance panels or other common To other entrance panels or other common
cameras(configured with P= 8 – P= 11) cameras(configured with P= 12 – P= 15)
cam. 4 cam. 5 cam. 6 cam. 7
=– =– =– = oFF
P P P P
=4 =5 =6 = 7
N =– N =– N =– N = –
Z =– Z =– Z =– Z = – coLoUr InDoor cAmerAs AVAILABLe In tHe FoLLoWInG FInIsHes:
M =– M =– M =– M = –
A =– A =– A =– A = – 391658 LIGHT
PL =– PL =– PL =– PL = – 391659 LIGHT TECH
391657 LIVING
391663 AXOLUTE - WHITE
391661 AXOLUTE TECH
391662 AXOLUTE - ANTHRACITE
428 MY HOME Structured cabling system for the home sector
CONTENTS
MY HOME – Structured cabling system for the home sector
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Structured cabling system for the home sector MY HOME 429

GEnEraL FEaTUrES
What is the structured cabling system for the home sector?

The advancement of multimedia of untested solutions, which may Telephone System, and the Television
services, such as satellite TV and have unpredictable results and data signals
terrestrial digital systems, internet always attentive to technological a “star” system is used to connect the
telephone systems and television, development and to the above stated cables from the distribution board to
have highlighted the need for a needs, BTicino offers an ideal and the user sockets in the various rooms
specific cabling system inside the convenient solution for the creation of the house
house, ensuring the distribution of of a “communication area” inside the
the available services across various distribution board, which centralises
rooms, avoiding the implementation the devices for the distribution of the
Communication area
remote
control device
TV/SAT IPTV
Telephone line
Internet
IPTV
TV/SAT system
Communication area inside the

MY HOMe Flatwall distribution board

MY HOME AUTOMATION
SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
The home structured cabling system By integrating the Web Server to
allows the integration of devices the network, it will be possible to
Data
for the control of the MY HOME remotely control the MY HOME
functions a Multimedia Touch system using a computer or mobile
Screen can be connected to the data phone connected to the internet
network to control all the home TV/SAT
automation functions from a room of
the house, allowing the user can take
advantage of multimedia contents
TV/SAT
(audio and video) stored inside
other PCs connected to the network
TV/SAT
Telephone system
IPTV
TV/SAT
Multimedia Touch Screen 10”
Touch Screen 3,5”

GEnEraL FEaTUrES
The devices for the distribution of data, telephone and tv
TV/SAT IPTV
Telephone distribution frame

F555
it can be used to distribute 1
telephone line to 8 different sockets,
or 2 telephone lines to 4 sockets.
xDSL filter with telephone

distribution frame F558
to separate the ADSL data line
from the Telephone line. The
Telephone line is available on 3
independent outputs.
y
wa
ate
essG Access
Acc Gateway
Power supply F552

it provides 9 V, 1.6 A, voltage for
the supply of active devices.

Patch module F550C6
TV/SAT for patching inside the user socket wiring
IPTV distribution board.
Wire and patch cord connections are
concealed inside the distribution board and
cannot be seen by the user.
Switch F551
for the distribution of 1 data line to 4
different rJ45 sockets.
TV/SAT IPTV
6-way TV/SAT distribution frame
F553
for the distribution of the television
signal to 6 different TV jacks.
Web Server F454

for local and remote management of
MY HOMe applications.

GEnEraL FEaTUrES
application examples:
telephone, data, TV/SaT, iPTV and video door entry system
This drawing shows the possibility of in order to make the iPTV signal distribution board, of a special
distributing, in addition to telephone available to the corresponding Gateway access device supplied by
and data signals, also the iPTV service decoder, it will be necessary to the Supplier of the iPTV service
TV/SaT and digital signals install, inside the communication
TV/SAT
TV/SATTV/SAT IPTV IPT
IPT
IPTV rJ45 sockets
Flatwall
TV/SAT IPTV
TV/SAT jacks

MY HOMe
The following devices are installed video door entry system
inside the distribution board:

 Gateway access supplied by the
supplier of the iPTV service
 data switch F551
 TV/SaT distribution frame F553
 Telephone distribution frame F555
 Patch modules F550C6
 xdSL filter with telephone

GEnEraL FEaTUrES
application examples: telephone, data and integration

with MY HOME for local and remote function control
This drawing shows the possibility This solution makes it possible to use if the network has an internet
of installing a data and telephone the 10” Multimedia Touch Screen connection, it will be possible to
distribution system integrated with to control the home automation control all the home automation
the MY HOME system, for local and functions, and to share the function also remotely, using a PC, or
remote function control multimedia content of other storage a mobile phone
integration is made possible by devices connected to the data The following devices are installed
using the Web Server device, which network inside the distribution board:
operates as a bridge between the  Gateway access supplied by the
BUS wiring of the MY HOME system, supplier of the adSL service
and the data network wiring system  Web Server F454
 data switch F551
 TV/SaT distribution frame
F553 TV/SAT IPTV
TV/SAT jacks
Multimedia Touch Screen 10”
TV/SAT
TV/SAT IPTV
IPTV
rJ45 sockets
DSL InTerneT SerVICe
remote control device

 xdSL filter with telephone
 Telephone distribution frame F555
 Patch modules F550C6
Flatwall

GEnEraL FEaTUrES
Cabling structure and components for the home sector

Home structured cabling requires as well as all active information in new or refurbished homes, where
a STar type structure: the user management and distribution the MY HOME FLaTWaLL solution has
socket connection cables meet in a devices, are located in general, the been selected as the general electric
central point called “star centre” or communication area is created by distribution board (for example, to
communication area grouping together all the devices in also centralise the MY HOME devices),
This is the area where the an appropriate distribution board the communication area must be
connections with the access networks to be installed near the general created inside the distribution board
for distribution of various services distribution board of the home itself
(Telephone system, TV/SaT…),
User socket
User socket
User socket
Communication areas inside the MY HOMe

FLATWALL distribution board

in addition to the distribution board
the following items can be identified:
 Signal handling and distribution
devices;
 Cables for the connection of the
devices to the various user sockets;
 User sockets with connectors split
by service type
User socket
User socket
User socket

GEnEraL FEaTUrES

Switch F551
THE DEVICES FOR THE
DISTRIBUTION OF SIGNALS
The management of the data
network
To ensure the connection of several
computers to the data network
and the sharing of the internet
connection, the “Switch” device F551
must be used
The internet network connection

The connection to the internet
network requires an adSL modem,
which may also be supplied by the
internet Service Provider (iSP)
WIRING DIAGRAM
rJ45 socket rJ45 socket

Patch modules
F550C6
L4665L20/L40
patch cord
TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT IP
Switch
F551
To the ADSL modem

XDSL filter F558
The management of telephone

signals
The telephone signal does not
require any special management
devices, with the exception of a
special filter F558, which separates
the telephone signal from the digital
signal for the adSL modem The
device has 3 filtered outputs for
the connection of three telephone
jacks For more complex systems, a
distribution frame F555 can be used
to replicate one telephone line to For a detailed description of the listed devices see the corresponding technical
eight output lines intended for the sheets .
respective telephone connectors
WIRING DIAGRAM
Patch modules
rJ45 socket F550C6 rJ45 socket
TV/SAT IPTV T
XDSL filter
F558
L4665L20/L40
patch cord
Telephone distribution
rJ45 socket frame F555 rJ45 socket
TV/SAT TV/
Telephone line IPTV

GEnEraL FEaTUrES

Patch module F550C6
The management of the

television signals
The distribution of the television if, on the other hand, the system
signal (both terrestrial and satellite), provides two separate signals, one
to several TV jacks, is entrusted to analogue and one digital, with
the TV/SaT distribution frame F553, separate cables, one distribution
which has one input connector and frame and the corresponding TV
six output connectors if the aerial connectors shall be used for each
system provides mixed analogue and signal
digital signals, only one device will be
needed
WIRING DIAGRAM
Patch module
Socket rJ45 F550C6 Socket rJ45
TV/SAT IPTV
Patch cord
L4665L20/L40
Switch Telephone distribution

F551 frame F555
Socket rJ45
Socket rJ45
TV/SAT IPTV

Signal patching
TV/SAT distribution frame
With this operation it is possible F553
to reconfigure over time the
correspondence between the user
sockets and the devices in the
communication area it is performed
using special patch modules F550C6,
to which the wiring cables are
connected
The connection with the devices
is performed using patch cords
L4665L20 and L4665L40
The special geometrical conformation
of the device (vertical cable input)
means that the wiring and the patch
cords can be concealed inside the
communication distribution board
WIRING DIAGRAM
TV/SAT socket TV/SAT socket
TV/SAT IPTV
TV/SAT socket
TV/SAT IPTV
TV/SAT distribution frame

F553
TV/SAT socket TV/SAT socket
TV/SAT IPTV
TV/SAT IPTV
TV/SAT system
SAT decoder

GEnEraL FEaTUrES
THE WIRING COAXIAL CABLE

in home structured cabling systems The coaxial cable consists of a central The Coaxial cable for Television
two types of cables are used: rigid or flexible conductor, insulated, applications has a characteristic
 coaxial cables for the distribution using dielectric material, from an impedance of 75 Ohms and a
of the television signal; external cylindrical conductor called diameter between 4 and 7 mm
 4 pair twisted cable for the “shield”
transmission of telephone and
data signals
The CEi 306-2 (*) guide calls for a
so-called “basic” wiring characterised
by 1 cable with 4 symmetrical pairs
Cavo COAXIAL
and 1 Coaxial cable destined to the
corresponding rJ45 type connectors
for data transmission, and to coaxial
connectors for the television
The same guide recommends
a so called “advanced” wiring,
characterised by 2 cables with 4
symmetrical pairs for data/telephone
services, and 2 coaxial cables for TV
signals
CABLE WITH 4 SYMMETRIC

PAIRS The performance in terms of due to the current transmission
Used for data and telephone maximum frequency of the requirement, the CEi guide
transmission, this cable consists transmitted signal, is expressed in recommends 5e category cables
of 4 pairs of twisted cables it is categories as below: However, in order to prepare the
available with (STP, S-FTP) or without Category 5: data transmission up to network for future applications,
(UTP) external shield For both, the 100 Mbit/s category 6 or 6a cables are
characteristic impedance is 100 Category 5e: data transmission up to recommended The typical use
Ohms 1000 Mbit/s (100 MHz) requires capping with rJ45
Category 6: data transmission up to connectors
1000 Mbit/s (250 MHz)
Category 6a: data transmission up to
10 Gbit/s (500 MHz)
nOTe (*): CeI 306-2. Guide for

telecommunication and multimedia distribution
Unshielded cable (UTP)
wiring inside residential buildings.
Shielded cable (STP)

THE USER SOCKET
in the system configuration described TV COnneCTOrS
so far, each branch of the “Star
HS4214D
centre” reaches, and ends in, a user
L4202D
socket normally consisting of one or
more connectors
There are two types of connectors for
the home data network:
 TV signal coaxial connector HC4269F
 rJ45 standard connector with 8

contacts for telephone system and
data signals
n4210D
L4269F
Shielded TV and SAT COnneCTOrS in die-cast enclosure
Data network and telephone system connectors
nT4279C6
L4279C6
AM5979C6
n4279C6
For the connection of telephone devices with rJ11 connectors to

rJ45 type connectors, the use of the rJ45/rJ11 adapter cable,
rJ45 connectors L4664, is recommended

Main requirements
STANDARDS DESIGN CRITERIA DEFINITION OF THE FUNCTIONS
The design and installation of the during the design of the home data REQUIRED
home data network system must be network system, it is important that The design of the data network
performed following the indications the following aspects are defined in system requires a good knowledge
and requirements contained in the orderly sequence: of the multimedia functions to be
following documents: Functions required (data, Telephone installed around the home as a way
CEI 306-2: Guide for system, TV); of example, attached is the table of
telecommunication and multimedia Selection of the installation solutions CEi 306-2 guide For each application
distribution wiring inside residential based on the features of the building this table shows the features of the
buildings irrespective of the type of system and corresponding wiring setup to be
CEI 64-100/1: residential building the required functions, it is necessary implemented for the multimedia
Guide for the presetting of the that the PLaniMETrY, as well as a network
infrastructures for electric, electronic, GEnEraL FUrniTUrE PLan, are made
and communication systems available to the installer it must also
Part 1: Building risers be considered that on a design and
CEI 64-100/2: residential building installation point of view the creation
Guide for the presetting of the of a home data network system is
infrastructures for electric, electronic, not very different from that of a
and communication systems traditional electric power system
Page 2: dwellings (apartments)
CEI EN 50173-1: information
technology - Structured cabling
systems
Part 1: General requirements
CEI EN 50173-4: information Selection of the cable by application type
technology - Structured cabling

CABLES SERVICE BAND CABLE USED
systems Page 4: Homes
TV
47...2150 Mhz COAXIAL
(terrestrial + satellite)
Traditional telephone system* 1 Mhz 1 symmetric pair
LAN 1 Gb/s 4 symmetric pairs
* In order to take advantage of the flexibility of the home wiring system, it is recommended that also for the telephone system service a 4 symmetrical pair
cable is used, connected to a RJ45 socket, instead of the traditional twisted pair connected to the RJ11/12 socket.
In this case, the same rJ45 socket used to connect the pc to the local ethernet network can be reused, for example, to connect a standard analogue telephone to the telephone line,
without any intervention required on the horizontal wiring. The only action needed will be the patching of the termination of the corresponding cable in the Star centre, moving
the connector from the ethernet switch to the telephone distribution frame. To connect a telephone unit with rJ11 socket to the rJ45 socket, use the corresponding cable rJ11/
rJ45 L4664.

Creation of the communication area
On an installation point of view, it will therefore be necessary to ZONE FOR HOME WIRING
it is recommended that the also allow for partitions or similar DEVICES
communication area is split in two solutions for the separation of the This area is occupied by the patch
specific zones: systems modules connecting the user
 zone for the installation of if the FLaTWaLL switchboard is used, sockets to the Star centre, as well
Gateway access devices a specific compartment is available as all devices for the appropriate
 zone for home wiring devices for the installation of multimedia distribution of the various signals to
devices the sockets themselves
ZONE FOR GATEWAY ACCESS
DEVICES
This area is occupied by all active
and non active equipment, with
corresponding wiring for the
connection of the electric services
coming from the outside of the
home, such as:
 Telephone line;
 TV/SaT system from the central
unit downstream the aerials Zone for home wiring devices
an example of active device for

this area is the adSL modem with
integrated switch, and if applicable
the Gateway device for the signals
coming from the optic fiber network
On the other hand, a non active
Zone for Gateway Access devices
device can be the filter for the
separation of the telephone signal
from the adSL data signal
For the operation of active devices, it
will be necessary to allow for
230 V power supply sockets, with the
corresponding disconnection and
protection devices in case of indirect
contact and overload
it must be considered that both
devices and wiring of the telephone
and data networks must be kept
separate from the 230 V electric
power supply devices and wiring

GEnEraL rULES FOr inSTaLLaTiOn
Positioning of the user sockets

it is recommended that 2 rJ45 the use of of the user sockets is not also be installed, inside dedicated
sockets (data and telephone) and 1 prevented by the positioning of the device holding boxes if no precise
TV jack are installed in each room, furniture For the power supply of design is available, the miminum
every 3 75 m of the perimeter of the connected devices, on the side requirements recommended for each
the room (ref CEi En 50173-4) The of each user socket one or more standard room of the house could be
number of sockets in each room 230 V power supply sockets must as follows:
must, in any case, be such that
ROOM TYPE DEVICES TO BE USED
from each zone it will be possible
Kitchen 1 RJ45 socket (on worktop level) + 1 TV/SAT jack
to reach the user point using a PC
Main bedroom 3 RJ45 sockets (2 of which for the telephone on bedside cabinets) + 1 TV/SAT jack
or telephone connection cord not Second bedroom 2 RJ45 sockets (bedside cabinet and desk) + 1 TV/SAT jack
longer than 5 metres without causing Living / sitting room 2 RJ45 sockets + 1 TV/SAT jack
any transit problems inside the Study 2 RJ45 sockets
room Obviously, this requirement Tavern 2 RJ45 sockets + 1 TV/SAT jack

Gym 1 RJ45 socket
must be assessed also taking into
Technical room 1 RJ45 socket
account the current or future (laundry room/boiler room, etc.)
position of the furniture, so that For the connection of telephone devices with rJ11 connectors to rJ45 type sockets, use the rJ45/rJ11 adapter cable
L4664.
DIAGRAM
Star centre distribution board
example of a possible home wiring system.

User socket wiring
in order to ensure access to all types service and those for the telephone
of services (data, telephone system, system will be available on all the
and TV), the user socket must be pins of the connector, as shown in Cat. 6 UTP
fitted with rJ45 connectors (female the following table Connectors
type), and coaxial connectors for

aerial systems, with electric features
compatible with the ones of the
corresponding connection cables
RJ45 CONNECTORS
For the connection of modular rJ45
connectors to the 4 symmetric pair RJ45 APPLICATION PIN NUMBER
data cable, two solutions can be 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
implemented, regulated by Telephone system
(analogue digital)
Tia/Eia 568a or Tia/Eia 568B
ISDN
standards respectively
Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mps
From the table it is clear that pins 7 and 8 are not used. However, there are
special applications that also require these pins.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TV COAXIAL SOCKET
EIA 568
rJ45 connector Bsecondo
cablato For the distribution of TV services
lo standard TIA/eIA 568B.
in the residential network wiring
These two standards are completely system it is necessary to install
similar in terms of performance and the Coaxial cable, which must be
supported applications The only connected, in the user sockets, to
difference is that pair 2 and pair 3 are the corresponding F or iEC type TV
switched jack (male type) The socket must be
TV coaxial socket
The main trend is to install systems compatible with the cable features
using the Tia/Eia 568B standard and must assure the transmission,
connection requirements without relevant attenuation, of the
By using this type of wiring, both the television signal with frequencies
signals for the distribution of the data up to 2 150 GHz BTicino has a wide
range of die-cast aluminium TV jacks
for the distribution of TV SaT and FM
radio signals

Wiring diagrams
System with 3 active telephone jacks and 4 active data sockets
(*) (*)
RJ45 sockets
(*) (*)
Star centre
F550C6 F550C6
POTS+ADSL
external
telephone
line
F551 F552
Power
PLT1
F558
a b
IN
PLT1
OUT
a b
LINE
230 Vac
ADSL modem
ITEM DESCRIPTION DIN MOD. QUANTITY

F551 Switch 10/100 Mbs 4 1
F552 Power supply 1 1
F558 ADSL filter 2 1
PLT1 Protect. against lightning 2 1
F550C6 Patch module 1 11
L4665L40/L20 Patch cable 7
See catalogue RJ45 connector 11
NotE (*): sockets preset for future patching

System with 6 active telephone jacks and 6 active data sockets
(*)
RJ45 sockets
(*)
Star centre
F550C6 F550C6 F550C6 F550C6
F555
F552 F551
F551
Power
L1+L2
L1
L1 L2 L1 L2
POTS+ADSL
external
telephone
line
PLT1 F558 230 Vac
a b
IN
PLT1
OUT
a b ADSL modem
LINE
ITEM DESCRIPTION DIN MOD. QUANTITY ITEM DESCRIPTION DIN MOD. QUANTITY
F558 ADSL filter 2 1 F550C6 Patch module 1 14
PLT1 Protect. against lightning 2 1 F552 Power supply 1 1
F555 Tel. distribution frame 4 1 L4665L40/L20 Patch cable 15
F551 Switch 10/100 Mbs 4 2 See catalogue RJ45 connector 14
NotE (*): sockets preset for future patching

Wiring diagrams
System with Gateway access, 6 telephone jacks,

4 data sockets, 1 IPTV jack, and 6 TV/SAT jacks
RJ45 sockets
Star centre
F550C6 F550C6 F550C6
F555 F551 F552
Power
POTS+ADSL L1+L2
L1
L1 L2 L1 L2
external
telephone
line
230 Vac
PLT1
F558 Gateway access (*)
a b
IN
PLT1
IPTV output
OUT
a b
LINE
(*) Access Gateway 1 F550C6 Patch module 1 11
F558 ADSL filter 2 1 F552 Power supply 1 1
PLT1 Protect. against lightning 2 1 L4665L40/L20 Patch cable 14
F555 Telephone distrib. frame 4 1 See catalogue RJ45 connector 11
F553 Hub TV 4 1 See catalogue TV connecor 6
F551 Switch 10/100 Mbs 4 1
NotE (*): Device supplied by the supplier of the IPTV service

Television set with integrated DTT decoder (if the
television is not fitted with one, connect it to the TV
jack using an external DTT decoder)
IPTV decoder SAT receiver
TV jacks
type 4214D
F550C6
F553
Down from TV/SAT aerial TV distribution board

with mixer

Wiring diagrams
System for distribution of telephone system,

data network, TV/SAT signal
RJ45 sockets
Star centre
F550C6 F550C6 F550C6 F550C6
F551 F552 F551 F552

F555
Power Power
POTS+ADSL
L1+L2
L1
L1 L2 L1 L2
external
telephone
line
230 Vac 230 Vac
PLT1
a b
F558
IN
PLT1
OUT
ADSL Modem
a b
LINE

B variant
Down from
aerial
TV central unit IF/IF central unit Multiswitch
DTT decoder SAT receiver

TV
TV jacks
type 4214D
F553
TO THE MY HOME VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

F555 Telephone distrib.frame 4 1
F551 Switch 10/100 Mbs 4 2
F552 Power supply 1 2
F553 Hub TV 4 1
L4665L40/L20 Patch cable 13
See catalogue RJ45 connector 11
See catalogueo TV connecor 6

Wiring diagrams
System with Wireless router modem external to the

distribution board for the management of 4 data sockets
RJ45 sockets
OUT
IN
RJ45 sockets
Star centre
F550C6 F550C6 F550C6
F552
F555 F551
Power
POTS+ADSL
L1+L2
L1
L1 L2 L1 L2
external
telephone
line
230 Vac
PLT1
346020
a b
IN
PLT1
OUT
a b
LINE
Modem (*)

F555 Telephone distrib.frame 4 1
F551 Switch 10/100 Mbs 4 1
F552 Power supply 1.5 1
L4665L40/L20 Patch cable 12 Note (*): If the Modem has an RJ11 input connector use the
See catalogue RJ45 connector 12 L4664 adapter cable

Integration of the data and telephone system network
with the MY HOME system, for local or remote function control
RJ45 sockets
10” Multimedia Touch Screen

for local control
To the telephone system RJ45 sockets system
Star centre
F550C6 F550C6
F454
ETHERNET
F555 F551 F552 SCS AI SCS AV
Power
L1+L2
L1
L1 L2 L1 L2
POTS+ADSL
external
telephone 230 Vac
line TO THE MY HOME SYSTEM
PLT1 ADSL modem

F558
a b
IN
PLT1
OUT
a b
LINE
F454 Web server 10 1 F551 Switch 10/100 Mbs 4 1
HC/HS4659 Multimedia Touch Screen 1 F550C6 Patch module 1 9
F558 ADSL filter 2 1 F552 Power supply 1 1
PLT1 Protect. against lightning 2 1 L4665L40 Patch cable 10
F555 Tel. distribution frame 4 1 See catalogue RJ45 connector 8

Wiring diagrams
Expansion of the number of data sockets
The number of RJ45 sockets for data transmission

shown in the electric diagrams can be extended by
using several F551 switches in cascade, as shown in the
example:
RJ45 sockets
F551 F551
RJ45 sockets
F551
ADSL modem

F551 Switch 10/100 Mbs 4 3

CONTENTS
MY HOME – System integration and control
Wiring diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
System integration and control MY HOME 459

GENERAL FEATURES
System integration
The integration among the various housework MY HOME functions using a PC or
MY HOME system gives the following It makes it possible to centrally
a mobile device connected to the
advantages: control all the functions using local internet Integration is achieved
it allows to perform advanced
and remote management devices using appropriate interfaces that
functions resulting from the In this way, it will be possible to connect the BUS of the various
interaction among different check all the systems installed systems to each other
systems Some examples: the using only one Touch screen device The picture below shows the local
possibility of switching the lights positioned, for example, in the control devices of the MY HOME
on when the Burglar-alarm system corridor or in the living room Also, systems
detects an alarm condition, when away from home, it will be
of automatically reducing the possible to check and manage the
volume of the music broadcasted
Video Display
when a door entry system call is
received, and the switching off of
the heating inside a room when
a opened is opened while doing
Local Display
Nighter control
Touch Screen
PC with MHVISUAL software

Special
control
460 MY HOME System integration and control

Mode of integration
There are two modes of integration: communication protocols through
Integration among the various MY
TCP/IP interfaces using the BTicino
HOME systems; Open Web net protocol
Integration between MY HOME

systems and systems using other
INTEGRATION AMONG MY HOME SYSTEMS

TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT T
Video door entry and home
video surveillance system SCS/SCS Burglar alarm SCS/SCS Automation
interface interface
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi

automazione automazione
energia
diffusione sonora diffusione
luci sonora
antifurto tvcc antifurto
termoregolazione termoregolazione
www
videocitofonia videocitofonia
irrigazione controllo
Audio/Video node
(or Multichannel matrix)
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia

termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo
Sound system lan controllo carichi managementcontrollo
Energy energia luci lan tvcc controllo carichi www energiairrigazione luci t
Integration is achieved as follows:

By sharing of the same BUS wiring,
different systems cannot share the be connected to each other using
as indicated in the description of same wiring This is for example the a specific interface
each individual system case of the burglar-alarm system
Using integration interfaces for
and the automation system, the
those cases when the devices of which corresponding BUS can only
TV/SAT IPTV PROTOCOLS

INTEGRATION BETWEEN MY HOME SYSTEM AND APPLICATIONS WITH DIFFERENT
Open Web Net MY HOME integrated system Devices

communication protocol with DALI protocol
Other home automation

applications

GEnErAL FEATUrES
Integration and interfacing devices

Integration is possible thanks to the The BTicino range of system MY HOME can also be integrated
use of specific interfacing devices integration devices consists of: with systems with different
that enable performing advanced SCS/SCS interface - F422 (2 DIn)
communication protocols and
home automation functions Audio/video node - F441 (6 DIn)
technology, as for example Konnex,
Multichannel matrix - F441M (10
DALI and EIB, through TCP/IP
DIn)) interfaces (for example the Web
Server) The devices are the following:
SCS/EIB interface F426;

SCS/DALI interface F429

INTERFACES FOR INTEGRATION WITH DIFFERENT STANDARDS AND PROTOCOLS

SCS/EIB
Audio/Video node
Interface
Multichannel matrix
SCS/DALI

Integration among MY HOME systems
AUTOMATION AND ENERGY
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The integration between these two To keep the two systems separate
systems is achieved without the need (for example to use independent
for an interface This is because the electric power supplies), these can
devices share the same BUS cable be connected to each other using
and power supply the F422 interface in “physical
separation” mode: MOD = 6”
TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT IP

ENERGY
AUTOMATION MANAGEMENT
utomazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia

automazione controllo
diffusione sonora lanantifurto controllo carichi
termoregolazione energia
videocitofonia luci
controllo tvcc lan ww
contro
Light Shutter Temperature Temperature

control control sensor sensor
230 Vac BUS SCS
TV/SAT IPTV
Dimmer Actuator- Temperature Temperature

actuator TV/SAT 2 relays TV/SAT control actuator control actuator
IPTV IPTV
TV/SAT IPTV
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrig
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione

automazione videocitofonia
diffusione sonora controlloantifurto lan
termoregolazione
controllovideocitofonia
carichi energiacontrollo luci lan tvcc
controllo carichi wwwenergia irrigazione luci tvcc www irrigazione
ora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
Lights Shutters Radiator Radiator

GEnErAL FEATUrES

VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
AND SOUND SYSTEM
The integration between the Video When the entrance panel is activated, It is also possible to use the video
door entry system and the Sound the sound system reduces the handset to broadcast a message
system is achieved using the Audio/ volume of the stereo sources so that inside the various rooms using the
Video node F441 or the multichannel the sound of the bell can be heard amplifiers (pager function)
Matrix F441M The audio will return to its original
The power supply is the same for volume when the handset is replaced
both systems
TV/SAT IPTV
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM SOUND SYSTEM
diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi automazione
energia diffusione
lucisonora antifurto
tvcc termoregolazione
www videoc
irrigaz
Flush mounted amplifier Loudspeaker
Video Station Multichannel

matrix
230 Vac
Entrance panel
Radio tuner RCA input

Outdoor camera

INTEGRATION AMONG ALL THE MOD=4 BURGLAR-ALARM MODE
SYSTEM The SCS/SCS interface in
In addition to the interfacing Burglar-Alarm mode (MOD=4)
procedures described in the previous must be used when integrating the
pages, MY HOME systems can also be Automation or the Video door entry
integrated using the F422 SCS/SCS system (even if integrated with the
interface configured in 3 different Sound System) with the Burglar-alarm
modes: system Each system has a dedicated
Burglar-alarm: MOD = 4
power supply, as shown in the
Galvanic separation: MOD = 0
following drawings
Physical separation: MOD = 6

TV/SAT TV/SAT
IPTV
BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM
diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan automazione diffusione sonora
controllo carichi energia antifurto luci termoregolazionetvcc videocitofonia www controlloirrig
Power supply Power supply

230 Vac 230 Vac
OUT OUT
SCS interface SCS interface

MOD=4 MOD=4
IN IN
TV/SAT IPTVTV/SAT IPTV
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto automazione

termoregolazione videocitofonia antifurto controllotermoregolazionelan
diffusione sonora automazione
controllo
videocitofonia carichi controllo diffusione
energia sonoralan antifurto
luci te
controllo carich
AUTOMATION 230 Vac

Power supply
230 Vac
Power supply VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SOUND
SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM

GENERAL FEATURES

MOD=0 GALVANIC SEPARATION
The SCS/SCS interface in Galvanic system with the Video door entry
separation mode (MOD=0) must system or the Sound system. Each
be used when interfacing the system has a dedicated power
Automation or Energy management supply.
TV/SAT IPTV
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY AUTOMATION
Power supply
SYSTEM SYSTEM Power supply
OUT
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan automazione
controllo carichi diffusione sonora
energia antifurto
luci termoregolazione
tvcc videocitofo
ww
SCS interface
230 Vac MOD=0 230 Vac
IN
MOD=6 PHYSICAL SEPARATION

This mode brings together Each system can be connected both As described in the previous pages,
the features of the “physical to the OUT and the IN clamp of the the integration between the two
expansion” mode, described in the interface. systems does not require the use of
“AUTOMATION” section, and the In MOD=6, the interface F422 interfaces. However, the possibility
features of the “galvanic separation” can also be used to integrate the of keeping the two BUSes separate
mode, and can be used for systems Automation system with the Energy may be useful if the user also wishes
with devices preset for virtual Management system, keeping the to keep the electric power supplies of
configuration. corresponding BUSes electrically the systems separate.
separate.
TV/SAT IPTV
AUTOMATION
Power supply
SYSTEM
TV/SAT ENERGY
IPTV
MANAGEMENT
Power supply
SYSTEM
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo ca
230 Vac
OUT
SCS interface
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo MOD=6
lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
230 Vac
IN

USE OF INTERFACES WITH
DIFFERENT MODES
The two modes described may be For example, the integration of of the home in alarm status using the
used together when integrating the Video door entry system with monitor of the video handset; at the
different systems and performing the Automation and Burglar-alarm same time as the activation of the
advanced functions systems enable displaying the areas siren, all the lights inside the home
will also come on
TV/SAT
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY BURGLAR-ALARM
IPTV TV/SAT
Power supply SYSTEM SYSTEM Power supply
zione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia automazione

lan antifurtocarichi
controllo termoregolazione
luci controllo
tvcc lan www
230 Vac 230 Vac
OUT OUT
SCS interface SCS interface
MOD=0 MOD=4
IN IN
TV/SAT
Power supply
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo la

AUTOMATION
230 Vac
SYSTEM

GEnErAL FEATUrES

It is possible to create a system If necessary, each of these can be
with three interfaces, to connect an expanded or interfaced with the
Automation system with physical Video Door Entry System or the
extension (interface with MOD=6) Sound System using other interfaces
and a Burglar Alarm system (interface It is the case, for example, of a villa
with MOD=4) to a single riser consisting of several large floors
TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT

AUTOMATION BURGLAR-ALARM
SYSTEM Power supply SYSTEM Power supply
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto automazione

termoregolazione diffusione sonora
videocitofonia antifurto
controllo termoregolazione
lan videocitofonia
controllo carichi controllo
energia lan
luci
230 Vac 230 Vac
OUT
Power supply
I1 = -
I2 = -
I3 = - OUT
I4 = 2
MOD = 6
IN I1 = -
I2 = -
I3 = -
I4 = 1
MOD = 4
IN 230 Vac
TV/SAT IP
AUTOMATION
Power supply SYSTEM
automazione diffusione sonora OUT

antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan contr
230 Vac
I1 = -
I2 = -
I3 = -
I4 = 1
MOD = 2
IN

Integration between MY HOME
and systems with different protocols
In order to integrate the MY HOME Interfacing with other external
system with systems with different protocols is also possible using the
communication protocols, 2 devices OPEn WEB nET communication
are available: protocol, purposely designed
SCS/EIB interface for the
by BTicino for the exchange of
integration of MY HOME with EIB information and controls with devices
protocol based systems; compatible with this language
SCS/DALI interface for the
For more information visit the
integration of MY HOME with website www myopen-legrandgroup
lighting DALI protocol based com or see the following pages of
systems; this guide
TV/SAT IPTV
Power supply Actuator
To DALI devices
230 Vac
MY HOME
SYSTEM
Interfacing with DALI devices

GEnErAL FEATUrES
System control
The BTicino MY HOME system can a simple command sent using Mobile access
monitor and control your home or the TOUCH SCrEEn, or remotely
office in total safety and privacy using the PC, a hand-held
TV/SAT IPTV
Control can be performed locally computer,telephone or mobile
using the various tools, such as phone
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregol
LOCAL CONTROL
The system can command and
control the MY HOME system, using
zione videocitofonia controllo
the controls installed insidelanthe controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
home A single movement controls

several devices inside the home
(blinds, shutters, lights )
Scenario control
iPad with My Home BTicino Application
CONTROL WITH PC AND IPAD

It is also possible to supervise and
control the system using a PC with PC with MHVISUAL software
MHVISUAL software installed, and

an iPad with the BTicino My Home The BTicino My Home application is
application Thanks to a simple and only available from the Apple Store in
customisable graphic interface, the following versions:
it is possible to control lights and - Free DEMO, with limited functionality;
shutters, view the images from the - at a fee, including all the My Home
cameras installed in the various functions
rooms, change the temperature,
and attend to any alarms occurred

REMOTE CONTROL
The system can be controlled and Internet
monitored remotely (when away
from the premises where the MY
HOME system is installed) using
the MY HOME WEB portal or an
internet point-point connection
The extremely quick, private and
safe system provides control of
your home from anywhere, also
performing the CCTV functions and
monitoring the burglar-alarm system
(sending SMS messages or e-mails
with attachments)
remote connection can be achieved Point-point connection:
the Internet connecting directly
in two different ways: Direct connection to the devices to the fixed IP address of the line
by means of ADSL line dedicated to the control system
MY HOME WEB service

The ADSL line gives access to the This control is performed using
The connection to the system is MY HOME system by means of dedicated WEB pages
ensured using the MY HOME WEB

portal This is the virtual platform
for remote management services
dedicated to users with a MY HOME
system equipped with BTicino
remote connection devices
MY HOME WEB is intended both for
installers and users; the installers Mobile access Internet
will be able to offer their customers
a remote assistance and remote
TV/SAT IPTV
system diagnostic service Using
a mobile phone or a PC with
internet connection, users will be
able to remotely control all the Internet
home automation functions, like
for example the activation of the
o termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
Point-point connection
cameras for the monitoring of
the home, the reception of video
door entry system calls when away
Web Server
from the home, the activation of
the burglar-alarm system and the
heating system

GEnErAL FEATUrES
Local control devices

BaSIC CONTROL SPECIaL CONTROL SOFT TOuCH KNOB CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL
CONTROL
FuNCTIONS PERFORMED
H4652/2 H4651M2 HD4653M2/3 HD4563
L4652/2 L4651M2 HC4653/2/3 HC4563
AM5832/2 AM5831M2 HS4653/2/3 HS4563 3529
H4652/3 L4563 HD4654
L4652/3 N4563 HC4654
AM5832/3 NT4563 HS4654
L/N/NT4654N
Cyclical ON/OFF
ON/OF control with light

intensity adjustment
LIGHTING
General, room,
and group controls
Timed controls
Shutter control
UP/DOWN in normal mode
auTOMaTION UP/DOWN in safe mode
General, room, and group
controls
Recalling of scenarios saved

in the F420 scenario module
SCENaRIO CONTROL Activation of scenarios

saved in the MH200N
scenario programmer
(CEN configurator)
System arming and

BuRGLaR aLaRM
disarming and separation
Amplifier ON/OFF, track

SOuND SySTEM change, and volume
adjustment
Temperature display and

TEMPERaTuRE CONTROL
zone management
Consumption control and

display
ENERGy SaVING
Anti black-out load
management
VIDEO DOOR ENTRy Control and command of

SySTEM video door entry functions Electric door lock release Electric door lock release Electric door lock release and
and staircase light control and staircase light control staircase light control
Display of network
MuLTIMEDIaLITy multimedia contents (IP
Radio and Media Server)

GREEN SWITCH BaDGE-HOLDER TRaNSPONDER CaPaCITIVE NIGHTER SCENaRIO CONTROL
CONTROL POCKET REaDER aND WHICE CONTROL
HC/HD/HS4658 H4648 HD4607 HD4680

HC/HD/HS4659 H4649 HC4607 HC4680
HD4657M3/4
L/N/NT4658 LN4648 HS4607 HS4680
HC4657M3/4
L/N/NT4659 LN4649 L/N/NT4607 L4680
HS4657M3/4
N4680
NT4680

GEnErAL FEATUrES

LOCaL DISPLay TOuCH SCREEN MuLTIMEDIa TOuCH SCREEN
FuNCTIONS PERFORMED HD4685

HC4685
HS4685
L4685
N4685 H4684 HD4690
NT4685 L4684 HC4690
AM5864 HS4690
Cyclical ON/OFF
ON/OF control with light

intensity adjustment
LIGHTING
General, room,
and group controls
Timed controls
Shutter control
UP/DOWN in normal mode
AUTOMATION UP/DOWN in safe mode
General, room, and group
controls
Recalling of scenarios saved in

the F420 scenario module
SCENARIO CONTROL Activation of scenarios saved

in the MH200N scenario
programmer
(CEN configurator)
System arming and disarming

BURGLAR ALARM
and separation
Amplifier ON/OFF, track change,

SOUND SYSTEM
and volume adjustment
TEMPERATURE Temperature display and zone

CONTROL management
Consumption control and display

ENERGY SAVING
Anti black-out load
management
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY Control and command of video

SYSTEM door entry functions Electric door lock release and staircase light control
Display of network multimedia

MULTIMEDIALITY contents (IP Radio and Media
Server)

VIDEO TOuCH SCREEN VIDEO HaNDSETS
349310
349311/12/13
H4687
349320/21
System status and alarm notification display System status and alarm notification display System status and alarm notification display
Display of camera images
Display of the main screen of the 3465 multimedia interface

GEnErAL FEATUrES

The MY HOME system can be advanced like the TOUCH SCrEEn as scenarios (which with just one
commanded and controlled used Just one command manages simple touch let you switch On lights, raise
various interfaces, from the simplest functions such as switching on a shutters, switch on the sound system,
such as the basic control to the most light and advanced functions such set the temperature etc )
Soft Touch control - 2 modules
TWO AND THREE AXOLUTE SOFT

TOUCH CONTROLS
With the simple touch of the control,
this device is capable of sending
actuation and adjustment commands
for the automation, sound system
and video door entry system
functions
AXOLUTE NIGHTER, WHICE AND

WHITE GLASS CONTROLS
The nighter and Whice control This effect gives the user the feeling
is a control where the traditional of activating the control
pushbuttons are replaced by Using the appropriate configurator it
capacitive sensors is possible to select different intensity
Moving the finger close to a sensor is levels
Nighter 3 module control
the same as pressing a pushbutton
The device can therefore be used to
control single or group loads (e g
Lights and Shutters), sound system,
scenarios, and basic door entry
system functions
Whice 4 module control

It’s manufactured in the versions with
3 and 4 flush mounted modules, with
6 and 8 keys respectively
Each zone corresponding to a key is
marked at the centre by a light blue
LED
When the user moves a finger close,
its intensity increases sensibly, and
remains so until the finger is moved
away again

INFRARED CONTROLS
Ir receiver and new Ir remote IR receiver
control: with the receiver,manual
control can be replaced or integrated
with a remote control, using the
infrared remote control 3529
IR remote control
Controls intended for 1-relay motor etc ), scenario managements,

actuators for single loads and 2-relay Sound system and Video door entry
actuators for double loads (shutter system
CODE PROTECTED CONTROL

When used in the Automation
system, the device created for Code protected control
arming/disarming the Burglar-alarm

system can be used to manage basic
and advanced controls, which are
Transponder
protected and can be activated using
a transponder badge

GEnErAL FEATUrES

MOVEMENT AND LIGHTING
SENSORS
Thanks to the new sensors of the Comfort and wellbeing

Lighting Management system, The new sensors also allow
Passive presence IR detector
within the MY HOME system it is now increasing the level of comfort
possible to control the lighting levels of the users, with the automatic
based on the presence of people switching on of the light when
inside the room and the amount of entering the room, and the
natural light, ensuring: preservation of the desired
Energy efficiency
lighting level based on external
With the new sensors it is possible conditions
to eliminate energy waste through
an intelligent management of
the lights, ensuring the necessary
lighting levels, at the right time
and in the right place The various
operating modes that can be set
with the configuration enable the
user to obtain different levels of
energy efficiency
Light and presence IR sensor
GREEN SWITCH: ILLUMINATION

ONLY WHEN NEEDED
Green Switch is the intelligent state of regulations, saving energy without
the art solution for managing lighting compromising on modern life comfort
without waste in the residential and today is possible
service sectors The light is switched on Bticino offers solutions for an
by the user, and goes off automatically environmentally intelligent
when no one is in the room management of lighting, and for
respect for the environment and the control of domestic energy
Passive IR movement sensor
compliance with the new building consumptions - AUTO MODE-

LOCAL DISPLAY TOUCH SCREEN
TOUCH SCrEEn OLED technology This is a room control for all the MY and customised icons for the light
control device for the control of the HOME functions It is possible to points Again, with a simple touch
Automation (scenario management), switch the lights on and off, lower on the icon chosen, the lamp or
Temperature control and Sound or rise the shutters, control garden lamps associated with it will switch
system functions of the MY HOME watering, adjust the temperature on or off
system in the various rooms, etc , and to
Local display automatically activate scenarios
based on logic or time conditions
The display shows a “home page”,
Touch Screen
inside which the applications that
can be managed are graphically
represented
Touch the icon for the application
to be managed (e g Lighting) to
display a page with the included
MHVISUAL AND VIDEO TOUCH

SCREEN
The MHVISUAL applications enable, MHVISUAL communicates with the
using a graphic interface that can MY HOME systems using an Ethernet
be easily customised, to control the card fitted in the VIDEO TOUCH
MY HOME system devices through a SCrEEn and the generic PC for access
VIDEO TOUCH SCrEEn or a generic to one or more WEB Servers
PC
The program gives the possibility of Video Touch Screen with MHVISUAL software
creating a graphic representation of

the system to be controlled, where
the actual devices are represented by
preset, and fully customisable icons
At any time, it will be possible to
control the status of the lighting,
automation and burglar-alarm
system, to activate the HOME VIDEO
SUrVEILLAnCE SYSTEM, and manage
the saved scenarios

GEnErAL FEATUrES
10” MULTIMEDIA TOUCH

SCREEN
Within the range of BTicino MY it is also possible to answer video connection In this case, it will also be
HOME home automation system door entry system calls, and visually possible, using appropriate icons of
control products is the Multimedia monitor all the rooms inside the the Home Page, to take advantages
Touch Screen Thanks to the 10” house through the images of the MY of rSS services such as news and
16/9 LCD screen with Touch Screen HOME system cameras weather forecasts, display Webcam
technology, a touch of the simple In addition to the described functions, images, and listen to the radio
and intuitive icons is enough to easily there is also the possibility of through the internet
managed all the home automation managing, together with the Sound Available in three finishes, anthracite
functions, like, for example, the system, multimedia contents such as grey (HS4690), metallic grey
automation of lights and shutters, the audio, video and pictures available (HC4690), and white (HD4690), the
display of energy consumption levels, from external sources connected to a device is completed by teak, brushed
and the monitoring of the burglar- USB port, or an SD card connector, or or white aluminium, or nighter &
alarm system status by connecting the device to a home Whice glass front cover plates
Using Multimedia Touch Screen data network with ADSL internet
HA4690LTK
HA4690XC
HA4690VNB
HA4690VSW
HA4690VBB
SUPERVISION AND CONTROL OF THE VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM USING THE 10” MULTIMEDIA TOUCH SCREEN

Video Station
VIDEO DISPLAY AND VIDEO

STATION
Devices created for managing the
video door entry system functions,
the VIDEO DISPLAY and the VIDEO
STATIOn, if installed in integrated
MY HOME systems (Automation with
Video door entry system, Burglar- Video Display
alarm, Temperature control, etc ),
they are capable of managing the
home automation functions by
activating the customisable menus,
displayed on a colour LCD screen
As far as the Automation functions
are concerned, both devices can
be used to activate an appropriate
menu, and the scenarios saved in the
This is not a TOUCH SCrEEn device
NIGHTER & WHICE VIDEO

STATION
Handset that can be installed in 2
wire video systems, with 8” colour
LCD display
Whice Video Station
It’s integrated in the MY HOME
system, and manages the following
functions: Video door entry system,
Temperature control, Sound system,
Scenarios, Alarms
All the home automation functions
are managed using the customisable
menus found on the display
This is not a TOUCH SCrEEn device

GEnErAL FEATUrES

SCENARIO MANAGEMENT
SYSTEMS
These devices can be used to create watching the television or reading systems is the activation of a certain
particular and advanced room a book, following the lifestyle of the background music, the setting of the
comfort situations called scenarios, user temperature and the light level of the
for example by switching on some Another example of an advanced house, when entertaining friends
lights to a certain intensity level, scenario that can be set using
and positioning some shutters for the various integrated MY HOME
Scenario programmer MH200N

Green Switch control and
light/movement sensor
Touch Screen
TV/SAT
Nighter & Whice control

The scenarios described are managed Scenario module F420, 2 DIn
Scenario programmer, MH200n, for

using particular devices capable of modules, capable of saving 16 the creation and management of
saving in the memory all the Controls scenarios for automation, sound advanced scenario, also dependant
that define the scenario, and which system, temperature control on time events
the user can recall simultaneously by and video door entry system
pressing one single pushbutton applications
The devices capable of saving and
programming these functions are the
TV/SAT IPTV
following:
Special control
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc w
Video Station (*)
Soft Touch control
Local display
IPTV
Protected scenario control with transponder (*)
controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione Scenario control
NOTE (*): at the moment these devices cannot activate scenarios managed by the MH200N scenario programmer..

GEnErAL FEATUrES

SCENARIO PROGRAMMER
MH200N
The device, installed in a MY HOME the nine auxiliary channels; and date enables, for example, to
system, executes the scenarios An certain hour or date;
simulate a presence inside the home
programmed with the TIMH200n An event of the burglar-alarm
by automatically activating the
software (included in the CD system; shutters or the lights at certain preset
supplied) based on the following A condition occurring on the
times, when no one is in fact at home
enabling, disabling, block or release Temperature control system; A control pushbutton of the
events: An entrance panel call or the status
automation system can be
Pressure of a control pushbutton
of a camera of the video door entry programmed so that when it is
(configured in CEn mode); system; pressed all currently active scenarios
Switching on and off of a light
An event of the sound system
are interrupted (Panic button)
(with the exception of dimmer Following these events, MH200n MH200n also operates as a system
light points); can control the MY HOME system Gateway See the section “remote
Automatic operation activation
applications control devices”
(shutter movement); The execution of a conditioned
An event managed using one of
scenario combined with a set time
EXAMPLES OF SCENARIOS
Below are some examples of to be activated is performed
scenarios that can be set using the using the appropriate TiMH200n
MH200n device program supplied together with the
The association of the keys of the programmer
control devices to the scenarios
automazione diffusione sonora
F411/2
Scenario 1 – Returning home:
When the burglar-alarm is disarmed, at daytime the shutters go up but the
TV/SAT IPTV
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto term
lights stay off; at night time the lights come on but if closed the shutters
remain closed.
TV/SAT IPTV
F411/1N
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www ir

TV/SAT IPTV
TV/SAT IPTV
F411/1N
Scenario 2 - Garden lights:
Following the activation
automazione of the
diffusione control device,
sonora antifurto everytermoregolazione
evening at 20.00 o’clock,
or when the light sensor detects that outside is dark, all the lights of the
garden come on automatically.
A= 1
PL= 1
M= CEN
F411/2
Light
13 14
sensor
automazione
sonora antifurto
diffusione sonora termoregolazi
antif
Scenario 3 - Energy saving: TV/SAT TV/SAT IPTV IPTV
Following a room control (A=2) for the opening of the shutters, if the light
A= 2
sensor detects that it is daytime, the scenario automatically turns off all the
lights of that room.
F411/1N
automazione
sonora diffusione
antifurto sonora termoregolazione
antifurto videocitofonia
videocitofonia lan
controllo controllo carichi
lan energia
controllo carichi luci
energia tvcc luci wwwtvcc irrigazione
A= AMB A= 2
PL= 2
automazione automazione
diffusione sonora diffusione sonora termoregolaz
antifurto antif
Light
F411/2
sensor
TV/SAT TV/SAT IPTV IPTV
Scenario 4 - Relax: TV/SAT
The control device can be used to lower the shutters, adjust the dimmer lights
at 20%, and activate the sound system in the desired room.
automazione
sonora diffusione
antifurto sonora termoregolazione
antifurto videocitofonia
videocitofonia lan
controllo controllo carichi
lan controllo
energia carichi luci
energia tvcc luci www
tvcc irrigazion
F411/1N
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan co
20%
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofon
A= 1
PL= 1
M= CEN

GEnErAL FEATUrES
remote control devices

MY HOME offers the possibility a hand-held PC or a WAP telephone MY HOME PORTAL WEB
of controlling all the integrated connected to the internet network In In addition to direct connection
functions of the house using a PC, a both cases the control is performed control, by using the telephone or the
hand-held PC, a fixed line telephone, using any browser program to access internet the Gateway access devices
or a mobile phone the particular WEB pages saved in the of the home give the possibility of
In order to enable remote control, the WEB server, where the functions to be remotely controlling all the MY HOME
following devices, providing Gateway managed are represented by simple functions using the connection to the
access between the MY HOME system and intuitive icons MY HOME WEB portal
and the telephone and/or internet Thanks to the BUS of the MY HOME In this case, by using a PC connected
network, must be installed inside the system the WEB server is connected to the internet or a telephone, it
home to all the functions installed inside will be possible to interact with a
F454 Web Server, or MH200n
the home (automation, burglar-alarm, virtual platform, which exchanges
scenario programmer; etc ) Connection to the outside is, with the MY HOME system all the
3486 or 3485 burglar-alarm central
as already indicated, though the information on the status of the
unit internet home automation functions of the
If the Web server is used inside If the Burglar-alarm central unit house
the home, it will be possible to is used, connected to the PSTn
connect the system locally using a or GSM telephone network, the NOTE: Web Servers, scenario programmers and
PC connected to the LAn nETWOrK control of certain functions of the burglar-alarm central unit are flexible devices
of the home, or remotely using a PC, MY HOME system is performed by purposely designed to enable remote control of the
remotely sending special telephone various MY HOME functions using the above modes.
commands In case of limited control requirements, the following
3486
devices can be used, which can only be managed
using telephone or SMS commands:
Devices for MY HOME remote control GSM telephone activator F462;

PSTN F461/2 telephone actuator.

F454 For the features see the following pages
MH200N
3485
F461/2
F462

EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION TO THE F454 WEB SERVER USING A SMARTPHONE AND THE MH300 WI-FI MODEM ROUTER
LAN NETWORK
Ethernet
Modem Router
TV/SAT My Home system BUS
IPTV
Smartphone
Telephone line
o termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc

Internet
www irrigazione
ISP
EXAMPLE
IPTVOF CONNECTION TO THE F454 WEB SERVER USING A SMARTPHONE AND GPS CONNECTION
Smartphone
Web Server

GEnErAL FEATUrES

aDSL
FuNCTIONS PERFORMED
F454 MH200N
Automation
- ON/OFF lighting
- Shutter UP/DOWN
Burglar alarm
Energy management
Video surveillance system

max 96 cameras (connecting the F454 to a 2 wire digital video door entry system)
Display the pictures in black and white and colour
Temperature control
Sending e-mail messages following instrusions and technical alarm
Sending an SMS following specific events, request for current status, alarms
Only with MY HOME portal
Sending voice calls in case of intrusion and technical alarm

Only with MY HOME portal
Sending e-mail with attachment in case of intrusion and technical alarm
Video door entry answering machine: saving and sending the message and pictures recorded
by the entrance panel by e-mail
Forwarding of calls following Stop&Go events

GSM GSM + PSTN aNaLOGuE TELEPHONE LINE (PSTN)
Art.F462
F461/2
3486 3485
Control of single electric loads Control of single electric loads
Only with MY HOME portal Only with MY HOME portal
Switching on and off remotely Only with MY HOME portal Only with MY HOME portal

GEnErAL FEATUrES

F454 AUDIO/VIDEO WEB or “no alarm notification”) It is Listen to the audio recorded by the

SERVERS also possible to receive an e-mail microphone of the selected camera
These devices can be used to operate message, with images attached, in (remote noise monitoring;
a MY HOME system installed in the your mailbox, for the notification of Broadcast the own voice through

house or the office The connection burglar-alarm system events; the loudspeaker associated to the
can be established using a modem Supervision of the electric system,
selected camera (real time audio
and/or a data network (wired with the reception of messages in communication using the personal
or wireless) By using a Personal case of tripping of the Stop&Go computer);
Computer or a hand-held computer device Listen and view the messages

with standard browser (e g Internet In addition, it is possible to perform recorded using the “Video door
Explorer 6), the user can locally or the following operations: entry system answering machine
remotely connect to the Web server, real time audio and video
function”
using customisable web pages, and connection to the cameras of the The audio messages and the
perform the following operations: video door entry system images may also be forwarded by
Supervision and control of the
In particular, it is possible to: e-mail to an address
Automation, Energy management View the images broadcasted by

and Temperature control systems; the selected camera (with the
Supervision of the burglar-alarm
possibility of adjusting the image,
system by receiving the status the framing and the zoom settings
messages (“system in alarm status” of the image using the PC);
TV/SAT IPTV
MY HOME FUNCTIONS WHICH THE WEB SERVER CAN MANAGE
TV/SAT IPTV
Automation
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto term

Burglar alarm
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc
Web server
Lighting
luci tvcc
Home video
energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
surveillance system
MY HOME portal Monitoring, command and

TV/SAT IPTV TV/SAT IPTV control of the system by
means of web pages and/or
management programs
Management and control of the MY HOME system using a

a antifurto personal computerdiffusione
automazione
termoregolazione or avideocitofonia
hand-held
sonora computer, by connectingtermoregolazione
antifurto
controllo lan
Video door entry
videocitofonia
controllo carichi
Energy
controllo
energia lan luci controllo carichi
tvcc energiawww luci
irrigazione
to the MY HOME portal through a fixed-line or mobile phone, system management
following a customisable voice menu.

With the activation of the MY HOME The Web Server can only connect As well as having the same level of
WEB service, it is possible to remotely one user with the My Home system; acces as the user, the administrator
manage the home, using a PC or a this is fundamental to guarantee can also access the COnFIGUrATIOn
hand-held PC with internet, fixed the confidentiality, the coherence function and define certain Web
line telephone or mobile phone and the univocity of the operations Server parameters, such as the
connection performed number of pictures to be saved in
The Web Server can also be used as a The controls, defined during the the video door entry answering
Gateway for the virtual configuration programming of the Web server machine, the e-mail address to which
of the MY HOME devices using the device software programs alarm signals and/or messages in
supplied, are password protected to the answering machine, login and
prevent unwanted access password for access to the pages as
Two types of users can access the user, date, time and time zone and
Web pages: display language of the WEB pages
administrator,
In case of control using the MY
user
HOME WEB service, acces is through
the MY HOME portal via double
identification
Example of control pages for the F454 Web Server
Identification
page
Control Home
Page
NOTE: The privacy of the information exchanged and of the pictures displayed is also guaranteed by the SSL
128 bit protocol.

GEnErAL FEATUrES

WEB SERVER FOR CONNECTION TO
THE INTERNET NETWORK
To connect the MY HOME system configured, an ADSL modem and an
to the Internet and use the MY ADSL line are required (with fixed or
HOME WEB Portal, in addition to dynamic IP)
the F454 Web Server, appropriately
PC1 PC2
IP: 192.168.1.36 IP: 192.168.1.37
SM:255.255.225.0 SM:255.255.225.0
IP: 192.168.1.35
SM:255.255.225.0
F454
LAN
IP public
ADSL Modem IP: 192.168.1.1
Internet PC3
luci tvcc www irrigazione SM:255.255.225.0
IP: 192.168.1.38
SM:255.255.225.0

WIRELESS EXTENSION OF A
NETWORK
If the ADSL modem is not a “wireless” Before being included in the system,
modem, or to extend the radio signal, repeaters must be wired to the Wi-Fi
it will be possible to use a “repeater” router using a LAn cable for Internet
to create extended wireless networks connection, and must be correctly
in homes with several floors without configured
wired LAn network
For optimum use, we recommend
to allow for one “repeater” for each
PC1
floor
IP: 192.168.1.36
SM:255.255.225.0
Repeater
1ST FLOOR
IP: 192.168.1.2
SM:255.255.225.0
GROUND FLOOR
LAN
IP: 192.168.1.1
SM:255.255.225.0
IP pubblic
tvcc Internet
www irrigazione
ADSL Modem PC3
LAN IP: 192.168.1.38
SM:255.255.225.0
IP: 192.168.1.35
SM:255.255.225.0
F454

GEnErAL FEATUrES

BURGLAR-ALARM CENTRAL
UNIT WITH PSTN OR GSM
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATOR
The telephone communicator, with Telephone controls
Can be interrogated by telephone

which the 3486 and 3485 burglar- The devices installed in the home to give information on the status of
alarm central units are fitted, is can be commanded using the the burglar-alarm system;
capable of automatically dialling fixed-line or the mobile phone Allows continuous monitoring of

previously programmed telephone by using predefined codes, or the system sending, for example, a
numbers and to forward, through using the MY HOME WEB service notification that there has been a
the PSTn (3485) or PSTn/GSM (3486) (through a PC or a hand-held pc power cut for more than 2 hours
telephone lines, one or more pre- with internet line, a fixed line The device also makes available:
recorded messages, following an telephone, or a mobile phone) the possibility of setting an extra

intrusion or a technical alarm It also joker telephone number, common
enables bidirectional communication MAIN FUNCTIONS for all the messages, for easier
between the user and the burglar- The telephone communicator: tracking;
alarm system or the automation when there are particular events
automatic recording of the internal

system, for the interrogation of the such as an alarm (example: memory of the events which have
status of the burglar-alarm system, intrusion alarm) or system fault, it happened and been detected by
and the activation of the loads (lights automatically calls the telephone the system,
and shutters) The programming and numbers previously set, specifying The possibility of connecting to the

the remote use are protected by a by means of pre-recorded BTicino “MY HOME” portal
secret code consisting of 5 digits, messages the type of alarm This will make the MY HOME WEB
which can be customised by the detected; services available, for example the
user; the secret code must also be commands an automatic operation
forwarding of an e-mail when an
entered in case of alarm call, to send following an event detected by the alarm occurs
monitoring and silencing commands burglar-alarm system;
Its functions can be divided into 3 can be called by the user, and

categories: using “open web net” commands Burglar-alarm central unit with PSTN/
GSM telephone communicator 3486
Alarm management
or simplified commands can
When the burglar-alarm system activate the operation of devices
detects an alarm, it activates to call inside the home;
the numbers set, specifying the
type of alarm detected
Automation
Burglar-alarm central unit with
PSTN telephone communicator 3485
Following events detected by
the burglar-alarm system, it
can determine the automatic
operation of other devices in the
home

EXAMPLES OF USE
5 examples of use of the burglar- Interrogating the status of the
sends a call to the pre-programmed
alarm control unit with PSTn or burglar-alarm system telephone numbers and connects
GSM telephone communicator are By calling the home number the to the MY HOME portal The portal
proposed below remember that communicator can be interrogated will send an e-mail, an SMS, and a
each device can perform all the to receive information on the voice call to the pre-programmed
functions indicated simultaneously status of the burglar-alarm system addresses
InTrUSIOn ALArM
(e g on/off, events detected)
Following an intrusion alarm the Technical alarm (gas leak)

communicator calls the pre-set By combining the gas detector in
telephone numbers the burglar-alarm system via an
Tampering alarm and switching on
interface, when there is a gas leak
the garden lighting the communicator will call and
Following a tampering alarm inform the user
(window opening) the dialling Alarm forwarding using the MY

device calls the pre-set telephone HOME WEB portal
numbers and switches on the Following an alarm the telephone
lamps in the garden communicator of the central unit
TV/SAT IPTV
INTRUSION ALARM Tampering alarm and switching on the garden lighting

Central unit Central unit Relay
3486 3486 actuator
Contact
IR Lighting
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo interface
lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc
sensor
Alarms Alarms
AT IPTV TV/SAT TV/SAT IPTV IPTV TV/SAT
Mobile phone Fixed-line telephone Mobile phone Fixed-line telephone

TV/SAT IPTV
Interrogation of the burglar-alarm status
Central unit
3486
lo automazione
iffusione sonora lan diffusione
antifurto sonora
controllo carichi antifurto
termoregolazione termoregolazione
energiavideocitofonia luci controllo System
videocitofonia
automazione
tvcc lan controllo
diffusione
www sonora
controllo lan
carichi antifurto
irrigazione controllo carichi
energia termoregolazione
lucienergiavideocitofonia
tvcc luci controllo www tvcc lan
irrigazione w
status

Burglar alarm
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci
Alarms
TV/SAT TV/SAT IPTV

IPTV
Mobile phone Fixed-line telephone

GEnErAL FEATUrES

GSM telephone activator
GSM TELEPHONE ACTIVATOR

F462
It can be used to enable and disable thermostats to switch the system
the user loads remotely, using simple On or OFF remotely Using the L/n/
SMS telephone messages nT4550 timer thermostat one can
The device is set up to have 2 also interrogate the system status
alarm contacts When the status of remotely and set it to a particular
one of the contacts changes the temperature
device sends an alarm SMS to the
saved number The device can be
interfaced with the BTicino timer
USE WITH TIMER THERMOSTAT USE FOR LOADS ON/OFF

TV/SAT IPTV
System ON-OFF
Timer thermostat Light

automazione diffusione sonora TV/SAT
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia
IPTV
controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc
SMS SMS ON-OFF
automazione diffusione sonora antifurto Interaction

termoregolazione with
videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www Watering
irrigazione
the system ON-OFF

Timer thermostat
L/N/NT4450
ALARM NOTIFICATION USE
SMS
Close alarm
contacts

Telephone actuator
TELEPHONE ACTUATOR F461/2

The telephone actuator can control The activation, deactivation, check
two users (e g boilers, watering the and programming commands must
garden, staircase light, garden light, only be sent to the actuator from a
etc ) at a distance by means of the telephone with touch tone dialling
fixed-line telephone or from the (DTMF), when using telephones with
mobile phone pulse dialling (PD) or rotary dial the
The programming and the remote actuator does not work
controls are protected by a secret The telephone commands can be
code (password) consisting of 4 sent in the simplified version, with a
digits, which can be customised by small number of codes for easier use,
the user; the default code is 1234 or in the complete version according
During programming three different to a standard defined by the “Open
operating modes can be selected: Web net” protocol
Lighting
Also, the users can be activated
Can be used to activate/deactivate locally using the two pushbuttons telephone switchboard
users such as staircase light, (C1 and C2) on the front panel In this application the users can be
garden light, boilers etc Up to four actuators in parallel on controlled both from the extensions
Automatic operation
the line can be installed on the same and from an external telephone line
Can be used to operate the shutter telephone line to command more When there is a power cut (230V
(up/down) motors or other electric than two users Actuator operation a c ) the actuator keeps all the
motors is guaranteed even if there is an programming in the memory,
Temperature control
answering machine on the telephone including the status of the relays
To activate or deactivate the boiler line
in combination with BTicino timer The actuator can also be installed
thermostats as an extension on a BTicino PABX
Example: Light mode and Temperature control

remotely controls the switching On and OFF of lights and shutters
TV/SAT and the temperature control
IPTV
TV/SAT IPTV
automazione diffusione sonora Fixed-line

antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia Gardenluci tvcc Shutters
automazione
www
diffusione sonora
irrigazione
antifurto termoregolazion
telephone lighting up/down
antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo lan controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione
Telephone actuator
IPTV
Timer thermostat
Mobile phone HC/HD/HS4451
L/N/NT4451

GEnErAL FEATUrES
MY HOME WEB
MY HOME Web is a virtual platform Installer area:
Customer area:

designed by BTicino, to provide intended for the My Home solely intended for customers
innovative services to all customers installers which can register their interested in the remote management
with a MY HOME system fitted with own systems Following customer’s of their system This service, active
BTicino remote connection devices request, it is also possible to since 2003, enables remote control
The platform can be split in two main activate the remote Assistance of all the home automation functions
separate areas: service, which gives the possibility of the MY HOME system, making
of remotely monitoring the home available exclusive services that are
of the customer, and receive real only possible through the web portal
time notifications in case of faults (danger notifications, web scenarios,
etc )
MY HOME portal
CUSTOMER AREA
(Remote management)
INSTALLER AREA
(Remote assistance)
CONNECTION SAFETY AND

PROTECTION
In developing the MY HOME WEB These solutions provide high levels of:
portal, BTicino has paid special Privacy: protection of data from

attention to ensuring high levels of unauthorised access;
protection of the data transferred Integrity: safeguard of the

through the network from unwanted accuracy and completeness of the
access information;
The most stringent protection criteria Accessibility: guarantee that both

have been implemented, like: data and information will be
The use of the special https
available when required
protocol, which makes any In recognition of the high safety level
information being transferred offered by the connection with the
through the line unreadable at the MY HOME WEB portal, BTicino has
origin; obteined the ISO27001 “Information
The use of the 128 bit SSL (Secure
technology - Security management
Socket Layer) protocol, certified systems” certification
by the VeriSign Certification
Authority.

MY HOME WEB – Installer Area
Token device for the creation of the
Installers access their own dedicated Filing of any activities performed
password
area in the Installer Portal section - on the system through the web;
MY HOME section, using the Token Enabling of the system remote

and the personal access keys (login management function for the
and password) Here they will find the customer
following services: Menu management and list of

System registration;
regular maintenance activities for
Filing of the device configuration
the single system
files and documents generated by
the YouProject design software,
and by the programming software
programs
System management web page details
DOCUMENTS THAT CAN BE FILED

XML file generated by YouProject

Web configuration file

Server

Configuration files for Multimedia

Touch Screen, Touch Screen, etc
Installers that have been appointed reception of fault notifications in

ACCESS TO THE PORTAL USING
by the Customer to provide a remote case of: MOBILE DEVICES
assistance service, will be able to - Faulty or exhausted battery; In addition to using the browser,
ensure a highly professional remote - Device or zone in intrusion or the installer can also interact using
assistance service, consisting in the tampering alarm status; mobile devices (mobile phones,
following functions: - Device in panic alarm status; hand-held phones, etc ), to display
Forwarding of diagnostic
- Loss of communication between the following information:
commands to ensure correct the Burglar-alarm central unit or Customer data;

operation of certain system the Web Server, and the Portal; Customer contract and credit

devices, such as: - Temperature control system fault situation;
- Scenario central unit and actuators Events from remotely managed

of the Automation system; systems
- Burglar-alarm central unit;
- Temperature central unit;
- Web Server
Numero Verde
NOTE: For more information or to request the activation of the Installer Area contact the Call Centre, toll-free number 800.837.035
800-837035 (8.30-19.00 Monday to Friday and 8.30-12.30 Saturday)

GEnErAL FEATUrES
MY HOME WEB – Customer Area

Customers can check all the MY through the cameras of the Video water leaks, or burglary attempts
HOME comfort, safety, saving and door entry system, activate certain Depending on the control device
communication functions for their scenarios, monitor and store on file used by the Portal to interact with the
own homes the consumptions of the home and MY HOME system, it will be possible
For example, they can switch the much more to control and use the functions
heating on, check the status of the They can be informed at any time on listed in the following table:
Burglar-Alarm system, display on the status of the home, and receive
screen some areas of the home prompt notification in case of gas or
CONTROL DEVICES WEB SERVER (*) BuRGLaR-aLaRM CENTRaL uNIT
Functions
F454 *
3486 - 3485
Comfort
1
Safety
Energy Management and Load Control
Energy Management and Consumption Display
Audio Video communication
NOTE *: In order to use the MY HOME WEB service with Web Server, an ADSL modem/router must be installed in the system.
NOTE 1: The Web Server only indicates the status of the Burglar-alarm system.
EXCLUSIVE ADVANCED SERVICE COST

FUNCTIONS PERFORMED WITH With the on-line procedure
MY HOME WEB Customers purchase one BTicino
In addition to the remote control credit, of limited duration and
of the home automation functions, renewable, which they can use to
the user can also define and use a manage their system remotely, and
range of exclusive and advanced which amount varies depending on
functions that are specifically useful the applications to control
for ensuring a customised use of the
service (see following table)
FuNZIONI DESCRIPTION
WEB scenarios Irrespective of the presence of scenario management devices inside the home, it is possible to define web scenarios that can also be enabled by sending SMS messages, or based on events.
Planning Creation of action sequences that activate automatically at certain times or during certain days, and repeat following a plan.
Notifications and actions Definition of the actions performed by MY HOME WEB and of the type of notifications forwarded following a system event (SMS notifications, e-mail, etc.).
Multiple users (houses) Customisation of the portal for access to several systems (several homes)
Multiple users (users) Customisation of the procedure for accessing the portal depending on user type.
Interface customisation Creation of customised navigation menus, based on the needs of the user and the management device used (web browser, hand-held PC, etc.)
Event log Display of the list of the events occurred within the system

Page for the display of the electric consumption
Page for the display of the images recorded by

the camera
ACCESS MODE USING MOBILE

DEVICES
In addition to web access, possible enable/disable the remote
Voice access
using a PC with web browser assistance by the installer For this mode, a DTMF touch tone
connected to the internet, the The list of the functions that can keypad telephone must be used
customer can communicate with be managed can be defined by To establish voice access, the user
the Portal using other channels accessing the web portal, “Mobile must call 199 240 022 An automatic
taking advantage of mobility, such as Menu Customisation” section voice message will greet the
mobile phones and hand-held PCs Access using SMS messages customer, asking for the personal ID
The functions that can be performed By sending SMS messages it is code (telephone login followed by
with each mode of connection are possible to activate a scenario telephone password), followed by
the following: (ordered sequence of actions to be the * key
Mobile access performed inside the home) Once logged in, an automatic
Web Mobile access is possible The creation of the scenarios and the message will give the list of the menu
using the web browser (XHTML association to the SMS message is functions, and the keys to be pressed
compatible), of mobile devices such performed during the Customer Area for their selection After the function
mobile phones and hand-held PCs customisation stage has been selected, the voice will
After connecting to the www By sending SMS messages it is also explain the procedure for performing
myhome-bticino it website and possible to know the status of the the desired operations on the system
completing the authentication devices The voice access menu can be
procedure (login and password), it customised by the customer during
will be possible to: the Customer Area customisation
Manage the system functions
stage
(lights, automation, burglar-alarm,
temperature control, etc );

GEnErAL FEATUrES
System layout for the use of the MY HOME WEB services

CONTROL DEVICES WEB SERVER FOR CONNECTION ACTIVE WEB SERVER CONNECTION
In order to use the MY HOME WEB TO THE INTERNET NETWORK (WAC)
services, it will be necessary to install With the F454 Web Server it is In private networks, where the
a control device connected to the MY possible to establish real time system cannot be reached directly
HOME system communication at any time, using by the Internet (e g : Fastweb), or the
It is possible to choose between two the MY HOME system of the home router cannot be configured for using
categories of devices: A necessary condition for ensuring the My Home Web services, it will be
F454 Web Server for connection
the above is the availability of an necessary to set the WAC connection
through the internet; ADSL line with Flat 24h contract, mode (Active Connection of the Web
Telephone communicator of the
dynamic or static IP, and the use of an Server) in the configuration of the
3485 and 3486 burglar-alarm ADSL modem router, appropriately Web Server and the system on the
central unit, for connection using configured using the parameters for Portal
the PSTn telephone network connection to the LAn network and
The two devices may be used at the the Portal
same time to increase the flexibility
of the remote control of the whole
home by MY HOME WEB MY HOME portal
TV/SAT IPTV
Internet IP WAN: fixed or dynamic

(depending on the type of contract)
Web Server F454

IP: 192.168.1.35 IP_LAN: 192.168.1.1
NM: 255.255.255.0 NM: 255.255.255.0
LAN NETWORK
192.168.1.x
255.255.255.0
PC 01 PC 02 PC 03

TELEPHONE COMMUNICATOR
MY HOME portal
OF THE 3485 AND 3486 CENTRAL
UNIT FOR CONNECTION TO THE
PSTN NETWORK
Using the burglar-alarm central unit
with communicator, it is possible to
control all the MY HOME functions
with the exception of video door
entry system and video surveillance
system functions, which can only be
controlled using the F454 Web Server
Centrale antifurto 3486
Linea telefonica
TV/SAT IPTV

GEnErAL FEATUrES
MY HOME WEB – Creation and configuration

of the Customer Area
PRELIMINARY REQUIREMENTS OPERATION FLOW
A fundamental requirement for the After compiling, the Excel file can be The operations to follow for the
creation of the customer area is the imported in the YouProject program configuration and activation of the
availability of the XML configuration for the creation of the corresponding Customer area consist of two stages:
file of the system, generated by the system configuration file in XML Operations to be performed using

project and configuration program format the internet in the “Installer Area”;
YouProject For the creation of a Customer area, operation for the configuration

In case of existing systems, or systems it will be necessary for the installer of the control devices in the MY
not designed using YouProjects, it to have a personal “Installer Area” HOME system
will still be possible to obtain the XML enabled inside the MY HOME WEB
file by compiling the “electric system portal
booklet” in Excel format, available For details on the procedure
from the website www professionisti refer to the “Installer Area User
bticino it or in the CD attached to Manual” available from the www
this guide professionisti bticino it website
The procedure can also be performed
by a Technical After Sale Service
(CAT)
First level Second Installer user

menu level menu name
Sidebar
Functional
pushbuttons
Operating area

MY HOME WEB – Creation of the customer area:
operations to be performed in the Installer Area
1. System registration;
Configuration of the TCP/IP CHANNEL
2. Loading of the XML file for the
configuration of the system in the
System documents area;
3. Entering of the parameters of the
control devices (web server or burglar-
alarm central units) in the “Devices”
section, as explained below:
3.1 The use of the Web Server
shall be specified by entering the
following parameters:
OPEn password;

Type of connection: DYnAMIC IP

ADSL, STATIC IP ADSL or WAC
Configuration of the DTMF PSTN CHANNEL
(Web Server Active Connection);
“Internal IP” address associated

to the control device;
number of the port used for

sending the controls
number of the port used for

receiving
Password for camera images

3.2 The use of the burglar-alarm
central unit must be specified by
entering the telephone number
of the PSTn line or the OPEn
password
4. Saving of the page for the creation Configuration of the parameters for Energy Management devices
of the GATEWAY ID data;
5. Enabling of the rEMOTE
MAnAGEMEnT function in the
“Available functions” section
The customer will receive an e- mail
containing the necessary link for
the creation of the contract This
document must be printed, signed,
and posted to BTicino, who will then
provide the safety keys (Login and
Password) for the use of the service
6. Configuration, if required, of
the Energy Management devices
installed in the system, by entering
the corresponding parameters in the
Note: For the detailed list of the parameters to configure, refer to the documentation available from the www.
specific sections
professionisti.bticino.it website.

GEnErAL FEATUrES
MY HOME WEB – Creation of the customer area:

operations to be performed on the control devices
WEB SERVER F454
Configure the device using the Ethernet page
TIF454 program, entering the

following data:
ETHERNET PAGE
The IP Address, Subnet Mask and
router IP fields are already filled
In this page it will be necessary to
enter the router IP as primary DnS
(normally 192 168 1 1), and the
DnS supplied by the ADSL internet
provider as the secondary DnS
Also specify the type of address (fixed
or DHCP), and set the UPnP IGD
Gateway ID Connection
function MyHome portal page parameters
MY HOME PORTAL PAGE
In this page perform the following
operations:
1. Enable portal access
2. In the GATEWAY ID field enter
the GATEWAY ID code generated
automatically during the
configuration of the control device
3. Select the type of connection:
Fixed IP: In case of fixed IP ADSL

subscription (normally in case of
business customers)
Variable IP: in case of variable
Authentication page
IP ADSL subscription (the most
common one)
”Web Server Active Connection”

(W A C ): in case of private
networks, where the system
cannot be directly reached by the
Internet (e g Fastweb), or of non-
configurable router
4. Check the default connection
parameters:
MY HOME WEB address:

portal myhomeweb it
AUTHENTICATION PAGE
MHWEB email:
In this page enter the user login and Also specify the password of the
mhe pro@myhomeweb it password, and the OPEn password camera used for forwarding images
SMTP Server address:
entered in the portal when entering
smtp myhomeweb it the system details

MODEM ROUTER
In addition to the settings for the
ADSL Modem
connection to the ADSL line and the
LAn nETWOrK of the home, this
device must also be correctly natted
following the table shown on the
side
IP_WaN PORT IP LaN PORT PROTOCOL DESCRIPTION

443 443 Tcp http server (SSL)
20000 20000 Tcp Open server
Note: if the ports indicated are occupied for other network devices (hardware and software), called
functions, it will be possible to select other ones Firewalls, is not the responsibility of BTicino. In
using the configuration software of the Modem case of intervention by a BTicino engineer, good
Router. communication between the control device and
Warning: The maintenance and the configuration the portal will be certified only using the products
of the devices of the LAN network, and the included in the Catalogue.
BURGLAR-ALARM CENTRAL
UNIT 3485 OR 3486
OPEN password
In order to enable the central unit for
Burglar-alarm central unit 3485 or 3486
use as control device for the portal,
it will be necessary to enter the
following data in the “Portal Services”
menu item of the configuration
program of the central units:
Jolly number: enter the telephone

number for the connection to the
portal (800 029 498)
System ID: enter the Gateway ID

number automatically generated
by the portal during the
Code: enter the OPEn password

entered in the portal during the
ID Gateway

GEnErAL FEATUrES
Open WEB nET language and MY OPEn Community

The previous pages describe how The customisation of the
THE OPEN (OPEN PROTOCOL
the integration among the various H/HW/Ln4890/A Touch Screen FOR ELECTRICAL NETWORK)
functions of Comfort, Safety and icons for hotel applications, or for WEB NET LANGUAGE
Savings offered by MY HOME enables use in public establishments and For some years BTicino has decided
the user to take advantage of the showrooms; to make the Open Web net language
actual home automation benefits The creation of interfaces for
available This is a high level protocol
In this context, more and more the control of the light flow and that can be used to control the
sought after are becoming the the colour tone of rGB LED low devices and exploit their potential
tools for ensuring “communication” consumption lamps based on the requirements of the
between the MY HOME system and The above is only a part of the many customers
other systems using modes other possibilities of customising MY The protocol has been designed
than the ones discussed until now in HOME, and of integrating it with to be independent from the
this guide other systems and applications communication support: it is
Some examples: In order to enable field operators to possible to control and monitor
The use of third party software
develop further solutions meeting the MY HOME system through the
for the control of the MY HOME more and more the needs of the Ethernet network, through an rS232
functions using devices such as customer, BTicino has decided to serial connection, through a USB
I-PHOnE, I-PAD and Smartphone; make the Open Web net language connection, or through a Gateway
The integration with MY HOME of
available through the My Open directly connected to the system
devices appropriately configured Community
for the management of lights and
shutters by disabled people;
Web Server
Burglar-alarm central unit
MY HOME
system
Interface
devices with MY
HOME

MY OPEN COMMUNITY: TOOLS AND DEVELOPMENT
Created in 2006 by BTicino, it’s a TOOLS FOR OPEN WEB NET
virtual community that through the APPLICATIONS
http://www myopenlegrandgroup For the development of the L4684SDK touch Screen:

com website offers installers, software applications using the Open Web net By connecting this device with
developers, and system integrators language, BTicino has created two IP port and slave USB to a PC for
several services: upload and download dedicated tools: programming purposes, it will be
spaces, development and actual 3504SDK Startkit:
possible to create configuration
application tools, newsletters and Product designed for system files with customised icons, to be
information on events integrators and developers used with touch screens Thanks
who want to get closer to MY to the versatility of the Open
It is also a platform capable of HOME, Starkit is a functioning language, it will therefore be
providing information on the MY miniaturised MY HOME system, possible to manage, in addition
HOME system and the development which includes 4 light points, 2 to MY HOME devices, also devices
products available, including any shutters and 1 camera from other brands performing
relevant support documentation, as different functions
well as managing a forum, always
active and lively, that provides
continuous exchange of knowledge
and experiences in the Open Web
net language field
For more information visit

http://www.myopen-legrandgroup.com

Wiring diagrams
Integration of the Automation system

with the Temperature Control system
The system includes a Local Display The Touch Screen is configured

and a Touch Screen. using the software and is capable
The Local Display is configured for
of managing all the functions
the management of the temperature present, and the scenarios saved in
control and is associated to the the scenario module.
sensor (ZA = 0, ZB = 1)
ZA = -
ZA = - ZB = 1
ZB = 2 A =1 N1 = 1
A =1 MOD = SLA PL1 = 2 ZB2 = OFF A =-
PL = 1 SLA = 1 PL2 = 2 N2 = - PL = 1
F411/N 4695 F411/2 F430/2 F420

E46ADCN 18.0°C
23.7°C
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
F411/1N F411/2 F430/2 F420
C OK
C1 C1 C2 C1 C2 DEL
230 Vac
BUS SCS
H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 HS4693 HS4891 H4890

ON
GEN
OFF
A1 = GEN A1 = 1 A1 = 1 ZA = - ZA = -
PL1 = - PL1 = 2 PL1 = 1 ZB = 1 ZB = 1
M1 = O/I M1 = M1 = - MOD = SLA MOD = 1
A2 = - A2 = - A2 = 2 SLA = 1 FUN = 4
PL2 = - PL2 = - PL2 = 1
M2 = - M2 = - M2 = O/I
ITEM DESCRIPTION Quantity

E46ADCN Power supply 1
F430/2 DIN actuator 1
F415 Dimmer 1
F411/1N 1 relay DIN actuator 1
F411/2 2 relays DIN actuator 1
H4652/2 Control 3
HS4891 Local Display 1
H4890 Touch Screen 1
H4693 Temperature control probe 1
H4695 Temperature central unit 1

Integration of the Video door entry system
with the Sound system
The integrated system includes: An H4651M2 special control

Two Video Displays for the
configured for controlling the
reception of entrance panel calls, amplifier with address A = 2 PF =1.
and for the management of the
Sound system functions.
L4569 L4569
230 Vac 230 Vac
346020 346020
346020 346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~ PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA 175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz 47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
230 Vac
HS4565 HS4565 F502
N =1 N =2
P =- P =-
POWER
POWER: 100-240V
110-55mA
+
SELV
+ 230 Vac
344163
50-60Hz
344163
LEFT RIGHT
1Wrms 1Wrms
8 8
ON OFF
ON/OFF POWER
A =2
H4562 PF = 1
H4651M2
A =1 ON
1-2 1-2
ON
3499
PF = 1
BUS BUS
OFF OFF
3499
A =2
PF = 1
SPE = 8
F441M 346000
230 Vac
391662
P =- S =1
S =9 S =2
P =1
HS4560
F500N MP3 reader
345140
ITEM DESCRIPTION Quantity ITEM DESCRIPTION Quantity

F441M Multichannel matrix 1 346020 Power supply 2
F502 DIN amplifier 1 H4651M2 Control 1
3499 Line termination 2 HS4560 RCA input 1
L4569 Loudspeaker 3 H4562 Flush mounted amplifier 1
345140 Axolute entrance panel 1 HS4565 Flush mounted loudspeaker 2
F500N DIN radio 1 344163 Video Display 2
346000 Power supply 1 391662 Flush mounted camera 1

Wiring diagrams
Integration of the Burglar-alarm system

with the Automation and Temperature Control systems
The integrated system includes the A Touch Screen configured for the
A Burglar-alarm central unit

following control and management management of all the functions configured for activating
devices: present and the scenarios; it can automations (switching on of
A Local Display, configured for the
also be used for enabling/disabling lights) in case of an alarm event
management of the temperature the Burglar-alarm system and
control, and associated to the separate the protected zones.
sensor (ZA = 0, ZB = 1)
4072L
3485
E46ADCN
HS4607 HS4611
Z =1
Z =0 N =1
N =1 MOD = –
230 Vac
F411/1N
E46ADCN F411/2 F430/2 F420
18.0°C F422
1 2 3 23.7°C 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3
ZA = 0
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
F411/1N
OUT
I1 = –
F411/2 F430/2 F420
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
ZB = 1
F422
I2 = –
C1 C1 C2 C1 C2 DEL
C OK
N1 = 1
C
A =1 I3 = –
ZA = 0 PL1 = 2 ZB2 = OFF A =0 IN
I4 = 1
ZB = 1 PL2 = 2 N2 = - PL = 1
MOD = 4
A =1
230 Vac PL = 1
H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 HS4693 HS4891 H4890

ON
GEN
OFF
A1 = GEN A1 = 1 A1 = 1 ZA = 0 ZA = -
PL1 = - PL1 = 2 PL1 = 1 ZB = 1 ZB = 1
M1 = O/I M1 = M1 = - MOD = SLA MOD = 1
A2 = - A2 = - A2 = - SLA = 1 FUN = 4
PL2 = - PL2 = - PL2 = -
M2 = - M2 = - M2 = -

E46ADCN Power supply 1 HS4891 Local display 1
E47ADCN Power supply 1 H4890 Touch screen 1
F422 SCS/SCS interface 1 HS4693 Temperature control probe 1
F430/2 DIN actuator 1 HS4611 Double-technology IR sensor 1
F411/1N 1 relay DIN actuator 1 HS4607 Transponder reader 1
F411/2 2 relays DIN actuator 1 4072L Outdoor siren 1
H4652/2 Control 3 3485 Central unit 1

Integration of the Burglar-alarm system with
the Video door entry system and the Sound system
The integrated system includes the A camera configured for use with

following control and management the Burglar-alarm IR sensor of zone
devices: 1 (Z = 1).
A Video Display for monitoring and
When an alarm condition occurs
controlling the home entrance and within the zone, the camera
manage the Sound system; it can activates and sends the images to
also be used to check the status the Video display (N = 1), on which
of the Burglar-alarm system and they can be displayed.
notify alarm events.
4072L
3485
E46ADCN
HS4607 HS4611
Z =1
Z =0 N =1
N =1 MOD = –
230 Vac BUS/SCS

346020 344163 HS4565 HS4565
N =1
P =0
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
P =0
47/63 Hz
H4562
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
S =9
ON A =1
PF = 1
F422
OFF
1-2 BUS OUT
I1 = –
3499 035 62
I2 = – C
N646
F441 346000 I3 = –
IN
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 I4 = 1
MOD = 4
OUT
IN
349140
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SCS
230 Vac
P =1
Z =1
N =1
F500N
391662

F422 SCS/SCS interface 1 HS4565 Flush mounted loudspeaker 2
S =1 F500N DIN radio 1 HS4611 Double-technology IR sensor 1
F441 Audio/Video node 1 HS4607 Transponder reader 1
E46ADCN Power supply 1 4072L Outdoor siren 1
346000 Power supply 1 3485 Central unit 1
346020 Power supply 1 344163 Video Display 1
H4562 Flush mounted amplifier 1 391662 Flush mounted camera 1

Wiring diagrams
Integration of the Automation system with the Video door

entry system (with Web server for remote control)
For the control and management of A Video Display with icon menu.
A Local Display configured for the

the functions, the following modes The Multimedia Touch Screen
management of the Sound system
and devices are used: device, which operates as a video amplifier with address A=1 PF=1.
A Personal Computer with
door entry system handset and a
MHVISUAL software for the full device for the control of the whole
control of all the home functions. system using the icon menu.
230 Vac
344163 HS4565 HS4565
N =1
346020 P =0
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
H4562
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
ON
A =1
OFF
PF = 1
F422
F441 346000
OUT
I1 = –
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
F422
C
I2 = –
I3 = –
OUT IN
I4 = 1
IN
MOD = –
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SCS
230 Vac
P =0
S =9
F500N P =1
S =1 Z =1
N =1
391662
349140

F420 Scenario module 1 346000 Power supply 1
E46ADCN Power supply 1 346020 Power supply 2
F422 SCS/SCS interface 1 H4652/2 Control 3
F430/2 DIN actuator 1 HS4891 Local display 1
F414 DIN dimmer 1 HS4690 Multimedia Touch Screen 1
F411/1N 1 relay DIN actuator 1 H4562 Flush mounted amplifier 1
F411/2 2 relays DIN actuator 1 HS4565 Flush mounted loudspeaker 2
F500N DIN radio 1 HS4692 Temperature probe 1
F454 Web Server 1 344163 Video Display 1
F441 Audio/Video node 1 391662 Flush mounted camera 1
349140 Axolute entrance panel 1

PC with MHVISUAL software
Crossover Ethernet cable
N =2 F454
ETHERNET
SCS AI SCS AV
F411/1N F411/2 F430/2 F420

E46ADCN
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
F411/1N 18.0°C F411/2 F430/2

ZA = 0 F420
C1
23.7°C C1 C2 C1 C2 ZB = 2 DEL
13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen A =1 N1 = 1
C OK
PL1 = 2 ZB2 = OFF A =0
PL2 = 2 N2 = - PL = 1
A =1 ZA = 0
PL = 1 ZB = 1
MOD = 0 230 Vac
H4652/2 H4652/2 H4652/2 HS4692 HS4891

ON A =1
PF = 1
+2
+3
+1
GEN OFF
-1 MOD = –
-2
-3
OFF FUN = 8
A1 = GEN A1 = 1 A1 = 1 ZA = 0
PL1 = - PL1 = 2 PL1 = 1 ZB = 2
M1 = O/I M1 = M1 = - MOD = 0
A2 = - A2 = - A2 = -
PL2 = -
230 Vac
PL2 = - PL2 = -
M2 = - M2 = - M2 = -
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~

175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
1-2
S =1 HS4690

WIrInG DIAGrAMS
Total integration of the MY HOME systems

with remote function control
The control of the MY HOME If the system includes a modem
functions is performed with the router, the program may also
following devices: be used to manage the remote
A Web Server for the local control
control through the internet
of the system, using a Personal A Local Display to recall all

Computer with MHVISUAL scenarios saved in the F420
software scenario module
L4569 L4569
HS4565 HS4565
230 Vac
H4562 ON
230 Vac 230 Vac A =2

A =1 PF = 1 POWER SELV
344163 344163
POWER: 100-240V + +
110-55mA
PF = 1 OFF 50-60Hz LEFT RIGHT

1Wrms 1Wrms
A =2
8 8
ON OFF
PF = 1 ON/OFF POWER
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
SPE = 8
175 – 165 mA 175 – 165 mA
H4651M2
47/63 Hz 47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA 600 mA
ON
346020
OFF
N =1 N =2
P =0 P =0
349140 A to HS4690
F441M 346000
P =0
S =9
230 Vac
B from HS4690
F500N MP3
391662 HS4560
391670
P =1 S =2
Z =1
N =1 S =1
P =2
Z =1
N =2

PC with MHVISUAL
software
Modem Router/Switch
ADSL line with fixed IP
Direct Ethernet cable
F454
ETHERNET
SCS AI SCS AV
N =4
F422 F411/1N F411/2 F430/2 F420

E46ADCN
OUT 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
I1 = – 18.0
ZA = 0
F422 F411/1N °C F430/2 F420
F411/2
C
I2 = – C1 23.7°C C1 C2 C1 C2
ZB = 1 DEL
IN
I3 = – 13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen A =1 N1 = 1
I4 = 1 C OK PL1 = 2 ZB2 = OFF
MOD = – PL2 = 2 N2 = -
A =1 ZA = 0
ZB = 2 A =0
PL = 1 PL = 1 230 Vac
MOD = 0
D
H4652 H4652 H4652 HS4692 HS4891
ON
ZA = –
next >>
+2
+3
ZB = 1
+1
GEN OFF
-1
MOD = 1
-2
-3
OFF
FUN = 1
A1 = GEN A1 = 1 A1 = 1 ZA = 0
PL1 = - PL1 = 2 PL1 = 1 ZB = 1
M1 = O/I M1 = M1 = - MOD = 0
A2 = GEN A2 = - A2 = 2
PL2 = - PL2 = - PL2 = 1
M2 = - M2 = - M2 = O/I
ITEM DESCRIPTION QuaNTITy ITEM DESCRIPTION QuaNTITy

F420 Scenario module 1 346000 Power supply 1
E46ADCN Power supply 1 346020 Power supply 1
F422 SCS/SCS interface 1 H4652/2 Control 3
F430/2 DIN actuator 1 H4651M2 Special control 1
F441M Multichannel matrix 1 HS4891 Local display 1
F502 DIN amplifier 1 HS4650 RCA input 1
3499 Line terminator 2 H4562 Flush mounted amplifier 1
F414 DIN dimmer 1 L4569 Loudspeaker 2
F411/1N 1 relay DIN actuator 1 HS4692 Temperature control probe 1
F411/2 2 relays DIN actuator 1 344163 Video Display 2
HS4565 Loudspeaker 2 391662 Flush mounted camera 1
F500 DIN radio 1 391670 Outdoor camera 1
F454 Web Server 1

WIrInG DIAGrAMS
Total integration of the MY HOME systems

with remote function control
230 Vac HS4690

N =3
346020
A
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
from F441M (BUS)
to F441M (SCS Audio OUT) B
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
4072A
3485
C
E47ADCN HS4070
N = 0
MOD = 1
OUT
F422
F422
I1 = –
OUT
F422
IN I2 = – HS4607 HS4611 3480
C
I3 = –
I4 = 1
IN
MOD = 4
Z =0 Z =1
N =1 N =1
MOD = – Z =2
N =1
MOD = –
D
ITEM DESCRIPTION QuaNTITy

F422 SCS/SCS interface 1
E47ADCN Power supply 1
HS4690 Multimedia Touch Screen 1
HS4611 Double-technology IR sensor 1
HS4607 Transponder reader 1
3480 Contact interface 1
HS4070 Indoor siren 1
3485 Central unit 1
4072A Outdoor siren 1

CONTENTS
MY HOME – Software and services
Software and services MY HOME 519

General features
YouProject preparing estimates and designing MY HOME

home automation systems
YouProject includes all MY HOME home automation applications (light and automatic movement),
temperature control, energy management, burglar-alarm, technical alarms, sound system, video
door entry system, lighting management, hotel management and local & remote control, which may
be selected by the customer and integrated at their discretion.
It represents a valid tool that can help  Physical/logic extension system  Automatic creation of a full dynamic
the installer or the designer to design management; set of documentation for the type of
the system correctly The software  “Drag & Drop” inclusion of standard system designed
automatically performs all the functions home automated rooms or creation/  The documentation includes:
(layout of devices, size and electric modification of customised rooms;  General description and advantages
calculation, allocation of addresses,  Inclusion/creation/change of of the MY HOME system;
composition of tables) that are specific cabinets/distribution boards/flush  Detailed description of the
to the home automation system The mounted boxes and junction boxes, individual functions of the actual
user can also change or customise the device packets for traditional or design;
design of the system during all stages home automation systems, loads and  Bill of quantities items;
of the project advanced devices;  System configuration and
By using the “standard rooms”, which  Automatic calculation of the home absorption levels check;
include many different types, fitted automation implementation  Wired connection (between actuator
with all home automation devices, devices, with analysis of the space and load);
irrespective of their actual sizes, and requirements for DIN devices and  Configuration references (e g
always customisable, it is therefore of the thermal dissipation inside connection between control and
possible to quickly produce a system enclosures; load);
cost analysis, which will include all the  Automatic calculation of the  Detailed list of the materials
documentation needed for providing configuration; needed for the installation and
the necessary indications for preparing  Check of absorption levels for all corresponding costs;
estimates and compete in tenders devices connected to the bus they
The same basis for preparing the belong to;
estimates used for creating the project Example of a project of a burglar-alarm system
becomes the starting point for the
optimisation of the job, to customise
and complete it, and to create a
standard design on which to work on
The main functions are:

 Creation of a system for stand-alone
or integrated management of all the
MY HOME applications;
 Creation and check of the system
levels, according to CEI 64-8
standard;
520 MY HOME Software and services

 Estimate of the working hours By simply dragging the objects (boxes, obtain one single list of materials to
required for the configuration, light points, etc ) of the project on the be purchased It is also possible to
programming and putting into plan, it is possible to create an executive generate an XML configuration file,
service of the designed system; project of the system, including home which can then be used to define the
 PDF or RTF (Word) printing of the automation symbols, configuration pages for the control of the system
documentation created; legends, box identification details with using the MY HOME WEB portal,
 Export in Excel format of: bill of corresponding installation heights, one- the MHVisual software, the Touch
quantities, list of materials, labels, wire diagram and all that is necessary for Screen control devices and for the
and project tree view an immediate and clear reading of the configuration of the devices using the
YouProject can be opened directly project “Virtual Configuration” software
in AutoCAD® (FULL version) or using The file created with YouProject
the SPAC® software distributed by ( mhp) does NOT need exporting
SDProject in SDF format, and can be directly
opened using the TiPre software, to
Example of documentation
obtained using YouProject
To obtain the software go to the area Servizio Tecnico—Software e Schemari (Technical Service – Software and Diagrams) of the
www.professionisti.bticino.com website.

GENERAL FEATURES
Virtual Configurator
Software for the configuration of the Automation and Temperature Control systems using a PC
To simplify the configuration The configuration is then transferred In alternative to the configuration kit,
of the AUTOMATION and to the relevant device using a one of the following Gateway devices
TEMPERATURE CONTROL systems, wireless Wi-Fi connection or can also be used:
BTicino recommends the use of through an Ethernet connection,  MH200N
the “virtual configuration” mode between the PC and an appropriate  F454
The configuration parameters 3503 configuration kit, connected
are no longer manually set using to the bus of the Automation or
configurators, but using a special Temperature Control system
program called Virtual Configurator,
Example of screen for the definition of the
installed on a PC Automation system devices
PC with VIRTUAL
CONFIGURATOR program
Ethernet cable
Kit 3503
BUS
connector
TV/SAT TV/SAT
IPTV IPTV Power supply
BUS connector
ne diffusione sonora
Shutters
automazione
antifurto Temperature
diffusione control
sonora
lan controllo
energia controlloluci
carichi energia
tvcc luci
www

YouDiagram
Design and configuration of digital 2 wire and 8 wire Door entry- Video door entry-Telephone
systems, Sound system, and CCTV systems
You Diagram is the BTicino software In just a few minutes, it will be It is also possible to manage:
for the design of one-family and possible to create door entry,  Sound systems;
multifamily door entry-video door video door entry, and integrated  Single channel sound systems
entry-telephone systems created communication systems using the integrated with video door entry
using the entire digital 2 wire / 8 wire product solution that is most suited systems;
and CCTV catalogue range It enables to your needs  Multi channel sound systems
to produce the system diagram, integrated with video door entry
the selection / dressing of entrance systems;
panels, handsets and cameras, the  CCTV
configuration of the devices, and the
check of the absorption levels for
each system BUS
Example of a video door entry system design

GENERAL FEATURES
BTicino responds
BTicino is always attentive to customers’ needs and offers a range of services to facilitate and simplify
all the installation stages.
Design support
Do you need catalogues, guides, and Do you need an estimate and

commercial information? technical information?
Call this toll free number: Call this toll free number:
Numero Verde Numero Verde
800-837035 800-293000
* *
The service is only intended for

professional
* All numbers are active from 8 30 a m to 18 30 p m Monday to Friday, and 8 30 a m to 12 30 p m on Saturday

System start up support
Technical After Sale Service (CAT): Or visit the “TECHNICAL SERVICE”

BTicino offers a system technical after (SERVIZIO TECNICO) area of the
sales service through authorised CAT. www professionisti bticino it website
For more information on this service
both during and after the warranty
period, the costs (for services not
covered by warranty), and the details
of the closest CAT, call this tool free
number:
Numero Verde
800-837035
*
* All numbers are active from 8 30 a m to 18 30 p m Monday to Friday, and 8 30 a m to 12 30 p m on Saturday

526 MY HOME Catalogue
CONTENTS
Radio system catalogue
Catalogue MY HOME 527

RADIO SYSTEM CATALOGUE
MY HOME - RADIO ZigBee®

AXOLUTE - Automation and technical alarms
HB4596 HA4599 H4586 HC4578
Item RADIO CONTROL FOR LIGHT AUTOMATION Item GATEWAY SCS / ZIGBEE
HA4596 control to be completed with one 1 module key cover HD4578 SCS/Zigbee gateway for integration with the radio
HB4596 (item HC/HD/HS4915BA) for the ON/OFF control of 1 HC4578 system of MY HOME control devices and/or system
group of actuators - powered by 3 V CR2032 battery, HS4578 actuators, BUS Automation - 27 Vdc power supply from
supplied. the BUS - 2 flush mounted modules.
HA4597 control to be completed with two 1 module key covers
HB4597 (item HC/HD/HS4915BA) for the ON/OFF control of 2
groups of actuators - powered by 3 V CR2032 battery, Item ON/OFF RADIO ACTUATORS FOR LIGHT AUTOMATION AND
supplied. GENERIC LOADS
HA4598 control to be completed with two 1 module key covers actuator to be completed with 1 module key cover
H4590
HB4598 (item HC/HD/HS4915BA + HC/HD/HS4911AD) for the (item HC/HD/HS4915BA) for the control of lamps and
control of 1 group of DIMMER actuators - powered by generic loads with 300 W max. power
3 V CR2032 battery, supplied - power supply 100-240 Vac
- connection to the load without neutral conductor
- status indication LED - 2 flush mounted modules
SHUTTER CONTROL RF actuator to be completed with 1 module key cover
H4591
HA4599 control to be completed with two 1 module key covers (item HC/HD/HS4915BA) for the control of lamps and
HB4599 (item HC/HD/HS4911AH + HC/HD/HS4915) for the generic loads with 2500 W max. power
control of 1 group of actuators for the management - power supply 100 -240 Vac - status indication LED
of motorised rolling shutters - powered by 3 V CR2032 - 2 flush mounted modules
battery, supplied. actuator to be completed with 2 1 module key covers
H4592
(item HC/HD/HS4915BA) for the control of 2 groups of
lamps and generic loads with 1000 W max. power
4 SCENES CONTROL RF - power supply 100-240 Vac - status indication LED
HA4589 control to be completed with two 1 module key covers - 2 flush mounted modules
HB4589 (item HC/HD/HS4911) for the management of 4
scenarios- powered by 3 V CR2032 battery, supplied
Item DIMMER RADIO ACTUATORS FOR LIGHT AUTOMATION
H4593 actuator to be completed with 2 1 module key covers
DEVICES FOR TECHNICAL ALARMS (item L/N/NT4915AN + L/N/NT4911ADN ) for the
H4586 technical alarm transmitter. It can be used to control of lamps and generic loads with 400 Wmax.
transmit to the radio automation system a danger power - power supply 100-240 Vac - connection to the
signal generated by a gas, smoke, or water detector load without neutral conductor - status indication LED
connected to its terminals. 12 Vac/dc power supply - 2 flush mounted modules.
using transformer item HC/HD/HS4541 - H4594 actuator for 0-10 V Ballast with 1000 W max.
2 flush mounted modules powerto be completed with 2 1 module key covers
H4587 device to be used in conjunction with the radio (item L/N/NT4915AN + L/N/NT4911ADN) - power
transmitter item H4586 for the control of solenoid supply 100-240 Vac - status indication LED - 2 flush
valves and danger optical/light signalling devices (gas, mounted modules.
water, smoke leaks). To be completed with 2 key covers
item HC/HD/HS4911. 100 to 240 Vac power supply
– 2 flush mounted modules SHUTTER SWITCH RF WITH PRESET FUNCTION
H4595 actuator to be completed with 2 1 module key covers
ADAPTER FOR BACK BOXES (item HC/HD/HS4911AD + HC/HD/HS4915BA) for the
H4588 adapter for flush mounted boxes. It gives the possibility control of rolling shutters - possibility of storing the
of installing surface mounted radio controls inside flush position of the rolling shutters - power supply 100-240 Vac
mounted boxes - 2 flush mounted modules
KEY COVER SELECTION SUMMARY TABLE KEY COVER SELECTION SUMMARY TABLE
Mechanism code Key cover code Mechanism code Key cover code
H4590 HC/HD/HS4915BA H4595 HC/HD/HS4911AH + HC/HD/HS4915
H4591 HC/HD/HS4915BA HA4589, HB4589 2 x HC/HD/HS4911
H4592 2 x HC/HD/HS4915BA HA4596, HB4596 HC/HD/HS4915BA
H4593 HC/HD/HS4915BA + HC/HD/HS4911AD HA4597, HB4597 2 x HC/HD/HS4915BA
H4594 HC/HD/HS4915BA + HC/HD/HS4911AD HA4598, HB4598 HC/HD/HS4915BA + HC/HD/HS4911AD
HA4599, HB4599 HC/HD/HS4911AH + HC/HD/HS4915
528 MY HOME Catalogue NOTE: White colour device Tech colour device Anthracite colour device Neutral item
LIVINGLIGHT - Automation and technical alarms
L4596N LN4586 NT4578N

N4599N
Item RADIO CONTROL FOR LIGHT AUTOMATION Item GATEWAY SCS / ZIGBEE
N4596N control to be completed with one 1 module key cover N4578N SCS/Zigbee gateway for integration with the radio system
L4596N (item L/N/NT4915AN) for the ON/OFF control of 1 group NT4578N of MY HOME control devices and/or system actuators, BUS
of actuators - powered by 3 V CR2032 battery, supplied. L4578N Automation - 27 Vdc power supply from the BUS - flush
mounted modules - 2 flush mounted modules
N4597N control to be completed with two 1 module key covers
L4597N (item L/N/NT4915AN) for the ON/OFF control of 2
groups of actuators - powered by 3 V CR2032 battery, ON/OFF RADIO ACTUATORS FOR LIGHT AUTOMATION AND
supplied Item GENERIC LOADS
N4598N control to be completed with two 1 module key covers LN4590 actuator to be completed with 1 module key cover
L4598N (item L/N/NT4915AN + L/N/NT4911ADN) for the control (item L/N/NT4915AN) for the control of lamps and
of 1 group of DIMMER actuators - powered by 3 V generic loads with 300 W max. power
CR2032 battery, supplied. -power supply 100-240 Vac - connection to the load
without neutral conductor - status indication LED
- 2 flush mounted modules
SHUTTER CONTROL RF actuator to be completed with 1 module key cover
LN4591
N4599N control to be completed with two 1 module key covers (item L/N/NT4915AN) for the control of lamps and
L4599N (item L/N/NT4911AHN + L/NT4915AN or N4915LN) generic loads with 2500 W max. power
for the control of 1 group of actuators for the - power supply 100 -240 Vac - status indication LED
managementof motorised rolling shutters - powered by - 2 flush mounted modules
3 V CR2032 battery, supplied actuator to be completed with 2 1 module key covers
LN4592
(item L/N/NT4915AN) for the control of 2 groups of
lamps and generic loads with 1000 W max. power
4 SCENES CONTROL RF - power supply 100-240 Vac - status indication LED
N4589N control to be completed with two 1 module key covers - 2 flush mounted modules
L4589N (item L/N/NT4911N) for the management of 4 scenarios
- powered by 3 V CR2032 battery, supplied
Item DIMMER RADIO ACTUATORS FOR LIGHT AUTOMATION
LN4593 actuator to be completed with 2 1 module key covers
DEVICES FOR TECHNICAL ALARMS (item L/N/NT4915AN + L/N/NT4911ADN )for the control
LN4586 technical alarm transmitter. It can be used to of lamps and generic loads with 400 W max. power
transmit to the radio automation system a danger - power supply 100-240 Vac - connection to the load
signal generated by a gas, smoke, or water detector without neutral conductor - status indication LED
connected to its terminals. 12 Vac/dc power supply - 2 flush mounted modules
using transformer item L/N/N/T4541 - supplied key LN4594 actuator for 0-10 V Ballast with 1000 W max. power to
covers - 2 flush mounted modules be completed with 2 1 module key covers
LN4587 device to be used in conjunction with the radio (item L/N/NT4915AN + L/N/NT4911ADN)
transmitter item LN4586, for the control of solenoid - power supply 100-240 Vac - status indication LED
valves and danger optical/light signalling devices - 2 flush mounted modules
(gas, water, smoke leaks).
To be completed with 2 L/N/NT4911N keycovers.
100 to 240 Vac power supply - 2 flush mounted modules
SHUTTER SWITCH RF WITH PRESET FUNCTION
LN4595 actuator to be completed with 2 1 module key covers
ADAPTER FOR BACK BOXES (item L/N/NT4911AHN + L/NT4915AN or N4915LN)
LN4588 adapter for flush mounted boxes. It gives the possibility for the control of motorised rolling shutters - possibility
of installing surface mounted radio controls inside flush of storing the position of the rolling shutters - power
mounted boxes. supply 100-240 Vac - 2 flush mounted modules
KEY COVER SELECTION SUMMARY TABLE KEY COVER SELECTION SUMMARY TABLE
Mechanism code Key cover code Mechanism code Key cover code
LN4590 L/N/NT4915AN LN4595 L/N/NT4911AHN+ L/NT4915N o
N4915LN
LN4591 L/N/NT4915AN
N4589N, L4589N L/N/NT4911N+L/N/NT4911N
LN4592 L/N/NT4915AN+L/N/NT4915AN
N4596N, L4596N L/N/NT4915AN
LN4593 L/N/NT4915AN+ L/N/NT4911ADN
N4597N, L4597N L/N/NT4915AN+L/N/NT4915AN
LN4594 L/N/NT4915AN+ L/N/NT4911ADN
N4598N, L4598N L/N/NT4915AN+ L/N/NT4911ADN
N4599N, L4599N L/N/NT4911AHN+ L/N/NT4915N o
N4915LN
Items with code L.. require round cover plates, those with code N.. required square cover plates.
NOTE: White colour device Tech colour device Anthracite colour device Neutral item Catalogue MY HOME 529
RADIO SYSTEM CATALOGUE
MY HOME - RADIO ZigBee®

Devices suitable for both the AXOLUTE and the LIVINGLIGHT series
3571
3579 3527N
3575 3576
WIRELESS MOVEMENT DETECTOR RF ZIGBEE SURFACE MOUNTING Item ON/OFF RADIO ACTUATORS FOR LIGHT AUTOMATION AND
3579 control fitted with infrared movement sensor that GENERIC LOADS
enables creating scenarios (enabling of several 3571 false ceiling mounted actuator for the control of
actuators) for when a people move inside the area lamps and generic loads with 2500 W max. power
covered by an IR sensor. Sensor coverage 11 m, - power supply 100-240 Vac
3-60 min. adjustable time delay - wall mounted
installation- powered by two 1.5 V AA batteries 3575 mobile socket with German standard plug and socket
for the control of lamps and generic loads with 10 A
max. absorption - power supply 100-240 Vac
RADIO REMOTE CONTROLS
3527N radio remote control with 5 pushbuttons for the
control of scenarios - powered by two 1.5 V LR03
batteries, supplied Item DIMMER RADIO ACTUATORS FOR LIGHT AUTOMATION AND
GENERIC LOADS
3528N remote control as above - with 4 pushbuttons 3572 false ceiling mounted actuator for the control of
- powered by 3 V CR2032 battery, supplied lamps and generic loads with 600 W max. power
- power supply 100-240 Vac
3573 false ceiling mounted actuator for 0-10 V Ballast

control with 1000 W max. power - power supply
Item OPEN WEB NET / ZIGBEE GATEWAY 100-240 Vac
3577 control interface with 2 independent contacts for
the control of 2 light actuator groups, or one group 3574 mobile socket with German standard plug and socket
of rolling shutter actuators. The device also gives for the control of lamps and generic loads max. 500 W
thepossibility of creating a scenario generated by - power supply 100-240 Vac
devices such as, for example, twilight switches or
humidity detectors, connected to the corresponding
contacts. Basic modularity for flush mounted box
installation Item INDIVIDUAL ROLLER BLIND CONTROLLER RF ZIGBEE FOR
3578 Open/ZigBee gateway for central control of the MOUNTING IN TECHNICAL COMPARTMENT
functions using Open Web Net communication 3576 500 VA rolling shutter actuator for
protocol devices installation inside the rolling shutter box
- power supply 100 - 240 Vac
Item WIRELESS TEMPERATURE SENSOR RF ZIGBEE SURFACE

MOUNTING
3581 radio temperature probe for indoor use with measurement range
between (-10) - (+ 40) °C. The device provides activation of 2 separate
scenarios that initiate when the room temperature falls below
(scenario 1) or exceeds (scenario 2) the 2 temperature thresholds set
in the device itself

CONTENTS
AXOLUTE catalogue

AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Integration and control
HD4690 H4890 F422 F429 HD4891
Item LOCAL DISPLAY Item MULTIMEDIA TOUCH SCREEN

HD4891 1.2” OLED Touch Screen for the simultaneous HD4690 multimedia Touch Screen with 10” 16/9 LCD screen for:
HC4891 management of max. 4 functions: Sound System, HC4690 - MY HOME system control
HS4891 Temperature Control, Consumption Display, Load HS4690 - video door entry system functions and video
management, Scenarios - 2 modules - monitoring systems
it replaces item HC/HS/HD4685 - management of multimedia contents on external
sources (USB and SDCard), on the LAN network or IP
TOUCH SCREEN (IP radio, RCS, Webcam)
Wall mounted installation. Presetting with cable
H4890 3.5” colour Touch Screen for the management of the collection 506E flush mounted box. To be complete
following functions: Automation, Lighting, Burglar with the appropriate surround plate
22°C Alarm, Temperature Control, Sound System, Scenarios,
Load Management and Consumption Display.
USB front connector for configuration.
Device preset for programming with Open Web Net SURROUND PLATE FOR MULTIMEDIA TOUCH SCREEN
protocol language- it replaces item H4684 HA4690XC surround plate - finished aluminium
HW4890 Touch Screen as above - AXOLUTE ETÈRIS series
monobloc - can be installed only in boxes 528W (wall)
22°C and PB528W (false ceiling). It replaces item HW4684 surround plate - white
HA4690VBB
HA4690LTK surround plate - teak wood

TOUCH SCREEN IP ADAPTER
3496 accessory to be used with TOUCH SCREEN - it can be
used for playing audio tracks stored on the PC, on the
server, as well as any IP radio content (e.g. radio), HA4690VNB surround plate - Nighter
through the loudspeakers of the Sound system - to be
installed on the back of TOUCH SCREEN units
HA4690VSW surround plate - Whice
VIDEO TOUCH SCREEN
H4687 flush mounted panel PC with 15” Touch Screen display
for the control of the MY HOME system using the
MHVisual software
SCS-SCS INTERFACE
MHVISUAL SOFTWARE F422 interface between SCS BUS based systems, dedicated
to different functions - 2 lowered DIN modules
MHVISUAL control and management software of the lighting
functions, Automation, Burglar alarm, Temperature
control, Sound system, Scenarios, Energy management
and Video surveillance system
INTERFACE FOR DIFFERENT SYSTEMS
F426 SCS/EIB interface - for the control of EIB systems in
MY HOME applications - 2 DIN modules
SCS/DALI INTERFACE
F429 DALI dimmer, 8 independent outputs with 230 Vac
16 ballasts maximum load, direct load control device,
6 DIN modules
The MY HOME system can also be controlled by

iPad devices thanks to BTicino MY HOME, the official
BTicino application which can be downloaded from
iTunes, in the “Free” version as well.
: devices with Open Web Net communication protocol for the development of integration applications.
MY HOME - BUS SCS
MH200N 3486 F461/2 C9451 F454
Item SCENARIO MODULE Item PSTN TELEPHONE ACTUATOR

F420 device enabling to save 16 scenarios for Automation, F461/2 telephone actuator, 2 independent relays, with
Sound system, Temperature control and Video door exchange contact, power supply 230 Vac -
entry applications - 2 DIN modules 3 DIN modules
SCENARIO PROGRAMMER GSM TELEPHONE ACTUATOR

MH200N device for the execution of scenarios programmed F462 GSM telephone actuator for the enabling/disabling
using TiMH200N. The scenario may be combined with of loads via SMS. It provides interaction with BTicino
times and dates, manual activations, events managed timer thermostats, item L/N/NT4450, and the
through AUX channels, or generated by the possibility of managing 2 alarm inputs
automation, temperature control and burglar-alarm - 4 DIN modules
systems. The device can operate as a gateway for
the use of the MHVisual and Virtual Configurator
software. 6 DIN modules SWITCH
346020 compact power supply for MH200N scenario
programmer - 2 DIN modules F551 10/100 Mbs switch - 5 ports for the distribution of
1 LAN line to 4 lines. Possibility of adding several
switches for arranging several lines – Power supply
using item F552 power supply unit – 4 DIN modules
WEB SERVER AUDIO/VIDEO C9451 reduced size switch (29x98x171 - HxDxL), with 9
audio/video web server for the remote control of the RJ45 ports. Automatic detection of the T base
F454
system using web pages or the MY HOME portal. 10/100Mbit/s operating speed. Possibility of
The device can operate as a gateway for the use of the connecting up to 8 PCs - 12 Vdc with power supply
MHVisual and Virtual Configurator software - included
6 DIN modules. It replaces item F453 and F453AV.
CENTRAL UNIT WITH TELEPHONE DIALLING DEVICE

3485* POLYX ALARM central unit with system self-learning
function, and display of the configuration on the
screen. Controlled using the transponder and the
keypad. Managing up to 72 zones and max. 8 areas.
Possibility to set up to 16 user scenarios. Fitted with
PSTN telephone dialling device for alarm forwarding.
Programmed using the TiSecurity POLYX application.
Wall mounted using the metal bracket supplied as
standard. Battery powered, using battery item 3506,
supplied as standard
3486* central unit with system self-learning function, and
display of the configuration on the screen. Controlled
using IR remote control, the transponder and the
PSTN telephone dialling device and integrated GSM
for alarm forwarding. Programmed using the
TiSecurity GSM application. Wall mounted using the
metal bracket supplied as standard or flush-mounted
in MULTIBOX boxes. Power supply with battery item
3507/6.
: devices with Open Web Net communication protocol for the development of integration applications. (*): devices with level 2 IMG certification according to CEI79-2.
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME
Automation
H4651M2 H4652/2 H4652/3 HD4653M2 HD4653M3 HD4657M3
Item CONTROL FOR SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Item SOFT TOUCH CONTROLS

H4651M2 special control – allows to control an actuator by HD4653M2 touch control for the activation and/or adjustment of
executing all standard functions plus several special HC4653/2 one single actuator, or of a scenario saved in the
functions: activation of 4 scenarios saved in the F420 HS4653/2 scenario module, item F420 – adjustable LED intensity
module, timing operations, activation of an actuator – 2 modules
installed on a different bus, selection of the dimmer touch control for the activation and/or adjustment of
HD4653M3
setting fixed level and soft-start & soft-stop speed, one single actuator, or of a scenario saved in the
HC4653/3
sound system, lock switching-on control, call to the scenario module, item F420 – adjustable LED intensity
HS4653/3
floor and staircase light switching-on control, – 3 modules
management of auxiliary channels. To be integrated
with 1 or 2-module, one or two-function key covers
- 2 modules
DIGITAL GLASS CONTROLS
MY HOME control for the control of single loads or load groups
(e.g. lights and shutters), sound system, basic audio door
CONTROL FOR SINGLE AND DOUBLE LOADS entry functions (e.g. gate opening). The configuration can be
completed in two separate ways: physical (connecting the physical
H4652/2 control which can operate a single actuator for single configurators to their sockets), or virtual (the control can be
or double loads or two actuators for single loads or configured remotely). It is fitted with capacitive touch keys that
independent double loads – to be completed with one can be identified using adjustable intensity LEDs.
2-module key cover for controls with one or
two functions or two 1-module key covers WHITE GLASS
with one or two functions - 2 modules HD4657M3 6 key control – 3 module size
H4652/3 control which can operate three actuators for single
loads or independent double loads – to be completed
with three 1-module key covers for controls with one
or two functions- 3 modules HD4657M4 8 key control – 4 module size
Digital glass control installation Box Support Control WHICE

503E H4703 HD4657M3 HC4657M3 6 key control – 3 module size
HC4657M3
HS4657M3
504E H4704 HD4657M4 8 key control – 4 module size
HC4657M4
HC4657M4
HS4657M4
NIGHTER
HS4657M3 6 key control – 3 module size
Box
Support
NOTE: for white glass controls, contact your local BTicino commercial representative for
availability.
Control
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Automation
HD4563 HS4563 HD4680 HS4680 HC4607 HC4607/4 3530S 3540
Item KNOB CONTROL Item CONTACT INTERFACE

HD4563 knob control for advanced dimmer adjustment (level 3477 basic module control interface with 2
HC4563 from 1 to 99%, soft-start switch on, etc.). Central independent contacts for the control of 2
HS4563 ON/OFF pushbutton. - 2 modules actuators for single function loads, or 1 actuator
for double function loads (shutters) – the
inputs accepts two traditional switches or
pushbuttons with NO and NC contact, or a
SCENARIO CONTROL traditional two-way switch, or interlocked
pushbuttons
HD4680 scenario control that can be customized for the control
HC4680 of up to 4 “room set-ups” of independent Automation F428 as above - 2 DIN modules
HS4680 Temperature control and Sound system saved in the
scenario module, item F420 - 2 modules
SCENARIO MODULE MEMORY MODULE

F420 device enabling to save 16 scenarios for Automation, F425 module used for saving the status of the actuators -
Sound system, Temperature control and video door to reset the light automation system in case of power
entry applications - 2 DIN modules cut – 2 lowered DIN modules
CODE PROTECTED CONTROLS

HD4607 device that allows to save up to 30 transponders
HC4607 (badges) for the execution of protected controls -
HS4607 2 modules
HD4607Z4 transponder protected scenario control - it enables

HC4607/4 saving up to 30 transponders (badges) for the control
HS4607/4 of 4 protected scenarios - 2 modules
TRANSPONDER
3530S portable badge - when moved close to the transponder
reader, it causes its activation, enabling the signal
r
nde
spo
tran
generated to be transferred to the BUS – it does not

TY
EC URI
H S
HIG
require batteries – it can be automatically coded using

the transponder reader
3540 as above - key-holder
Warning:
only controls with production batch no. from 03W18 can read items 3530S (slim badge) and
3540 (key-ring). Older readers are only suitable for use with item 3530 (badge).
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
HD4654 HC4654 HS4654 3529 HS4658 HS4659
Item ACTIVE INFRARED RECEIVERS Item GREEN SWITCH AND PIR SENSOR
HD4654 remote control receiver for remote control item 3529 HD4658 Green Switch: integrated control with movement
HC4654 - up to 16 activations or scenarios saved in the scenario HC4658 sensor, using a combination of passive infrared rays
HS4654 module, item F420 and scenario programmer item HS4658 and ultrasounds, and brightness sensor. Manual
MH200N - 2 modules switching on of the light using the front pushbutton,
and automatic switching off based on brightness level
and movement. Switch off delay and brightness sensor
IR REMOTE CONTROL threshold adjustable using the one/two-way
3529 device for the control of receivers (up to 16 (BMSO4003 and BMSO4001) remote control, physical
receivers within the same room) - possibility of or virtual configuration. 2 modules
direct selection of up to 16 channels - powered HD4659 passive infrared sensor for the detection of movement
by four 1.5 V AAA batteries HC4659 and the lighting level. Coverage 5 m wide by 180° and
HS4659 9 m field depth at an installation height of 1.2 m.
Switch off delay and brightness sensor threshold
adjustable using the one/two-way (BMSO4003 and
BMSO4001) remote control, physical or virtual
configuration. 2 modules
Management of lighting level depending on the presence UP TO

55%
of people and the level of natural light:
this means maximum visual comfort for the users, and a
big contribution to energy savings. In the service sector, SAVINGS
savings of 55% to 75% are possible. in compliance with
EN15193 standard
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Automation
BMSE1001 BMSE2001 BMSE2005
Item LIGHTING/MOVEMENT SENSORS Item LIGHTING/MOVEMENT SENSORS

BMSE1001 passive infrared BUS sensor, for the detection of BMSE2003 passive infrared BUS sensor, for the detection of
movement and light intensity, ceiling mounted movement and light intensity, wall or ceiling mounted
installation, protection index IP20, screw connection, installation, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45
6 m (28 m2) diameter coverage when installed connection, coverage 2 m wide by 30°, 9+9 m (36 m2)
at a 2.5 m height, maximum installation height field depth when installed at a 2.5 m height, max.
4 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS, absorption installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS,
10 mA, virtual or physical configuration adjustment absorption 12 mA, adjustment using one-two-way
BMSE2001 passive infrared BUS sensor, for the detection of remote control(BMSO4003 and BMSO4001), physical
movement and light intensity, wall or ceiling mounted or virtual configuration
installation, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45 BMSE2004 passive infrared BUS sensor, for the detection of
connection, coverage 2 m wide by 30°,12 m (24 m2) movement and light intensity, wall or ceiling mounted
field depth when installed at a 2.5 m height, max. installation, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45
installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS, connection, coverage 10 m wide by 140°, 27 m (210 m2)
absorption 12 mA, adjustment using one-two-way field depth when installed at a 2.5 m height, max.
remote control (BMSO4003 and BMSO4001), physical installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS,
or virtual configuration absorption 12 mA, adjustment using one-two-way
installation, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45 BMSE2005 double technology passive infrared and ultrasound
connection, coverage 11 m wide by 90°, 14 m (120 m2) BUS sensor, for the detection of movement and light
field depth when installed at a 2.5 m height, max. intensity, wall or ceiling mounted installation,
installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45 connection,
absorption 12 mA, adjustment using one-two-way coverage 14 m wide by 180°,7 m (77 m2) field depth
remote control(BMSO4003 and BMSO4001), physical when installed at a 2.5 m height, max. installation
or virtual configuration height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS, absorption
12 mA, adjustment using one-two-way remote control
(BMSO4003 and BMSO4001), physical or virtual
configuration
NOTE: for more information on remote controls BMSO4003 and BMSO4001 refer to the
Lighting Management Catalogue
SENSOR QUICK SELECTION TABLE

BMSE1001 BMSE2001 BMSE2002 BMSE2003 BMSE2004 BMSE2005
Type of installation ceiling wall/ceiling wall/ceiling wall/ceiling wall/ceiling wall/ceiling
Operation ON-OFF, dimmer, movement detection, lighting level
Type of Auto/Eco/ Auto/Eco/ Auto/Eco/ Auto/Eco/ Auto/Eco/ Auto/Eco/
operation Walkthrough Walkthrough Walkthrough Walkthrough Walkthrough Walkthrough
Type of sensor PIR PIR PIR PIR PIR PIR+US
Power supply 27 Vdc from BUS 27 Vdc from BUS 27 Vdc from BUS 27 Vdc from BUS 27 Vdc from BUS 27 Vdc from BUS
Absorption 10 mA 12 mA 12 mA 12 mA 12 mA 17 mA
IP protection index IP20 IP42 IP42 IP42 IP42 IP42
Coverage at 2.5 m ø 6 m (28 m2) 2 x 12 m (24 m2) 11 x 14 m (120 m )
2
2 x 9+9 m (36 m )
2
10 x 27 m (210 m2) 14 x 7 m (77 m2)
Angle (vertical/horizontal) 90/360° 90/30° 60/90° 90/30° 60/140° 60/180°
Max. installation height (m) 4 6 6 6 6 6
Sensitivity (lux) 1 - 2000 1 - 2000 1 - 2000 1 - 2000 1 - 2000 1 - 2000
Switch off time delay 0 sec. – 255 hours 0 sec. – 255 hours 0 sec. – 255 hours 0 sec. – 255 hours 0 sec. – 255 hours 0 sec. – 255 hours
Operating temperature (-5) – (+45) °C (-5) – (+45) °C (-5) – (+45) °C (-5) – (+45) °C (-5) – (+45) °C (-5) – (+45) °C
Factory settings No 300 lux - 15 minutes 300 lux - 15 minutes 300 lux - 15 minutes 300 lux - 15 minutes 300 lux - 15 minutes
Adjustment with Remote Control No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Adjustment using the PC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Type of connection With clamp and RJ45 With clamp and RJ45 With clamp and RJ45 With clamp and RJ45 With clamp and RJ45 With clamp and RJ45

AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
H4671M2 H4678 3475
Item ACTUATORS AND FLUSH MOUNTED ACTUATORS/DIMMERS

actuator with 2 independent relays - for single, double, Example of use of actuator item H4671M2 in the “actuator and
H4671M2 remote control” mode. Press the left key cover to control the
and mixed loads: 2 A resistive, 2 A for filament lamps,
500 W for motor reducers, 2 A cosϕ 0.5 for actuator to manage a lamp connected to the device. The right key
ferromagnetic transformers, and 70 W for fluorescent cover controls one or more remote actuators for different functions
lamps - logic relay interlock via the configuration. The (management of lights, shutters or scenarios).
device may also be configured to manage a remote
actuator – 2 modules Flush mounted actuators
H4671/1 1 relay actuator with control-key - for single load: 6 A
resistive or filament lamps, 2 A cosϕ 0.5 for
ferromagnetic transformers and 150 W fluorescent
lamps - to be completed with single or double function
2 module key cover
H4678 dimmer actuator for filament lamps and ferromagnetic
transformers - 60 - 300 VA, 230 Vac - to be completed
with single or double function 2 module key cover -
2 modules
BASIC MODULE ACT UATORS

3475 1 relay actuator - for single loads: 2 A resistive or
incandescence lamps and 2 A cosϕ 0.5 for ”Control” key cover
ferromagnetic transformers – suitable for for remote actuator
installation in ceiling light cups or inside flush- management
mounted boxes, behind control devices
incandescence lamps and 2 A cosϕ 0.5 for ”Actuator” key
ferromagnetic transformers – input suitable for a cover for
traditional NO contact pushbutton light management
LOADS WHICH CAN BE DRIVEN (230 VAC 50/60 HZ)

Actuators Type
Energy saving LED lamps Linear fluorescent Compact fluorescent Electronic transformers Ferromagnetic Motor reducers for
incandescent and lamps 1) lamps transformers 2) shutters 3)
halogen lamps
H4671M2 2A 70 W 0.3 A 70 W 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A

460 W Max. 2 lamps 70 W Max. 2 lamps 70 W 460 VA 460 W
H4671/1 6A 150 W 0.65 A 150 W 0.65 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 -

1380 W Max. 3 lamps 150 W Max. 3 lamps 150 W 460 VA -
H4678 0.25 - 1.30 A - - - - 0.25 - 1.30 A -

60 - 300 W - - - - 60 - 300 VA -
3475 2A 40 W - 40 W - 2 A cosφ 0.5 -

3476 460 W Max. 1 lamp - Max. 1 lamp - 460 VA -
Notes:
1) power factor corrected fluorescent lamps, energy saving lamps, discharge lamps.
2) in order to calculated the actual power of the load connected to the actuator, it will be necessary to take into account the transformer performance. For example, when connecting a dimmer to a 100
VA ferromagnetic transformer with 0.8 performance, the actual load power will be 125 VA. The transformer must be loaded at its rated power, or in any case never below 90% of its rated power. It will be
preferable to use a single transformer, rather than several transformers in parallel. For example, it will be preferable to use one single 250 VA transformer with 5 x 50 W spotlights connected, rather than using
5 x 50 VA transformers in parallel, with one 50 W spotlight each.
3) the symbol shown on the actuators refers to the shutter motor reducers.
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Automation
F411/1N F411/2 F411/4 F411/1NC F411/2NC BMSW1001 BMSW1002 BMSW1003
Item ACTUATORS FOR CENTRALISATIONS Item ACTUATORS FOR CENTRALISATIONS

F411/1N two-way 1 relay actuator - for single loads: 16 A F411/2NC actuator with 2 independent NC relays for single loads,
resistive, 10 A filament lamps, 4 A cosϕ 0.5 for 6 A resistive and filament lamps, and 0.65 A for
ferromagnetic transformers, and 4 A for fluorescent fluorescent lamps. At switch on, the contact of the
lamps - 2 DIN modules device is always closed (ON status), and it opens when
F411/2 2 independent relay actuator - for single and double an OFF control is sent. In this way, if there is no power
loads: 10 A resistive and 6 A for filament lamps, 500 W input from the BUS, the device will remain in the ON
for motor reducers, 2 A cosϕ 0.5 for ferromagnetic status, keeping the load ON. - 2 DIN modules
transformers, and 250 W for fluorescent lamps – logic BMSW1001 ON/OFF actuator, 1 output with maximum load 16 A at
relay interlock via configuration - 2 DIN modules 230 Vac, clamp and RJ45 connection, IP20 protection
F411/4 4 independent relay actuator - for single, double and index, power supply 100/240 Vac 50/60 Hz, direct load
combined loads: 6 A resistive and 2 A for filament lamp, control pushbutton – zero-crossing function -
500 W for motor reducers, 2 cosϕ 0.5 for ferromagnetic 4 DIN modules
transformers, and 70 W for fluorescent lamps - logic BMSW1002 ON/OFF actuator, 2 independent outputs with
relay interlock via configuration - 2 DIN modules maximum load 16 A at 230 Vac, clamp and RJ45
F411/1NC actuator with 1 two-way NC relay for single loads, connection, IP20 protection index, power supply
16 A resistive, 10 A for incandescence lamps, and 4 A for 100/240 Vac 50/60 Hz, direct load control pushbuttons
fluorescent lamps. At switch on, the contact of the – zero-crossing function - 4 DIN modules
device is always closed (ON status), and it opens when BMSW1003 ON/OFF actuator, 4 independent outputs with
an OFF control is sent. In this way, if there is no power maximum load 16 A at 230 Vac, clamp and RJ45
input from the BUS, the device will remain in the ON connection, IP20 protection index, power supply
status, keeping the load ON - 2 DIN modules 100/240 Vac 50/60 Hz, direct load control
pushbuttons – zero-crossing function
- 6 DIN modules

Actuators Type
Energy saving
incandescent and LED lamps Linear fluorescent Compact fluorescent Electronic Ferromagnetic Motor reducers for
halogen lamps lamps 1) lamps transformers transformers 2) shutters 3)
F411/1N 10 A 500 W 4A 500 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 -
F411/2 6A 250 W 1A 250 W 1A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A
F411/4 2A 70 W 0.3 A 70 W 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A
F411/1NC 10 A 500 W 4A 500 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 -
F411/2 NC 6A - 0.65 A - 0.65 A 1 A cosφ 0.5 -
1380 W - 150 W - 150 W 230 VA -
BMSW1001 16 A 2.1 A 10 X (2 X 36 W) 1150 W 16 A 16 A -
3680 W 500 VA 4.3 A 5A 3680 W 3680 W -
BMSW1002 16 A 2.1 A 10 X (2 X 36 W) 1150 W 16 A 16 A -
3680 W 500 VA 4.3 A 5A 3680 W 3680 W -
BMSW1003 16 A 2.1 A 10 X (2 X 36 W) 1150 W 16 A 16 A -
3680 W 500 VA 4.3 A 5A 3680 W 3680 W -
Notes:
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
F413N BMDI1001 F414 F415 F416U1 F417U2 F429
Item DIMMERS FOR CENTRALISATIONS Item MULTILOAD DIMMER FOR CENTRALISATIONS

BMDI1001 1/10 V dimmer, 1 output with maximum load 4.3 A F416U1 multiload dimmer, 1 output with maximum load
at 230 Vac, clamp and RJ45 connection, IP20 4.3 A at 230 Vac, clamp and RJ45 connection,
protection index, 6 DIN modules, power supply IP20 protection index, power supply 100/240 Vac
100/240 Vac 50/60 Hz, direct load control 50/60 Hz, direct load control pushbutton
pushbutton - 6 modules - 6 DIN modules
F413N 1 output dimmer for the powering of fluorescent lamps F417U2 multiload dimmer, 2 independent outputs with
or LED sources with 1 to 10 V input for single loads maximum load 1.7 A at 230 Vac, clamp and RJ45
up to 2.5 A at 230 Vac - screw connection - 27 Vdc connection, IP20 protection index, power supply
power supply - absorption 30 mA - possibility of 100/240 Vac 50/60 Hz, direct load control
connecting up to 10 ballasts (clamps 1-2) - with direct pushbutton - 6 DIN modules
load control pushbutton - DIN rail mounted version F429 DALI Dimmer, 8 independent outputs for the
– 2 modules connection of up to 16 DALI reactors for each output
F414 1 output dimmer for the powering of filament and - power supply 230 Vac 50/60 Hz; 110-240 Vdc -
halogen lamps with ferromagnetic transformer - - absorption 90 mA - with direct load control
27 Vac power supply - absorption 9 mA - with direct pushbutton – DIN rail mounted version – 4 modules
load control pushbutton, DIN rail mounted version - F418 dimmer for the management of LEDs and compact
4 modules fluorescent lamps (CFL) with adjustable light intensity,
F415 1 output dimmer for the powering of filament and and energy saving halogen lamps with maximum
halogen lamps with electronic transformer - 27 Vdc power 200W, power supply 110 to 230 Vac – absorption
power supply - absorption 22 mA - with direct load 10 mA – DIN rail mounted version – 4 modules
control pushbutton - DIN rail mounted version -
4 modules

Actuators Type
Energy saving
BMDI1001 4.3 A - 4.3 A 4.3 A - - -
1000 VA - 1000 VA 1000 VA - - -
F413N - - 2 A 460 W 4) - - - -
- - Max. 10 ballast type T5, - - - -
T8, compact or driver
for LED
F414 0.25 - 4.3 A - - - - 0.25 - 4.3 A -
60 - 1000 VA - - - - 60 - 1000 VA -
F415 - - - - 0.25 - 1.7 A - -
- - - - 60 - 400 VA - -
F416U1 4.3 A - - - 4.3 A 4.3 A -
40 - 1000 W - - - 40 - 1000 W 40 - 1000 W -
F417U2 1.7 A - - - 1.7 A 1.7 A -
40 - 400 W - - - 40 - 400 W 40 - 400 W -
F418 200 W @ 230 Vac 200 W @ 230 Vac - 200 W @ 230 Vac - - -
100 W @ 110 Vac 100 W @ 110 Vac - 100 W @ 110 Vac - - -
Notes:
4) only compatible with lamps with 1/10 V Ballast.
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Burglar alarm - Technical alarms
3486 HD4601 HC4601 HS4608
3485 HD4607Z4 HD4603Z8 HC4607/4 HC4603/8 HS4607/4 HS4606
Item BURGLAR-ALARM CENTRAL UNIT WITH TELEPHONE Item AREA 1-4 DIVIDER
DIALLING DEVICE HD4607Z4* receiver for the arming/disarming of the system using
3485* POLYX ALARM central unit with system self-learning HC4607/4* the transponder badge item 3530S and item 3540 -
function, and display of the configuration on the HS4607/4* pushbuttons for the control of 4 zones - zone status
screen. Controlled using the transponder and the and system status LED notifications - possibility of
keypad. Managing up to 72 zones and 8 areas. disabling visual and sound notifications - 2 modules
Wall mounted using the metal bracket supplied as AREA 5-8 EXPANSION UNIT
supplied as standard HD4603Z8 module for the expansion of zones that may be divided
HC4603/8 - zones 5 to 8 control pushbuttons - LED zone status
3486* central unit with system self-learning function and notification - possibility of disabling the visual
display of the configuration on the screen. Controlled HS4603/8
notifications - it can be coupled to the zone 1-4 divider
using the IR remote control, the transponder and the to expand the system to up to 8 zones - 2 modules
keypad. Managing up to 72 zones and 8 areas.
integrated PSTN and GSM telephone dialling device,
for forwarding of alarms. Programmed using the
TiSecurity GSM application. Wall mounted using the KEYPAD CONNECTOR WITH DISPLAY
metal bracket supplied as standard, or flush mounted HD4608* device fitted with display for arming or disarming the
inside MULTIBOX units. Battery powered, using battery HC4608* system using a numeric key, set and saved on the
item 3507/6 not supplied HS4608* burglar-alarm central unit, item. 3485/B, item 3486 or
3483 coaxial extension cable for the central unit aerial, with transponder badge.
item 3486 - L = 3.5 metres It can be used to display all information, as well as to
manage some functions, of the central unit (division
etc.). Installation inside flush mounted boxes, item
3484* GSM aerial protection tamper - to ensure level 2 of CEI 506E, with front cover plate, Powered by battery,
79-2 standard, the tamper protection must be used item L4380/B, included - 6 modules
BURGLAR-ALARM CENTRAL UNIT

3485B central unit with system self-learning function and
on-screen configuration display. Controlled using the
transponder and the keypad. Managing up to 36
zones and 4 areas. Possibility to set up to 4 user
scenarios. Fitted with alarm notification actuator, as KEYPAD CONNECTOR
well as doors and windows protection NC contacts HD4606* device for arming or disarming the system using a
connection terminal. Wall mounted using the metal HC4606* numeric key, set and saved on the burglar-alarm
bracket supplied as standard. Battery powered, using HS4606* central unit, item 3485/B, item 3486 and item
battery item 3506, supplied HC/HD/HS4601 - 2 modules
HD4601 as above - flush mounted installation - battery
HC4601 powered, using battery item L4380/B supplied -
HS4601 6 modules
(*) : devices with level 2 IMG certification according to CEI79-2..
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

HD4607 3540 348220 HS4605 HD4610 HC4610 N4640 HC4613
Item TRANSPONDER CONNECTOR Item PASSIVE INFRARED DETECTORS

HD4607* for arming and disarming the system using the HD4610* passive infrared volumetric presence detector with
HC4607* transponder (badge) saved in the display central unit HC4610* adjustable sensitivity level (range: 3-9 metres)
HS4607* - LED system status notification - auxiliary channel HS4610* - alarm LED with memory – 105° angular opening,
available for activations - 2 modules 14 bands over 3 floors – auxiliary pre-alarm channel
that can be activated - 2 modules
HD4611* volumetric presence detector as above - angular
TRANSPONDER HC4611* opening that can be divided from 105° to 0° - lens
3530S* slim line portable badge
r
HS4611* adjustable on 2 axis
nde
spo
tran
HIG
H S
EC URI
TY
HD4611B passive infrared volumetric presence detector with

HC4611B fixed sensitivity level (range: 6 metres) - alarm LED
3540* key-ring portable badge HS4611B with memory - 105° angular opening, 14 bands over
3 floors - only for burglar alarm functions - 2 modules
REMOTE CONTROL IR PASSIVE MINI-DETECTORS

radio remote control with built-in transponder, with N4640 passive infrared volumetric presence detector with
348220 adjustable sensitivity (range: 3-9 metres) -
two pushbuttons, for arming or disarming of the
system. Max. distance 50 m without obstructions. alarm LED with memory - 105° angular opening,
Powered by a 3 V CR2032 type battery - to be used 14 bands over 3 floors - 3 level sensitivity adjustment
with radio receiver, item HC/HD/HS4618 through the configuration – possibility of activating
the auxiliary pre-alarm channel – wall mounted, tilted
and corner, installation
N4640B detector as above - preset sensitivity level (range:
KEY DISCONNECTOR 6 metres) - only for burglar alarm functions
HD4605 module to switch the system off and block it
HC4605 by means of a mechanical key
HS4605 - LED system status notification
– fitted with keyhole cover
– key with 10,000 combinations - DOUBLE-TECHNOLOGY DETECTORS
2 modules double-technology volumetric presence detector made
HD4613
HC4613 up of two sensors: one infrared to detect warm bodies
HS4613 (IR) and one with microwaves to detect movement
EXTENDED 4 PLUS GUARANTEE (MW). The alarm is only triggered when both detection
BTicino 4 PLUS Guarantee package – extended technologies activate. - 2 modules
3549
program guarantee that offers the following
advantages for the installer: - free start up by the
BTicino Technical After-Sales Service Centre - aftersales
assistance supplied by BTicino Technical
After-Sales Service Centres – all interventions free of
charge during the 2 year guarantee period, and subject
to fixed fee for the following 2 years - the guarantee
on the burglar alarm system may be extended to
4 years - interventions not covered by the guarantee
will be subjected to a fixed fee at advantageous
conditions - activation of the My home Web service
(on request of the customer)
MY HOME - BUS SCS
3480 F482 3510M 3514
3518
Item CONTACT INTERFACE MODULE Item CABLE DETECTOR FOR SHUTTERS

3480* interface module for two NC/NO electromagnetic 3514 detector for the protection of shutters or rolling
contact lines - possibility of connecting a balanced and shutters
unbalanced contact protection line – alarm indication
LED with tripping memory – auxiliary pre-alarm
channel that can be activated - basic module
F482* as above - for the management of two NC WINDOW-BREAKING DETECTOR
electromagnetic contact lines and rope sensors for
shutters - 2 DIN 3516 piezoelectric window-breaking detector. Installation
by means of double-sided adhesive tape, supplied.
NOTE: The item 3480 device is also preset the management of “technical alarms” in general. Protection of windows with 3 metre maximum
diagonal opening
IR BARRIERS
CONTACT INTERFACE MODULE WITH 12 VOLT OUTPUT Active infrared barriers for the protection of windows and doors.
3480V12 contact interface module with 12V output to connect to The device consists of 2 columns, one operates as TRANSMITTER
the system a mechanical rope sensor for shutters (item (TX), the other as RECEIVER (RX). When several IR beams are
3514) or similar, or a contact normally closed or opened broken, the alarm is immediately triggered.
and one IR barrier for windows - basic module 3518 window barrier - 1 metre - 4 beams
F482V12 as above - for the management of two contacts - 2 DIN
3519 door barrier - 2 metres - 8 beams
3518/50 window barrier - 0.5 metres - 2 beams

MAGNETIC CONTACTS
3510 NC electromagnetic contact interface detectors and
protection line - flush mounted version
3510M detector as above - made of brass with high

mechanical resistance, for installation in non
ferromagnetic material windows and doors,or in
low section doors and windows
3510PB detector as above – made of brass, with high
mechanical resistance for installation in all types of
doors and windows and reinforced doors
3511 detector as above - visible mounted version
3512 detector as above - made of die cast aluminium, for

installation on tilting or sliding doors. Preset for
floor installation
3513 detector as above - version for visible installation on
metal surfaces
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

HD4511V12 HC4511/12 HS4512/12 3440 3448 3482 HS4919
HD4618 3442 HB4619
Item RELAY ACTUATOR MODULE Item RADIO MAGNETIC AND GLASS BREAKING DETECTOR
3479 multiple configuration actuator module with relay 3442 magnetic opening detector for doors and windows -
output – NO-NC, 24 V 0.4 A cosϕ 0,4 contacts – to it can be connected to additional magnetic wire
be use for the repetition of several types of alarms contacts (items 3510, 3511 and 3513) - powered by
depending on the configuration. It may be activated one 3.6 V 1/2 AA battery, included
by: burglar alarms, exhausted battery signals, valve 3444 glass piezoelectric detector - protection of windows
closing due to technical alarms – basic module with 3-metre maximum diagonal opening - powered
F481 as above - 2 DIN by one 1/2 AA 3.6 V battery, included
CABLE DETECTOR FOR SHUTTERS

3445 detector for the protection of shutters or
similar winding shutters, consisting of a cable
TECHNICAL ALARM INTERFACE detector and radio transmitter - possibility of also
3481 interface module for the reception of alarm signals controlling an opening magnet (included) for
from technical alarm sensors like gas detectors, perimeter control - powered by one 1/2 AA 3.6 V
HD4511V12 and HC/HS4511/12 - HD4512V12 and battery, included
HC/HS4512/12 – 5-12 Vac/dc opto-insulated input
– basic module
F483 as above - 2 DIN REMOTE CONTROL FOR REMOTE ASSISTANCE
3448 radio remote control for sending remote assistance
notifications - it can be programmed automatically
using the HC/HD/HS4618 radio receiver - powered by a
NATURAL GAS DETECTORS 3 V CR2032 type battery, included - battery life 2 years
HD4511V12 NATURAL GAS detector with visual and sound (85 dB)
HC4511/12 alarm notification - internal self-diagnosis - preset
HS4511/12 for the control of signal repeaters - powered by a RADIO FLOOD DETECTORS
12 Vac/dc transformer, item HC/HD/HS4541 or item HA4619 detector with sensor, for detecting flooding
F91/12E - 2 modules caused by any type of liquids - powered by a
3 V CR2032 type battery, included. To be
furnished with front cover plate and
LPG DETECTORS key covers and item HC/HD/HS4919 - 2 modules
HD4512V12 LPG GAS detector with visual and sound (85 dB) alarm HB4619 as above - fit with round cover plate
HC4512/12 notification - internal self-diagnosis - preset for the
HS4512/12 control of signal repeaters - powered by a 12 Vac/dc
transformer, item HC/HD/HS4541 or item F91/12E -
2 modules
PAIR OF KEY COVERS
HD4919 for flood detector, item L4619
RADIO RECEIVER FOR COMBINED WIRE-RADIO SYSTEM HC4919
HS4919
HD4618 radio receiver module to be used as interface between
HC4618 the wire burglaralarm and the radio sensors, for the
HS4618 installation of combined wire-radio systems – it can
also be used for remote assistance functions, together FLOOD SENSOR
with remote control item 3448 and radio sensors -
2 modules 3482 water detection sensor - to be used together with
the contact interface, item 3480, in technical alarm
mode
PASSIVE INFRARED RADIO DETECTOR
3440 passive infrared volumetric presence detector - alarm
LED with memory – 12-metre range, 90° angular
opening, 17 bands over 4 floors – possibility of pulse
counter function activation - powered by 1 AA 3.6 V
battery, included
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Burglar alarm - Technical alarms - Management devices with IR remote control
4072L HC4070 3507/6 L4630 HD4603/4 HC4604 HS4604

3506
3505/12 4050
Item EXTERNAL SIREN WITH SYSTEM BATTERY Item ZONE 1-4 DIVIDER
4072L* external siren including the self-supply battery for the HD4603/4 receiver for the arming/disarming of the system using
whole system - sound notification can be set from HC4603/4 the IR remote control, item 4050 - pushbuttons for
0 to 10 minutes by means of the central unit - to be HS4603/4 the control of 4 zones - zone status and system status
fitted with a 12 V 12 Ah battery, item 3505/12 - sound LED notifications - possibility of disabling visual and
intensity 105 dB (A) at 3 metres - light signaller with sound notifications. Only for use with central units
xenon lamp - anti-foam grid - protected against item 3486 - 2 modules
tearing and opening - to be used with power supply
item E46ADCN
CONNECTOR
BATTERY FOR EXTERNAL SIREN ITEM 4072L HD604 receiver for the arming/disarming of the system using
HC4604 the remote control, item 4050 - LED system status
3505/12 12 V 12 Ah battery HS4604 notification - possibility of disabling visual and sound
notifications - possibility of setting the activation of
fixed system zones - auxiliary channel available for
activation of access controls (electric locks). Only for
use with central units item 3486 - 2 modules
OPTIONAL EXTERNAL SIREN
4072A* self-powered external siren - sound notification can
be set from 0 to 10 minutes by means of the control
unit - to be fitted with a 12 V 7 Ah battery - sound REMOTE CONTROL
intensity 105 dB (A) at 3 metres - light signaller with
xenon lamp - anti-foam grid - protected against 4050 portable infrared remote control for system arming/
tearing and opening - to be used with power supply disarming - it can be automatically coded from the
item E47ADCN central unit - powered by two CR1616 3 V lithium
batteries, included - battery operation time
NOTE: the external sirens do not include configurators. These may be purchased separately following the
procedure explained in the “Catalogue - Devices and common accessories” page.
50,000 operations
INTERNAL SIREN
HD4070* self-supplied internal siren for installation inside 506E
HC4070* boxes - to be fitted with a 6 V 0.5 Ah battery, item
HS4070* 3507/6 - sound intensity 90 dB (A) at 3 metres -
protected against tearing and tampering
NOTE: the external sirens do not include configurators.These may be purchased separately following the
procedure explained in the “Catalogue - Devices and common accessories” page.
BATTERIES
3507/6 6 V battery for internal siren item HC/HD/HS4070
3506 7.2 V battery for central unit, item 3485/B
L4380/B 6 V spare battery for central unit, item HC/HD/HS4601

and connector, item HC/HD/HS4608
TAMPER
L4630* anti-tamper device for the protection of burglar-alarm
devices - reference notches for any type of flush
mounted box

AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Temperature control
HD4695 HC4695 HS4695 HD4692 HC4692 HC4692FAN
HD4891 HC4891 HD4693 HS4693 3550 3456
Item 4-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT Item FAN COIL KNOB SENSORS

HD4695 central unit for the management of a temperature HD4692FAN room temperature control sensor for heating and
HC4695 control system with up to 4 zones - the product also HC4692FAN cooling systems with knob for +/- 3 °C manual
HS4695 includes the TiThermo Basic for programming from HS4692FAN adjustment of the temperature set in the unit and for
PC - 3 modules OFF and antifreeze mode selection, with manual/
automatic fan-coil Hydro-relax system speed selection
- 2 modules
99-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT
3550 central unit for the management of a temperature Item RADIO TEMPERATURE SENSOR
control system with up to 99 zones - the product also 3455 radio sensor for the measurement of external
includes the TiThermo Basic for programming from temperature - use with appropriate receiving radio
PC - wall mounted installation or in MULTIBOX interface, item HC/HD/HS4577 - solar cell or battery
enclosures powered - IP65 wall mounted enclosure
SENSOR RECEIVING RADIO INTERFACES

BATTERY
HD4577 temperature radio sensor receiving radio interface,
3507/6 6 V 0.5 Ah temperature control central unit battery item 3455 - 27 Vdc power supply from BUS
HC4577
HS4577 - 2 modules
ACTUATORS
LOCAL DISPLAY
F430/2 2 independent relay actuator – for single and double
HD4891 1.2” OLED Touch Screen for the simultaneous loads: 6 A resistive, 3 A motor valves and pumps -
HC4891 management of max. 4 functions: Sound System, logic relay interlock via configuration - 2 DIN modules
HS4891 Temperature Control, Consumption Display, Load
Management, Scenarios - 2 modules - it replaces item F430/4 4 independent relay actuator - for single, double and
HC/HD/HS4685 combined loads: 6 A resistive, 3 A motor valves,
pumps and fan-coil - logic relay interlock via
EXTERNAL SENSOR configuration - 2 DIN modules
3457 Local Display external sensor
CONTACT INTERFACE MODULE

3480 door and window electric contact interface module
SENSORS for switching on the connected zone - basic enclosure
HD4693 room temperature control sensor for heating and
HC4693 cooling systems - temperature measurement range F482 as above - 2 DIN module enclosure
HS4693 3 - 40 °C - 2 modules
NOTE: for magnetic contacts see the Burglar Alarm section.

KNOB SENSORS
HD4692 room temperature control sensor for heating and SPLITTER MANAGEMENT INTERFACE
HC4692 cooling systems with knob for +/- 3 °C manual air conditioning unit interface with IR emitter
adjustment of the temperature set in the unit and for 3456
HS4692 for the repetition and play back of IR air
OFF and antifreeze mode selection - 2 modules conditioning unit remote control signals. It can
be controlled using Touch Screen and
Multimedia Touch Screen. Basic mechanism,
to facilitate installation behind the air
conditioning unit. IR cable length 2 m, power
supply from the 27 V bus
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Energy management
HD4672N HC4672N HS4672N HS4673 3508BUS 3523 3522
F521 F522 F523 F524
Item CONSUMPTION DISPLAY Item LOAD CONTROL MANAGEMENT

F520 device for the measurement of electric power on HD4672N 1 relay actuator – 10 A for incandescent lamps 4 A for
a maximum of three lines, made possible by HC4672N fluorescent lamps or ferromagnetic transformers and
connecting three toroids to the appropriate inputs. HS4672N 500 W for LED lamps and compact fluorescent lamps
The collected and processed data can be displayed for Load Control Management and/or Automation
on Touch Screen or Multimedia Touch Screen. DIN rail functions. Forced load operation pushbutton - flush
mounting version - 1 module The device is supplied mounted version – 2 modules
with 1 toroid HD4673 panel for the display and the control of the loads
3523 additional toroids for the bus meter with three inputs HC4673 connected to the actuators
for toroids, item F520, and actuator with sensor, item HS4673
F522, for the measurement of the earth leakage
current. Cable length 400 mm
3522 pulse counter interface for the collection of data
from the meters (water, gas, etc.) with pulse ACCESSORIES
output. The values measured can be displayed on 3508BUS plug-in clamp for BUS connection - width 3.81 mm
Touch Screen or Multimedia Touch Screen. Basic
module version, for hidden installation. Power
supply from 27 V BUS
3508U2 2 pole plug-in clamp
LOAD CONTROL MANAGEMENT
F521 central unit for the management and control of the
load control system actuators, to prevent the risk of 3508U3 3 pole plug-in clamp
disconnection of the surge protection device of the
electricity provider. The central unit manages up to
63 loads maximum, with a contract power of 1.5 to 18
kW, and a tolerance of up to +/- 20%.
It includes a bus meter with 3 inputs for toroids for the
controlled line. DIN rail mounting version - 1 module
The device is supplied with 1 toroid
F522 actuator with integrated current sensor for controlled
load consumption module. 1 relay – 10 A for
incandescent lamps and 4 A for fluorescent lamps or
ferromagnetic transformers and 500 W for LED lamps
and compact fluorescent lamps - Bistable relay with
zero crossing for load control Management and/or
Automation functions. DIN rail mounting version
- 1 module. Earth leakage current control made
possible by connecting an additional toroid, item 3523
F523 1 relay actuator – for incandescent lamps, 4 A for
fluorescent lamps or ferromagnetic transformers, and
500 W for LED lamps and compact fluorescent lamps
– Bistable relay with zero crossing for load control
Management and/or Automation functions. DIN rail
mounting version - 1 module
F524 Device for the central management of energy
consumption data from a maximum of 10 lines
(detected using a bus meter with toroids, F520, load
control unit, F521, or pulse counter interfaces, 3522).
The data can be displayed using appropriate integrated
web pages, connecting the device to a LAN network
through the Ethernet port. It gives the possibility of
configuring several tariffs, and to download the
data. The device features microSD housing for the
backup of the recorded data. DIN rail mounting version
- 1 module - Power supply from 27 V BUS
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Sound system
F441 346030 F500N HS4560 L4561N H4562 F502 F503
F441M L4668BUS/35
Item AUDIO /VIDEO MIXERS Item AMPLIFIERS

346030 compact 2 wire power supply with integrated video H4562 flush mounted amplifier - to be completed with
adapter. For base sound systems with one installable key covers - connection to BUS SCS system and stereo
sound source only - 2 DIN modules loudspeakers - functions: ON/OFF loudspeakers,
volume control, source cycling function, and radio
346830 video adapter for base sound systems - only one sound station or CD track change – 2 modules
source can be installed - 2 DIN modules - electric power
supply by means of item 346000 F502 stereo amplifier – terminal for system
connection to the SCS BUS and the stereo speakers -
F441 audio/video node for audio source mixing (4 sources power supply 100 - 240 Vac - 4 DIN modules
maximum) towards 4 outputs - 6 DIN modules - fitted
SC
S
with DIN rail depth compensator F503 stereo amplifier for accurate reproduction of the
sound signal, both from the SCS/BUS and, in
F441M multichannel matrix with cross connecting alternative, from the AUX input (MP3 or CD player,
functions, switch mixing and shunting (switch mix etc.). Wide range of high and low tone adjustments
and shunt) for the distribution of both stereo sound available, 10 preset equalisation levels + 10
source signals and audio/video signals of the 2–wire customisable levels, virtual surround, and more.
intercom/video system - 8 inputs (the first 4 for the Each parameter can be displayed on the OLED
intercom/video 2 wire system, and the next 4 for graphic display. All the adjustments are performed
stereo sound sources), and 8 outputs - 10 DIN using the keys of the amplifier, or remotely using
modules - including DIN rail depth compensator Touch Screen devices - 10 DIN modules
SOUND SOURCES
F500N FM radio tuner with RDS. Storage of up to 5 radio
stations, display of RDS messages and tuned frequency.
Possibility of using the built-in wire antenna, or an
external antenna connected using a coaxial cable
with MCX-F adapter (supplied). 4 DIN modules, DIN rail
depth compensator included
HD4560 flush mounted RCA input - to be used to control a
HC4560 stereo source - 2 modules
HS4560
L4561N device for the control of stereo sound sources using the
infrared remote control - programmed using the PC -
possibility of managing the source from the amplifiers
or the special controls - 4 DIN modules - including
RCA/RCA cable and jack cable for the connection of
the IR transmitter
3495 source insulator for the adaptation of an audio signal
from external sound sources, to preserve the SELV
characteristics of the BUS. To be used when the sound
source is not powered by batteries. 4 female RCA
terminals, split between “IN” (for the connection of
the external sound source) and “OUT” (to be connected
to the RCA input item HC/HD/HS4560
PATCH CORD
Type Length (cm)
L4668BUS/35 BUS-BUS 35
MY HOME
Sound system
HD4563 HD4653M2 - HD4653M3 HC4653/2 - HC4653/3 HS4653/2 - HS4653/3 HD4657M3 HC4657M4 HS4685
Item CONTROLS Item DIGITAL GLASS CONTROLS

H4651M2 special amplifier management control to be completed MY HOME control for the control of single loads or load groups
with key covers, for the management of ON/OFF (e.g. lights and shutters), sound system, basic audio door
functions, volume control, change of source and entry functions (e.g. gate opening). The configuration can be
change of programmed radio station - 2 modules completed in two separate ways: physical (connecting the physical
configurators to their sockets), or virtual (the control can be
configured remotely). It is fitted with capacitive touch keys that
can be identified using adjustable intensity LEDs.
KNOB CONTROLS
HD4563 flush mounted knob operated device for ON/OFF, WHITE GLASS
HC4563 volume control, programmed radio station and CD HD4657M3 6 key control – 3 module size
HS4563 track change - 2 modules
HD4657M4 8 key control – 4 module size

SOFT TOUCH CONTROL
HD4563M2 2 module touch control for switching the stereo
HC4563/2 loudspeakers on/off and for volume adjustment – WHICE
HS4563/2 AXOLUTE series, light finish
HC4657M3 6 key control – 3 module size
HD4653M3 3 module touch control for switching the stereo
HC4653/3 loudspeakers on/off and for volume adjustment –
HS4653/3 AXOLUTE series, light finish
HC4657M4 8 key control – 4 module size
NIGHTER
HD4657M3 6 key control – 3 module size
LOCAL DISPLAY CONTROL

HD4891 1.2” OLED Touch Screen for the simultaneous
HC4891 management of max. 4 functions: Sound System,
HS4891 Temperature Control, Consumption Display, Load
Management, Scenarios - 2 modules - it replaces item
HC/HD/HS4685
TOUCH SCREEN IP ADAPTER

3496 accessory to be used with H/HW4890 Touch Screen
devices - it can be used for playing audio tracks stored
on the PC, on the server, as well as any IP radio content
(e.g. radio), through the loudspeakers of the 2 WIRE
Sound system - to be installed on the back of Touch
Screen units
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Sound system
HC4654 HD4565 H4570 3529 349418 349414 349415
L4567 L4569 L4566 L4566/10 L4568 3499 346841 346851 346850
Item FLUSH MOUNTED LOUDSPEAKERS Item CONNECTORS FOR INTERFACING THE BUS CABLE TO SOUND
HD4565 16 Ω flush mounted loudspeaker for 506E and PB526 SYSTEM DEVICES
HC4565 boxes - power 12 W 349418 8-contact connector for the connection of items F500N,
HS4565 349414 L4561N and 3465 to the BUS (connect PINS 5 and 6)
349415
H4570 8 Ω flush mounted 2-way loudspeaker for 4 module
MULTIBOX boxes item 16104 - power 100 W
LINE TERMINATOR
3499 line terminator - to be installed on the audio/video
node outputs
WALL MOUNTED LOUDSPEAKERS
L4567 8 Ω wall mounted 2-way slim line loudspeaker,
D=37 mm - power 40 W - colour white INTEGRATION AND EXPANSION DEVICES
346841 floor distribution block, to be used with the audio/
video node, item F441 and the DIN rail amplifiers,
L4569 8 Ω outdoor 2-way loudspeaker, IPx4, with adjustable item F502 and F503, for complete saturation of one
inclination fixing brackets - power 140 W - colour black audio/video node output
346851 system expansion module for the installation of
extended systems, with up to 140 loudspeakers
- 4 DIN modules
Item FALSE CEILING LOUDSPEAKERS 346850 apartment interface for connection to an independent
L4566 8 Ω false ceiling 2-way loudspeaker, L = 240 mm building complex video door entry system riser
- power 100 W - colour white integrated with MY HOME applications (Sound system,
Automation, etc.) – 4 DIN modules
L4566/10 8 Ω false ceiling and plasterboard loudspeaker,

L = 100 mm - power 20 W - colour white ACTIVE INFRARED RECEIVERS
HD4654 remote control receiver for remote control - up to 16
L4568 8 Ω loudspeaker with the same size as a standard false HC4654 activations or scenarios saved in the scenario module,
ceiling panel (60x60 cm), for installation on false HS4654 item F420 - 2 modules
ceilings - 50 W power - colour white
REMOTE CONTROLS
3529 receiver control device (up to 16 receivers within
the same room) - possibility to select up to 16
transmission channels directly - powered by two
1.5 V AAA batteries
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Common devices and accessories
E46ADCN E47ADCN 335919 3559 3545

E47/12
Item POWER SUPPLIES Item VARIOUS ACCESSORIES

E46ADCN* power supply - input 230 Vac, output 27 Vdc SELV – 3515 spare plug-in clamps
maximum consumption 450 mA – DIN rail mounted
model - space requirement 8 DIN modules – for flush
mounted or wall mounted switchboards
E47ADCN* power supply as above 230 Vac - installation on DIN rail 335919 cable for the connection to the PC for the
with 8 module space requirement for wall mounted programming of the Automation, Burglar Alarm,
boxes, item F115/8A - made for the connection of Temperature Control and Sound System devices -
12 V 7/12/24 Ah back-up battery for USB port
E47/12 power supply - 8 DIN module version for wall mounted 3559 cable as above - for USB port
boxes, item F115/8 A - made for the connection of one
12 V 6.5 - 25 Ah battery for the powering of 12 V
devices (IR barriers, etc.)
E49 compact power supply for Temperature control, Energy
Management and Automation systems - input 230 Vac,
output 27 Vdc - maximum power delivered 600 mA - VOUCHER FOR TECHNICAL AFTER SALES SERVICE
2 DIN modules 3545 “Booklet” of 5 vouchers for visits by a CAT technician to
346000 power supply for Video door entry system and Sound service My Home, Video door entry, Telephony, Light
system. Power supply: 230 Vac @ 50-60 Hz. Maximum signalling and CCTV systems
power delivered 1.2 A. Electronically protected
(without fuse) against short-circuit and overload.
Double insulation SELV device - 8 DIN modules
346020 2 DIN module compact additional power supply. For
local supply of the video door entry entrance panels
and handsets. Power supply: 230 Vac @ 50-60 Hz.
Maximum power delivered 600 mA. Protected by
integrated fuse (not replaceable). Double insulation
SELV device
346030 2 DIN module compact power supply for Video door
entry system and Sound system. Maximum power
delivered 600 mA. Protected by integrated fuse (not
replaceable). Double insulation SELV device
For the selection of the power supply, based on the system being installed, refer to the following table.
System Power supply

E46ADCN E47ADCN E47/12 E49 346000 346020
Automation • •
Burglar alarm • (1) • (2) • (3)
Energy management/Cons. display • •

Temperature control • •
Sound system • •
Video door entry system • •
NOTE (1): for systems with external siren 4072L
(2): for systems with external siren 4072A or without siren
(3): for sensors with 12 Vdc power supply (ex. IR barriers)
(*) : devices with level 2 IMG certification according to CEI79-2.

AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

3501/0 3501/1 3501/2 3501/3 3501/4
3501/GEN 3501/GR 3501/AMB 3501/AUX

L4669
L4669/500
L4669HF 336904 502PA
3501/PUL 3501/SLA 3501/CEN 3501/T
WALL MOUNTED BOXES FOR POWER SUPPLY AND BATTERY -

Item BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM Item VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION KIT
F115/8A DIN wall mounted enclosure for the installation of 3504 kit for the configuration of the Automation system
power supply item E47ADCN using a PC and the VIRTUAL CONFIGURATOR
software, supplied as standard on CD, and Secure Digit
(SD) memory card. It replaces item 3503N.
F115/8B enclosure for the 12 V 7 Ah battery, for the self-supply
of the burglar-alarm system with power supply item
E47ADCN – self-protection contact against opening
attempts CONFIGURATORS – SINGLE-TYPE PACKAGE OF 10 PIECES
3501/0 configurator 0
WALL MOUNTED BOXES FOR MODULAR DEVICES 3501/1 configurator 1
502NPA reduced depth wall mounted installation box - fitted 3501/2 configurator 2
with anti-tamper device – 2 modules – complete
with support 3501/3 configurator 3
ANGULAR BOX
502PA surface mounted box for angular installation – fitted 3501/6 configurator 6
with antitamper device – 2 modules – complete with 3501/7 configurator 7
frame and white cover plate (LB)
CONNECTION CABLES 3501/GEN configurator GEN
L4669 sheathed pair made up of 2 flexible wires with
unshielded plaited sheath - insulation 300/500 V - 3501/GR configurator GR
complies with standards CEI 46-5 and CEI 20-20 - 3501/AMB configurator AMB
coil length 100 metres
L4669/500 as above - coil length 500 metres 3501/AUX configurator AUX
3501/ON configurator ON
3501/OFF configurator OFF
L4669HF as above - low toxicity cable without halogens - ideal
for application in environments where fire hazard 3501/OI configurator OI
safety is critical - maximum length 200 m (1)
L4669S double sheathed SCS made up of 2 flexible wires with CONFIGURATORS – SINGLE-TYPE PACKAGE OF 10 PIECES
unshielded plaited sheath for burglar-alarm system
- insulation 300/500 V - complies with standards CEI 3501/PUL configurator PUL
46-5 and CEI 20-20 - coil length 100 metres 3501/SLA configurator SLA
336904 specific cable with 2 twisted conductors. It can be 3501/CEN configurator CEN
installed in underground piping, in accordance with
CEI 20-13 and CEI 20-14 standards. It ensures the best 3501/T configurator
➝ ➝
➝
performance in video systems (higher distance 3501/TM configurator M

➝
between EP and Handset when compared with other

cables). Coil length 200 metres
CONFIGURATOR KIT
System Cable 3501K kit of configurators from 0 to 9
L4669 L4669S 336904
L4669/500
L4669HF
Automation • •(2)(2) 3501K/1 kit of configurators AUX, GEN, GR, AMB,ON, OFF, O/I,
• • PUL, SLA, CEN, , M

➝
➝
➝
➝
Burglar alarm
Energy management/Cons. display • •(2)(2)
Sound system •
NOTE (1): for availability contact your local BTicino sales representative
•
(2): for systems with underground cable lines
MY HOME
KEY-COVERS WITHOUT SILK-SCREEN PRINTING - 1 AND 2 FUNCTIONS
HD4911 HD4911M2 HD4915 HD4915M2
HC4911 HC4911M2 HC4915 HC4915M2
HS4911 HS4911M2 HS4915 HS4915M2
KEY-COVERS WITHOUT SILK-SCREEN PRINTING - 1 FUNCTION KEY-COVERS WITHOUT SILK-SCREEN PRINTING - 2 FUNCTIONS
1 module 2 modules 1 module 2 modules
Item Item Item Item
HD4915 HD4915M2 HD4911 HD4911M2
HC4915 HC4915/2 HC4911 HC4911/2
HS4915 HS4915/2 HS4911 HS4911/2
NOTE: control keys are supplied with

the device as standard.
upper pushbutton
control
lower pushbutton key
LED
key cover
2 functions
2 modules
key cover
1 function
key cover 2 modules
2 functions
key cover 1 module
1 function
1 module
AXOLUTE catalogue
MY HOME
KEY-COVERS WITH SILK-SCREEN PRINTING – 1 AND 2 FUNCTIONS
HD4915AA HD4915M2AA HC4915/2AA HC4915AC HS4915/2AA HS4915BA HD4911AF HD4911MAF HC4911AF HC4911AI HC4911AG HC4911BC
HC4915/2AC HS4915/2BA
KEY-COVERS WITH SILK-SCREEN PRINTING KEY-COVERS WITH SILK-SCREEN PRINTING

WITH SYMBOLS – 1 FUNCTION WITH SYMBOLS – 1 FUNCTION
1 module 2 modules 1 module 2 modules
Description Item Item Description Item Item
HD4915AA HD4915M2AA HD4915BG HD4915M2BG
OFF HC4915AA HC4915/2AA ROOM HC4915BG HC4915/2BG
HS4915AA HS4915/2AA HS4915BG HS4915/2BG
HD4915AB HD4915M2AB HD4915BH HD4915M2BH
ON HC4915AB HC4915/2AB ALARM HC4915BH HC4915/2BH
HS4915AB HS4915/2AB HS4915BH HS4915/2BH
HD4915AC HD4915M2AC
GEN HC4915AC HC4915/2AC
HS4915AC HS4915/2AC
HD4915AD HD4915M2AD
DIMMER HC4915AD HC4915/2AD
HS4915AD HS4915/2AD KEY-COVERS WITH SILK-SCREEN PRINTING
HD4915BA HD4915M2BA WITH SYMBOLS – 2 FUNCTIONS
LIGHT HC4915BA HC4915/2BA 1 module 2 modules
HS4915BA HS4915/2BA Description Item Item
HD4915BL HD4915M2BL HD4911AF HD4911M2AF
BED LIGHT HC4915BL HC4915M2BL ON - OFF - GEN HC4911AF HC4911/2AF
HS4915BL HS4915M2BL HS4911AF HS4911/2AF
HD4915BB HD4915M2BB HD4911AG HD4911M2AG
BELL HC4915BB HC4915/2BB ON - OFF HC4911AG HC4911/2AG
HS4915BB HS4915/2BB HS4911AG HS4911/2AG
HD4915BC HD4915M2BC HD4911AH HD4911M2AH
EXHAUST FAN HC4915BC HC4915/2BC UP - DOWN HC4911AH HC4911/2AH
HS4915BC HS4915/2BC HS4911AH HS4911/2AH
HD4915BD HD4915M2BD HD4911AI HD4911M2AI
ON - OFF
KEY HC4915BC HC4915/2BD HC4911AI HC4911/2AI
ADJUSTMENT
HS4915BC HS4915/2BD HS4911AI HS4911/2AI
HD4915BE HD4915M2BE HD4911BA HD4911M2BA
TREBLE CLEF HC4915BE HC4915/2BE LIGHT HC4911BA HC4911/2BA
HS4915BE HS4915/2BE HS4911BA HS4911/2BA
HD4915BF HD4915M2BF HD4911BC HD4911M2BC
NURSE HC4915BF HC4915/2BF EXHAUST FAN HC4911BC HC4911/2BC
HS4915BF HS4915/2BF HS4911BC HS4911/2BC
HD4915DD — HD4911BE HD4911M2BE
DO NOT DISTURB HC4915DD — TREBLE CLEF HC4911BE HC4911/2BE
HS4915DD — HS4911BE HS4911/2BE
HD4915MR — HD4911AD —
REARRANGE + up and
HC4915MR — HC4911AD —
THE ROOM – down
HS4915MR — HS4911AD —
MY HOME
F558 F555 L4665L20 HC4279C6A HC4202D HC4210D
Item CONNECTOR FOR VERTICAL PATCHING Item CAT. 6 CABLES

F550C6 cat. 6 module for the patching of the wiring inside the category 6 U/UTP unshielded cable with 24 AWG (0.51) solid
star centre cabinet. Reversible connectors for the copper conductors, with polyolefin insulation, 4 pair of twisted
connection of cables to the user sockets from the top conductors with internal partition - performance 500 MHz - in
or from the floor - 1 DIN module accordance with ISO/IEC 11801 and 2.0, EN 50173-1 and EIA/TIA
568 B2.10 standards - blue
Cable sheath Length Packaging
DIGITAL SIGNAL DEVICES 32754 LSZH 305m coil
F551 10/100 Mbs switch - 5 ports for the distribution of
1 LAN line to 4 lines. Several switches can be added 32871 LSZH 1000m coil
to setup more lines - 4 DIN modules 32872 PVC 1000m coil
TELEPHONE SIGNAL DEVICES RJ45 CONNECTORS

F558 xDSL filter with 3 way telephone distribution frame HD4279C6A RJ45 connectors fitted with metal screen,
for the separation of the ADSL data line from the HC4279C6A identification plate, and dust cover - 1 module
telephone line. Possibility of connection to an 8 output HS4279C6A
telephone distribution frame, item F555, to increase
the number of lines - 2 DIN modules
F555 8 output telephone distribution frame to distribute
1 telephone line to 8 different sockets, or 2 telephone TELEVISION SIGNAL CONNECTOR
lines to 4 sockets. Possibility of connection to several HD4202D direct (shunted) coaxial socket for single-user antenna
distribution frames to increase the number of lines - HC4202D systems, including remotely powered and centralised
4 DIN modules HS4202D systems, and single use and centralised satellite
systems with feed-through current and signal for
channel selection - shielded connection clamps with
captive screws - diam. 9.5 mm - male connector -
TELEVISION SIGNAL DEVICES 1 module
F553 universal TV/SAT distribution frame (5–2400 MHz)
for the distribution of the signal to 6 separate TV
sockets. F type connection clamps - 4 DIN modules
TV CONNECTOR F TYPE
HD4269F TV coaxial connector F type - impedance 75 Ohm -
HC4269F screw connection - 1 module
ACCESSORIES HS4269F
F552 9 V 1.6 A power supply for the power supply to the
switch, item F551 - 1.5 DIN modules
TV + RD + SAT CONNECTOR
L4665L20 FLAT type patch cord with RJ45 connectors - category HD4210D direct (shunted) coaxial socket for single-user TV
6 - PVC cable sheath - with built in SNAGGLE - in HC4210D antenna systems, including remotely powered and
accordance with EN 50173-1 and EIA/TIA 568 A/B HS4210D centralised shunted systems, and single use and
standards - length 20 cm centralised shunted satellite systems with
L4665L40 patch cord as above - length 40 cm feed-through current and signal for channel selection,
and radio systems - male 9.5 mm diam. TV connector
- 9.5 mm diam. female radio and SAT connector - for
installation inside rectangular box, item 503E, item
L4664 telephone cable, with RJ45 and RJ11 connectors, 504E, item 506L- 2 modules
for the connection of telephone devices with RJ11
connector to devices with RJ45 connector -
length 200 cm DEMIXED TV +SAT CONNECTOR
HD4214D demixed direct (shunted) coaxial socket for single-user
HC4214D TV antenna systems, including remotely
HS4214D powered and centralised shunted systems, single
use and centralised shunted satellite systems with
feed-through current and signal for channel selection
- male 9.5 mm diam. TV connector - SAT connector
F type- 1 module
AXOLUTE catalogue
HOTEL OFFER RANGE

This page lists the devices specifically intended for hotel room services. The BTicino hotel
room offer range, and in more general terms for the hotel sector, includes however many
more devices that are also used in other sectors, and are therefore listed in various sections
throughout this catalogue. Some of them are, for example:
- comfort devices = light, curtain, and scenario controls with dedicated symbols. Also,
thermostats, and temperature probes with knobs
- audio and video devices = connectors for every need, and sound signalling devices
- safety devices = step lights, and emergency lamps
H4549 HD4177 HC4033 H4372V230H HC4915DD HC4915MR
HS4547
Item BADGE-HOLDER POCKET Item KEY COVER WITH SYMBOLS FOR AXIAL CONTROLS
H4549 badge holder pocket for the power supply inside the HD4921BL bed light
hotel room - slot light with built-in lamp - 30 second HC4921BL
switch-off delay - power supply 230 Vac - 2 modules HS4921BL
- to be completed with front cover in the desired look
H4548 badge holder pocket for the power supply inside the HD4921DD do not disturb
hotel room with RFID technology recognition - slot HC4921DD
light with built-in lamp - 30 second switch-off delay HS4921DD
- power supply 230 Vac - 2 modules - to be
completed with front cover in the desired look HD4921MR rearrange the room
HC4921MR
HS4921MR
MY HOME SYSTEM BADGE-HOLDER POCKETS Item LAMPHOLDER FOR OFF-DOOR SIGNALLING

H4649 badge holder pockets for the power supply inside the off-door lampholder with double optical signalling:
hotel room - slot light with built-in lamp - 30 second H4372V230H
do not disturb and rearrange the room – use 2 LEDs
switch-off delay - SCS bus connection - 2 modules item LN4742V12T (12 V)
H4648 badge holder pockets for the power supply inside the
hotel room with RFID technology recognition
- slot light with built-in lamp - 30 second switch-off SHAVER SOCKETS
delay - SCS bus connection - 2 modules - to be shaver socket with insulation transformer
completed with front cover in the desired look HD4177
HC4177 - input voltage 230 Vac @ 50/60 Hz - output voltage
HS4177 115/230 Vac 20 VA
FRONT COVERS FOR BADGE-HOLDER POCKETS

HD4547 front cover for traditional or My Home badge-holder
HC4547 pocket CORD PUSHBUTTONS
HS4547 HD4033 cord pushbutton 1 P NO 10 A for bathroom alarm
HC4033
HS4033
KEY COVERS WITH SYMBOLS FOR MY HOME CONTROL

HD4915DD key cover for rocker control devices with
HC4915DD ”do not disturb” symbol
HS4915DD
HD4915MR key cover with ”rearrange the room” symbol

HC4915MR
HS4915MR
HD4915BL key cover with ”room light” symbol

HC4915BL
HS4915BL
HD4915M2BL key cover as above - 2 modules

HC4915M2BL
HS4915M2BL
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM AND VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM
Video display and cameras
349313 349311 349320 349210 349310 391662
Item VIDEO DISPLAY Item VIDEO STATION

349313 hands-free video display unit which can be installed 349310 stereo hands-free video display unit which can be
349311 in 2 wire video systems. 2.5” LCD colour display. It installed in 2 wire video systems. 5.6” LCD colour
349312 can be combined with the MY HOME system; equipped display. It can be combined with the MY HOME
with customizable navigation menus via the PC for system; equipped with customizable navigation
managing the followings functions: video door-entry menus via the PC for managing the followings
units, temperature control, sound system, scenarios, functions: video door-entry units, temperature
alarms. Keys included: navigation, auto-switch on, control, sound system, scenarios, alarms. In integrated
door lock release, hands-free connection and pager. systems, when using a sound system, the Video
LED used for: call exclusion, door status, connection. Station acts as an amplifier, hence reproducing all
Configuration via physical configurators and menus. the audio sources in the system. Keys included:
USB port for programming. flush-mounting navigation, auto-switch on, door lock release, staircase
installation in 506 box. Available frames: all those lights, mute, hands-free connection and pager. LED
included in the 506E domestic lines. used for: call exclusion, door status, connection.
Configuration via physical configurators and menus.
USB and RS232 port for programming. Can be installed
on the wall using a special bracket. Glass, wood and
NIGHTER & WHICE VIDEO STATION aluminum dedicated frames.
349321 stereo hands-free video display unit which can be
349320 installed in 2 wire video systems. 8” LCD colour
display. It can be combined with the MY HOME
system; equipped with customizable navigation
menus via the PC for managing the followings FRAMES FOR VIDEO STATION
functions: video door-entry units, temperature 349210 satin- finished aluminium frame
control, sound system, scenarios, alarms. In integrated
systems, when using a sound system, the Video
Station acts as an amplifier, hence reproducing all
the audio sources in the system. Keys included: 349211 Kristall glass frame
navigation, auto-switch on, door lock release, staircase
lights, mute, hands-free connection and pager. LED
used for: call exclusion, door status, connection.
Can be connected to the multimedia interface. 349212 TEAK wooden frame
Configuration via physical configurators and menus.
USB and RS232 port for programming. Can be
installed on the wall using a special bracket.
NOTE: the size of the display may be slightly different.
2 WIRE SYSTEMS INDOOR CAMERAS

391663 2 wire technology flush mounted colour camera -
391661 with microphone - 1.3” CCD, 380 horizontal lines
391662 resolution, 3.7 mm lens
AXOLUTE catalogue
AXOLUTE Outdoor entrance panels
339313 349140 339213 348402 348400 348401 348402
Item OUTDOOR Item PROGRAMMER AND TRANSPONDER KEY

339313 steel tear proof flush mounted box - 3 modules 348402 transponder key programmer
349140 electronic module including: speaker phone module, 348200 transponder key black
motorised camera and colour display. A proximity
reader is integrated for access control functions
by means of transponder keys. Programming and
configuration software included. 348201 transponder key red
339213 3 module frame + supporting frame in steel finish.
Anti-housebreaking resistant safety key for assembly
and disassembly provided.
348202 transponder key green
339223 3 module frame + supporting frame in brass finish.
Anti-housebreaking resistant safety key for assembly
and disassembly provided.
348203 transponder key blue
348204 transponder key orange
348205 transponder key grey
348206 transponder key yellow
CONTENTS
LIVINGLIGHT catalogue

MY HOME - BUS SCS

F422 LN4890 N4891 F429 H4687
Item LOCAL DISPLAY Item VIDEO TOUCH SCREEN

N4891 1.2” OLED Touch Screen for the simultaneous H4687 flush mounted panel PC with 15” Touch Screen display
NT4891 management of max. 4 functions: Sound System, for the control of the MY HOME system using the
L4891 Temperature Control, Consumption Display, Load MHVisual software
management, Scenarios - 2 modules -
it replaces item L/N/NT4685
MHVISUAL SOFTWARE
TOUCH SCREEN
MHVISUAL control and management software of the lighting
LN4890 3.5” colour Touch Screen for the management of the functions, Automation, Burglar alarm, Temperature
following functions: Automation, Lighting, Burglar control, Sound system, Scenarios, Energy management
22°C Alarm, Temperature Control, Sound System, Scenarios, and Video surveillance system
Load Management and Consumption Display.
USB front connector for configuration.
Device preset for programming with Open Web Net
protocol language- it replaces item L4684 SCS-SCS INTERFACE
LN4890A Touch Screen as above - can be installed with F422 interface between SCS BUS based systems, dedicated
LIVINGLIGHT AIR cover plates - it replaces item to different functions - 2 lowered DIN modules
22°C LN4684A

TOUCH SCREEN IP ADAPTER F426 SCS/EIB interface - for the control of EIB systems in
MY HOME applications - 2 DIN modules
used for playing audio tracks stored on the PC, on the
server, as well as any IP radio content (e.g. radio),
through the loudspeakers of the Sound system - to be
installed on the back of TOUCH SCREEN units SCS/DALI INTERFACE
F429 DALI dimmer, 8 independent outputs with 230 Vac
: devices with Open Web Net communication protocol for the 16 ballasts maximum load, direct load control device,
development of integration applications.
6 DIN modules
The MY HOME system can also be controlled by iPad devices

thanks to BTicino MY HOME, the official BTicino application which
can be downloaded from iTunes, in the “Free” version as well.
MY HOME - BUS SCS
MH200N 3486 F461/2 C9451 F454

F420 device enabling to save 16 scenarios for Automation, F461/2 telephone actuator, 2 independent relays, with
Sound system, Temperature control and Video door exchange contact, power supply 230 Vac -
entry applications - 2 DIN modules 3 DIN modules

MH200N device for the execution of scenarios programmed F462 GSM telephone actuator for the enabling/disabling
using TiMH200N. The scenario may be combined with of loads via SMS. It provides interaction with BTicino
times and dates, manual activations, events managed timer thermostats, item L/N/NT4450, and the
through AUX channels, or generated by the possibility of managing 2 alarm inputs
automation, temperature control and burglar-alarm - 4 DIN modules
software. 6 DIN modules SWITCH
346020 compact power supply for MH200N scenario
programmer - 2 DIN modules F551 10/100 Mbs switch - 5 ports for the distribution of
1 LAN line to 4 lines. Possibility of adding several
switches for arranging several lines – Power supply
using item F552 power supply unit – 4 DIN modules
WEB SERVER AUDIO/VIDEO C9451 reduced size switch (29x98x171 - HxDxL), with 9
audio/video web server for the remote control of the RJ45 ports. Automatic detection of the T base
F454
system using web pages or the MY HOME portal. 10/100Mbit/s operating speed. Possibility of
The device can operate as a gateway for the use of the connecting up to 8 PCs - 12 Vdc with power supply
MHVisual and Virtual Configurator software - included
6 DIN modules. It replaces item F453 and F453AV
CENTRAL UNIT WITH TELEPHONE DIALLING DEVICE

screen. Controlled using the transponder and the
Wall mounted using the metal bracket supplied as
supplied as standard
display of the configuration on the screen. Controlled
using IR remote control, the transponder and the
PSTN telephone dialling device and integrated GSM
for alarm forwarding. Programmed using the
TiSecurity GSM application. Wall mounted using the
metal bracket supplied as standard or flush-mounted
in MULTIBOX boxes. Power supply with battery item
3507/6.
(*): devices with level 2 IMG certification according to CEI79-2.
: devices with Open Web Net communication protocol for
the development of integration applications.
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
L4651M2 L4652/2 L4652/3
Item SPECIAL CONTROL Item CONTROLS FOR SINGLE AND DOUBLE LOADS
L4651M2 actuator with 2 independent relays - for single, double, L4652/2 lowered section control that can drive a single actuator
and mixed loads: 2 A resistive, 2 A for filament for single or double loads, as well as two actuators for
lamps, 500 W for motor reducers, 2 A cosϕ 0.5 for single loads or double independent loads - to be
ferromagnetic transformers, and 70 W for fluorescent completed with one 2 module key cover for one or two
lamps - logic relay interlock via the configuration. The functions controls, or 2 one or two-function 1 module
device may also be configured to manage a remote key covers - 4 green/red two-colour LEDs - 2 modules
actuator – 2 modules L4652/3 control that can drive three actuators for single or
independent double loads - to be completed with
three 1 module key covers for one or two-function
MY HOME KEY COVERS controls - 6 green/red two-colour LEDs - 3 modules
MY HOME key covers have been unified with those for electromechanical control devices.
NOTE: control pushbuttons are supplied with the device as standard.

Key covers must be selected by the customer.
special controls and for
single or double loads
upper pushbutton
control
lower pushbutton
pushbutton
LED
key cover
2 functions
2 modules
key cover
key cover 1 function
1 function key cover 2 modules
1 module 2 functions
1 module
new LIVINGLIGHT
NOTE ON USE OF THE HINGE
ITEM 4911TDM HINGE
3 module support
4911TDM accessory for the installation of
2 module key covers on 503E box
mounted devices
hinge
item 4911TDM
2 module
control key
control
2 module
1 module key cover
control key
1 module
key cover
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Automation
N4563 N4680 NT4607 NT4607/4 L4563 L4680
3530S 3540
Item KNOB CONTROL Item CONTACT INTERFACE

N4563 knob control for advanced dimmer adjustment (level 3477 basic module control interface with 2
NT4563 from 1 to 99%, soft-start switch on, etc.). Central independent contacts for the control of 2
L4563 ON/OFF pushbutton. - 2 modules actuators for single function loads, or 1 actuator
for double function loads (shutters) – the
inputs accepts two traditional switches or
pushbuttons with NO and NC contact, or a
SCENARIO CONTROL traditional two-way switch, or interlocked
pushbuttons
N4680 scenario control that can be customized for the control
NT4680 of up to 4 “room set-ups” of independent Automation F428 as above - 2 DIN modules
L4680 Temperature control and Sound system saved in the
scenario module, item F420 - 2 modules
SCENARIO MODULE MEMORY MODULE

F420 device enabling to save 16 scenarios for Automation, F425 module used for saving the status of the actuators -
Sound system, Temperature control and video door to reset the light automation system in case of power
entry applications - 2 DIN modules cut – 2 lowered DIN modules
CODE PROTECTED CONTROLS

device that allows to save up to 30 transponders KIT - SHUTTER AUTOMATION
N4607
NT4607 (badges) for the execution of protected controls - MHKIT10N automation kit for automated control of 5 shutters
L4607 2 modules (or motor controlled curtains) - white, Tech, anthracite
colour controls
N4607/4 transponder protected scenario control - it enables
NT4607/4 saving up to 30 transponders (badges) for the control
L4607/4 of 4 protected scenarios - 2 modules
TRANSPONDER
3530S portable badge - when moved close to the transponder
reader, it causes its activation, enabling the signal
r
nde
spo
tran
generated to be transferred to the BUS – it does not

TY
EC URI
H S
HIG
require batteries – it can be automatically coded using

the transponder reader
3540 as above - key-holder with same functions
Warning:
only controls with production batch no. from 03W18 can read items 3530S (slim badge) and
3540 (key-ring). Older readers are only suitable for use with item 3530 (badge).
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
N4654N NT4654N 3529 L4658N N4659N
Item ACTIVE INFRARED RECEIVERS Item GREEN SWITCH AND PIR SENSOR
N4654N remote control receiver for remote control item 3529 N4658N Green Switch: integrated control with movement
NT4654N - up to 16 activations or scenarios saved in the scenario NT4658N sensor, using a combination of passive infrared rays
L4654N module, item F420 and scenario programmer item L4658N and ultrasounds, and brightness sensor. Manual
MH200N - 2 modules switching on of the light using the front pushbutton,
and automatic switching off based on brightness level
and movement. Switch off delay and brightness sensor
IR REMOTE CONTROL threshold adjustable using the one/two-way
3529 device for the control of receivers (up to 16 (BMSO4003 and BMSO4001) remote control, physical
receivers within the same room) - possibility of or virtual configuration. 2 modules
direct selection of up to 16 channels - powered N4659N passive infrared sensor for the detection of movement
by four 1.5 V AAA batteries NT4659N and the lighting level. Coverage 5 m wide by 180° and
L4659N 9 m field depth at an installation height of 1.2 m.
Switch off delay and brightness sensor threshold
adjustable using the one/two-way (BMSO4003 and
BMSO4001) remote control, physical or virtual
configuration. 2 modules
Management of lighting level depending on the presence UP TO

of people and the level of natural light:
this means maximum visual comfort for the users, and a
big contribution to energy savings. In the service sector,
55%
SAVINGS
EN15193 standard
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Automation
BMSE1001 BMSE2001 BMSE2005
Item LIGHTING/MOVEMENT SENSORS Item LIGHTING/MOVEMENT SENSORS

BMSE1001 passive infrared BUS sensor, for the detection of BMSE2003 passive infrared BUS sensor, for the detection of
movement and light intensity, ceiling mounted movement and light intensity, wall or ceiling mounted
installation, protection index IP20, screw connection, installation, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45
6 m (28 m2) diameter coverage when installed connection, coverage 2 m wide by 30°, 9+9 m (36 m2)
at a 2.5 m height, maximum installation height field depth when installed at a 2.5 m height, max.
4 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS, absorption installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS,
10 mA, virtual or physical configuration adjustment absorption 12 mA, adjustment using one-two-way
installation, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45 BMSE2004 passive infrared BUS sensor, for the detection of
connection, coverage 2 m wide by 30°,12 m (24 m2) movement and light intensity, wall or ceiling mounted
field depth when installed at a 2.5 m height, max. installation, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45
installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS, connection, coverage 10 m wide by 140°, 27 m (210 m2)
absorption 12 mA, adjustment using one-two-way field depth when installed at a 2.5 m height, max.
remote control (BMSO4003 and BMSO4001), physical installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS,
or virtual configuration absorption 12 mA, adjustment using one-two-way
installation, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45 BMSE2005 double technology passive infrared and ultrasound
connection, coverage 11 m wide by 90°, 14 m (120 m2) BUS sensor, for the detection of movement and light
field depth when installed at a 2.5 m height, max. intensity, wall or ceiling mounted installation,
installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45 connection,
absorption 12 mA, adjustment using one-two-way coverage 14 m wide by 180°,7 m (77 m2) field depth
remote control(BMSO4003 and BMSO4001), physical when installed at a 2.5 m height, max. installation
or virtual configuration height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS, absorption
12 mA, adjustment using one-two-way remote control
(BMSO4003 and BMSO4001), physical or virtual
configuration
NOTE: for more information on remote controls BMSO4003 and BMSO4001 refer to the
Lighting Management Catalogue.
SENSOR QUICK SELECTION TABLE

Coverage at 2.5 m ø 6 m (28 m2) 2 x 12 m (24 m2) 11 x 14 m (120 m )
2
2 x 9+9 m (36 m )
2
10 x 27 m (210 m2) 14 x 7 m (77 m2)
Sensitivity (lux) 1 - 2000 1 - 2000 1 - 2000 1 - 2000 1 - 2000 1 - 2000
Switch off time delay 0 sec. – 255 hours 0 sec. – 255 hours 0 sec. – 255 hours 0 sec. – 255 hours 0 sec. – 255 hours 0 sec. – 255 hours
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
LN4671M2 L4678 3475
Item ACTUATORS AND FLUSH MOUNTED ACTUATORS/DIMMERS

actuator with 2 independent relays - for single, double, Example of use of actuator item LN4671M2 in the “local actuator
LN4671M2 and remote control” mode. Press the left key cover to control the
and mixed loads: 2 A resistive, 2 A for filament lamps,
500 W for motor reducers, 2 A cosϕ 0.5 for actuator to manage a lamp connected to the device. The right key
ferromagnetic transformers, and 70 W for fluorescent cover controls one or more remote actuators for different functions
lamps - logic relay interlock via the configuration. The (management of lights, shutters or scenarios).
device may also be configured to manage a remote
actuator – 2 modules Flush mounted actuators
L4671/1 1 relay actuator with control-key - for single load: 6 A
resistive or filament lamps, 2 A cosϕ 0.5 for
ferromagnetic transformers and 150 W fluorescent
lamps - to be completed with single or double function
2 module key cover
L4678 dimmer actuator for filament lamps and ferromagnetic
transformers - 60 - 300 VA, 230 Vac - to be completed
with single or double function 2 module key cover -
2 modules
BASIC MODULE ACT UATORS

incandescence lamps and 2 A cosϕ 0.5 for “Control“ key cover
ferromagnetic transformers – suitable for for remote actuator
installation in ceiling light cups or inside flush- management
mounted boxes, behind control devices
incandescence lamps and 2 A cosϕ 0.5 for “Actuator“
ferromagnetic transformers – input suitable for a key cover for
traditional NO contact pushbutton light management

Actuators Type
Energy saving LED lamps Linear fluorescent Compact fluorescent Electronic transformers Ferromagnetic Motor reducers for
incandescent and lamps 1) lamps transformers 2) shutters 3)
halogen lamps
LN4671M2 2A 70 W 0.3 A 70 W 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A

L4671/1 6A 150 W 0.65 A 150 W 0.65 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 -

L4678 0.25 - 1.30 A - - - - 0.25 - 1.30 A -

60 - 300 W - - - - 60 - 300 VA -
3475 2A 40 W - 40 W - 2 A cosφ 0.5 -

Notes:
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Automation

ferromagnetic transformers, and 4 A for fluorescent fluorescent lamps. At switch on, the contact of the
fluorescent lamps. At switch on, the contact of the – zero-crossing function - 4 DIN modules
- 6 DIN modules

Actuators Type
Energy saving
F411/1N 10 A 500 W 4A 500 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 -
F411/2 6A 250 W 1A 250 W 1A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A
F411/4 2A 70 W 0.3 A 70 W 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A
F411/1NC 10 A 500 W 4A 500 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 -
F411/2 NC 6A - 0.65 A - 0.65 A 1 A cosφ 0.5 -
1380 W - 150 W - 150 W 230 VA -
BMSW1001 16 A 2.1 A 10 X (2 X 36 W) 1150 W 16 A 16 A -
3680 W 500 VA 4.3 A 5A 3680 W 3680 W -
BMSW1002 16 A 2.1 A 10 X (2 X 36 W) 1150 W 16 A 16 A -
3680 W 500 VA 4.3 A 5A 3680 W 3680 W -
BMSW1003 16 A 2.1 A 10 X (2 X 36 W) 1150 W 16 A 16 A -
3680 W 500 VA 4.3 A 5A 3680 W 3680 W -
Notes:
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
F413N BMDI1001 F414 F415 F416U1 F417U2 F429

F413N 1 output dimmer for the powering of fluorescent lamps F417U2 multiload dimmer, 2 independent outputs with
or LED sources with 1 to 10 V input for single loads maximum load 1.7 A at 230 Vac, clamp and RJ45
up to 2.5 A at 230 Vac - screw connection - 27 Vdc connection, IP20 protection index, power supply
power supply - absorption 30 mA - possibility of 100/240 Vac 50/60 Hz, direct load control
connecting up to 10 ballasts (clamps 1-2) - with direct pushbutton - 6 DIN modules
load control pushbutton - DIN rail mounted version F429 DALI Dimmer, 8 independent outputs for the
– 2 modules connection of up to 16 DALI reactors for each output
load control pushbutton, DIN rail mounted version -
4 modules
F415 1 output dimmer for the powering of filament and
halogen lamps with electronic transformer - 27 Vdc
power supply - absorption 22 mA - with direct load
4 modules

Actuators Type
Energy saving
BMDI1001 4.3 A - 4.3 A 4.3 A - - -
1000 VA - 1000 VA 1000 VA - - -
F413N - - 2 A 460 W 4) - - - -
for LED
F414 0.25 - 4.3 A - - - - 0.25 - 4.3 A -
60 - 1000 VA - - - - 60 - 1000 VA -
F415 - - - - 0.25 - 1.7 A - -
- - - - 60 - 400 VA - -
F416U1 4.3 A - - - 4.3 A 4.3 A -
40 - 1000 W - - - 40 - 1000 W 40 - 1000 W -
F417U2 1.7 A - - - 1.7 A 1.7 A -
40 - 400 W - - - 40 - 400 W 40 - 400 W -
Notes:
MY HOME - BUS SCS
3485 N4601 3486 L4608 L4607/4
N4603/8 NT4607/4 NT4603/8 L4606
DIALLING DEVICE N4607/4* receiver for the arming/disarming of the system using
3485* POLYX ALARM central unit with system self-learning NT4607/4* the transponder badge item 3530S and item 3540 -
function, and display of the configuration on the L4607/4* pushbuttons for the control of 4 zones - zone status
supplied as standard N4603/8 module for the expansion of zones that may be divided
NT4603/8 - zones 5 to 8 control pushbuttons - LED zone status
display of the configuration on the screen. Controlled L4603/8
notifications - it can be coupled to the zone 1-4 divider
integrated PSTN and GSM telephone dialling device,
TiSecurity GSM application. Wall mounted using the KEYPAD CONNECTOR WITH DISPLAY
metal bracket supplied as standard, or flush mounted N4608* device fitted with display for arming or disarming the
inside MULTIBOX units. Battery powered, using battery NT4608* system using a numeric key, set and saved on the
item 3507/6 not supplied L4608* burglar-alarm central unit, item. 3485/B, item 3486 or
3483 coaxial extension cable for the central unit aerial, with transponder badge. If used with the flush
item 3486 - L = 3.5 metres mounted central unit, item L/N/NT4600/4, the code
or the transponder badge used are those saved in the
central unit during the programming of the keypad
3484** GSM aerial protection tamper - to ensure level 2 of CEI and badge connector devices. It can be used to display
79-2 standard, the tamper protection must be used all information, as well as to manage some functions,
of the central unit (division etc.). Installation inside
flush mounted boxes, item 506E, with front cover
plate. Powered by battery, item L4380/B, included
BURGLAR-ALARM CENTRAL UNIT - 6 modules - do not install with AIR cover plates
scenarios. Fitted with alarm notification actuator, as KEYPAD CONNECTOR
well as doors and windows protection NC contacts N4606* device for arming or disarming the system using a
connection terminal. Wall mounted using the metal NT4606* numeric key, set and saved on the burglar-alarm
bracket supplied as standard. Battery powered, using L4606* central unit, item 3485/B, item 3486 and item
battery item 3506, supplied L/N/NT/4601. If used with the flush mounted control
as above - flush mounted installation - battery unit, item L/N/NT4600/4, the code used is the one
N4601 saved on the central unit during the programming
NT4601 powered, using battery item L4380/B supplied -
6 modules - do not install with AIR cover plates procedure - 2 modules
L4601

MY HOME - BUS SCS

N4607 N4640 NT4610 3540 348220 L4605
N4610 NT4613
Item TRANSPONDER CONNECTOR Item BURGLAR-ALARM KIT

N4607* for arming and disarming the system using the MHKIT85N burglar-alarm expandable kit formed of:
NT4607* transponder (badge) saved in the display central unit. - 1 central unit item 3485B
L4607* If used with the flush mounted central unit, item - 2 IR sensors item N4640
L/N/NT4600/4, the transponder used is the one saved - 1 power supply item E46ADCN
in the central unit during the programming procedure - 1 external siren item 4072L
- LED system status notification - auxiliary channel - 1 magnetic contact item 3511
available for activations - 2 modules - various configurators
PASSIVE INFRARED DETECTORS

TRANSPONDER N4610* passive infrared volumetric presence detector with
3530S* slim line portable badge NT4610* adjustable sensitivity level (range: 3-9 metres)
- alarm LED with memory – 105° angular opening,
r
nde
L4610*
spo
tran
14 bands over 3 floors – auxiliary pre-alarm channel

TY
EC URI
H S
HIG

3540* key-ring portable badge
N4611* volumetric presence detector as above - angular
NT4611* opening that can be divided from 105° to 0° - lens
L4611* adjustable on 2 axis
N4611B passive infrared volumetric presence detector with

NT4611B fixed sensitivity level (range: 6 metres) - alarm LED
REMOTE CONTROL with memory - 105° angular opening, 14 bands over
L4611B
348220 radio remote control with built-in transponder, with 3 floors - only for burglar alarm functions - 2 modules
two pushbuttons, for arming or disarming of the
system. Max. distance 50 m without obstructions.
Powered by a 3 V CR2032 type battery - to be used
with radio receiver, item L/N/NT4618
IR PASSIVE MINI-DETECTORS
N4640 passive infrared volumetric presence detector with
adjustable sensitivity (range: 3-9 metres) -
KEY DISCONNECTOR alarm LED with memory - 105° angular opening,
N4605 module to switch the system off and block it 14 bands over 3 floors - 3 level sensitivity adjustment
NT4605 by means of a mechanical key - LED system through the configuration – possibility of activating
L4605 status notification – fitted with keyhole the auxiliary pre-alarm channel – wall mounted, tilted
cover – key with 10,000 combinations - and corner, installation
2 modules detector as above - preset sensitivity level (range:
N4640B
6 metres) - only for burglar alarm functions
EXTENDED 4 PLUS GUARANTEE

3549 BTicino 4 PLUS Guarantee package – extended
program guarantee that offers the following DOUBLE-TECHNOLOGY DETECTORS
advantages for the installer: - free start up by the N4613 double-technology volumetric presence detector made
BTicino Technical After-Sales Service Centre - aftersales NT4613 up of two sensors: one infrared to detect warm bodies
assistance supplied by BTicino Technical L4613 (IR) and one with microwaves to detect movement
After-Sales Service Centres – all interventions free of (MW). The alarm is only triggered when both detection
charge during the 2 year guarantee period, and subject technologies activate. - 2 modules
to fixed fee for the following 2 years - the guarantee

MY HOME - BUS SCS
3480 F482 3514
3510M
3518

3480* interface module for two NC/NO electromagnetic 3514 detector for the protection of shutters or rolling
contact lines - possibility of connecting a balanced and shutters
unbalanced contact protection line – alarm indication
LED with tripping memory – auxiliary pre-alarm
channel that can be activated - basic module
F482* as above - for the management of two NC WINDOW-BREAKING DETECTOR
electromagnetic contact lines and rope sensors for
shutters - 2 DIN 3516 piezoelectric window-breaking detector. Installation
by means of double-sided adhesive tape, supplied.
NOTE: The item 3480 device is also preset the management of “technical alarms” in general. Protection of windows with 3 metre maximum
diagonal opening
IR BARRIERS
CONTACT INTERFACE MODULE WITH 12 VOLT OUTPUT Active infrared barriers for the protection of windows and doors.
3480V12 contact interface module with 12V output to connect to The device consists of 2 columns, one operates as TRANSMITTER
the system a mechanical rope sensor for shutters (item (TX), the other as RECEIVER (RX). When several IR beams are
3514) or similar, or a contact normally closed or opened broken, the alarm is immediately triggered.
and one IR barrier for windows - basic module 3518 window barrier - 1 metre - 4 beams
F482V12 as above - for the management of two contacts - 2 DIN

MAGNETIC CONTACTS


floor installation
metal surfaces

MY HOME - BUS SCS

N4511/12 3440 NT4511/12 3482 L4512/12
N4618 3442 3448 L4919
Item RELAY ACTUATOR MODULE Item RADIO MAGNETIC AND GLASS BREAKING DETECTOR
3479 multiple configuration actuator module with relay 3442 magnetic opening detector for doors and windows -
output – NO-NC, 24 V 0.4 A cosϕ 0,4 contacts – to it can be connected to additional magnetic wire
be use for the repetition of several types of alarms contacts (items 3510, 3511 and 3513) - powered by
depending on the configuration. It may be activated one 3.6 V 1/2 AA battery, included
by: burglar alarms, exhausted battery signals, valve 3444 glass piezoelectric detector - protection of windows
closing due to technical alarms – basic module with 3-metre maximum diagonal opening - powered
F481 as above - 2 DIN by one 1/2 AA 3.6 V battery, included
CABLE DETECTOR FOR SHUTTERS

3445 detector for the protection of shutters or
similar winding shutters, consisting of a cable
TECHNICAL ALARM INTERFACE detector and radio transmitter - possibility of also
3481 interface module for the reception of alarm signals controlling an opening magnet (included) for
from technical alarm sensors like gas detectors, perimeter control - powered by one 1/2 AA 3.6 V
L/N/NT4511/12 and L/N/NT4512/12 – 5-12 Vac/dc battery, included
opto-insulated input – basic module
F483 as above - for the management of two contacts - 2 DIN
REMOTE CONTROL FOR REMOTE ASSISTANCE
3448 radio remote control for sending remote assistance
notifications - it can be programmed automatically
using the HC/NT4618 radio receiver - powered by a
NATURAL GAS DETECTORS 3 V CR2032 type battery, included - battery life 2 years
N4511/12 NATURAL GAS detector with visual and sound (85 dB)
NT4511/12 alarm notification - internal self-diagnosis - preset
L4511/12 for the control of signal repeaters - powered by a
12 Vac/dc transformer, item L/N/NT4541 or item RADIO FLOOD DETECTORS
F91/12E - 2 modules detector with sensor, for detecting flooding
L4619
caused by any type of liquids - powered by a
3 V CR2032 type battery, included. To be
LPG DETECTORS furnished with front cover plate and
LPG GAS detector with visual and sound (85 dB) alarm key covers and item L/N/NT4919 - 2 modules
N4512/12
NT4512/12 notification - internal self-diagnosis - preset for the
L4512/12 control of signal repeaters - powered by a 12 Vac/dc
transformer, item L/N/NT4541 or item F91/12E - PAIR OF KEY COVERS
2 modules N4919 for flood detector, item L4619
NT4919
L4919
RADIO RECEIVER FOR COMBINED WIRE-RADIO SYSTEM
N4618 radio receiver module to be used as interface between
NT4618 the wire burglaralarm and the radio sensors, for the FLOOD SENSOR
L4618 installation of combined wire-radio systems – it can
also be used for remote assistance functions, together 3482 water detection sensor - to be used together with
with remote control item 3448 and radio sensors - the contact interface, item 3480, in technical alarm
2 modules mode
PASSIVE INFRARED RADIO DETECTOR

3440 passive infrared volumetric presence detector - alarm
LED with memory – 12-metre range, 90° angular
opening, 17 bands over 4 floors – possibility of pulse
counter function activation - powered by 1 AA 3.6 V
battery, included
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Burglar alarm - Technical alarms - Management devices with IR remote control
4072L N4600/4 NT4070 L4604 L4600/4
N4603/4 3505/12 N4604 4050
Item EXTERNAL SIREN WITH SYSTEM BATTERY Item 4-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT
4072L* external siren including the self-supply battery for the N4600/4 compact system central unit - it enables system
whole system - sound notification can be set from NT4600/4 arming/disarming, 4-zone control, programming of
0 to 10 minutes by means of the central unit - to be L4600/4 up 30 remote controls, system test completion, and
fitted with a 12 V 12 Ah battery, item 3505/12 - sound management of alarms, including their notifications
intensity 105 dB (A) at 3 metres - light signaller with and memory - possibility of setting alarm times and
xenon lamp - anti-foam grid - protected against tripping delays of zone 1 - 3 modules
item E46ADCN
ZONE 1-4 DIVIDER

BATTERY FOR EXTERNAL SIREN ITEM 4072L receiver for the arming/disarming of the system using
N4603/4
3505/12 12 V 12 Ah battery NT4603/4 the IR remote control, item 4050 - pushbuttons for
L4603/4 the control of 4 zones - zone status and system status
LED notifications - possibility of disabling visual and
sound notifications. Only for use with central units
item 3486 and item L/N/NT4600/4 - 2 modules
OPTIONAL EXTERNAL SIREN
4072A* self-powered external siren - sound notification can
be set from 0 to 10 minutes by means of the control CONNECTOR
unit - to be fitted with a 12 V 7 Ah battery - sound
intensity 105 dB (A) at 3 metres - light signaller with N4604 receiver for the arming/disarming of the system using
xenon lamp - anti-foam grid - protected against NT4604 the remote control, item 4050 - LED system status
tearing and opening - to be used with power supply L4604 notification - possibility of disabling visual and sound
item E47ADCN notifications - possibility of setting the activation of
fixed system zones - auxiliary channel available for
NOTE: the external sirens do not include configurators. These may be purchased separately following the
procedure explained in the “Devices and common accessories” page.
activation of access controls (electric locks). Only for
use with central units item 3486 and item
L/N/NT4600/4 - 2 modules
INTERNAL SIREN
N4070* self-supplied internal siren for installation inside 506E
NT4070* boxes - to be fitted with a 6 V 0.5 Ah battery, item REMOTE CONTROL
4070* 3507/6 - sound intensity 90 dB (A) at 3 metres -
protected against tearing and tampering 4050 portable infrared remote control for system arming/
disarming - it can be automatically coded from the
NOTE: the external sirens do not include configurators.These may be purchased separately following the
procedure explained in the “Devices and common accessories” page.
central unit - powered by two CR1616 3 V lithium
batteries, included - battery operation time
50,000 operations
BATTERIES
3507/6 6 V battery for internal siren item N/NT/L4070
3506 7.2 V battery for central unit, item 3485/B
L4380/B 6 V spare battery for central unit, item L/N/NT4601

and connector, item L/N/NT4608
TAMPER
L4630 anti-tamper device for the protection of burglar-alarm
mounted box

MY HOME - BUS SCS

Temperature control
N4695 N4693 NT4695 NT4692FAN L4695 L4693
N4692 N4891 3550 NT4692 NT4685 3456
Item 4-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT Item RADIO TEMPERATURE SENSOR

N4695 central unit for the management of a temperature 3455 radio sensor for the measurement of external
NT4695 control system with up to 4 zones - the product also temperature - use with appropriate receiving radio
L4695 includes the TiThermo Basic for programming from interface, item L/N/NT4577 - solar cell or battery
PC - 3 modules powered - IP65 wall mounted enclosure
99-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT SENSOR RECEIVING RADIO INTERFACES

3550 central unit for the management of a temperature N4577 temperature radio sensor receiving radio interface,
control system with up to 99 zones - the product also NT4577 item 3455 - 27 Vdc power supply from BUS
includes the TiThermo Basic for programming from L4577 - 2 modules
PC - wall mounted installation or in MULTIBOX
enclosures
ACTUATORS
BATTERY F430/2 2 independent relay actuator – for single and double
loads: 6 A resistive, 3 A motor valves and pumps -
3507/6 6 V 0.5 Ah temperature control central unit battery logic relay interlock via configuration - 2 DIN modules
F430/4 4 independent relay actuator - for single, double and
combined loads: 6 A resistive, 3 A motor valves,
configuration - 2 DIN modules
LOCAL DISPLAY
N4891 1.2” OLED Touch Screen for the simultaneous
NT4891 management of max. 4 functions: Sound System,
L4891 Temperature Control, Consumption Display, Load CONTACT INTERFACE MODULE
Management, Scenarios - 2 modules - it replaces item 3480 door and window electric contact interface module
L/N/NT4685 for switching on the connected zone - basic enclosure
EXTERNAL SENSOR
F482 as above - 2 DIN module enclosure
3457 Local Display external sensor
SENSORS
SPLITTER MANAGEMENT INTERFACE
N4693 room temperature control sensor for heating and
NT4693 cooling systems - temperature measurement range 3456 air conditioning unit interface with IR emitter
L4693 3 - 40 °C - 2 modules for the repetition and play back of IR air
conditioning unit remote control signals. It can
be controlled using Touch Screen and
Multimedia Touch Screen. Basic mechanism,
KNOB SENSORS to facilitate installation behind the air
conditioning unit. IR cable length 2 m, power
N4692 room temperature control sensor for heating and supply from the 27 V bus
NT4692 cooling systems with knob for +/- 3 °C manual
L4692 adjustment of the temperature set in the unit and for
OFF and antifreeze mode selection - 2 modules
FAN COIL KNOB SENSORS

N4692FAN room temperature control sensor for heating and
NT4692FAN cooling systems with knob for +/- 3 °C manual
L4692FAN adjustment of the temperature set in the unit and for
OFF and antifreeze mode selection, with manual/
automatic fan-coil Hydro-relax system speed selection
- 2 modules
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Energy Management
N4672N NT4672N L4673 L4672N
3508BUS 3523 3522
F521 F522 F523 F524
Item CONSUMPTION DISPLAY Item LOAD CONTROL MANAGEMENT

F520 device for the measurement of electric power on N4672N 1 relay actuator – 10 A for incandescent lamps 4 A for
a maximum of three lines, made possible by NT4672N fluorescent lamps or ferromagnetic transformers and
connecting three toroids to the appropriate inputs. L4672N 500 W for LED lamps and compact fluorescent lamps
The collected and processed data can be displayed for Load Control Management and/or Automation
on Touch Screen or Multimedia Touch Screen. DIN rail functions. Forced load operation pushbutton - flush
mounting version - 1 module The device is supplied mounted version – 2 modules
with 1 toroid N4673 panel for the display and the control of the loads
3523 additional toroids for the bus meter with three inputs NT4673 connected to the actuators
for toroids, item F520, and actuator with sensor, item L4673
f522, for the measurement of the earth leakage
from the meters (water, gas, etc.) with pulse ACCESSORIES
output. The values measured can be displayed on 3508BUS plug-in clamp for BUS connection - width 3.81 mm
Touch Screen or Multimedia Touch Screen. Basic
module version, for hidden installation. Power
3508U2 2 pole plug-in clamp
LOAD CONTROL MANAGEMENT
load control system actuators, to prevent the risk of 3508U3 3 pole plug-in clamp
electricity provider. The central unit manages up to
63 loads maximum, with a contract power of 1.5 to 18
It includes a bus meter with 3 inputs for toroids for the
controlled line. DIN rail mounting version - 1 module SYSTEM DIAGRAM FOR THE DISPLAY OF THE ENERGY PRODUCED AND CONSUMED,
The device is supplied with 1 toroid AND LOAD MANAGEMENT
F522 actuator with integrated current sensor for controlled Photovoltaic Solar thermal panels
load consumption module. 1 relay – 10 A for panels
incandescent lamps and 4 A for fluorescent lamps or
ferromagnetic transformers and 500 W for LED lamps
and compact fluorescent lamps - Bistable relay with
zero crossing for load control Management and/or
Automation functions. DIN rail mounting version
- 1 module. Earth leakage current control made
possible by connecting an additional toroid, item 3523
F523 1 relay actuator – for incandescent lamps, 4 A for
fluorescent lamps or ferromagnetic transformers, and
500 W for LED lamps and compact fluorescent lamps
– Bistable relay with zero crossing for load control Electricity
Management and/or Automation functions. DIN rail meter
mounting version - 1 module
F524 device for the central management of energy
consumption data from a maximum of 10 lines Pulse
(detected using a bus meter with toroids, F520, load counter
control unit, F521, or pulse counter interfaces, 3522). interface
BUS
The data can be displayed using appropriate integrated
web pages, connecting the device to a LAN network 2
through the Ethernet port. It gives the possibility of
configuring several tariffs, and to download the
data. The device features microSD housing for the
backup of the recorded data. DIN rail mounting version
- 1 module - Power supply from 27 V BUS
Actuator Load control

(*) : devices with level 2 IMG certification according to CEI79-2. central unit
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Sound system
F441 346030 F500N F441M L4561N L4560 L4563
L4651M2
Item AUDIO /VIDEO MIXERS Item KNOB CONTROLS

346030 compact 2 wire power supply with integrated video N4563 flush mounted knob operated device for ON/OFF,
adapter. For base sound systems with one installable NT4563 volume control, programmed radio station and CD
sound source only - 2 DIN modules L4563 track change - 2 modules
346830 video adapter for base sound systems - only one sound
source can be installed - 2 DIN modules - electric power
supply by means of item 346000
LOCAL DISPLAY
F441 audio/video node for audio source mixing (4 sources 1.2” OLED Touch Screen for the simultaneous
maximum) towards 4 outputs - 6 DIN modules - fitted N4891
NT4891 management of max. 4 functions: Sound System,
SC
S
with DIN rail depth compensator Temperature Control, Consumption Display, Load
L4891
F441M multichannel matrix with cross connecting Management, Scenarios - 2 modules -
functions, switch mixing and shunting (switch mix it replaces item L/N/NT4685
and shunt) for the distribution of both stereo sound
source signals and audio/video signals of the 2–wire
intercom/video system - 8 inputs (the first 4 for the
intercom/video 2 wire system, and the next 4 for
stereo sound sources), and 8 outputs - 10 DIN
modules - including DIN rail depth compensator
SOUND SOURCES
stations, display of RDS messages and tuned frequency.
Possibility of using the built-in wire antenna, or an BASIC STEREO SYSTEM DIAGRAM WITH ONE SOUND SOURCE
with MCX-F adapter (supplied). 4 DIN modules, DIN rail Loudspeaker Loudspeaker
N4560 flush mounted RCA input - to be used to control a
NT4560 stereo source - 2 modules
L4560
infrared remote control - programmed using the PC - Amplifier Amplifier
the IR transmitter BUS - Cable 336904 2
3495 source insulator for the adaptation of an audio signal
Line terminator
from external sound sources, to preserve the SELV Compact power
characteristics of the BUS. To be used when the sound supply 346030
terminals, split between “IN” (for the connection of
the external sound source) and “OUT” (to be connected Sound sources
to the RCA input item L/N/NT4560
BUS - Cable 336904

CONTROLS
L4651M2 special amplifier management control to be completed
with key covers, for the management of ON/OFF
functions, volume control, change of source and Radio tuner Stereo control RCA input
change of programmed radio station - 2 modules F500N L4561N
MY HOME - BUS SCS
Sound system
L4562 F502 F503 336982 336984 336983
N4575N N4654N N4565 3529 L4566 L4566/10 L4568

N4575SB
H4570 L4567 L4569 L4668BUS/35 3499 346841 346851 346850
Item AMPLIFIERS Item FALSE CEILING LOUDSPEAKERS

L4562 flush mounted amplifier - to be completed with L4566 8 Ω false ceiling 2-way loudspeaker, L = 240 mm
key covers - connection to BUS SCS system and stereo - power 100 W - colour white
loudspeakers - functions: ON/OFF loudspeakers,
station or CD track change – 2 modules L4566/10 8 Ω false ceiling and plasterboard loudspeaker,
stereo amplifier – terminal for system L = 100 mm - power 20 W - colour white
F502
power supply 100 - 240 Vac - 4 DIN modules
L4568 8 Ω loudspeaker with the same size as a standard false
F503 stereo amplifier for accurate reproduction of the ceiling panel (60x60 cm), for installation on false
sound signal, both from the SCS/BUS and, in ceilings - 50 W power - colour white
alternative, from the AUX input (MP3 or CD player,
etc.). Wide range of high and low tone adjustments
available, 10 preset equalisation levels + 10 CONNECTORS FOR INTERFACING THE BUS CABLE TO SOUND
customisable levels, virtual surround, and more. SYSTEM DEVICES
Each parameter can be displayed on the OLED 8-contact connector for the connection of items F500N,
graphic display. All the adjustments are performed 336982
336984 L4561N and 3465 to the BUS (connect PINS 5 and 6)
using the keys of the amplifier, or remotely using
Touch Screen devices - 10 DIN modules 336983
LINE TERMINATOR
FLUSH MOUNTED LOUDSPEAKERS node outputs
N4565 16 Ω flush mounted loudspeaker for 506E and PB526
NT4565 boxes - power 12 W
L4565
INTEGRATION AND EXPANSION DEVICES
H4570 8 Ω flush mounted 2-way loudspeaker for 4 module 346841 floor distribution block, to be used with the audio/
MULTIBOX boxes item 16104 - power 100 W video node, item F441 and the DIN rail amplifiers,
item F502 and F503, for complete saturation of one
audio/video node output
WALL MOUNTED LOUDSPEAKERS - 4 DIN modules
L4567 8 Ω wall mounted 2-way slim line loudspeaker, apartment interface for connection to an independent
D=37 mm - power 40 W - colour white 346850
building complex video door entry system riser
integrated with MY HOME applications (Sound system,
L4569 8 Ω outdoor 2-way loudspeaker, IPx4, with adjustable Automation, etc.) – 4 DIN modules
inclination fixing brackets - power 140 W - colour black
ACTIVE INFRARED RECEIVERS

N4654N remote control receiver for remote control - up to 16
PATCH CORD NT4654N activations or scenarios saved in the scenario module,
L4654N item F420 - 2 modules
Type Length (cm)
BUS-BUS 60 REMOTE CONTROLS
L4668BUS/60
1.5 V AAA batteries
MY HOME - BUS SCS

E46ADCN E47ADCN 335919 3559 3545

E47/12

E47ADCN* power supply as above 230 Vac - installation on DIN rail 335919 cable for the connection to the PC for the
with 8 module space requirement for wall mounted programming of the Automation, Burglar Alarm,
E49 compact power supply for Temperature control, Energy
Management and Automation systems - input 230 Vac,
output 27 Vdc - maximum power delivered 600 mA - ADAPTERS
2 DIN modules F80AL adapter for the installation of 2 LIVINGLIGHT modules
346000 power supply for Video door entry system and Sound on DIN 35 rail
system. Power supply: 230 Vac @ 50-60 Hz. Maximum
(without fuse) against short-circuit and overload. F400A as above - 3 modules
integrated fuse (not replaceable). Double insulation VOUCHER FOR TECHNICAL AFTER SALES SERVICE
SELV device “Booklet” of 5 vouchers for visits by a CAT technician to
3545
346030 2 DIN module compact power supply for Video door service My Home, Video door entry, Telephony, Light
entry system and Sound system. Maximum power signalling and CCTV systems
System Power supply

E46ADCN E47ADCN E47/12 E49 346000 346020
Automation • •
Burglar alarm • (1) • (2) • (3)

(3): for sensors with 12 Vdc power supply (ex. IR barriers)
MY HOME - BUS SCS
3501/0 3501/1 3501/2 3501/3 3501/4
3501/GEN 3501/GR 3501/AMB 3501/AUX

L4669
L4669/500
L4669HF 336904 502PA
3501/PUL 3501/SLA 3501/CEN 3501/T
WALL MOUNTED BOXES FOR POWER SUPPLY AND BATTERY -

Item BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM Item VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION KIT
power supply item E47ADCN using a PC and the VIRTUAL CONFIGURATOR
software, supplied as standard on CD, and Secure Digit
(SD) memory card. It replaces item 3503N.
with anti-tamper device – 2 modules – complete
ANGULAR BOX
with antitamper device – 2 modules – complete with 3501/7 configurator 7
frame and white cover plate (LB)
complies with standards CEI 46-5 and CEI 20-20 - 3501/AMB configurator AMB
coil length 100 metres
336904 specific cable with 2 twisted conductors. It can be 3501/CEN configurator CEN
➝ ➝
➝

➝

CONFIGURATOR KIT
System Cable 3501K kit of configurators from 0 to 9
L4669 L4669S 336904
L4669/500
L4669HF

➝
➝
➝
➝
Burglar alarm
Sound system •
•
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Key covers for MY HOME controls
1 FUNCTION KEY COVERS
NEUTRAL LIGHTABLE KEY COVERS

1 module 2 modules
Description Item Item
NEUTRAL KEY COVER WITH NT4915N NT4915M2N
LIGHTABLE BOTTOM SECTION L4915N L4915M2N N4915LN NT4915N L4915N
HIGH BRIGHTNESS COVER N4915LN N4915M2LN
KEY COVERS WITH DIFFUSER AND LIGHTABLE SYMBOL

1 module 2 modules
N4915AN N4915M2AN
KEY COVER WITH NT4915AN NT4915BN NT4915DN
NT4915AN NT4915M2AN
LIGHT SYMBOL
L4915AN L4915M2AN
N4915BN N4915M2BN
KEY COVER WITH NT4915BN NT4915M2BN
STAIRCASE LIGHT SYMBOL
L4915BN L4915M2BN
N4915DN N4915M2DN NT4915FN NT4915M2ADN
KEY COVER WITH NT4915DN NT4915M2DN
BELL SYMBOL
L4915DN L4915M2DN
N4915FN N4915M2FN
KEY COVER WITH NT4915FN NT4915M2FN
KEY SYMBOL
L4915FN L4915M2FN
N4915M2ADN NT4915DD NT4915MR
KEY COVER WITH NT4915M2ADN
DIMMER SYMBOL
L4915M2ADN
N4915DD
KEY COVER WITH NT4915DD
“DO NOT DISTURB” SYMBOL
L4915DD
N4915MR
KEY COVER WITH NT4915MR
“REARRANGE THE ROOM” SYMBOL
L4915MR
MY HOME - BUS SCS
2 FUNCTION KEY COVERS
NEUTRAL LIGHTABLE KEY COVERS

1 module 2 modules
NEUTRAL KEY COVER WITH N4911N N4911M2N
LIGHTABLE TOP AND BOTTOM NT4911N NT4911M2N N4911N NT4911N L4911N
SECTION L4911N L4911M2N
KEY COVERS WITH 2 DIFFUSERS AND LIGHTABLE SYMBOLS

1 module 2 modules
N4911AFN N4911M2AFN
KEY COVER WITH LIGHT ON-OFF NT4911AFN NT4911AGN NT4911AHN
SYMBOL AND “GEN” SCREEN NT4911AFN NT4911M2AFN
PRINTING
L4911AFN L4911M2AFN
N4911AGN N4911M2AGN
KEY COVER WITH NT4911AGN NT4911M2AGN
ON OFF SYMBOLS
L4911AGN L4911M2AGN
N4911AHN N4911M2AHN NT4911AIN NT4911BFN
KEY COVER WITH NT4911AHN NT4911M2AHN
UP DOWN SYMBOLS
L4911AHN L4911M2AHN
N4911ADN
KEY COVER WITH SYMBOLS
+ TOP AND NT4911ADN
- BOTTOM
L4911ADN
NT4911ADN
N4911AIN N4911M2AIN
KEY COVER WITH SYMBOLS
ADJUSTMENT OFF NT4911AIN NT4911M2AIN
ADJUSTMENT ON
L4911AIN L4911M2AIN
N4911BFN
KEY COVER WITH CHANGE SOURCE NT4911BFN
AND CHANGE TRACK SYMBOLS
L4911BFN

MY HOME - BUS SCS

KEY COVERS THAT CAN BE CUSTOMISED WITH DIFFUSERS, AVAILABLE IN KIT
KEY COVERS THAT CAN BE CUSTOMISED 1 FUNCTION 2 FUNCTIONS

1 module 2 modules
1 FUNCTION KEY COVER N4915TN N4915M2TN
THAT CAN BE CUSTOMISED NT4915TN NT4915M2TN
WITH 1 DIFFUSER* L4915TN L4915M2TN
can be customised can be customised
2 FUNCTION KEY COVER N4911TN N4911M2TN with 1 diffuser with 2 diffusers
THAT CAN BE CUSTOMISED NT4911TN NT4911M2TN
WITH 2 DIFFUSERS* L4911TN L4911M2TN
KIT OF DIFFUSERS
Description Item
KIT COMPOSITION AS N4915KIT
SHOWN ON THE SIDE NT4915KIT
(5 DIFFUSERS EACH TYPE) L4915KIT
KIT OF DIFFUSERS
Description Item
KIT COMPOSITION AS N4915KIT1
SHOWN ON THE SIDE NT4915KIT1
(5 DIFFUSERS EACH TYPE) L4915KIT1
KIT OF DIFFUSERS
Description Item
N4915SETBL
KIT WITH DIFFUSER SHOWN ON
NT4915SETBL
THE SIDE (50 DIFFUSERS)
L4915SETBL
MY HOME
F558 F551 L4665L20 NT4279C6A NT4202D NT4210D
Item CONNECTOR FOR VERTICAL PATCHING Item CAT. 6 CABLES

F550C6 cat. 6 module for the patching of the wiring inside the category 6 U/UTP unshielded cable with 24 AWG (0.51) solid
star centre cabinet. Reversible connectors for the copper conductors, with polyolefin insulation, 4 pair of twisted
connection of cables to the user sockets from the top conductors with internal partition - performance 500 MHz - in
or from the floor - 1 DIN module accordance with ISO/IEC 11801 and 2.0, EN 50173-1 and EIA/TIA
568 B2.10 standards - blue
Cable sheath Length Packaging
DIGITAL SIGNAL DEVICES 32754 LSZH 305m coil
F551 10/100 Mbs switch - 5 ports for the distribution of
1 LAN line to 4 lines. Several switches can be added 32871 LSZH 1000m coil
to setup more lines - 4 DIN modules 32872 PVC 1000m coil
TELEPHONE SIGNAL DEVICES RJ45 CONNECTORS

F558 xDSL filter with 3 way telephone distribution frame N4279C6A RJ45 connectors fitted with metal screen,
for the separation of the ADSL data line from the NT4279C6A identification plate, and dust cover - 1 module
telephone line. Possibility of connection to an 8 output L4279C6A
telephone distribution frame, item F555, to increase
the number of lines - 2 DIN modules
F555 8 output telephone distribution frame to distribute
1 telephone line to 8 different sockets, or 2 telephone TELEVISION SIGNAL CONNECTOR
lines to 4 sockets. Possibility of connection to several N4202D direct (shunted) coaxial socket for single-user antenna
distribution frames to increase the number of lines - NT4202D systems, including remotely powered and centralised
4 DIN modules L4202D systems, and single use and centralised satellite
systems with feed-through current and signal for
channel selection - shielded connection clamps with
captive screws - diam. 9.5 mm - male connector -
TELEVISION SIGNAL DEVICES 1 module
F553 universal TV/SAT distribution frame (5–2400 MHz)
for the distribution of the signal to 6 separate TV
sockets. F type connection clamps - 4 DIN modules
TV CONNECTOR F TYPE
N4269F TV coaxial connector F type - impedance 75 Ohm -
NT4269F screw connection - 1 module
ACCESSORIES L4269F
F552 9 V 1.6 A power supply for the power supply to the
switch, item F551 - 1.5 DIN modules
TV + RD + SAT CONNECTOR
L4665L20 FLAT type patch cord with RJ45 connectors - category N4210D direct (shunted) coaxial socket for single-user TV
6 - PVC cable sheath - with built in SNAGGLE - in NT4210D antenna systems, including remotely powered and
accordance with EN 50173-1 and EIA/TIA 568 A/B L4210D centralised shunted systems, and single use and
standards - length 20 cm centralised shunted satellite systems with
L4665L40 patch cord as above - length 40 cm feed-through current and signal for channel selection,
and radio systems - male 9.5 mm diam. TV connector
- 9.5 mm diam. female radio and SAT connector - for
installation inside rectangular box, item 503E, item
L4664 telephone cable, with RJ45 and RJ11 connectors, 504E, item 506L- 2 modules
for the connection of telephone devices with RJ11
connector to devices with RJ45 connector - length
200 cm DEMIXED TV +SAT CONNECTOR
N4214D demixed direct (shunted) coaxial socket for single-user
NT4214D HS4214D TV antenna systems, including remotely
L4214D powered and centralised shunted systems, single
use and centralised shunted satellite systems with
feed-through current and signal for channel selection
- male 9.5 mm diam. TV connector - SAT connector
F type- 1 module

HOTEL OFFER RANGE

This page lists the devices specifically intended for hotel room services. The BTicino hotel
room offer range, and in more general terms for the hotel sector, includes however many
more devices that are also used in other sectors, and are therefore listed in various sections
throughout this catalogue. Some of them are, for example:
- comfort devices = light, curtain, and scenario controls with dedicated symbols. Also,
thermostats, and temperature probes with knobs
- audio and video devices = connectors for every need, and sound signalling devices
- safety devices = step lights, and emergency lamps
LN4549 L4177 NT4915TN N4915SETBL N4373H NT4915DD NT4915MR
N4547 N4033
Item BADGE-HOLDER POCKET Item LAMPHOLDER FOR OFF-DOOR SIGNALLING

LN4549 badge holder pocket for the power supply inside the N4373H off-door lampholder with double optical signalling:
hotel room - slot light with built-in lamp - 30 second NT4373H do not disturb and rearrange the room – use 2 LEDs
switch-off delay - power supply 230 Vac - 2 modules L4373H item LN4742V12T (12 V)
LN4548 badge holder pocket for the power supply inside the
hotel room with RFID technology recognition - slot
light with built-in lamp - 30 second switch-off delay KEY COVER THAT CAN BE CUSTOMISED AND KIT OF DIFFUSERS
- power supply 230 Vac - 2 modules - to be N4915TN key cover for rocker control devices
completed with front cover in the desired look NT4915TN that can be customised with lightable diffuser
L4915TN
N4915SETBL kit of 50 lightable diffusers with bed light symbol

NT4915SETBL
MY HOME SYSTEM BADGE-HOLDER POCKETS L4915SETBL
LN4649 badge holder pockets for the power supply inside the
hotel room - slot light with built-in lamp - 30 second
switch-off delay - SCS bus connection - 2 modules
- to be completed with front cover in the desired look SHAVER SOCKETS
N4177* shaver socket with insulation transformer
LN4648 badge holder pockets for the power supply inside the - input voltage 230 Vac @ 50/60 Hz - output voltage
hotel room with RFID technology recognition NT4177 *
L4177* 115/230 Vac 20 VA
- slot light with built-in lamp - 30 second switch-off
delay - SCS bus connection - 2 modules - to be
completed with front cover in the desired look * Note: in case of installation using AIR cover plates, the box extension must be used to make
wiring easier
CORD PUSHBUTTONS
N4033 cord pushbutton 1 P NO 10 A for bathroom alarm
FRONT COVERS FOR BADGE-HOLDER POCKETS NT4033
N4547 front cover for traditional or My Home badge-holder L4033
NT4547 pocket
L4547
KEY COVERS WITH SYMBOLS

N4915DD key cover for rocker control devices with
NT4915DD “do not disturb“ symbol
L4915DD
N4915MR key cover for rocker control devices with

NT4915MR “rearrange the room“ symbol
L4915MR
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM AND VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM
Video display and cameras
344401 344413 344411 344412 391658 391659 391647
Item VIDEO DISPLAY Item 2 WIRE INDOOR CAMERAS

344400 2 wire handsfree video handset for flush mounted 391658 flush mounted colour camera. 3.7 mm fixed optics,
installation. With 2.5” colour LCD display with PC 391659 1/3” CCD, 380 horizontal lines resolution. With
customisable OSD navigation icon menu for the 391657 microphone. The device must be configured by
management of the following MY HOME applications: connecting physical configurators - 2 modules
video door entry system, temperature control,
sound system, automation (scenarios), and burglar
alarm. Keys available: navigation, auto-switch on,
door lock release, and handsfree connection LED
signalling for: bell exclusion, door status and COAX INDOOR CAMERAS
connection. Firmware update/programming USB port. 391648 camera as above - with video signal output in
Suitable for flush mounted installation using item 391649 coaxial cable - power supply 12 Vdc - 120 mA (max)
506E boxes. To be completed with the front covers 391647
and front cover plates. It can be configured
using physical configurators, or using the
programming and configuration software supplied
344401 as above - for installation with “AIR“ cover plates
344413 front cover

344411
344412
Video display
LIVINGLIGHT AIR version
Example of assembled Video Display

including the cover plate
Video display
LIVINGLIGHT version
Anthracite
front cover
Tech front
cover
White front
cover
Cover plate
Cover plate
Cover plate
CONTENTS
MàTIX catalogue

Màtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

F422 AM4890 F422 F429
Item TOUCH SCREEN Item TOUCH SCREEN VIDEO

AM4890 3.5” colour Touch Screen for the management of the H4687 flush-mounted panel PC with 15” Touch Screen display
following functions: Automation, Lighting, Burglar to control the MY HOME system by means of MHVisual
22°C alarm, Temperature control, Sound system, Scenarios, software
Load management and Consumption display.
Front USB connector for configuration.
Device set up for programming with Open Web Net
protocol language. It replaces item AM5864 MHVISUAL SOFTWARE
MHVISUAL control & management software for the Lighting,
Automation, Burglar alarm, Temperature control,
Sound system, Scenarios, Energy management and
IP TOUCH SCREEN ADAPTER Video monitoring system functions
used for playing audio tracks stored on the PC, or on
the server, as well as any IP radio content (e.g. radio), SCS-SCS INTERFACE
through the loudspeakers of the sound system F422 interface between systems based on SCS BUS
- to be installed on the back of TOUCH SCREEN units dedicated to different functions - 2 shallow DIN
modules
: devices with Open Web Net communication protocol for the
development of integration applications.

F426 SCS/EIB interface - to control EIB system with MY HOME
systems - 2 DIN modules
SCS/DALI INTERFACE
F429 DALI dimmer, 8 maximum load independent outputs
16 230 Va.c. ballasts, direct load control pushbutton
- 6 DIN modules
The MY HOME system can also be controlled by iPad devices thanks

to BTicino MY HOME, the official BTicino application which can be
downloaded from iTunes, in the “Free” version as well.

MY HOME - BUS SCS
MH200N 3486 F461/2 C9451 F454

F420 device for saving 16 scenarios for automation, sound F461/2 telephone actuator, 2 independent relays, with
system, temperature control, and video door entry exchange contact, 230 Vac power supply -
system applications - 2 DIN modules 3 DIN modules

MH200N device for the execution of scenarios programmed F462 GSM telephone actuator for enabling/disabling of loads
using TiMH200N. The scenario may be combined with via SMS. It provides interaction with BTicino timer
times and dates, manual activations, events managed thermostats L/N/NT4450 and the possibility of
through AUX channels, or generated by the managing 2 alarm inputs - 4 DIN modules
Automation, temperature control and burglar alarm
software. 6 DIN modules SWITCHES
346020 mini power supply for the powering of the MH200N 10/100 Mbs switch - 5 ports for the distribution of
scenario programmer - 2 DIN modules F551
1 LAN line to 4 lines. Several Switches can be added to
setup more lines - Powered by power supply item F552
- 4 DIN modules
WEB SERVER AUDIO/VIDEO C9451 reduced size switch (29x98x171 - HxDxL), with
9 RJ45 ports. Automatic detection of the T base
F454 audio/video web server for the remote control of 10/100Mbit/s operating speed. Possibility of
the system using web pages or the MY HOME portal. connecting up to 8 PCs - 12 Vdc with power supply
The device can operate as a gateway for the use of the included
MHVisual and Virtual Configurator software
- 6 DIN modules - it replaces items F453 and F453AV
CENTRAL UNIT WITH COMMUNICATOR

screen. It can be controlled by transponder and keypad.
Managing up to 72 zones and max. 8 areas, and
possibility to set up to 16 user scenarios. Fitted with
PSTM telephone communicator for alarm forwarding.
Can be programmed using the TiSecurity POLYX
application. Wall mounted installation with metallic
bracket supplied as standard. Battery powered, using
item 3506 battery, supplied as standard
display of the configuration on the screen. It can be
controlled by the IR remote control, transponder and
keypad. Managing up to 72 zones and max. 8 areas,
and possibility to set up to 16 user scenarios. Fitted
with PSTM and GSM telephone communicator for
alarm forwarding. Can be programmed using the
TiSecurity GSM application. Wall mounted installation
with metallic bracket supplied or flush mounted in
MULTIBOX boxes. Battery powered, using item
3507/6 battery
(*): devices with level 2 IMG certification according to CE179-2
: devices with Open Web Net communication protocol for

the development of integration applications.

Màtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
AM5831M2 AM5832/2 AM5832/3 AM5787/4 3530S 3540 AM5834
AM5787 3529
Item SPECIAL CONTROL Item CONTACT INTERFACE

AM5831M2 special control – can drive an actuator performing all 3477 basic module control interface with 2
the standard functions of a control and also some independent contacts to control 2 actuators for
special functions: activation of 4 scenarios saved in the single-function loads or to control 1 actuator for
item F420 module, timings, activation of an actuator double-function loads (shutters) – accepts
installed on a different bus from the control, selection in input two traditional switches or pushbuttons
of the fixed adjustment level and the dimmer softstart with NO and NC contact or a traditional two-way
and soft-stop speed, sound system, door lock switch or interlocked pushbuttons
operation control, call to the floor control, switching as above - 2 DIN modules
ON staircase lights and management of auxiliary F428
channels. To be completed with 1 or 2-module key
covers with 1 or 2 functions - 2 modules
CONTROLS FOR SINGLE AND DOUBLE LOADS MEMORY MODULE

AM5832/2 lowered control which can drive a single actuator F425 module to save the actuator status – to reset the light
for single or double loads or two actuators for single automation system when there is a black-out
loads or independent double loads – to be completed – 2 shallow DIN modules
with 1 2-module key cover for controls with one or two
functions or 2 1-module key covers with one or two
functions - 2 green/red two-colour LEDs- 2 modules
AM5832/3 control which can drive three actuators for single or ACTIVE INFRARED RECEIVERS
independent double loads – to be completed with AM5834 receiver for the remote control by means of remote
3 1-module key covers for controls with one or two control 3529 - up to 16 actuations or scenarios saved
functions- 6 green/red two-colour LEDs - 3 modules in the scenario module F420 and scenario programmer
MH200N - 2 modules
IR REMOTE CONTROL
CONTROLS PROTECTED WITH CODE device for receiver control (up to 16 receivers
3529
AM5787 device which can save up to 30 transponders (badges) within the same room) - possibility to select up to
to actuate protected controls - 2 modules 16 channels directly - powered by two 1.5 V AAA
batteries
AM5787/4 scenario control protected with transponder - allows
you to store up to thirty transponders (badges) for
controlling 4 protected scenarios - 2 modules
NOTE: the control keys are supplied with the device as
special controls and controls standard. The customer must select the key covers.
TRANSPONDER for single and double loads
3530S portable badge – when brought close to the
transponder reader it activates it allowing the transfer
r
nde
spo
tran
of the signal generated on the BUS – does not require

TY
EC URI
H S
upper pushbutton
HIG
batteries for power – can be automatically coded by

means of the transponder reader control key
as above- key-ring lower pushbutton
3540
LED
Warning:
only controls with production batch 03W18 or higher can read items 3530S (slim badge) and
3540 (key-rings). The older readers only work with item 3530 (badge).
key cover
2 functions
2 modules
key cover
key cover 1 function
1 function key cover
2 modules
1 module 2 functions
1 module

MY HOME - BUS SCS
Automation
AM5658 AM5659 BMSE1001 BMSE2001 BMSE2005
Item GREEN SWITCH AND PIR SENSOR Item LIGHTING/MOVEMENT SENSORS

AM5658 Green Switch: integrated control with movement BMSE2002 passive infrared BUS sensor, for the detection of
sensor, using a combination of passive infrared rays movement and light intensity, wall or ceiling mounted
and ultrasounds, and brightness sensor. Manual installation, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45
switching ON of the light using the front pushbutton, connection, coverage 11 m wide by 90°, 14 m (120 m2)
and automatic switching off based on brightness field depth when installed at a 2.5 m height, max.
level and movement. Switch off delay and brightness installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS,
sensor threshold adjustable using the one/two-way absorption 12 mA, adjustment using one-two-way
(BMSO4003 and BMSO4001) remote control, physical remote control(BMSO4003 and BMSO4001), physical or
or virtual configuration. 2 modules virtual configuration
AM5659 passive infrared sensor for the detection of BMSE2003 passive infrared BUS sensor, for the detection of
movement and the lighting level. Coverage 5 m movement and light intensity, wall or ceiling mounted
wide by 180° and 9 m field depth at an installation installation, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45
height of 1.2 m. Switch off delay and brightness connection, coverage 2 m wide by 30°, 9+9 m (36 m2)
sensor threshold adjustable using the one/two-way field depth when installed at a 2.5 m height, max.
(BMSO4003 and BMSO4001) remote control, physical installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply
or virtual configuration. 2 modules from BUS, absorption 12 mA, adjustment using
one-two-way remote control(BMSO4003 and
BMSO4001), physical or virtual configuration
BMSE2004 passive infrared BUS sensor, for the detection of
movement and light intensity, wall or ceiling mounted
installation, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45
connection, coverage 10 m wide by 140°, 27 m (210
m2) field depth when installed at a 2.5 m height, max.
LIGHTING/MOVEMENT SENSORS installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply
from BUS, absorption 12 mA, adjustment using
BMSE1001 passive infrared BUS sensor, for the detection of onetwo-way remote control(BMSO4003 and
movement and light intensity, ceiling mounted BMSO4001), physical or virtual configuration
installation, protection index IP20, screw connection,
6 m (28 m2) diameter coverage when installed BMSE2005 double technology passive infrared and ultrasound
at a 2.5 m height, maximum installation height BUS sensor, for the detection of movement and light
4 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS, absorption intensity, wall or ceiling mounted installation,
10 mA, virtual or physical configuration adjustment protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45 connection,
coverage 14 m wide by 180°,7 m (77 m2) field depth
BMSE2001 passive infrared BUS sensor, for the detection of when installed at a 2.5 m height, max. installation
movement and light intensity, wall or ceiling mounted height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from BUS, absorption
installation, protection index IP42, clamp and RJ45 12 mA, adjustment using one-two-way remote control
connection, coverage 2 m wide by 30°,12 m (24 m2) (BMSO4003 and BMSO4001), physical or virtual
field depth when installed at a 2.5 m height, max. configuration
installation height 6 m, 27 Vdc power supply from
BUS, absorption 12 mA, adjustment using one- NOTE: for more information on remote controls BMSO4003 and BMSO4001 refer to the
twoway Lighting Management Catalogue.
remote control (BMSO4003 and BMSO4001),
physical or virtual configuration
Management of lighting level depending on the UP TO

presence of people and the level of natural light: this
means maximum visual comfort for the users, and a big
contribution to energy savings. In the service sector,
55%
SAVINGS
EN15193 standard

Coverage at 2.5 m ø 6 m (28 m2) 2 x 12 m (24 m2) 11 x 14 m (120 m2) 2 x 9+9 m (36 m2) 10 x 27 m (210 m2) 14 x 7 m (77 m2)
Sensitivity (lux) 1 - 2000 1 - 2000 1 - 2000 1 - 2000 1 - 2000 1 - 2000
Switch off time delay 0 sec. – 255 hours 0 seconds – 255 hours 0 seconds – 255 hours 0 seconds – 255 hours 0 seconds – 255 hours 0 sec. – 255 hours

Màtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
AM5851M2 3475
Item FLUSH MOUNTED ACTUATORS

actuator/control with 2 independent relays – for single, Example of use of actuator item AM5851M2 in the “actuator and
AM5851M2
double or mixed loads: 2 A resistive, 2 A incandescent remote control” mode. Press the left key cover to control the
lamps, 500 W for motor reducers, 2 A cosϕ 0.5 for actuator to manage a lamp connected to the device. The right key
ferromagnetic transformers and 70 W for fluorescent cover controls one or more remote actuators for different functions
lamps – logic interlock of the relays by configuration. (management of lights, shutters or scenarios).
The devices can also be configured to manage a remote
actuator – 2 modules Flush mounted actuator
AM5851/1 actuator with 1 relay with control key – for single
loads; 6A resistive or incandescence lamps, 2 A cosϕ
0.5 for ferromagnetic transformers and 150 W
fluorescent lamps – to be completed with 2-module
key covers for single or double function
BASIC MODULE ACTUATORS

3475 actuator with 1 relay – for single loads; 2A resistive
or incandescente lamps and 2A cosϕ 0.5 for
ferromagnetic transformers – suitable for
installation in ceiling light cups or in flush
mounted boxes behind control devices
3476 actuator with 1 relay – for single loads; 2A
resistive or incandescente lamps, 2A cosϕ 0.5 for ”Control” key cover
for remote actuator
ferromagnetic transformers – accepts a traditional management
pushbutton with NO contact in input ”Actuator” key cover for
light management

Actuators Type
Energy saving LED lamps Linear fluorescent Compact fluorescent Electronic transformers Ferromagnetic Motor reducers
incandescent and lamps 1) lamps transformers 2) for shutters 3)
halogen lamps
AM5851M2 2A 70 W 0.3 A 70 W 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A

AM5851/1 6A 150 W 0.65 A 150 W 0.65 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 -

3475 2A 40 W - 40 W - 2 A cosφ 0.5 -

Notes:
2) in order to calculate the actual power of the load connected to the actuator, it will be necessary to take into account the transformer performance. For example, when connecting a dimmer to a 100

MY HOME - BUS SCS
Automation

ferromagnetic transformers, and 4 A for fluorescent fluorescent lamps. At switch ON, the contact of the
fluorescent lamps. At switch ON, the contact of the – zero-crossing function - 4 DIN modules
- 6 DIN modules

Actuators Type
Energy saving
incandescent and LED lamps Linear fluorescent Compact fluorescent Electronic Ferromagnetic Motor reducers
halogen lamps lamps 1) lamps transformers transformers 2) for shutters 3)
F411/1N 10 A 500 W 4A 500 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 -
F411/2 6A 250 W 1A 250 W 1A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A
F411/4 2A 70 W 0.3 A 70 W 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 2A
F411/1NC 10 A 500 W 4A 500 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 -
F411/2 NC 6A - 0.65 A - 0.65 A 1 A cosφ 0.5 -
1380 W - 150 W - 150 W 230 VA -
BMSW1001 16 A 2.1 A 10 X (2 X 36 W) 1150 W 16 A 16 A -
3680 W 500 VA 4.3 A 5A 3680 W 3680 W -
BMSW1002 16 A 2.1 A 10 X (2 X 36 W) 1150 W 16 A 16 A -
3680 W 500 VA 4.3 A 5A 3680 W 3680 W -
BMSW1003 16 A 2.1 A 10 X (2 X 36 W) 1150 W 16 A 16 A -
3680 W 500 VA 4.3 A 5A 3680 W 3680 W -
Notes:

Màtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Automation
F413N BMDI1001 F414 F415 F416U1 F417U2 F429

F413N 1 output dimmer for the powering of fluorescent F417U2 multiload dimmer, 2 independent outputs with
lamps or LED sources with 1 to 10 V input for single maximum load 1.7 A at 230 Vac, clamp and RJ45
loads up to 2.5 A at 230 Vac - screw connection - connection, IP20 protection index, power supply
27 Vdc power supply - absorption 30 mA - possibility 100/240 Vac 50/60 Hz, direct load control
of connecting up to 10 ballasts (clamps 1-2) - with pushbutton - 6 DIN modules
direct load control pushbutton - DIN rail mounted F429 DALI Dimmer, 8 independent outputs for the
version – 2 modules connection of up to 16 DALI reactors for each output
load control pushbutton, DIN rail mounted version -
4 modules
F415 1 output dimmer for the powering of filament and
halogen lamps with electronic transformer - 27 Vdc
power supply - absorption 22 mA - with direct load
4 modules

Actuators Type
Energy saving
incandescent and LED lamps Linear fluorescent Compact fluorescent Electronic Ferromagnetic Motor reducers
halogen lamps lamps 1) lamps transformers transformers 2) for shutters 3)
BMDI1001 4.3 A - 4.3 A 4.3 A - - -
1000 VA - 1000 VA 1000 VA - - -
F413N - - 2 A 460 W 4) - - - -
for LED
F414 0.25 - 4.3 A - - - - 0.25 - 4.3 A -
60 - 1000 VA - - - - 60 - 1000 VA -
F415 - - - - 0.25 - 1.7 A - -
- - - - 60 - 400 VA - -
F416U1 4.3 A - - - 4.3 A 4.3 A -
40 - 1000 W - - - 40 - 1000 W 40 - 1000 W -
F417U2 1.7 A - - - 1.7 A 1.7 A -
40 - 400 W - - - 40 - 400 W 40 - 400 W -
Notes:

MY HOME - BUS SCS
3486 3485 AM5787/4 AM5783/8
COMMUNICATOR AM5787/4* receiver for the arming/disarming of the system using
3485* POLYX ALARM central unit with system self-learning the transponder badge item 3530S and item 3540 -
function, and display of the configuration on the pushbuttons for the control of 4 zones - zone status
PSTN telephone communicator for alarm forwarding.
supplied as standard AM5783/8 module for the expansion of zones that may be divided
- zones 5 to 8 control pushbuttons - LED zone status
display of the configuration on the screen. Controlled notifications - it can be coupled to the zone 1-4 divider
integrated PSTN and GSM telephone communicator,
TiSecurity GSM application. Wall mounted using the KEYPAD CONNECTOR
metal bracket supplied as standard, or flush mounted device fitted with display for arming or disarming the
inside MULTIBOX units. Battery powered, using battery AM5786*
system using a numeric key, set and saved on the
item 3507/6, not supplied burglar-alarm central unit, item. 3485/B, item 3486
3483 coaxial extension cable for the central unit aerial, - 2 modules
item 3486 - L = 3.5 metres
3484* GSM aerial protection tamper - to ensure level 2 of CEI
79-2 standard, the tamper protection must be used
BURGLAR-ALARM CENTRAL UNIT

scenarios. Fitted with alarm notification actuator, as
well as doors and windows protection NC contacts
connection terminal. Wall mounted using the metal
bracket supplied as standard. Battery powered, using
battery item 3506, supplied
(*) : devices with level 2 IMG certification according to CEI79-2. Catalogue MY HOME 595
Màtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

AM5787 3540 AM57855 AM5790 N4640 AM5791
Item TRANSPONDER CONNECTOR Item BURGLAR-ALARM KIT

AM5787* for arming and disarming the system using the MHKIT85N burglar-alarm expandable kit formed of:
transponder (badge) saved in the display central unit. - 1 central unit item 3485B
- LED system status notification - auxiliary channel - 2 IR sensors item N4640
available for activations - 2 modules - 1 power supply item E46ADCN
- 1 external siren item 4072L
- 1 magnetic contact item 3511
- various configurators
TRANSPONDER
3530S* slim line portable badge
tran
spo
nde
r
PASSIVE INFRARED DETECTORS
HIG
H S
EC URI
TY
AM5790* passive infrared volumetric presence detector with

adjustable sensitivity level (range: 3-9 metres)
3540* key-ring portable badge - alarm LED with memory – 105° angular opening,
14 bands over 3 floors – auxiliary pre-alarm channel
AM5791* volumetric presence detector as above - angular
opening that can be divided from 105° to 0° - lens
adjustable on 2 axis
KEY DISCONNECTOR
AM5785 module to switch the system off and block it AM5791B passive infrared volumetric presence detector with
by means of a mechanical key - LED system fixed sensitivity level (range: 6 metres) - alarm LED
status notification – fitted with keyhole with memory - 105° angular opening, 14 bands over
cover – key with 10,000 combinations - 3 floors - only for burglar alarm functions - 2 modules
2 modules
IR PASSIVE MINI-DETECTORS
EXTENDED 4 PLUS GUARANTEE N4640 passive infrared volumetric presence detector with
3549 BTicino 4 PLUS Guarantee package – extended adjustable sensitivity (range: 3-9 metres) -
program guarantee that offers the following alarm LED with memory - 105° angular opening,
advantages for the installer: - free start up by the 14 bands over 3 floors - 3 level sensitivity adjustment
BTicino Technical After-Sales Service Centre - aftersales through the configuration – possibility of activating
assistance supplied by BTicino Technical the auxiliary pre-alarm channel – wall mounted, tilted
After-Sales Service Centres – all interventions free of and corner, installation
charge during the 2 year guarantee period, and subject N4640B detector as above - preset sensitivity level (range:
to fixed fee for the following 2 years - the guarantee 6 metres) - only for burglar alarm functions
596 MY HOME Catalogue (*) : devices with level 2 IMG certification according to CEI79-2.
MY HOME - BUS SCS
AM5792 3480 F482 3510M 3514 3518

3480* interface module for two NC/NA electromagnetic 3514 detector for the protection of shutters or shutters
contact lines elettromagnetici NC/NA - possibility of
connecting a balanced and unbalanced contact
protection line – alarm indication LED with tripping
memory – auxiliary pre-alarm channel that can be
activated - basic module
F482 as above - for the management of two NC WINDOW-BREAKING DETECTOR
electromagnetic contact lines and cable detector for 3516 piezoelectric window-breaking detector. Installation
shutters - 2 DIN by means of double-sided adhesive tape, supplied.
Protection of windows with 3 metre maximum
NOTE: The item 3480 device is also preset the management of “technical alarms” in general. diagonal opening
CONTACT INTERFACE MODULE WITH 12 V OUTPUT IR BARRIERS

3480V12 contact interface module with 12V output to connect a Active infrared barriers for the protection of windows and doors.
sensor with mechanical wire for shutters (item 3514) The device consists of 2 columns, one operates as TRANSMITTER
or similar, or a normally closed or open contact and (TX), the other as RECEIVER (RX). When several IR beams are
an IR barrier for windows to the system - basic module broken, the alarm is immediately triggered.
F482V12 as above - for the management of two contacts - 2 DIN 3518 window barrier - 1 metre - 4 beams
MAGNETIC CONTACTS window barrier - 0.5 metres - 2 beams

3518/50


floor installation
metal surfaces
Màtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

AM5731/12 AM5732/12 3482 4072L 3505/12
Item RELAY ACTUATOR MODULE Item EXTERNAL SIREN WITH SYSTEM BATTERY
3479 actuator module with multiple configuration and 4072L external siren including the self-supply battery for the
relay output - C-NO-NC contacts, 24 V 0.4 A cosϕ 0,4 whole system - sound notification can be set from
- to be used for the repeating of various types of alarm 0 to 10 minutes by means of the central unit - to be
on the basis of its configuration. It can be activated by: fitted with a 12 V 12 Ah battery, item 3505/12 - sound
burglar alarms, flat battery signals, closing valve for intensity 105 dB (A) at 3 metres - light signaller with
technical alarms - basic module xenon lamp - anti-foam grid - protected against
F481 as above - 2 DIN tearing and opening - to be used with power supply
item E46ADCN
BATTERY FOR EXTERNAL SIREN ITEM 4072L

3505/12 12 V 12 Ah battery
TECHNICAL ALARM INTERFACE
3481 interface module to receive alarm signals from
AM5731/12 and AM5732/2 gas detector technical
alarm sensors – availability of 5 – 12 Vac/dc input
optoisolated - basic module OPTIONAL EXTERNAL SIREN
F483 as above - 2 DIN 4072A self-powered external siren - sound notification can
be set from 0 to 10 minutes by means of the control
unit - to be fitted with a 12 V 7 Ah battery - sound
intensity 105 dB (A) at 3 metres - light signaller with
xenon lamp - anti-foam grid - protected against
NATURAL GAS DETECTORS item E47ADCN
AM5731/12 NATURAL GAS detector with visual and sound (85 dB) NOTE: the external sirens do not include configurators. These may be purchased separately following the
alarm notification - internal self-diagnosis - preset procedure explained in the “Devices and accessories” page.
for the control of signal repeaters - powered by a
12 Vac/dc transformer, item AM5734 or item F91/12E
- 2 modules
INTERNAL SIREN
N4070 self-supplied internal siren for installation inside 506E
boxes - to be fitted with a 6 V 0.5 Ah battery, item
LPG DETECTORS 3507/6 - sound intensity 90 dB (A) at 3 metres -
AM5732/12 LPG GAS detector with visual and sound (85 dB) alarm protected against tearing and tampering
notification - internal self-diagnosis - preset for the NOTE: the external sirens do not include configurators. These may be purchased separately following the
control of signal repeaters - powered by a 12 Vac/dc procedure explained in the “Devices and accessories” page.
transformer, item AM5734 or item F91/12E - 2 modules
BATTERIES
3507/6 6 V battery for internal siren item N4070
FLOOD SENSOR
3482 water detection sensor - to be used together with
the contact interface, item 3480, in technical alarm
mode 3506 7.2 V battery for central units, item 3485/B
TAMPER
L4630 tamper-proof device for the protection of burglaralarm
mounted box

MY HOME - BUS SCS
Temperature control
AM5875 AM5872 3550 3456
Item 4-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT Item ACTUATORS

AM5875 central unit for the management of a temperature F430/2 2 independent relay actuator – for single and double
control system with up to 4 zones - the product also loads: 6 A resistive, 3 A motor valves and pumps -
includes the TiThermo Basic for programming from logic relay interlock via configuration - 2 DIN modules
PC - 3 modules
F430/4 4 independent relay actuator - for single, double and
combined loads: 6 A resistive, 3 A motor valves,
99-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT configuration - 2 DIN modules
3550 central unit for the management of a temperature
control system with up to 99 zones - the product also
includes the TiThermo Basic for programming from
PC - wall mounted installation or in MULTIBOX CONTACT INTERFACE MODULE
enclosures 3480 door and window electric contact interface module
for switching ON the connected zone - basic enclosure
BATTERY as above - 2 DIN module enclosure

F482
3507/6 6 V 0.5 Ah temperature control central unit battery
KNOB SENSORS SPLITTER MANAGEMENT INTERFACE

AM5872 room temperature control sensor for heating and 3456 air conditioning unit interface with IR emitter
cooling systems with knob for +/- 3 °C manual for the repetition and play back of IR air
adjustment of the temperature set in the unit and for conditioning unit remote control signals. It can
OFF and antifreeze mode selection - 2 modules be controlled using Touch Screen.
Basic mechanism, to facilitate installation
behind the air conditioning unit. IR cable length
2 m, power supply from the 27 V BUS

Màtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Energy management
F521 F522 F523 F524 3508BUS 3523 3522
Item CONSUMPTION DISPLAY Item ACCESSORIES

F520 device for the measurement of electric power on 3508BUS plug-in clamp for BUS connection
a maximum of three lines, made possible by - width 3.81 mm
connecting three toroids to the appropriate inputs.
The collected and processed data can be displayed
on Touch Screen. DIN rail mounting version - 1 module 3508U2 2 pole plug-in clamp
3523 additional toroids for the bus meter with three inputs
for toroids, item F520, and actuator with sensor, item 3508U3 3 pole plug-in clamp
f522, for the measurement of the earth leakage
from the meters (water, gas, etc.) with pulse output.
The values measured can be displayed on Touch Screen.
Basic module version, for hidden installation. Power
LOAD CONTROL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DIAGRAM FOR THE DISPLAY OF THE ENERGY PRODUCED AND CONSUMED, AND LOAD
MANAGEMENT
load control system actuators, to prevent the risk of
electricity provider. The central unit manages up to Photovoltaic Solar thermal panels
63 loads maximum, with a contract power of 1.5 to 18 panels
Integrates an electrical energy measurer for the
controlled line. DIN rail mounting version - 1 module
F522 actuator with integrated current sensor for controlled
load consumption module. 1 relay - for single loads,
16 A resistive, 10 A for incandescent lamps, and 4 A
for fluorescent lamps or ferromagnetic transformers -
bistable relay with zero crossing for load control
Management and/or Automation functions. DIN rail
mounting version - 1 module. Earth leakage current Electricity
meter
control made possible by connecting an additional
toroid, item 3523
F523 1 relay actuator - for single loads, 16 A resistive, Pulse
10 A for incandescent lamps, and 4 A for fluorescent counter
lamps or ferromagnetic transformers - Bistable interface
relay with zero crossing for load control Management BUS
and/or Automation functions. DIN rail mounting 2
version - 1 module Washing
device for the centralisation of the power consumption machine
F524
data from a max. of 10 lines (measured with F520 Microwave
measurers with toroids, F521 load control unit or 3522 oven
pulse-counter interface). The data can be displayed
by integrated web pages connecting the device to a
LAN network by its Ethernet port. It allows the
configuration of different tariffs and the downloading
of data. The device has a slot for microSD for further Actuator Actuator Load control
backup of the recorded data. central unit
Version for fixing on DIN rails - 1 module
– Power supply from 27 V BUS

MY HOME - BUS SCS
Sound system
F441 346030 F500N AM5740 AM5742 F502 F503
L4561N AM5831M2 F441M L4668BUS/35
Item AUDIO /VIDEO MIXERS Item AMPLIFIERS

346030 compact 2 wire power supply with integrated video AM5742 flush mounted amplifier - to be completed with
adapter. For base sound systems with one installable key covers - connection to BUS SCS system and stereo
sound source only - 2 DIN modules loudspeakers - functions: ON/OFF loudspeakers,
346830 video adapter for base sound systems - only one sound station or CD track change – 2 modules
source can be installed - 2 DIN module - electric power
supply using item 346000 F502 stereo amplifier – terminal for system
F441 audio/video node for audio source mixing (4 sources power supply 100 - 240 Vac - 4 DIN modules
maximum) towards 4 outputs - 6 DIN modules - fitted
SC
S
with DIN rail depth compensator F503 stereo amplifier for accurate reproduction of the
sound signal, both from the SCS/BUS and, in
F441M multichannel matrix with cross connecting alternative, from the AUX input (MP3 or CD player,
functions, switch mixing and shunting (switch mix etc.). Wide range of high and low tone adjustments
and shunt) for the distribution of both stereo sound available, 10 preset equalisation levels + 10
source signals and audio/video signals of the 2–wire customisable levels, virtual surround, and more.
intercom/video system - 8 inputs (the first 4 for the Each parameter can be displayed on the OLED
intercom/video 2 wire system, and the next 4 for graphic display. All the adjustments are performed
stereo sound sources), and 8 outputs - 10 DIN using the keys of the amplifier, or remotely using
modules - including DIN rail depth compensator Touch Screen devices - 10 DIN modules
SOUND SOURCES
PATCH CORDS
stations, display of RDS messages and tuned frequency. Type Length (cm)
Possibility of using the built-in wire antenna, or an L4668BUS/35 BUS-BUS 35
with MCX-F adapter (supplied). 4 DIN modules, DIN rail L4668BUS/60 BUS-BUS 60
AM5740 flush mounted RCA input - to be used to control a
stereo source - 2 modules BASIC STEREO SYSTEM DIAGRAM WITH ONE SOUND SOURCE
infrared remote control - programmed using the PC -
the IR transmitter
3495 source insulator for the adaptation of an audio signal Amplifier Amplifier
from external sound sources, to preserve the SELV
characteristics of the BUS. To be used when the sound
terminals, split between “IN” (for the connection of BUS - Cable 336904 2
the external sound source) and “OUT” (to be connected
to the RCA input item AM5740 Line terminator
Compact power
supply 346030
Sound sources
CONTROLS
AM5831M2 special amplifier management control to be completed
with key covers, for the management of ON/OFF
functions, volume control, change of source and
change of programmed radio station - 2 modules BUS - Cable 336904
Radio tuner Stereo control RCA input

F500N L4561N

Màtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

Sound system
N4565 336985 3499 346841
H4570 L4567 L4569 346851 346850
L4566 L4566/10 L4568 3529 AM5834
Item FLUSH MOUNTED LOUDSPEAKERS Item CONNECTORS FOR INTERFACING THE BUS CABLE TO SOUND
N4565 16 Ω flush mounted loudspeaker for 506E and PB526 SYSTEM DEVICES
boxes - power 12 W 336985 8-contact connector for the connection of items
F500N, L4561N and 3465 to the BUS (connect PINS
5 and 6)
H4570 8 Ω flush mounted 2-way loudspeaker for 4 module
MULTIBOX boxes item 16104 - power 100 W
LINE TERMINATOR
node outputs
WALL MOUNTED LOUDSPEAKERS
L4567 8 Ω wall mounted 2-way slim line loudspeaker,
D=37 mm - power 40 W - colour white
INTEGRATION AND EXPANSION DEVICES
L4569 8 Ω outdoor 2-way loudspeaker, IPx4, with adjustable 346841 floor distribution block, to be used with the audio/
inclination fixing brackets - power 140 W - colour black video node, item F441 and the DIN rail amplifiers,
item F502 and F503, for complete saturation of one
audio/video node output
FALSE CEILING LOUDSPEAKERS - 4 DIN modules
L4566 8 Ω false ceiling 2-way loudspeaker, L = 240 mm
- power 100 W - colour white 346850 apartment interface for connection to an independent
building complex video door entry system riser
integrated with MY HOME applications (Sound system,
L4566/10 8 Ω false ceiling and plasterboard loudspeaker, Automation, etc.) – 4 DIN modules
L = 100 mm - power 20 W - colour white
L4568 8 Ω loudspeaker with the same size as a standard false ACTIVE INFRARED RECEIVERS
ceiling panel (60x60 cm), for installation on false
ceilings - 50 W power - colour white AM5834 remote control receiver for remote control - up to 16
activations or scenarios saved in the scenario module,
item F420 - 2 modules
REMOTE CONTROLS
1.5 V AAA batteries

MY HOME - BUS SCS
E46ADCN E47ADCN 335919 3559 3545

E47/12

E47ADCN* power supply as above - installation on DIN rail with 335919 cable for the connection to the PC for the
8 module space requirement for wall mounted programming of the Automation, Burglar Alarm,
E49 compact power supply for Temperature control and
Automation systems - input 230 Vac, output 27 Vdc -
maximum power delivered 600 mA - 2 DIN modules VOUCHER FOR TECHNICAL AFTER-SALES SERVICE
3545 “Booklet” of 5 vouchers for visits by a CAT technician to
346000 power supply for Video door entry system and Sound service My Home, Video door entry, Telephony, Light
system. Power supply: 230 Vac @ 50-60 Hz. Maximum signalling and CCTV systems
(without fuse) against short-circuit and overload.
integrated fuse (not replaceable). Double insulation
SELV device
346030 2 DIN module compact power supply for Video door
entry system and Sound system. Maximum power
System Power supply

E46ADCN E47ADCN E47/12 E49 346000 346020
Automation • •
Burglar alarm • (1) • (2) • (3)
(3): for sensors with 12 Vdc power supply (ex. IR barrier)
Màtix catalogue
MY HOME - BUS SCS

3501/0 3501/1 3501/2 3501/3 3501/4
3501/GEN 3501/GR 3501/AMB 3501/AUX

L4669
L4669/500
L4669HF 336904 502PA
3501/PUL 3501/SLA 3501/CEN 3501/T
Item WALL MOUNTED BOXES FOR POWER SUPPLY AND BATTERY -

BURGLAR-ALARM SYSTEM Item VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION KIT
power supply item E47ADCN using a PC and the VIRTUAL CONFIGURATOR software,
supplied as standard on CD, and (SD) memory card.
It replaces item 3503N
with tamper-proof device – 2 modules – complete
ANGULAR BOX
with tamper-proof device – 2 modules – complete 3501/7 configurator 7
with frame and white cover plate (LB)
complies with standards CEI 46-5 and CEI 20-20 - 3501/AMB
coil length 100 metres configurator AMB
336904 specific cable with 2 twisted conductors. It can be configurator CEN
3501/CEN
➝ ➝
➝

➝

CONFIGURATOR KIT
System Cable kit of configurators from 0 to 9
3501K
L4669 L4669S 336904
L4669/500
L4669HF
➝
➝
➝
➝
Burglar alarm
Sound system •
•

MY HOME - BUS SCS
KEY COVERS WITH SILK-SCREEN PRINTING 1-FUNCTION AND 2-FUNCTION KEY-COVERS WITHOUT
SILK-SCREEN PRINTING
AM5915AC AM5915AA AM5915BA AM5915/2AA AM5911 AM5911/2
AM5911AF AM5911AI AM5915BE AM5911BF
Item KEY-COVERS WITHOUT SILK-SCREEN PRINTING

1 and 2 functions
KEY-COVERS WITH SILK-SCREEN PRINTING AM5911 key cover without silk-screen printing - 1 mod.
WITH 1 FUNCTION SYMBOL AM5911/2 key cover without silk-screen printing - 2 mod.
1 module 2 modules
OFF AM5915AA AM5915/2AA
ON AM5915AB AM5915/2AB
GEN AM5915AC AM5915/2AC
DIMMER AM5915AD AM5915/2AD
LIGHT AM5915BA AM5915/2BA
BELL AM5915BB AM5915/2BB
EXHAUST FAN AM5915BC AM5915/2BC
KEY AM5915BD AM5915/2BD
TREBLE CLEF AM5915BE AM5915/2BE
NURSE AM5915BF AM5915/2BF
ALARM AM5915BH AM5915/2BH
KEY-COVERS WITH SILK-SCREEN PRINTING

WITH 2 FUNCTION SYMBOL
1 module 2 modules
ON - OFF - GEN AM5911AF (*) AM5911/2AF
ON - OFF AM5911AG AM5911/2AG
UP DOWN AM5911AH AM5911/2AH
ON - OFF
AM5911AI (*) AM5911/2AI
ADJUSTMENT
SOUND SYSTEM
AM5911BF (*) —
SYMBOLS
TREBLE CLEF AM5911BE (*) —
NOTE (*): key covers that can be used with Sound System devices as well.

Màtix catalogue
HOTEL OFFER RANGE

This page lists the devices specifically intended for hotel room services. The BTicino hotel - comfort devices = light, curtain, and scenario controls with dedicated symbols. Also,
room offer range, and in more general terms for the hotel sector, includes however many thermostats, and temperature probes with knobs
more devices that are also used in other sectors, and are therefore listed in various sections - audio and video devices = connectors for every need, and sound signalling devices
throughout this catalogue. Some of them are, for example: - safety devices = step lights, and emergency lamps
AM5765 AM5052H AM5064VH AM5460 AM5006
Item BADGE-HOLDER POCKET Item SHAVER SOCKET

AM5765 badge-holder pocket with switch to switch ON lights AM5460 shaver socket with insulation transformer - input
and devices in hotel rooms - slot light with built-in voltage 230 Vac @ 50/60 Hz - output voltage
lamp - switch-off delay - max. load 30 VA 230 Vac - 3 115/230 Vac 20 VA - 3 modules - colour white
modules - white
A5765 pocket as above - colour ivory A5460 shaver socket - as above - colour ivory
L4546 key-holder card for badge-holder pocket AM5765

- A5765
CORD PUSHBUTTON
AM5006 1P (NO) 10 A - 250 Vac cord pushbutton
- colour white
CHANGEOVER SWITCH AND LAMPHOLDER A5006 1P (NO) 10 A - 250 Va.c. cord pushbutton
FOR OFF-DOOR SIGNALLING - colour ivory
AM5064VH off-door lampholder with double optical signalling:
”do not disturb” and ”rearrange the room” – use 2
LEDs item LN4742V12T (12V)
AM5052H 1P 16 A – 250 Vac double-key changeover switch
PLEASETURB
DO NOT
DIS
1-0-2 with interlock and double signalling:
MAKE
PLEASEROOM
UP THE ”do not disturb” and ”rearrange the room”.
To be used with the lampholder AM5064VH

CONTENTS
FLATWALL catalogue

FLATWALL catalogue
Base, device-holder supports and accessories
Wall Base MODUle

Item Description
3750 base module h 240 - 270 cm for masonry walls consisting of: lower module back,
telescopic module back, upper end cap, bracket with adjustable feet, duct fastener
plate and masonry mesh
3751 module as above, for plasterboard walls
3823 flush mounted module h 150 cm for masonry and plasterboard walls
3750 3823
3751
DeViCe-HOlDer sUPPOrts aND aCCessOries

Item Description
3787 device-holder support h30 cm, max. 36 DIN mod.
3788 device-holder support for free fi xing of non DIN devices, or for fi xing cables when
used as a riser
3787 3788 3789 device-holder support h60 cm, max. 72 DIN mod.
3801 bracket for the installation of 1 or 2 My Home 506E modular devices
3802 bracket for the installation of 3 My Home 506E modular devices
3789 3805 pair of brackets for non modular central units
3790 kit including a pair of trunkings and DIN rails for 3788
3756 horizontal partition (optional)
3803 extension module. to be used as joining piece when crossing floors.
Its use is compulsory in the riser solution
3801 3802 3804 vertical partition h 300 cm to separate cables in the riser solution
3828 multimedia box to be completed with F496/MF clips
3831 cable gland kit for multimedia box
3805 3790 3756
3803 3828 3804

Finishing elements
PaNels
Item Description
3794 front cover panel h 120 cm for 1 506E modular device
3795 front cover panel h 120 cm for 2 506E modular devices
3791 front cover panel h 30 cm for 1 506E modular device
3797* glass DIN switchboard h 30 cm
3798* metal sheet DIN switchboard h 30 cm
3829 multimedia box panel h 30 cm
3799* plastic DIN switchboard h 30 cm
3757 front cover panel h 30 cm
3794 3795 3796
3771 upper and lower end caps for 240 and 270 versions
3825 upper and lower end caps for 150 version
3761** front cover panel for non modular central units
3791 3792 3793 * Use white blanking modules, F215FP, to close any free compartments
** Use white blanking modules, 16133, to close any free compartments
3797 3798 3799

3829
3757
3759
3785
3825
3786
3771 3761
sUrrOUND Plates aND PrOFiles

Item Description
3817 surround plate for AxolUtE items
3818 surround plate for lIVING items
3821 side finishing profiles h 270 cm
3821
3817 3822
3818 3826
FLATWALL catalogue
MY HOME Flatwall 240 - 270

Assembly guide: switchboard solution
BASE SETUP: DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS AND SUPPORTS FOR INSTALLABLE

BACK ACCESSORIES MY HOME ACCESSORIES
DEVICES
Touch Screen
H4684
L4684
3802
Bracket for the
installation of Burglar alarm
3 My Home 506E central unit
3803 modular devices HD/HC/HS4601
Extension module HD/HC/HS4608
(compulsory for the riser solution) L/N/NT4601
L/N/NT4608
3801
Video Display
Bracket for the
349311 (light)
installation of
349312 (dark)
1 or 2 My Home
506E modular devices
3787
Device-holder support
h 30 cm, max. 36 DIN mod. Support
for 506E
H4726
3756 (AXOLUTE)
Horizontal
partition
(optional)
Power supplies and other

3789 My Home DIN module devices
h 60 cm, max. 72 DIN mod.
DIN protection devices
3788 3790
Device-holder support Kit including a pair of
for free installation of trunkings and DIN rails
non DIN modules for 3788 (optional)
3828
Box for multimedia devices
F496/MF
Clips
3750
Flush mounted back
3751 3787 3550 3486

3805
Flush mounted back for Device-holder support Temperature GSM burglar alarm
Brackets for non
plasterboard (without h 30 cm, max. 36 DIN mod. control central unit central unit
modular central unit
masonry mesh) support

FINISHING ELEMENTS: PANELS, END CAPS AND SURROUND PLATES *** FINISHING
ELEMENTS:
SIDE SURROUND
PLATES
3817
Surround plates
for AXOLUTE items
3794 3795 3796

Front cover panel Front cover panel Front cover panel
h 120 cm for one h 120 cm for two h 120 cm for three
506E modular device 506E modular devices 506E modular devices
3818
Surround plates
for LIVING items
3791 3792 3793

as above h 30 cm as above h 30 cm as above h 30 cm
3797** 3798** 3799**

DIN switchboard DIN switchboard DIN switchboard
h 30 cm, glass h 30 cm, metal sheet h 30 cm, plastic
3829 3757 3759 3785 3786

Multimedia Front cover panel Front cover panel Front cover panel Front cover panel
box panel h 30 cm h 60 cm h 90 cm h 120 cm
3821
h 30 cm
3822
Side surround
plates h 270 cm
and h 240 cm
* Use white blanking modules, 16133, to close any free

compartments
3771 ** Use white blanking modules, E215FP1N, to close any
Upper and lower
end caps internal free compartments
(to be fitted last) *** Panels and upper and lower end caps must always be
installed after the side surround plates (3821 or 3822)
3761
Front cover panel for non
modular central units*
FLATWALL catalogue

Assembly guide: switchboard solution
BASE SETUP: DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS AND SUPPORTS FOR INSTALLABLE

BACK ACCESSORIES MY HOME ACCESSORIES
DEVICES
Touch Screen
H4684
L4684
3802
Bracket for the
installation of Burglar alarm
3 My Home 506E central unit
modular devices HD/HC/HS4601
HD/HC/HS4608
L/N/NT4601
L/N/NT4608
3801 Video Display
Bracket for the 349311 (light)
installation of 349312 (dark)
1 or 2 My Home
506E modular devices
3787
h 30 cm, max. 36 DIN mod. Support for
506E
H4726
3756 (AXOLUTE)
Horizontal
partition
(optional)
Power supplies and other

3789 My Home DIN module devices
DIN protection devices
3823
Flush mounted back
3788 3790
Device-holder support Kit including a pair of
for free installation of trunkings and DIN rails
non DIN modules for 3788 (optional)
3828
Box for multimedia devices
F496/MF
Clips
3787 3550 3486

3805
Device-holder support Temperature GSM burglar alarm
Brackets for non
h 30 cm, max. 36 DIN mod. control central unit central unit
modular central
unit support

ELEMENTS:
SIDE SURROUND
PLATES
3791 3792 3793

as above h 30 cm as above h 30 cm as above h 30 cm
3817 3818
Surround plates Surround plates
for AXOLUTE items for LIVING items
3797** 3798** 3799**

DIN switchboard DIN switchboard DIN switchboard
h 30 cm, glass h 30 cm, metal sheet h 30 cm, plastic
3829 3757 3759 3785

Multimedia Front cover panel Front cover panel Front cover panel 3826
box panel h 30 cm h 60 cm h 90 cm Side surround
plates h 150 cm
h 30 cm
3825 * Use white blanking modules 16133, to close any free

Upper and lower end caps compartments
(to be fitted before the front ** Use white blanking modules F215FP, to close any internal
cover panels) free compartments
*** Panels and upper and lower end caps must always be
installed after the side surround plates (3821 or 3822).
3761
Front cover panel for
non modular central units*
FLATWALL catalogue

Assembly guide: electric distribution board solution
BASE SETUP: DEVICE-HOLDER SUPPORTS SUPPORTS FOR INSTALLABLE

BACK AND ACCESSORIES MY HOME DEVICES
DEVICES
3787
3756
Horizontal Power supplies and other
partition My Home DIN module devices
(optional)
3789
h 60 cm, max. DIN 72 mod.
3823
Flush mounted back
3788 3790
Device-holder support for Kit including a pair of
free installation of non trunkings and DIN rails for
DIN modules 3778 (optional)

ELEMENTS:
SIDE SURROUND
PLATES
3759 3785
Front cover panel Front cover panel
h 60 cm h 90 cm
3825
Upper and lower end caps
(to be fitted before the front cover panels) 3826
Side surround plates
h 150 cm
*** Panels and upper and lower end caps must always be
installed after the side surround plates (3821 or 3822).

FLATWALL catalogue

Assembly guide: floor riser solution
BASE SETUP: BRACKETS AND ACCESSORIES

BACK
3803
Extension module
(compulsory for
the riser solution)
3788 3804
Device-holder support for Vertical
cable fixing partition
h 300 cm
3790
Kit including a pair of trunkings
and DIN rails for 3778 (optional)
Floor slab
3750 Extension
Flush mounted back module
3751
Flush mounted back for plasterboard 3803
(without masonry mesh) Example of installation of the extension module

FINISHING ELEMENTS: PANELS AND END CAPS *** FINISHING
ELEMENTS:
SIDE SURROUND
PLATES
3759 3785 3786

h 60 cm h 90 cm h 120 cm
3771
Upper and lower *** Panels and upper and lower end caps must
end caps always be installed after the side surround
(to be fitted last) plates (3821 or 3822)
3821
3822
Side surround
plates h 270 cm
and h 240 cm

FLATWALL catalogue
Examples of composition
Composition with switchboard for protection devices h 270 cm.
Back modularity View of the whole unit
Material list
Item Description Quantity
3750 Flush mounted back 1
3789 Device-holder support h 60 cm 4
3786 Front cover panel h 120 cm 1
3797 DIN switchboard glass h 30 cm 1
3821 Pair of side surround plates h 270 cm 1
3771 Upper and lower end caps 1
Composition with switchboard for protection devices h 240 cm.
Material list
3797 DIN switchboard metal sheet h 30 cm 1

Composition with switchboard for protection devices and My Home devices 3 + 3 modules h 270 cm
Material list
3801 Bracket for the installation of 1 or 2 My Home devices 1
3795 Front cover panel h 120 cm for 2 506E modular devices 1
3817 Axolute surround plates 2
Composition with switchboard for protection devices and non modular My Home devices 270 cm
Material list
3805 Brackets for non modular central unit support 1
3761 Front cover panel for non modular central units 1
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0

FLATWALL catalogue
Examples of composition
Composition for riser column h 270 cm

Material list
3788 Device-holder support for cable fixing 4
3803 Extension module 1
Flatwall h150 composition with multimedia box and My Home devices 3 + 3 modules
Material list
3801 Bracket for the installation of 1 or 2 My Home devices 1
3792 Front cover panel h 30 cm for 2 506E modular devices 1
3828 Multimedia box 1
3829 Front cover panel h 30 cm for Multimedia box 1
3759 Front cover panel h 60 cm
3817 Axolute surround plates 2
Note: To ensure maximum design integration with the room where it is installed, MY HOME FLATWALL front cover panels, supplied in their original white colour, may also be
painted using the same paint as the walls.

Examples of aesthetic compositions
GSM burglar alarm central unit 3486 and temperature control Switchboard for electrical protection devices
central unit 3550
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
Material list Material list

Item Description Quantity Item Description Quantity
3805 Pair of brackets for non modular central units 1 3797 DIN switchboard glass h 30 cm 1
3761 Front cover panel for non modular central units 1 F215FP White blanking modules for closing any free compartments ***
*** Use 1 blanking module for each free DIN module
GSM burglar alarm central unit 3486 Multimedia box
Material list Material list

Item Description Quantity Item Description Quantity
3805 Pair of brackets for non modular central units 1 3828 Box for multimedia devices, with cable gland cut-outs 1
3761 Front cover panel for non modular central units 1 3829 Door for 30 cm high multimedia box 1
16133 White blanking modules for closing a free compartment 2 Clips for the installation of multimedia devices. 6 clips are already
F496/MF n*
supplied as standard with the 3828 box
Cable gland kit for multimedia box. 4 cable glands already supplied
My Home, Touch Screen, Video Display, etc. devices 3831
as standard with the 3828 box
n*
* Depending on installation requirements
Material list
3801 Bracket for the installation of 1 or 2 506E devices 1
3792 Front cover panel for 2 My Home devices 1
3817 Surround plates for AXOLUTE items 2
622 MY HOME Technical sheets
CONTENTS
MY HOME – Technical sheets
Radio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Automation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Burglar alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Load control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
Video door entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
Structured cabling system for the home sector. . . 1095
Control and integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1108
Technical sheets MY HOME 623

Technical sheets
The pages that follow provide all “Technical Sheets” These can be  Dimensional and technical data;
the technical information to assess, selected by Item code No.  Configuration;
design, and install a MY HOME For each device, the corresponding  Wiring diagram, if required
automation system technical sheet offers information on:
For detailed information on individual  Product description;
devices refer to the corresponding  Related items;
The technical sheets may also

be viewed by accessing the
“Professionals” section of the
www.bticino.com
624 MY HOME Technical sheets

Icons of the systems the device belongs to
Description
Multimedia Touch Screen HC/HS 4690
Description Front view
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Multimedia Touch Screen is a device that enables controlling all the functions of the
1 2
MY HOME system by means of simple and intuitive icons displayed on the 10” 16:9 LCD
Touch Screen.
In addition to the management of the automation functions, lights, temperature con-
trol, sound system, burglar alarm, and scenarios, by using the device it is also possible 3
to answer to video door entry system calls, and display the images transmitted by the
entrance panel, or the connected cameras. Thanks to the USB device and SD card inputs,
Multimedia Touch Screen can manage multimedia files, allowing the users to listen to
their favourite music or to view films and images.
When integrated with a domestic LAN network with internet connection, the device
enables (following the activation of specific icons) receiving RSS services such as “news”
and weather information, displaying images transmitted through webcams, and liste-
ning to internet radio channels.
Device drawing
Related items 5 4
Surround plate: HA4690XC, HA4690VBB, HA4690LTK, HA4690VNB, HA4690VSW Rear view
Power supply: 346020 6 7 8 9 10 11
Technical data
T
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Local power supply (1 – 2):
18 – 27 Vdc
18 – 27 Vdc 17 PSTN BUS 2 1
Configuration
Maximum local absorption (1 – 2): 600 mA ON
12
16 ETH
OFF
Absorption from SCS BUS: 50 mA

SCS AUDIO OUT
Operating temperature: 5 – 45 °C
Assembly, Installation
13 15 14 13
Dimensional data Legend

1. 10” Touch Screen colour LED display
2. Microphone
17 mm 3. USB connection
305 mm
4. Mini USB PC connection
5. SD card connector
6. Sound system source output connector
7. RJ45 connector for Ethernet connection
8. LAN connection signalling LED HC/HS 4690
228 mm 9. PSTN telephone line connector (future application)
10. 2 wire video BUS/SCS connector Configuration Installation
TECHNICAL SHEETS
11. 1-2 power supply connector
Multimedia Touch Screen must be configured using the TiMultimediaTouchScreen sof- Connect Multimedia Touch Screen to the system and fix it to the wall using the bracket
12. End of line ON/OFF micro switch tware supplied as standard. In order to receive/transfer the configuration performed, supplied with the product.
13. Loudspeaker or to update the firmware, connect Multimedia Touch Screen to the PC using one of the
14. Bracket fixing screw three solutions:
- USB-miniUSB cable;
15. Factory configuration reset pushbutton
- serial connector (3559);
16. NiMh 7.2 V battery compartment; 160 mAh - Ethernet cable.
17. RS232 PC connector
USB connection 1
Dimensional data
Technical data Wiring diagrams
Ethernet cable
Legend
230 Vac
PSTN BUS 2 1
PR I
346020
PRI: 220 - 240 V~
175 - 165 mA
47 / 63 Hz
1-2: 27 Vdc
600 mA
ETH
SCS AUDIO OUT
1-2
BT00318-a-UK
F441M
346020
Multichannel matrix
Power supply
Wiring diagrams Audio SCS BUS
Technical sheets MY HOME 625

626 MY HOME Technical sheets – Radio system
CONTENTS
Technical sheets – Radio system
Technical sheets – Radio system MY HOME 627

Remote control 5 pushbuttons 3527N
Description
Front view
Remote control with 5 scenario control pushbuttons.
The device can be set to operate as an IR remote control (mode not possible for ZigBee®
Radio automation devices).
Technical data 1
Power supply: No. 2 batteries, 1.5 V LR03
Duration of the batteries: 2 years
Technology: 2.4 GHz Radiofrequency ZigBee® standard
Radio frequency capacity: 100 m free field, 10 m in rooms with
concrete walls
Infrared capacity: 10 m free field
Dimensional data
183 mm
46 mm Rear view
17 mm
Configuration
“Push and Learn” self-learning type.
3
4
5
BT00392-a-UK
Legend
1. Scenario activation pushbutton
2. NETWORK key
3. NETWORK LED
4. LEARNING LED
5. LEARNING key

Remote control 4 pushbuttons 3528N
Description
Front view
Remote control with 4 scenario control pushbuttons.
1
6
5 2
Technical data
3
Power supply: No. 1 lithium battery, 3V, CR2032 type
Duration of the batteries: 5 years 4
Capacity: 80 m free field, 15 m in rooms with
concrete walls
Dimensional data
Rear view
50 mm 21 mm
7
8
76 mm
Legend
1. Scenario no. 1 activation pushbutton
Configuration
5. LEARNING LED
6. LEARNING key
7. NETWORK LED
8. NETWORK key
BT00393-a-UK

Integration module switch 1X2500W RF 3571
Description
Front view
Actuator for the control of a load with maximum power 2500 W, with ON/OFF control
pushbutton for system testing.
In enclosure suitable for installation inside false ceilings.
Technical data 5 1
Power supply: 100 – 240 Vac 50/60 Hz 4 2
Operating temperature: 5 – 45 °C 3
concrete walls
Power/absorption of the loads driven: see following table
Incandescent Fluorescent Ferromagnetic

Voltage Halogen lamp
lamp tube lamp transformer
Legend
Voltage
1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
230 Vac 2500 W 2500 W 1250 W 2500 VA 3. ON/OFF key
110 Vac 1250 W 1250 W 625 W 1250 VA 4. LEARNING LED

5. LEARNING key
Compact
Electronic
Voltage fluorescent LED lamps Motors Wiring diagram
transformer
tube lamp
Voltage
230 Vac 2500 W 1250 W 1250 W 250 VA

110 Vac 1250 W 625 W 625 W 125 VA
Dimensional data
N L
50 mm
BT00394-a-UK
Important:
38 mm – Protect the device with a 10 A fuse.
L
L
N
– Connect a load before performing any “scenario” learning procedure.

N
– For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60% higher than their rated
141 mm power must be connected.
Configuration standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50 W lamp with an efficiency of
“Push and Learn” self-learning type. 0.78 => power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)

Integration module dimmer 1 X 600W all load RF 3572
Description
Front view
Dimmer actuator for the control of a load with maximum power 600 W, with ON/OFF
control and adjustment pushbuttons for system testing.
8
7
6 1
Technical data 5 2
4 3
Power supply: 100 – 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
concrete walls
Incandescent Ferromagnetic Electronic

lamp transformer transformer
Legend
1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
Voltage
3. + key: press and release to switch the load ON at 66% of its power, press and hold
down to increase the power to the maximum value
4. - key: press and release to switch the load ON at 33% of its power, press and hold
Max. 600 W 600 W 450 VA 600 VA down to decrease the power to the minimum value
230 Vac
Min. 60 W 60 W 60 VA 60 VA 5. LEARNING LED
Max. 300 W 300 W 225 VA 300 VA 6. LEARNING key
110 Vac 7. Load selection micro-switch: ON / OFF
Min. 60 W 60 W 60 VA 60 VA
8. ON/OFF key
Dimensional data Wiring diagram
50 mm
38 mm
L
L
141 mm
BT00395-a-UK
Configuration Important:
“Push and Learn” self-learning type. – For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60% higher than their rated
power must be connected.
standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50 W lamp with an efficiency of
0.78 => power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)

Integration module dimmer 0-10V 1000W RF 3573
Description
Front view
Actuator for the control of Ballasts for 0-10 V type Fluorescent tube lamps with power up
to 1000 W max. The device has pushbuttons for ON/OFF control and for the adjustment
of the power to the load for system testing.
7
Technical data 6 1
Power supply: 100 – 240 Vac 50/60 Hz 5 2
Operating temperature: 5 – 45 °C 4 3
concrete walls
Ballast 0 – 10 V
Voltage
230 Vac 1000 VA

Legend
110 Vac 500 VA 1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
Dimensional data
3. + key: press and release to switch the load ON at 66% of its power, press and hold
down to increase the power to the maximum value
50 mm 4. - key: press and release to switch the load ON at 33% of its power, press and hold
down to decrease the power to the minimum value
5. LEARNING LED
6. LEARNING key
38 mm 7. ON/OFF key
141 mm
Configuration
Wiring diagram
Important:
– For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60% higher than their
BT00396-a-UK
rated power must be connected.

– For the calculation of the controllable power take into account the efficiency
of standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50 W lamp with an efficiency
of 0.78 => power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)
N L – +

Mobile switched dimmer socket RF
ZigBee for Schuko Standard 3574
Description
Front view
Actuator device to be used with an electric socket, for dimmer control of a load with
maximum power 500 W. The mobile socket can be managed with one or more radio
controls or locally using an appropriate pushbutton that can be found on the top section 2
of the device.
1 3
The device is protected from overheating caused by overload through an appropriate
protection circuit that intervenes automatically by reducing the power to the load.
Technical data
Power supply: 100 – 240 Vac; 50/60 Hz
Technology: Radio 2.4 GHz standard ZigBee®
Capacity: 150 m free field;
15 m in rooms with concrete walls
3574_front
Incandescent Ferromagnetic Electronic Detail point 1
c
d
b e
Voltage
a
max. 500 W 500 W 500 VA 500 VA

230 Vac
min. 50 W 50 W 60 VA 60 VA
max. 250 W 250 W 250 VA 250 VA Legend
110 Vac
min. 50 W 50 W 60 VA 60 W 1. ON/OFF key. The programming pushbuttons and LEDs can be found under the
protection:
Dimensional data a. CONTROL key
b. LEARNING LED
c. NETWORK LED
d. NETWORK key
82 e. LEARNING key
2. – key: press and hold down to decrease the power to the minimum value.
3. + key: press and hold down to increase the power to the maximum value
Assembly, installation
29
85
BT00489-a-UK
46
3574_front 3574_Top
Size in mm
Socket
Configuration
Technical sheets – Radio system
3574_montaggio
MY HOME 633
Mobile switch socket RF ZigBee
for Schuko Standard 3575
Description
Front view
Actuator device to be used with an electric socket, for ON/OFF control of a load with
maximum power 2500 W. The mobile socket can be managed with one or more radio
controls or locally using an appropriate pushbutton that can be found on the top
section of the device.
1
Technical data
Power supply: 100 - 240 Vac; 50/60 Hz
15 m in rooms with concrete walls

3575_front
Voltage
Detail point 1
c d
230 Vac 2500 W 2500 W 1250 W 2500 VA
b e
110 Vac 1250 W 1250 W 625 W 1250 VA
a f
Electronic Compact fluorescent
Voltage LED lamps
transformer tube lamp
Legend
Voltage
1. ON/OFF key. The programming pushbuttons and LEDs can be found under the
protection:
230 Vac 2500 W 1250 W 1250 W
110 Vac 1250 W 625 W 625 W a. CONTROL key LED
b. LEARNING LED
c. NETWORK LED
Dimensional data
d. NETWORK key
e. LEARNING key
82 f. CONTROL key
29
BT00490-a-UK
85
46
3575_front 3575_Top
Size in mm
Configuration Socket

3575_montaggio

Individual roller blind controller RF ZigBee
for mounting in technical compartment 3576
Description
Front view
Actuator device for the control of rolling shutter and shutter motors with maximum
power 500 VA.
4
The actuator is inside an appropriate enclosure for installation in rolling shutter boxes
or junction boxes.
Technical data
Power supply: 100 - 240 Vac; 50/60 Hz
15 m in rooms with concrete walls 3
2
Shutter motor 5
1
Voltage 6
230 Vac 500 VA

100 Vac 270 VA Legend
3576_front
1. LEARNING LED
Dimensional data 2. NETWORK key
3. Fixing hook
4. Wiring for connection to the power line and to the load
5. NETWORK LED
6. LEARNING key
Wiring diagram
blue
brown
blu black
120 marrone grey
nero
grigio
3576_lato
BT00491-a-UK
3576_front
27 35
55
Size in mm
Configuration Important: Connect a load before performing any “scenario” learning procedure.

3576
Configuration
Select the operating mode
The device may operate in two different modes:
- Bistable (to operate the rolling shutter press and immediately release the UP or
DOWN keys).
- Monostable (to operate the rolling shutter press and hold down the UP or DOWN
keys).
The device is supplied configured in bistable mode. It will be possible to change
the operating mode at any time by pressing and holding down for more than > 4 sec.
4 seconds both the UP and DOWN pushbuttons at the same time.
Use of the device in bistable mode
Opening and closing the rolling shutter:

Press and release the UP and DOWN pushbuttons.
Shutter control Shutter control
Adjustment of the blade position:

Press the UP and DOWN pushbuttons for more than 1 second.
BT00491-a-UK
> 1 sec.
50% 50%
> 1 sec.
50% 50%
+ = + =

50% 50%
3576
Use of the device in monostable mode

Press and hold down the UP and DOWN Pushbuttons until the desired rolling shutter position.
50% 50%
+ = + =
BT00491-a-UK

3576
Saving of the PRESET position (opening the rolling shutter to a preset position) Calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter;:
The rolling shutter control device for the management of the actuator can also 1. Check if the rolling shutter motor is equipped with a traditional, or with an
be enabled to set the rolling shutters to a preset position, using the appropriate electronic “limit switch”.
pushbutton (Preset).
2. Fully open the rolling shutter.
The procedure for storing the position is performed in two different stages:
- calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter; 3. In case of traditional limit switch, press the pushbutton shown in the picture
- saving of their positions. . for more than 4 seconds. Press the pushbutton for less than 1 second in case of
electronic limit switch.
4. The rolling shutter will close completely, will open completely, and then will move
to the half open position. During this stage do not operate the device.
5. The device has saved the rolling shutter full opening and full closing time.
Now proceed with saving the desired position (Preset).
> 4 sec.
Shutter control
100% 0% 50%
<1 sec.
Shutter control
Saving the rolling shutter position:

1. Operate the UP and DOWN PUShbuttons of the radio control to move the rolling 2. To save the desired position press the Preset pushbutton of the rolling shutter radio
shutter to the desired position. 50% control for more than 10 seconds.
BT00491-a-UK
+ =
>10 sec.
3. From now on, irrespective of its position, when the Preset pushbutton of the
control device is pressed the rolling shutter will move to the previously saved
position.
RF ZigBee transmitter with auxiliary inputs (2 inputs) 3577
Description
Front view
This device gives the possibility of integrating traditional control devices (Two-way
switch, switch, or pushbutton) in MY HOME radio systems.
The interface has 3 cables identified with C, 1, and 2 respectively, which connect to a 3
two-way switch, or to a pushbutton.
The definition of the type of device connected (two-way switch, or pushbutton), and
therefore of the interface operating mode, is done using appropriate pushbuttons
found on the device itself; the preset mode (at the factory) requires connection to
a two-way switch.
By configuring the A, PL, and MOD sockets, it will be possible to use this interface,
together with the SCS/ZigBee gateway, for the radio extension of a MY HOME BUS 2 4
system. The device is inside a Basic container with reduced sizes, for installation in
flush mounted boxes, junction boxes, rolling shutter boxes, and trunking. Particularly 1 5
advantageous is the installation inside junction boxes, positioning the item at the
back of the flush mounted box, behind traditional devices.
Related items 8 7 6
Gateway SCS/ZigBee: HC/HD/HS4578, L/N/NT4578N.
Technical data Legend

Power supply: No. 1 lithium battery, 3V, CR2032 type 1. LEARNING LED
Duration of the battery: 5 years 2. SCS My Home Configurator socket
Operating temperature: 5 – 45 °C 3. Local CONTROL key
Capacity: 150m free field; 2 4. SCS My Home Configurator socket
1
15m in rooms with concrete walls 5. NETWORK LED
C
6. NETWORK key
Dimensional data 7. Wiring for connection to traditional devices
8. LEARNING key
Size: basic module
Wiring diagram
2 1
BT00492-a-UK
2 2
1 1
C C
Connection to a two-way switch Connection to two pushbuttons
2 1
3577
Configuration
Configuration of the ZigBee network
Definition of the interface operating mode

The interface is already configured during production for connection to a two-way
switch or to a switch. If connecting one or more pushbuttons, change the operating
mode as indicated below:
1. Press the two pushbuttons on the interface for at least 5 seconds.

2. When the two LEDs (green on the left and orange on the right) flash slowly,
release the pushbuttons. The interface is now preset for connection to one or more
pushbuttons.
To restore “switch/two-way switch” mode, press the two interface pushbuttons for at
least 5 seconds, and release them when the two LEDs come on steady (not flashing). 1 2 1 1
L L L
Operating test
After completing the wiring and defining the operating mode, the operation of the in- - If the interface is in “pushbutton” mode, use the right pushbutton cyclically to send a
terface can be tested using the traditional devices connected, or the two pushbuttons: cyclic ON and OFF command to the radio actuator associated with the P1 pushbutton.
- If the interface is in “two-way switch” mode, use the left pushbutton to send an ON Use the left pushbutton to send a cyclic ON and OFF command to the radio actuator
command to the radio actuator associated to the two-way switch. Use the right push- associated with the P2 pushbutton.
button to send the OFF command.
BT00492-a-UK

Open Web Net/Zigbee Gateway 3578
Description
Front view
Interface for interaction with the functions of the ZigBee radio system using a Personal
Computer and an Open Web Net communication protocol.
The device must be connected to a USB port of the computer and features a radio
transmitter for sending/receiving data to and from ZigBee devices installed in the
electric system. 1
Technical data
Power supply: From USB 2.0 socket
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with concrete walls
4 2
3
Side view
BT00493-a-UK
Legend
1. USB connector
2. Data traffic indicator LED
3. NETWORK key
4. NETWORK LED

3578
Configuration
Connecting the device to the network Disconnecting the interface from the network
1. In the system identify the actuator device with “Zigbee network coordinator” 1. Press the NETWORK key on the interface. The NETWORK LED will flash quickly.
function, and press the NETWORK key for 3 seconds.
3 sec.
2. The NETWORK LED (yellow) will come on steady, and after a few instants will 2. Press the NETWORK key again for at least 10 seconds. The NETWORK LED will
start flashing quickly. flash quickly twice and then will turn off. The interface is no longer connected to
the ZigBee network.
10 sec.
3. Press the NETWORK key on the interface. The NETWORK LED will come on
steady during the network search procedure and then will start flashing slowly.
4. To complete the procedure press the NETWORK KEY of the Coordinator device;
The corresponding NETWORK LED will flash three times while the interface
NETWORK LED will turn off.
BT00493-a-UK

Wireless movement detector RF ZigBee
surface mounting 3579
Description
Front view
Each scenario can consist of the timed activation of one or more ON/OFF
and/or Dimmer actuators, depending on the brightness of the room and the presence
(scenario 1), or absence (scenario 2) of people inside the area covered by the IR sensor.
LEARN
Related items
2 DETECT
ON/OFF radio actuator: 3571, 3575, H4591, LN4591

Dimmer radio actuator: 3572, 3574, H4593, LN4593
Rear view
Technical data
Power supply: No. 2 batteries, AA 1.5V LR06
Timing ON: 15 minutes (1)
Minimum brightness threshold for 9 3
scenario activation: 1000lux (1)
IR sensor sensitivity: 100% (1)
Operating temperature: 5 – 45 °C 8 LEARN NETW 4
Technology: Radio 2.4 GHz standard ZigBee® DETECT END_DETECT
Radio frequency capacity: 100 m free field, 10 m in rooms with 7 5

concrete walls
Note (1): the values can be changed using the BMSO4001 and BMSO4003 remote
controls
6
IR sensor covering area: see drawings on page 2

1. LED:
- Exhausted battery (flashing slowly)
82 40 - presence of people detected inside the area (flashing)
2. Fresnell lens (the IR sensor is underneath)
3. NETWORK LED
4. NETWORK key
5. END DETECT key for the creation of scenario No. 2
6. Closing screw. Remove to open the sensor and replace the batteries
BT00520-a-UK
105
7. DETECT key for the creation of scenario no. 1
8. LEARNING key
9. LEARNING LED
Size in mm

0.4 m
0.2 m
3579
0.2 m
3m
Dimensional data - IR sensor covering area Configuration
Configuration of the device inside the network: “Push and Learn” self-learning type.
Configuration of the time period, of the IR sensor sensitivity, and of the
brightness threshold.
90° The device is supplied with the following factory set parameters:
- AUTO mode
- Timing ON: 15 minutes
Passage sensor - IR sensitivity: 100%
- Brightness threshold for activation: up to 1000 lux maximum
Other modes can be configured using remote controls BMSO4001 and BMSO4003 (see
the instruction leaflet for the details).
Creation of scenario 1 – active when people are present in the area controlled by
12 m the sensor.
1. Press the sensor LEARNING key. The LEARNING LED will come on steady, and then will
flash slowly.
Installation height 2.3 m
LEARN
LEARN NETW
0.4 m
DETECT
DETECT END_DETECT
2.3 m
1.5 m
0.2 m
3m
1.2 m
12 m
2. Then press the DETECT pushbutton. The LEARNING LED will flash quickly.
Installation height 0.4 m

90°
LEARN NETW
LEARN NETW
N DETECT END_DETECT
0.4 m
DETECT END_DETECT
L
0.2 m
LEARN
0.2 m DETECT
3m 12 m
3. Press the LEARNING key of the actuator used for the scenario.
The LEARNING LED will come on steady, and then will flash slowly.
90° N
L
N
L
BT00520-a-UK
LEARN NETW
LEARN NETW
DETECT END_DETECT
DETECT END_DETECT LEARN NETW
DETECT END_DETECT
12 m
LEARN NETW
DETECT END_DETECT
644 MY
N
HOME Technical sheets – Radio system
L N
L
N
L
N
L
LEARN NETW
LEARN NETW
DETECT END_DETECT
DETECT END_DETECT
3579
4. Press the ON pushbutton of the actuator. The connected load will come on and the Creation of scenario 2 – active when people leave the area controlled by the
LEARNING LED will flash more quickly. sensor.
1. Repeat the operations described for the creation of scenario 1, using the END
N DETECT pushbutton to perform the operations described in point 2.
N
L N
L L
LEARN NETW
DETECT END_DETECT
LEARN NETW LEARN NETW

NETW
N
L
END_DETECT DETECT END_DETECT

DETECT
END_DETECT
DETECT
LEARN
DETECT
LEARN
END_DETECT
NETW
END_DETECT
NETW
5. Repeat the procedures at points 3 and 4 for each actuator to associate to the NOTE: For more information on the amendment of the set scenarios (addition and
scenario during its creation. removal of actuators) refer to the instruction leaflet supplied with the sensor.
6. Press the sensor LEARNING key. The corresponding LEARNING LED and those of all
the associated actuators will go off.
LEARN NETW
N DETECT END_DETECT
L N
L
DETECT
LEARN
DETECT
LEARN
LEARN NETW
DETECT END_DETECT
T
END_DETECT
NETW
END_DETECT
NETW
N
L
N
L
N
L
ETW
ND_DETECT
BT00520-a-UK

Wireless temperature sensor RF ZigBee
surface mounting 3581

Device capable of activating several actuators (scenarios) based on the measured
temperature.
it is possible to manage up to 2 scenarios: the first activates when the temperature falls 1
below a T1 level, the second when the temperature exceeds a T2 level.
activation of scenario 2
temperatures
T2
Threshold
Threshold 2
T1
activation of scenario 1
The sensor is battery powered, it features an LCD display for the display of the measured
temperature, and a probe with ±0.5°C precision tolerance. It can be easily wall mounted
using screws.
Technical data Internal view

Power supply: No. 2 batteries, 1.5 V AAA type
Duration of the battery: 2 years 1
Measured temperature range: (-25) – (+ 40) ° C
Tripping threshold: 1° C
Precision: ±0.5 °C
Technology: Radio 2.4 GHz standard ZigBee® 8 3
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15m in rooms with concrete walls
7 4
Dimensional data
UP
76 mm
6 - +
DOWN
116 mm
UP
5
BT00494-a-UK
- +
Legend
DOWN
1. Battery exhausted LED

2. Measurement probe
3. LEARNING LED
4. LEARNING key
Configuration 5. Probe connection clamp
Configuration of the ZigBee network: “Push and Learn” self-learning type. For the 6. Configuration menu navigation joystick
association of the scenarios that can be enabled based on the temperature measured 7. NETWORK key
refer to the installation manual supplied with the sensor.
8. NETWORK LED

H4586
Transceiver for technical alarms LN4586
Description
Front view
Device to be used together with a detector, for the protection of the home from water,
gas, or smoke. In case of danger, the device will send a radio signal to the radio actuator
for the activation of acoustic/luminous indicators, or for the control of a solenoid valve
for the isolation of the water or gas pipes at the entrance of the house.
4 1
Technical data
Power supply: 12 Vdc (also with 12 Vac L/N/NT4541
transformer) 3 2
concrete walls

Size: 2 flush mounted modules 1. ON/OFF key
2. NETWORK LED
3. LEARNING LED
Configuration 4. LEARNING key
“Push and Learn” self-learning type. 5. NETWORK key
Wiring diagram
230 V
Radio interface H/LN4586
Gas detector
L/N/NT4511/12
L/N/NT4512/12 + –
A – +
HD/HC/HS4511/12
– + Aux
HD/HC/HS4512/12
12 Vdc 12 Vac transformer

L/N/NT4541
HD/HC/HS4541
BT00397-a-UK

H4587
Actuator RF for technical alarms LN4587
Description
Front view
Radio actuator device with relay output to be used for the notification of an alarm
through the activation of visual/acoustic indicators, or for the control of a solenoid valve
for the isolation of the water or gas pipes at the entrance of the house.
The actuator is used together with the specific Radio interface for technical alarms,
H/LN4586.
5 1
Technical data
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with 3
concrete walls
Power/absorption of the loads driven: 2500 W (240 Vac)
1250 W (100 Vac)

Size: 2 flush mounted modules 1. NETWORK LED
2. LEARNING LED
3. Key
Configuration
4. LEARNING key
“Push and Learn” self-learning type. 5. NETWORK key
Wiring diagram
Aux2 Aux1 + –
BT00398-a-UK

HA4589 L4589N
4 scenario control RF HB4589 N4589N

Radio control device used for saving and managing up to 4 scenarios max.
1 2
Technical data
Power supply: No. 1 lithium battery, 3 V, CR2032 type 10 3
Duration of the batteries: 5 years M A PL
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with concrete walls
Dimensional data
8 5
Size: 2 modules
Configuration 7 6
Radio system: “Push and Learn” self-learning type.
Wire system: If the device is integrated with the BUS Automation system using the Gateway
SCS/Zigbee interface, it will be possible to manage scenarios saved in the scenario module Legend
item F420, which address must be specified by connecting the configurators to the A, PL, and 1. LEARNING key
M housings as indicated:
2. NETWORK key
Use with scenario module F420: 3. Scenario no. 2 key
A = Room
4. Configurator socket (A, PL)
PL = Light point
M = operating mode (1 – 4). It associates to the 4 pushbuttons the scenarios saved by the 5. Scenario no. 4 key
scenario module (max. 16). The correspondence between the 4 control keys and the scenario 6. NETWORK LED
numbers saved in the module is as follows:
7. LEARNING LED
Configurator in M Scenario saved 8. Scenario no. 3 key
1 scenario 1 – 4
2 scenario 5 – 8 9. Configurator socket (M)
3 scenario 9 – 12 10. Scenario no. 1 key
4 scenario 13 – 16
Scenario programming NOTES:

To program, change or delete a scenario, the programming of Module F420 must be enabled. Once the necessary operations have been completed, lock the programming procedure,
This is confirmed by the status LED turning green (press the lock/unlock key of the scenario by pressing the lock/unlock key of the scenario module for at least 0.5 seconds, until the
module for at least 0.5 seconds). After this has been done, proceed as follows: corresponding LED turns red.
1. press one of the four control keys to which the scenario should be associated to for 4 To delete a scenario, proceed as follows:
seconds. The corresponding LED starts flashing; 1. The scenario module must be enabled for programming;
2. Set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation, Temperature 2. press the pushbutton of the scenario to delete for at least 10 seconds. The corresponding
control, Sound system, etc. functions; LED will flash quickly for approx. 2 seconds, confirming that the scenario has been deleted.
3. confirm the scenario by quickly pressing the corresponding key on the control to exit the If the LED does not flash, the procedure has been unsuccessful.
programming mode; To reset the whole memory, press the DEL key of the scenario module for 10 seconds. The yellow
4. to change a scenario, or to create new ones to use with the other keys, repeat the procedure LED, “”reset scenarios””, will flash quickly.
starting from point 1;
BT00399-a-UK
To recall an already set scenario, a quick pressure of the corresponding key on the scenario
control is enough.

Switch RF without neutral 400W H4590
with LEDS status LN4590
Description
Front view
Actuator for the control of loads with maximum power 400 W, with ON/OFF LED. 1
For the connection of the device to the load and to the electric system no neutral
conductor is required.
2
Technical data
4
concrete walls
Incandescent Ferromagnetic Electronic 5

Legend
1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
Voltage
3. LEARNING LED
4. ON/OFF key
Max. 400 W 400 W 400 VA 400 VA 5. Load ON/OFF LED
230 Vac 6. LEARNING key
Min. 60 W 60 W 60 VA 60 VA
Max. 200 W 200 W 200 VA 200 VA
110 Vac
Min. 60 W 60 W 60 VA 60 VA
Dimensional data
Size: 2 flush mounted modules
Configuration
Wiring diagram
Important:
– Connect a load before performing any “scenario” learning
procedure.
BT00400-a-UK
– For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60%

higher than their rated power must be connected.
– For the calculation of the controllable power take into account
the efficiency of standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50
W lamp with an efficiency of 0.78 => power actually absorbed
by the transformer = 64 VA)
L

Universal switch RF with neutral 2500W H4591
Description
Front view
Actuator for the control of different loads with maximum powers up to 2500 W, with 1
ON/OFF LED.
Technical data
2
concrete walls 6 3
Power/absorption of the loads driven: see following table 4

5
Legend
Voltage
1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
230 Vac 2500 W 2500 W 1250 W 2500 VA 3. LEARNING LED
110 Vac 1250 W 1250 W 625 W 1250 VA 4. ON/OFF key
5. Load ON/OFF LED
6. LEARNING key
Compact
Electronic
Voltage fluorescent LED lamps Motors
transformer
tube lamp Wiring diagram
Voltage
230 Vac 2500 W 1250 W 1250 W 250 VA

110 Vac 1250 W 625 W 625 W 125 VA
Dimensional data N L

BT00401-a-UK
Configuration
Important:
“Push and Learn” self-learning type. – Connect a load before performing any “scenario” learning procedure.
standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50 W lamp with an efficiency of 0.78
=> power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)

Universal switch RF with neutral 2 X 1000W H4592

Actuator for the control of 2 different loads with maximum powers up to 1000 W, with 1
ON/OFF LED.
Technical data
Power supply: 100 – 240 Vac 50/60 Hz 2
concrete walls 7 3
4
6 5 5
Voltage
Legend
230 Vac 2 x 1000 W 2 x 1000 W 2 x 500 W 2 x 1000 VA 1. NETWORK key
110 Vac 2 x 500 W 2 x 500 W 2 x 250 W 2 x 500 VA
2. NETWORK LED
3. LEARNING LED
Compact
Electronic 4. ON/OFF key
Voltage fluorescent LED lamps Motors
transformer
tube lamp 5. Load ON/OFF LED
6. ON/OFF key
Voltage 7. LEARNING key
230 Vac 2 x 1000 W 2 x 500 W 2 x 500 W 2 x 100 VA Wiring diagram

110 Vac 2 x 500 W 2 x 250 W 2 x 250 W 2 x 50 VA
Dimensional data
Configuration
N L 1 2
BT00402-a-UK
Important:

All load dimmer RF without neutral H4593
300W with LEDS bargraphe LN4593
Description
Front view
Actuator for the control of different loads with maximum powers 300 W, with ON/OFF
LED. For the connection of the Dimmer to the load and to the electric system no neutral
conductor is required. The selection of the ON/OFF mode based on the load to drive
(resistive or inductive) is performed using a micro-switch.
1
8 2
Technical data
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with 4
concrete walls
Incandescent Halogen Ferromagnetic Electronic 6 5

Voltage
lamp lamp transformer transformer
Legend
Voltage
1. + key: press and release immediately to activate the load at 66% of its power; press
and hold down to increase the power to the maximum value.
Max. 300 W 300 W 300 VA 300 VA 2. NETWORK LED
230 Vac
Min. 60 W 60 W 60 VA 60 VA 3. LEARNING LED
Max. 150 W 150 W 150 VA 150 VA 4. - key:press and release immediately to activate the load at 33% of its power; press
110 Vac and hold down to decrease the power to the minimum value.
Min. 60 W 60 W 60 VA 60 VA
5. Load ON/OFF LED
6. ON/OFF key
Dimensional data
7. LEARNING key
8. NETWORK key
Wiring diagram
Configuration
L
BT00403-a-UK
Important:

H4594
Dimmer RF for ballasts 0-10V 1000W LN4594
Description
Front view
Actuator for the control of Ballasts for 0-10 V type Fluorescent tube lamps with power 1
up to 1000 W max , with ON/OFF LED.
Technical data 2
3
concrete walls 8 4
Ballast 0 – 10 V
7 6
Voltage
Legend
1. NETWORK key
2. + key: press and release immediately to activate the load at 66% of its power; press
230 Vac 1000 VA and hold down to increase the power to the maximum value.
110 Vac 500 VA 3. NETWORK LED
4. LEARNING LED
5. - key: press and release immediately to activate the load at 33% of its power; press
Dimensional data and hold down to decrease the power to the minimum value.
Size: 2 flush mounted modules 6. Load ON/OFF LED
7. ON/OFF key
8. LEARNING key
Configuration
Wiring diagram
Important:
procedure.
BT00404-a-UK
– For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60%

higher than their rated power must be connected.
– For the calculation of the controllable power take into account
the efficiency of standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50
+ – N L W lamp with an efficiency of 0.78 => power actually absorbed
by the transformer = 64 VA)

H4595
Shutter switch RF with preset function LN4595
Description
Front view
Actuator for the control of electric rolling shutter or shutter motors with maximum po- 1
wer 500 VA.
Technical data
2
3
concrete walls 8 4
Shutter motor
Voltage 7 6
Legend
Max. 500 VA
230 Vac 1. NETWORK key
Min. 270 VA
2. UP key
Max. 250 VA 3. NETWORK LED
110 Vac
Min. 135 VA 4. LEARNING LED
5. DOWN key
6. Load ON/OFF LED
Dimensional data
7. STOP key
8. LEARNING key
Configurazione
Wiring diagram
Important:
procedure.
BT00405-a-UK
N L

H4595
LN4595
Configuration
DOWN keys).
keys).
The device is supplied configured in bistable mode. It will be possible to change the
operating mode at any time by pressing and holding down for more than 4 seconds
both the UP and DOWN keys of the rolling shutter control at the same time. > 4 sec.
Shutter control

Press and release the UP and DOWN keys.

Press the UP and DOWN keys for more than 1 second.
BT00405-a-UK
> 1 sec.
50% 50%
> 1 sec.
50% 50%
+ = + =

50% 50%
H4595
LN4595

Press and hold down the UP and DOWN keys until the desired rolling shutter position.
Saving of the PRESET position (opening the rolling shutter to a preset position) Calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter;
In addition to the operating modes specified, this device can be used to also set the 1. Check if the rolling shutter motor is equipped with a traditional, or with an electronic
rolling shutters to a preset position by only pressing one key. “limit switch”.
The procedure is performed in two different stages: 2. Fully open the rolling shutter.
- calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter;
3. In case of traditional limit switch, press the key shown in the picture for more than 4
- saving of their positions.
seconds. Press the key for less than 1 second in case of electronic limit switch.
4. The rolling shutter will close completely, will open completely, and then will move to
the half open position. During this stage do not operate the device.
5. The device has saved the rolling shutter full opening and full closing time. Now
proceed with saving the desired position (Preset).
50% 50%
+ = + =
> 4 sec.
Shutter control
BT00405-a-UK
100% 0% 50%
< 1 sec.
Shutter control

H4595
LN4595

1. Operate the UP and DOWN keys of the radio control to move the rolling shutter to 2. To save the desired position press the Preset key of the rolling shutter radio control
the desired position. 50% for more than 10 seconds.
+ =
>10 sec.
3. From now on, irrespective of its position, when the Preset key of the control device
is pressed the rolling shutter will move to the previously saved position.
BT00405-a-UK

HA4596 L4596N
Switch control RF 1 gang HB4596 N4596N
Description
Front view
Radio control device for the control of an ON/OFF or Dimmer actuator or group of
actuators. 1 2
When controlling Dimmer actuators, it will only possible to switch the load on/off, but
not to adjust the power level (dimmer function).
Technical data
Power supply: No. 1 lithium battery 3 V, CR2032 type 7 3
Technology: Radio 2.4 GHz standard ZigBee® 4
concrete walls
6 5
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Legend
1. LEARNING key
Configuration
2. NETWORK key
Radio system: “Push and Learn” self-learning type. 3. Configurator socket (A,PL)
Wire system: if the device is integrated in the BUS Automation system using the Gateway
4. ON/OFF key
SCS/Zigbee interface it will be possible to manage BUS actuators, which address must be
configured by connecting the configurators to the A, PL, and M housings as indicated. 5. NETWORK LED
6. LEARNING LED
A = Room 7. Configurator socket (M)
PL = Light Point
M = Operating mode
Configurator in M Function
0 Cyclical ON/OFF
1 ON timed - 1 minute
2 ON timed - 2 minutes
8 ON timed - 500 ms
BT00406-a-UK
O/I Cyclical ON/OFF

OFF OFF control
ON ON control
PUL monostable ON/OFF control (key)

HA4597 L4597N
Switch control RF 2 gangs HB4597 N4597N
Description
Front view
Radio control device for the control of two separate or two groups of ON/OFF or Dimmer
type actuators. 1 2
When controlling Dimmer actuators, it will only possible to switch the load on/off, but
not to adjust the power level (dimmer function).
Technical data
concrete walls
6 5
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Legend
1. LEARNING key
Configuration
2. NETWORK key
Radio system: “Push and Learn” self-learning type. 3. Configurator socket (A, PL1)
Wire system: If the device is integrated in the BUS Automation system using the
Gateway SCS/Zigbee interface it will be possible to manage BUS actuators, which 4. ON/OFF key No. 2
address must be configured by connecting the configurators to the A, PL1, PL2, and M 5. NETWORK LED
housings as indicated. 6. LEARNING LED
7. ON/OFF key No. 1
A = Room
8. Configurator socket (PL2, M)
PL1 = Light Point N°1
PL2 = Light Point N°2
M = Operating mode (see table)
Configurator in M Function
0 Cyclical ON/OFF
1 ON timed - 1 minute
BT00407-a-UK
8 ON timed - 500 ms
O/I Cyclical ON/OFF
OFF OFF control
ON ON control
PUL Monostable ON/OFF control (key)

HA4598 L4598N
Dimming control 1 gang HB4598 N4598N
Description
Front view
Radio control device for the control of an ON/OFF or Dimmer actuator, or a group of
actuators. 1 2
When controlling ON/OFF actuators, it will only possible to switch the load on/off.
3
Technical data
Power supply: No. 1 lithium battery 3 V, CR2032 type
Duration of the batteries: 5 years 9 4
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with 8 5
concrete walls
Dimensional data 7 6
Size: 2 modules for surface mounted installation
Configuration Legend
“Push and Learn” self-learning type. 1. LEARNING key

If the device is integrated in the BUS Automation system using the Gateway SCS/Zigbee 2. NETWORK key
interface it will be possible to manage BUS dimmer actuators, which address must be 3. + key: press and release to switch the load ON at 66% of its power, press and hold
configured by connecting the configurators to the A and PL. down to increase the power to the maximum value
4. Configurator socket (A,PL)
5. - key: press and release to switch the load ON at 33% of its power, press and hold
down to decrease the power to the minimum value
6. NETWORK LED
7. LEARNING LED
8. ON/OFF key
9. Configurator socket (not used)
BT00408-a-UK

HA4599 L4599N
Shutter control RF HB4599 N4599N
Description
Front view
Radio control device for the control of one actuator or of one group of actuators for the
control of motorized rolling shutters or shutters. It has a STOP/PRESET pushbutton to 1 2 3
stop the movement of the rolling shutter/shutter, and to move it to a preset position.
Technical data
concrete walls
7 6
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Legend
Configuration 1. LEARNING key
2. NETWORK key
If the device is integrated in the BUS Automation system using the Gateway SCS/ 3. UP key
Zigbee interface it will be possible to manage 2 relay actuator, which address must be 4. Configurator socket (A,PL)
configured by connecting the configurators to the A, PL, and M housings as indicated: 5. DOWN key
6. NETWORK LED
A = Room
PL = Light Point 7. LEARNING LED
M = operating mode (see below) 8. STOP/PRESET key. Stops the rolling shutter during its movement. If pressed when
the rolling shutter is stopped, it activates its movement to a preset position, saved
in the Shutter actuator H/LN4595.
Configurator in M Function 9. Configurator socket (M)
Press and immediately release UP and DOWN
 keys to rise or lower the rolling shutter; to stop
the movement press the STOP key.
Press and hold down the UP or DOWN keys to
send the command to rise or lower the rolling
 M
shutter; to stop the movement release the
pushbutton.
Configuration
BT00409-a-UK
DOWN keys).
keys).
The device is supplied configured in bistable mode. It will be possible to change the
operating mode at any time by pressing and holding down for more than 4 seconds > 4 sec.
both the UP and DOWN pushbuttons at the same time.

HA4599 L4599N
HB4599 N4599N

Press and release the UP and DOWN pushbuttons.
Shutter Shutter
actuator actuator

Press the UP and DOWN pushbuttons for more than 1 second.
Shutter Shutter
actuator actuator
> 1 sec.
50% 50%
> 1 sec.
Opening and closing the rolling shutter: 50% 50%

+ rolling shutter position.
Press and hold down the UP and DOWN Pushbuttons until the desired = + =
Shutter Shutter
50%
50%
actuator actuator
BT00409-a-UK
+ = + =
+ = + =

HA4599 L4599N
HB4599 N4599N
Saving of the PRESET position (opening the rolling shutter to a preset position) Calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter;
In addition to the operating modes specified, this device can be used to also set the 1. Check if the rolling shutter motor is equipped with a traditional, or with an electronic
rolling shutters to a preset position by only pressing one pushbutton. “limit switch”.
The procedure is performed in two different stages: 2. Fully open the rolling shutter.
- calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter;
3. In case of traditional limit switch, press the pushbutton shown in the picture for more
- saving of their positions.
than 4 seconds. Press the pushbutton for less than 1 second in case of electronic limit
switch.
4. The rolling shutter will close completely, will open completely, and then will move to
the half open position. During this stage do not operate the device.
5. The device has saved the rolling shutter full opening and full closing time. Now proceed
with saving the desired position (Preset).
> 4 sec.
100% 0% 50%
< 1 sec.

1. Operate the UP and DOWN PUShbuttons of the radio control to move the rolling 2. To save the desired position press the Preset pushbutton of the rolling shutter radio
shutter to the desired position. 50% control for more than 10 seconds.
BT00409-a-UK
+ =
> 10 sec.
3. From now on, irrespective of its position, when the Preset pushbutton of the
control device is pressed the rolling shutter will move to the previously saved
position.
L/N/NT4578N
Gateway SCS/ZigBee® HD/HC/HS4578
Description
Front view
Device for interfacing the ZigBee® radio Automation system with the My Home BUS
Automation system.
It makes it possible to extend a wire Automation system and to management the
corresponding actuators, using the ZigBee® radio controls. .
4 1
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
Absorption: 20 mA
Maximum number of ZigBee® devices that can be managed: 32 3 2
Technology: Radio 2.4 GHz standard
ZigBee®
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in
rooms with concrete walls
Dimensional data
Rear view
Configuration
5
The interface must be configured by assigning the address following the procedure used
for BUS Automation systems.
A = Room 1 – 9
PL = Light Point 1 – 9 6
M = - (no configurator)
Note: assign an address not used for other Automation devices.
Legend
1. NETWORK LED
2. LEARNING LED
3. LEARNING key
4. NETWORK key
5. Configurator socket (A,PL and M)
6. BUS clamp
BT00410-a-UK

666 MY HOME Technical sheets - Automation
CONTENTS
Technical sheets – Automation
Technical sheets - Automation MY HOME 667

Basic radio actuator 3470
Description
This device can be used to exploit the benefits of radio technology in a combined
radio-wire BUS system. The basic radio actuator can be driven by the Automation
system controls, by means of transmitting interface item L/N/NT4576N and item
HC/HS4576. The device can also be installed in flush mounted boxes and is fitted with 1
input connection cables for a switch or a traditional pushbutton.
The actuator has a LED that turns ON steadily when the load is active, and flashes in case 2
of wrong configuration. µ
3
Technical data
Power supply: 230 Vac 50 Hz
Power/Absorption of driven loads: - incandescent lamps 500 W / 2 A
- resistive loads 500 W / 2 A
- ferromagnetic transformers 500 VA / 2 A cosϕ 0.5
Radio frequency: 868 MHz Legend
Size: basic module
1. Configurator socket
2. Programming pushbutton
3. LED
Wiring diagram
External
pushbutton
L
230 Vac 50 Hz
N
BT00104-b-UK

3470
Configuration
The actuator must be configured by inserting the configurators in sockets A, PL, M and G. If the external contact is connected to the actuator, it is possible to choose one of the
If, for example, the actuator is configured with A =5 and PL = 3, it will be managed by operating modes included in the table below. The operating mode of the external
the wire control with address A = 5 and PL = 3. The radio interface must have address contact is determined by the type of configurator in the M socket.
52 or less (A = 5 and PL = 2). The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that
can be configured directly on the radio control devices, apart from those which use two
interlocked relays.
Possible function Combination configurator in M and type of external contact

Pushbutton Switch
Cyclical ON/OFF No configurator -
Monostable mode. PUL -
If installed in a MY HOME Automation system, the actuator will ignore Room and General
controls
ON/OFF - 0/1
Timed ON 1)
1–8
1) If controlled by an external pushbutton, the device will turn off after a given time Configurator Time (minutes)
period determined by the Configurator in M, as specified in the table.
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 15
7 30 sec.
8 0.5 sec.
Programming
This operation is necessary to create a link between the radio control devices and the
actuator. Follow the procedure below:
1) Power up the device.
2) Hold down the programming pushbutton until the LED lights up (about 4 seconds).
3) Release the pushbutton.
4) Within 20 seconds press the programming radio interface pushbutton or press the
wire control device key.
5) Programming will be completed when the LED flashes and then turns off.
6) Repeat the operating sequence from 2 through 5 for all the radio control devices to
be programmed.
To cancel all programming in the actuator proceed as follows:

BT00104-b-UK

2) Hold down the pushbutton (see figure); after 4 seconds, the LED will turn ON; hold
down the pushbutton until the LED turns off.
3) Release the key.
4) When the LED flashes and then turns off, all previously programming will be
cancelled.

Basic actuator 3475
Description
Front view
The device forms part of the Basic automation and is therefore small in size. This actuator
can be used in flush mounted boxes, junction boxes, rolling shutter boxes and trunking.
Particularly suitable is the installation inside junction boxes, positioning the item at
the back of the flush mounted box, behind lowered automation devices, or behind
traditional type devices (pushbuttons, switches, etc.). L L1 1
4 1
The actuator has cords for connection to the load to be controlled and a LED.
ART. 3475
230V ˜
2A cosϕ = 0,6
Technical data 2A 2
Power supply from BUS: 27 Vdc
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
Absorption: 13 mA
Power/Absorption of driven loads:
Incandescent lamps LED lamps Ferromagnetic
Halogen lamp Compact fluorescent lamp transformers
Side view
3
230 Vac 460 W 2A 40 W Max. 1 lamp 2 A cosφ 0.5 460 VA
Size: basic module

4
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be configured directly on 1. Configurator socket
the control, apart from those which require the use of two interlocked relays. 2. LED
Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same 3. 0.75 mm2 cords for connection to the load
actuator are listed in the table below. 4. BUS
Possible function Configurator in M

Pushbutton (monostable ON) ignores the Room and General controls PUL
Actuator as Slave. Receives a control sent by a Master actuator which has the same address SLA
BT00076-c-UK
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for point-point control. 1–4
With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set in the Master actuator 1)
1) Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control Configurator Time (minutes)
activates the light (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the
same time. The OFF control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan 1 1
working for the time set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as 2 2
indicated in the table.
3 3
4 4

Basic control actuator 3476
Description
Front view Side view
The device is part of the Basic automation system, and is therefore characterized by a
compact size, which makes it possible for it to be installed inside flush mounted boxes,
junction boxes, other boxes and trunking. Particularly suitable is the installation inside 3
junction boxes, positioning the item at the back of the flush mounted box, behind
lowered automation devices, or behind traditional type devices (pushbuttons, switches,
etc.). This actuator/ control accepts on the input a traditional pushbutton with NO L L1 1
2 1
contact. The control/actuation device has a BUS inlet made by means of the blue cables,
an inlet to connect the external pushbutton by means of the grey and black cables and a
ART. 3476
relay contact to control the load by means of the two white cords. 230V ˜
2A cosϕ = 0,6
Technical data 2A 2
Absorption: 13 mA 4
Incandescent lamps LED lamp Ferromagnetic
Halogen lamp Compact fluorescent lamp transformers
Legend
2. LED
3. 0.75 mm2 cords for connection to the load
230 Vac 460 W 2A 40 W Max. 1 lamp 2 A cosφ 0.5 460 VA 4. BUS
Size: basic module
Configuration
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be configured directly on
the control, apart from those which require the use of two interlocked relays.
Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same
actuator are listed in the table below.

Cyclical ON/OFF No configurator
ON/OFF mode 0/1
Pushbutton (On monostable) ignores Room and General controls PUL
Actuator as Slave. SLA
Receives a control sent by a Master actuator with the same address
Timed ON 1) 1 – 8 1)
1) If controlled by external pushbutton the device switches off after a time set by the
BT00077-c-UK
Configurator Time (minutes)

configurator in M as indicated in the table below.
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 15
7 30 sec.
8 0.5 sec.
Basic contacts interface 3477
Description
This devices let you integrate traditional control devices (switches, pushbuttons, etc.) in
advanced systems with BUS operating logic. A
PL1
Therefore, it is possible to extend the use of the automation system and Lighting PL2 1
Management in rooms where traditional systems are already present or in historic and M
SPE
prestigious environments whereby the complete or partial remaking of the electric
system involves heavy masonry work. The old but valuable switch with its no longer 3477
compliant wiring can therefore continue to be used with it as the connection to the 2
load to be controlled is carried out safely by connecting it with its SCS interface with
no-voltage contact.
The PL1 contact drives the PL1 light point, the PL2 contact drives the PL2 light point. PL1 PL2 C
The interface is fitted with two LEDs for the notification of correct operation and three
cables for connection to traditional devices. The device is made with Basic enclosure,
with reduced dimensions and can be used in flush mounted and junction boxes and
trunkings. The installation in boxes is particularly advantageous, with the positioning
of the item inside the flush mounted box, behind lowered automation devices or behind 3
4
traditional devices (pushbuttons, circuit breakers etc.).
The device may be installed in a MY HOME system and can be configured both physically
and virtually, or as a component of the Lighting Management system, using specific
configuration procedures (Plug&go, Project&Download).
Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1. Configurator socket

Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc (attention, it must only be used in MY HOME systems with physical configuration)
Absorption: 3.5 mA 2. LED
3. Cords for connection to traditional devices
Dimensional data 4. BUS
Size: basic module
MY HOME configuration
When installed in a MY HOME system, the device may be configured in two ways:
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets.
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the 3503N Kit or
the web server. The Virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC.
BT00272-a-UK

3477
Physical configuration
The interface includes two independent central units, identified with positions PL1 and The interface is fitted with a LED to signal correct operation, and three clamps for
PL2. The two units can send: connection to traditional devices such as:
- controls to two actuators for two independent loads (ON, OFF or adjustment) identified - two traditional NO (normally open) and NC (normally closed) switches or pushbuttons;
with the address PL1 and PL2 and mode specified in M or; - a two-way switch.
- a control to the scenario module item F420;
- a double control intended for a single load (motor for rolling shutter UP/DOWN, OPEN-
CLOSE curtains) identified with the address PL1 and PL2 and mode specified M.
1) SPE=0 mode - Standard functions - Automation
Value configurator in M
Possible function
single function double function
Cyclical ON-OFF for short press and adjustment with long pressure no configurator -
ON ON -
ON timed 1)
1–8 -
OFF OFF -
OFF pressing the key connected to PL1 - ON pressing the key connected to PL2 and
- 0/1
adjustment with long pressure (dimmer) 2)
UP/DOWN rolling shutter to end of stroke - 
UP/DOWN rolling shutter monostable -  M
Pushbutton PUL -
1) The device sends an OFF control after a time set by the configurators used as indicated in 2) As a function of the receiver actuator operating mode.
the table below.
NotE: If circuits are connected to the interface clamps, the operating mode to select is PUL.
Configurator Time (min.)
If normally open (NO) pushbuttons are connected all the other operating modes indicated in
1 1 the table are performed.
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 15
7 30 sec.
8 0.5 sec.
BT00272-a-UK

3477
2) Operating mode with the configurator in M and in SPE
Possible function Value configurator in SPE
Locks the status of the devices to which the control is addressed 1 1 -
Unlocks the status of the devices to which the control is addressed 1 2 -
Unlocks with key connected to PL2
1 - 3
and locks with key connected to PL1
On with flash 1) 2 none – 9 -
ON (key in PL2) - OFF (key in PL1) without adjustment 1 - 0/1
Cyclical ON/OFF without adjustment (only NO contact) 1 7 -
Selection adjustment level fixed at 10 to 90 % of the dimmer 2)
3 1–9 -
Call the scenarios of module F420 4 - see table (3)
Management of scenario module item F4203) 6 see table (3)
ON timed (2 seconds) 8 1
ON timed (10 minutes) 8 2
1) Device to be combined with an OFF control for switching OFF. 3) With SPE=4 it is only possible to recall the scenario saved in the F420 module; with SPE=6
The flash time is indicated in the table: it is possible to recall and program the scenarios saved in the F420 module. M=1-8: group of
scenarios to be controlled:
Configurator Time configurator (sec.)
none 0.5 M First contact (PL1) Second contact (PL2)
1 1 1 1 2
2 1.5 2 3 4
3 2 3 5 6
4 2.5 4 7 8
5 3 5 9 10
6 3.5 6 11 12
7 4 7 13 14
8 4.5 8 15 16
9 5 A=0 to 9 and PL1=1 to 9 are the room and the light point of the scenario module to be
controlled. PL2 must be the same as PL1, or not configured (in this case the second contact is
2) Device to be combined with the dimmer actuator and an OFF control for switching OFF. disabled).
The configurator defines the adjustment in % of the load power.
Configurator in N % P of load
1 10
BT00272-a-UK
2 20
3 30
4 40
5 50
6 60
7 70
8 80
9 90

3477
Scenario programmer: in order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary to To call a set scenario just press its pushbutton on the control quickly.
enable the programming mode of the Module item F422 so that the status LED is green
To cancel a scenario completely, keep the corresponding pushbutton pressed for about ten
(press the lock/unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds); continue with
seconds.
the following operations:
1) press one of the four control keys the scenario is to be associated to for 3 seconds. The
corresponding LED will begin to flash.
2) Set the scenario using the corresponding controls belonging to the various Automation,
Temperature control, Sound system functions, etc.
3) confirm the scenario by quickly pressing the corresponding key on the control to exit
programming mode;
4) To change or create new scenarios to be linked to the other keys, repeat the procedure
starting from point 1.
3) Mode with SPE=7 - Automation standard functions - normally closed contact

This mode can perform the controls envisaged by the Basic operating mode with SPE = 0 when NC pushbuttons or switches are connected to the interface clamps.
4) Mode with SPE=5 - sound system -
When the interface is correctly configured, the following functions are performed: M=1 Source cycling/track cycling mode
M=0 ON/OFF mode: N1 contact: cycle source
N1 contact: N2 contact: cycle track
With a short pressure, the following sequence is sent: In this operating mode:
- ON of the sources. PL2 indicates the source to activate before switching the amplifier on. - room controls
If PL2=0, source 1 is turned on (follow-me mode)
A = 1-9 is the amplifier room
- ON of the A/PL1 amplifier.
- General controls
With extended pressure the following happens:
A = GEN for general controls
- For point-point controls, if the amplifier is already on, only the volume is adjusted (VOL+);
PL1=PL2=0
if the amplifier is off, the switch on sequence is sent first;
- For AMB or GEN controls, only the volume is adjusted.
N2 contact:
With a short pressure, the OFF command of the A/PL1 amplifier is sent
With an extended pressure the volume is adjusted (VOL -)
In this operating mode:
Point-point control
- A = 1-9 amplifier room
- PL1= 0-9 amplifier speaker
Room control
BT00272-a-UK
A = AMB
PL1 = 1-9 amplifier room the control is intended for
General control
A = GEN
PL1 = 0
PL2 = 1-4 indicates the source to activate before switching the amplifier on.
If PL2=0, follow-me mode is activated

3477
Virtual configuration Lighting Management configuration

Using the Virtual Configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed When installed in a Lighting Management system, the device can be configured in the
below: following ways:
- contact; - Plug&Go
- single light control; - Project&Download,
- single disable control;
Using the Virtual Configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed below:
- single scenario control;
- contact
- single CEN control;
- single light control
- single scenario PLUS control;
- single disable control
- single CEN PLUS control;
- single scenario control
- single AUX control.
- single CEN control
- single scenario PLUS control
- single CEN PLUS control
- single AUX control
For more information on the functions see the glossary before the Technical sheets
chapter.
Wiring diagram
Basic interface
A
PL1
PL2
M
Historical actuator
SPE
3477
PL1 PL2 C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Historical switch C1 C2
SCS BUS
N
BT00272-a-UK

Mobile actuator 3526 - 3526/10 - 3526/16
Description
This plug-in actuator provides radio control, through transmitting interfaces
L/N/NT4576N or HC/HS4576, of the connected load using the internal 16 A relay. 1
The relay contact is of the normally open type. In this way, when idle the load connected
to the actuator is off.
The actuator is available in three versions:
- 3526 with German standard plug for connection to the network socket, and universal 2 A
socket (German standard, 10 A and 16 A) for connection of the load.

PL
MOD
3 5 G
- 3526/10 with 10 A plug for connection to the network socket, and German
standard/10 A plug for connection of the load.
- 3526/16 with 16 A plug for connection to the network socket, and universal socket
ART. 3526
(German standard, 10 A and 16 A) for connection of the load. 230V
˜ μ
4A cosϕ =0,5
16A 4A M
Technical data 4A 10A
Power supply: 230 Vac @ 50 Hz

Power/Absorption of driven loads for 3526 and 3526/16: 4
- incandescent lamps 2300 W / 10 A
- resistive loads 3500 W / 16 A Programming
- fluorescent lamps 1000 W / 4 A This operation is necessary to create a link between the radio control devices and the
- electronic transformers 1000 W / 4 A actuator. Follow the procedure below:
- ferromagnetic transformers 1000 VA / 4 A cosϕ 0.5 1) Plug in the device.
Power/Absorption of driven loads for 3526/10: 2) Hold down the pin key until the LED lights up (about 4 seconds).
- incandescent lamps 2300 W / 10 A 3) Release the key.
- resistive loads 2300 W / 10 A 4) Within 20 seconds press the programming radio interface pushbutton or press the
- fluorescent lamps 1000 W / 4 A wire control device key.
- electronic transformers 1000 W / 4 A 5) Programming will be completed when the LED flashes and then turns off.
- ferromagnetic transformers 1000 VA / 4 A cosϕ 0.5 6) Repeat the operating sequence from 2 through 5 for all the radio control devices to
Radio frequency: 868 MHz be programmed.
Legend To cancel all programming in the actuator proceed as follows:

1. Set up for customisations with label. 1) Plug in the device.
2. LED 2) Hold down the pin key; after 4 seconds, the LED will turn ON; hold down the
3. Pin pushbutton for manual activation/deactivation and programming of the load. pushbutton until the LED turns off.
4. Socket for connecting the load. 3) Release the key.
5. Configurator socket. 4) When the LED flashes and then turns off, all programming will be cancelled.
Configuration
No configuration is required when installed in traditional systems, or systems only
consisting of radio devices. When integrating the device to a MY HOME system, or when
advanced functions are required, at least the A and PL positions must be configured. The
configuration as belonging to the G group is only possible if also A and PL are configured.
For example, if the actuator is configured with A = 5 and PL = 3, it will be managed by
the wire control with address A=5 and PL=3. The radio interface must have an address
BT00105-b-UK
not higher than 52 (A=5 and PL=2). If a PUL configurator is connected to the MOD
position, the actuator will ignore Room and General controls.
Mobile actuators execute all the basic operation modes that can be configured directly on LED
radio control devices, except for the ones requiring interlocked relays. If the configuration
is wrong, the signalling LED will start flashing, and will do so until a correct combination
of configurators is connected.
Possible function Configurator in MOD

The actuator ignores the Room and PUL
General controls
Normal operation -
Radio remote control 6 channels 3527
Description
This remote control is a transmitting radio device that can drive the radio actuators item
F470/1, F470/2, 3526, 3526/10 and 3526/16; when used in conjunction with receiving led
interfaces HC/HS4575 and L/N/NT4575N, it can also be used to control devices of the
key 1
MY HOME system. This remote control has six radio channels and six customisable keys
which are back-lit and emit a sound when selected. key 2
The remote control can also be used as a flashlight. There is an orange LED which
indicates that the radio transmission has occurred after pressing a key; if this indicator key 3
turns red, it means that the batteries are dead and must be replaced. key 4
Technical data key 5
Power supply: 2 AA 1.5 V pen batteries
key 6
(not provided, min. duration: 3 years)
Radio frequency: 868 MHz
Range: 100 m in free field
(metal and reinforced concrete walls reduce the range)
Type of modulation: FSK
Torch function:
When you press keys 5 and 6, the remote control will act as a flashlight.
Warning, in this mode the duration of the battery is sensibly decreased.
Key 6
Key 5
BT00099-b-UK

3527
Configuration
To configure the remote control, it is not necessary to use traditional configurators:
Switches are used instead as indicated in the following table. To access the switches
remove the upper part of the remote control.
NOTE: Switches 3 and 4 must be left with the factory settings; switch no. 4 is used to set
the volume level of the audible signal of the keys, and to change the key scanning time
for the disabled function.
Programming
To associate a different control to each of the alarm radio remote control channels, follow
the procedure below:
1) Press the interface radio programming pushbutton, configured in self-learning
mode, for 3 seconds: the red LED will turn ON steadily; release the pushbutton.
2) Within 20 seconds press the key of the remote control you want to program; the red
LED will begin to flash, hence indicating the activation of the programming mode.
3) Within 5 minutes, set the function you want to associate to the remote control key
using the actuator and/or corresponding control; the red LED will start flashing
quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that the programming has been
completed.
4) You can repeat 1), 2) and 3) for all keys, even for a key that has already been
associated (in case you want to change it). A maximum of 24 self-learning
operations are possible (e.g. 4 remote controls item 3527).
1 2 3 4
To cancel the programming of one of the remote control keys, follow the procedure
below:
1) Press the programming pushbutton on the radio interface for at least 8 seconds
(after 4 seconds the red LED will turn ON steadily and then after another 5 seconds it
will turn off). Release the key. The red LED will turn ON again steadily.
2) If you want to cancel the programming condition of a key, press it on the remote Choose the level of the key audible signal:
control within 20 seconds; the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, 1 - Move switch no. 4 to programming mode (UP).
thus confirming the cancellation. 2 - Hold down keys 1 and 3 simultaneously; after 2 seconds, keys 1 and 2 will light up.
3) From now on, the cancelled key will no longer activate any control until it is 3 - Press one of the lit keys to listen to the audible signal associated to it (key 1 higher
re-programmed. level).
To cancel all programming conditions of the interface simultaneously, press the 4 - Hold down the key corresponding to the required level for more than 2 seconds.
programming pushbutton for about 12 seconds: the red LED will turn ON steadily 5 - The level will be stored when an audible signal is emitted and when the key starts
after 3 seconds; after another 5 seconds, it will turn off and after another 4 seconds flashing.
it will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus confirming the cancellation of all 6 - Move switch no. 4 to normal operation mode (DOWN).
programming conditions.
Release the key. Here you can completely reset the device by cancelling both the
associated radio codes and the controls associated to the various remote control keys.
Switch Position Operating mode

Up It lights up when the remote control key is pressed.
BT00099-b-UK
1 2 3 4
Key lighting = ON
Switch 1
Down It does not light up when the remote control key is pressed.
1 2 3 4
Key lighting = OFF
Up An audible signal is emitted when a key is pressed.
1 2 3 4 Audible signal = ON
Switch 2
Down No audible signal is emitted when a key is pressed.
1 2 3 4 Audible signal = OFF

3527
Remote control functions for disabled people

The radio control is provided with a 3.5 mm standard mono jack input for connecting a
detector (for disabled people) and a screw connection for installation on wheelchair or
on bedside.
Thanks to signals issued by an external sensor, the main functions of the remote control
can also be recalled by a disabled person (control devices that enable to recover the
residual capacity of movement of a disabled person).
SCANNING OF KEYS - the first signal from the external sensor starts the remote control jack input
keys scanning sequence; the key reached by the scanning sequence may be identified by
a luminous and/or audible signal.
KEY SELECTION - the second signal from the sensor stops the scanning sequence when
the selected key is reached.
CONTROL ACTIVATION - the third signal from the sensor corresponds to a standard
pressure of the selected key. A short pressure corresponds to the key being pressed for a screw connection
short time, and then released; in case of extended pressure, the remote control will wait
for a fourth signal from the sensor, which will be interpreted as the key being released.
The time between the third and the fourth signal is interpreted as an extended pressure.
The scanning time for each individual key may be changed whilst in programming
mode. The remote control is sold factory set with a standard scanning time of 1 second.
1 - Move switch no. 4 to programming mode (UP).
2 - Press keys 1 and 6 at the same time for at least 2 seconds; the first four keys light up.
3 - Press one of the lit keys to perform a scanning test to ascertain the associated
time. Scanning times are as follows: Key 1 = 2 sec., Key 2 = 1 sec., Key 3 = 0.5 sec.,
Key 4 = 0.3 sec.
4 - Press and hold down the key corresponding to the desired time for at least
2 seconds.
5 - The successful completion of the programming procedure is confirmed by the
pressed key flashing
6 - Move switch no. 4 to normal operation mode (DOWN).
BT00099-b-UK

4 channels 3528
Description
This remote control is a transmitting radio device which can drive MY HOME devices, key 4 key 1
if used together with the receiving radio interface HC/HS4575 and item L/N/NT4575N;
it gives the possibility of directly driving radio actuators F470/1, F470/2, 3526, 3526/10,
3526/16 and item 3470.
The remote control has 4 keys, the same as the number of radio channels available.
There is an orange LED which signals, when a key is pressed, that the transmission radio
has occurred. LED
Technical data
Power supply: 3V battery type CR2032 (min. duration: 2 years)
(metal and reinforced concrete walls reduce the range) key 3 key 2
Configuration
The remote control is supplied with 2 switches to define the operating mode for the
operation in radio systems (remote control and radio actuator), as shown in the figure.
In MY HOME applications leave the switch in the preset positions.
Programming
To associate a different control to each of the alarm radio remote control channels, follow
the procedure below:
1) Press the programming pushbutton of the radio interface, configured in self-learning
mode, for 3 seconds: the red LED will turn ON steadily; release the pushbutton.
2) Within 20 seconds press the key of the remote control you want to program; the red M P
LED will begin to flash, hence indicating the activation of the programming mode.
3) Within 5 minutes, set the function you want to associate to the remote control key
using the actuator and/or corresponding control; the red LED will start flashing
quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that the programming has been
completed.
4) You can repeat 1), 2) and 3) for all keys, even for a key that has already been
associated (in case you want to change it).
To cancel the programming of one of the remote control keys, follow the procedure
below:
1) Press the programming pushbutton on the radio interface for at least 8 seconds To cancel all programming conditions of the interface simultaneously, press the pin
(after 4 seconds the red LED will turn ON steadily and then after another 5 seconds it pushbutton for about 12 seconds: the red LED will turn ON steadily after 3 seconds;
will turn off). Release the key. The red LED will turn ON again steadily. after another 5 seconds, it will turn off and after another 4 seconds it will start flashing
2) If you want to cancel the programming condition of a key, press it on the remote quickly for about 2 seconds, thus confirming the cancellation of all programming
control within 20 seconds; the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, conditions.
thus confirming the cancellation. Release the key. Here you can completely reset the device by cancelling both the
BT00100-b-UK
3) From now on, the cancelled key will no longer activate any control until it is associated radio codes and the controls associated to the various remote control keys.
re-programmed.

3529
Description
The IR remote control is a device capable of performing the following functions:
- directly drive traditional devices with integrated IR receivers currently on our catalogue
(L4425, 1 channel receiver with relay output, and L4426, 2 channel receiver with 2
interlocked relay outputs); 1 2
- interface to the SCS BUS using the IR receiver L/N/NT4654N , HC/HS4654 and AM5834
3 4
IR receivers, for the creation of controls for 1 relay actuators for single loads, and for 2
relay actuators for double loads (shutters motor etc.), adjust the dimmer, generate or 5 6
recall scenarios saved in the scenario module, or operate sound systems and video door
7 8
entry systems.
The IR remote control includes: 9 10
- 16 keys that may be lit individually by a blue LED.
When a key is pressed, its light comes on and stays on until released, when the light 11 12
gradually goes off; 13 14
- 16 windows for entering an icon representing the function saved by the pushbutton;
- a buzzer emitting an audible signal when the key is pressed 15 16
- a standard 3.5mm jack input, enabling the remote control to be used through a signal
coming from a sensor for disabled people.
Technical data
Power supply: 3 Vdc (2 AAA type, 1.5 V batteries)
Absorption: such to ensure that the batteries will last for a period of
2 years, based on 100 pressures per day
Frequency: 36.7 KHz in PCM modulation
Configuration
Inside the battery housing is a 4-way Dip Switch type changeover switch with two
positions, for selecting the operating modes as indicated in the table.
BT00109-b-UK
1 2 3 4
Dip Switch changeover switch

with factory configuration

3529
Switch Position Operating mode

Switch 1 Up It lights up when the remote control key is pressed.
1 2 3 4 Key lighting = ON
Down It does not light up when the remote control key is pressed.
1 2 3 4 Key lighting = OFF
Switch 2 Up An audible signal is emitted when a key is pressed.
1 2 3 4 Audible signal = ON
Down No audible signal is emitted when a key is pressed.
1 2 3 4 Audible signal = OFF
Switch 3 Up Programming of the key scanning speed for the disabled user function.
1 2 3 4
Down Normal operation.

1 2 3 4
Remote control functions for disabled people

The radio control is provided with a 3.5 mm standard mono jack input for connecting
a detector (for disabled people) and a screw connection for installation on wheelchair
or on bedside. Thanks to signals issued by an external sensor, the main functions of the
remote control can also be recalled by a disabled person (control devices that enable to
recover the residual capacity of movement of a disabled person).
SCANNING OF KEYS - the first signal from the external sensor starts the remote control
keys scanning sequence; the key reached by the scanning sequence may be identified by
a luminous and/or audible signal.
KEY SELECTION - the second signal from the sensor stops the scanning sequence when
the selected key is reached.
CONTROL ACTIVATION - the third signal from the sensor corresponds to a standard
pressure of the selected key. A short pressure corresponds to the key being pressed for a
short time, and then released; in case of extended pressure, the remote control will wait
for a fourth signal from the sensor, which will be interpreted as the key being released.
The time between the third and the fourth signal is interpreted as an extended pressure.
- If the control activation (third closing) does not occur within three times the
! selected scanning time, the scanning procedure starts again.
- Time out due to extended pressure from jack: 1 min.
The scanning time of each individual key may be changed whilst in programming
mode.
1 - Move switch no. 3 to programming mode (UP).
2 - The first four keys light up.
3 - Press one of the lit keys to perform a scanning test to ascertain the associated time.
Scanning times are as follows:
BT00109-b-UK
Key 1 = 2 sec.
Key 2 = 1 sec.
Key 3 = 0.5 sec.
Key 4 = 0.3 sec.
4 - Press and hold down the key corresponding to the desired time for at least 2
seconds.
5 - The successful completion of the programming procedure is confirmed by the
pressed key flashing
6 - Move switch no. 3 to normal operation mode (DOWN).

Dimmer actuator BMDI1001
Description
110 – 230 Vac control device for electronic ballast or driver power supply with dimmer
function; it can supply fluorescent lamps or LED lamps and adjust their brightness 1 2 3 4 5
depending on the voltage, with values between 1 and 10V, with which they are driven.
From any specially configured control point connected to the BUS system one can switch
the lights connected ON and off or set their brightness. A short pressure of the control
key will switch the load ON or off, while an extended pressure can be used to adjust the
brightness level. 9
configuration procedures (Plug&Go, Push&Learn, Project&Download)
Technical data
Power supply: 110 - 230 Vac @ 50/60 Hz
Max. absorption: 165 mA
Number of outputs: 1 x 4.3 A
Operating: dimmer
Operating temperature: (-5) – (+ 45) °C
Max. No. of ballasts that can be connected: 160
Type of connection: – RJ45 8 7 6
– clamp input 2 x 2.5 mm2
– clamp output 2 x 1.5 mm2
and 1 x 2.5 mm2
Power/Absorption of driven loads: Incandescent lamps, halogen lamp and
Legend
compact fluorescent lamp 4.3 A / 1000 VA
1. Load status indication LED
Standards, Certifications, Marks 2. Load activation pushbutton
Standards: IEC60669 - 2 - 1 3. Learn Mode status indication LED
4. Learn Mode pushbutton
Dimensional data 5. Clamps for the connection to the 100 – 230 Vac power supply
Size: 6 DIN modules 6. 1 – 10 V output voltage clamps
7. Contact clamps
MY HOME Configuration 8. BUS RJ45 connector
(attention, it must only be used in MY HOME systems with physical configuration)
- Physical configuration, by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets.
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the Kit or the
web server. The Virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC.
BT00314-b-UK

BMDI1001
The actuator performs all the Basic operating modes that can be configured directly on
the control, apart from those which require the use of 2 interlocked relays.
1) Operating mode with Configurator in M

Actuator as Slave. Receives a control sent by a Master actuator with the same address
SLA
Pushbutton (ON monostable) ignores Room and General controls

PUL
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for point-point control. With the OFF control
the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed1) 1 – 4 1)
1) The ON control activates the Master actuator and the Slave actuator at the same time. Configurator Time (minutes)
The next OFF control deactivates the Master actuator and keeps the Slave actuator active
for the period of time set with configurator 1 - 4 connected to M of the Master actuator as 1 1
indicated in the table. 2 2
3 3
4 4
2) Operating mode with configurator in L “Selection of the minimum brightness level”: Configurator Time (minutes)
the configurator in the L position establishes the minimum output voltage between the
1 - 2 clamps when the load is ON, thus allowing the minimum intensity level to be selected. No configurator 1
5 different voltage levels can be selected, so that the standard 0-10V is possible as well as 1 1.5
the standard 1-10V.
2 2
3 0
4 0.5
3) Configurator in TYPE “Selecting the type of load used”: Configurator TYPE Load driven
In the TYPE position the configurator determines the type of load used on the basis of the
following table. If ballasts for fluorescent lamps with typical switching ON delay of 1.5 s are No configurator Fluorescent ballast
used, the device will send the soft/start switching ON control taking account of the delay. If 1 LED driver
power supplies for LED lamps must be controlled instead the device will send an immediate
soft/start switching ON control.
Using the Virtual configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed
below:
- dimmer
Lighting Management configuration
BT00314-b-UK
When installed in a Lighting Management system, the device can be configured in the
following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
Using the Virtual Configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed
below:
- dimmer
chapter.
BMDI1001
Operating mode
When in Test mode, by pressing the pushbutton of the actuator it will be possible to enable or disable the associated load.
DIMMER FUNCTION
0% 100 %
ON-OFF
0%
Wiring diagram
L
N
F881NA/16 F881NA/2 ON/OFF

230V 230V
C16 C2
BT00314-b-UK

Passive infrared
ceiling sensor BMSE1001
Description
Device with cover
Control and command device, powered by the SCS BUS, with two different sensors, the 1 2
combination of which enables managing the light level inside the room, taking into
account both the presence of people, and the level of natural light, therefore ensuring
efficient energy savings and better user comfort.
The device has an IP 20 protection index, and is intended for ceiling mounted installation.
The sensor is fitted with:
- BUS wiring connector;
- PIR movement sensor;
- light sensor;
- internal microcontroller;
- two-colour LED;
- multifunction key;
- configurator socket. 4 3
PIR movement sensor:
it detects the presence of people inside the room. It’s used inside rooms with free view, Device without cover
without obstacles, for the detection of people.
Light sensor:
it detects the light level inside the room, switching the load ON or OFF based on whether 5
the light threshold set on the sensor (adjustable by the user) is lower/higher than the
value detected. The light sensor has priority on the movement sensor: if the PIR sensor
detects a presence, but natural light is sufficient, no load management signal is sent
by the device. In order to avoid continuous switching ON and OFF, a tolerance on the 6
threshold values must be set.
The sensor may be installed in a MY HOME system and can be configured both physically
and virtually, or as a component of the Lighting Management system using specific
configuration procedures (Plug&Go, Push&Learn, Project&Download).

Power supply: 27 Vdc 1. LED indicator:
Absorption: 10 mA - fixed green = BUS detected
Operation: ON/OFF, dimmer
- orange flashing once = movement detected.
Operating temperature: (-5) – (+45) °C
Sensor type: PIR - orange-green flashing quickly = no configuration or wrong configuration.
Protection index: IP20 - orange-green flashing for 1 second = configuration being performed
Sensitivity: 1 – 2000 lux - red flashing quickly = acquiring the Set Point
Time delay: 30 s – 255 h
- red-green flashing quickly = sensor calibration being performed
Coverage of the PIR sensor at 2.5 m: Ø 6m(28m2)
Covering angle: 90/360° 2. Light sensor
Maximum installation height: 4m 3. Infrared PIR movement sensor
Type of connection: screw clamps 4. Multifunction key:
- Short pressure to select the device when using the virtual configuration.
- Pressure for 2 seconds, for the acquisition of the Set Point when working in Stand
BT00295-a-UK
Standards, Certifications, Marks Alone Mode.

EN 50428 - Two short pressures to enter the Push&Learn procedure during operation with the
Lighting Management system.
- A short pressure, followed by an extended pressure of 10 sec. to reset the sensor.
5. BUS connection screw clamps

BMSE1001
Dimensional data Covering range for item BMSE 1001
The movement sensor is supplied with a lens with actual covering range area as
75 mm shown in the figure below.
2.5 m
8m
m
40 mm 4 4
Adjustable sensitivity level

Low Medium High Max.
A (m) Ø (m) S (m2) Ø (m) S (m2) Ø (m) S (m2) Ø (m) S (m2)
2.5 2 3 3 7 5 20 6 28
20 mm 3 3 7 4 13 6 28 7 38
15 mm 4 3 7 5 20 7 38 8 50
Legend:
A = installation height (m)
Ø = diameter (m)
S = surface (m2)
The features of the device are defined by 6 configurator sockets, and their functions
depend on the operating mode:
Room: A=1–9
Light point: PL = 1 – 9
Mode: M=0–8
PIR movement sensor sensitivity: S =0 – 3

Load ON time: T=0–9
WARNING: Addresses A = 0 and PL = 0 do not exist

BT00295-a-UK

BMSE1001

The device controls the load with the address indicated in A and PL. When a movement is detected, if the light level is lower than the set level, the
device switches the assigned load on, and keeps it on until the time set with the configurator connected to T expires (Auto Mode). The PIR movement
0
sensor sensitivity is set with the configurator connected to S. For correct operation, the sensor lighting set point must be set (see procedure). If the user
switches the light off manually with a control device, the movement sensor is disabled until a movement is detected, for a time set in T.
In this mode the sensor operates as a pure twilight switch, the movement sensor is disabled. When the light level falls below the set threshold, the
device switches the load on, and switches it off when the light level exceeds the threshold again (Auto Mode). Configure A = 1-9 and PL = 1-9. GEN, 1
ROOM and GR configurators cannot be connected. In this mode configurators S and T are not connected.
In this mode the device does not directly manage a load, but sends to the MH200N scenario programmer the notification of a movement and the
lighting value. In this case the device address will be connected to A and PL, which must be unique within the system. Therefore, the GEN, ROOM and
2
GR configurators cannot be connected. In this mode the S and T configurators are not connected, as these parameters are managed directly by the
scenario programmer.
In this mode the device directly manages the load, maintaining a constant light level inside the room (this mode is only valid if the sensor manages a
dimmer); when a movement is detected the device switches the light on and keeps it on based on the presence of people and the desired light level
(Auto Mode). When a movement is detected, if the light level is lower than the set level, the device switches the assigned load on, and keeps it on until
the time set with the configurator connected to T expires.
3
During its operation the sensor maintains a constant light level based on the configurator connected to D; for example, when the outside light level
increases, the device decreases the brightness of the load driven. For correct operation, the sensor lighting set point must be set (see procedure).
It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor set-point until the next
switching ON.
In this mode the device operate as a pure twilight switch and manages the load directly, maintaining a constant light level inside the room, disabling
the presence sensor (this mode is only valid if the sensor manages a dimmer). The switching ON of the load is manual, while the switching OFF is
managed automatically by the sensor based on the desired light level (Eco Mode). When the light is off the sensor therefore does not switch the load
on, but waits for the user to do so using a manual control. During its operation the sensor maintains a constant light level based on the configurator
connected to D; for example, when the natural light level increases, the device decreases the brightness of the load driven. Once the load has been 4
switched off, if the natural light level decreases the sensor will no longer switch the load on, but will wait for the user to do so manually. For correct
operation, the sensor lighting set point must be set (see procedure).
It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor set-point until the next
switching ON.
The device controls the load with the address indicated in A and PL (SEE FUNCTION WITH M=0). The switching ON of the load is manual and the device
keeps the load on based on the presence of people and the desired light level (Eco Mode). 5
In this mode the device maintains a constant light level inside the room (SEE FUNCTION WITH M=3). The switching ON of the load is manual and the
device keeps the load on based on the presence of people and the desired light level (Eco Mode). 6
In this mode the sensor operates as a pure twilight switch, the movement sensor is disabled (SEE FUNCTION WITH M=1). The switching ON of the load
is manual and the device keeps the load on based on desired light level (Eco Mode). 7
In this mode the device operates as a pure twilight switch and directly manages a load, maintaining a constant light level inside the room, disabling
the movement sensor (SEE FUNCTION WITH M=4). When the light level falls below the set threshold, the device switches the load on, and switches it 8
off when the light level exceeds the threshold again (Auto Mode).
WARNING: when managing scenarios using the information from the sensor, using the MH200N scenario programmer, the sensor must be configured exclusively in M=2 mode.
BT00295-a-UK

BMSE1001
1) Table of the active load times based on the configurator connected to T: 2) Sensitivity table for the PIR movement sensor based on the configurator
connected to S:
Configurator in T Active load time in min. Configurator in S Sensitivity

No configurator 15 No configurator Low
1 30 sec. 1 Medium
2 1 2 High
3 2 3 Very high
4 5
5 10 Procedure for the acquisition of the sensor lighting set-point:
6 15
- Press the pushbutton for two seconds.
7 20 - The LED will start flashing red quickly.
8 30 - Move away from under the sensor, so that it can perform a correct measurement
- After about 20 sec. the LED stops flashing and the sensor finishes the acquisition.
9 40
NOTE: it is important that the set-point is reacquired every time the sensor position is
changed, and every time that what is under the sensor changes.
Using the Virtual configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed When installed in a Lighting Management system, the device can be configured in the
- local lighting/movement detector - Plug&Go (see the dedicated technical guide)
- local lighting sensor - Push&Learn
- local movement sensor - Project&Download,
- central lighting detector
- central lighting sensor
below:
- central movement sensor
- local lighting/movement detector
- local lighting sensor
- local movement sensor
- central lighting detector
chapter.
Installation mode
The sensor must never be installed near heat sources or near the splitter of the cooling
system.
BT00295-a-UK

BMSE1001
BT00295-a-UK

Wide band
wall/ceiling sensor BMSE2001
Description
Control and command device, powered by the SCS BUS, with two different sensors, the
combination of which enables managing the light level inside the room, taking into 6
efficient energy savings and better user comfort.
1
The device has an IP42 protection index and must be installed indoors, either on the wall
or the ceiling, using the bracket supplied. 2
- RJ45 clamp for the connection of the BUS cable;
- passive infrared PIR movement sensor; 3
- light sensor;
- two-way IR receiver for adjustment using the remote control BMS04001 and BMS04002;
- pushbutton for enabling the adjustment of the parameters using the remote control;
- configurator socket.
it detects the presence of people inside the room. It’s used inside rooms with free view,
without obstacles, for the detection of people. 4
5
Light sensor:
it detects the light level inside the room, switching the load ON or OFF based on whether
by the device. In order to avoid continuous switching ON and OFF, a tolerance on the
7
Standards, Certifications, Marks

Standards: Safety standard:
- CE directive EN 60669-2-1

Power supply: 27 Vdc 1. Light sensor
Absorption: 12 mA 2. Infrared PIR movement sensor
Operation: ON/OFF and dimmer 3. Two-way IR receiver
Functions: Auto/Eco/ Walktrough 4. Pushbutton enabling remote control adjustments
Sensor type: PIR (attention, it must only be used in MY HOME systems with physical configuration)
BT00296-a-UK

6. LED indicator
Sensitivity: 1 – 2000 lux
Time delay: 30 s-255 h 7. RJ45 clamp for the connection of the BUS cable - RJ45/SCS BMAC1001 adaptor
Coverage of the PIR sensor at 2.5 m: 2 m x 12 m(24 m2)
Covering angle: 90/30°
Maximum installation height: 6m
Type of connection: RJ45

BMSE2001
Dimensional data
115.86 mm Coverage of the PIR sensor

115.86 mm
30°
2.5 m
mmmm
91 91
m
0 6 12
1.25
0
0.75

A L P S L P S L P S L P S
(m) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2)
mmmm
69.6
2.5 1.5 11 15.5 1.5 11 15.5 1.5 11 17 1.5 11 17

69.6
3 1.5 11 15.5 1.5 11 15.5 1.5 11.5 17 1.5 11.5 17

4 1.5 11.5 17 1.5 11.5 17 1.5 12 20 2 12 20
5 1.5 11.5 17 1.5 11.5 17 1.5 12 20 2 12 20
6 1.5 11.5 17 1.5 11.5 17 1.5 12 20 2 12 20
Legend:
L = width (m)
P = depth (m)
S = surface (m2)
MY HOME configuration Physical configuration

When installed in a MY HOME system, the device may be configured in two ways: The features of the device are defined by 6 configurator sockets, and their
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets. functions depend on the operating mode:
the web server. The Virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC. Room: A= 1–9
Mode: M=0–4
PIR movement sensor sensitivity: S = 0 – 3

Load ON time: T= 0–9
Lighting sensor sensitivity: D= 0–5
BT00296-a-UK

BMSE2001

The device controls the load with the address indicated in A and PL. When a movement is detected, if the lighting level is lower than the set level, the device
switches the assigned load on, and keeps it on until the time set with the configurator connected to T expires (auto mode). The PIR movement sensor sensitivity is
0
set with the configurator connected to S. For correct operation, it is necessary to set the sensitivity of the lighting sensor with the configurator connected to D. If the
user switches the light off manually using a control device, the movement sensor is disabled until a movement is detected, for a time indicated by T.
In this mode the sensor operates as a pure twilight switch, the movement sensor is disabled. When the light level falls below the set threshold, the device switches the load
on, and switches it off when the light level exceeds the threshold again (Auto Mode). Configure A = 1-9 and PL = 1-9. GEN, ROOM and GR configurators cannot be connected. 1
In this mode configurators S and T are not connected.
In this mode the device does not directly manage a load, but sends to the MH200N scenario programmer the notification of a movement and the lighting value. In this case
the device address will be connected to A and PL, which must be unique within the system. Therefore, the GEN, ROOM and GR configurators cannot be connected. In this mode 2
the S and T configurators are not connected, as these parameters are managed directly by the scenario programmer.
In this mode the device directly manages the load, maintaining a constant light level inside the room (this mode is only valid if the sensor manages a dimmer); when a
movement is detected the device switches the light on and keeps it on based on the presence of people and the desired light level (Auto Mode). When a movement is
detected, if the lighting level is lower than the set level, the device switches the assigned load on, and keeps it on until the time set with the configurator connected to T
3
expires. During its operation the sensor maintains a constant light level based on the configurator connected to D; for example, when the natural light level increases, the
device decreases the brightness of the load driven. For correct operation, it is necessary to set the sensitivity (Set point) of the lighting sensor with the configurator connected
to D. It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor Set point until the next switching ON.
In this mode the device operates as a twilight device, and directly manages a load, maintaining a constant light level inside the room (this mode is only valid if the sensor
manages a dimmer), and disabling the movement sensor. The load is switched on manually and switched off automatically by the sensor, depending on the desired light
level (Eco mode). When the light is off the sensor therefore does not switch the load on, but waits for the user to do so using a manual control. During its operation the sensor
maintains a constant light level based on the configurator connected to D; for example, when the natural light level increases, the device decreases the brightness of the load
4
driven. Once the load has been switched off, if the natural light level decreases the sensor will no longer switch the load on, but will wait for the user to do so manually. For
correct operation, it is necessary to set the sensitivity (Set point) of the lighting sensor with the configurator connected to D. It is possible to change the threshold set using a
control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor set-point until the next switching ON. It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that
changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor Set point until the next switching ON.
1) Table of the active load times based on the configurator connected to T: 3) Sensitivity table for the ligthing sensor based on the configurator connected to D:
Configurator in T Active load time in min. Configurator in D Sensitivity in Lux

No configurator 15 No configurator Wall mounted: 300 Ceiling mounted: 500
1 30 sec. 1 20
2 1 2 100
3 2 3 300
4 5 4 500
5 10 5 1000
6 15
7 20
8 30
9 40
BT00296-a-UK
2) Sensitivity table for the PIR movement sensor based on the configurator connected to S:
Configurator in S Sensitivity
No configurator Low
1 Medium
2 High
3 Very high

BMSE2001
below:
- PLUS IR scenario control
chapter.
BT00296-a-UK

BMSE2001
Operating mode
Auto mode: Eco mode:
The switching ON/OFF of the load are ordered automatically by the dimmer/actuator, The load is switched ON manually and switched off automatically by the sensor, depending
depending on people’s presence and the desired light level as detected by the BUS on people’s presence and the desired light level. The ECO mode requires the installation
sensor. The AUTO mode does not require the installation of a BUS control. of a control. The function of the pushbutton is mainly to activate the automatism of
However, it is nevertheless possible to add a BUS control, with the function of forcing the the sensor: at the first pressure, the sensor compares the desired light level with the
switching ON/OFF of the automatism set by the dimmer/actuator. actual light level inside the room, and decides if the lights must be switched on or not.
The system remains in manual operation while a presence is being detected: after the A subsequent pressure of the pushbutton will force the switching ON/OFF of the
switching OFF time delay due to non-detection of presence has elapsed, the system automatism determined by the sensor. The system remains in manual operation while
returns to automatic mode. a presence is being detected: after the switching OFF time delay due to non-detection
of presence has elapsed, the system returns to automatic mode. A further functionality
of the ECO mode is the temporary AUTO mode operation (30 seconds), following a
switching OFF due to no presence being detected. After 30 seconds from switching OFF,
the sensor returns to operate in ECO mode, therefore without performing an automatic
switching ON.
59 min 59 0min
s 0s
255 h 25530h s 30 s
255 h 30 s
59 min 0s
255 h 25530h s 30 s
255 h 30 s
In addition to the two modes above, the following functions are also available:
Walkthrough: the device switches the lights off 3 minutes after somebody has entered
the room, if no presence is detected for 20 seconds (if the time delay is set to less than
3 minutes, that value will apply). If a presence is detected within the 20 seconds, the
system uses the set time delay.
Audible signal: 1 minute, 30 seconds, and 10 seconds before the expiry of the set time
BT00296-a-UK
delay, an audible signal is emitted 255 h 30 s 255 h 30 s
Settable parameters
Parameters Adjustment range Factory settings

Time delay 30 s – 255 h 15 min
PIR Sensitivity (%) 0 – 100 100
LUX Sensitivity (Lux) 1 – 2000 300 +/- 15%
Operating mode1) Auto/Eco Auto
Walktrough Enabled/Disabled Enabled
NOTE: All parameter adjustments can be performed using the physical configuration, the IR remote control, or the PC.
1) these modes may be set using the physical configuration
BMSE2001
The device is intended for indoor installation, on the wall or the ceiling, using the bracket supplied.
Wall mounted installation Ceiling mounted installation
1 2 1 2
3 4 3
5
BT00296-a-UK

Narrow beam
wall/ceiling mounted sensor BMSE2002
Description
efficient energy savings and better user comfort. 1
The device has an IP42 protection index and must be installed indoors, either on the wall 2
or the ceiling, using the bracket supplied.
3
- passive infrared PIR movement sensor;
- light sensor;
it detects the presence of people inside the room. It’s used inside rooms with free view, 4
Light sensor:
threshold values must be set. 7


Functions: Auto/Eco/Walktrough
4. Pushbutton enabling remote control adjustments
Sensor type: PIR 5. Configurator socket
BT00297-a-UK
Sensitivity: 1 – 2000 lux 6. LED indicator

Time delay: 30 s - 255 h 7. RJ45 clamp for the connection of the BUS cable - RJ45/SCS BMAC1001 adaptor
Coverage of the PIR sensor at 2.5 m: 11 m x 14 m (120 m2)
Maximum installation height: 6 m

BMSE2002
Dimensional data
Coverage of the PIR sensor

Copertura del sensore PIR
115.86 mm
115.86 mm
5.5
3.5
0 90°
91 mm
3.5
91 mm
5.5
m
2.5 m
m
4 6 14

(m) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2)
mmmm
2.5 10 13.5 65 10 14 68 10.5 14 68 11 14 70

69.669.6
3 10 13.5 66 10.5 14 68 10.5 14 70 11 14 70

4 10 14 68 10.5 14 70 11.0 14 76 11 14.5 76
5 10 14 68 10.5 14 70 11.0 14 76 11 14.5 76
6 10 14 68 10.5 14 70 11.0 14 76 11 14.5 76
Legend:
L = width (m)
P = depth (m)
S = surface (m2)
MY HOME Configuration Physical Configuration

When installed in a MY HOME system, the device may be configured in two ways: The features of the device are defined by 6 configurator sockets, and their functions
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets. depend on the operating mode:
Mode: M=0–4
PIR movement sensor sensitivity: S = 0 – 3

Sensitivity of the lighting sensor: D = 0 – 5
BT00297-a-UK

BMSE2002

The device controls the load with the address indicated in A and PL. When a movement is detected, if the light level is lower than the set level, the device
switches the assigned load on, and keeps it on until the time set with the configurator connected to T expires (Auto Mode). The PIR movement sensor
sensitivity is set with the configurator connected to S. For correct operation, it is necessary to set the sensitivity of the lighting sensor with the configurator 0
connected to D. If the user switches the light off manually using a control device, the movement sensor is disabled until a movement is detected, for a
time indicated by T.
In this mode the sensor operates as a pure twilight switch, the movement sensor is disabled. When the light level falls below the set threshold, the device switches
the load on, and switches it off when the light level exceeds the threshold again (Auto Mode). Configure A = 1-9 and PL = 1-9. GEN, ROOM and GR configurators 1
cannot be connected. In this mode configurators S and T are not connected.
In this mode the device does not directly manage a load, but sends to the MH200N scenario programmer the notification of a movement and the lighting value.
In this case the device address will be connected to A and PL, which must be unique within the system. Therefore, the GEN, ROOM and GR configurators cannot be 2
connected. In this mode the S and T configurators are not connected, as these parameters are managed directly by the scenario programmer.
In this mode the device directly manages the load, maintaining a constant light level inside the room (this mode is only valid if the sensor manages a dimmer); when
a movement is detected the device switches the light on and keeps it on based on the presence of people and the desired light level (Auto Mode). When a movement
is detected, if the lighting level is lower than the set level, the device switches the assigned load on, and keeps it on until the time set with the configurator connected
to T expires. During its operation the sensor maintains a constant light level based on the configurator connected to D; for example, when the natural light level 3
increases, the device decreases the brightness of the load driven. For correct operation, it is necessary to set the sensitivity (Set point) of the lighting sensor with the
configurator connected to D. It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor Set point
until the next switching ON.
In this mode the device operates as a twilight device, and directly manages a load, maintaining a constant light level inside the room (this mode is only valid if the
sensor manages a dimmer), and disabling the movement sensor. The load is switched on manually and switched off automatically by the sensor, depending on the
desired light level (Eco mode). When the light is off the sensor therefore does not switch the load on, but waits for the user to do so using a manual control. During
its operation the sensor maintains a constant light level based on the configurator connected to D; for example, when the natural light level increases, the device
4
decreases the brightness of the load driven. Once the load has been switched off, if the natural light level decreases the sensor will no longer switch the load on, but
will wait for the user to do so manually. For correct operation, it is necessary to set the sensitivity (Set point) of the lighting sensor with the configurator connected
to D. It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor set-point until the next switching
ON. It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor Set point until the next switching ON.
1) Table of the active load times based on the configurator connected to T: 3) Sensitivity table for the ligthing sensor based on the configurator connected to D:
Configurator in T Active load time in min. Configurator in D Sensitivity in Lux

No configurator 15 No configurator Wall mounted: 300 Ceiling mounted: 500
1 30 sec. 1 20
2 1 2 100
3 2 3 300
4 5 4 500
5 10 5 1000
6 15
7 20
8 30
9 40
BT00297-a-UK
2) Sensitivity table for the PIR movement sensor based on the configurator connected to S:
Configurator in S Sensitivity
No configurator Low
1 Medium
2 High
3 Very high

BMSE2002

below:
chapter.
BT00297-a-UK

BMSE2002
Operating mode
The switching ON/OFF of the load are ordered automatically by the dimmer/actuator, The load is switched ON manually and switched off automatically by the sensor,
depending on people’s presence and the desired light level as detected by the BUS depending on people’s presence and the desired light level. The ECO mode requires
sensor. The AUTO mode does not require the installation of a BUS control. the installation of a control. The function of the pushbutton is mainly to activate the
However, it is nevertheless possible to add a BUS control, with the function of forcing the automatism of the sensor: at the first pressure, the sensor compares the desired light
switching ON/OFF of the automatism set by the dimmer/actuator. level with the actual light level inside the room, and decides if the lights must be
The system remains in manual operation while a presence is being detected: after the switched ON or not.
switching OFF time delay due to non-detection of presence has elapsed, the system A subsequent pressure of the pushbutton will force the switching ON/OFF of the
returns to automatic mode. automatism determined by the sensor. The system remains in manual operation while
a presence is being detected: after the switching OFF time delay due to non-detection
switching ON.
59 min 59 0min
s 0s
255 h 25530h s 30 s
255 h 30 s
59 min 0s
255 h 25530h s 30 s
255 h 30 s
Walkthrough: The device switches the lights off 3 minutes after somebody has entered
Audible signal: 1 minute, 30 seconds, and 10 seconds before the expiry of the set time 255 h 30 s 255 h 30 s
delay, an audible signal is emitted

BT00297-a-UK
Settable parameters

NOTE: All parameters adjustments can be performed using the physical configuration, the IR remote control, or the PC.
BMSE2002
1 2 1 2
3 4 3
5
BT00297-a-UK

Two-way narrow beam
Description
or the ceiling, using the bracket supplied. 2

- passive infrared PIR movement sensor; 3
- light sensor;
PIR movement sensor: 4
5
Light sensor:
76


BT00298-a-UK

Sensitivity: 1 – 2000 lux 6. LED indicator
Time delay: 30 s -255 h 7. RJ45 clamp for the connection of the BUS cable - RJ45/SCS BMAC1001 adaptor
Coverage of the PIR sensor at 2.5 m: 2 m x 9 m + 9 m (36 m2)

BMSE2003
Dimensional data
115.86 mm
115.86 mm Coverage of the PIR sensor
1.25
0
91 mm 91 mm
0.75
m
9 0 9

(m) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2)
69.6 mm69.6 mm
2.5 1 15.5 20 1.5 16 22 1.5 16 24 1.5 16.5 26

3 1.5 16 22 1.5 16 24 1.5 16.5 28 2 17 31
4 1.5 16 26 1.8 17 31 2 18 32 2 18 34
5 1.5 16 26 1.8 17 31 2 18 32 2 18 34
6 1.5 16 26 1.8 17 31 2 18 32 2 18 34
Legend:
L = width (m)
P = depth (m)
S = surface (m2)
Example of coverage of the PIR sensor with devices BMSE2003 and BMSE2004 (e.g. a corridor).
1.75 x H 1xH 1xH 1xH 1xH 1.75 x H

BT00298-a-UK
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the 3503N Kit or Room: A= 1–9
the web server. The Virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC. Light point: PL = 1 – 9
Mode: M=0–4
PIR movement sensor sensitivity: S= 0–3
Sensitivity of the lighting sensor: D= 0–5

BMSE2003

In this mode the device does not directly manage a load, but sends to the MH200N scenario programmer the notification of a movement and the lighting value. In this
case the device address will be connected to A and PL, which must be unique within the system. Therefore, the GEN, ROOM and GR configurators cannot be connected. 2
In this mode the S and T configurators are not connected, as these parameters are managed directly by the scenario programmer.
4
1) Table of the active load times based on the configurator connected to T: 2) Sensitivity table for the PIR movement sensor based on the configurator connected to S:

1 30 sec. 1 Medium
2 1 2 High
3 2 3 Very high
4 5
5 10
6 15 3) Sensitivity table for the ligthing sensor based on the configurator connected to D:
7 20 Configurator in D Sensitivity in Lux

8 30 No configurator Wall mounted: 300 Ceiling mounted: 500
9 40 1 20
BT00298-a-UK
2 100
3 300
4 500
5 1000

BMSE2003

below:
chapter.
BT00298-a-UK

BMSE2003
Operating mode
The switching ON/OFF of the load are ordered automatically by the dimmer/actuator, The load is switched on manually and switched off automatically by the sensor,
switching ON.
59 min 59 0min
s 0s
255 h 25530h s 30 s
255 h 25530h s 30 s 255 h 30 s
59 min 0s
255 h 30 s
delay, an audible signal is emitted 255 h 30 s 255 h 30 s
Settable parameters
BT00298-a-UK

Time delay 30 – 255 h 15 min
Note: all the parameter adjustments can be performed using the physical configuration, the IR remote control, or the PC.

BMSE2003
1 2 1 2
3 3
4
5
BT00298-a-UK

One-way narrow beam
Description
2
3
- light sensor;
4
Light sensor:
by the device. In order to avoid continuous switching ON and OFF, a tolerance on the 7


6. LED indicator
BT00299-a-UK

Time delay: 30 s -255 h 7. RJ45 clamp for the connection of the BUS cable - RJ45/SCS BMAC1001 adaptor

BMSE2004
Dimensional data
115.86 mm
115.86 mm
70°
5
3
91 mm 91 mm
3
5
12°
2.5 m
m
3 10 18 27

69.6 mm69.6 mm
(m) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2)
2.5 8.5 25.5 95 9 26 103 9.5 27 115 9.5 27 115
3 9.5 26 107 9.5 26.5 111 9.5 27 116 10 27 117
4 9.5 26.5 110 9.5 27 116 10 28 123 10 28.5 128
5 9.5 26.5 110 9.5 27 116 10 28 123 10 28.5 128
6 9.5 26.5 110 9.5 27 116 10 28 123 10 28.5 128
Legend:
L = width (m)
P = depth (m)
S = surface (m2)
Example of coverage of the PIR sensor with devices BMSE2003 and BMSE2004 (e.g. a corridor).
1.75 x H 1xH 1xH 1xH 1xH 1.75 x H

BT00299-a-UK
Mode: M=0–4
PIR movement sensor sensitivity: S=0–3

Lighting sensor sensitivity: D=0–5
WARNING: there is no address A = 0 and PL = 0
BMSE2004

4

1 30 sec. 1 Medium
2 1 2 High
3 2 3 Very high
4 5
5 10

9 40 1 20
BT00299-a-UK
2 100
3 300
4 500
5 1000

BMSE2004

below:
chapter.
BT00299-a-UK

BMSE2004
Operating mode
The switching ON/OFF of the load are ordered automatically by the dimmer/actuator, The load is switched ON manually and switched off automatically by the sensor,
switching ON.
59 min 59 0min
s 0s
255 h 25530h s 30 s
255 h 30 s
255 h 25530h s 30 s 59 min 0s
255 h 30 s
255 h 30 s 255 h 30 s
BT00299-a-UK
Settable parameters

Time delay 30 – 255 h 15 min
NOTE: All parameter adjustments can be performed using the physical configuration, the IR remote control, or the PC.
BMSE2004
1 2 1 2
3 3
4
5
BT00299-a-UK

Double technology
Description
Control and command device, powered by the SCS BUS, with three different sensors,
the combination of which enables managing the light level inside the room, taking into 5
2

- RJ45 clamp for the connection of the BUS cable 3
- US ultrasound movement sensor
- light sensor;
- two-way IR receiver for adjustment using the remote control BMS04001 and BMS04002
- pushbutton for enabling the adjustment of the parameters using the remote control 4
- configurator socket
without obstacles, for the detection of people.
US movement sensor:
it detects the presence of people inside the controlled room thanks to the emission of
ultrasound pulses, detecting any return echo caused by the presence of people within
the rated covering range. It’s used in rooms where obstacles are present.
Light sensors:
the light threshold set on the sensor (adjustable by the user) is lower/higher than the 8
Standards, Certifications, Marks Legend

Standards: Safety standard: 1. Light sensor
- CE directive EN 60669-2-1 2. Infrared PIR movement sensor
3. US ultrasound movement sensor
Technical data
4. Two-way IR receiver
Power supply: 27 Vdc 5. LED indicator
Absorption: 17 mA
BT00300-a-UK

Operation: ON/OFF and dimmer
Functions: Auto/Eco/Walktrough 7. Configurator socket
Sensor type: PIR and US 8. RJ45 clamp for the connection of the BUS cable - RJ45/SCS BMAC1001 adaptor
Time delay: 30 s – 255 h
Maximum installation height: 6 m
BMSE2005
Dimensional data
116 mm 2.5 m
116 mm
14 m
m
2 7
7m
mm
9191 mm

PIR L P S L P S L P S L P S
(m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2)
2.5 3 1 10 5 3 20 8 4 29 10 5 39
3 3 1 10 5 3 20 8 4 29 10 5 39
4 3 2 14 6 3 28 9 5 42 12 6 57
5 4 2 19 7 4 38 11 5 58 14 7 77
6 4 2 25 8 4 50 12 6 75 16 8 100
mm
7070 mm

US L P S L P S L P S L P S
(m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2) (m) (m) (m2)
2.5 4 2 19 7 4 38 11 5 58 14 7 77
3 4 2 19 7 4 38 11 5 58 14 7 77
4 4 2 19 7 4 38 11 5 58 14 7 77
5 4 2 19 7 4 38 11 5 58 14 7 77
6 3 2 14 6 3 28 9 5 42 12 6 57
When installed in a MY HOME system, the device may be configured in two ways: Legend:
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets. L = width (m)
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the 3503N Kit or P = depth (m)
the web server. The Virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC. S = surface (m2)
The features of the device are defined by 6 configurator sockets, and their functions
depend on the operating mode:
BT00300-a-UK
Room: A= 1–9
Mode: M=0–4
PIR movement sensor sensitivity: S= 0–3

Lighting sensor sensitivity: D= 0–5

BMSE2005

connected to D. If the user switches the light off manually using a control device, the movement sensor is disabled until a movement is detected, for a time
indicated by T.
In this mode the sensor operates as a pure twilight switch, the movement sensor is disabled. When the light level falls below the set threshold, the device switches the
load on, and switches it off when the light level exceeds the threshold again (Auto Mode). Configure A = 1-9 and PL = 1-9. GEN, ROOM and GR configurators cannot 1
be connected. In this mode configurators S and T are not connected.
configurator connected to D. It is possible to change the threshold set using a control that changes the brightness: this new value is set as a new sensor Set point until
the next switching ON.
4

1 30 sec. 1 Medium
2 1 2 High
3 2 3 Very high
4 5
5 10

9 40 1 20
BT00300-a-UK
2 100
3 300
4 500
5 1000

BMSE2005

below:
chapter.
BT00300-a-UK

BMSE2005
Operating mode
The switching ON/OFF of the load are ordered automatically by the dimmer/actuator, The load is switched on manually and switched off automatically by the sensor,
The system remains in manual operation while a presence is being detected: after the switched on or not.
switching ON.
59 min 59 0min
s 0s
255 h 25530h s 30 s
255 h 25530h s 30 s
255 h 30 s
255 h 30 s 59 min 0s
255 h 30 s 255 h 30 s
Settable parameters
BT00300-a-UK

PIR Sensitivity (%) 30 s – 100 100
US Sensitivity (%) 0 – 100 100
Note: all the parameter adjustments can be performed using the physical configuration, the IR remote control, or the PC.
BMSE2005
1 2 1 2
3 3
4
5
BT00300-a-UK

1 relay actuator
in DIN module BMSW1001
Description
1 2 3 4
1 relay actuator for single loads up to 16 A at 230 Vac and installation inside DIN rail
switchboards or distribution boards. This device is fitted with local load control
pushbuttons.
configuration procedures (Plug&Go, Push&Learn, Project&Download) 8
Technical data
Absorption: 5 mA
Dissipated power with max. load: 2.8 W
Number of outputs: 1 x 16 A
Operation: ON/OFF
Operating temperature: (- 5) – (+45) °C
Type of connection: – RJ45
– clamp output 2 x 1.5 mm2 and 1 x 2.5 mm2
Cable section 2.5 mm2
7 6 5
Incandescent lamps - Halogen lamp LED lamp
Electronic transformer - Ferromagnetic transformers Legend
1. L1 Load status indication LED
2. Learn Mode status indication LED
4. Clamps for the connection to the 100 – 240 Vac power supply
230 Vac 3680 W 16 A 500 VA 2.1 A
5. L1 load connection clamps
6. L1 Load activation pushbutton
Linear fluorescent lamp Compact fluorescent lamp
7. BUS RJ45 connector- RJ45 BUS connector – RJ45/SCS adaptor, item BMAC1001 -
10 X (2 X 36 W) 4.3 A 1150 W 5A

Standards: IEC60669 - 2 - 1
BT00311-b-UK
Dimensional data
Size: 4 DIN modules

BMSW1001
MY HOME Configuration
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the 3503N Kit or the

PUL
SLA
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for a point-point type control. With the OFF
control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed1) 1 – 4 1)
1) Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control activates the Configurator Time (minutes)
light (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time.
The OFF control switches the light OFF immediately and leaves the fan working for the time 1 1
set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table. 2 2
3 3
4 4
below:
- light actuator

following ways:
- Plug&Go (see the dedicated technical guide)
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
BT00311-b-UK
below:
- light actuator
chapter.

BMSW1001
Operating mode
Wiring diagram
L
N
F881NA/16 F881NA/2
230V 230V
C16 C2
BT00311-b-UK

2 relay actuator
Description
1 2 3 4
Actuator with 2 independent relays for single loads up to 16 A at 230 Vac and installation
inside DIN rail switchboards or distribution boards.
This device is fitted with local load control pushbuttons.
The PL1 and PL2 positions can never have the same configurator, because the device
cannot manage the interlock of the 2 relays. This means that it cannot manage motors 8
of rolling shutters, curtains, etc.
The actuator may be installed in a MY HOME system and can be configured both
physically and virtually, or as a component of the Lighting Management system, using
specific configuration procedures (Plug&Go, Push&Learn, Project&Download).
Technical data 1 2

Absorption: 5 mA
Dissipated power with max. load: 1.7 W
Operation: ON/OFF
Operating temperature: (-5 ) – (+45) °C
7 6 5
Cable section: 2.5 mm2
Power/Absorption of driven loads: Legend
Incandescent lamps - Halogen lamp LED lamp 1. L1, L2 Load status indication LED
Electronic transformer - Ferromagnetic transformers
4. Clamps for the connection to the 100 – 240 Vac power supply
5. L1, L2 load connection clamps
230 Vac 3680 W 16 A 500 VA 2.1 A 6. L1, L2 Load activation pushbutton
7. BUS RJ45 connector
Linear fluorescent lamp Compact fluorescent lamp 8. Configurator socket
10 X (2 X 36 W) 4.3 A 1150 W 5A

BT00312-b-UK
Dimensional data
Size: 4 DIN modules

BMSW1002
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the kit or the Web
server. The Virtual Configurator software must be installed on the PC.

Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates;
none – 4 1)
the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed 1). This mode is only operative if PL1≠PL2.
SLA

PUL
1) Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control activates Configurator Time (minutes)
the light (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time. The OFF
control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for the time set with No configurator 0
configurator 0 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table. 1 1
2 2
WARNING: the PL1 and PL2 positions must never have the same configurator.
3 3
4 4
below:
- light actuator

following ways:
- Plug&Go
BT00312-b-UK
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
below:
- light actuator
chapter.

BMSW1002
1 2
Operating mode
1 2 1 2
Wiring diagram 1 2
L
N
1 2
F881NA/16 F881NA/2
230V 230V
C16 C2
BT00312-b-UK

4 relay actuator
Description
Actuator with 4 independent relays for single loads up to 16 A at 230 Vac, and installation
inside DIN rail switchboards or distribution boards. 1 2 3 4
This device is fitted with local load control pushbuttons.
The PL1, PL2, PL3 and PL4 positions can never have the same configurator, because the
device cannot manage the interlocking of the 2 relays. This means that it cannot manage
motors of rolling shutters, curtains, etc.
8
The actuator may be installed in a MY HOME system and can be configured both
physically and virtually, or as a component of the Lighting Management system, using
specific configuration procedures (Plug&Go, Push&Learn, Project&Download).
Technical data
Power supply: 110 - 230 Vac @ 50/60 Hz µ
Operation: ON/OFF
Operating temperature: (-5 ) – (+45) °C
– clamp input 2 x 2.5 mm2 7 6 5
Cable section: 2.5 mm2
Legend
1. L1, L2, L3, L4 Load status indication LED.
Incandescent lamps - Halogen lamp LED lamp

Electronic transformer - Ferromagnetic transformers 4. Clamps for the connection to the 230 Vac power supply
5. L1, L2, L3, L4 load connection clamps.
6. L1, L2, L3, L4 Load activation pushbutton.
230 Vac 3680 W 16 A 500 VA 2.1 A (attention, it must only be used in MY HOME systems with physical configuration)
Linear fluorescent lamp Compact fluorescent lamp

BT00313-b-UK
10 X (2 X 36 W) 4.3 A 1150 W 5A

Dimensional data
Size: 4 DIN modules

BMSW1003
Questa modalità è operativa solo se PL1≠PL2≠PL3≠PL42).
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the Kit or the web
server. The Virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC.

Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. With the OFF control the Master actuator
deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed1). none – 4 1)
This mode is only operative if PL1≠PL2≠PL3≠PL42).
SLA

PUL
1) Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control activates Configurator Time (minutes)
the light (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time. The OFF
control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for the time set with No configurator 0
configurator 0 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table. 1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
below:
- light actuator

following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Push&Learn
BT00313-b-UK
- Project&Downlaod,
below:
- light actuator
chapter.

BMSW1003
Operating mode
Wiring diagram
L
N
F881NA/16 F881NA/2
230V 230V
C16 C2
µ
BT00313-b-UK

Power supply E46ADCN
Description
The power supply must be used to supply power to the MY HOME and Lighting
Management systems. On the output, the unit supplies a 27 Vdc continuous low voltage,
with a maximum current of 1 A. It is electronically protected (without fuses) against
short circuit and overload.
It’s a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI EN60065, and can therefore
be used in conjunction with a SELV source in accordance with paragraph 11.1.2.5 of CEI
64-8-4.
The power supply unit is fitted inside a 8 DIN rail module enclosure, and its installation
must be in accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
In general, the following requirements must be met:
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures.
- The device must be kept away from water drips and sprays.
- Care must be taken not to obstruct the air vents.
- A two-pole circuit breaker must be installed, with contact separation of at least 3 mm 3 2 1
located nearby the power supply. The circuit breaker is used to disconnect the power
supply from the mains, and to protect it.
Power supply voltage: 230 Vac ± 10% @ 50/60 Hz 1. Clamps (1-2) with 27 Vdc output voltage
Input MAX power consumption: 300 mA 2. Clamps (BUS) for the connection of the BUS/SCS
Output voltage: 27 Vdc 3. Clamps for connection to the power supply voltage
Maximum power delivered: 1.2 A
Maximum power consumption: 11 W
Reference standards: EN60065
Dimensional data
Size: 8 DIN modules
BT00273-a-UK

1 relay actuator
in DIN module F411/1N
Description
Actuator for installation in DIN rail distribution boards or switchboards. This device
incorporates a two-way relay and a local load control pushbutton, only active if the
actuator has been configured.
The device can be installed in a MY HOME system and can be configured both physically
or virtually. In the last case, by configuring the G1, G2, and G3 positions, the actuator may 1 2 3
be associated to a maximum of three separate groups. When installed as a component of
the Lighting Management system, specific configuration procedures are used (Plug&go, F411/1N
Project&Download).
Technical data C1
Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 4

Absorption: 22 mA 3
Number of outputs: 1x10 A
Power/Absorption of driven loads: 1
2
Incandescent lamps LED lamp Linear fluorescent lamp Ferromagnetic

Halogen lamp Compact fluorescent Electronic transformer transformers
lamp
Legend
2. BUS
3. LED
4. Pushbutton
230 Vac 2300 W 10 A 500 W Max. 10 lamps 920 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 920 VA
Dissipated power with max. load: 1,5 W

Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules
Configuration MY HOME
BT00274-b-UK

F411/1N
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be configured directly on the control, apart from those which require the use of two interlocked relays.
Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same actuator are listed in the table below.

Pushbutton (ON monostable) ignores Room and General controls PUL
Actuator as Slave. Receives a control sent by a Master actuator with the same address SLA
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for a point-point type control. 1 – 4 1)
With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has
elapsed1)
1) Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control activates
the light (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time.
The OFF control switches the light OFF immediately and leaves the fan working for the 1 1
time set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table. 2 2
3 3
4 4
- light actuator - Plug&Go
- Project&Download,
below:
- light actuator
chapter.
Wiring diagram
N
L
1 2 3
1 2 3 L N
F411/1N MIN 3 m
BT00274-b-UK
C1

1 NC relay actuator
in DIN module F411/1NC
Description
Front view
incorporates a two-way NC relay and a local load control pushbutton. When compared
with actuator F411/11, the device inverts the relay control logic: at switching ON the
relay contacts are always closed (status ON – LED ON), and open following an OFF control
(LED OFF) In this way, if there is no power input from the BUS, the device will remain in
the ON status, keeping the load ON. In the configurator sockets the device shows the 1 2 3
positions G1, G2 and G3, in additions to positions A, PL, and M, which make it possible
F411/1NC
for up to 3 separate belonging groups to be associated to the actuator.
C1
Technical data 4
Power supply from BUS: 27 Vdc 3
Absorption: 22 mA 1
lamp
Legend
2. BUS
3. LED
4. Pushbutton
230 Vac 2300 W 10 A 500 W Max. 10 lamps 920 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 920 VA
Operating temperature: 5 - 35 °C
Size: 2 DIN modules
Configuration
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be configured directly on Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same
the control, apart from those which require the use of two interlocked relays. actuator are listed in the table below.

BT00190-c-UK
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. 1 – 4 1)
Only for a point-point type control.
With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after
the time set with the configurators has elapsed1)
1) The value of the configurator listed in the table defines the final time, after which Configurator Time (minutes)
expiry the actuator deactivates its own SLAVE
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
2 relay actuator
in DIN module F411/2
Description
incorporates two independent relays for the activation of 2 loads, and includes local
control pushbuttons for each individual load, which are only active if the actuator has
been configured.
The device can be installed in a MY HOME system and configured physically or virtually.
In this case when the PL1 and PL2 positions are configured using the same configurator
the device interlocks the relays, to which it is possible to connect motors of rolling
shutters, curtains, etc.
When installed as a component of the Lighting Management system, specific 1 2 3 4
configuration procedures are used (Plug&go, Project&Download).
ART. F411/2
Technical data
C1 C2
4
Absorption: 28 mA
Number of outputs: 2x6A
Incandescent lamps LED lamp 1

2
Halogen lamp Compact fluorescent lamp
230 Vac 1380 W 6A 250 W Max. 4 lamps
Linear fluorescent lamp Ferromagnetic transformers Motor reducers for rolling shutters Legend
Electronic transformer
2. BUS
3. LED
230 W 1A 2 A cosφ 0.5 460 VA 460 W 2A 4. Pushbutton
Dissipated power with max. load: 1.7 W1)

Number of outputs: 2x6A
NOTE: 1) the dissipated power indicated is that corresponding to the device with all the
relays loaded at the maximum load.
With lower loads also the dissipated power is lower and may be calculated by means of
the following formula: P[mW]=140+400*N+10*[Ic1+Ic2]
P: dissipated power in mW, N: no. of loaded relays, IN: load current corresponding to
BT00275-b-UK
the N relay.
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the Kit or the Web
F411/2
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be configured directly on the control. Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same
Timed stop for motors. The device deactivates after the time set has elapsed . This mode is only operative if LP1 = LP2
1)
none – 9 1)
(same configurators), i.e. with the two relays interlocked
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; none – 4 2)
the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed2). This mode is only operative if PL1≠PL2.

No configurator 1
1 2
2 5
3 10
4 infinite or until the next control
5 20 sec.
6 10 sec.
7 5 sec.
8 15 sec.
9 30 sec.
2) The value of the configurator listed in the table defines the final time, after which the Configurator Time (minutes)
actuator disables its own slave
No configurator 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
below:
- light actuator
- rolling shutter actuator

BT00275-b-UK
following ways:
- Project&Download,
below:
- light actuator
chapter.

F411/2
Wiring diagrams
Diagram for the connection of lighting devices

A
PL
N M
G1
L G2
P L
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 L N L N
ART. F411/2
MIN 3 m
C1 C2
N L
P L
Diagram for the control of a 230 Vac motor with 2 windings

N
L
L1
M L2
F411/2 actuator M = motor in AC

with 2 windings
L1-N = clockwise rotation
L2-N = anticlockwise rotation
BT00275-b-UK

2 NC relay actuator
in DIN module F411/2NC
Description
Front view
incorporates two independent relays for the activation of 2 loads, and includes local
control pushbuttons for each individual load.
When compared with actuator F411/2, this device inverts the relay control logic: at
switching ON the relay contacts are always closed (status ON – LED ON), and open
following an OFF control (LED OFF) In this way, if there is no power input from the BUS, 1 2 3 4
the device will remain in the ON status, keeping the loads ON. ART. F411/2NC
Technical data
C1 C2
3
Absorption: 28 mA
Incandescent lamps Linear fluorescent lamp Ferromagnetic 1
Halogen lamp Electronic transformer transformers 2
Legend
2. BUS
3. LED
4. Pushbutton
230 Vac 1380 W 6A 150 W 0.65 A 1 A cosφ 0.5 230 VA
Size: 2 DIN modules
Configuration
The actuator performs all the basic functions that can directly be configured on the The following table lists the operating modes possible with the configurator connected
control device, with the exception of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays. to position M of the same actuator.

Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. 1 – 4 1)
Only for a point-point type control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates;
BT00191-c-UK
the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed 1).
1) The value of the configurator listed in the table defines the final time, after which Configurator Time (minutes)
expiry the actuator deactivates its own SLAVE
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4

4 relay actuator
Description
incorporates four independent relays with a common clamp, for the activation of four
loads, with local control pushbuttons for each individual load only active if the actuator
has been configured.
The device can be installed as part of a MY HOME system, and configured physically or
virtually. In this case if two adjoining positions (e.g. PL2 and PL3) are assegned the same
configurator, the actuator may set two of the four relays in interlocking mode, for the
control of loads such as rolling shutter motors, curtain motors, etc. If all the PL positions
have the same configurator, the actuator sets the four relays for the control of motorised 1 2 3 4 5
rolling shutters.
ART. F411/4
When installed as a component of the Lighting Management system, specific
configuration procedures are used (Plug&go, Project&Download).
C1 C2 C3 C4
Technical data 4
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 3
Absorption: 40 mA
1
Number of outputs: 4x2 A 2
Incandescent Motor LED lamp Linear fluorescent lamp Ferromagnetic
lamps reducers Compact fluorescent Electronic transformer transformers
Halogen lamp for rolling lamp
shutters
Legend
2. BUS
230 Vac 460 W 2 A 460 W 2A 70 W Max. 2 lamps 70 W 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 460 VA 3. LED
Dissipated power with max. load: 3.2 W 1) 4. Pushbutton
NOTA: 1) the dissipated power indicated is that corresponding to the device with all the
relays loaded at the maximum load.
With lower loads also the dissipated power is lower and may be calculated by means of
the following formula: P[mW]=140+400*N+10*[Ic1+Ic2+...IcN]
P: dissipated power in mW, N: no. of loaded relays, IcN: load current corresponding to
the N relay.
BT00276-b-UK
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules

F411/4
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be configured directly on the control. Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same actuator
are listed in the table below.
Delayed stop for rolling shutter motor operation. The actuator deactivates after the time set has elapsed1). none – 9 1)
This mode is only operative if PL...=PL...+1 (same configurators), i.e. with the two relays interlocked
Delayed stop for shutter motor operation. The actuator deactivates after the time set has elapsed. none – 1, 2 or 3
This mode is only operative if PL1=PL2=PL3=PL4, with interlocking of relays in pairs 2)
Actuator as Slave. Receives a control sent by a Master actuator with has the same address SLA
1) The value of the configurator shown in the table determines the final time. At the end of Configurator Time (minutes)
this time, the actuator will deactivate. No configurator 1
Example 1: 1 2
A=1 PL1=3 PL2=5 PL3=5 PL4=2 M=none 2 5
In this case the relays (PL1) and (PL4) are activated on the basis of the mode defined by the 3 10
controls configured A=1 PL=3 and A=1 PL=2. Relays (PL2) and (PL3) are interlocked and 4 infinite or until the next control
are activated by control A=1 and PL=5 with mode defined in M. Relays (PL2) and (PL3)
deactivate after a minute. 5 20 sec.
6 10 sec.
Example 2: 7 5 sec.
A=1 PL1=3 PL2=2 PL3=4 PL4=6 M=none 8 15 sec.
In this case all the relays (PL...≠ PL...+1) and (PL4) activate on the basis of the mode defined
9 30 sec.
by the controls configured A=1 PL=3, A=1 PL=2, A=1 PL=4 e A=1 PL=6. Whether there are
configurators 1 to 4 in position M of the actuator or not makes no difference. Configurator Time (sec.)
2) The value of the configurator shown in the table determines the final time. At the end of No configurator 20
1 15
this time, the actuator will deactivate. 2 25
Example: 3 60
- if M=1, the total opening/closing operation time is 15 seconds.
- if M=3 the opening and closing operations are performed while the corresponding control
is pressed. When installed in a Lighting Management system, the device can be configured in the
following ways:
Virtual configuration - Plug&Go
- Project&Download,
below: Using the Virtual Configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed
- light actuator below:
- rolling shutter actuator - light actuator
- curtain actuator
For more information on the functions see the glossary before the Technical sheets chapter.
Wiring diagrams
Diagram for the connection of lighting devices

N
L
BT00276-b-UK
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F411/4 1 2 3 4 5 L N L N L N L N
MIN 3 m
C1 C2 C3 C4

F411/4
Diagram for shutter movement control
M1 M2
Ap C ˜ Ch Ap C ˜ Ch
N
PL1 PL2PL3 PL4
1 2 3 4 5
ART. F411/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
M1 = motor controlling the internal rabbet shutter

M2 = motor controlling the external rabbet shutter
PL1 - PL2 = contacts: they must be interlocked to each other and must
always be fitted to the internal rabbet shutter
PL3 - PL4 = contacts: they must be interlocked to each other and must
always be fitted to the external rabbet shutter BUS
WARNING: configure PL1 = PL2 = PL3 = PL4

BT00276-a-UK
Operation:
- The opening of the shutter with external rabbet must start before the one with internal
rabbet. The opening of PL1 will start 3 seconds after the start of PL3.
- The closing of the shutter with external rabbet must start after the one with internal
rabbet. The closing of PL4 will start 3 seconds after the start of PL2.
- The total time for the full opening/closing of the shutters must be adjustable between
15 and 25 seconds. This adjustment is possible during installation, based on the size of
the shutters, to allow for strong winds.

Dimmer actuator
in DIN module F413N
Description
Control device for electronic ballast or driver power supply with dimmer function; it can
supply fluorescent lamps or LED lamps and adjust their brightness depending on the
voltage, with values between 1 and 10V, with which they are driven.
From any specially configured control point and connected to the BUS system one can
switch the lights connected on and off or set their brightness. A short pressure of the
1 2 NC 3 4
control key will switch the load on or off, while an extended pressure can be used to -+
0-10V
adjust the brightness level. The minimum brightness level and the type of load connected ART. F413N
(Ballast for fluorescents or driver for LED) can be selected during the configuration.
and virtually, or as a component of the Lighting Management system, using specific C1
configuration procedures (Plug&go, Project&Download). 4
Technical data 1
2
Absorption: 30 mA
Linear fluorescent lamp: 2 A / 460 W
MAX. 10 ballast type T5, T8, compact or Legend
driver for LED 1. Configurator socket
Dissipated power with max. load: 1W (attention, it must only be used in MY HOME systems with physical configuration).
2. BUS
Dimensional data
3. LED
Size: 2 DIN modules 4. Pushbutton
BT00277-b-UK

F413N
The actuator performs all the Basic operating modes that can be configured directly on the control, apart from those which require the use of 2 interlocked relays.
1) Operating mode with configurator in M

Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for point-point control. With the OFF control 1 – 4 1)
the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed 1)
Normal operation -
1) The ON control activates the Master actuator and the Slave actuator at the same time. The next
OFF control deactivates the Master actuator and keeps the Slave actuator active for the period of
time set with configurator 1 - 4 connected to M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table. 1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
2) Operating mode with configurator in L “ Selection of the minimum brightness level”:

The configurator in the L position establishes the minimum output voltage between the 1 - 2 clamps when the load is on, thus allowing the minimum intensity level to be selected.
5 different voltage levels can be selected, so that the standard 0-10V is possible as well as the standard 1-10V.
Configurator L Minimum output voltage (V)

none 1
1 1.5
2 2
3 0
4 0.5
3) Configurator in TYPE “Selecting the type of load used”:

In the TYPE position the configurator determines the type of load used on the basis of the following table.
If ballasts for fluorescent lamps with typical switching ON delay of 1.5s are used, the device will send the soft/start switching ON control taking account of the delay.
If power supplies for LED lamps must be controlled instead the device will send an immediate soft/start switching ON control.
Configurator type Load driven

No configurator Fluorescent ballast
1 LED driver
BT00277-b-UK
below:
- dimmer

F413N
Add the section before the wiring diagrams:

following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Project&Download,
Using the Virtual Configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed below:
- dimmer
chapter.
Wiring diagram
≥ 3m
L N + –
1 2 NC 3 4 Ballast
-+
0-10V
– + NC NO L LED driver
ART. F413N
Fluorescent lamp
C1 LED lamp
1 2 NC 3 4
1 2 NC 3 4
0 10 V
SCS BUS MAX 6mA 036 56
C1
BT00277-a-UK

Dimmer actuator
in DIN module F414 - F415
Description
Item F414 and item F414/127 controls resistive loads and ferromagnetic transformers 1
while item F415 and item F415/127 controls electronic transformers.
After connecting the dimmer directly to the BUS and to the load, the light intensity can
be adjusted from any correctly configured control point. Press the control pushbutton
quickly to switch the load ON or OFF, while press it for longer to adjust the light intensity.
The actuator can signal any load problems such as, for example, the breaking of the
lamp. It is also protected by fuse, which can easily be replaced if it blows.
T5H 250V
6
and virtually, or as a component of the Lighting Management system, using specific 0245 06
5 F414
Technical data
4
Absorption F414: 9 mA
Absorption F415: 22 mA
Number of outputs F414: 1x4 A
Number of outputs F415: 1x1,7 A
Operating temperature: (-5) – (+45) °C 3 2
Dissipated power with max. load - F414: 10 W
Dissipated power with max. load - F415: 11 W
F414 Power/Absorption of driven loads: Legend

Incandescent lamps - Halogen lamp - Ferromagnetic transformers
1. Load
3. BUS
4. Key
5. LED
230 Vac 0.25 – 4.3 A / 60 – 1000 VA
6. Fuse
F415 Power/Absorption of driven loads:

Electronic transformer
230 Vac 0.25 – 1.7 A / 60 – 400 VA

BT00278-b-UK
Dimensional data
Size: 4 DIN modules

F414 - F415
Configuration MY HOME
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be configured directly on the control. Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same actuator
are listed in the table below.

Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for point-point control. With the OFF control the 1 – 4 1)
Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed 1)
1) The ON control activates the Master actuator and the Slave actuator at the same time. The next
OFF control deactivates the Master actuator and keeps the Slave actuator active for the period of Configurator Time (minutes)
time set with configurator 1 - 4 connected to M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table. 1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
below:
- dimmer
following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Project&Download,
below:
- Dimmer
chapter.
BT00278-b-UK

F414 - F415
Wiring diagram
L L
N N
Lamp
T5H 250V
T5H 250V
0245 06 0245 06
F414
F415
400 VA
F414 F415
SCS BUS SCS BUS
BT00278-b-UK

Multi-load 1000 W
Dimmer Actuator F416U1
Description
This item controls resistive loads, ferromagnetic transformers and electronic transformers.
1 2 3 4
After connecting the dimmer directly to the BUS and the load, the brightness can be
adjusted from any correctly configured control point. A short pressure of the control key
will switch the load ON or OFF, while an extended pressure can be used to adjust the
brightness level. The The actuator can signal any load faults such as a faulty lamp.
The device may be installed in a MY HOME system and can be configured both physically 11
WARNING: it is not possible to connect devices with electronic transformer and devices 10 ON/+ RL/C
with ferromagnetic transformer on the same line 9

F416U1
OFF/-
4,3 A
Technical data
Power supply: 100 -240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz
Number of outputs: 1 x 4.3 A 8 7 6 5
Operation: dimmer
Protection index: IP20 Legend
Cable section: 2.5 mm2 1. Learn Mode status indication LED:
Power/Absorption of driven loads: – Green flashing in forced inductive mode

– Orange flashing in forced capacitive mode
Incandescent and Electronic transformer Ferromagnetic transformers – Orange steady in automatic capacitive mode
halogen lamps
– Green steady in automatic inductive mode
3. Load manual forcing pushbutton
4. Clamps for the connection to the 230 Vac power supply
230 Vac 40 – 1000 W 4.3 A 40 – 1000 W 4.3 A 40 – 1000 VA 4.3 A 5. Load connection clamps
6. ON pushbutton for the control/adjustment of the load
Standards, Certifications, Marks 7. OFF pushbutton for the control/adjustment of the load
9. Load type indication:
Dimensional data Green: inductive
Orange: capacitive
Size: 6 DIN modules 10. Orange LED ON: load fault
BT00315-b-UK
Green LED ON: load active (from 1 % to 100 %)


F416U1
the control. Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the
same actuator are listed in the table below.

PUL

PUL
the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed1 1 – 4 1)
3 3
4 4
below:
- dimmer

following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
below:
BT00315-b-UK
- dimmer
chapter.

ON/+
ON/+ RL/CRL/C
F416U1
F416U1 OFF/-
OFF/-
4,3 4,3
A A
F416U1
ON/+
ON/+ RL/CRL/C
F416U1
F416U1
Operating mode
OFF/-
OFF/-
4,3 4,3
A A
ON/OFF DIMMER FUNCTION
ON/+
ON/+ RL/C
RL/C ON/+
ON/+ RL/CRL/C
F416U1
F416U1
OFF/-
OFF/- F416U1
F416U1
4,3 OFF/-
4,3 AA OFF/-
4,3 4,3
A A
ON/+
ON/+ RL/CRL/C
ON/+
ON/+ RL/C
RL/C
F416U1
F416U1 OFF/-
F416U1
F416U1 OFF/-
OFF/- 4,3 4,3
A A
ON/+ 4,3
4,3 AA RL/C
OFF/-
F416U1
OFF/-
4,3 A
Manual forcing of the type of load

ON/+
ON/+ RL/C
RL/C
ON/+ RL/C ON/+ RL/C

F416U1
F416U1 ON/+ OFF/- RL/C
OFF/-
4,3
4,3 AA
F416U1
OFF/- F416U1
4,3 A
F416U1 OFF/-
OFF/- 4,3 A
4,3 A
<1s CAPACITIVE
<1s
ON/+
ON/+ RL/C
RL/C
F416U1
F416U1 < 1 s = ON OFF/-
OFF/-
4,3
4,3 AA
ON/+ RL/C ON/+ RL/C
ON/+ RL/C ON/+

FORCED IN-
RL/C
FORCED ON/+ RL/C ON/+ RL/C
DUCTIVE CAPACITIVE
ON/+ RL/C ON/+ RL/C
F416U1 F416U1 F416U1
F416U1
OFF/- OFF/- F416U1
OFF/-
OFF/- F416U1
OFF/-
OFF/-
4,3 A
4,3 A
F416U1
OFF/- 4,3 A
4,3 A
F416U1
OFF/- 4,3 A4,3 A
4,3 A 4,3 A
<1s
10 s = confirm changes
INDUCTIVE < 1 s = exit without saving changes
BT00315-b-UK

F416U1
Wiring diagram
L
N
ON/+ RL/C
F416U1
026 11
F881NA/16 100-240V~
OFF/-
230V 4,3 A
C16 50-60Hz
BT00315-b-UK

Multi-load 2x400 W
Dimmer Actuator F417U2
Description
The item controls resistive loads, ferromagnetic transformers and electronic transformers.
1 2 3 4
After connecting the dimmer directly to the BUS and the load, the brightness can be
adjusted from any correctly configured control point.
A short pressure of the control key will switch the load on or off, while an extended
pressure can be used to adjust the brightness level. The The actuator can signal any load
faults such as a faulty lamp. 14
PL1
PL2
G1
G2
M
A
ON/+ ON/+ RL/C
WARNING: it is not possible to connect devices with electronic transformer and devices F417U2
OFF/- OFF/-
with ferromagnetic transformer on the same line 2x400 VA
ε ε
Technical data
Power supply: 100 -240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz
Number of outputs: 2 x 1.7 A 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
Operation: dimmer
– clamp output 2 x 1.5 mm2 and 1 x 2.5 mm2 Legend
Cable section: 2.5 mm2 1. Learn Mode status indication LED:
– Green flashing in forced inductive mode
– Orange flashing in forced capacitive mode
Incandescent and Electronic transformer Ferromagnetic transformers – Orange steady in automatic capacitive mode
halogen lamps – Green steady in automatic inductive mode
3. Load manual forcing pushbutton
4. Clamps for the connection to the 230 Vac power supply
230 Vac 40 – 400 W 1.7 A 40 – 400 W 1.7 A 40 – 400 W 1.7 A

5. Load 2 connection clamps
6. Load 1 connection clamps
7. ON pushbutton for the control/adjustment of the load 2
Standards, Certifications, Marks 8. OFF pushbutton for the control/adjustment of the load 2
Standards: IEC60669 - 2 - 1 9. Orange LED ON: load 2 fault
– Green LED on: load 2 active (from 1% to 100%)
Dimensional data 10. ON pushbutton for the control/adjustment of the load 1
11. OFF pushbutton for the control/adjustment of the load 1
BT00316-b-UK
Size: 6 DIN modules

12. Orange LED ON: load 1 fault
– Green LED on: load 1 active (from 1% to 100%)

F417U2
- Physical configuration, by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets.
the control. Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the
same actuator are listed in the table below.

SLA

PUL
the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed1) 1 – 4 1)
3 3
4 4
below:
- dimmer

following ways:
- Plug&Go
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download,
BT00316-b-UK
below:
- dimmer
chapter.

ON/+
ON/+ ON/+ RL/CRL/C
ON/+
F417U2
F417U2 OFF/-
OFF/- OFF/-
2x400 VA VA OFF/-
2x400
F417U2
ON/+
ON/+ ON/+ RL/CRL/C
ON/+
F417U2
F417U2 OFF/- OFF/-
Operating mode
OFF/- OFF/-
2x400 VA VA
2x400
ON-OFF DIMMER FUNCTION
ON/+
ON/+ ON/+ RL/C
ON/+ RL/C
F417U2
F417U2
OFF/-
OFF/- OFF/-
OFF/-
2x400VA
2x400 VA F417U2
F417U2
2x400 VA VA
2x400
ON/+
ON/+ ON/+ RL/C
ON/+ RL/C
F417U2
F417U2 F417U2
F417U2
ON/+ 2x400VA
2x400 VA RL/C
OFF/-
OFF/- OFF/-
OFF/- 2x400 VA VA
2x400
F416U1
OFF/-
4,3 A
Manual forcing of the type of load
ON/+ RL/C ON/+ RL/C

ON/+ RL/C
F417U2
F417U2
F416U1
VA OFF/-
2x400VA F416U1
2x400 OFF/-
4,3 A
F416U1
OFF/- 4,3 A
4,3 A
< 1 sec. CAPACITIVE

< 1 sec.
F417U2
F417U2
< 1 s = ON
ON/+ 2x400VA
2x400 VA
RL/C ON/+ RL/C
ON/+ RL/C ON/+

FORCED
RL/C
FORCED ON/+ RL/C ON/+ RL/C
INDUCTIVE CAPACITIVE
ON/+ RL/C ON/+ RL/C
F416U1 F416U1 F416U1
F416U1
OFF/- OFF/- F416U1
OFF/-
OFF/- F416U1
OFF/-
OFF/-
4,3 A
4,3 A
F416U1
OFF/- 4,3 A
4,3 A
F416U1
OFF/- 4,3 A4,3 A
4,3 A 4,3 A
<1s
10 sec. = confirm changes
INDUCTIVE < 1 sec. = exit without saving changes
BT00316-b-UK

Description
This device allows you to manage scenarios for Automation, Sound system and
Temperature Control systems which have been created, modified and activated using
different devices of the Automation system. Up to 16 scenarios may be saved in the
scenario module, with up to 100 controls each. The scenarios can also give door entry
and Video door entry controls for one-family systems to switch on the staircase lights
and open the door lock. If installed in large systems with interface item F422 in logical ART.F420
expansion, the module can save automation controls for the system where it is installed.
On the front cover of the item there are two keys and two LED. The first pushbutton DEL
(padlock) locks or unlocks the programming procedure avoiding involuntary operations 6 1
such as cancelling the scenarios and the corresponding LED indicates the status: green
programming possible, red programming blocked, orange temporary block.
5 2
The second pushbutton (DEL) cancels all the scenarios, the LED underneath indicates
that the cancellation has taken place or that the device is performing the learning
procedure. 4 3
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc Front view
Absorption: 20 mA
Operating temperature: 0 – 40 °C Legend
Size: 2 DIN modules
1. Scenario cancellation pushbutton
Configuration 2. Scenarios/learning reset LED
The combination of the scenario module with a control device is ensured by assigning 4. BUS
to both items the same address. This is identified by the configurators with a numeric 5. Programming status LED
value for position A = 0-9 and position PL = 1-9. When using a Touch Screen, the 6. Lock/unlock programming pushbutton
address of the scenario module must be specified during programming, using the
Tidisplay software. Several scenario modules may be installed in one system, allocating
a different address to each module.
Scenario programmer key 1 key 2

In order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary to enable the
programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the status LED is green (press the
lock/unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds); continue with the
following operations:
led key 1-3 LED key 2-4
1) press one of the four control keys the scenario should be associated to for 3 seconds.
The corresponding LED starts flashing; key 4
key 3
2) set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation,
Temperature control, Sound system, etc. functions;
programming mode;
4) to change or create new scenarios to be linked to the other keys, repeat the NOTES:
procedure starting from point 1. Inside the system itself one Scenario module can be programmed at a time as the
BT00067-b-UK
other devices are temporarily locked; during this phase the “programming status” LED
To call a set scenario just press its pushbutton on the control quickly. becomes orange signalling the temporary Lock.
During the learning procedure and when there are timed controls or group controls,
If the module does not receive any input for 30 minutes from the start of the learning the Scenario module does not save events for 20 seconds. You must thus wait before
procedure, programming will automatically be interrupted. To cancel a scenario completely, continuing with creating the scenario.
keep the corresponding pushbutton pressed for about ten seconds. During the scenario learning procedure only the changes of status are saved.
To erase the entire memory keep the DEL pushbutton on the Scenario module pressed for The Scenario module should be configured with a different A and PL address from
10 seconds, the yellow “reset scenarios” LED flashes quickly. Once the operations have been that of an actuator. Use A=0 and PL=1 to 9, which cannot be used by actuators. If the
performed lock the programming by pressing the lock/unlock pushbutton for at least 0.5 configuration is wrong the Programming status LED flashes ORANGE.
seconds, so that the corresponding LED becomes red. In case of “virtual” configuration the LED flashes RED.

SCS-SCS
gateway F422
Description
The SCS/SCS gateway is an interface that provides communication among BUS systems
with SCS technology, even if they perform different functions. The interface has two BUS
clamps, IN and OUT.
On the front is a C key for virtual configuration and a LED for the notification of: 5
- correct power supply and configuration (on steady),
- BUS not detected (off), OUT
- configuration not detected or incorrect configuration (flashing).
The device may operate in six different modes:
- Physical expansion for MY HOME and Lightingh Management: can increase the total
BUS length or exceed the absorption limit of 1200 mA for the individual power supply. C
- Logical expansion for MY HOME: can increase the number of devices of a system, which 4
is 175 (max 11 in rooms defined with A = 0 to 10 and 16 light points with PL = 0 to 15).
3
Address A = 0, PL = 0 is not permitted.
- Burglar alarm/automation interface for MY HOME: it allows communication between IN
these two systems.
- Public riser: it provides alarm event supervision for the common parts of the video door 2 1
entry system.
- Galvanic separation for MY HOME: can interface two different functions (ex.: Sound
system with Automation).
- Separazione fisica: raggruppa le caratteristiche della modalità Espansione fisica e della
modalità Separazione galvanica. Utilizzabile per impianti con dispositivi predisposti
per la configurazione virtuale.
NOTE: regardless of the interface mode of use, it must be taken into account that Legend
the two Buses connected constitute at all effects two systems, and, as such, they
must be subjected to all existing sizing and installation rules. 1. Configurator socket
2. BUS
Technical data
3. Signalling LED
Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 4. Pushbutton for virtual configuration
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 5. OUT clamp
IN clamp absorption: 25 mA
OUT clamp absorption: 5 mA
Dissipated power with max. load: 1W
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules
Configuration
I1 I2 I3 I4 MOD
Sockets l1, l2, l3, and l4 are used to uniquely identify, using numerical configurators, the
addresses of the interfaces inside the system. The interface may also be configured using the
BT00280-c-UK
Virtual Configuration application as indicated in the software User Manual.
1) Operating mode “Physical expansion” - configurare MOD = 1 -

With the interface configured in this mode, it will be possible to extend the physical - On the input BUS (IN) the addresses must go from A=0 / PL=1 and A=3 / PL=1;
limit of the maximum length of the BUS, or exceed the limit of 1200 mA delivered by the
- On the output BUS (OUT) the addresses must be beween A=3 / PL=3 and A=9 /
individual power supply, but not the maximum number of actuators (max. 175).
PL=9 or the address of the next interface. As it can be seen from the example, all
The positions identified with I1 and I2 must not be configured. The “separation address”
the automation BUS 1 addresses are lower than that of the interface, while all the
between the two buses connected to the interface must instead be defined in positions
automation BUS 2 addresses are higher; the interface address therefore separates all
I3 and I4. Supposing as in the example that I3=3, I4=2:
the addresses of which the complete system might be made up of into two or more
blocks.
F422
Installation example
A/PL = 33  53 2 A/PL = 78  175 (*) 4
Automation Automation
OUT OUT OUT
OUT OUT OUT

F422 F422
C I1 = – C I1 = – C I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = – I2 = –
I3 = 3 I3 = 5 I3 = 7
IN IN IN
I4 = 2 I4 = 4 I4 = 7
MOD = 1 MOD = 1 MOD = 1
IN IN IN
A/PL = 01  31 1 A/PL = 55  76 3
Note (*): maximum number of addresses available with virtual configuration of the devices.
Installation rules:
- Configure both I3 and I4 with configurators from 1 to 9, to set the separation between - The web server and the scenario programmer must be installed on the BUS line with
the two Buses. the lowest addresses (system 1 in the drawing).
- I1 and I2 must not be configured. - All the control devices configured to send Point-point, Room, Group and General
- If several interfaces are installed in series, the addresses of the devices between one controls can be connected on either branch of the system (1 or 2) regardless of their
interface and the other must be within those of the two interfaces (see system example). addresses in A and PL positions.
- In this mode, it is not possible to install two interfaces in parallel on the same BUS. - This is also true in the case of actuators configured in the “slave” operating mode.
- It is possible to install up to four interfaces in series, which subdivide the system in 5 - Interface item F422 allows the transit between the various systems of the Point-Point,
separate sections, individually powered. Group, Room and General controls. As an example, install a control configured with
- The scenario module, the memory module, the IR emitter for the control of air A=1 and PL=5 in system 2 to control actuator A=1 and PL=5 installed in system 1.
conditioning units, and the devices that can be configured in self-learning mode, - Within the system, no device must be configured with the same address as the
must be installed on the BUS section corresponding to the own local address (e.g. if interface.
the scenario module is configured as A=0/PL=1, it will have to be placed on system
BT00280-c-UK
no. 1 - see system example).

F422
2) “Logic expansion” operating mode - MOD = 2 configurator

This mode enables separation of control systems, with each of them therefore capable A typical example may be a large villa on several floors: A system may be installed for
of using all the addresses available. It is therefore possible to connect several systems each floor, all connected to each other through another system operating as a riser.
to an automation BUS, with each system having all the 175 addresses available. The The positions identified with l1, l2 and l3 must not be configured, while in the l4 position,
BUS to which all others are connected therefore operates as main riser. This BUS must the address of the interface (l4 from 1 to 9) connected to the riser must be configured.
necessarily belong to an automation system. It is recommended that this mode is used
for systems installed in large villas or in the service/industrial sector.
Installation example
A/PL = 01  99 (*) 1 A/PL = 01  99 (*) 2 A/PL = 01  99 (*) 3
Automation Automation Automation
OUT OUT OUT
OUT OUT OUT
F422 F422 F422
C C C
I1 = – I1 = – I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = – I2 = –
IN I3 = – IN I3 = – IN I3 = –
I4 = 1 I4 = 2 I4 = 3
MOD = 2 MOD = 2 MOD = 2
IN IN IN
Main riser
Note (*): maximum number of addresses available with physical configuration. Maximum 175 addresses may be managed with virtual configuration.
Installation rules: - From the main riser (IN clamp), arrive the general controls (rolling shutters and lights),
- Configure I4 to give a number from 1 to 9 to the Buses connected to the riser. group controls (this allows a minimum centralisation of the controls, using standard
- I1, I2 and I3 must not be configured. devices of the control system), and power management controls (to allow positioning
of the power management central unit on the riser). On the other hand, point-point
- The BUS of the individual system connected to the main riser must be connected to the
controls are stopped by the interface, and therefore remain inside the individual
OUT clamp of the interface.
system, including the riser. The controls of all systems other than automation,
- The main riser must consist of an Automation system in which, in addition to the including AUXILIARY controls, travel in the two directions without any processing. In
corresponding control devices and actuators, it will also be possible to install the order to send controls from one system to the other, the special controls H4651M2,
BT00280-c-UK
Energy management central unit, temperature central unit, and the MH200N scenario L4651M2 and AM5831M2 may be used in extended control mode.
programmer.
- The interface address cannot be the same as that of other devices (e.g. configure the
- In this mode up to nine interfaces may be connected to the main riser; it is possible to interface l1= -, 12= -, 13= -, l4=1 and MOD = 2, if a scenario module is configured
manage up to ten systems as if they were a single one. Each system connected to the with A = - and PL = 1).
riser can have all 81 addresses allowed.
- The web server and the scenario programmer must be installed on the BUS line with
the lowest addresses (system 1 in the drawing).

F422
3) “Burglar alarm/automation interface” mode- MOD = 3 configurator -
This mode is indicated when display of burglar alarms and technical alarms are
required, generated within the common sections, using a switchboard, item 346310,
installed on the backbone or the riser of the video door entry system.
Simple diagram for the display of alarms on common parts
Riser 1 Riser 2 Riser 3
OUT OUT OUT
346851 346851 346851
ON ON ON
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
IN IN IN
OUT
287 I1 = –
I2 = –
&
I3 =
*
I4 =*
MOD = 3
,1
Burglar Alarm System

IN
(contact interfaces,
For the electric diagram see the switchboard
Common system section gas/water sensors, etc.) technical sheet.
Installation rules:
• On the common sections it is possible to connect contact interfaces, or technical
alarms (gas/water leak), up to a total of 9 auxiliary channels; these must be
BT00280-c-UK
connected to the IN clamp of interface item F422.
(*) Use a free address of the video handset.

F422
4) “Interface between burglar alarm and automation/video door entry system/ 5) Operating mode “Galvanic separation” - configurator
sound system” mode - MOD = 4 configurator - MOD = no configuration
This mode can be used to interface the Automation system to the burglar alarm system, This configuration enables keeping the power supplies of the two buses separate,
to facilitate interaction and exchange of information between the two BUS. Thanks to this allowing interfacing of different MY HOME functions (e.g. sound system and automation).
function, it is possible to remotely control the automation system using the telephone In some cases, the use of this interface is necessary (for example when the sound system
communicator. The positions identified with l1, l2 and l3 must not be configured, while is installed). In other cases installation alternatives are possible; for example, it will be
in the l4 position, the address of the interface (l4 from 1 to 9) must be configured. possible (but not compulsory) to install Temperature Control on a separate BUS, and
interface it with Automation using an interface in Galvanic Separation mode.
The positions identified with l1, l2 and l3 must not be configured, while in the l4 position,
the address of the interface (l4 from 1 to 9) must be configured.
Installation example Installation example
Burglar alarm Sound system
OUT OUT
OUT OUT
F422 F422
C I1 = – C I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = –
I3 = – I3 = –
IN I4 = 1 IN I4 = 1
MOD = 4 MOD = –
IN IN
Automation
Video door entry system Automation
Sound system
Installation rules: Installation rules:

BT00280-c-UK
- Configure l4 with configurators from 1 to 9. - Configure l4 with configurators from 1 to 9.

- I1, I2 and I3 must not be configured. - I1, I2 and I3 must not be configured.
- The BUS of the Burglar Alarm system must be connected to the OUT clamp of the - The Automation BUS must be connected to the IN clamp. The other systems must be
interface. connected to the OUT clamp (e.g. Sound System).
- It is not possible to connect other interfaces to the Burglar Alarm system, to physically - It is not possible to connect several Automation systems to the same Sound System.
extend the BUS, or to increase the maximum number of devices. - Thanks to this mode, using the Web Server A/V it is possible to control a one-family
- Only one interface may be connected to the Burglar Alarm system. It is therefore not system (a video door entry system and an Automation system, at the most subdivided
possible to connect together two Automation systems through the Burglar Alarm system. into lines, following the physical and/or logic expansion mode procedure).
- Installation of the Automation system actuators within the Burglar Alarm system is not - The interface does not use any addresses of the Automation system.
allowed.
- The interface does not use any addresses of the Automation system.

F422
6) “Physical separation” mode - MOD=6 configurator
This mode brings together the features of the “physical expansion” mode and the In view of the above, it will no longer be necessary to indicate the system separation
“galvanic separation” mode. address in positions I3 and I4; therefore, the interface will have to be configured by
Each system may be connected to both the OUT and the IN clamps of the interface and, assigning any address from 01 to 99, including any address already used by actuator
differently from what is required for “physical expansion” MOD=1, the addresses of the devices installed in the connected systems. If several interfaces are used, these must
devices of the two systems may be selected freely. have different addresses.
A/PL = 15 A/PL = 26 A/PL = 48 A/PL = 27 A/PL = 35 A/PL = 78
System No. 2 System No. 3
OUT OUT
OUT OUT
F422 F422
C I1 = – C I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = –
I3 = – I3 = –
IN IN
I4 = 1 I4 = 2
MOD = 6 MOD = 6
IN IN
A/PL = 11 A/PL = 35 A/PL = 62
Automation
System No. 1
BT00280-c-UK

F422
The use of the interface with this mode may be useful to keep the Automation system
and the Temperature control system separate (for example when using independent
power supplies).
Automation
OUT
OUT
F422
C I1 = –
I2 = –
I3 = –
IN
I4 = 1
MOD = 6
IN
Energy management
Installation rules: Configuration:

- Each individual system connected to the IN or OUT clamps of the interface must be For correct operation, the interface must be configured to:
powered by its own power supply. - define its address within the system;
- It is possible to use up to 4 interfaces in MOD=6 for the connection of the Automation and/ - acquire the address of the devices of the systems connected to the IN and OUT clamps.
or Energy Management, and Temperature Control systems to each other. Configuration of the interface address:
- In case of cascade connection of several Automation and/or Energy management, and The device may be configured in 3 different modes:
Temperature Control systems, each individual system must be connected to the OUT clamp - using numerical configurators, 0 to 9, in positions I3 and I4;
of one interface and the IN clamp of the other. Therefore, do no connect the system to the - using the Virtual Configurator application as indicated in the software User Manual;
two interfaces only using the OUT clamps. - using the “self-configuration” procedure as indicated below:
- Do not configure positions l1 and l2. 1. press the interface pushbutton for a few instants; the LED flashes slowly.
- In positions l3 and l4, address l3=0 to 9 and l4=1 to 9 of the interface must be specified. 2. press the pushbutton again; the LED flashes quickly and the device starts the self-
This address may also correspond to that of other actuator devices installed in the configuration procedure.
connected systems. If several interfaces are installed, these must have different addresses. 3. Once the configuration procedure has been completed correctly, the LED comes on steady.
- The interface does not use any addresses of the Automation system. Repeat this operation for all the interfaces in MOD-6 of the system.
- The scenario module and the devices that can be configured in self-learning mode can
BT00280-c-UK
be connected to any branch of the system (no. 1 or no.2). The memory module must be
connected to the system connected to the OUT clamp of the last interface.
- All control devices configure for sending Point-point, Room, Group, and General controls Acquisition of the addresses of the connected devices:
may be connected to any branch of the system (no.1 or no. 2), without limitation, This procedure must only be carried out after the configuration of the interface address (or
irrespective of their respective addresses in the A and PL positions. several interfaces, as applicable). It is possible to select one of two modes:
- The above also applies to actuators configured in “slave” operating mode. - using the Virtual Configurator application as indicated in the software User Manual;
- Interface f422 allows Point-point, Group, Room, and General controls to travel through the - pressing the interface pushbutton for at least 2 seconds. Any other interfaces in MOD=6
various systems. It is therefore possible to install, for example, in system no. 2 a control installed in the system will automatically acquire the configuration of the devices.
configured as A=1 and PL=5 that will control actuator A=1 and PL=5 installed in system Before performing this operation check that all system interfaces and actuators have their
no. 1. addresses configured.

F422
7) Use of interfaces with different modes
For home automation systems of a certain complexity, several systems may be If necessary, each of these can be expanded (physical expansion mode) or interfaced
integrated with interfaces configured in different modes. For example, it is possible to with the Video Door Entry System or the Sound System using other interfaces.
create a system with three interfaces for the connection of two Automation systems and For example, in case of a villa consisting of several large floors.
one Burglar alarm system to one single riser.
Example N. 1
Automation Burglar alarm
OUT OUT
OUT OUT
F422 F422
C I1 = – C I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = –
I3 = – I3 = –
IN IN
I4 = 2 I4 = 1
MOD = 6 MOD = 4
230 Vac
IN IN
Automation
OUT
OUT
F422
C I1 = –
I2 = –
I3 = –
IN
I4 = 1
MOD = 2
BT00280-c-UK
IN

F422
Example no. 2: system with logic expansion
A/PL = 01  31 1a A/PL = 33  53 1b A/PL = 55  175 1c

Automation Automation Automation
(low addresses) (intermediate addresses) (high addresses)
OUT OUT OUT
OUT OUT OUT
F422 F422 F422
C C C
I1 = – I1 = – I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = – I2 = –
IN I3 = – IN I3 = 3 IN I3 = 5
I4 = 1 I4 = 2 I4 = 4
MOD = 2 MOD = 1 MOD = 1
IN IN IN
Main riser
OUT OUT OUT OUT
OUT OUT OUT OUT
F422 F422 F422 F422
C I1 = – C I1 = – C I1 = – C I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = – I2 = – I2 = –
I3 = – I3 = – I3 = – I3 = –
IN IN IN IN
I4 = 1 I4 = 2 I4 = 1 I4 = 1
MOD = 2 MOD = 2 MOD = 4 MOD = –
IN IN IN IN
BT00280-c-UK
2 3 Sound
Automation Automation Burglar alarm
system

F422
Example no. 3: system without logic expansion
A/PL = 33  53 1b A/PL = 55  175 1c

(intermediate addresses) (high addresses)
OUT OUT
OUT OUT
F422 F422
C C
I1 = – I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = –
IN I3 = 3 IN I3 = 5
I4 = 2 I4 = 4
MOD = 1 MOD = 1
IN IN
A/PL = 01  31 1a
Automation
(low addresses)
OUT OUT
OUT OUT
F422 F422
C I1 = – C I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = –
I3 = – I3 = –
IN IN
I4 = 1 I4 = 1
MOD = 4 MOD = –
IN IN
BT00280-c-UK
Sound
Burglar alarm
system

Memory
module F425
Description
The memory module is connected to a system and permanently saves the status of all the
actuators configured to manage the lights, after each control sent.
This device is very useful in case of a black-out or short power cuts (minimum 400 mS),
because it can reset the status of all the lamps controlled by the system once the power
returns. The reset operations take about 10 seconds. Just one memory module can be
connected to the BUS for each system installed (i.e. each power supply), unless two or
more systems are being connected using the SCS/SCS gateway (item F422) configured
in physical expansion mode. In this case just one is needed for all the systems connected
F425
together.
The device must be put into operation once the system is already installed and powered.
The multicolour LED indicates the status of the device: 4

- OFF: device too far from the power supply
3
- fixed green: normal operation
- fixed orange: system not yet acquired
- fixed red: device exclusion being performed
- flashing red: acquisition being performed 1
2
- flashing orange: wrong or missing configuration

- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc from BUS 1. Configurator socket
- Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 2. BUS
- Absorption: 5 mA
3. Multi-colour LED
- Operating temperature: 0 - 40 °C
- Dissipated power with max. load: 0.1 W 4. Key
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules
Configuration
- Connect the memory module, switch the BUS ON and make sure that the loads of the NOTES:
dimmers are connected and powered (all the loads must be OFF). - Rolling shutter actuators are not managed.
- Press the key on the front for at least five seconds, when the red LED turns on steadily - The memory module is configured using the Project&download procedure.
release the key. - The timed switchings ON will be activated as simple switchings ON.
- Switch the loads which are not to be managed ON one by one (all the loads left OFF will - It is important to configure the Memory module with an address A and PL different
be managed). from that of an actuator. We thus recommend using A=0 and PL=1 - 9, which cannot
- Press the device key within 30 minutes, the red LED will start to flash quickly to show be used by actuators.
that the device is performing the learning procedure. - For modifications to the system, repeat the save procedure..
- After about 30 seconds the LED turns green steady to signal that the learning procedure
has ended and the memory module is operative. WARNING:
BT00281-a-UK
- If the programming procedure has not been completed within 30 minutes, the LED The memory module is installed near the power supply (possibly in the same electrical
shines orange to signal that the system status has not been saved. panel); the distance must not however be greater than 10 metres.
At the end of the programming procedure a test should be performed to check that the
device is set correctly:
- Switch on some of the controlled loads (i.e. those not explicitly excluded during the
programming procedure).
- Switch off, simulating a black-out, for at least 15 seconds.
- Switch back on again; after a few seconds the status of the controlled loads must be
reset (i.e. those which were ON before the black-out must switch back ON), while the
unmanaged loads must however remain OFF.

DIN contacts interface F428
Description
This devices let you integrate traditional control devices (switches, pushbuttons, etc.) in
advanced systems with BUS operating logic.
Therefore, it is possible to extend the use of the Lighting Management system in rooms
where traditional systems are already present or in historic and prestigious rooms 1
whereby the complete or partial remaking of the electric system would entail heavy
C N1 N2
masonry work.
The old but valuable switch with its no longer compliant wiring can therefore continue
to be used with it, as the connection to the load to be controlled is carried out safely by F428
connecting it with its SCS interface with no-voltage contact.

Contact N1 controls light point PL1, contact N2 controls light point PL2.
The device is fitted with 2 LEDs for the notifications of contact closure, programming/
5
deletion, and the status of the control devices.
and virtually, or as a component of the Lighting Management system, using specific N1 N2
2
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc
Absorption: 9 mA
Dissipated power with max. load: 0.2 W 3

1. Clamps for connection to traditional devices
Size: 2 DIN modules
(attention, it must only be used in MY HOME systems with physical configuration).
MY HOME configuration 3. BUS
When installed in a MY HOME system, the device may be configured in two ways: 4. LED
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets. 5. Key
the web server. The Virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC. BT00283-a-UK

F428
A PL1 PL2 M SPE
The interface includes two independent central units, identified with positions N1 and - Two traditional NO (normally open) and NC (normally closed) switches or pushbuttons;
N2. The two units can send: - A two-way switch.
- Controls to two actuators for two independent loads (ON, OFF or adjustment) identified The interface also has a pushbutton to enable virtual configuration
with the address PL1 and PL2 and mode specified in M
or;
- A control to the scenario module item F420;
- A double control intended for a single load (motor for rolling shutter UP/DOWN,
OPEN-CLOSE curtains) identified with the address PL1 = PL2 and mode specified M.
The interface has two LEDs to signal correct operation and three clamps to connect to
traditional devices such as:
1) SPE=0 mode - Standard functions - Automation
Possible function
Cyclical ON/OFF with short pressure and adjustment with long pressure No configurator _
ON ON _
ON timed )
1-8 _
OFF OFF _
OFF pressing the key connected to N2 - ON pressing the key connected to N1 and adjustment with long pressure (dimmer) _ 2)
0/1
UP/DOWN rolling shutter to end of stroke _ 
UP/DOWN rolling shutter monostable _ M
Pushbutton PUL –
(1) The device sends an OFF control after a time set by the configurators used as indicated in (2) As a function of the receiver actuator operating mode.
the table below.
NotE: If circuits are connected to the interface clamps, the operating mode to select is
PUL.
1 1 If normally open (NO) pushbuttons are connected all the other operating modes
2 2 indicated in the table are performed.
3 3
BT00283-a-UK
4 4
5 5
6 15
7 30 sec.
8 0.5 sec.

F428
2) Operating mode with Configurator in M and SPE
Possible function Value configurator in SPE
Locks the status of the devices to which the control is addressed 1 1 –
Unlocks the status of the devices to which the control is addressed 1 2 –
Unlocks with key connected to N1
1 – 3
and locks with key connected to N2
On with flash 1) 2 none – 9 –
ON (key in N1) - OFF (jkey in N2) without adjustment 1 – 0/1
Cyclical ON/OFF without adjustment (only NO contact) 1 7 –
Selection adjustment level fixed at 10 to 90 % of the dimmer 2)
3 1–9 –
Call the scenarios of module F420 4 See table (3)
Management of scenario module item F420 3) 6 See table (3)
Timed ON (2 sec.) 8 1 –
Timed ON (10 min.) 8 2 –
(1) Device to be combined with an OFF control for switching OFF. (3) With SPE=4 it is only possible to recall the scenario saved in the F420 module; 3) With
The flash time is indicated in the table: SPE=6 it is possible to recall and program the scenarios saved in the F420 module. M=1-8:
group of scenarios to be controlled:
Configurator Time (sec.)
none 0.5 M First contact (N1) Second contact (N1)
1 1 1 1 2
2 1.5 2 3 4
3 2 3 5 6
4 2.5 4 7 8
5 3 5 9 10
6 3.5 6 11 12
7 4 7 13 14
8 4.5 8 15 16
9 5
A=0 to 9 and PL1=1 to 9 are the room and the light point of the scenario module to be
(2) Device to be combined with the dimmer actuator and an OFF control for switching OFF. controlled.
The configurator defines the adjustment in % of the load power. PL2 must be the same as PL1, or not configured (in this case the second contact is disabled).
Configurator N % P of load
1 10
BT00283-a-UK
2 20
3 30
4 40
5 50
6 60
7 70
8 80
9 90

F428
Scenario programmer: in order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary 4) To change or create new scenarios to be linked to the other keys, repeat the procedure
to enable the programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the status LED is green starting from point 1.
(press the lock/unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds); continue with the
To call a set scenario just press its pushbutton on the control quickly.
To completely delete a scenario, press the corresponding key for 10 seconds.
1) press one of the four control keys the scenario should be associated to for 3 seconds.
The corresponding LED starts flashing;
2) set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation, Temperature
control, Sound system, etc. functions;
programming mode;
3) Mode with SPE = 7 - Automation standard functions - normally closed contact

This mode can perform the controls envisaged by the Basic operating mode with SPE = 0
when NC pushbuttons or switches are connected to the interface clamps.
4) Mode with SPE = 5 - Sound system

When the interface is correctly configured, the following functions are performed: - M=1 Source cycling/track cycling mode
- M=0: ON/OFF mode - N1 contact: cycle source
- N1 contact: - N2 contact: cycle track
With short pressure the following sequence is sent:
- ON of the sources. PL2 indicates the source to activate before switching the amplifier on. If
PL2=0, source 1 is turned on (follow-me mode). - Room control:
- ON of the A/PL1 amplifier. A = 1-9 is the amplifier room
With extended pressure the following happens: General type controls:
- For point-point controls, if the amplifier is already on, only the volume is adjusted (VOL+); A = GEN for PL1=PL2=0 general controls
if the amplifier is off, the switch on sequence is sent first;.
- For AMB or GEN controls, only the volume is adjusted.
- N2 contact:
- With a short pressure, the OFF control for the A/PL1 amplifier is sent.
- With an extended pressure the volume is adjusted (VOL -).

- Point-point control:
A = 1-9 amplifier room ;
PL1=0-9 amplifier speaker.
BT00283-a-UK
- Room control:
A = AMB
PL1 = 1-9 amplifier room the control is intended for
- General control:
A = GEN
PL1 = 0
PL2 = 1-4 indicates the source to activate before switching the amplifier on. If PL2=0 the
follow-me mode is activated.

F428
- contact; - Plug&Go (see the dedicated technical guide)
- single light control; - Project&Download,
below:
- contact;
- single light control;
chapter.
Wiring diagram
M
Interfaccia Attuatore
modulo DIN
C N1 N2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART. F428
ART. F430/2
C1 C2
N1 N2
SCS BUS
L
BT00283-a-UK

SCS/DALI
gateway F429
Description
1_ 2_ 3 4 5 6 7 8
The device is an interface between MY HOME/Lighting Management systems and + + + _ + _ OUTPUT + _ + _ + _ + _
devices driven using the DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting Interface) protocol. It has
eight independent outputs to which up to 16 DALI devices can be connected for each
output. Three pushbuttons with notification LED set the operating mode. Key P1 sets up
the device for the virtual configuration, key P2 is used to select one of the eight outputs
which connect with the DALI devices and key P3 is used to switch the output which has
been selected with key P2 ON, OFF and to dim it. On pressing key P3 quickly one can
switch the load ON or switch it OFF cyclically, while pressing it for a long time adjusts
5
the brightness. 1
Technical data N L
Power supply: 110 – 240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz; 110 – 240 Vdc
Absorption: 5 mA
Operating temperature: (-5) – (+45) °C 4 3
Dissipated power: 4W
No. of DALI outputs: 8 x 16 ballast

Size: 6 DIN modules 1. Pushbuttons
2. LED
3. Power supply
When installed in a MY HOME system, the device may be configured in two ways: 4. BUS
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets. 5. Configurator socket (attention, it must only be used in MY HOME systems with
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the 3503N Kit or physical configuration)
BT00284-a-UK

F429
For the configuration there are 3 sockets identified A, G and M as specified below: The following table lists the operating modes possible with the configurator connected to
- A = 1 - 9 light point room address. The number of light points PL is defined with key P2. position M of the same actuator.
If pressed, the LED will flash a number of times equal to the number of the port selected. If
pressed again, the next output is selected.
- G= 1 - 9 group address
- M= Operating mode

Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for point-point control. With the OFF control the 1 = 1 min
Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time has elapsed 2 = 2 min
3 = 3 min
4 = 4 min
Depending on the configurator connected to A, the outputs will take the following address:
OUTPUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A=1 A=1 A=1 A=1 A=1 A=1 A=1 A=1
1
PL=1 PL=2 PL=3 PL=4 PL=5 PL=6 PL=7 PL=8
A=2 A=2 A=2 A=2 A=2 A=2 A=2 A=2
2
A=3 A=3 A=3 A=3 A=3 A=3 A=3 A=3
3
A=4 A=4 A=4 A=4 A=4 A=4 A=4 A=4
4
A=5 A=5 A=5 A=5 A=5 A=5 A=5 A=5
A= 5
A=6 A=6 A=6 A=6 A=6 A=6 A=6 A=6
6
A=7 A=7 A=7 A=7 A=7 A=7 A=7 A=7
7
A=8 A=8 A=8 A=8 A=8 A=8 A=8 A=8
8
A=9 A=9 A=9 A=9 A=9 A=9 A=9 A=9
9
Note: The PL configurator is not required, as the value is set by the output to which the DALI device is connected. All the outputs belong to the same group connected to G.

BT00284-a-UK
- dimmer - Plug&Go (see the dedicated technical guide)
- Project&Download,
below:
- dimmer
chapter.

F429
Wiring diagram
DALI DALI
DEVICE DEVICE
DALI DALI
DEVICE DEVICE
MAX. 16
DEVICES
FOR EACH OUTPUT
DALI
DEVICE
1_ 2_ 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ + + _ + _ OUTPUT + _ + _ + _ + _
N L
L
SCS BUS
N
BT00284-a-UK

2 relay radio actuator
Description
1
radio-wire BUS system. In addition to being driven by the local micro-pushbutton, 2
the radio actuator can also be driven by wire controls (using the transmitting interface
L/N/NT4576N and HC/HS4576).
The actuator consists of two interlocked relays for double loads (e.g. motor reducer), and 1 2 3 L N
1 2 3
can also be used with only one relay, for single loads.
ART.F470/2
Technical data
Power/Absorption of driven loads: - incandescent lamps 500W / 2 A 4
- fluorescent lamps 70 W / 0.3 A
- electronic transformers 70 W / 0.3 A 3
- motor reducers for rolling shutters 2 A / 500 W
Size: 2 DIN modules Front view
Actuator F470/2 has two independent relays to operate two loads. If positions PL1 and 1. Relay contact
PL2 have the same address (same configurator) the device activates the interlock of the 2. Power supply 230 Vac @ 50 Hz
two relays to which rolling shutter, curtain, etc. motors can be connected. If positions 3. Configurator socket
PL1 and PL2 have different addresses (different configurators), the device works with 4. LED
two independent relays with addresses A, PL1 and A, PL2. If the actuator is configured 5. Micropushbutton
to use just one relay (position A and PL1), position PL2 must not be configured. Actuator
F470/2 performs all the basic operating modes, that can be configured directly on the
control. Moreover operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same

The actuator ignores the Room and General controls PUL
Timed stop. The actuator deactivates after the time set has elapsed 1)
none – 4 1)
Normal operation -
1) The value of the configurator indicated in the table defines the final time, after Configurator Time (minutes)
which the actuator switches off. Only if the relays are interlocked (PL1 = PL2)
No configurator 1
1 2
2 5
BT00107-a-UK
3 10
4 Infinite or until the next control

F470/2
Programming
2) Hold down the Micropushbutton until the LED lights up (about 4 seconds).
3) Release the key.
4) Within 20 seconds press the programming radio interface pushbutton or press the 1 2 3 L N
wire control device key. 1 2 3
5) Programming will be completed when the LED flashes and then turns off. ART.F470/2
be programmed.

1) Power up the device. LED
2) Press the micropushbutton for 11 seconds (after 4 seconds the LED will turn on, after
another 7 seconds it will turn off).
3) Release the key.
4) When the LED flashes and then turns off, all programming will be cancelled.
BT00107-b-UK

DIN radio actuator
for single loads F470/1
Description
1
radio-wire BUS system. 2
In addition to being driven by the local micro-pushbutton, the radio actuator can also be
driven by wire controls (using the transmitting interface L/N/NT4576N and HC/HS4576).
1 2 3 L N
1 2 3
Technical data
ART.F470/1
Power/Absorption of driven loads: - incandescent lamps 1400W / 6 A C1
- resistive loads 2300 W / 10 A 5

- fluorescent lamps 230 W / 1 A 4
- electronic transformers 230 W / 1 A
Radio frequency: 868 MHz 3
Size: 2 DIN modules
Configuration
Front view
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be directly configured on
the control, apart from those which involve the use of two interlocking relays.
In traditional systems or systems only consisting of radio devices no configuration is
Legend
required. When integrating the device in a MY HOME system, or for advanced functions,
at least the A and PL positions must be configured. The configuration as belonging to 1. Relay contact
the G group is only possible if also A and PL are configured. If a PUL configurator is 2. Power supply 230 Vac @ 50 Hz
connected to the M position, the actuator will ignore Room and General controls. Also, 3. Configurator socket
The following table lists the operating modes possible with the configurator connected 4. LED
to position M of the same actuator. To cancel all programming in the actuator proceed 5. Micropushbutton
as follows:
2) Press the Micropushbutton for 11 seconds (after 4 seconds the LED will turn on, after
another 7 seconds it will turn off).
3) Release the key.
4) When the LED flashes and then turns off, all programming will be cancelled.
1 2 3 L N
1 2 3
ART.F470/1
The actuator ignores the Room and PUL
General controls
Normal operation -
LED
Programming
BT00106-b-UK

2) Hold down the Micropushbutton until the LED lights up (about 4 seconds).
3) Release the key.
4) Within 20 seconds press the programming radio interface pushbutton or press the
wire control device key.
be programmed.

Actuator 16 A F523
Description
The device is an actuator with 1 bistable relay sensor with zero crossing functionality, Front view
intended for the Load control and/or Automation functions. 1
The actuator is capable of assessing frequency (50 Hz) and voltage (230 Vac) in an
isolated way.
In load control mode:

The actuator will be given a priority indicating the tripping order that will be followed by
the F521 central unit for load management (e.g. Priority 1 will be the first load disabled 6
if the threshold is exceeded). This priority coincides with the address that will be used in 2
all configuration software programs. Using the forcing pushbutton it will be possible to
re-enable the load for 4 hours after DISABLING by the central unit, or remove the load 3
forcing previously set.
In automation mode, the actuator can perform the following functions:

4
- all operating modes that can be configured on the control devices, with the exception
of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays;
- possibility of group configuration (G);
- additional modes using the M configuration socket.
In mixed load control and automation mode, the following rules are followed:
The local key performs the load control management function (forcing/end of forcing)
- if the load is ENABLED or FORCED, the status of the relay follows the commands of the 5
Automation system.
- if the load is DISABLED by the central unit for load management, the status of the relay
does not follow the commands of the Automation system, but can only be re-enabled by Top view Bottom view
a control, ENABLING or FORCING, from the load control management.
During disabling, the actuator keeps the statuses requested by the Automation
commands in the memory. After RE-ENABLING the relay is placed in the status required
by the last automation command.
This function has been conceived for applications where the load control management
function is implemented, with the need of performing hourly load scheduling. 7
If during DISABLING stage the relay is switched off due to the scheduling settings, when
re-enabling takes place it will stay switched off.
1
5
The bistable relay enables preserving the status of the load also in case of lack of voltage
from the SCS bus (e.g. device reset).
The space requirement for the device is equal to 1 DIN module. The device is provided
with socket for 6 configurators: A, PL, G, M, P1, P2.
Technical data
Operation power supply with BUS SCS: 18 – 27 Vdc

Absorption: 10 mA max
Operating temperature: 0 – 40 °C Legend
BT00362-b-UK
Power/Absorption of driven loads: Incandescent and halogen lamps 10 A / 2300 W 1. 230 Vac connection
LED lamps and compact fluorescent lamps 2. Load forcing pushbutton
500 W / Max. 10 lamps 3. Virtual configuration pushbutton (future application)
Linear fluorescent lamp and 4. Configurator sockets
electronic transformers 4 A / 920 W 5. BUS connection
Ferromagnetic transformers 4 A cosφ 0.5 / 920 VA 6. User interface LED, SEE TABLE
7. Load connection
Dimensional data
1 DIN module

F523
Configuration
The device can be configured by connecting the physical configurators to the correct The device is provided with socket for six configurators, which define:
sockets (Physical configuration) - A/PL/G/M local address (room, light point), group, and mode in the automation system.
- P1/P2 priority in the load control management system, (P1 = tens, P2 = units)
1) Automation Mode:
The actuator performs all the operating modes that can be configured on the control connected to the M position of the actuator itself.
devices, with the exception of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays; it can In the A and PL positions it will be necessary to indicate the device address, while the P1
also accept extended switch on, switch off, and time delay controls. and P2 positions must be configured equal to zero.
In addition, the following table lists the operating modes required for the configurator The pushbutton operates in ON/OFF cyclical mode.
Actuator as slave. It receives a command sent by a Master actuator with the same address SLA
Master actuator with delayed Off control on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for point-point type control. 1 – 41)
With the Off control, the Master actuator is disabled; the Slave actuator is disabled after the time set using the
configurators has elapsed1)
In the Off delayed mode, the master sends the Off command after a period of time set
1)
Configurator in M Time (minutes)
using the 1 - 4 configurator connected to M as shown in the table:
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
LED notifications based on the status of the actuator in automation mode:
Device status Green LED Red LED Result
Load OFF Fixed ON OFF GREEN

Load ON Fixed ON Fixed ON ORANGE
2) Load control management mode:

In the P1 and P2 positions it will be necessary to indicate the priorities from 01 to 63, the
BT00362-b-UK
A, PL, G and M positions must be configured equal to zero.
LED notifications based on the status of the actuator in load control management mode:
Enabled Fixed ON Fixed ON ORANGE

Forced Fixed ON Flashing 1 s/1 s ORANGE flashing 1s/1s on GREEN
Disabled OFF Fixed ON RED

F523
2) Load control management and automation:

In the P1 and P2 positions it will be necessary to indicate the priorities from 01 to 63.
In A and PL it will be necessary to indicate the device address.
LED notifications based on the status of the actuator in load control management and automation mode:
Enabled + ON Fixed ON Fixed ON ORANGE

Enabled + OFF Fixed ON OFF GREEN
Forced + ON Fixed ON Flashing 1 s/1 s ORANGE flashing 1s/1s on GREEN
Forced + OFF Flashing 1 s/1 s Flashing 1 s/1 s ORANGE flashing 1s/1s
Common LEDs signalling:
Installation error (230 Vac not detected) OFF Flashing 100 ms/900 ms RED flashing 100 ms/900 ms
Configuration error Fixed ON Flashing irregularly ORANGE irregularly on GREEN
No configuration Fixed ON Flashing 128 ms/128 ms ORANGE flashing 128 ms/128 ms on
GREEN
BT00362-b-UK

F523
Wiring diagrams
Actuator connection:
230 Vac
C16
F881NA/16
230V
C16
BT00362-b-UK
BUS
CARICO

Flush mounted 2 relay
radio actuator H4573/2 - L4573/2
Description
radio-wire BUS system. The 2 relay radio actuator can be driven by the controls of the 1
automation system, using the transmitting interface L/N/NT4576N or HC/HS4576. 3
When used in a traditional system, the device can be driven directly by radio controls, or
using the local controls on the device.
The actuator consists of two interlocked relays for double loads (e.g. motor reducer), and
can also be used with only one relay, for single loads.
2
Technical data
Power supply: 230 Vac 50 Hz Front view H4573/2*
Power/Absorption of driven loads: - incandescent lamps 500 W / 2 A
- ferromagnetic transformers 500 VA / 2 A cosϕ 0.5 N C1 4
Size: 2 flush mounted modules A
PL1
PL2
L C2 M
G
Rear view
* NOTE: in the L4573/2 version, the position of the programming pushbutton

and the bottom LED are inverted.
Legend
1. LED
3. Local pushbuttons
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram

Light connection wiring diagram Rolling shutter wiring diagram
NN NN
LL LL
BT00103-b-UK
N NC1 C1 N NC1 C1
L1 L1
A A A A
PL1 PL1 PL1 PL1 MM
PL2 PL2 PL2 PL2 N N
L LC2 C2 L L C2 C2
M M
G G
M M
G G
L2 L2

H4573/2 - L4573/2
Configuration
The device can also be used for operating rolling shutters and curtains as well as for Example: The actuator with address A = 5 and PL1 = PL2 = 3 is managed by the wire
controlling a single load. The actuator must also be configured by placing the appropriate control configured with A = 5 and PL = 3. The radio interface must have address 52 or
configurators in the sockets of configurators A, PL1, PL2, M and G. If you want to use less (A = 5 and PL = 2).
the device for operating rolling shutters or curtains, configure A, PL1 and PL2 leaving
PL1=PL2. If you want to use the device for operating a single load, configure A and PL1
with PL1=1–9 and leave PL2 unconfigured. In this case, only one relay is used.
Possible function Combination of key cover used Combination of key cover used
and configurator in M and configurator in M

ON by pressing upper key - OFF pressing lower key - 0/1
Cyclical ON/OFF (only in Automation system) PUL -
The actuator ignores the Room and General controls
Control UP (upper key) and DOWN (lower key) as long as the key is pressed. - ↑↓M
For radio controls, it deactivates after 1 minute
Control UP (upper key) and DOWN (lower key) to end of travel. - PUL
TThe actuator ignores the Room and General controls and it deactivates after 1 minute
Control UP (upper key) and DOWN (lower key) to end of travel. - none - 4 1)
The actuator deactivates after the time set has elapsed 1)
1) The value of the configurator shown in the table determines the final time.
At the end of this time, the actuator will deactivate.
The configuration and/or customisation operations must be performed No configurator 1
when the actuator is NOT powered. 1 2
2 5
3 10
4 Infinite or until the next control
Programming
1) Power up the actuator.
3) Release the key.
4) Within 20 seconds press the transmitting radio interface programming pushbutton
or press the wire control device key.
BT00103-b-UK
be programmed.

2) Hold down the programming pushbutton; after 4 seconds, the LED will turn on; hold
3) Release the key. WARNING! RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
4) When the LED flashes and then turns off, all previously programming will be Press the programming pushbutton using a phase-tester or electrically-insulated
cancelled. screwdriver only. This operation must be carried out by qualified personnel only.

1 relay radio actuator H4574 - L4574
Description
This device can be used to exploit the benefits of radio technology in a combined radio- 1
wire BUS system. The two-way radio actuator can be driven by the Automation system
3
controls, by means of transmitting interface item L/N/NT4576N or HC/HS4576.
When used in a traditional system, the two-way radio actuator can be driven directly by
a radio control, or using the local control on the device.
Technical data 2
Operating temperature: 0 – 40 °C Front view H4574*
Power/Absorption of driven loads: - incandescent lamps 50 – 500 W / 0.2 – 2 A
- resistive loads 50 – 500 W / 0.2 – 2 A
- fluorescent lamps 12 a– 70 W / 0.05 – 0.3 A
- electronic transformers 12 – 70 W / 0.05 – 0.3 A C1 C2 N L 4
- ferromagnetic transformers 50 – 500 VA / 0.2 – 2 Acosϕ 0.5
Radio frequency: 868 MHz A
Type of modulation: FSK PL
M
Size: 2 flush mounted modules G
Rear view
*NOTE: in the L4574 version, the positions of the programming pushbutton
and the bottom LED are inverted.
Legend
1. LED
3. Local pushbuttons
4. configurator socket
Wiring diagram
L
Wiring diagram for load controlled from one point only N
L
N
C1 C2 N L
A
PL
M
G
BT00102-b-UK
Wiring diagram L
N
Wiring diagram for load controlled from two or more points
L
C1 C2 N L
A
PL
M
G

H4574 - L4574
Configuration
The actuator must be configured by connecting the configurators which define the Example: The actuator with address A = 5 and PL = 3 is managed by the wire control
actuator address and operating mode in sockets A, PL, M and G. The actuator performs configured with A = 5 and PL = 3. The radio interface must have address 52 or less (A
all the basic operating modes that can be configured directly on the radio control = 5 and PL = 2).
devices, apart from those which use two interlocked relays. For the configuration details
refer to the table below.
Possible function Combination of key cover used and Combination of key cover used and
configurator in M configurator in M

ON pressing upper key - OFF pressing lower key - 0/1
Cyclical ON/OFF (only in Automation system) PUL -
The configuration and/or customisation operations must be performed when the actuator is not powered.
Programming
1) Power up the actuator.
3) Release the key.
4) Within 20 seconds press the transmitting radio interface programming pushbutton
or press the wire control device key.
be programmed.

2) Hold down the programming pushbutton; after 4 seconds, the LED will turn on; hold
3) Release the key.
4) When the LED flashes and then turns off, all previously programming will be WARNING! RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
cancelled. Press the programming pushbutton using a phase-tester or electrically-insulated
screwdriver only. This operation must be carried out by qualified personnel only.
BT00102-b-UK

My Home system
key card switches H4648 - H4649 - LN4648 - LN4649
Description
Front view
Hotel room power supply key card switch, available in the basic or in the RFID version (13.56
MHz frequency key card recognition). Thanks to the LED backlit slot, the device can be found in
the dark. An automatic switch off delay can also be set.
It can be used with key cards with sizes between 45 mm and 54 mm (ISO).
The configuration can be performed in two ways:
- physical configuration, by inserting the configurators in their sockets 1
- virtual configuration, using the virtual configurator software.
On completion of the installation procedure, the device must be fitted with a front cover in
the desired look (note: to be purchased separately; the item number will depend on the look
2
selected).
3
Technical data
Power supply from BUS: 18-27 Vdc
Stand-by Absorption: 5 mA
RFID key card frequency: 13.56 MHz H4649 - LN4649
Dimensional data
2 flush mounted modules
3
Two modes: 1
- CENTRALIZED, to recall scenarios managed by the scenario programmer. When the key card
is inserted and removed, the device forwards a signal to the scenario programmer, which
depending on the scenarios set will activate the corresponding functions programmed.
A = 1-9 (CEN command address) 2
PL = 1-9 (CEN command address)
M1 = CEN
M2 = no configurator H4648 - LN4648
DEL1 = no configurator
DEL2 = no configurator
Note: the insertion of the key card corresponds to “Pushbutton 1” of the control, while the Rear view
removal of the key card corresponds to “Pushbutton 2” of the control
- SCENARIO, where by inserting the key card a group of actuators is enabled, and an entrance
scenario is activated (through the scenario module), and by removing the key card an
exit scenario is activated (through the scenario module), thanks to which all the group 4
actuators will switch off and then disable after a set time delay.
A = 1-9 (as scenario module)
PL = 1-9 (as scenario module)
M1 = 1-8 (activation of the corresponding scenario: see table B)
M2 = no configurator 5
DEL1 = 0 - 9 (switching on time delay at the insertion of the key card: see table A)
BT00496-a-UK
DEL2 = 0 - 9 (switching off time delay after the removal of the key card: see table A)
Legend
1. Programming key: Learn IN
2. Programming key: Learn OUT
3. LED
5. BUS connector
H4648 - H4649 - LN4648 - LN4649
Table A Table B
Configurator value Time Configurator value Scenario - Group
0 0 1 Scenario-group (Sce1=1, Sce2=9, Gr=1)
1 1 min. 2 Scenario-group (Sce1=2, Sce2=10, Gr=2)

8 Scenario-group (Sce1=8, Sce2=16, Gr=8)
7 15 min.
8 15 sec. Note: Sce 1 = scenario activated on insertion
9 30 sec. Sce 2 = scenario activated on removal
Gr = group of actuators
SCENARIO mode programming
SCENARIO mode programming

This operation is performed to create a link between the key card switch and the scenario
module. The procedure is as follows:
1) Power the key card switch. Check that the scenario module is in programming mode, with
the green LED on; 1
2) Press and hold down programming key 1 (Learn IN) or 2 (Learn OUT) until the LED starts
flashing (approximately 3 seconds);
3) Create the scenario using the system controls and actuators;
4) Once the scenario has been saved, briefly press programming key 1 (Learn IN) or 2 (Learn 2
2) to exit the programming status;
5) The scenario module will also have to exit programming status (see the scenario module 3
technical information).
Cancelling the programming in SCENARIO mode:

1) Power the key card switch. Check that the scenario module is in programming mode, with
the green LED on:
2) Press and hold down programming key 1 (Learn IN) or 2 (Learn 2) for 8 seconds. after 3 H4649 - LN4649
seconds the LED will turn on, after a further 5 seconds it will turn off again;
3) Release the key;
4) The LED flashing, followed by the LED switching off, indicates that the programming has
been cancelled;
5) The scenario module will also have to exit programming status (see the scenario module
technical information).
3
1
2
BT00496-a-UK
H4648 - LN4648
1. Programming key: Learn IN

2. Programming key: Learn OUT
3. LED

Special control H4651M2 - L4651M2 - AM581M2
Description
1
The two-module flush mounted and lowered special control has 4 pushbuttons and
2 green/red two-colour LEDs (Living and Màtix versions), or 4 blue/red two-colour
LEDs (Axolute version). The LEDs may be adjusted or excluded using the pushbutton on
the control. The control can be used for performing both standard and special functions 2
(timed ON, scenario control, timer control, dimmer, functions for video door entry
system and sound system).
configuration procedures (Plug&go, Push&Learn, Project&Download). 3
5
Technical data
Absorption with maximum LED intensity: 6 mA for H4651M2
8.5 mA for L4651M2
and AM5831M2
Operating temperature: 5 – 35°C
A
6
Dimensional data PL/PF
M
LIV1/AUX
Size: 2 flush mounted modules LIV2
SPE
I
MY HOME configuration Legend

When installed in a MY HOME system, the device may be configured in two ways: 1. LED
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets. 2. Upper pushbutton
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the 3503N Kit or the
3. Lower pushbutton
4. LED
5. Pushbutton for LED adjustment/exclusion
Physical configuration 6. Configurator socket
The special control may also be used in systems with SCS/SCS gateways (item F422). If (attention, it must only be used in MY HOME systems with physical configuration)
the control is installed on the BUS of an interface, it will be possible to directly control 7. BUS
the actuator on the BUS of another interface, without the need for intermediate auxiliary
controls. For this, the I configurator, representing the interface address on which BUS is
the actuator to control, must be used. The logic expansion interfaces on the system must
be numbered from 1 to 9. When I=0, the device on the local line is controlled, while if
BT00285-a-UK
I=CEN, the line controls a device installed on the riser. With the new control, it is therefore
possible to set addresses for 81x9 devices connected to the buses for the 9 interfaces +
81 devices in the riser, for a total of 810 addresses. The M, LIV1 and LIV2 sockets are also
used for timer control functions.
Depending on the configuration of SPE, the device performs functions for several systems:
SPE = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, ON for Automation system
SPE = 7 for Video door entry system
SPE = 8 for Sound system

H4651M2 - L4651M2 - AM581M2
1) Mode with SPE=0 - Standard functions - Automation
Possible function Value configurator in M

Cyclic control. For point-point controls, the ON/OFF functions are performed by a short pressure, while a longer pressure
No configurator
will be used for the adjustments; for the other controls only the ON/OFF functions are performed
ON control only ON
OFF control only OFF
On control using the upper key, Off control using the lower key. For point-point controls, the ON/OFF functions are
0/1
performed by a short pressure, while a longer pressure will be used for the adjustments
Control of rolling shutter UP/DOWN to end of stroke
Control of monostable rolling shutter UP/DOWN (duration of the control for the whole time the key is pressed) 0/1
Pushbutton mode PUL
Timed ON control 1–8
The control, which address is indicated in A and PL, sends a control for the scenario programmer, item MH200N CEN
1) The controlled actuator switches off after an amount of time set by the configurators
used, as shown in the table.
1 1
2) Enabling the T1 (upper) and T2 (lower) keys to manage scenarios of the programmer 2 2
MH200.
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 15
7 30 sec.
8 0.5 sec.
2) Mode with SPE=1 - advanced functions - Automation

Locks the status of the devices to which the control is addressed 1
Unlocks the status of the devices to which the control is addressed 2
Unlocks with upper key and locks with lower key 3
ON short timed 2 seconds 7
Timed ON 10 min. 8
BT00285-a-UK

H4651M2 - L4651M2 - AM581M2
3) Mode with SPE=2 - Flashing - Automation

On with flash 1)
0–9
1) When an actuator receives a flashing control, this is performed by closing
and opening the relay for a time equal to T. Configurator Time (sec.)
The T time depends on the configurators used in M, as shown in the table: 0 0.5
1 1
2 1.5
3 2
4 2.5
5 3
T T 6 3.5
7 4
8 4.5
9 5
4) Mode with SPE=3 - Dimmer level - Automation

Selection of the adjustment level of Dimmer1 1–9
1) The configurator in M determines the adjustment in % of the load power.
Configurator % P of load
as indicated in the table
1 10
2 20
3 30
4 40
5 50
6 60
7 70
8 80
9 90
5) Mode with SPE=4 - scenario repetition - Automation

BT00285-a-UK
Repetition of scenario 1 - 9 of the scenario module which address is specified in A and PL 1–9

H4651M2 - L4651M2 - AM581M2
6) Mode with SPE=5 - enhanced dimmer functions - Automation

Selection of the 0 – 9 SOFT-START and SOFT-STOP speeds (see table below) and selection of the fixed adjustment level from 1% to 99% through the
LIV1=0-9 and LIV2=0-9 sockets. Control is cyclic, with ON at the selected level, and OFF. If LIV1=LIV2=0, the control enables to switch between ON (at the
0–9
last saved level) and OFF, with a short pressure. When using point-point controls, the adjustment occurs with a long pressure. The function is only active if
the device address corresponds to a dimmer actuator.
Configurator Soft-start and soft-stop time (sec.)

0 1
1 2
2 3
3 5
4 10
5 20
6 40
7 1 min.
8 2 min.
9 4 min. 15 sec.
7) Mode with SPE=6 - Scenario control - Automation
The special control does not manage the scenarios by saving them in its own memory, The A and PL positions of the special control must correspond to those of the scenario
but has the function of recalling, creating or changing 4 scenarios in the scenario module, while the association of each key of the control with one of the scenarios
Module F420. saved, is performed by configuring the M socket.
Value configurator in M Key 1 (T1) Key 2 (T2) Key 3 (T3) Key 4 (T4)
1 scenario 1 scenario 2 scenario 3 scenario 4
NOTE: M=1 – 4 identifies the group of the scenarios to control with the four keys, T1, T2, T3 and T4.
Scenario programmer:
Scenario management keys
Scenarios: in order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary to enable the
programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the status LED is green (press the lock/
key 1 key 2
unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds); continue with the following
operations: LED key 1
BT00285-a-UK
1) Press one of the four keys on the special control to which the scenario is to be associated for
3 seconds, the corresponding LED will begin to flash.
2) Set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation, Temperature
control, Sound system, etc. functions.
3) Confirm the scenario by quickly pressing the corresponding key on the special control to
exit programming mode. LED key 3 LED key 4
starting from point 1. key 3 key 2
To call a set scenario just press its pushbutton on the control quickly. To completely delete a
scenario, press the corresponding key for 10 seconds. NOTE: The image is shown as reference. The position of the keys is the same for all the
Legrand automation ranges.

H4651M2 - L4651M2 - AM581M2
8) Mode with SPE=7 - Video door entry system
Possible function Possible function

Door lock control; A and PL are the address (two digits) of the entrance panel for which to control the door lock using the T3 key
(bottom left); the T4 key (bottom right) controls the door lock of entrance panel EP (A/PL)+2, the T1 key (top left) controls the 1
door lock of entrance panel EP (A/PL)+1 and the T2 key (top right) the one of entrance panel EP (A/PL)+3.
Control for call to the floor; A and PL are the address (two digits) of the handset to call. 2
Control to switch on the staircase lights; A and PL are the address (two digits) of the handset from where the staircase lights are
3
controlled.
9) Mode with SPE=8 - Sound system

This function is used to control the amplifiers and the sound system sources. Example:
When A, PL/PF and M are correctly configured, the following functions are performed: - if A=1, PL/PF=1 and M=3, the radio control will manage the amplifier with address A=1
and PF=1, and will activate source no. 3.
1) A = 1–9 address of the amplifier room to control
In sound system mode the keys on the special control perform the following functions:
PL/PF = 0–9 amplifier address to control
1) With a short pressure of T1, the following sequence is sent:
M = 0 (Follow-me mode)*
- ON of the sources, source 1 is switched on only if M=0;
2) A = AMB - Room configuration
- ON of the amplifier.
PL/PF = 0-9 configuration of the room to control ( in this case all the amplifiers of the
2) With an extended pressure of T1:
same room will be controlled)
- for point-point controls, if the amplifier is already on, only the volume is adjusted
M = 1 (activation of sound source S=1)*
(VOL+); if the amplifier is off, the switch on sequence is sent first;
3) A = GEN this control enables switching ON all the amplifiers in the home
- for Room, Group and General controls, only the volume is adjusted.
PL/PF = -
3) With an extended pressure of T3, the volume is adjusted (VOL-). A short pressure sends
M = 4 (activation of sound source S=4)*
the OFF control to the amplifier.
4) When T2 is pressed the source is changed.
NOTE (*): M = 1-4 indicates the source to activate before switching the amplifier on.
5) T4 is the control for the active source.
If M=0, source 1 is switched on without first switching OFF the sources (follow-me
mode).
In all SPE=8 modes, the sockets of LIV1, LIV2 and I must not be configured.
10) Mode with SPE=9 - enhanced dimmer functions version 0/I - Automation

Selection of the SOFT-START and SOFT-STOP speed (see table below) and selection of the fixed adjustment level from 1% to 99%
through the LIV1=0-9 and LIV2=0-9 sockets, according to the table for SPE=5. Control is ON at the level selected with the upper key
and OFF at the one selected with the lower key. If LIV1=LIV2=0, a short pressure of the upper key will be enough for the ON control (at 0–9
the last level saved), and of the lower key, for the OFF control; only in case of point-point controls, an extended pressure will give the
possibility to perform adjustments (upwards with the upper key and downward with the lower key), on 100 levels at variable speed.
BT00285-a-UK

H4651M2 - L4651M2 - AM581M2
11) Mode with SPE=ON - timer control

In this mode the control only works as a timer. In order to use this special control as a
S value (LIV2) Time (sec.)
timer control, the meaning of the configurators is as follows:
M becomes M1 0 0
LIV1 becomes M2 1 5
LIV2 becomes S 2 10
Configure the M1 and M2 sockets for setting the timer minutes, and S for the timer 3 15
seconds, in 5 sec. steps; see table. 4 20
If M1=M2=S=9, a control is sent with a 0.5 sec. time value. If M1=M2=S=0, the control
is not timed and works in cyclic ON-OFF on the bottom left pushbutton. By correctly 5 25
selecting the sub keys, it is possible to only send timer controls or, using the two right 6 30
keys, the usual ON, OFF or dimmer adjustment controls.
7 35
8 40
9 45
12) Management of input auxiliaries (AUX)

The configurator in AUX indicates the auxiliary channel number which activates the control. On receiving a message sent on the AUX channel indicated, the device sends the control
for which it is configured, as if its own control pushbutton had been pressed.
- double light control - Plug&Go (see the dedicated technical guide)
- double disable control - Push&Learn
- double scenario control - Project&Download,
- double CEN control
- double scenario PLUS control Using the Virtual Configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed
- double CEN PLUS control below:
- double AUX control - double light control
- double video door entry system control - double disable control
- double sound system control - double scenario control
- double scenario PLUS control
- double CEN PLUS control
- double AUX control
- double video door entry system control
- double sound system control
chapter.
LED adjustment
BT00285-a-UK
30%
DEFAULT
60% 0%
100%
PUSH t > 2 s
Basic control
for 2 independent loads H4652/2 - L4652/2 - AM5832/2
Description
1
Two-module, flush mounted and lowered special control with 4 pushbuttons and 2
green/red two-colour LEDs (LIVING and Màtix versions), or 4 blue/red two-colour LEDs
(AXOLUTE version). The LEDs may be adjusted or excluded using the pushbutton on the
control. 2
The device can control one single actuator for single or double loads, or two actuators
for single or double loads, independent from each other.
configuration procedures (Plug&go, Push&Learn, Project&Download). 3
5
Technical data
Absorption with maximum LED intensity: 6 mA for H4652/2
8.5 mA for L4652/2
and AM5832/2
Dimensional data
6
A
PL/PF
M
MY HOME configuration LIV1/AUX
LIV2
SPE
When installed in a MY HOME system, the device may be configured in two ways: I

the web server. The Virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC. 7
Legend
1. LED
2. Upper pushbutton
3. Lower pushbutton
4. LED
5. Pushbutton for LED adjustment/exclusion
7. BUS
BT00286-b-UK

H4652/2 - L4652/2 - AM5832/2
Possible function Combination of key covers used/Configurator in M1 and M2

ON control ON –
OFF control OFF –
Timed ON control2) 1–8 –
Dimmer - ON control (upper key)
– 0/I
OFF (lower key) + adjustment 1)
Cyclical ON-OFF control + adjustment 1) no configurator –
UP/DOWN rolling shutter to end of stroke – ↑↓
Monostable rolling shutter UP/DOWN – ↑↓ M
Bistable rolling shutter up-down movement.
Blades adjustment if the pressure time is less than 1.5 s.
– 6
Up-down to the end of travel if the control is pressed for
more than 1.5 s.
Pushbutton (ON monostable) PUL –
Activation of scenarios managed by the programmer MH200N3) – CEN
1. If the control is sent to a dimmer actuator; Configurator Time (minutes)
2. The controlled actuator switches off after an amount 1 1
of time set by the configurators used, as shown in the 2 2
table.
3 3
3. Enabling of keys T1 (upper) and T3 (lower) with 2
module key cover; Enabling of keys T1 – T2 (upper) 4 4
and T3 – T4 (lower) with 1 module key cover; For 5 5
MH200N programmer scenario management. If
the device is used only to manage the scenario 6 15
programmer MH200, do not configure positions A2, 7 30 sec.
PL2.
BT00286-b-UK
8 0.5 sec.
below:
- double scenario control
H4652/2 - L4652/2 - AM5832/2
Lighting Management configuration LED adjustment
following ways:
- Push&Learn 30%
- Project&Download,
Using the Virtual Configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed DEFAULT
below: 60% 0%
- double light control
PUSH t > 2 s 100%
chapter.
BT00286-b-UK

Basic control
for 3 independent loads H4652/3 - L4652/3 - AM5832/3
Description
Three module flush mounted control, with six pushbuttons and three LED (in the LIVING 1
and Màtix version) or 6 LEDs (in the AXOLUTE version), which signal the status of the
control. The device can drive 1 relay single load actuators.
The device can be installed in a MY HOME system and configured physically or virtually.
In this mode the control can drive actuators with 2 interlocked relays and send controls
for the management of advanced devices, if configured using the CEN configurator.
When installed as a component of the Lighting Management system, specific
configuration procedures are used (Plug&go, Push&Learn, Project&Download). 2
Technical data
Absorption: 9 mA
Dimensional data
A1
PL1
A2
MY HOME configuration PL2 4
A3
When installed in a MY HOME system, the device may be configured in two ways: PL3
M
5
Legend
1. Upper pushbutton
2. Lower pushbutton
3. LED
5. BUS
BT00290-a-UK

H4652/3 - L4652/3 - AM5832/3
The device consists of three independent controls, and found on the back of the devices
are three separate A and PL positions, which relate to the keys on the front of the control.
From left to right, the three front buttons correspond to control 1 (A1, PL1), control 2 (A2,
PL2), and control 3 (A3, PL3).
Configurator value in position M Key covers used/function Configurator value in position M Key covers used/function
No configurator Cyclical ON/OFF 1 Cyclical ON/OFF UP/DOWN

NotE: if the control is associated to a dimmer actuator item H/L4678 item H/L4674 4 monostable
Cyclical ON/OFF
with operating modes cyclical ON-OFF, ON (upper key) and OFF (lower key) the UP/DOWN
brightness can also be adjusted. 7 ON (upper key)
Cyclical ON/OFF
OFF (lower key)
Configurator value in position M Key covers used/function Configurator value in position M Key covers used/function
3 UP/DOWN 2 Cyclical ON/OFF UP/DOWN

6 monostable UP/DOWN 5 monostable
Cyclical ON/OFF
UP/DOWN
9 ON (upper key) 8 ON (upper key)
OFF (lower key) Cyclical ON/OFF
OFF (lower key)
CEN enabling the T1-T2-T3 (upper) and T4-
T5-T6 (lower) keys to manage scenarios of
the programmer MH200N*
Note (*): Do not configure positions A2, PL2 and A3, PL3.
BT00290-a-UK
- double light control - Plug&Go (see the dedicated technical guide)

- double rolling shutter control - Push&Learn
- double CEN control - Project&Download,
below:
- double light control
For more information on the functions see the glossary before the Technical sheets chapter.
Flush mounted 1 relay actuator H4671/1 - L4671/1 - AM5851/1
Description
Front view
This device incorporates an electromechanical relay to control a single load. it therefore
offers the advantage of being suitable for use as a control device, thanks to the front
pushbuttons. 1
Technical data
2
Power supply from BUS: 27 Vdc from BUS
3
Operation power supply with BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
Absorption: 16.5 mA
Power/Absorption of driven loads: Rear view
PL
lamp
G1 4
G2
7 5
L L1
6
Legend
1. Upper pushbutton
230 Vac 1380 W 6A 150 W Max. 3 lamps 150 W 0.65 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 460 VA 2. Lower pushbutton
3. LED
Dissipated power with max. load: 0.9 W 4. Configurator socket
Size: 2 flush mounted modules 5. Power line
6. BUS
7. 2x2.5 mm2
BT00072-c-UK

H4671/1 - L4671/1 - AM5851/1
Configuration
The actuator performs all the basic operating modes that can be directly configured on
the control, apart from those which involve the use of two interlocking relays. Also, the
following table lists further operating modes possible with the configurator in the M
position of the same actuator. The configurators connected to the G1 and G2 positions
make it possible for the device to be associated to two separate belonging groups.
Possible function Combination key cover used and configurator in M
Cyclical ON/OFF No configurator —

ON pressing upper key - OFF pressing lower key — O/I
Cyclical ON/OFF PUL —
Actuator as Slave. Receives a control sent by a Master actuator with the same address SLA —
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for 1-4 —
point-point control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator
is disabled after the time set in the Master actuator 1)
The control is configured in the M = 0/1 socket.
same time. The OFF control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan 1 1
working for the time set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as 2 2
indicated in the table.
3 3
4 4
BT00072-c-UK

Control/actuator H4671M2 - LN4671M2 - AM5851M2

1
This device, with 4 pushbuttons and 4 two-colour LEDs at the front (green/red in the
LIVING and MÀTIX versions, and blue/red in the AXOLUTE version), is fitted with two
independent relays for the management of:
- 2 loads or 2 groups of loads, independent; 2
- 1 single load (rolling shutter motor).
The actuator may also be configured for the management of the connected load, whilst
at the same time operating as a “control device” for the management of one or more
remote actuators, with operating modes typical of control device item art. H/L4652/2.
Below are the possible operating modes of the device and the combination with the 3
key covers.
4
1. Actuator for rolling shutter automation and remote “control” function
1
Rolling shutter management Remote actuator “control”
“actuator” key cover key cover Rear view
5
7
2. Lighting and remote “control” function actuator
6
Light management Remote actuator “control”

“actuator” key cover key cover
Legend
3. Lighting actuator (2 independent loads) 1. LED:
LIVING LIGHT: green with motor stopped, or orange (green + red) with motor in
Light 1 management Light 2 management operation
“actuator” key cover “actuator” key cover green with light OFF, and orange with light ON
AXOLUTE: blue with motor stopped, or blue + red with motor in operation
blue with light OFF, or blue + red with light ON
2. Upper pushbuttons
3. Lower pushbuttons
4. Lighting and rolling shutter automation actuator 4. LED adjustment/disable pushbutton
5. Configurator socket (attention, it must only be used in MY HOME systems with
physical configuration)
Rolling shutter management
BT00411-b-UK
“actuator” key cover 6. BUS

7. Clamps (3x2.5 mm2) for connection to the load
Light management
“actuator” key cover

H4671M2 - LN4671M2 - AM5851M2
Technical data
Stand-by Absorption: 14 mA max
Incandescent lamps - Motor reducers for rolling LED lamp

Halogen lamp shutters Compact fluorescent lamp
230 Vac 460 W 2A 460 W 2A 70 W Max. 2 lamps
Linear fluorescent lamp - Electronic transformer Ferromagnetic transformers
70 W 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 460 VA

EN50090-2-2 Home and building electronic systems (HBES)
EN50090-2-3 General functional safety requirements for products intended to be
integrated in HBES
EN50428 Switches and related accessories for use in home and building
electronic systems (HBES)
Dimensional data
Wiring diagram
Light connection wiring diagram Rolling shutter wiring diagram
N
N N
LL L
BT00411-b-UK
L1
M
N
L2

H4671M2 - LN4671M2 - AM5851M2
Configuration
When installed in a MY HOME system, the device may be configured in two ways: The PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION is performed by connecting the relevant configurators to
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets. the 6 corresponding sockets:
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, by connecting the system to the PC using the Kit or the web A1, PL1 and M1= definition of address and actuator operating mode
server. The Virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC. A2, Pl2 and M2= definition of address and remote actuator “Control”, or “Actuator 2
mode” operating mode.
Actuator” operating mode – left pushbutton.

The A1 and PL1 positions define the address of the actuator.
The configurator in position M1 sets the function performed by the load connected to
the device, as per the following table:
Combination of key covers used/Configurator in M1

Possible function
Lighting function
Cyclical ON/OFF no configurator –
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave
actuator. Only for point-point control. With the OFF control the Master
1–4 –
actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator is disabled after the time set in the
Master actuator (see note 1)
ON pressing upper key - OFF pressing lower key – O/I
Cyclical ON/OFF
PUL –
Automation Function
Rolling shutter up-down movement with stop 2 minutes after the key has
– OFF
been pressed; the actuator ignores Room and General controls
Rolling shutter up-down movement with stop after the time set by the
– 5–8
configurator (see table 1)
UP/DOWN rolling shutter monostable – ↑↓ M
Bistable rolling shutter up-down movement. Blades adjustment if the
pressure time is less than 1.5 s. Up-down movement to the end of travel if – ↑↓
the control is pressed for more than 1.5 s.
Note: for the lighting functions connect the load to clamps L1-C 1) Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control activates
BT00411-b-UK
Table 1: START/STOP time
The OFF control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for the
Configurator M1 Time (minutes) time set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table.
5 1
6, ↑↓ M, ↑↓ 2 Configurator M1 Time (minutes)
7 5 1 1
8 infinite until the next control 2 2
3 3
4 4
H4671M2 - LN4671M2 - AM5851M2
“Remote control actuator” operating mode – right pushbutton.

The A2 and PL2 positions define the A and PL address of the remote actuator to manage.
The configurator in position M2 sets the function as per the following table:
Combination key covers used and configurator in M2

Possible function
Lighting function
ON control ON –
OFF control OFF –
Timed ON control2) 1–8 –
Dimmer - ON control (upper key)
– 0/I
OFF (lower key) + adjustment 1)
Cyclical ON-OFF control + adjustment 1) no configurator –
Automation function
UP/DOWN rolling shutter to end of stroke – ↑↓
UP/DOWN rolling shutter monostable – ↑↓ M
Pushbutton (ON monostable) PUL –
Activation of scenarios managed by the programmer MH200N3) – CEN
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 15
7 30 seconds
8 0.5 seconds
1) If the control is sent to a dimmer actuator;
2) The controlled actuator switches off after an amount of time set by the configurators used, as shown in the table;
3) Enabling of keys T1 (upper) and T3 (lower) with 2 module key cover; enabling of keys T1 – T2 (upper) and T3 – T4 (lower) with 1 module key cover. For MH200N programmer
scenario management. If the device is used only to manage the scenario programmer MH200, do not configure positions A2, PL2.
BT00411-b-UK

H4671M2 - LN4671M2 - AM5851M2
“Actuator” operating mode for two separate loads – left and right pushbuttons –
M1=CEN
When the CEN configurator is connected to the M1 position, the actuator is preset for
the management of two separate loads, connected to contacts C-L1 and C-L2 of the
two relays, controlled locally using both front pushbuttons, right (load connected in
C-L2) and left (load connected in C-L1). In practice, the ”lighting” functions for the left
pushbutton (see page 3) are also applied to the right pushbutton.
In the positions A1, PL1 and A2, PL2 it will be necessary to define the Room and Light
Point addresses of the two loads.
When the M2 position is configured, the possible functions are:
Combination key covers used and configurator in M2

Possible function
Cyclical ON/OFF no configurator –

Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the
corresponding Slave actuator. Only for point-point
control. With the OFF control the Master actuator 1–4 –
deactivates; the Slave actuator is disabled after the time
set in the Master actuator (see note 1)
ON pressing upper key - OFF pressing lower key – O/I
Cyclical ON/OFF
PUL –
1) Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control activates
The OFF control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for the
time set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table.
Configurator M1 Time (minutes)

1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
BT00411-b-UK

Dimmer actuator H4678 - L4678
Description
Front view
The device is a dimmer for controlling resistive loads or ferromagnetic transformers.
Lets you switch on, switch off and adjust the illumination intensity of the load; it can be
controlled with the BUS or local key. If you press the key briefly, the load will switch on or
switch off. If you hold it pressed longer, the brightness can be adjusted. 1
The actuator can signal any load problems such as, for example, the breaking of the
lamp. It is also protected by a fuse, which can easily be replaced if it blows.
The LED on the actuator changes colour based on the status of the device:
2
- green/blue LED: voltage – load off
3
- red: load ON
- flashing LED: wrong configuration
Rear view
Technical data
Absorption: 9 mA
Incandescent lamps Ferromagnetic transformers
Halogen lamp
5
Legend
1. Upper pushbutton
2. Lower pushbutton
3. LED
5. Fuse
230 Vac 60 - 300 W 0.25 - 1.30 A 0.25 - 1.30 A 60 - 300 VA
Dissipated power with max. load: 3W

Connection
N
clamp
white = adjusted brown = line
A
BT00075-c-UK
PL
M
G
configurators
fuse

H4678 - L4678
Configuration
Possible function Combination key cover used and configurator in M
Cyclical ON/OFF with short pressure and adjustment with long pressure No configurator —
ON pressing the upper key and adjustment UP. — O/I
OFF on the upper key and adjustment DOWN.
Cyclical ON/OFF PUL —
Actuator as Slave. Receives a control sent by a Master actuator with the same address SLA —
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. Only for 1 – 4 —
point-point control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator
deactivates after the time set in the Master actuator 1)
same time. 1 1
The OFF control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for 2 2
the time set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the
3 3
table.
4 4
BT00075-c-UK

Radio control with battery HA4572 - HB4572 - L4572 - H4572PI - L4572PI
Description
The radio control is used to drive wire actuators and recall scenarios of the system
through the receiving interface (HC/HS4575 and L/N/NT4575N). 1
It’s available on the catalogue in two versions:
- HA/HB/L4572 with surface mounting frame for installation using double sided
tape (supplied) or using standard wall plugs. No flush mounted box or masonry 2
work required. When used with Living cover plates remove the side sections of the
PL1
PL2
supporting frame.
M
A
- H/L4572PI with frame, for flush mounted installation inside traditional supports.
The radio control is battery operated. When using the control for the first time make
sure the battery protection tab is removed.
3
Technical data
Power supply: 3V battery type CR2032 (Min. duration: 2 years)
Radio frequency: 868 MHz 4
Range: 100 m in free field (metal and reinforced concrete walls
reduce the range)
Legend
Size: 2 modules 1. Tab for removing battery
2. Pushbuttons
4. LED
Control composition table
Residential series Control Key cover Cover plate Support
Square
HA4572 HC4919 HS4919 HA4802...

AXOLUTE
SURFACE
Elliptical
HB4572 HC4919 HS4919 HB4802...
LIVING
LIGHT
LIGHT TECH
L4572 L4919 N4919 NT4919 L4802... N4819... NT4819...
BT00095-b-UK
PL1
PL2
M
A
AXOLUTE
FLUSH MOUNTED
H4572PI HC 4919 HS 4919 HA4802... HB4802... H4702
LIVING
PL1
PL2
M
A
LIGHT
LIGHT TECH
L4572PI L4919 N4919 NT4919 L4802... N4819... NT4819... L4702 N4719

HA4572 - HB4572 - L4572 - H4572PI - L4572PI
Configuration
The radio devices must be configured using the numeric configurators only; “virtual The radio control must be configured by placing the appropriate configurators in sockets
configuration” is therefore not applicable in this case. A, PL1, PL2 and M. If position PL2 is not configured, the right key will be disabled.
Possible function Fitting of spacer below the key covers Combination of key covers used / Configurator in M
KEY A KEY B
1 3
2 4
ON control YES ON
OFF control YES OFF
ON control pressing the upper key, OFF pressing the lower NO 0/1
key and long press to adjust the intensity
Rolling shutter UP/DOWN control - to end of stroke NO ↑↓
Rolling shutter up/down control for the time the key is NO ↑↓ M
pressed
Pushbutton mode YES PUL
Key A: Cyclical ON/OFF Key cover A: YES 1
Key B: Up/Down rolling shutters Key cover B: NO
Key A: Cyclical ON/OFF Key cover A: YES 2
Key B: Rolling shutters – Up/Down Key cover B: NO
Key A: ON - upper key, OFF - lower key NO 3
Key B: Up/Down
Key A: ON - upper key, OFF - lower key NO 4
Key B: Rolling shutters – Up/Down
Cyclical ON-OFF control and intensity adjustment with YES No configurator
extended pressure
Scenario management (see the following table) 5–8
CEN control to manage MH200 CEN
M=5 – 8 scenario module

This mode can be used only if the system includes a Scenario Module item F420 that allows The control activates a scenario from 1 to 16, depending on the configurator placed in
you to activate (not program) a previously stored scenario. In this operating mode, positions position M and the key pressed, as described in the following table.
BT00095-b-UK
A and PL1 represent the address of the scenario module on which one can operate.
Value configurator in M Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4

5 Scenario 1 Scenario 2 Scenario 3 Scenario 4

Flat radio control no battery HA4572SB - HB4572SB - L4572SB
Description
1
The radio control is used to control the MY HOME system using the receiving interface
HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB. This special devie does not require the use of a battery as it’s
already fitted with a piezo-electric generator.
The control does not require flush mounted boxes as it can be installed with double-
sided adhesive tape (supplied) or using standard wall plugs. no masonry work is
therefore required.
Technical data
Power supply: piezo-electric generator
(metal and reinforced concrete walls reduce the range)
Type of modulation: ASK Front view 2
Size: 2 modules
The radio control does not have positions for the configuration of the operating modes, 1. Pushbutons
as these are set by configuring the SPE position of the radio receiver HC/HS/L/N/ 2. Piezo-electric generator
NT4575SB.
Control composition table
Residential series Control Key cover Cover plate
Square
AXOLUTE HA4572SB HC4919SB HS4919SB HA4802...

SURFACE
Elliptical
HB4572SB HC4919SB HS4919SB HB4802...
LIVING
BT00097-b-UK
LIGHT
LIGHT TECH
L4572SB L4919SB N4919SB NT4919SB L4802... N4819... NT4819...

2 module flush mounted HC4672N - HS4672N - HD4672N
actuator 16 A L4672N - N4672N - NT4672N
Description
Front view
The device is an actuator with 1 bistable relay sensor with local pushbutton for load
forcing/local control for the Automation and/or Load control management functions.

the F21 load control unit (e.g. Priority 1 will be the first load disabled if the threshold is
exceeded). This priority coincides with the address that will be used in all configuration
software programs. Using the forcing pushbutton it will be possible to re-enable the load
for 4 hours after DISABLING by the central unit, or remove the load forcing previously set.
In automation mode, the actuator can perform the following functions:

- all operating modes that can be configured on the control devices, with the exception
of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays; 1
- possibility of group configuration (G);
- additional modes using the M configuration socket.
3 2
- if the load is ENABLED or FORCED, the status of the relay follows the commands of the
Automation system. Rear view
- if the load is DISABLED by the central unit for load management, the status of the relay
does not follow the commands of the Automation system, but can only be re-enabled by
a control, ENABLING or FORCING, from the load control management.
During disabling, the actuator keeps the statuses requested by the Automation
A
commands in the memory. After RE-ENABLING the relay is placed in the status required L PL
by the last automation command. G 4
7 M
This function has been conceived for applications where the load control management P1
function is implemented, with the need of performing hourly load scheduling. If P2
during DISABLING stage the relay is switched off due to the scheduling settings, when
6
re-enabling takes place it will stay switched off.
L1
The bistable relay enables preserving the status of the load also in case of lack of voltage 5
from the SCS bus (e.g. device reset).
The device consists of 2 modules, so that it can be installed in supports of the Living,
Light, Light Tech and Axolute series, and is provided with socket for 6 configurators: A, PL,
G, M, P1, P2.
Operating power supply 1. Local pushbutton for load forcing/local control

with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 2. LED RED
Absorption: 10 mA max 3. Green/red two-colour LED
BT00363-b-UK
Operating temperature: 0 – 40 °C 4. Configurator socket

Power/Absorption of driven loads: Incandescent and halogen lamps 10 A / 2300 W 5. BUS connection
LED lamp and Compact fluorescent lamps 6. Load connection
500 W / Max. 10 lamps 7. Phase connection
Linear fluorescent lamp and electronic
transformers 4 A / 920 W
Ferromagnetic transformers 4 A cosφ 0.5 / 920 VA
Dimensional data
2 flush mounted modules

HC4672N - HS4672N - HD4672N
L4672N - N4672N - NT4672N
Configuration
The device can be configured by connecting the physical configurators to the correct
sockets.
The device is provided with socket for six configurators, which define:
- A/PL/G/M local address (room, light point), group, and mode in the automation system.
- P1/P2 priority in the load control management system, (P1 = tens, P2 = units)
1) Automation Mode:
The actuator performs all the operating modes that can be configured on the control connected to the M position of the actuator itself.
devices, with the exception of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays; it can In the A and PL positions it will be necessary to indicate the device address, while the P1
also accept extended switch on, switch off, and time delay controls. and P2 positions must be configured equal to zero.
In addition, the following table lists the operating modes required for the configurator The pushbutton operates in ON/OFF cyclical mode.
In the Off delayed mode, the master sends the Off command after a period of time set
1)
Configurator in M Time (minutes)
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
Two-colour LED
Device status Result Red LED
green red
Load OFF Fixed ON OFF GREEN OFF

Load ON Fixed ON Fixed ON ORANGE OFF
BT00363-b-UK

HC4672N - HS4672N - HD4672N
L4672N - N4672N - NT4672N

In the P1 and P2 positions it will be necessary to indicate the priorities from 01 to 63, the
A, PL, G and M positions must be configured equal to zero.
Two-colour LED
Green Red
Enabled ON Fixed ON Fixed ON ORANGE OFF

Enabled OFF Fixed ON OFF GREEN OFF
Forced Fixed ON Flashing 1 s/1 s ORANGE flashing 1 s/1 s on GREEN OFF
Disabled Fixed ON OFF GREEN Fixed ON

Two-colour LED
Green LED Red LED
Enabled + ON Fixed ON Fixed ON ORANGE OFF

Enabled + OFF Fixed ON OFF GREEN OFF
Disabled Fixed ON OFF GREEN Fixed ON
Forced + ON Fixed ON Flashing 1 s/1 s ORANGE flashing 1 s/1 s on GREEN OFF
Forced + OFF Flashing 1 s/1 s Flashing 1 s/1 s ORANGE flashing 1 s/1 s OFF
Two-colour LED
BT00363-b-UK
Green LED Red LED
No configuration Fixed ON Flashing ORANGE flashing OFF

128 ms/128 ms 128 ms/128 ms on GREEN
Configuration error Fixed ON Flashing irregularly ORANGE flashing OFF
irregularly on GREEN

HC4672N - HS4672N - HD4672N
L4672N - N4672N - NT4672N
Wiring diagrams
230 Vac
C16
F881NA/16
230V
C16
LOAD
A
L PL
G
M
P1
P2
L1
SCS BUS
BT00363-b-UK

HD4563 - HC4563 - HS4563
Regulation rotative control L4563 - N4563 - NT4563
Description
The regulation rotative control is used for the advanced management of dimmer
actuators and sound systems. The central pushbutton can be used to switch the
controlled dimmer on and off, with times (soft-start and soft-stop) and switch-on
intensity (from 1 to 99%) that can be set by configuring the device. The rotary knob 1
instead accurately adjusts the controlled power from the minimum to the maximum 2
value
In the sound system it’s used to send to the BUS controls for the management of various
devices such as amplifiers and sound sources; the central pushbutton can be used for
“ON/OFF”, CD track, or saved radio station cycling control, while the knob can be used
to adjust the volume of the loudspeakers. The control may be configured as point-point, Front view
room, and general.
Technical data
Max. Absorption: 5 mA
Configuration
Rear view
A1
A ROOM
PL/PF PL/PF Light point/voice point
M Legend
LIV1 (Sound system)
LIV2
SPE M mode 1. Knob
I
LIV1 adjustment level 10 – 90 2. Pushbutton/LED
LIV2 adjustment level 1 – 9 3. Configurator socket
SPE special
I address of the device to be controlled
(see table 1 for details)
1) Mode with SPE=0 - enhanced dimmer functions -

Can switch a dimmer actuator ON, selecting the level from 1% to 99%, and the soft-start and soft-stop speed. The times shown in the table refer to the maximum level.
The knob perform adjustment on 99 levels.
Possible function Configurator in M Configurator in LIV1 Configurator in LIV2 (unit)
(tens)
ON-OFF cyclic with selection of soft-start and soft-stop speed (see table 2). 1–9 0–9 0–9
If LIV1=LIV2=0 the load switches ON at the last level saved
ON-OFF cyclic with switching ON at the level from 1-99%. If LIV1=LIV2=0 the load - 0–9 0–9
switches ON at the last level saved
Table 1: address of the device to be controlled Table 2: start/stop time

BT00066-b-UK
Configurator in I Address Configurator in M Time (sec.)

1–9 Systems with logical extension. Address of interface 0 default
item F422 the BUS of which the dimmer to be driven 1 1
is found on 2 3
3 5
0 The dimmer is found in the same system as the control
4 10
CEN Systems with logical extension. The dimmer is 5 20
found in the riser BUS and the knob control in one 6 40
of the connected systems 7 1 min.
8 2 min.
9 4 min. and 15 sec.
HD4563 - HC4563 - HS4563
L4563 - N4563 - NT4563
2) Mode with SPE=1 - Sound system mode -

Possible function Value configurator in M Configurator in LIV1 Configurator in LIV2
Follow-me mode (*) 0 1 – 9 volume level when the amplifier is
activated, without configurators the last set -
level activates
Address of the first source to activate 1–4 1 – 9 volume level when the amplifier is
activated, without configurators the last set -
level activates
The A room can be configured from 1 to 9 for point-point function, or with AMB to identify a room, and finally with GEN for the activation of all the amplifiers of the house.
NOTE (*): the Follow-me mode allows to have the same music in another room after switching OFF the amplifier of the room previously occupied, and switching ON the one in the
current room.
3) Mode with SPE=2 - basic dimmer functions -

Can switch a dimmer ON, selecting the level from 1 to 9. If M = 0 the load switches ON at the last level saved. Unlike the mode with SPE=0 the knob can perform adjustments on 9 levels.
Possible function Value configurator in M Configurator in LIV1 (tens) Configurator in LIV2 (unit)
Cyclical ON/OFF with switching ON at level 1 to 9 1–9 - -
BT00066-b-UK

HD4575 - HC4575 - HS4575
Receiving radio interface L4575N - N4575N - NT4575N
Description
The interface lets you use radio controls to operate one or more actuators with a wire
BUS, thus allowing you to create combined radio and wire systems.
This device cannot interact with the radio control without batteries (HA/HB/
L4572SB).
Technical data
Operating power supply SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 4 1
Absorption: 22 mA
Radio frequency: 868 MHz Front view
Configuration A
PL
There are four ways to configure the interface: M
- Physical expansion for expanding Automation systems; 2
- SELF-LEARNING, used in combination with the remote controls item 3527 and item 3528;
- SCENARIO PROGRAMMER for the control of devices item MH200.
- REMOTE SCENARIOS, for managing scenarios stored by the scenario module item F420.
The interface has three configuration sockets: A and PL for the address and M for the 3
operating mode.
1) Physical expansion mode - configurator M=1 - Rear view

In this mode it is possible to install only one receiving interface for each system; it may
be used on the same system of the transmitting interface item HC/HS4576 or item L/N/
NT4576N (only if it is likewise configured in Physical expansion mode – M = 1). Legend
Only radio control devices with a configurable address (sockets A, PL, M, G etc.) must be
1. Programming/reset pushbutton
used, such as item HA/HB/L4572 and item H/L4572PI, etc.; these devices must also be
configured.
3. BUS
4. LED
The configurators in A=1 – 9 and PL= 1 – 9 separate the wire system from the radio
system; all addresses lower than A and PL are reserved for the wire system while all Programming
addresses higher than A and PL are reserved for the automation system. In the example To associate a radio device to the receiving interface, follow the procedure below:
below, the address of the receiving interface is A=6 PL=1; all the messages of controls 1) Press the radio interface programming pushbutton for 3 sec.: the red LED will turn
with an actuator with address lower than 61 (59, 58, etc.) as recipient are transmitted on on steadily; release the key.
the BUS. 2) Within 20 seconds press the key of the radio control you want to program; The
red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that the
programming has been completed.
Receiving interface item L/N/NT4575N
A
PL
A =6 3) Now repeat 1) and 2) for all codes to be stored inside the interface (max. 128 codes).
M PL = 1
M =1
To eliminate a code from the receiving interface, follow the procedure below:
1) Press the pushbutton for at least 8 seconds (after 3 seconds the red LED will turn on
BUS steadily and then after another 5 seconds it will turn off). Release the key. The red
BT00096-b-UK
LED will turn on again.

2) Within 20 seconds press the key on the transmitting device using the key of the
channel you want to cancel: the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2
WYRE SYSTEM RADIO SYSTEM seconds, thus confirming the cancellation.
Available addresses Available addresses 3) From now on, the cancelled key will no longer send any control to the BUS until it is
from 11 to 59 from 62 to 99 re-programmed.
To cancel all codes from the receiving interface, press the pushbutton for about 12
seconds (after 3 seconds the red LED will turn on steadily, after another 5 seconds it will
If there is an HC/HS4576 and L/N/NT4576N transmitting interface in the system,
turn off and after another 4 seconds it will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds,
configured with M=1, the latter should have an address next to the one of the receiving
thus confirming that all programming conditions have been cancelled). Release the key.
interface. Example: A=6 PL=1 M=1 for the receiving interface and A=6 PL=2 M=1 for
the transmitting interface.
HD4575 - HC4575 - HS4575
L4575N - N4575N - NT4575N
2) Self-learning mode - configurator M = 0 -

This operating mode enables associating a single function to any key of the alarm radio
remote control. By following the procedures below, the user can set, delete, or change
this association.
1
It is necessary to insert the numeric configurators in the two A = 0 – 9 and PL = 1 – 9 Arrangement of keys on the
positions of the interface in order to determine the address of the device in the system, 3528 remote control 2
which must be different from the actuator address. 4 1 3
NOTE: only radio controls or radio remote controls that cannot be configured can 4
operate in this mode (e.g. 3527, 3528...). 5
It is also necessary that no transmitting interface, HS4576 and L/N/NT4576N is installed
in the system, although several receiving interfaces may be present. 6
Functions that the receiving interface can “learn”:

a. Automation
- ON/OFF - actuator; operation in cyclical mode. Actuator ON/OFF with short pressure,
and dimmer adjustment with long pressure (point-point control only). Arrangement of
- Timed ON. keys on the 3527
- Flashing. remote control
3 2
- Rolling shutters UP; UP functioning till end of stroke in bistable mode.
Long pressure executes UP function, short pressure executes STOP function.
- Rolling shutters DOWN; DOWN functioning till end of stroke in bistable mode.
Long pressure executes DOWN function, short pressure executes STOP function. d. Auxiliary channels
- Lock/Unlock actuator. - Auxiliary lights ON/OFF; operation in cyclical mode.
- Scenario activation. - Rolling shutters UP; UP functioning till end of stroke in bistable mode. Long pressure
b. Video door entry system executes UP function, short pressure executes STOP function.
- Door lock control (also during a conversation). - Rolling shutters DOWN; DOWN functioning till end of stroke in bistable mode. Long
- Staircase light control. pressure executes DOWN function, short pressure executes STOP function.
- Floor call (also general). - Reset.
- Auto-switching ON and cycling of cameras(only with SCS F442 modulator)
c. Sound system
- ON amplifier (always in follow-me mode) amplifier ON with short pressure, volume
Up with extended pressure.
- OFF amplifier. amplifier OFF with short pressure, Volume Down with extended
pressure.
- Cycling of sources.
- Change radio station or music track.
Programming
To associate a different control to each of the alarm radio remote control channels, follow To cancel the programming of one of the remote control keys, follow the procedure
the procedure below: below:
1) Press the programming pushbutton of the radio interface for 3 seconds: the red LED 1) Press the programming pushbutton on the radio interface for at least 8 seconds
will turn on steadily; release the pushbutton. (after 4 seconds the red LED will turn ON steadily and then after another 5 seconds it
2) Within 20 seconds press the key of the remote control you want to program; the red will turn off). Release the key. The red LED will turn ON again steadily.
LED will begin to flash, hence indicating the activation of the programming mode. 2) If you want to cancel the programming condition of a key, press it on the remote
BT00096-b-UK
3) Within 5 minutes, set the function you want to associate to the remote control key control within 20 seconds; the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds,
using the actuator and/or corresponding control; the red LED will start flashing thus confirming the cancellation.
quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that the programming has been 3) From now on, the cancelled key will no longer activate any control until it is
completed. re-programmed.
4) You can repeat 1), 2) and 3) for all keys, even for a key that has already been To cancel all programming conditions of the interface simultaneously, press the pin
associated (in case you want to change it). A maximum of 24 self-learning pushbutton for about 12 seconds:
operations are possible (e.g. 4 remote controls item 3527). the red LED will turn on steadily after 3 seconds; after another 5 seconds, it will turn
off and after another 4 seconds it will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus
confirming the cancellation of all programming conditions.
Release the key. Here you can completely reset the device by cancelling both the
associated radio codes and the controls associated to the various remote control keys.
HD4575 - HC4575 - HS4575
L4575N - N4575N - NT4575N
3) Scenario programmer mode - configurator M=CEN

In this mode press one of the keys of remote control item 3527 and item 3528 to activate
the scenarios which are programmed and managed by the scenario programmer device
item MH200.
In this operating mode the system must not have the transmitting interface item HC/ 1
Arrangement of keys on
HS4576 or item L/N/NT4576N; several receiving interfaces item HC/HS4575 and item 2
the 3528 remote control
L/N/NT4575N can also be installed.
The numeric configurators to define the address different from that assigned to the 4 1 3
actuators must be connected to the two positions A = 0 – 9 and PL = 0 – 9 of the 4
interface (A and PL must not be 0 at the same time)
5
Programming 6
The programming procedure is that described in the “Programming” chapter interface in
mode “Physical expansion – Configurator M=1”.
4) Remote scenario mode - configurator M = 6 – 8
This operating mode enables you to associate each scenario stored by the scenario
module item F420 to any key of the radio remote control item 3527 and item 3528.
In the two positions of the interface, A = 0–9 and PL =1-9, it will be necessary to
connect the configurators corresponding to the scenario module to control. Arrangement of
The configuration in M determines the correspondence between the keys of the remote keys on the 3527
3 2
control and the scenarios stored, as shown in the table below. remote control
NOTE: only radio controls or radio remote controls that cannot be configured can
operate in this mode (e.g. 3527, 3528...).
Furthermore, it is possible to install different receiving interfaces item HC/HS4575 or NOTE: The keys shown with * refer to remote control item 3528 with 4 channels.
L/N/NT4575N.
Scenario number Configurator Configurator Configurator
in the scenario M=6 M=7 M=8
module
Scenario 1 Key 1 *
Scenario 2 Key 2 *
Scenario 3 Key 3 *
Scenario 4 Key 4 *
Scenario 5 Key 5
Scenario 6 Key 6
Scenario 7 Key 1 *
Scenario 8 Key 2 *
Scenario 9 Key 3 *
Scenario 10 Key 4 *
Scenario 11 Key 5
Scenario 12 Key 6
BT00096-b-UK
Scenario 13 Key 1 *
Scenario 14 Key 2 *
Scenario 15 Key 3 *
Scenario 16 Key 4 *

HD4575 - HC4575 - HS4575
L4575N - N4575N - NT4575N
Programming
To program a scenario it is necessary: To cancel a scenario, follow the procedure below:
1) To enable the programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the programming 1) Enable the programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the programming
status LED is green (press the lock/unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 status LED is green
seconds). 2) Press the interface programming pushbutton for 8 seconds (after 3 seconds the red
2) Press the programming pushbutton of the interface for 3 seconds: the red LED will LED will turn on steadily and then after another 5 seconds it will turn off again).
turn on steadily. Release the pushbutton. The red LED will turn on again.
3) Within 20 seconds press the Alarm radio remote control key of the scenario you 3) Within 20 seconds press the alarm radio remote control key of the scenario to
want to program on the radio remote control: the red LED will begin to flash, hence be cancelled from the remote control: when the scenario module confirms the
indicating the activation of the programming mode. cancellation the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds and then it
4) Set the scenario using the controls and/or actuators of the MY HOME system. will turn off.
5) Press the interface pushbutton to exit the programming mode: the red LED will turn 4) Repeat 2) and 3) for all the scenarios you want to cancel.
off To cancel all programming of the interface simultaneously, press the programming
6) Repeat 2) through 5) for all the scenarios you want to program (maximum 128 pushbutton for about 12 seconds (after 3 seconds the red LED will turn on steadily,
codes). after another 5 seconds it will turn off and after another 4 seconds it will start
7) To disable the possibility of programming, or of cancelling any scenarios, press the flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus confirming the cancellation). Release the
lock/unlock key of the scenario module until the corresponding LED turns red. key.
NOTE: This operation will not cancel the scenarios saved in the Scenario Module.
Cancelling all scenarios: to execute this operation, it is necessary to hold down the DEL
key directly on the Scenario Module for 10 seconds after pressing the self-learning key
so that the LED turns green.
BT00096-b-UK

HD4575SB - HC4575SB - HS4575SB
Receiving radio interface L4575SB - N4575SB - NT4575SB
Description
The receiving interface must be used to allow the radio control without batteries item
HA/HB/L4572SB to operate the MY HOME system. A
PL1 3
M1
PL2
Technical data M2
SPE
Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1

Absorption: 33 mA 2
Front view Rear view
1 2
Configuration
The interface can be configured in five different modes:
- SELF LEARNING
- STANDARD
- REMOTE SCENARIO MANAGEMENT
- Sound system
- Video door entry system 3 4
Positions A, PL1 and PL2 define the receiver addresses in the MY HOME system. pair of pair of
Positions M1 and M2 define the operating modes. keys 1 and 3 keys 2 and 4
1) Self-learning mode - SPE=0- Front view of the radio control
This operating mode enables you to associate one of the following functions to each pair item HA/HB/L4572SB with key covers
of keys, pair 1-3 and pair 2-4 of the radio control item HA/HB/L4572SB.
a) Automation
Legend
- ON/OFF - actuator; operation in O/I mode. Actuator ON/OFF with short pressure, and
dimmer adjustment with long pressure (point-point control only). The upper key of 1. LED
the pair is automatically associated to the ON control and UP intensity adjustment, 2. Programming/reset pushbutton
whereas the lower key is associated to the OFF control and DOWN intensity 3. Configurator socket
adjustment. 4. BUS
- Timed ON. Both keys of the pair execute the same function.
- Flashing. Both keys of the pair execute the same function. d) Auxiliary channels
- Rolling shutters – UP/DOWN; UP/DOWN functioning till end of stroke in bistable - ON/OFF auxiliary lights; operation in O/I mode. The ON control is automatically given
mode. The upper key of the pair is automatically associated to the UP control (UP by the upper key of the pair while the OFF control is given by the lower key.
with long pressure, STOP with short pressure) whereas the lower key is associated to - Rolling shutters – UP/DOWN; UP/DOWN functioning till end of stroke in bistable
the DOWN control (DOWN with long pressure, STOP with short pressure). mode. The upper key of the pair is automatically associated with the UP control (UP
- Lock/Unlock actuator. Both keys of the pair execute the same function. with long pressure, STOP with short pressure) whereas the lower key is associated
- Scenario activation. Both keys of the pair execute the same function. with the DOWN control (DOWN with long pressure, STOP with short pressure).
b) Video door entry system - Reset. Both keys of the pair execute the same function.
- Door lock control (also during a conversation). Both keys of the pair execute the
same function.
- Staircase light control. Both keys of the pair execute the same function.
- Floor call (also general). Both keys of the pair execute the same function.
BT00098-b-UK
- Auto-switching ON and cycling of cameras(only with SCS F442 modulator). Both

keys of the pair execute the same function.
c) Sound system A 0–9
- ON/OFF amplifier; ON always works in Follow me mode. With short pressure
amplifier ON/OFF, volume adjustment with extended pressure. The amplifier ON and PL1 1–9
Up volume adjustment controls are automatically associate to the upper key, while M1 0
the amplifier OFF and Down volume adjustment controls are associated to the lower PL2 0
key.
- Cycle source/station-track change. The source cycling control is automatically M2 0
associated to the upper key, while the station-track change control is associated to SPE 0
the lower key.

L4575SB - N4575SB - NT4575SB
Self-learning mode programming

It is possible to associate up to 24 functions to each single receiving interface (hence, for To cancel the programming of a radio control key pair, follow the procedure below:
each interface it is possible to associate up to 12 radio controls L4572SB). The association 1) Press the programming pushbutton of the interface for at least 8 seconds; after 3
between the required function and the pair of keys is made by following the procedure seconds the red LED will turn on steadily; after another 5 seconds, it will turn off.
described below. Release the pushbutton. The red LED will turn on again steadily.
2) If you want to cancel a programming condition, press the key of its pair within 20
In order to associate a function to each radio control key pair, follow the procedure seconds; the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus confirming
below: the cancellation.
1) Press the interface programming pushbutton for 3 seconds. When the red LED turns 3) From now on, the cancelled pair of keys will no longer activate any control until it is
on steadily. Release the pushbutton. re-programmed.
2) Within 20 seconds press a key of the pair you want to program on the radio control;
the red LED will begin to flash, hence indicating the activation of the programming To cancel all interface associations simultaneously, press the programming pushbutton
mode. of the receiving interface for about 12 seconds; after 3 seconds the red LED will turn
3) Within 5 minutes set the function you wan to associate to the radio control key, on steadily, after another 5 seconds, it will turn off nd after another 4 seconds it
using the corresponding device (e.g. control, actuator, amplifier, etc.). The red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus confirming the cancellation of all
will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that the association programming conditions. Release the pushbutton.
has been achieved;
4) Repeat 1), 2) and 3) for all key pairs to be associated, even for a pair that has already
been associated (in case you want to change it).
2) Standard mode - SPE=1 -

This operating mode allows you to implement the automation standard functions (e.g. controlling lights and rolling shutters). In addition to positions A, PL1 and PL2 – which
determine the receiving interface address item HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB in the Automation system – it is necessary to configure positions M1 and M2, which determine the operating
modes of the pair of keys (pair 1-3 and pair 2-4) of the associated radio control.
Possible function Configurator in position M1 Configurator in position M2
Pair of keys 1 and 3 Pair of keys 2 and 4
1 3
3 4
Cyclical ON/OFF control 2) and intensity adjustment with No configurator No configurator

long pressure 2)
ON control 2) ON ON
OFF control 2) OFF OFF
ON control by pressing the upper key, 0/1 0/1
OFF by pressing the lower one and intensity adjustment
with long pressure
UP control (buttons 1 and 2) and DOWN till end (buttons 3 ↑↓ ↑↓
and 4) of travel
UP control (buttons 1 and 2) and DOWN (buttons 3 and 4) ↑↓ M ↑↓ M
rolling shutter – as long as the key is pressed
Pushbutton mode 2) PUL PUL
Timed ON control 1) 2) 1–8 1–8
CEN control to manage MH200 CEN CEN
BT00098-b-UK
1) depending on the configurator placed in the control, the actuator turns OFF Configurator Rated time (min.)
automatically after a time period specified in the table.
1 1
2) mount the shim supplied on the back of the key cover, so that only the lower key is
2 2
used.
3 3
NotE: if positions A2 and PL2 are not defined the pair of pushbuttons 2 and 4 will be 4 4
disabled. 5 5
6 15
7 30 sec.
8 0.5 sec.
L4575SB - N4575SB - NT4575SB
Standard mode programming

In order to associate a radio control item HA/HB/L4572SB to the receiving interface HC/ 2) within 20 seconds, press a key of the pair you want to cancel a programming
HS/L/N/NT4575SB, follow the procedure below: condition on the radio control; the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2
1) Press the programming pushbutton of the interface for 3 seconds: the red LED will seconds, thus confirming the cancellation.
turn on steadily; release the key. 3) from now on, the cancelled pair of keys will no longer activate any control until it is
2) within 20 seconds, press a key of the pair you want to program on the radio control; re-programmed.
The red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that the
programming has been completed. To cancel all programming from the receiving interface HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB, press the
3) now repeat 1) and 2) for all codes to be stored inside the interface, up to a maximum of 128. programming pushbutton on the interface for about 12 seconds (after 3 seconds the
red LED will turn on steadily, after another 5 seconds it will turn off and after another
To eliminate a code from the receiving interface item HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB, follow the procedure 4 seconds it will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus confirming that all
below: programming conditions have been cancelled). Release the key.
1) press the programming pushbutton of the interface for at least 8 seconds. (after 3
seconds the red LED will turn on steadily, after another 5 seconds, it will turn off).
Release the key. The red LED will turn on again.
3) Remote scenario management mode - SPE=6 -

This operating mode can be used to manage the scenarios saved in the F420 scenario
module using the HA/HB/L4572SB radio control. The configuration in A and PL1 of the
receiving interface must correspond to that (A and PL) of the scenario module to be
controlled.
The configuration in M1 determines the correspondence between the keys of the radio
control and the scenarios stored in the Scenario Module.
A 0–9
PL1 1–9
M1 1–4
PL2 0
M2 0
SPE 6
Value configurator in M Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4

Scenario programming
To program a scenario it is necessary:
1) In order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary to enable the 2) Press the interface programming pushbutton for 8 seconds (after 3 seconds the red
programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the programming status LED is LED will turn on steadily and then after another 5 seconds it will turn off again).
green (press the lock/unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds). Release the pushbutton. The red LED will turn on again.
2) Press the programming pushbutton of the interface for 3 seconds: the red LED will 3) Within 20 seconds press the key of the scenario you want to cancel on the radio
turn on steadily. control: when the scenario module confirms the cancellation, the red LED will start
flashing quickly for about 2 seconds and then it will turn off.
BT00098-b-UK
3) Within 20 seconds press the key of the scenario you want to program on the radio
control: the red LED will begin to flash, hence indicating the activation of the 4) Repeat 2) and 3) for all the scenarios you want to cancel.
programming mode.
4) Set the scenario using the controls and/or actuators of the MY HOME system. To cancel all programming of the interface simultaneously, press the programmings pushbutton
5) Within 35 minutes, press the programming key on the interface to exit the for about 12 seconds (after 3 seconds the red LED will turn on steadily, after another 5 seconds it
programming mode: the red LED will turn off. will turn off and after another 4 seconds it will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus
6) Repeat 2) and 5) for all the scenarios you want to program. confirming the cancellation). Release the key.
7) To disable the possibility of programming, or of cancelling any scenarios, press the NOTE: This operation will not cancel the scenarios saved in the Scenario Module.
lock/unlock key of the scenario module until the corresponding LED turns red.
To cancel a scenario, follow the procedure below: Cancelling all scenarios: to execute this operation, it is necessary to hold down the DEL
1) Enable the programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the programming key directly on the Scenario Module for 10 seconds after pressing the self-learning key
status LED is green. so that the LED turns green.
L4575SB - N4575SB - NT4575SB
4) Sound system mode - SPE=8 -

This operating mode enables implementing the sound system functions. In this
operating mode the keys of the radio control operate as follows: 1 2
- Key 1: a short pressure activates the source and the amplifier. An extended pressure
increases the volume.
- Key 3: a short pressure switches the amplifier off. An extended pressure decreases
the volume.
- Key 2: changes sound source.
- Key 4: changes track or radio station.
3 4
The Room (A) and Loudspeaker (PL1/PF1) must be configured following the procedure pair of pair of
below: keys 1 and 3 keys 2 and 4
- A= 0 – 9: is the amplifier room; PL1/PF1= 0 – 9: is the amplifier loudspeaker;
- A=AMB: is for room controls; PL1/PF1= 0 – 9: is the room the control is intended for; Front view of the radio control
- A=GEN: for general type controls; PL1/PF1 must be 0. item HA/HB/L4572SB with key covers
The configuration M1=1-4 defines the source to activate before switching ON the
amplifier; If M1=0, source 1 is switched on without first switching Off the sources Example:
(Follow-me mode). - if A=1, PL1/PF1=1 and M=3, the radio control will manage the amplifier with address
The PL2 and M2 configurators must be equal to zero. A=1 and PF=1, and will activate source no. 3.
Sound system programming

In order to associate a radio control item HA/HB/L4572SB to the receiving interface HC/ 2) within 20 seconds, press a key of the pair you want to cancel a programming
HS/L/N/NT4575SB, follow the procedure below: condition on the radio control; the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2
1) Press the programming pushbutton of the interface for 3 seconds: the red LED will seconds, thus confirming the cancellation.
turn on steadily; release the key. 3) from now on, the cancelled pair of keys will no longer activate any control until it is
2) within 20 seconds, press a key of the pair you want to program on the radio control; re-programmed.
The red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that the
programming has been completed. To cancel all programmings from the receiving interface HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB, press
3) now repeat 1) and 2) for all codes to be stored inside the interface, up to a maximum the programming pushbutton on the interface for about 12 seconds (after 3 seconds the
of 128. red LED will turn on steadily, after another 5 seconds it will turn off and after another
4 seconds it will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus confirming that all
To eliminate a code from the receiving interface item HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB, follow the
programming conditions have been cancelled). Release the key.
procedure below:
1) press the programming pushbutton of the interface for at least 8 seconds. (after 3
seconds the red LED will turn on steadily, after another 5 seconds, it will turn off).
Release the key. The red LED will turn on again.
5) Video door entry system mode - SPE=9 -

This operating mode gives the possibility of interacting with the video door entry - M=2: Floor call control
system, assigning to the radio control some functions like: staircase light switching ON, A and PL1 (if M1=2) and/or A and PL2 (if M2=2) are the address (two digits) of the
floor call, and entrance panel door lock opening. handset to call.
- M=3: staircase light switching ON control
BT00098-b-UK
The M1 (pair of keys 1 and 3) and M2 (pair of keys 2 and 4) mode configurators must be A and PL1 (if M1=3) or A and PL2 (if M2=3) are the address (two digits)
configured in one of the following ways: corresponding to the handset from which the staircase lights are controlled.
- M=1: double door look release control
A and PL1 (if M1=1 and M2≠0) are the address of the entrance panel from which
the door lock is controlled: key 3 controls the door lock of entrance panel (A/PL1),
while key 1 controls the door lock of entrance panel (A/PL1)+1. A and PL2 (if M2=1)
are the address of the entrance panel from which the door lock is controlled: key 4
controls the door lock of entrance panel (A/PL2), while key 2 controls the door lock
of entrance panel (A/PL2)+1. The address of the entrance panel specified in A/PL1
or in A/PL2 must be lower or equal to 95.

L4575SB - N4575SB - NT4575SB
Example of Configuration
Configuration radio interface HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB Radio control
A 2 Entrance panel 22 HA/HB/L4572SB Staircase lights26
PL1 1 1 2
1 2
M1 1
PL2 6
M2 3 Entrance panel 21 Staircase lights26
13 4
2
3 4
SPE 9 1 2
3 4
3 4
If the PL2 and M2 positions have not be configured, the right side keys (2 and 4) are A and PL1 are the address (two digits) of the entrance panel for which the door
disabled. lock is to be controlled: Key 3 controls the door lock of entrance panel (A/PL1), key
The only exceptions are as follows: 4 controls the door lock of entrance panel (A/PL1)+1, key 1 that of entrance panel
- M1=1, M2=0, PL2=0: quadruple door lock release. (A/PL1)+2, and key 2 that of entrance panel (A/PL1)+3. The address of the entrance
panel specified in A/PL1 must be lower or equal to 95.
Radio interface configuration - HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB 1 2

A 1 Radio control HA/
Entrance panel 15 HB/L4572SB Entrance panel 16
PL1 3
3 4
M1 1 1 2
PL2 0
M2 0
Entrance panel 13 Entrance panel 14
SPE 9 3 4
Video door entry system programming

In order to associate a radio control item HA/HB/L4572SB to the receiving interface HC/ To eliminate a code from the receiving interface item HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB, follow the
HS/L/N/NT4575SB, follow the procedure below: procedure below:
1) Press the programming pushbutton of the interface for 3 seconds: the red LED will 1) press the programming pushbutton of the interface for at least 8 seconds. (after 3
turn on steadily; release the key. seconds the red LED will turn on steadily, after another 5 seconds, it will turn off).
2) within 20 seconds, press a key of the pair you want to program on the radio control; Release the key. The red LED will turn on again.
The red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that the 2) within 20 seconds, press a key of the pair you want to cancel a programming conditon
programming has been completed. on the radio control; the red LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus
3) now repeat 1) and 2) for all codes to be stored inside the interface, up to a maximum confirming the cancellation.
BT00098-b-UK
of 128. 3) from now on, the cancelled pair of keys will no longer activate any control until it is
re-programmed.
To cancel all programmings from the receiving interface HC/HS/L/N/NT4575SB, press
the programming pushbutton on the interface for about 12 seconds (after 3 seconds the
red LED will turn on steadily, after another 5 seconds it will turn off and after another
4 seconds it will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus confirming that all
programming conditions have been cancelled). Release the key.

HD4576 - HC4576 - HS4576
Radio transmitting interface L4576N - N4576N - NT4576N
Description
The interface lets you control one or more radio actuators from a control in the
Automation wire system, thus allowing you to create combined radio and wire systems.
Technical data
Absorption: 40 mA
Range: 100 m in free field (metal and reinforced
concrete walls reduce the range) Front view
Configuration
A
The interface can be configured in physical expansion mode. PL
M
It is possible to install only one interface item HC/HS4576 or item L/N/NT4576N for each
2
system; it may be used on the same system of the receiving interface item HC/HS4575
and item L/N/NT4575N (only if it is configured in physical expansion mode – M = 1.
The configurators in positions A and PL separate the wire system from the radio system;
all addresses lower than A and PL are reserved for the wire system. All addresses higher
than A and PL will be reserved to the radio part of the Automation system. 3
In the example below, the address of the receiving interface is A=6 PL=2; all control
messages having an actuator with address higher than 62 (63, 64, etc.) as their recipient
Rear view
are radio-transmitted.
If there is a receiving interface, item HC/HS4575 and item L/N/NT4575N, in the
system configured with M=1, the latter should have an address next to the one of the
transmitting interface item HC/HS4576 and item L/N/NT4576N. Legend
Example: A=6 PL=1 M=1 for the receiving interface and A=6 PL=2 M=1 for the 1. Programming/reset pushbutton
transmitting interface. 2. Configurator socket
3. BUS
4. LED
Transmitting interface
A
PL
A =6
M PL = 2
M =1
BUS
BT00101-b-UK
Wire system Radio system

WIRE SYSTEM RADIO SYSTEM
Available addresses Available addresses
from 11 to 61 from 63 to 99

HD4653M2 - HC4653/2 - HS4653/2
Soft touch control HD4653M3 - HC4653/3 - HS4653/3
Description
Two-module and three-module touch control. The difference between the who versions
is only mechanical, the configuration procedures and the operating modes are the same. 1
If the device is properly configured, it is possible to send controls for the automation
system and sound system and to manage the scenarios stored in the scenario module.
Technical data 2
for item HC/HS4653/2
Size: 3 flush mounted modules for item HC/HS4653/3
1. LED
2. Sensitive area
A room
A
PL/PF PL/PF Light point/voice point
M
M2
(sound system SPE=8)
SPE M mode
INT
M2 mode 2
(scenario selection SPE=6)
SPE special
INT LED intensity adjustment
Possible function SPE M

For point-point controls, it executes the cyclical ON/OFF function for short approaching and load power None None
adjustment (dimmer actuators) for long approaching. As for the other controls, it executes only ON/OFF
Timed control. The device sets the actuator to OFF after a predetermined time (see table 1) None 1-8
ON control None ON
OFF control None OFF
Pushbutton (ON monostable) None PUL
Cyclic ON/OFF without adjustment 1 7
ON control with flash. Flashing time (see table 2) 2 None – 9
Selects the fixed adjustment level of the dimmer ( see table 3) 3 1–9
Sound system function 8 Se = 0 Follow-me mode (*)
If = 1 – 4 Address of the first source to activate
BT00065-b-UK
Audio and video door entry functions 9 If=1 Door lock ON control; A/PL address (2 digits)
of the entrance panel from which the door lock
is controlled.
If=2 floor call control; A/PL address (2 digits) of
the handset to call
If=3 staircase light control; A/PL address (2 digits)
of the handset from which the lights are controlled
Activation of scenarios managed by the scenario programmer MH200 None CEN
NOTE (*): the Follow-me mode allows to have the same music in another room after switching OFF the amplifier of the room previously occupied, and switching ON the one in the
current room.

HD4653M2 - HC4653/2 - HS4653/2
HD4653M3 - HC4653/3 - HS4653/3
Table 1 SPE = none Table 2 SPE = 2 Table 3 SPE = 3

M Time M Time M % power on the load
1 1 min. None 0.5 sec. 1 10 %
2 sec. (SPE=7) 1 1 sec. 2 20 %
2 2 min. 2 1.5 sec. 3 30 %
10 min. (SPE=7) 3 2 sec. 4 40 %
3 3 min. 4 2.5 sec. 5 50 %
4 4 min. 5 3 sec 6 60 %
5 5 min. 6 3.5 sec. 7 70 %
6 15 min. 7 4 sec. 8 80 %
7 30 sec. 8 4.5 sec. 9 90 %
8 0.5 sec. 9 5 sec.
Operating modes for scenario management

By connecting configurator 6 in the SPE socket, the touch Control can call, program and The scenario number can be selected using configurators 1-9 in positions M and M2, as
cancel any of the 16 scenarios contained in a Scenario Module item F420. in the following table. The address of the Scenario Module to control must be indicated
in positions A and PL.
Table 4 A - PL
M M2 Scenario number Address (2 digits) of the Scenario Module to be controlled
0 1 1
0 2 2
... ... ...
1 6 16
Programming a scenario Cancelling a scenario

1) the Scenario Module must be enabled in order to execute the programming process; 1) The Scenario Module must be enabled in order to execute the programming process;
2) put your hand near the detector zone of the control (the LEDs will switch on at their 2) put your hand near the detector zone of the control (the LEDs will switch on at their
maximum intensity) and keep it in position. The intensity of the LEDs will decrease maximum intensity) and keep it in position. The intensity of the LEDs will decrease
to their lowest level after 3 seconds; now move your hand away from the control; to their lowest level after 3 seconds; keep your hand in position for about another 5
3) the LEDs will begin to flash with a very low frequency, hence indicating the seconds;
activation of the programming mode; 3) the LEDs will start flashing at a high frequency, thus indicating that the scenario has
4) set the scenario using the controls and/or actuators; been cancelled; they will then return to their lowest level of intensity.
5) put your hand briefly near the control to exit the programming mode; the LEDs will
stop flashing and will return to their lowest level of intensity. NOTE: To cancel all scenarios of the module, use the reset key directly on the scenario
module.
Selecting the intensity of the LEDs (INT configurator)

Connect the configurators in the INT socket to choose different LEDs brightness levels,
BT00065-b-UK
according to the installation requirements. Specifically:
INT = none when inactive and with load off, the LEDs are lit at 30%, with load
on (only for point-point light controls) they are lit at 60%
INT = 1 when inactive and with load off, the LEDs are lit at 45%, with load on
(only for point-point light controls) they are lit at 70%
INT = OFF when inactive and with load off, the LEDs are unlit, with load on
(only for point-point light controls) they are lit at 30%

HD4654 - HC4654 - HS4654 - L4654N
IR receiver N4654N - NT4654N - AM5834
Description
The receiver enables adding or replacing the manual control with an infrared remote
control item 3529. It is possible to associate to the remote control pushbuttons controls
intended for 1-relay actuators for single loads and 2-relay actuators for double loads
(rolling shutter motor etc.), manage scenarios, as well as sound system and video
door entry systems. In addition to the IR receiving lens, the front of the device shows a 1
programming pushbutton and a notification LED, to confirm that the IR signal sent by
the remote control has been received, and notification of the programming procedure.
8 2
Front view
7 A
PL1/PF1
PL2/PF2
PL3/PF3
3
PL4/PF4
6 M
5 4
Rear view
3529

Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1. Receiving lens
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 2. Programming/reset pushbutton
Absorption: 8.5 mA 3. Channel selection
Operating temperature: 5 – 35 °C 4. BUS
Size: 2 flush mounted modules 5. Two-way switch, to enable programming
6. Operating modes
7. Room number receiving the control
8. LED
Configuration
The IR receiver can be set up for 5 different operating modes depending on the
configuration of positions A, A, PL1, PL2, PL3, PL4 and M:
Mode M Possible function

A - remote control 1–4 Repeating of 4 generic controls (ON/OFF, UP/DOWN) with the 4 remote control keys. The desired control are saved in the receiver
during installation by connecting the configurators in the A, PL1-PL4 and M position. The modification of the preset functions will
BT00071-b-UK
require the reconfiguration of the IR receiver.

B - advanced scenarios CEN Activation of scenarios managed by the scenario programmer item MH200
C - remote self-learning none Repeating of generic controls (ON/OFF, UP/DOWN) with the remote control keys. In this case the receiver saves the controls by
performing a self-learning procedure. The customer can change the succession and the controls saved to be recalled with the
remote control at any time.
D - scenario module control 6 Management with the remote control of a maximum of 16 recorded scenarios in the scenario module item F420.
E - Sound system 9 Management using the remote control of the amplifier to be controlled.

HD4654 - HC4654 - HS4654 - L4654N
N4654N - NT4654N - AM5834
1) Mode “A” (remote control) M = 1 – 4

This mode lets the user associate generic controls (ON/OFF, UP/DOWN) intended for - Controls intended for actuators for single and double loads belonging to the room
single loads or double loads to the remote control keys. defined with configurator 1 to 9 in position A. In this case the operating modes are
The correspondence between the remote control keys and the loads controlled is defined by the configurators marked by the graphics of the function performed,
determined in the installation phase by the configuration of positions A and PL 1 to PL connected to positions PL 1 to 4.
4 of the IR receiver, as shown in the table below. The following can be associated to the
remote control pushbuttons:
- Point-point controls, i.e. intended for single or double loads (rolling shutter motor)
whose address is specified by configurator 1 to 9 in positions PL 1 to PL 4. The various
operating modes are determined by the association of the configurators to the PL
positions.
Function Type of control Position A Position PL1/PF1 Position PL2/PF2 Position PL3/PF3 Position PL4/PF4
Cyclical ON/OFF with Light point in the 1–9 1–9 1–9 1–9 1–9
short pressure + room indicated in A
adjustment (dimmer)
Cyclical ON/OFF Room control 2) 1–9 AMB AMB AMB AMB
Rolling shutter Light point n the room 1 – 9 1–9 1–9
UP/DOWN 1) indicated in A 1–9 1–9
1–9 1–9
1–9 1–9
1–9 1–9
1–9 1–9
Monostable rolling Room control 2) 1–9 ↑↓ M ↑↓ M
shutter UP/DOWN1) ↑↓ M ↑↓ M
↑↓ M ↑↓ M
↑↓ M ↑↓ M
↑↓ M ↑↓ M
↑↓ M ↑↓ M
UP/DOWN rolling Room control 2)
1–9 ↑↓ ↑↓
shutter to end of ↑↓ ↑↓
stroke1)
↑↓ ↑↓
↑↓ ↑↓
↑↓ ↑↓
↑↓ ↑↓
ON control Room control 2) 1–9 ON ON ON ON
OFF control Room control 2)
1–9 OFF OFF OFF OFF
BT00071-b-UK
1) The two PL positions must have the same configurator. The UP control is associated 2) The control is intended for devices belonging to the room indicated in A.
to the first PL position and the DOWN control with the second PL position.
Example 2: if on the receiver confi gurator ↑↓ is connected to positions PL2 and
Example 1: if on the receiver configurator 7 is connected to positions PL2 and PL3, the PL3, and configurator 2 is connected to position A,the remote control operates all the
remote control operates double actuator No. 7 of the room indicated in A, raising the actuators in room 2, raising the rolling shutters with pushbutton 2 and lowering them
rolling shutters with pushbutton 2 and lowering them with pushbutton 3. with pushbutton 3.

HD4654 - HC4654 - HS4654 - L4654N
N4654N - NT4654N - AM5834
Up to 4 IR receivers can be installed in the room considered. They can manage maximum Configurator in M Configurator in M
16 separate controls.
The correspondence between the channels of a remote control and the respective IR CH1 CH9
receiver is established by configuring position M of the IR receiver correctly. CH2 CH10
CH3 CH11
CH4 CH12
CH5 CH13
CH6 CH14
CH7 CH15
CH8 CH16
2) Mode “B” (advanced scenarios) M=CEN

This mode uses the IR remote control item 3529 as “scenario control” to activate one or Detail of the TiMH200 program
more advanced scenarios saved in the Programmer item MH200. to define pushbutton 3 of the
The IR receiver must be also configured in positions A and PL using the numeric remote control for the activation
configurators for the definition of the address in the system. of the Night scenario.
The association between one or more remote control pushbuttons (maximum 6) with Address A=1 and PL=3 of the
the scenarios created and saved in the Programmer item MH200 is performed when IR receiver is specified in the
creating the scenario itself using the TiMH200 application. “Object” field.
3) Mode “C” (remote self-learning) M=0

This mode enables to associate a single control to any key of the remote control. To cancel the programming of one of the remote control channels, follow the procedure
Using only one receiver it is possible to associate up to 16 controls to a remote control. below:
Configure the receiver with address A=0 and PL=1-9 that cannot be used by actuators. 1) press the programming pushbutton for at least 8 seconds: the LED will turn
on steadily after 3 seconds; after another 5 seconds, it will turn off; release the
Controls that the receiver can “learn”: pushbutton within 4 seconds: the LED will turn on steadily;
- ON/OFF actuator (ON/OFFcyclical functioning with short pressure and adjustment 2) within 20 seconds press the key of the channel you want to cancel on the remote
with long pressure) control: The LED will start flashing quickly for about 4 seconds, thus confirming the
- Timed ON cancellation;
- Flashing 3) from now on, the cancelled key will no longer activate any control until it is
- UP/DOWN rolling shutter (UP/DOWN until end of stroke) re-programmed.
- Lock/Unlock actuator
- ON/OFF lights - auxiliary, (Cyclical ON/OFF functioning) To cancel the programming of all remote control channels simultaneously, press the
- Up/down rolling shutter auxiliary (UP/DOWN until end of stroke) programming pushbutton for about 12 seconds: the LED will turn on steadily after
- Video door entry system (door lock and staircase lights) 3 seconds; it will turn off after another 5 seconds; after another 4 seconds, it will
- Sound system (management of the amplifier to be controlled) start flashing quickly for about 4 seconds, thus confirming the cancellation of all
programming conditions.
To associate a different control to each of the remote control channels, follow the
procedure below: NOTE: with the two-way switch in the “closed padlock” position programming and
1) press the programming pushbutton of the receiver for 3 seconds: the LED will turn cancelling the IR receiver are forbidden.
BT00071-b-UK
on steadily;
2) within 20 seconds press the key of the channel you want to program on the
remote control: the LED will begin to flash, hence indicating the activation of the
programming mode;
3) set up the control you want to associate to the remote control key using the controls
and/or corresponding actuator: the LED will turn on steadily;
4) you can now repeat 2) and 3) for all keys, even for a key that has already been
associated, in case you want to change it;
5) press the key to exit the programming mode: the LED will turn off.

HD4654 - HC4654 - HS4654 - L4654N
N4654N - NT4654N - AM5834
4) Mode “D” (Scenario module control) M=6

This mode enables creating, deleting or changing the scenarios saved in the scenario To cancel a scenario, follow the procedure below:
module, item F420, and to recall them using the remote control. The procedure lets you 1) Press the programming pushbutton of the receiver for 8 sec.: the LED will turn on
store up to 16 scenarios using all 16 channels of the remote control. steadily after 3 seconds; it will turn off again after another 5 seconds; release the
key within 4 seconds: the LED will turn on steadily;
To program, change or delete a scenario, the programming of Module item F420 must 2) within 20 seconds press the key of the scenario you want to cancel on the remote
be enabled, confirmed by the programming status LED turning green (press the lock/ control; when the scenario module sends the deleting confirmation, the LED will
unlock key for at least 0.5 seconds), and the two-way switch on the back of the IR start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds and then it will turn off;
receiver must be in the “padlock open” position. Follow the procedure below: 3) repeat 1) and 2) for all the scenarios you want to cancel.
1) press the programming pushbutton of the receiver for 3 seconds: the LED will turn
on steadily; Release the pushbutton; The entire memory can only be reset from the scenario module. To prevent the possibility
2) within 20 seconds press the key of the scenario you want to program on the of programming or deleting the scenarios from the IR receiver, move the two-way switch
remote control: the LED will begin to flash, hence indicating the activation of the on the back to the “lock closed” position.
programming mode;
3) set the scenario using the controls and/or actuators; NOTE: configure the device with address A=0 and PL=1-9 which cannot be used by
4) press the key to exit the programming mode: the LED will turn off; actuators. For example, if the scenario module is configured with A=0 and PL=3, the IR
5) repeat 1) and 4) for all the scenarios you want to program. receiver must be configured with A=0; PL=3 and M=6.
5) Mode “E” (Sound system) M=9

In the Sound system, the IR receiver can control up to 4 amplifiers. The association of the A-B-C-D keys to those of the remote control is performed as
The control is always in “follow me (*)” mode, and the functions that can be performed shown in the table:
are: Key A Key B Key C Key D
- Key A: With a short pressure, the “ON” control is sent. An extended pressure will
increase the volume PF1 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4
- Key B: With a short pressure, the “OFF” control is sent. An extended pressure will PF2 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8
decrease the volume PF3 Ch 9 Ch 10 Ch 11 Ch 12
- Key C: cycling of the radio stations saved, or CD track change
- Key D: cycling of the sources PF4 Ch 13 Ch 14 Ch 15 Ch 16
Where:
- PF1 = 0 – 9 address of the 1st amplifier to control
- PF2 = 0 – 9 address of the 2nd amplifier to control
- PF3 = 0 – 9 address of the 3rd amplifier to control
- PF4 = 0 – 9 address of the 4th amplifier to control
- A = 1 – 9 room receiving the control
NOTE (*): the follow-me mode allows to have the same music in another room after
switching OFF the amplifier of the room previously occupied, and switching ON the one
in the current room.
BT00071-b-UK

AXOLUTE HD4657M3 - HC4657M3 - HS4657M3
NIGHTER and WHICE control HD4657M4 - HC4657M4 - HS4657M4
Description
The Nighter and Whice control is a control where the traditional pushbuttons are replaced
by capacitive sensors.The device can be used to perform the functions typical of a special
SCS control by simply moving a finger close to the surface. It is produced in the 3 and
4 module flush mounted version, 6 and 8 keys respectively. Each zone corresponding to
a key is marked at the centre by a light blue LED. When the user moves a finger close
to the zone, its intensity increases sensibly, and remains so until the finger is moved
away again. The brightness level of the LEDs can be changed using the appropriate
adjustment pushbutton.
The Nighter and Whice control can operate in 4 different ways: self-learning, scenarios,
swivelling, CEN.
- The self-learning mode (cyclic or non-cyclic) allows to associate to each key most of
the typical automation system, sound system, video door entry system (staircase light,
open-door, call to the floor, door lock, and cycling of cameras) functions, in addition to Front view
auxiliary controls.
- The scenario mode can be used to recall, program and delete 6 scenarios of a scenario
module.
- The swivelling mode can be used to drive the 3 or 4 consecutive light points or rolling 1
shutters (or rooms or groups).
- The CEN mode enables using the control with the scenario programmer
item MH 200.
In order to clean the device, it is possible to temporarily disable the sensitive zones
by pressing two diagonally opposite zones at the same time. The LEDs will flash in
sequence. Normal operation is automatically reinstated after 10 seconds. 2
P
3
Technical data HC/HS4657M3

Max absorption HD/HC/HS4657M3: 20 mA
Max absorption HD/HC/HS4657M4: 25 mA Rear view
Operating temperature: 0–40 °C
Installation Legenda
Nighter and Whice can be easily wall mounted using the following items, available to order: 1. LED intensity programming and adjustment pushbutton
- for the 3-module control: box, item 503E, and screw support, item H4703 2. Configurator socket
- for the 4-module control: box, item 504E, and screw support, item H4704 3. BUS
Supports:
H4703
H4704
BT00110-d-UK
Control:
HC4657M3
Boxes: HS4657M3
503E HC4657M4
504E HS4657M4

HD4657M3 - HC4657M3 - HS4657M3
HD4657M4 - HC4657M4 - HS4657M4
Configuration
The configuration of the Nighter & Whice control can be made in two different modes:
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION: by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets;
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION: the control can be configured remotely, when no physical
configurators are available. (For the details refer to the Virtual Configuration).
Regardless of the mode, an A/PL address must always be assigned to the control.
A room
PL Light point
M mode
INT LED display mode
For the activation of the programming pushbutton and the LED adjustment, only use
the screwdriver provided
1) Self-learning mode M=0
This operating mode can be used to associate one individual control to any key of the device. It is 0
possible to create, delete or change each control. The device may be configured using any A/PL
address already present in the system, or a unique address not used by other devices.
Programming the Keys Deleting the programming of the keys

To associate a different control to each key, proceed as follows: 1) Press and release the key on the back, the LEDs come on in succession;
1) Press and release the key on the back, the LEDs come on in succession; 2) Within 20 seconds press and hold down for 4 seconds the key for which programming
2) Lightly touch the key to be programmed within 20 seconds: he LED will start is to be cancelled; from now on, no controls will be activated when this key is
flashing, confirming that the programming mode is active; pressed, until the key is programmed again.
3) Set up the control you want to associate to the key using the controls and/or 3) The corresponding LED flashes for 4 seconds in alternative to the others, after which
corresponding actuator. The LEDs start flashing in succession it will be possible to repeat point 2, to delete other programming sequences;
4) You can now repeat 2) and 3) for all keys, even for a key that has already been 4) Short press the pushbutton, or wait 20 seconds to automatically exit delete
associated, in case you want to change it; programming.
5) Press the pushbutton to exit programming, or wait 20 seconds to exit programming NOTE: To cancel the programming of all keys at the same time press and release the
automatically. key on the back. The LEDs will come on in succession. Press the pushbutton on the back
again, and hold it down for 10 seconds: all LEDs will flash for about 4 second to confirm
that all programming has been deleted.
BT00110-d-UK
2) Non-cyclical self-learning mode M=6

This mode is a variant of the self-learning mode (M=0), in which, however, the keys never 6
work cyclically.” Therefore, if for example, the ON of an actuator or dimmer is learnt, the
couple of keys is configured automatically to switch on or increase the light intensity level for
the upper key, and switch off or decrease the level of intensity for the lower one.
If, on the other hand, a single function is learnt (e.g. recalling of a scenario), the other key
of the pair remains without function, or retains the previous function. The device may be
configured using any A/PL address already present in the system, or a unique address not
used by other devices.

HD4657M3 - HC4657M3 - HS4657M3
HD4657M4 - HC4657M4 - HS4657M4
3) Scenario mode M = 1 – 4
This operating mode is useful if the system includes a scenario module, item F420. 1 – 4
The combination is ensured by assigning to both items the same address, identified by
A=0-9 and PL=1-9. The user may create, delete or change the scenarios saved in the
scenario module, and can recall them using the keys. With this procedure it is possible to
save up to 16 scenarios using two 8-key devices or three 6-key devices .
The following table shows the correspondence between the number of the scenario saved in the scenario module, and the keys of the control in the possible configurations:
3 module control (6 scenarios)
No. of the key M=1 M=4 M=3
Key 1 Scenario 1 Scenario 7 Scenario 13
Key 5 Scenario 5 Scenario 11
4 module control (8 scenarios)
No. of the key M=1 M=2
Programming a scenario
For the programming of the scenario, the procedure is as follows:
1) The self-learning configuration of the scenario module, item F420, must be enabled
(to do so press the self-learning pushbutton, so that the corresponding LED turns
green; if the LED is red, self-learning is disabled);
2) Press and release the key on the back; the LEDs of the keys enabled and programmed
for the scenario function will flash (1 sec. ON and 1 sec. OFF); ART.F420
3) Touch the key corresponding to the scenario to be programmed: the LED will start
flashing (upon receiving the update of the scenario module), confirming that
DEL
programming mode is active; Lock/unlock Scenario cancellation
4) Set the scenario using the controls and/or actuators; programming pushbutton
5) Press the pushbutton to exit programming: the LEDs flash in succession, it is now pushbutton Scenarios/learning
possible to repeat points 2, 3 and 4 for all scenarios, including those keys that have reset LED
already been associated, if they need changing; Programming
6) Press the pushbutton to exit programming, or wait 20 seconds to exit programming status LED
automatically.
F420
BT00110-d-UK
Cancelling a scenario
1) The scenario module, item F420 must be in configuration mode with self-learning
enabled;
2) Press and release the key on the back, the LEDs come on in succession;
3) Within 20 seconds press and hold down for 4 seconds the key of the scenario to be
cancelled; ;
4) The LEDs for the deleted key of the device will flash for 4 seconds. It is now possible
to repeat the instruction at point 2 to delete other programs. .
5) Briefly press the pushbutton, or wait 20 seconds to automatically exit delete
programming mode.
NOTE: the entire memory can only be reset from the scenario module: press and hold
down the “DEL” key for 10 seconds after enabling programming on the scenario module.
HD4657M3 - HC4657M3 - HS4657M3
HD4657M4 - HC4657M4 - HS4657M4
4) Swivelling modes M=0/I; ↑↓; ↑↓M

These modes enable quick installation without the need for learning procedures or scenario modules, allowing control of 4 or 3 consecutive light points or rolling shutters. The A PL
address is the light point or rolling shutter controlled by the first pair of keys. The subsequent pairs control the subsequent light points or rolling shutters. If the configurators Amb or
Gr are connected to A, in the same way the 4 or 3 pairs of keys control consecutive rooms or groups, starting from the one indicated by the configurator in PL.
NOTE: the maximum value of PL is 6 for the 4 module version, and 7 for the 3 module version.

ON/OFF control: On control using the upper key, Off control using the lower key. 0/I
For point-point controls, the ON/OFF functions are performed by a short pressure, while a
longer pressure will be used for the adjustments; for the other controls only the ON/OFF
functions are performed
Control (UP-DOWN for rolling shutters): up-down control to end of stroke ↑↓
Monostable control (UP-DOWN for rolling shutters): up and down control for the time the ↑↓M
key is pressed
5) Scenario programmer mode, M=CEN

The association of a scenario configured in the scenario programmer MH200N and the corresponding Nighter & Whice control activation keys, is performed during the programming
of the scenario itself using the software TiMH200N.
Always assign to the control a specific A/PL address on the system (not to be used by any other CEN
device installed on the BUS). The A=0, PL=0 configuration cannot be accepted.
This operating mode can only be used if the system includes a scenario programmer
(MH200N).
6) Selecting the intensity of the LEDs

Once the device has been configured, it is possible to adjust the LED intensity by pressing and holding down (t>2 sec.) the pushbutton on the back. The pushbutton operates on 3
intensity levels: starting from the default value (25%), the intensity changes every 2 seconds, showing the 3 levels that can be set, as per the following drawing. To select the desired
level simply release the pushbutton. Using the virtual configuration, the LED intensity may be adjusted to 10 different levels.
40%
DEFAULT
25%
0%
BT00110-d-UK
If the user has decided that the keys should lit up when pressed (status return), the brightness level will depend on the adjustment of the LEDs as shown below:
LED intensity level status return intensity

25% 65%
40% 70%
0% 20%

HD4657M3 - HC4657M3 - HS4657M3
HD4657M4 - HC4657M4 - HS4657M4
7) LED display selection mode – SET position

Using the SET configurator it is possible to select:
- if in the idle conditions the unused/not configured LEDs should stay off or on;
- if the LED should come on or not when the corresponding key is pressed (status return); for optimum status return effect, it is recommended that the LED brightness level is kept low.
- if the “fade” effect on the lighting pushbuttons should be enabled or disabled.
Configurator in the SET socket Behaviour

0 • LED on even if the key has not been configured
• No status return
• Fade effect enabled
• Fade effect disabled
2 • LED on only if the key has been configured (not configured -> LED off)
• Status return enabled
Once the device has been installed, wait two minutes for the self-calibration procedure to be
! completed. During this period, controls may be automatically sent to the system.
BT00110-d-UK

Green Switch HD/HC/HS4658 - L/N/NT4658N - AM5658

8
This devices features a PIR and US (ultrasound) movement detector, and a brightness
sensor for automatic activation of various types of loads following the detection of a
movement, and a brightness level lower than the set level. The enabling/disabling of
the load can also be performed manually using the appropriate front pushbutton and/or 7
using an external BUS control device. It is possible to configure several operating modes; 6
for the detailed descriptions see page 4. 1
Technical data 5 2
Voltage: 27 V= 3
Absorption: 17 mA
Collegamento tra rilevatore e attuatore: BUS SCS connector
Sensor type: movement detector (PIR+US) with 180°
detection angle and brightness sensor.
Flush mounted box depth: 40 mm
Weight: 60 g 4
Shock resistance: IK04
Penetration of solids and liquids: IP20
Time delay: 5 sec. - 59 min. 59 sec Legend
Brightness: 5 lux - 1275 lux
Operating temperature: (- 5) - (+ 45)°C 1. PIR sensor
Storage temperature: (- 20) - (+ 70)°C
2. LEARN LED
3. US sensor
Dimensional data
4. ON-OFF key
Size: 2 flush mounted modules 5. LEARN key
6. Movement detector sensor (under the lens)
A C 7. Infrared transmitter (under the lens)
8. Light sensor
A B C
45 45 51
Wiring diagram
BT00473-c-UK
BUS/SCS

HD/HC/HS4658 - L/N/NT4658N - AM5658
Installation
Detector position
PIR US
1m Position the detector so

that it is not affected by
the artificial light already
2.5 m
present in the room.
≥ 2.5 m
Configuration
Detection parameters:
Sensor parameters Preset value Adjustable parameters Configuration tools Available in

Distributed Central
BMSO4001 BMSO4003
mode mode
3,5,10,15,20 min −
Time delay 15 mn
30s - 255 h 59 min 59s −
Sensitivity PIR (molto alta) / US (alta) Low, medium, high, very high
Auto Not active Activate/Deactivate −
Mode
Walkthrough Active Activate/Deactivate −
Eco Not active Activate/Deactivate −
Iniziale PIR and US PIR and/or US, PIR, US −

Detection
Available but
mode
Maintenance PIR or US PIR and/or US, PIR, US −

not separate
Retrigger PIR or US PIR and/or US, PIR, US, Deactivate −
Alarm Not active Activate/Deactivate − −
Time delay: the time delay after which the load is switched off, if no movement Walkthrough:
is detected and the lighting level is sufficient - If a movement is detected for a period of time of less than 20”, the sensor will
BT00473-c-UK
switch the load off after 3 minutes;

Sensitivity: detection interval setting. - Otherwise the load will be switched off after the set time delay. .
Mode: Eco:
Auto: Manual switching on/automatic switching off:
Automatic switch on: - if no movement is detected, at the expiry of the time delay set;
- upon detection of a movement if the level of natural light is insufficient.. After switching off, if the detector detects a movements within 30 seconds the
Automatic switch off: lights automatically come on; after 30 seconds the lights must be switched on
- if no movement is detected, at the expiry of the time delay set; manually.
- or if the level of natural light is sufficient (set brightness threshold).
Another detection causes automatic switching on if the light is insufficient

HD/HC/HS4658 - L/N/NT4658N - AM5658
Detection mode: Retrigger: If the sensor detects a movement during the 30 s immediately after
Initial detection: the lights are switched on upon detection, if the natural light is switching off of the load, this is immediately switched on again. After the 30 s the
below the brightness threshold. sensors returns to normal operation. After 30 seconds the device must be switched on
manually
Maintenance: the lights stay on if another movement is detected.
Alarm: before the device is switched off a sound signal is emitted (1 minute, 30 seconds,
and 10 seconds before switching off),
Brightness parameters:

Distributed Central
BMSO4001 BMSO4003
mode mode
20, 100, 300, 500, 1000 lux −
Brightness threshold 300 lux −
0 - 1275 lux −
Calibration − 0 - 99995 lux −

Advanced
mode
Brightness adjustment Not active Activate/Deactivate − −
Light contribution Automatic Automatic - 1275 lux − −
Brightness threshold: value at which the lights come on if the brightness level Brightness adjustment: function for the switching off of the lights 10 minutes
is below the set values, and switch off if above this threshold. after the brightness threshold set is reached. In addition to this time there is a
further time interval (safety threshold to avoid inappropriate switching off).
Advanced mode:
Calibration: For calibration to be performed, it is necessary to measure the Light contribution: amount of supplementary light supplied by the lighting device
brightness level present using a lux metre, sending the value to the sensor using switched on.
a configuration remote control (BMSO4001).
Modification of the parameters using the configuration tools

• BMSO4001 : advanced configuration tool
• BMSO4003 : simplified configuration tool
When the detector receives an IR command from a configuration tool, it emits a sound
that confirms that the modification has been acquired.
Return to the factory settings:

1st pressure: press and release LEARN, the LED flashes slowly.
2nd pressure: press and hold down LEARN for 10 seconds until the LED starts flashing
quickly.
BT00473-c-UK
Performance
Height
≈6m 3m
(PIR/ (PIR/
1.2 m US) US)
4 5 6 8 m
5 m (PIR/US)
Small movements Large movements
8 m (PIR/US)
HD/HC/HS4658 - L/N/NT4658N - AM5658
My Home configuration
If the sensor is installed in a My Home system, it can be configured in two ways:
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, connecting the configurators to the relevant sockets;
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, connecting the system to the PC, using the kit Cat. no. 3503N, or the Web server. In this case the virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC.
Note: when configuring the product using the PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION or the VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, it will not be possible to use the configuration remote controls. Therefore,
the advanced functions (not settable using configurators) will not be accessible.
The sensor parameters are defined by 6 configurator sockets and the functions depend on the operating mode:
Light point: PL = 1 – 9 Sensitivity of the movement sensor: S = 0 – 3
Mode: M = 0 – 4 Control timer: T = 0 – 9
Sensitivity of the light sensor: D = 0 – 5
Warning: the addresses A = 0 and PL = 0 do not exist
Possible function Configurator mode

The sensor controls the light unit, the address of which defined in A and PL. When a movement is detected, and if the brightness level is below the
configured value, the system switches the specified light unit and keeps it on until the expiry of the period configured using the configurator in T
(automatic mode). The Sensitivity of the PIR movement detector is configured using the configurator in S. For appropriate operation, the Sensitivity of 0
the light sensor must be configured using the configurator in D. If a user manually switches off the lights, a control action can be used to disabled the
movement detector until a movement is detected, for a period set by T.
In this mode, the sensor only works based on the light conditions, and the movement sensor is disabled. When the brightness falls below the threshold
configured, the system switches on the light unit, switching it off again when the brightness exceeds the set threshold (automatic mode). Configurator 1
A = 1 and PL – 1-9, configurators GEN, AMB (room), and GR cannot be connected. In this mode, configurators S and T are not connected.
In this mode the sensor does not manage the lights directly, but sends movement and brightness signals to the scenario programmer MH200N. In this
case, the sensor address is entered in A and PL and must be unique inside the system. Therefore it is not possible to connect configurators GEN, AMB, 2
and GR. In this mode the S and T configurators are not connected because these parameters are directly managed by the scenario programmer.
In this mode the system directly manages a light unit, ensuring a consistent brightness level inside the room (this mode is only effective if the sensor
manages the dimmer). The system switches the lights on when a movement is detected and keeps them on based on the presence of people and the
lighting threshold configured (automatic mode). When a movement is detected, and if the brightness level is below the configured value, the system
switches the specified light unit on and keeps it on until the expiry of the period configured using the configurator in T. During operation the sensor
3
keeps a consistent brightness level, depending on the configurator in D. For example, when the brightness of the natural light increases, the sensor
reduces the brightness of the light unit controlled. For appropriate operation, the brightness Sensitivity threshold of the sensor must be configured
using the D configurator. The threshold value can be modified using a brightness control. The new value is then configured as the new sensor threshold,
until the next activation.
In this mode, the sensor only operates on the basis of the brightness conditions, and directly manages a light unit to ensure a consistent brightness
level inside the room (this mode is only effective if the sensor manages the dimmer). The movement sensor is disabled. The lights are manually
switched on, and automatically switched off by the sensor, based on the brightness threshold configured (eco mode). Therefore, when the lights
are off, the sensor does not switch them on; but it waits for the user to switch them on manually. During operation, the sensor keeps a consistent
brightness level, depending on the configurator in D. For example, when the brightness of the natural light increases, the sensor reduces the 4
brightness of the light unit controlled. When the lights are off, if the level of natural light decreases, the sensor does not switch them on. but it waits
for the user to switch them on manually. For appropriate operation, the brightness Sensitivity threshold of the sensor must be configured using the D
configurator. The threshold value can be modified using a brightness control. The new value is then configured as the new sensor threshold, until the
BT00473-c-UK
next activation.
Warning: to manage scenarios using the sensor signals, through the MH200N scenario programmer, the sensor must be configured in Mode 2.

HD/HC/HS4658 - L/N/NT4658N - AM5658
1) Duration of the light timer based on the configurator connected to T: 2) Sensitivity PIR movement detector based on the configurator
connected to S:
Configurator in T Light timer in minutes Configurator in S Sensitivity

1 0.5 1 Medium
2 1 2 High
3 2 3 Very high
4 5
5 10 3) Sensitivity of the light sensor based on the configurator connected to D:
6 15
7 20 Configurator in D Sensitivity in lux
8 30 No configurator 300
9 40 1 20
2 100
3 300
4 500
5 1000
The virtual configurator software can offer all the functions listed below:
- brightness/movement detector, local - brightness sensor, central
- brightness sensor, local - movement detector, central
-movement detector, local - IR PLUS scenario control
- brightness/movement detector, central
Configuration of the light management function

If the sensor is used in the Lighting Management system, it can be configured with the following modes:
- Plug&Go, Push&Learn (see the specific technical manual) For more detailed information on the functions, see the glossary at the beginning of the
- Project&Download. Technical Sheets section.
- brightness/movement detector, local
- brightness sensor, local
-movement detector, local
- brightness sensor, central
- movement detector, central
- IR PLUS scenario control
Maintenance Standards
Keep the lenses clean. Directive: EC
BT00473-c-UK
Clean the surface using a cloth. installation norms: NFC 15-100

Do not use: acetone, detergents for removing tar, or trichloroethylene. Product norms: IEC 60669-2-1
Maintenance using the following products: - hexane (En 60669-1)
- methylated spirit Environmental standards:
- soapy water - UE 2002/96/EC directive: RAEE (electric and electronic device waste).
- diluted ammonia -UE 2002/95/EC directive: RoHS (restriction on the use of dangerous
- bleach, diluted 10% substances)
- glass detergents - Standard: ERP (public buildings)
ERT (buildings used as workplaces)
Warning : an initial test is required in order to use other special maintenance IGH (very high buildings)
products.

Light / movement sensor - PIR HD/HC/HS4659 - L/N/NT4659N - AM5659

4
This devices features a PIR movement detector, and a brightness sensor for automatic
activation of various types of loads following the detection of a movement, and a
brightness level lower than the set level.
It is possible to configure several operating modes; for the detailed descriptions see 6
page 4. 5
1
Technical data
3 2
Voltage: 27 V=
Connection between detector and actuator: SCS BUS connector
Sensor type: PIR movement detector with 180°
detection angle and brightness sensor.
Flush mounted box depth: 40 mm
Weight: 60 g
Shock resistance: IK04
Penetration of solids and liquids: IP20
Time delay: 5 sec - 59 min. 59 sec Legend
Brightness: 5 lux - 1275 lux
1. PIR sensor
Operating temperature: (-5) - (+45) °C
Storage temperature: (-20) - (+70) °C 2. LEARN LED
3. LEARN key
4. Light sensor
Dimensional data 5. Movement detector sensor (under the lens)

6. Infrared transmitter (under the lens)
45 mm 51 mm
45 mm
Wiring diagram
BT00474-c-UK
BUS/SCS

HD/HC/HS4659 - L/N/NT4659N - AM5659
Detection mode: Retrigger: If the sensor detects a movement during the 30 s immediately after
Initial detection: the lights are switched on upon detection, if the natural light is switching off of the load, this is immediately switched on again. After the 30 s the
below the brightness threshold. sensors returns to normal operation. After 30 seconds the device must be switched on
manually
Maintenance: the lights stay on if another movement is detected.
Alarm: before the device is switched off a sound signal is emitted (1 minute, 30 seconds,
and 10 seconds before switching off),.
Brightness parameters:

Distributed
BMSO4001 BMSO4003 Central mode
mode
20, 100, 300, 500, 1000 lux −
Brightness threshold 300 lux −
0 - 1275 lux −
Calibration − 0 - 99995 lux −

Advanced
mode
Brightness adjustment Not active Activate/Deactivate − −
Light contribution Automatic Automatic - 1275 lux − −
Brightness threshold: value at which the lights come on if the brightness level
is below the set values, and switch off if above this threshold. Brightness adjustment: Automatic switch-off of the load 10 minutes after the
light level threshold is exceeded combined with an additional safety threshold (to
Advanced mode: avoid unintended switch-off).
Calibration: For calibration to be performed, it is necessary to measure the
brightness level present using a lux metre, sending the value to the sensor using Light contribution: amount of supplementary light supplied by the lighting device
a configuration remote control (BMSO4001). switched on.
Modification of the parameters using the configuration tools

• BMSO4001 : advanced configuration tool
• BMSO4003 : simplified configuration tool
When the detector receives an IR command from a configuration tool, it emits a sound
that confirms that the modification has been acquired.
Return to the factory settings:

1st pressure: press and release LEARN, the LED flashes slowly.
2nd pressure: press and hold down LEARN for 10 seconds until the LED starts flashing
quickly.
BT00474-c-UK
Performance
Height
≈6m 3m
(PIR) (PIR)
1.2 m
4 5 6 8 m
5 m (PIR)
Small movements Large movements
8 m (PIR)
HD/HC/HS4659 - L/N/NT4659N - AM5659
My Home configuration
If the sensor is installed in a My Home system, it can be configured in two ways:
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, connecting the configurators to the relevant sockets;
- VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, connecting the system to the PC, using the kit Cat. no. 3503N, or the Web server. In this case the virtual configurator software must be installed on the PC.
Note: when configuring the product using the PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION or the VIRTUAL CONFIGURATION, it will not be possible to use the configuration remote controls. Therefore,
the advanced functions (not settable using configurators) will not be accessible.
The sensor parameters are defined by 6 configurator sockets and the functions depend on the operating mode:
Local: A = 1 – 9 Sensitivity of the PIR movement sensor: S = 0 – 3
Light point PL = 1 – 9 Control timer: T = 0 – 9
Mode: M = 0 – 4 Sensitivity of the light sensor: D = 0 – 5
Warning: the addresses A = 0 and PL = 0 do not exist
Possible functions Configurator mode

The sensor controls the light unit, the address of which defined in A and PL. When a movement is detected, and if the brightness level is below the
configured value, the system switches the specified light unit and keeps it on until the expiry of the period configured using the configurator in T
(automatic mode). The Sensitivity of the PIR movement detector is configured using the configurator in S . For appropriate operation, the Sensitivity of 0
the light sensor must be configured using the configurator in D. If a user manually switches off the lights, a control action can be used to disabled the
movement detector until a movement is detected, for a period set by T.
In this mode, the sensor only works based on the light conditions, and the movement sensor is disabled. When the brightness falls below the threshold
configured, the system switches on the light unit, switching it off again when the brightness exceeds the set threshold (automatic mode). Configurator 1
A = 1 and PL – 1-9, configurators GEN, AMB (room), and GR cannot be connected. In this mode, configurators S and T are not connected.
In this mode the sensor does not manage the lights directly, but sends movement and brightness signals to the scenario programmer MH200N. In this
case, the sensor address is entered in A and PL and must be unique inside the system. Therefore it is not possible to connect configurators GEN, AMB, 2
and GR. In this mode the S and T configurators are not connected because these parameters are directly managed by the scenario programmer.
In this mode the system directly manages a light unit, ensuring a consistent brightness level inside the room (this mode is only effective if the sensor
manages the dimmer). The system switches the lights on when a movement is detected and keeps them on based on the presence of people and the
lighting threshold configured (automatic mode). When a movement is detected, and if the brightness level is below the configured value, the system
switches the specified light unit on and keeps it on until the expiry of the period configured using the configurator in T. During operation the sensor
3
keeps a consistent brightness level, depending on the configurator in D. For example, when the brightness of the natural light increases, the sensor
reduces the brightness of the light unit controlled. For appropriate operation, the brightness Sensitivity threshold of the sensor must be configured
using the D configurator. The threshold value can be modified using a brightness control. Quindi il nuovo valoreviene configurato come nuova soglia
dal sensore, fino all’attivazione successiva
In this mode, the sensor only operates on the basis of the brightness conditions, and directly manages a light unit to ensure a consistent brightness
level inside the room (this mode is only effective if the sensor manages the dimmer). The movement sensor is disabled. The lights are manually
switched on, and automatically switched off by the sensor, based on the brightness threshold configured (eco mode). Therefore, when the lights
are off, the sensor does not switch them on; but it waits for the user to switch them on manually. During operation, the sensor keeps a consistent
brightness level, depending on the configurator in D. For example, when the brightness of the natural light increases, the sensor reduces the 4
brightness of the light unit controlled. When the lights are off, if the level of natural light decreases, the sensor does not switch them on. but it waits
for the user to switch them on manually. For appropriate operation, the brightness Sensitivity threshold of the sensor must be configured using the D
configurator. The threshold value can be modified using a brightness control. The new value is then configured as the new sensor threshold, until the
BT00474-c-UK
next activation.
Warning: to manage scenarios using the sensor signals, through the MH200N scenario programmer, the sensor must be configured in Mode 2.

HD/HC/HS4659 - L/N/NT4659N - AM5659
Installation
Detector position
1m Position the detector so

that it is not affected by
the artificial light already
2.5 m
present in the room.
≥ 2.5 m
Configuration
Detection parameters:

Distributed
BMSO4001 BMSO4003 Central mode
mode
3,5,10,15,20 min −
Time delay 15 min
30s - 255 h 59 min 59s −
Sensitivity PIR (very high) Low, medium, high, very high

Auto Not active Activate/Deactivate −
Mode
Walkthrough Active Activate/Deactivate −
Eco Not active Activate/Deactivate −
Initial PIR Cannot be modified −

Detection
system
Available but
Maintenance PIR Cannot be modified −
not separate
Retrigger PIR PIR/Deactivate −
Alarm Not active Activate/Deactivate − −
Time delay: the time delay after which the load is switched off, if no movement Walkthrough:
is detected and the lighting level is sufficient - If a movement is detected for a period of time of less than 20”, the sensor will
BT00474-c-UK
switch the load off after 3 minutes;

Sensitivity: detection interval setting. - Otherwise the load will be switched off after the set time delay. .
Modalità:
Auto: Eco:
Automatic switch on: Manual switching on/automatic switching off:
- upon detection of a movement if the level of natural light is insufficient.. - if no movement is detected, at the expiry of the time delay set;
Automatic switch off: After switching off, if the detector detects a movements within 30 seconds the
- if no movement is detected, at the expiry of the time delay set; lights automatically come on; after 30 seconds the lights must be switched on
- or if the level of natural light is sufficient (set brightness threshold). manually.
Another detection causes automatic switching on if the light is insufficient.
HD/HC/HS4659 - L/N/NT4659N - AM5659
1) Duration of the light timer based on the configurator connected to T: 2) Sensitivity PIR and US movement detector based on the configurator
connected to S:
Configurator in T Light timer in minutes Configurator in S Sensitivity

1 0.5 1 Medium
2 1 2 High
3 2 3 Very high
4 5 When using the configurators it is not possible to individually set the sensitivity of the
5 10 detection technology. Both will have the value set by the S configurator.
6 15
7 20 3) Sensitivity of the light sensor based on the configurator connected to D:
8 30 Configurator in D Sensitivity in lux
9 40 No configurator 300
1 20
2 100
3 300
4 500
5 1000
- brightness/movement detector, local - brightness sensor, central
- brightness sensor, local - movement detector, central
-movement detector, local - IR PLUS scenario control
Configuration of the light management function
If the sensor is used in the Lighting Management system, it can be configured with the following modes:
- Plug&Go, Push&Learn (see the specific technical manual) For more detailed information on the functions, see the glossary at the beginning of the
- Project&Download. Technical Sheets section.
- brightness/movement detector, local
- brightness sensor, local
-movement detector, local
- brightness sensor, central
- movement detector, central
- IR PLUS scenario control
maintenance Standards
Keep the lenses clean. Directive: EC
BT00474-c-UK
Clean the surface using a cloth. installation norms: NFC 15-100

Do not use: acetone, detergents for removing tar, or trichloroethylene. Product norms: IEC 60669-2-1
Maintenance using the following products: - hexane (En 60669-1)
- methylated spirit Environmental standards:
- soapy water - UE 2002/96/EC directive: RAEE (electric and electronic device waste).
- diluted ammonia - Direttiva UE 2002/95/CE: RoHS (restriction on the use of dangerous
- bleach, diluted 10% substances).
- glass detergents - Standard: ERP (public buildings)
ERT (buildings used as workplaces)
Warning: an initial test is required in order to use other special maintenance IGH (very high buildings)
products.

HD4680 - HC4680 - HS4680
Scenario control L4680 - N4680 - NT4680
Description
The Scenario Control is a device that does not directly manage the scenarios by storing
them inside. It Basically acts as a control to activate, create and change 4 scenarios
stored in the Scenario Module item F420 for the MY HOME system, or in Lighting
Management devices, provided that this has been enabled for change using the
programming block/unblock key.
The device may be installed in a MY HOME system and can be configured both physically 1 2
Pausa Riunione
configuration procedures (Project&Download).
Technical data
Conferenza Proiezione
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 3 4
Absorption: 9 mA
Dimensional data
Legend
1. Key 1
2. Key 2
3. Key 3
4. Key 4
BT00288-a-UK

HD4680 - HC4680 - HS4680
L4680 - N4680 - NT4680
Positions A and PL of the scenario control must correspond to those in the scenario module
item F420. The association of each key of the control to one of the scenarios stored by the
module is made by configuring socket M. It is possible to configure positions N and DEL to
set the number of the scenario to be activated with a delay (from 15s to 15m).
Correspondence between the 4 keys of the scenario control and the number of scenarios stored in the module item F420:
Configurator M Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4

Depending on the configurators connected to position N, it is possible to set a delay to be The configurator in the DEL position determines the delay in activating the scenario.
associated to one or all scenarios before actuation is performed.
Configurator N Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Configurator DEL Delay

0 None None None None 0 None
1 Delay ON None None None 1 1 min.
2 None Delay ON None None 2 2 min.
3 None None Delay ON None 3 3 min.
4 None None None Delay ON 4 4 min.
5 Delay ON Delay ON Delay ON Delay ON 5 5 min.
6 10 min.
7 15 min.
8 15 min.
9 30 min.
BT00288-a-UK

HD4680 - HC4680 - HS4680
L4680 - N4680 - NT4680
Scenario programmer
In order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary to enable the To delete a scenario, proceed as follows:
programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the status LED is green (press the
lock/unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds); continue with the 1) the scenario module must be enabled for programming.
2) press the pushbutton of the scenario you want to cancel for at least 10 seconds: the
1) press one of the four control keys the scenario should be associated to for 4 seconds. corresponding LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that
The corresponding LED starts flashing; the scenario has been cancelled. . If the LED does not flash, it means that the control
has failed.
2) set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation,
Temperature control, Sound system, etc. functions; To erase the entire memory keep the DEL pushbutton on the Scenario module pressed for
10 seconds, the yellow “reset scenarios” LED flashes quickly.
3) confirm the scenario by briefly pressing the corresponding key on the control to exit
programming mode;
NOTES:
Once the operations have been performed lock the programming, pressing the
lock/unlock pushbutton, of the senario module, for at least 0.5 seconds, so that the
corresponding LED becomes red.
Controls to the MH200N programmer:

by configuring M = CEN, N = 0 and DEL =0, the pressure of a key sends to a MH200N a
control with A/PL address and pushbutton number the same as the key pressed.

Using the Virtual Configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed following ways:
below: - Project&Download,
- double scenario control
- double CEN control Using the Virtual Configurator software it is possible to perform all the functions listed
- double scenario PLUS control below:
- double CEN PLUS control - double scenario control
chapter.
BT00288-a-UK

HD4891 - HC4891 - HS4891
Local display L4891 - N4891 - NT4891
Description
Local Display is a device that gives the possibility of 4 home automation functions by
means of simple and intuitive icons displayed on a 1.2” OLED display with touch screen
technology.
It can be used to manage the temperature control, sound system, energy management,
and scenario functions. 1
The back of Local Display has a USB socket, which can be used to connect the device
to a PC, to update the configuration, the set of characters, and the icon, as well as the
firmware.
Front view
Technical data
- Power supply from BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
- Stand-by Absorption: max 10 mA @ 27 Vdc
max 15 mA @ 18 Vdc
- Operating absorption: max 50 mA @ 27 Vdc
2
max 70 mA @ 18 Vdc
- Operating temperature: 5 – 35 °C
- Size: 2 flush mounted modules
5 3
Configuration
Local Display may be configured in two ways:
Rear view
- physical configuration, by connecting the configurators to the appropriate sockets. 4
This mode gives the possibility of configuring with basic parameters only 1
function to manage, among the ones listed below. For the configuration of the
advanced parameters use the TiLocalDisplay software.
- from the PC, using the dedicated TiLocalDisplay software. This mode gives the
Legend
possibility of configuring all the parameters, for the management of 1 to 4
functions listed below. 1. OLED technology Touch Screen
3. BUS clamp
Funzioni gestibili 4. Clamp for the connection of the external temperature probe
5. USB connector
- Scenario control
- Temperature control with external probe 3457
- Temperature control with probe HD/HC/HS4693, L4693, N4693, NT4693.
- Sound system
- Consumption display
- Load management
- Advances scenarios (with MH200N programmer installed in the system), to be
configured using the software only
BT00517-a-UK

HD4891 - HC4891 - HS4891
L4891 - N4891 - NT4891
Installation Main functions that can be set using the Tilocal Display software
Local Display is installed using a traditional procedure, using a box, support, and Main possible functions using the software:
AXOLUTE or LIVINGLIGHT cover plate; the device is not fitted with a temperature probe. - selection of the operating mode to set for the device, temperature control, scenarios,
Therefore, it will not be necessary to comply with the probe installation requirements. sound system, load management, consumption display.
The recommended installation height is 150 - 160 cm. - configuration of the settings of the probe and of its parameters;
- definition of the type of temperature central unit;
- parameters for the measurement of energy production, or consumption costs;
Local Display physical configuration - configuration of the general device parameters;
- icon style definition.
- Scenario control mode - FUN = 1
Thanks to this mode, it will be possible to manage and change 4 different associated
scenarios of the F420 scenario module, and activate them by pressing one of the 4 icons
shown on the display.
A Room 0 – 9, room of the scenario module

item
PL Light point 1 – 9, light point of the scenario
module item F420
MOD Mode 1 – 4, scenario number (*)
FUN Function 1
(*) Correspondence among the 4 icons and the numbers of the scenarios that can be
saved in the F420 module
Configurator MOD Icon 1 Icon 2

1 Scenario 1 Scenario 2
2
3
4
Scenario 5
Scenario 9
Scenario 13
Scenario 6
Scenario 10
Scenario 14
scenario 1
1 2 scenario 2
Configurator MOD
1
2
3
Icon 3
Scenario 3
Scenario 7
Scenario 11
Icon 4
Scenario 4
Scenario 8
Scenario 12
scenario 3
3 4 scenario 4
4 Scenario 15 Scenario 16
Scenario programmer NOTE: Once the operations have been performed lock the programming, pressing the
In order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary to enable the lock/unlock pushbutton, of the senario module, for at least 0.5 seconds, so that the
programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the status LED is green (press the corresponding LED becomes red.
lock/unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds); continue with the
following operations: To delete a scenario, proceed as follows:
BT00517-a-UK
1) press one of the four control keys the scenario should be associated to for 3 1) the scenario module must be enabled for programming.
seconds. The screen shows the name and icon of the selected scenario and 2) press the pushbutton of the scenario you want to cancel for at least 7 seconds;
the programming bar, to indicate that the learning procedure has started
The display will confirm that the scenario has been deleted and return to the main
If the device does not receive any input for 30 minutes from the start of the learning
procedure, programming will automatically be interrupted; screen.
2) set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation, To erase the entire memory keep the DEL pushbutton on the Scenario module
Temperature control, Sound system, etc. functions; pressed for 10 seconds, the yellow “reset scenarios” LED flashes quickly.
3) confirm the scenario by quickly pressing the display
4) to change or create new scenarios to be linked to the other keys, repeat the procedure

HD4891 - HC4891 - HS4891
L4891 - N4891 - NT4891
– Sound system control mode - FUN = 2

With this mode, for the associated amplifier the user can control the switching ON or OFF, 1
the volume, the cycling through the sources, and their management (where allowed).
Information on the currently active source is also displayed.
In this mode the parameters that can be configured are the local address of the display (which 7 2
must coincide with the A/Pf address, and the M1 mode of the associated amplifier), and the ON
name of the sources that can be controlled.
RDS
2
A Room 0 – 9, amplifier room
6
106.70 3
PF Loudspeaker 1 – 9, Amplifier loudspeaker

5 4
MOD Mode 0 – 8, Source switching ON (*) OFF
FUN Function 2
NOTA (*): If M=0, source 1 is switched on without first switching OFF the sources
(follow-me mode).
Functions Legend
A quick pressure of keys 5 and 7 will respectively switch ON and OFF the associated 1. Indication of the amplifier status or radio frequency
amplifier. If the associated amplifier is on, an extended pressure of keys 5 and 7 may be 2. Cycling of sources (radio/aux)
used to adjust the volume, the intensity of which will be displayed by means of an icon 3. Active source indication
5. A short pressure of keys 2 and 4, will respectively cycle through the sources installed 4. Change radio station
in the system, and launch a control for the currently active source. If the associated 5. Associated amplifier OFF and volume decrease
amplifier is off and no source is on, the screen 6. Volume level indication
will not show any information. Press key 4 for 3 seconds to configure the alarm clock (see 7. Associated amplifier ON and volume increase
the user manual for details).
BT00517-a-UK

HD4891 - HC4891 - HS4891
L4891 - N4891 - NT4891
- Temperature control probe mode with external probe -

FUN = 3
Warning: the physical configuration can only be performed if the system includes a
99-zone temperature central unit.
An external temperature probe, item 3457, with the following characteristics, can be
connected on the back of Local Display: temperature
- 10 KΩ at 25 °C BETA 3435 probe
- max. length of the connection 10 metres
Local Display shows the temperature value measured by the external probe, the set
temperature value, and the local selector adjustment. The operations that may be
performed by user are:
- variation of the temperature set using the local selector, BUS - SCS
- FAN-COIL speed management,

- operating mode management.
ZA Zone address 0 – 9, Local Display address

ZB Zone address 1 – 9, Local Display address
MOD Mode 0 – 8, Slave probe number
FUN Function 3
For simple systems, where each zone controls at most one heating actuator and one air For more complex systems, the probe can memorize the actuators to activate, and the
conditioning actuator, both of the ON/OFF type, and on a system with only one pump pumps to control on the BUS. The programming operation must be completed directly
per function, the confi guration of the system can be performed by simply connecting from the central unit. The central unit can also be used for the calibration of the probe.
the confi gurators that identify the address of the device and, in case of probe, indicate During the system setting stage, it will be necessary to specify the actuators used for
the number of slaves present. the heating system, and those used for the air conditioning system, as they operate in
a complementary way.
Legend
1. Set temperature
2. Fan-Coil adjustment 2
11
3. Fan-Coil speed indication
4. Temperature variation indication + 2
5. Fan-Coil operation indication
10
25.5° 2 3
6. Change operating mode 4
7. Measured temperature
8. Decrease temperature
9. Operating mode indication
9
26.3° 5
10. System status indication 8 6

11. Increase the temperature
Functions 7
A short pressure of keys 8 and 11 can be used to locally change the temperature by
BT00517-a-UK
+/-3 °C, in relation to the settings received from the central unit. A short pressure of
key 6 can be used to select the mode of operation, cycling through the OFF, antifreeze/
thermal protection, and automatic statuses respectively. Each mode of operation is
identifi ed by a diff erent icon. A short pressure of key 2 will force the speed the fan-coils,
cycling through speed 1, 2, 3 or automatic.

HD4891 - HC4891 - HS4891
L4891 - N4891 - NT4891
- Temperature control probe mode with item HC4693,

HS4693, L4693, N4693, NT4693 probe - FUN = 4
Warning: physical configuration can only be used if a 99-zone temperature control
central unit is installed in the system
This mode is different from the previous one in the fact that the external probe is not The possible operations for the user are the adjustment of the set temperature using
connected to Local Display. Being unable to autonomously establish the temperature, the local selector, and the change of status of the probe. In this mode, the parameters
it must be associated to at least one probe, items HC4693, HS4693, L4693, N4693, or that can be configured are the local display address (which must coincide with the
NT4693. The user is shown the temperature value measured by the associated probes, ZA/ZB address of the associated probe), the type of control of the pump, the type of
the set temperature value, and the adjustment of the local selector. mode, and the number of slave probes.
ZA Zone address 0 – 9, probe address

ZB Zone address 1 – 9, probe address
MOD Mode 1 – 8, Slave probe number
FUN Function 4
For simple systems, where each zone controls at most one heating actuator and one air For more complex systems, the probe can memorize the actuators to activate, and the
conditioning actuator, both of the ON/OFF type, and on a system with only one pump pumps to control on the BUS. The programming operation must be completed directly
per function, the confi guration of the system can be performed by simply connecting from the central unit. The central unit can also be used for the calibration of the probe.
the confi gurators that identify the address of the device and, in case of probe, indicate During the system setting stage, it will be necessary to specify the actuators used for
the number of slaves present. the heating system, and those used for the air conditioning system, as they operate in
a complementary way.
Example of configuration of a zone (address 47) with Local Display and probe
item HC4693, HS4693, L4693, N4693, NT4693
Local Display Sonda Slave

Local Slave (HC/HS/L/N/NT4891) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
display probe Socket Configurator Socket Configurator
ZA 4 ZA 4
ZB 7 ZB 7
MOD 1 MOD SLA
FUN 4 SLA 1
Functions
A short pressure of keys 8 and 11 can be used to locally change the temperature by
+/-3°C, in relation to the settings received from the central unit. A short pressure of
key 6 can be used to select the mode of operation, cycling through the OFF, antifreeze/
thermal protection, and automatic statuses respectively.
Each mode of operation is identified by a different icon. A short pressure of key 2 will
force the speed the fan-coils, cycling through speed 1, 2, 3 or automatic.
BT00517-a-UK

HD4891 - HC4891 - HS4891
L4891 - N4891 - NT4891
- Energy Management Mode – consumption display FUN=5

It is possible to display the consumptions and the production of several energies of the
system, with monitoring of up to a maximum of ten lines. For each line, the consumptions and the instantaneous, daily, monthly, and annual
economic evaluation are displayed.
Warning: with physical configuration, only the consumptions of one line can be It will be possible to set two maximum consumption values, with the device emitting
displayed. visual and sound notifications if these are exceeded. In this case, the displayed value will
be green when below both limits, yellow when one has been exceeded, and red when
both have been exceeded.
ZA Line address 0–9

ZB Line address 1–9
MOD Type 0 = ELECTRICITY
1 = WATER
2 = GAS
3 = DHW
4 = HEATING/COOLING
FUN Function 5
Functions
Once the device has been configured, it will be possible to scroll through the various
lines using icon 4. For each measurement interface, by pressing briefly icon 3 it will then
be possible to display the consumptions or the economic evaluation. 4 Kw 1
m3 D/M/Y
Press and hold down icon 3 to access a submenu where it will be possible to change the
basic value of the economic evaluation. Total D
Consumption and economic evaluations are themselves split into: instantaneous, daily
(D), monthly (M), annual (Y). It is possible to scroll through these settings using icon 1.
Press and release icon 2 to access a submenu that can be used to set the time, the date,
115.4
the threshold levels (if enabled), and the possibility of enabling or disabling the beep kwh
emitted when the threshold is exceeded.
3 $ 2
Legend
1. selection of display times
2. setting of the functions (time, date, max. power, etc.)
3. economic display of the consumptions
4. selection of the lines to display
BT00517-a-UK

HD4891 - HC4891 - HS4891
L4891 - N4891 - NT4891
- LOAD MANAGEMENT mode

This mode, only available if Local Display is configured using the software, gives the
possibility of displaying loads, with their priority levels, and force their activation. The
device can manage up to 20 loads; if these are connected to actuators with current
sensor it will be possible to display other load information, like the instantaneous power
4
ON 1
consumption.
When the central unit for load management intervenes on a load, the device (if enabled
6
during the configuration) notifies the event with an indication on the display and an
audible notification.
Oven
Functions 3 i 2
After the configuration of the device it will be possible to select the various loads using
icon 1.
Icon 4 is disabled until the moment the central unit disables the load; when this
happens, the icon becomes active, and can be selected to force the activation of the load.
In this condition, icon 3, used to intervene on the status of the load, is disabled.
Legend
However, if icon 4 is disabled, it will be possible to select icon 3 to pre-force the load,
and avoid disconnection in case of intervention of the central unit when consumptions 1. selection of the load to control
are exceeded. 2. display of consumption data and device setup
If the loads are connected to actuators with current sensor, use icon 2 to access a 3. activation/deactivation of the load
submenu that can be used to display the instantaneous power consumption, as well as 4. forced activation of the load disconnected by the energy management central unit,
information form the line total consumption meters. While in this submenu, you can use due to consumptions being exceeded.
the RESET icon to reset the meters. Press key 2 for 3 seconds to access the menu used for
setting the time, the date, and the sound notification (beep).
- Advanced CEN SCENARIO mode

For systems with MH200N scenario programmers, Local Display can be used to enable 1
of the 4 scenarios displayed. This is done using the associated icons.
1 2
This function is only available if Local Display has been configured using the software.
1
3 4
Legend
BT00517-a-UK
1. scenario indication icon

BUS cable L4669 - L4669/500
Description Technical data

The grey BUS/SCS cable has been purposely designed and produced for the installation Insulation voltage: 300/500 V
of the Automation, Temperature Control and Burglar Alarm systems. This cable is used Can be buried: NO
for the distribution of the power supplies and the operating signals to all system Reference standards: It complies with the tests required by the
devices. following regulations: EN60811, EN50289,
The cable consists of a grey external sheathing and two twisted flexible conductors EN50290, EN60228, 50265-2-1,EN50395,
with a section of 0.35 mm2, one blue and one white. EN50396 as described inside the IMQ CPT 062
The cable is sold in 2 different type of coils: document
- 100 m coil, item L4669 External sheath colour: grey (RAL 7001)
- 500 m coil, item L4669/500 External sheath diameter: 5.5 +/- 0.1 mm
The cable has 300/500 V insulation. Using the clear clamp protections included in all External sheath thickness: 0.8 mm
the devices, the systems can also be installed in the same boxes and ducts as the power External sheath material: PVC (RZ)
lines (110 Vac, 127 Vac and 230 Vac). Number of internal conductors: 2 unshielded twisted flexible conductors with
sheath
WARNING Colour of internal conductors: white and blue
Although the construction of the grey cable ensures 300/500 V category electric Sheath thickness of internal conductors: 0.60 mm
insulation, correct system operation is not guaranteed when installed together with Sheath diameter of internal conductors: PVC (R2)
the power cables in the following cases: Conductor material: red electrolytic copper
- industrial environments, Conductor section: 0.35 mmq (12 x 0.20 mmq)
In residential/service sector environments, when the power cables provide power Operating temperature: 15 - 70 °C
supply to: Maximum short circuit temperature: 150 °C
- lift, Coil length: 100 m or 500 m
- inverters,
- pumps,
- motors and controlled motors,
- metal iodines lamps.
The grey BUS/SCS cable is not suitable for underground installation.

BT00289-a-UK

Halogen free BUS cable L4669HF

This white BUS-SCS cable has been purposely designed and built for the installation of Insulation voltage: 450/750 V
Automation and Temperature control systems in rooms with high risk of fire. Can be buried: YES inside appropriate protective conduits
Produced without halogens, the cable will burn without releasing toxic substances or External sheath colour: white (RAL 9010)
heavy, dense smoke, significantly increasing the safety level. External sheath diameter: 5.2 +/- 0.1 mm
This cable, consisting of an external sheath and two internal twisted conductors, is
External sheath thickness: 0.8 mm
used for the distribution of the power supplies and the operating signals to all system
External sheath material: LDFRPE Thermoplastic quality M1,
devices.
The cable has 450/750 V insulation. Using the clear clamp protections included in all hardness 95 A Shore
the devices, the systems can also be installed in the same boxes and ducts as the power Number of internal conductors: 2 unshielded twisted flexible
lines (110 Vac, 127 Vac and 230 Vac). conductors with sheath
Colour of internal conductors: brown and brown/white
Sheath thickness of internal conductors: 0.45 mm
WARNING Sheath material of internal conductors: LDPE polyethylene
Although the construction of the white cable ensures 450/750 V category electric Conductor material: red electrolytic copper
insulation, correct system operation is not guaranteed when installed together with Conductor section: 0.52 mmq (7 x 0.308 mm)
the power cables in the following cases: Operating temperature: (-15) – (+70) °C
- industrial environments,
Maximum short circuit temperature: 150 °C
In residential/service sector environments, when the power cables provide power
Coil length: 100m
supply to:
- lift,
- inverters, Standards, Certifications, Marks
- pumps, It complies with the tests required by the following regulations: UL13, UL1581,
- motors and controlled motors, EN60811, EN50289, EN50290, EN60228, 50265-2-1,EN50395, EN50396 as described
- metal iodines lamps. inside the IMQ CPT 062 document
The cable may be installed underground (inside appropriate protective conduits)

Marks:
BT00522-a-UK

860 MY HOME Technical sheets – Burglar alarm
CONTENTS
Technical sheets – Burglar alarm
Technical sheets – Burglar alarm MY HOME 861

Radio IR detector 3440
Description
This device, sensitive to the movement of warm bodies, is suitable for the protection of
interiors. The configuration can be changed to adjust the tripping sensitivity and set
the system to perform typical Automation functions, such as, for example, the delayed
switching on of lights, when the person crosses the protected area.
The sensor is powered by a 3.6V AA battery and is self protected against opening. Its free
field range is 100 m.
After some detections, these sensors automatically deactivate for 3 minutes, to prevent the
intruder to guess the sensor covering area. It also permits to save energy, thus extending
the life of the battery.
Technical data 1
- Power supply: 3.6 V lithium battery - type 1/2 AA

- Operating temperature: 5 - 40°C (indoor use)
- Minimum battery duration: 3 years
- Radio frequency: 868.35 MHz Front view
- Range: 100 metres free field 2
(metal, concrete walls and metal plates reduce coverage)
- Modulation: FSK Legend
1 - Fresnel lens;
CONFORMITY DECLARATION
2 - LED: Two red flashes signal an alarm; only one flash indicates that the battery is
Item 3440 meets the essential requirements of directive 1999/5/CE, as it complies with
exhausted.
the following standards:
ETSI EN300 220-3 ETSI EN301 489-3 EN60950 EN50090-2-2 EN50090-2-3.
Year of approval of the CE mark in accordance with the above directive: 2007
Dimensional data Covering range
12
105
10
8
BT00055-b-UK
6
4
2
Mt
105°
2,00
65 45
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

3440
Configuration M A Configurator
Z N O U
Infrared radio detectors require assigning of the zone they belong to, of the progressive D X socket
sensor number within the zone, setting of the detection mode and the allocation of an
auxiliary prealarm channel.
WARNING: the configuration operations must be performed with the battery disconnected.
Z
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone to the detector.
Configurator 1 assigns zone 1 to the detector, configurator 2 assigns zone 2 and so on to
a maximum of 8 zones.
N Tamper/learning
This configurator assigns the progressive number of the detector inside the appropriate
zone.
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on ON timed control
to a maximum of 9 sensors (IR detectors and contact interface) for each of the 8 zones.
For this mode, configure in the Z and N positions of the detector the addresses A and PL
MOD of the actuator to control respectively.
This configurator sets the sensor detection mode. To the MOD position connect the ON configurator to enable the time delay function.
It can be used, for EXAMPLE, when the device is directed towards a possible source of The switching ON period is set by connecting numerical configurators 1 to 9 to the AUX
disturbance (window or radiator), and its position cannot be changed. position as shown in the following table:
AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Configurator Mode
Time 1 min. 2 min. 3 min. 4 min. 5 min. 15 min 30 sec. 0.5 sec. 2 sec.
0 1st level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse)
AUTOMATION mode – GENERIC CONTROL USING AUXILIARY CHANNELS
1 1st level of sensitivity (pulse counter1 - high sensitivity) In this case, the control intended for the actuator is managed by a control device, item
2 2nd level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse) H/L4651M2 or AM5831M2, which, based on its own operating mode, set in its own M
position, activates the actuator with address set in A and PL.
3 3rd level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse)
The communication between the detector and the associated control device item
4 1st level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse) delayed2 H/L4651M2 or AM5831M2 is established by defining an auxiliary channel that has been
configured in the IR detector by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD position
5 1st level of sensitivity (pulse counter1 - high sensitivity) delayed2
and specifying, with numeric configurators 1-9 in the AUX position, the number of the
6 2nd level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse) delayed2 auxiliary channel. Obviously, in order to univocally set the auxiliary channel, also the
7 3rd level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse) delayed2 AUX position of the control must have the same configurator as the IR detector.
9 The device sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified Pairing IR radio sensors
channel in the AUX position only when the system is armed 1. Switch the system to “maintenance” mode.
2. Press the programming pushbutton of the radio receiver for five seconds, until the red
NOTE: LED comes on.
1) Use the pulse counter function to avoid false alarms caused by thermal variations 3. Press the sensor tamper contact twice.
(radiators etc.). 4. If the pairing of the device has been performed correctly, the red LED of the radio
2) Feature available on central units produced starting from week 08W06. receiver will go off.
If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED flashes, it means
that the device memory is full.
AUX 5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2.
This configurator activates the prealarm function and assigns an auxiliary channel (AUX). 6. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit.
To enable and use the AUX channels, refer to the description for wired IR detectors. 7. Exit “maintenance” mode.
BT00055-b-UK
Cancelling the IR radio sensors

NOTE: When the system is armed, the detector generates a normal burglary alarm.
1. Switch the system to maintenance mode.
AUTOMATION – Timed control mode: 2. Remove the power supply from the receiver.
Passive IR detectors can generate and send an ON timed control directly to one or more 3. Press and hold the programming pushbutton while reconnecting the power supply
to the radio receiver.
actuators of the automation system.
4. After 5 seconds the LED flashes orange. If the pushbutton is released at this time, only
the remote controls are cancelled. After 10 seconds the LED starts flashing quickly.
If the pushbutton is released now, only the sensors are cancelled.
5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
off, cancellation has been completed.
6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit “maintenance” mode.
Radio glass-breaking detector 3442
Description
This sensor protects doors and windows and generates an alarm signal in case of unwanted
opening. The device consists of two elements:
- a magnet, to be installed on the window /door, with corresponding bracket/spacer;
Magnet Radio transmitter
- a battery powered radio transmitter with NC contact to be installed on the window/door
frame.
The alarm is generated when, by opening the door or the window, the magnet is moved away
from the corresponding radio transmitter. Up to 3 NC additional contacts can be connected to
the device, protecting 3 more units (doors/windows).
Technical data
- Power supply: 3.6 V lithium battery - type 1/2 AA 1
- Operating temperature: +5 – +40°C (indoor use)
- Radio frequency: 868.35 MHz
- Range: 100 metres free field
(metal, concrete walls and metal plates reduce coverage) 5
- Modulation: FSK
2
ETSI EN300 220-3 ETSI EN301 489-3 EN60950 EN50090-2-2 EN50090-2-3
6
Dimensional data
3
120 32
25
Radio transmitter
30
Transmitter internal view

12
37
45
Magnet Legend
1 - Additional contact line clamp;
2 - Configurator socket;
BT00052-b-UK
3 - Magnetic contact;
4 - Tamper/learning;
5 - Battery housing;
6 - LED: two red flashes signal an alarm; only one flash indicates that the battery is
exhausted.

3442
Configuration
The device requires allocation of the zone it belongs to, the progressive number of the
sensors within the same zone, and the setting of the detection mode, as well as the
possible allocation of an auxiliary prealarm channel.
WARNING: the configuration operations must be performed with the battery disconnected.
Z
N
zone. Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and
so on to a maximum of 9 sensors (IR detectors and contact interface) for each of the 8
zones. M A
Z N O U
D X
MOD
Configurator
The configurator connected to this socket specify the detection mode associated to the socket
NC contact supplied and any other, max. 3, NC contacts connected to the internal clamp.
Configurator Operating mode

0 Not delayed
2 Delayed(1)
9 The device sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified
channel in the AUX position only when the system is armed.
AUX Prealarm function. With the system armed or disarmed, the
device sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified
channel in the AUX position. If the zone it belongs to is
divided, the auxiliary command is disabled. Transmitter internal view
NOTE(1): function available only with central units item 3485/B, item 3486 and HC/HD/
HS/L/N/NT4601.
AUX
The configurator in the AUX socket activates the auxiliary function of the corresponding
auxiliary channel. It therefore enables controlling auxiliary actuator devices, provided
that they have been configured using the same auxiliary channel.
Note: to complete the activations using the relay actuator type HD/HC/ HS/L/N/NT4614
and AM5794 see the appropriate technical sheet.
BT00052-b-UK

3442
Configuration
Pairing magnetic contacts Cancelling magnetic contacts
1. Switch the system to “maintenance” mode. 1. Switch the system to maintenance mode.
2. Press the programming pushbutton of the radio receiver for five seconds, until the 2. Remove the power supply from the radio receiver.
red LED comes on. 3. Press and hold the programming pushbutton while reconnecting the power supply
3. Press the tamper contact twice. to the radio receiver.
4. If the pairing of the device has been performed correctly, the red LED of the receiver 4. After 5 seconds the LED flashes orange. If the pushbutton is released at this time, only
will go off. If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED the remote controls are cancelled.
flashes, it means that the device memory is full. After 10 seconds the LED starts flashing quickly. If the pushbutton is released now,
5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2. only the sensors are cancelled.
6. Close the sensors to deactivate the tamper. 5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
7. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit. off, cancellation has been completed.
8. Exit “maintenance” mode. 6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit “maintenance”
mode.
Tamper/learning
Wiring diagram
In addition to the standard NC magnetic contact, the sensor can also control the opening
of other optional NC contacts (max. of 3) connected to an appropriate clamp of the Tamper line *
T
transmitting unit, as shown in the following diagram. C
-
WARNING: For correct operation of the device the corresponding magnetic contact, or
any additional magnetic contacts, must be activated within 12 hours from the moment
the device starts operation.
N.C.
Balance resistance
BT00052-b-UK
68K Ω
Note (*): short circuit contacts – and T if no tamper line is installed

Radio glass-breaking detector 3444
Description
This device generates an alarm signal when the sensor detects the vibrations cause by
the breaking of door or window glass. It consists of two elements:
- a vibration sensor, to be installed on the glass of the door or window to protect;
- a battery powered radio transmitter, to be installed on the frame;
Also supplied is an NC contact with additional magnet for the protection of doors and
windows.
Technical data
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C (indoor use)
Radio Sensor
- Modulation: FSK transmitter
Dimensional data 1
120 32
5
25
Radio transmitter
32 9 2
6
32
3
Sensor
4
BT00053-b-UK
Transmitter internal view
Legend
1 - Sensor connection clamp;
2 - Configurator socket;
3 - Additional Magnetic contact;
4 - Tamper/learning;
6 - LED: two red flashes signal an alarm; only one flash indicates that the battery is exhausted.

3444
Configuration
WARNING: The configuration operations must be performed with the battery disconnected
Z
N
zone. Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and
so on to a maximum of 9 sensors (IR detectors and contact interface) for each of the 8 M A
zones. Z N O U
D X
Configurator
MOD socket
The configurator connected to this socket specifies the detection mode associated to the
glass-breaking sensor supplied and the NC contact with additional magnet.

0 Not delayed
2 Delayed(1)
device sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified
channel in the AUX position. If the zone it belongs to is Transmitter internal view
divided, the auxiliary command is disabled.
NOTE(1): function available only with central units item 3485/B, item 3486 and HC/HD/
HS/L/N/NT4601.
AUX
BT00053-b-UK

3444
Configuration
Pairing detectors Cancelling detectors
will go off. If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED the remote controls are cancelled.
flashes, it means that the device memory is full. After 10 seconds the LED starts flashing quickly. If the pushbutton is released now,
5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2. only the sensors are cancelled.
6. Close the sensors to deactivate the tamper. 5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
7. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit. off, cancellation has been completed.
8. Exit “maintenance” mode. 6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit “maintenance”
mode.
Tamper/learning
Wiring diagram
Glass-breaking detector
The sensor must be connected using the transmitting unit as shown in the figure.
Do not extend the probe cable. 1m
WARNING: For correct operation of the device the glass-breaking detector, or any T
additional magnetic contacts, must be activated within 12 hours from the moment the C
-
device starts operation.
Tamper line (*)

T
C
-
BT00053-b-UK
To the glass-breaking detector
Note (*): short circuit contacts – and T if no tamper line is installed

Radio rolling shutter
opening detector 3445
Description
This device is the radio version of the wired detector, item 3514. It generates an alarm if
anyone attempts to open a rolling shutter.
It consists of two elements:
- a coil guide type rope detector to be fitted to the rolling shutter;
- a battery powered radio transmitter to be installed inside the box of the rolling shutter
or on the frame of the window to be protected.
Also supplied is an NC contact with additional magnet for the protection of doors and
windows.
The alarm is generated when the rope of the detector changes length following an Rope rolling shutter detector
attempt to open the rolling shutter.
Radio transmitter
Technical data
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C (indoor use)
- Modulation: FSK
Dimensional data
100 15
120 32 90
ø4
25
Radio transmitter
93
77
Rope rolling shutter detector

BT00054-b-UK
17

3445
Configuration
1
WARNING: The configuration operations must be performed with the battery
disconnected
Z
Configurator 1 assigns zone 1 to the detector, configurator 2 assigns zone 2 and so on to 2
N
zone. Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and M A
so on to a maximum of 9 sensors (IR detectors and contact interface) for each of the 8 Z N O U
D X
zones.
Configurator
3 socket
MOD
The configurator connected to this position, specifies the detection mode associated to
the rolling shutter sensor.

0 Not delayed
2 Delayed(1)
device sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified Transmitter internal view
divided, the auxiliary command is disabled.
NOTE(1): function available only with central units item 3485/B, item 3486 and HC/HD/ Legend
HS/L/N/NT4601. 1 - Rope rolling shutter detector connection clamp;
AUX 3 - LED: two red flashes signal an alarm; only one flash indicates that the battery is
The configurator in the AUX socket activates the auxiliary function of the corresponding exhausted.
BT00054-b-UK

3445
Configuration
Pairing detectors Cancelling detectors
will go off. If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED the remote controls are cancelled. After 10 seconds the LED starts flashing quickly. If
flashes, it means that the device memory is full. the pushbutton is released now, only the sensors are cancelled.
5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2. 5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
6. Close the sensors to deactivate the tamper. off, cancellation has been completed.
7. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit. 6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit “maintenance”
8. Exit “maintenance” mode. mode.
Tamper/learning
Wiring diagram
WARNING: For correct operation of the device the rolling shutter detector must be
1,5m activated within 12 hours from the moment the device starts operation.
+
C
-
Rope rolling
shutter detector
battery
Red Green Black

wire wire wire
BT00054-b-UK
NOTE: do not extend the cable of the detector.

Radio remote control for teleassistance 3448
Description
1
Radio device with three pushbuttons, for sending remote assistance requests.
Pressing the larger pushbutton a radio signal is sent, which is transferred on the BUS of
the Burglar-alarm system through the radio receiver item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4618.
The two round pushbuttons are used to configure the device and for resetting (silencing)
the current alarm.
3
Technical data
- Power supply: 3 V lithium battery - type CR2032
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C 2
- Range: 100 metres free field Front view
- Modulation: FSK

1 - LED: when pressing one key:
• it flashes twice if the battery is charged;
48 13
• it flashes once if the battery is exhausted;
2 - Generates an alarm;
3 - Alarm reset (press for 5 seconds for learning to be performed on the receiver).
60
Configuration
Pairing remote controls Cancelling remote controls
2. Press the programming pushbutton of the radio receiver for five seconds, until the 2. Remove the power supply from the receiver.
3. Press one of the round pushbuttons for 5 seconds. to the radio receiver.
BT00051-b-UK
4. If the pairing of the device has been performed correctly, the red LED of the radio 4. After 5 seconds the LED flashes orange. If the pushbutton is released at this time, only
receiver will go off. the remote controls are cancelled.
If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED flashes, it means 5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
that the device memory is full. off, cancellation has been completed.
5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2. 6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit “maintenance”
6. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit. mode.
7. Program the remote controls on the central unit.
8. Exit “maintenance” mode.

3448
Battery replacement
1 2
4 5
6 7 8
BT00051-b-UK

Relay actuator 3479
Description
1
This device allows to repeat various types of alarms by means of a relay voltage-free
contacts, depending on its configuration.
It can be activated by a technical alarm interface, or by another signal through the
auxiliary channel (AUX).
Normally used for the control of gas/water safety solenoid valves, or third party devices
(telephone diallers, optical notifications, etc.). 2
The internal relay is in positive safety; this means that, in case of tampering, it switches
over the contacts. By modifying the configuration, it is possible to change the safety
mode of the internal relay.
3
Related items
Technical alarm interfaces: 3841 and F483

4
5
Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS
Max. absorption: 20 mA 2. Configurator socket
Contact output: 24 V 1 A cosφ 0.4 3. LED indicating activated relay.
Operating temperature: 5 – 40 °C 4. Relay contact
5. Tamper line
Configuration
The relay actuator requires the allocation of the progressive number within the group of
auxiliary devices (relay actuator and auxiliary channels interface) installed within the
system, of the auxiliary channel number, and the operating modes.
N°
This configurator assigns the progressive number inside the auxiliary unit.
Configurator 1 identifies the first auxiliary, configurator 2 identifies the second and so
on for a maximum of 9 auxiliaries.
AUX and MOD

In combination the configurators in the AUX and MOD sockets assign the operating
mode on the basis of the following table.
Opertating mode
BT00483-a-UK
Configurators Description It activates by... It resets by...

AUX MOD
none none Repetition of the siren alarm Siren activation Silencing
none 1 System fault notification Activators red LED notification
none 2 System status notification Activation Deactivation

3479
“Auxiliary” operating mode

AUX MOD
none 3 Signalling with memory of the activation of any auxiliary Any AUX device of the system Pressure of the needle key on any technical
channel of the system. Typical example: signalling with alarm interface with AUX configurator from 1
memory of any technical alarm. to 9
1-9 3 Signalling with memory of the activation of the corresponding Technical alarm interface with pressure of the needle key on the interface of the
auxiliary channel. Typical example: signalling with memory of corresponding AUX channel active technical alarm
a specific technical alarm.
none 4 Signalling without memory of the activation of any auxiliary Any AUX device of the system Pressure of the needle key on any technical
channel of the system. Typical example: signalling without alarm interface with AUX configurator from 1
memory of any technical alarm. to 9
auxiliary channel. Typical example: signalling without memory corresponding AUX channel active technical alarm
of a specific technical alarm.
5 As mode 3 but with relay normally not excited.
NOTES - The “S” key of the 3 module flush-mounted central unit or the disabling of the central unit with display,
- Modes 5 and 6 give the same operating results of modes 3 and 4. Their difference is that the relay is which main function is that of silencing the sirens during a technical alarm, disables the relay if this has
normally not excited. This enables an opposite behaviour in case of tampering (cutting of the wire been activated by the technical alarm interface configured in mode “0” or “4” (technical alarm).
or BUS short circuit). In fact in mode 3 and 4 a tampering excites the device (modes indicated in
the case of actuation of alarms such as the siren, the telephone communicator, etc.); however, in - In all modes there is an auxiliary activation also in case of pre-alarm (IR detector and contact interface
mode 5 and 6 the same tampering does not cause any actuation (modes indicated in case of safety with AUX configurators). Attention must therefore be paid when using the relay actuator (in modes
actuations such as electrical door locks etc.). The selection of the appropriate mode ensures total with memory or with sensitivity to any auxiliary channel) to avoid unwanted activations.
system safety.
EXAMPLE: Activation of the solenoid valve in case of gas leak

Relay actuator configuation: Technical alarm interface configuration
Configurator position Value Configurator position Value
N° 1 N° 2
AUX 1 AUX 1
MOD 6 MOD 4
Wiring diagram
Burglar alarm BUS
Technical alarm
interface
Gas detector
Axolute
Livinglight
Matix
BT00483-a-UK
A – +
Relay
actuator
Alarm reset
Transformer
12 Vac
to the gas detector

Solenoid valve

Contact interface 3480
Description
1
This interface is used to connect 2 independent contact lines that can be balanced by
means of a resistance, and which tripping can be delayed, as well as one tampering
protection line. It can be used to achieve centralisation of all interfaces inside junction
7 2
boxes. A LED on the interface confirms appropriate operation of the device during the
system test procedure, and the tripping of the burglar-alarm system, when the system
is armed. This interface gives the possibility of connecting the alarm system to a sensor 3
line (that can be balanced with resistance, and/or which intervention can be delayed)
requiring 12V V power supply.
4
6
5
Front view

- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1. BUS;
- Max. absorption: 5 mA 2. Configurator socket;
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C 3. Line activated LED;
4. Contact line 2;
5. Contact line 1;
Dimensional data
6. Tamper line;
- Size: 2 Basic modules 7. Anti-tamper device.
Configuration
This interface module requires - for each of the two contact lines separate from each Z1
other - the allocation of the assigned zone Z, the progressive number N of the detectors N1
situated in the same zone, the setup of the MOD protection mode of the contact line. MOD1
Z2
Z1 N2
T - C1 - C2
This configurator assigns the number of the assigned zone of the NC/NO magnetic MOD2
contact connected to line 1.
Configurator 1 gives the contact the assignment to zone 1, configurator 2 gives the ART.F482
assignment to zone 2 and so forth, up to a maximum of 8 zones.
Z2
As above, for contacts connected to line 2.
T C2 C1
N1
This configurator assigns the progressive number of the NC magnetic contact within the
zone determined in position Z1.
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second, and so
forth, up to a maximum of 9 contacts for each of the 8 zones.
BT00045-c-UK
N2
As above, for contacts connected to line 2 (zone Z2).
MOD1 and MOD2

In this position a configurator is inserted for selecting the operating mode of the
interface according to the type of contact or detector connected to the two lines.
The interface can operate in two modes:
- as interface for the management of alarm contacts, system connection
pushbutton, and auxiliary channel generation;
- as interface for the management of technical alarms.

3480
Configuration
Managing alarms/system arming/auxiliary channel generation management
In this mode, two independent contact lines can be connected to the interface. The
corresponding addresses must be specified in positions Z1, N1, and Z2, N2. 1
The configurator in position MOD1 and MOD2 specifies the type of contact for the 9
generation of the alarm, as per the following table:
Configurator Sensor connected
none NC contact
1 NC contact - balanced
Tamper line
2 NC contact - delayed (1)
3 NC contact – delayed and balanced (1)
4 Contact NC and contact status forwarding
5 Contact NC balanced and contact status forwarding N.C. 68 Kohm
6 Contact NC delayed and contact status forwarding P

N.O.
7 Contact NC delayed balanced and contact status forwarding
8 NO contact
9 NO contact for system arming from remote N.O. pushbutton (2) Alarm contacts mode: management of a balanced NC contact line with N.O.
system arming pushbutton
AUX NC contact – forwarding of contact status (3)
Notes:
(1) Follows the delay set on the central unit:
this function is only available with central units item 3486, 3485/B and item
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601. With central units item L/N/NT4600/1 the interface must
be allocated to ZONE 1, with a time delay set (see the central unit configuration).
(2) The system is activated when the pushbutton is pressed for a minimum period of 3
seconds.
(3) This operating mode does not generate an alarm signal, but a contact status signal,
useful for Automation and Temperature control applications (automatic switching
off of the heating system when a window is open).
Technical alarms management
In this mode, the interface can only manage one contact line connected to the C1
and clamp, to which the NC or NO contact for the generation of the technical alarm 8
is connected. A NO pushbutton for resetting the generated technical alarm, can be 3
connected to the - and C2 clamps of the second line. The Z and N address of the interface
must only be specified in the positions Z1 and N1.
Selection of the alarm contact:
Configurator Type of contact

in MOD1 position Water detector
(N.O. contact)
none NC contact
8 NO contact
P
BT00045-c-UK
When a technical alarm with intermittent sound of the indoor siren is generated, it will
Alarm reset
also be possible to generate an Auxiliary signal. The channel of the Auxiliary signal is
defined by the numeric value of configurator 1 to 9 entered in the position MOD2. If the Technical alarms mode: management of a water detection probe. If flooding occurs,
OFF configurator is entered in this position, no auxiliary channel is generated (only the a sound alarm will be generated by an internal siren, and a signal will be sent to
technical alarm with intermittent sound of the siren). auxiliary channel no. 3. To reset the alarm press the P pushbutton.

3480
Energy saving management with Temperature control

- Use of a burglar-alarm system integrated with the Temperature control
If the contact interface is used in conjunction with the temperature control system to optimise system: in this case, the contact interface is connected to the burglar-alarm system
energy saving, two different types of configurations will be possible: BUS only, and communicates with the temperature control system BUS through the
F422 interface.
- Use in the temperature control system only: The contact interface is directly The interface must be configured in Z1/2 and N1/2 following the requirements and
connected to the temperature control BUS. It autonomously and independently features of the burglar-alarm system; only configurators with values 4 to 7 must
manages the two C1 and C2 lines. Only the line used must be configured, and not be connected to the MOD1/2 position, corresponding to the management of NC
both of them. Follow by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD1 and/or MOD2 contacts with generation of AUX event (see tables above). Also in this case, the
sockets. Then configure the [Z1/2] and [N1/2] sockets, in order to assign the address actual coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control
from 1 to 99 to the device within the system. zone must be performed using the TiThermo application. For more information refer
The coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control zone to the MY HOME Temperature control guide.
must be performed using the TiThermo application. For more information refer to
the MY HOME Temperature control guide.
Wiring diagram
BUS
Tamper line
N.C. N.C. N.C.
Balance resistance
68 kΩ ±5% 1/4 W
WARNING: use a 30 m max twisted, unshielded
cable.
N.C. N.C. N.C.
Balance resistance NOTE: It is recommended to install the

68 kΩ ±5% 1/4 W Unshielded 68 kΩ ±5% 1/4 W balancing resistance in
twisted cable correspondence with the last line contact.
Used for managing a technical alarm
(*) The N.C. pushbutton can be replaced by a NO pushbutton. The type of BUS
pushbutton activating the alarm is defined through the configuration of the MOD1
position of the device.
It is possible to also connect a water detection probe, as well as NC/NO contacts for
smoke or gas detectors. For the water detection probe use item 3482.
BT00045-c-UK
N.C. pushbutton (*)
N.O. pushbutton
Technical alarm activation
Alarm Reset

3480
Flooding alarm management
BUS
N. O. pushbutton
Tamper line
Alarm Reset
Probe item 3482

BT00045-c-UK

12 v contact interface 3480V12
Description
1
This interface gives the possibility of connecting the alarm system to a sensor line (that
can be balanced with resistance, and/or which intervention can be delayed) requiring
12 V power supply.
Produced in the basic modular version, the device can be used when centralizing all the
interfaces in junction boxes. A LED on the device confirms the appropriate operation
of the same during the system test procedure, and the tripping of the burglar-alarm 2
system, when the system is armed.
7
Technical data
3
Max. absorption: 5 mA to which the absorption of the sensor
connected must be added
Output: 12 V Max 50 mA
6 4
Dimensional data 5
Size: 2 Basic modules
The interface requires the allocation of the zone Z it belongs to, of the N progressive 1. BUS;
number of the sensors within the same zone, and the setting of the MOD contact line 2. Configurator socket;
protection mode. 3. Line activated LED;
4. 12 V power line;
Z1
This configurator assigns the number of the assigned zone of the NC magnetic contact 5. C contact line;
connected to line 1. 6. Tamper line;
7. Device tamper protection against opening
N1
MOD
In this position a configurator is inserted for selecting the operating mode of the
interface according to the type of contact or detector connected to the line. it is possible
to create a balanced and unbalanced protection line, with the possibility of generating
the alarm with a delay, as for zone 1. For the details of the various operating modes, refer
to the table below.
BT00480-a-UK
MOD

3480V12
Configuration
Configurator Sensor connected Specific mode for connection to wired rolling shutter sensors
none NC contact Configurator Sensor connected Pulses (*)
1 NC contact - balanced 8 Rolling shutter rope sensor - 12 (approx 20 cm)
2 NC contact - delayed * delayed*
3 NC contact - delayed * - balanced 9 Rolling shutter rope sensor - 25 (approx 45 cm)
4 NC contact and AUX event generation delayed*
5 Balanced NC contact and AUX event generation
Note (*): Follows the delay set on the central unit:
6 Delayed NC contact and AUX event generation this function is operative only with central units with display. With flush mounted 3
7 Balanced delayed NC contact and AUX event generation module central units, the interface must be allocated to ZONE 1, with a time delay set
(see central unit configuration).
Note (**): pulses generated by the sensor depending on the degree of opening of the
window, in cm, before the alarm is generated.

If the contact interface is used in conjunction with the temperature control system to - Use of a burglar-alarm system integrated with the Temperature control system: in this
optimise energy saving, two different types of configurations will be possible: case, the contact interface is connected to the burglar-alarm system BUS only, and
communicates with the temperature control system BUS through the F422 interface.
- Use in the temperature control system only: The contact interface is directly connected The interface must be configured in Z and N following the requirements and features of
to the temperature control BUS It autonomously and independently manages the burglar-alarm system; only configurators with values 4 to 7 must be connected to
the contact line. Follow by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD sockets. the MOD position, corresponding to the management of NC contacts with generation
Then configure the Z and N sockets, in order to assign the address from 1 to 99 to of AUX event (see tables above). Also in this case, the actual coupling between the
the device within the system. The coupling between the interface contact line and interface contact line and the temperature control zone must be performed using the
the temperature control zone must be performed using the TiThermo application. TiThermo application. For more information refer to the MY HOME Temperature control
For more information refer to the MY HOME Temperature control guide. guide.
Wiring diagram
1
Twisted, unshielded cable, with 30 metre

maximum length.
BT00480-a-UK
Sensor tamper N.C. N.C. N.C.
Balance resistance
100 kΩ ± 5% 1/4 W * N.C. N.C. N.C.
* Do not install more than 3 rope sensors on each line

3480V12
Connection with IR 3518 - 3518/50 - 3518/150 - 3519 barriers
RX TX
S1
13,8 13,8
GND GND
PT0 PT0
PT1 PT1
ALL0
ALL1
Reset
JP10
LED COM T COM C + -
If the max absorption of the system allows it, it will be possible to directly connect the barrier to one interface only.
WARNING: use a 30 m max twisted, unshielded cable.
BT00480-a-UK

3480V12
Installation
The maximum length of the interface connection line depends on the absorption of the connected loads, as for the following table
Siren Siren
4072L 4072A
Power supply Power supply

E46ADCN E47ADCN
B
A
Interface Interface
Absorption of the loads connected to the interfaces Maximum distance

A B
50 mA
100 mA 175 (*)
(2 interfaces with maximum load on the same line)
150 mA 175
150 (*)
200 mA
Note (*): this configuration requires the use of 2 sirens, item 4072L.
In case of extension of an existing system (for which it is not possible to know the exact
distances, and how many devices are connected to the BUS line the interface must be
connected to), it is necessary to perform the following test, to check that it is suitable
to install the interface:
BT00480-a-UK
1 Switch the system to maintenance mode

2 Connect the interface to the load to power
3 Measure the BUS voltage at the extremities of the interface
4 If the voltage exceeds 25 V, installation is possible
5 If the voltage is below 25 V, a dedicated cable must be connected to the interface.

Technical alarm interface 3481
Description
1
The technical alarm interface is used to receive signals from the outside (normally
analogue signals, like the closing/opening of a contact), converting them into digital
information for the BUS.
This information gives the possibility of differentiating between alarm notifications,
like the activation of the siren, or the telephone dialler, or the closure of the gas/water
solenoid valve. 2
The functions described can be obtained using a dedicated communication line
between the devices of the burglar alarm system, called auxiliary channel.
Up to 9 auxiliary channels are available for each system.
They are assigned by configuration of the device(s).
3
Related items
Relay actuator: F481 and 3479
Technical data

Max. absorption: 6 mA 6 4
5
Dimensional data
The technical alarm interface module requires the allocation of the progressive number 1. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS
within the group of auxiliary devices (relay actuator and auxiliary channels interface), 2. Configurator socket
the auxiliary channel number, and the operating modes. 3. Line activated LED
N° 4. External sensor connection clamp
This configurator assigns the progressive number inside the auxiliary unit. 5. Traditional external sensor connection clamp
Configurator 1 identifies the first auxiliary, configurator 2 identifies the second and so 6. Reset pushbutton connection
AUX and MOD
Activation from the technical alarm interface
Configurators
Description
AUX MOD
none none Technical alarm with normally closed (NC) contact
Internal siren (MOD 0 or 2) sounds intermittently until one of the following events occurs:
BT00485-a-UK
a) there is no longer an alarm

b) pressure of “S” key on the 3 module flush mounted central unit, or deactivation from the central unit with display;
c) pin key on the device itself pressed.
none 2 Anti-panic alarm with normally closed (NC) contact
Generates a burglar-alarm even with the system switched off and in any division condition.
Is silenced with the remote control.
none 4 Technical alarm with normally open (NO) contact
3481
Configurators
Relay opertating mode (description)
AUX MOD
1-9 none Technical alarm with NC contact and activation of the auxiliary channel
a) there is no longer an alarm;
It activates the corresponding auxiliary channel.
1-9 1 Anti-burglary automation with NC contact
It activates the corresponding auxiliary channel without interfering with the status of the burglar-alarm system, therefore without
generating signals or alarms.
1-9 2 Anti-panic alarm with NC contact and activation of the auxiliary channel
Generates a burglar-alarm even with the system switched off and in any division condition. Is silenced with the remote control.
1-9 3 Connection between burglar-alarm and auxiliary channels (LINK)
It generates and activation of the corresponding auxiliary channel following a burglary/tampering alarm.
1-9 4 Technical alarm with NO contact and activation of the auxiliary channel
a) there is no longer an alarm;

Relay actuator configuration: Technical alarm interface configuration
N° 1 N° 2
AUX 1 AUX 1
MOD 6 MOD 4
Wiring diagram
Burglar alarm BUS
Technical alarm
interface
Gas detector
Axolute
Livinglight
Matix
BT00485-a-UK
A – +
Relay
actuator
Alarm reset
Transformer
12 Vac
To the gas detector
Solenoid valve

Advanced central unit
with telephone communicator 3485
Description
1
The central unit has the function of supervising the burglar-alarm system, enabling the
management of the zone sensors independent from one another.
It is possible to save up to 16 activation scenarios and use them based on actual the needs.
It’s fitted with built-in telephone communicator for sending a telephone message in case
of alarm, or to check the status of the system using a fixed or mobile phone, when away
from home. Thanks to the integration with rolling shutter and light switching on movement
devices, it is possible to program automations that activate in case of alarm, to confuse the
intruder. 5 6
The central unit is also capable of communicating with vigilance bodies through an 7
appropriate protocol, further increasing the level of protection of the property (for this
service consult the installer).
Main functions 3 8
- Burglar-alarm central unit with combined telephone communicator;
- system self-learning and configuration on-screen display; 2
- can be controlled by transponder and keypad;
- independent management of each sensor;
- can be programmed by PC;
- detailed event memory and alarm only memory;
- customisation of alarm messages; Front view 4
- phone book for sending alarms;
- connection with surveillance central unit using the “Ademco Contact ID” protocol, with
the possibility of remote setting of Ademco parameters; Legend
- blocking for 1 minute the possibility of arming or disarming, or access to the navigation
menu, if the wrong key is entered for three consecutive times (from keypad or 1 - Graphic display: displays the messages which guide the programming operations
transponder); and the events which have occurred (more information on the following page).
- association of a set user name to scenarios, sensors and zones; 2 - Transponder reader: receives the burglar-alarm system switching on and off
- each individual sensor can be deactivated by sending a command from the central unit commands directly from the transponder keys.
keypad; 3 - Alphanumeric keypad: allows the manual switching on of all those programming
- possibility of sending a test call, with programmable delay, to the MY HOME Portal, or to operations which require the use of numbers and/or symbols.
the surveillance central unit; 4 - Microphone: used to record the messages and listen to the room remotely by
- signalling of failed connection with: sensors, with the system disarmed, a signalling icon means of telephone.
is displayed, with the system armed, an alarm is generated; 5 - C key: exit the current menu and the programming.
- division of the zones directly from the Central unit keypad. 6 - Navigation keypad: navigate inside the menu, confirms or cancels the
programming operations.
Management of burglar-alarm functions 7 - OK key: to confirm the programming operations.
8 - Loudspeaker: can listen to the recorded messages.
The central unit manages a total of 10 zones:
- zone 0 is reserved for the activators (max. 9);
Telephone communicator
- zones from 1 to 8 are reserved for the sensors;
- zone 9 is reserved for the technical alarms/ auxiliaries (gas detector etc.). - Allows two-way communication between the user and the My Home home
It performs the following functions: automation system;
- manages the events communicated by the sensors and can determine if and when to - if the burglar-alarm system has detected an alarm, it automatically dials the telephone
give the alarm; numbers previously programmed by the user and gives a voice message to say what
- zones from 1 to 8 can be separated as the user requires; type of event has happened;
BT00022-b-UK
- up to 16 division scenarios can be created and activated depending on needs; - it can be called by the user who, by means of predefined codes, can send commands to
- a specific division can be coupled to each key (max. 50). It is also possible to limit the the automation system and to the burglar-alarm system;
use of the key to certain days of the week, and to a specific time band; - the user can find out the state of the burglar-alarm and automation system by
- automatic devices can be operated as the user requires, if the burglar-alarm system telephone;
has recorded an event (e.g. switch on the lights in the zone where there is an intrusion - it lets you connect to the My Home portal and makes the My Home web service
alarm); available, for example the remote assistance service as well as the possibility to
- all the customising phases are guided and shown by means of the display. download the history of events;
- it enables automatic forwarding of alarm and event signallings to surveillance units,
using the Contact ID protocol, as well as the request and setting of its parameters.

3485
Legend
2 - Tamper line (see note);
1 3 - T1 local tamper;
4 - Reset key;
5 - Serial connector for PC programming;
6 - Burglar alarm BUS;
9 b
a 7 - ON/OFF slide switch;
8 b
8 - Telephone line OUT;
9 - Telephone line IN.
ART.3485 _
T1
2 NOTE: The central unit is supplied with the clamps (-/T1) of the Tamper line shorted for the
use of the T1 local tamper (wall mounted installation on metal base).
3
7
OF F
4 Technical data
ON
BUS
- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc
- Max. absorption: 55 (stand by) – 90 mA
6 5 - Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C
- Installation: wall mounted
Rear view
Dimensional data
Size (H,L,D): 128x125x25 mm
Configuration
The central units do not need configurators. The functions can be set directly on the Ademco Contact ID functionality
device itself (keypad and display), or using the appropriate software, TiSecurity POLYX. Ademco contact ID is a particular communication protocol operating on a telephone line
For detailed information refer to the corresponding manuals supplied with the products. with DTMF touch tone. Using this protocol, it is possible to set a one-way communication
between the burglar-alarm central units and the vigilance bodies. In this way, vigilance
Software configuration bodies can receive information concerning the type of event/alarm generated and, if
The program can be used to easily customise all parameters of the Central unit. It is available, the details of the peripheral from where it generated.
possible to receive the current configuration from the Central unit, change it and send
any changes made to the Central unit, save the configuration to a file for subsequent Events that can be managed using the Ademco Contact ID
modification, or save it as a backup copy. The Ademco Contact ID events managed by the central unit are the following:
Relating to the burglar-alarm system:
For further information refer to the software manual supplied with the central unit. - Anti-panic alarm
- Anti-burglary alarm
- General intrusion alarm
- Tamptest (device interconnection alarm)
- Device tampering alarm
- No power supply
- System battery faulty
- Activation / deactivation / cancellation*
- Sensor deactivation
- Periodical functionality test (routine check of the telephone line and the installation)
BT00022-b-UK
NOTE*: cancellation is the silencing of an alarm following the disarming of the system itself.
In this case the event is sent to the vigilance body, which can therefore check if it’s been
caused by a tampering attempt.
Relating to the technical alarms:

- Fire alarm (AUX=8)
- Gas leak alarm (AUX=1)
- Freezer alarm (AUX=2)
- Flooding alarm (AUX=3)
- Remote assistance alarm (AUX=9)
- Auxiliary device tampering (Z=9)
For every event, where required, the origin of the alarm is also forwarded, in terms of zone
and device.

3485
Wiring diagram
It is good practice to protect the system from lightning by using surge protective devices, connect the corresponding earth clamp with the “earth” reference of the SPD discharger
SPD, belonging to class II, as per the diagram shown. installed in the apartment distribution board (see diagram). The connection shall have as
In particular, to protect the burglar-alarm central unit from overvoltage from the low an impedance as possible, and will be performed using a conductor with minimum
telephone line, the use of the appropriate PLT1 device is recommended, taking care to section of 2.5 mm2, and maximum length of 30 metres.
Riser distribution board Apartment distribution board

Power meter
SPD coordination
(if necessary)
to the electric
S type earth system
leakage SPD1 SPD2
max. 30 m
Local line
a b
IN
PLT1
OUT
a b
b
a
BT00022-b-UK
ART.3485 _
T1
OF F
ON
BUS
Advanced central unit with telephone communicator

Base central unit 3485B
Description
1
It is possible to save up to 4 activation scenarios and use them based on actual needs.
The device can manage up to 10 automations split as follows:
- 1 actuated using an internal relay and coupled with intrusion events, technical alarms,
or system status;
- 9 coupled with arming, disarming, date and time events, to generate separation 4 6
scenarios.
5
Main functions 3
- System self-learning and configuration on-screen display; 2

- can be controlled by transponder and keypad (20 keys maximum);
- independent management of each sensor;
- local contact in addition to those already present on the system (configurable);
Front view
- possibility of updating the firmware using the PC;
menu, if the wrong key is entered for three consecutive times; Legend
- association of a user set name to scenarios (max. 4), sensors and zones;
1 - Graphic display: displays the messages which guide the programming operations and
- each individual sensor can be deactivated by sending a command from the central unit
the events which have occurred (more information on the following page).
keypad;
2 - Transponder reader: receives the burglar-alarm system switching on and off commands
- signalling of failed connection with: sensors, with the system disarmed, a signalling
directly from the transponder keys.
icon is displayed, with the system armed, an alarm is generated;
3 - Alphanumeric keypad: allows the manual switching on of all those programming
- division of the zones directly from the central unit keypad;
operations which require the use of numbers and/or symbols.
- presence of a local automation and signalling relay.
4 - C key: exit the current menu and the programming.
5 - OK key: to confirm the programming operations.
Management of burglar-alarm functions 6 - Navigation keypad: navigate the menu.
The central unit manages a total of 6 zones;
- zone 0 is reserved for the activators (max. 9); Technical data
- zone 9 is reserved for the technical alarms/ auxiliaries (gas detector etc.).
- Max. absorption: 50 mA
Performs the following functions:
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C
- manages the events communicated by the sensors and can determine if and when to
- Load of local relay contacts: 12/24 V – 1 A
give the alarm;
- Installation: wall mounted
- zones from 1 to 4 can be separated as the user requires;
- up to 4 division scenarios can be created and activated depending on needs;
- all the customising phases are guided and shown by means of the display; Dimensional data
- an automation can be coupled to the detection of a certain alarm, using the local relay: Size (H,L,D): 128x125x25 mm
for example, the switching on of a light, to confuse the intruder.
BT00023-b-UK

3485B
Legend
1 2 - Local contact;
3 - Tamper line (see note);
4 - T1 local tamper;
5 - Reset key;
b
a 6 - Firmware update serial connector;
b
7 - Burglar alarm BUS;
8 - ON/OFF slide switch;
2
ART.3485B
C 9 - Relay for automation in case of alarm.
NC
9 T1
3
NA NOTE: The central unit is supplied with the clamps (-/T1) of the Tamper line shorted for
4 the use of the T1 local tamper (wall mounted installation on metal base).
OF F
8 ON 5
BUS
7 6
Rear view
Configuration
The central units do not need configurators. The functions can be set directly on the
device itself (keypad and display), or using the appropriate software, either TiSecurity Example
Basic. Example of configuration performed on the central unit.
For detailed information refer to the corresponding manuals supplied with the products. - Detection of devices
MAINTENANCE
Language
Software configuration Key program
The program enables acquiring the configuration on the central unit, saving it in a file to System test
Learning
be used to reinstate the configuration of the same, or to configure other central units. It
is also possible to update the permanent software of the central unit using new versions Select
published by BTicino. Learning
MAINTENANCE
Language
Key program
System test
Learning
Press OK to confirm
LEARNING
After pressing OK, the
zone: 0 num.: 1 following screen appears
type: not exist
tamper: OFF
automatic
Press OK to start learning

BT00023-b-UK
Learning
ended
no problem
Vuoi inviare la
c o n f i g uNEXT
razione a
dispositivi di
(See
v i sthe
u amanual
l i z z aof
z ithe
o ncentral
e? unit)
invia = OK
non invia = CLEAR

Predisporre
l impianto
Advanced central unit
with telephone communicator 3486
Description
1 2 3 9
management of the zone sensors independent from one another. It is possible to save up
to 16 activation scenarios and use them based on actual the needs. It’s fitted with built-in
telephone communicator for sending a telephone message in case of alarm, or to check the
status of the system when away from home, using a fixed or mobile phone.
Thanks to the integration with rolling shutter and light switching on movement devices, it
is possible to program automations that activate in case of alarm, to confuse the intruder.
The central unit is also capable of communicating with vigilance bodies through an
appropriate protocol, further increasing the level of protection of the property (for this
service consult the installer).
Main functions 8 OK
- Burglar-alarm central unit with combined telephone communicator (on GSM and PSTN line); 7 CLEAR
- system self-learning and configuration on-screen display; 1 2 3

- can be controlled by IR remote control, transponder and keypad; 4 5 6
- independent management of each sensor; 7 8 9
- can be programmed by PC;
6 0
- customisation of alarm messages;
- phone book for sending alarms; Front view 5 4
- connection with surveillance central unit using the “Ademco Contact ID” protocol, with
the possibility of remote setting of Ademco parameters;
menu, if the wrong key is entered for three consecutive times (from keypad or Legend
transponder); 1 - Loudspeaker: can listen to the recorded messages and play voice messages in the
- association of a set user name to scenarios, sensors and zones; room by means of the telephone;
- each individual sensor can be deactivated by sending a command from the central unit 2 - Graphic display: displays the messages which guide the programming operations
keypad; and the events which have occurred;
- possibility of sending a test call, with programmable delay, to the MY HOME Portal, or to 3 - IR receiver: receives the switching on and off commands sent by the burglar-alarm
the surveillance central unit; system remote control;
- signalling of failed connection with: sensors, with the system disarmed, a signalling icon 4 - Transponder reader: receives the burglar-alarm system switching on and off
is displayed, with the system armed, an alarm is generated; commands directly from the transponder keys;
- division of the zones directly from the Central unit keypad. 5 - Alphanumeric keypad: allows the manual switching on of all those programming
operations which require the use of numbers and/or symbols;
Management of burglar-alarm functions 6 - Microphone: used to record the messages and listen to the room remotely by
means of telephone;
The central unit manages a total of 10 zones:
7 - CLEAR key: exit the current menu and the programming;
- Zone 0 is reserved for the acivators (max. 9);
8 - Navigation keypad: navigate inside the menu, confirms or cancels the
programming operations;
- zone 9 is reserved for the technical alarms/auxiliaries (gas detector etc.);
9 - GSM antenna with cable L = 1.5 metres: to be positioned upon verification of
Performs the following functions:
GSM signal reception.
- manages the events communicated by the sensors and can determine if and when to give the
alarm; Telephone communicator
- zones from 1 to 8 can be separated as the user requires;
BT00021-b-UK
- Allows two-way communication between the user and the My Home home automation system:
- if the burglar-alarm system has detected an alarm, it automatically dials the telephone numbers
- a specific division can be coupled to each key (max. 50). It is also possible to limit the use of the
previously programmed by the user and gives a voice message to say what type of event has
key to certain days of the week, and to a specific time band;
happened;
- automatic devices can be operated as the user requires, if the burglar-alarm system has
- it can be called by the user who, by means of predefined codes, can send commands to the
recorded an event (e.g. switch on the lights in the zone where there is an intrusion alarm);
automation system and to the burglar-alarm system;
- all the customising phases are guided and shown by means of the display.
- the user can find out the state of the burglar-alarm and automation system by telephone;
- it lets you connect to the My Home portal and makes the My Home web service available, for
example the remote assistance service as well as the possibility to download the history of
events;
- it enables automatic forwarding of alarm and event signallings to surveillance units, using the
Contact ID protocol, as well as the request and setting of its parameters.
3486
Legend
2 - Telephone line OUT;
1 3 - Telephone line IN;
impianto 4 - Reset key;
12 5 - T1 local tamper;
on off
2
3 6 - Tamper line (see note);
11 7 - Burglar alarm BUS;
4 8 - MY HOME sound system BUS;
9 - SIM card housing;
10 - Serial connector for PC programming (with cable item 335919 or item 3559);
10 11 - Battery housing (item 3507/6);
5 12 - GSM antenna connector.
NOTE: The central unit is supplied with the clamps (-/T1) of the Tamper line shorted for the
6 use of the local tamper T1 (wall mounted installation on metal base); For installations inside
MULTIBOX boxes ensure the connection of a NC circuit breaker to the -/T1 clamps for the
7 tamper function; alternatively, short clamps -/T2. In this case the central unit will not be
protected from tampering.
Technical data
8 - Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc
9
- Max. absorption: 50 (stand by) – 120 mA
- Installation: wall mounted or Multibox switchboard
Rear view
Dimensional data
Size (H,L,D): 210x210x30 mm
Configuration
The central units do not need configurators. The functions can be set directly on the Ademco Contact ID functionality
device itself (keypad and display), or using the appropriate software, either TiSecurity Ademco contact ID is a particular communication protocol operating on a telephone line
GSM. For detailed information refer to the corresponding manuals supplied with the with DTMF touch tone. Using this protocol, it is possible to set a one-way communication
products. between the burglar-alarm central units and the vigilance bodies. In this way, vigilance
bodies can receive information concerning the type of event/alarm generated and, if
Software configuration available, the details of the peripheral from where it generated.
The program can be used to easily customise all parameters of the Central unit. It is Events that can be managed using the Ademco Contact ID
possible to receive the current configuration from the Central unit, change it and send The Ademco Contact ID events managed by the central unit are the following:
any changes made to the Central unit, save the configuration to a file for subsequent Relating to the burglar-alarm system:
modification, or save it as a backup copy. - Anti-panic alarm
For further information refer to the software manual supplied with the central unit. - Anti-burglary alarm
- General intrusion alarm
- Tamptest (device interconnection alarm)
- Device tampering alarm
- No power supply
- System battery faulty
- Activation / deactivation / cancellation*
- Sensor deactivation
- Periodical functionality test (routine check of the telephone line and the installation)
BT00021-b-UK
NOTE*: cancellation is the silencing of an alarm following the disarming of the system itself.
In this case the event is sent to the vigilance body, which can therefore check if it’s been
caused by a tampering attempt.
Relating to the technical alarms:
- Fire alarm (AUX=8)
- Gas leak alarm (AUX=1)
- Freezer alarm (AUX=2)
- Flooding alarm (AUX=3)
- Remote assistance alarm (AUX=9)
- Auxiliary device tampering (Z=9)
For every event, where required, the origin of the alarm is also forwarded, in terms of zone
and device.
3486
Wiring diagram
It is good practice to protect the system from lightning by using surge protective devices, connect the corresponding earth clamp with the “earth” reference of the SPD discharger
SPD, belonging to class II, as per the diagram shown. installed in the apartment distribution board (see diagram). The connection shall have as
In particular, to protect the burglar-alarm central unit from overvoltage from the low an impedance as possible, and will be performed using a conductor with minimum
telephone line, the use of the appropriate PLT1 device is recommended, taking care to section of 2.5 mm2, and maximum length of 30 metres.
Riser distribution board Apartment distribution board

Power meter
SPD coordination
(if necessary)
to the electric
S type earth system
leakage SPD1 SPD2
max. 30 m
Local line
a b
IN
PLT1
OUT
a b
impianto
on off
BT00021-b-UK
Advanced central unit with telephone

communicator

Magnetic contacts 3510/M/PB - 3511 - 3512 - 3513
Description
Magnetic sensors are normally installed on the top side of windows or doors, opposite Magnet Contact
Magnet
to the hinges, so that even with small forced openings, the distance created between
the two components (magnet and reed contact) will be enough to cause an alarm. The
electromagnetic sensors included in the offer are of the NC contact and protection line
type. Contact
Protection
line
Flush mounted installation sensor, item 3510 and item 3510M
These cylindrical sensors have been purposely designed for Flush mounted installation,
as shown in the figure, for doors and windows with small sections. Sensor item 3510
is suitable for wooden doors and windows; sensor item 3510M is made of brass, has NC contact
high mechanical resistance, and is suitable of all types of non ferromagnetic doors and
windows (wood, PVC, aluminium).
Flush mounted installation sensor, item 3510PB Magnet Contact

These cylindrical sensors of large diameter (20 mm) have an enhanced magnet, and
have been purposely designed for Flush mounted installation in reinforced doors, doors, Magnet
and large entrance doors, of any material. Contact
Sensor for exposed installation, item 3511 Protection

When Flush mounted installation is not possible, this type of sensor may be used. White line
in colour, and very small in size, it is designed for exposed installation. It can be used
both on wood and plastic, but also on non ferrous metal doors and windows, such as
aluminium ones. This magnetic sensor has a NC contact and protection line. NC contact
Sensors for doors made of ferrous metal, item 3512 and 3513
Made of metal, and intended for installation on ferrous metal doors and windows. The
item 3512 sensor is suitable for the protection of sliding or tilting garage doors. thanks
to its die-cast aluminium structure capable of withstanding the passage of vehicles, it Contact
can be set on the floor. The connection cables are protected by steel sheathing.
item 3513 sensor can be used on sheet steel doors, such as those of cellars and
warehouses, and on ferrous metal doors and windows.
Protection
line
Configuration
Sensors do not require configuration.
NC contact
Contatto
Magnet
BT00041-b-UK

3510/M/PB - 3511 - 3512 - 3513
Dimensional data
78 17 40 7
14
18
30
67 Magnet
59
3511
35 ø10
Reed
6 6 6
contact
ø8
enclosure
3513 3510
<12 <12
ø24
ø20
ø10
26 18
ø10
ø8
17.5
3510PB 25.5
0.8
26.5
3510M
86
72 25
32
15
B A
65
BT00041-b-UK
Maximum distances from the magnet and the contact

Steel door Other doors
42
A 40 40
B 35 50
25 72 15.5
140
3512

Rolling shutter detector 3514
Description
This device can protect rolling shutters, or similar winding devices, and is made up of a 1
reel-type cable detector to be positioned in the shutter box.
The end of the cable, which can be extended up to 3.1 metres, is fastened to the base of
the rolling shutter. The device features a “movement/time excursion” cycle designed to
avoid false alarms due to accidental movements of the rolling shutter due to vibrations,
slow sliding and blasts of wind.
This detector is recommended to provide perimeter protection because it offers the
advantage of giving the alarm when the thief tries to lift the rolling shutter and thus
before he enters the home.
In order to use the detector, use the contact interface item HC/HS/HD/L/N/NT4612/12 or 2
item F482, which can control the impulses generated by the detector itself in case the
rolling shutter is forced open.
3
Configuration Front view

The sensor does not require configuration.

1 - Cable detector;
100 15
2 - BUS;
90 3 - Cable to be fastened to the rolling shutter.
ø4
93
77
3514 17
Wiring diagram
Balanced line
! Max. 3 detectors
item 3514
BT00042-b-UK
Z
N°
MOD
AUX
Possible T - C - +
Tamper
line
!
10.5 V
burglar alarm BUS Max. 30m
35mA

Glass-breaking detector 3516
Description
This glass breaking detector is positioned on the window to be protected using the
double-sided adhesive tape supplied. The break, or even a strong shock against
the glass, causes the emission of a noise with characteristic frequency which the
piezoelectric detector captures. A specific electronic circuit generates the alarm signal
which is interpreted by the contact interface (any for flush mounted installation or 3480
or F482) to which the detector must be connected. Sensor
For proper operation, do not connect more than three detectors in series to the clamps item 3516
of the interface.
Technical data
- Resistance: typical (normally closed): 14 Ω (max. 24 Ω)
in alarm (open): min. 1 MΩ
- Opening in alarm: 1-10 sec.
- Max. circuit voltage: 15 Vcc
- Max. circuit current: 15 mA
- Lightning suppression: 400 W per 1 m/sec.
- Operating temperature: (-18) – (50)°C
- Sensitivity: factory-set
- Fastening method: High adherence acrylic tape Contact interface
Configuration Burglar alarm BUS

40
The sensor does not require configuration.
Wiring diagram Dimensional data
120 32
Max 32 9
105
20m
Z
N°
25
32
AUX
T C
BUS
Max. no. 3
detectors in series
BT00040-b-UK

IR barriers for windows 3518-3518/50-3518/150-3519
Description
The device consists of 2 columns, one operating as a transmitter (TX), and the other
as a receiver (RX). Both have a microprocessor for the management of the alarm and 1
the synchronisation of the infrared beams. The table that follows shows the alarm 2
tripping times based on the rays broken:
OR: alarm with at least one ray broken (maximum sensitivity) AND: alarm with at least
two rays broken (minimum sensitivity).
Tripping Microswitch setting
time
OR AND
Rays
broken 100 200 100 200
only 1 2 sec. 2 sec. - -
2 not adjoining 1 sec. 1 sec. 1 sec. 1 sec.
2 adjoining or all 100 ms 200 ms 100 ms 200 ms 3
Anti insetti
Per installazioni con distanza tra RX e TX maggiori di 1 m, l’oscuramento di un solo raggio
se avviene direttamente su una delle barriere (per esempio a causa della presenza di
un insetto), non provoca allarme. L’allarme è però immediato se vengono interrotti altri
raggi.
Range and connection

The barriers have a maximum range of 12 m indoors and 6 m outdoors. They are
connected to the rest of the burglar-alarm system by contact interfaces. If the maximum
absorption of the burglar-alarm allows it, it is possible to connect one or more barriers
using interface 3480V12 o F482V12 (one interface per barrier, and only for item 3518/50
and 3518). In alternative, due to absorption limitation or when barriers 3518/150 and
3519 are installed, contact interfaces 3480 or F482 must be used for the connection to
the burglar-alarm system, as well as a power supply E47/12 for powering the barriers.
In this way up to a maximum of seven barriers 3518 or six barriers 3519 can be installed.
Legend
1 - Receiver;
Technical data 2 - Transmitter;
3 - IR emission zone.
- Range: 12 m high power indoors and 6 m outdoors, 3 m low
power both indoors and outdoors.
- Power supply: 12 Vdc +/- 2 Vdc
- Operating temperature: (-25) – (+55)°C
- Protection index: IP44
Dimensional data
BT00039-c-UK
10
Item Lenght A (mm)

A 3518 1080
3518/50 580
22.5
3518/150 1580
3519 2080
23

3518-3518/50-3518/150-3519
Configuration
The barriers are sold configured for operation in “AND” mode, with tripping time: 200ms.
To change the mode use the internal microswitch as shown in the following table:
OR 100ms OR 200ms
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
AND 100ms AND 200ms *
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
* default
Wiring diagram
Connection of the barrier to the item 3480V12 or F482V12

3480V12
(or DIN F482V12 version)
RX TX
S1
13,8 13,8
GND GND
PT0 PT0
Reset PT1 PT1
ALL0
ALL1
JP10
LED COM T COM C + -
If the max. consumption of the system allows it, it is possible to connect the 3518 or 3518/50 barrier directly to only one interface item 3480V12 or F482V12.
BT00039-c-UK
Connection table
MS1 Receiver (RX) MS1 Transmitter (TX)
1 +13.8V 1 +13.8V
2 GND 2 GND
3 PT0 Tamper C 3 PT0 Tamper C
4 PT1 Tamper N.C. 4 PT1 Tamper N.C.
5 All0 Alarm C
6 All1 Alarm N.C.
3518-3518/50-3518/150-3519
Configuration
The barriers are sold configured for operation in “AND” mode, with tripping time: 200ms.
To change the mode use the internal microswitch as shown in the following table:
OR 100ms OR 200ms
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
AND 100ms AND 200ms *
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
* default
Wiring diagram
Connection of the barrier to the item 3480V12 or F482V12

3480V12
(or DIN F482V12 version)
RX TX
S1
13,8 13,8
GND GND
PT0 PT0
Reset PT1 PT1
ALL0
ALL1
JP10
LED COM T COM C + -
If the max. consumption of the system allows it, it is possible to connect the 3518 or 3518/50 barrier directly to only one interface item 3480V12 or F482V12.
BT00039-c-UK
Connection table
MS1 Receiver (RX) MS1 Transmitter (TX)
1 +13.8V 1 +13.8V
2 GND 2 GND
3 PT0 Tamper C 3 PT0 Tamper C
4 PT1 Tamper N.C. 4 PT1 Tamper N.C.
5 All0 Alarm C
6 All1 Alarm N.C.
Alarm IR remote control 4050
Description
This easy to use IR remote control enables performing all the system arming and 1
disarming operations, and to confirm the settings. It’s coded automatically by the control
unit and has 4,000,000 code combinations. The specific programming procedure makes 2
it impossible to detect the code, thus assuring full safety. In any case, the user can easily
modify this code. Every system can recognise up to 30 remote controls when item L/N/ 3
NT4600/4 control unit is installed, or up to 50 remote controls with control unit item
3486. The remote controls can be programmed to work with several installations, thus
permitting, for instance, to control both the home and the office systems with a single
4
remote control.
With systems with control units item 3485/B and item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601, the
remote control does not operate. Front view

- Power supply: 3 Vdc (2 CR1616 battery) 1 - IR transmission zone;
- Max. no. of manoeuvres: 50.000 2 - LED for transmission confirmation;
3 - Control pushbutton;
4 - Key-ring.
Battery replacement
To replace the 2 remote control batteries proceed as shown in the following figures.
Note: dispose of exhausted batteries following current regulations. Do not insert a fully
charged battery and a partly charged battery inside the same remote control.
1
-
-
-
- - +
CR1616
-
+
+
BT00031-b-UK
K
CLAC
–
–
–
Outdoor siren 4072L-4072A
Description
These sirens have been designed so that they can be installed easily, are tamper resistant
and withstand atmospheric agents.
A tamper screw protects the sirens against pulling off/opening; when installing make
sure that the tamper screw is correctly positioned. 1
Outdoor siren item 4072L

If there is a power cut the battery inside the siren gives the whole system a minimum life 2
of 24 hours (as required by standard CEI 79-2).
This solution means that only one battery need to be used instead of the two of 3
traditional systems, thus reducing maintenance and increasing system reliability. The
central unit can be miniaturised with no effect on safety.
Front view
Outdoor siren item 4072A
This siren is a system optional and can only be installed in combination with power
supply item E47ADC.
It is useful for identifying which room the alarm is coming from but is not obligatory 4
because the system back-up battery will be connected to the power supply. The housing
inside the siren holds the self-power supply 12V 7Ah battery.
Technical data 5
- Max. absorption: 5 mA (item 4072A)
- Operating temperature: (-25) – (+55)°C
- Level of the signal emitted: 105 dB(A) at 3 metres Front view of the siren without external cover
- Frequency: 1500 Hz.
- Alarm autonomy: 15 min.
- Flashes per minute: 30 - 60 Legend
- Weight (without battery): 2.5 kg
- Protection index: IP34 1 - Plastic external cover;
- Self-protected from removal and opening 2 - Sound signaller;
- Battery protection fuse: F1: F5AL 3 - Sight signaller;
4 - Internal metal protection;
5 - Anti-foam grid to prevent penetration inside the casing.
Dimensional data
220 128
BT00057-b-UK
300

4072L-4072A
Configuration
Control card internal view
The external siren requires configuration of the progressive number. This is done by
means of the jumper (1) of the internal control card. A 1
If the system has 2 external sirens the jumper (1) of the second siren must be cut.
Internal siren card - connections

A Power supply-BUS twisted pair- (WHITE CABLE) B
B battery:
battery positive (RED cable)
battery negative (BLACK cable)
C loudspeaker (GREY cable)
C
Yellow LED Red LED
Yellow LED: if on check the Tamper Red LED: if on invert the BUS
protection polarity.
Installation procedure
1 - Remove the two screws (1) and take off the external cover (2). 3
2 - Remove the four screws (3) and pull out the internal protection cover (4). 3
3 - By using the drilling template (5), position the hole (6) near the wire-outlet pipe and 1
4
1
mark the position of the 5 holes. 2
NOTE: use a Ø 6 mm bit for drilling the holes.
3
3
5 7
8 4 - Insert the screw plastic plugs into the holes and partly tighten the top screws (7) and the
“tamper” screw (8).
6
5 - Adjust the “tamper” screw by using the notch (9) on the drilling template, as shown in the
picture.
If the installation or the adjustment of the tamper screw is carried out incorrectly, the
10 system will not work.
Wall 9 Wall 6 - Attach the siren to the two top screws (10).
Template
Tighten the two bottom screws (11). Tighten the four screws completely.
7 - Place the battery (12) 12V - 6.5-7.2 Ah (for item 4072A and 77673) or 12V - 12 Ah (for item
4072L) into the special housing without connecting the Faston clamps.
11 8 - On the siren internal board, connect the power supply pair (BUS) to the white wires (A), the
battery to the Red and Black wires (B) and the siren to the Grey wires (C).
BT00057-b-UK
12 A
B
Connections to the wires of the electronic card
If the red LED lights up, reverse
Colour Connection
the polarity of the BUS
White Telephone pair (BUS)
Before performing any White Telephone pair (BUS)
Yellow LED C operations on the siren, Red + Battery positive
Red LED switch the system to Black + Battery negative
maintenance mode. Grey Sound signaller
High voltage present near the Grey Sound signaller
flasher lamp.
Alarm radio remote control 348220
Description
Radio wave control device recommended for all those installations where an exposed
4
control device is not desired.
It can also used with the video door entry system, to control accesses. 1 2
The remote control must be used with the radio receiver item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4618.
Technical data
- Power supply: 3 V lithium battery - type CR2032
- Minimum battery duration: 2 years Front view
- Radio frequency: 868.35 MHz 3
(metal, concrete walls and metal plates reduce coverage) Legend
- Modulation: FSK 1 - Arming pushbutton;
2 - Disarming pushbutton;
3 - Key-ring;
4 - Control forwarding notification LED.
Dimensional data
48 13
60
Configuration
Pairing remote controls Cancelling remote controls
2. Press the programming pushbutton of the radio receiver for five seconds, until the red 2. Remove the power supply from the receiver.
BT00050-b-UK
LED comes on. 3. Press and hold the programming pushbutton while reconnecting the power supply
3. Press the arming pushbutton for 5 seconds. to the radio receiver.
4. If the pairing of the device has been performed correctly, the red LED of the radio 4. After 5 seconds the LED flashes orange. If the pushbutton is released at this time, only
receiver will go off. the remote controls are cancelled.
If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED flashes, it means 5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
that the device memory is full. off, cancellation has been completed.
5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2. 6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit “maintenance”
6. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit. mode.

348220
Battery replacement
1 2
4 5
6 7 8
BT00050-b-UK

12 V output power supply E47/12
Description
Device for the power supply of 12 V devices (e.g. IR barriers), designed for connection to
a 12 V - 6.5 - 24 Ah back-up battery.
The power supply can be installed in flush mounted switchboards item F115/8A,
or in suitable electric switchboards, with opening protected using the appropriate
1
anti-tampering device L4630.
For the 7.2 Ah battery it is recommended that the item F115/8B container is used, preset
for opening protection.
The twisted pair of the burglar-alarm system can be connected to the BUS clamps,
enabling the status of the battery to be read from the control unit display.
The power supply is a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI EN 60065,
which creates a SELV system (Safety Extra – Low Voltage) as described in the CEI 64-8
standard (ref. CEI 64-8-4 part 411.1.2.5).
The installation must be performed in accordance with current local regulations. 6 5 4 3 2
In general, the following rules must be followed:
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures; Front view
- The device must be kept away from water drips and sprays;
- Care must be taken not to obstruct the air vents;
- A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least
Legend
3 mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used to
disconnect the power supply from the mains, and to protect it. 1 - Battery status LED;
2 - 12 V device power supply connection clamps;
3 - Back-up battery connection clamps;
Technical data 4 - SCS BUS connection clamps (optional);
- Power supply: 230 Vac +/- 10% 50/60 Hz 5 - Tamper protection device socket;
- Max. absorption: 300 mA 6 - Network voltage connection clamps.
- Output voltage: 10.4-13.8 Vdc
- Maximum current supplied: 2 A Maximum current delivered by the devices
- Battery charging current: 400 mA
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C type of battery installed
- Protection index: IP30 7.2 Ah 12 Ah 24 Ah
duration in case 24 h 300 mA(*) 500 mA(*) 1A

Dimensional data of power line 15 h 480 mA 800 mA 1.6 A
Size: 8 DIN modules failure 8h 900 mA 1.5 A 2A
(*) In these cases the system complies with level 1 of CEI 79-2 standard.
BT00194-b-UK

Alarm power supply 230 V E47ADCN
Description
The power supply must be used to power the burglar-alarm system.
It supplies continuous 27 Vdc low voltage with a maximum current of 1 A, and is electronically
protected (without fuse) against short circuit and overload.
It’s a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI EN 60065, which provides
08W20
power supply to all the system devices connected to the system using the twisted 2-wire 12V
SCS/BUS cable, creating a SELV system (Safety Extra - Low Voltage) as described in the CEI 64-8 230 ± 10% V~ 50-60Hz
I MAX= 300 mA
standards (ref CEI 64-8-4 par 411.1.2.5). BUS 27V 1A BAT 400 mA
T=5÷40°C F1= F5AL
The power supply must be connected to the 12 Vdc 7.2 to 24 Ah battery to ensure the operation
of the system in case of power cut, to be installed inside an item F115/8B enclosure, protected
against unwanted opening.
To guarantee physical protection, the power supply unit must be installed in appropriate
electric switchboards, with opening protected using the appropriate Tamper device, item
L4630. 4 3 2 1
The device is enclosed in an 8 module DIN rail container, and its installation must be in
Front view
accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures, item F115/8A;
- The device must be kept away from water drips and sprays; Legend
- Care must be taken not to obstruct the air vents;
1 - Back-up battery connection clamps;
- A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least 3 mm
2 - Clamps for the connection of the SCS BUS;
must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used to disconnect the
3 - Tamper protection device socket;
power supply from the mains, and to protect it.
4 - Network voltage connection clamps.
Technical data Maximum current delivered by the devices

- SELV double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI EN 60065 standard type of battery installed
- Power supply: 230 Vac +/- 10% 50/60 Hz 7.2 Ah 12 Ah 24 Ah
- Maximum current supplied: 1A 24 h 110 mA(*) 190 mA(*) 380 mA
Duration in case of
- Battery charging current: 400 mA 15 h 180 mA 300 mA 600 mA
power line failure
- Dissipated power: 15 W 8h 340 mA 560 mA 700 mA
- Protection index: IP30 (*) In these cases the system complies with level 2 of CEI 79-2 standard.
Dimensional data
Size: 8 DIN modules
BT00059-b-UK

Relay actuator F481
Description
This device allows to repeat various types of alarms by means of a relay voltage-free
contacts, depending on its configuration.
It can be activated by a technical alarm interface, or by another signal through the
auxiliary channel (AUX). 3
Normally used for the control of gas/water safety solenoid valves, or third party devices
(telephone diallers, optical notifications, etc.).
The internal relay is in positive safety; this means that, in case of tampering, it switches
over the contacts.
By modifying the configuration, it is possible to change the safety mode of the internal
relay.
Related items
Technical alarm interfaces: 3841 and F483 1
Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS
Max. absorption: 20 mA 2. Relay active notification LED
Contact output: 24 V 1 A cosφ 0.4 3. Clamp for the connection of alarm devices
Configuration
The relay actuator requires the allocation of the progressive number within the group of
auxiliary devices (relay actuator and auxiliary channels interface) installed within the
system, of the auxiliary channel number, and the operating modes.
N°
This configurator assigns the progressive number inside the auxiliary unit.
Configurator 1 identifies the first auxiliary, configurator 2 identifies the second and so
AUX and MOD

BT00482-a-UK
Operating mode

AUX MOD
none none Repetition of the siren alarm Siren activation Silencing
none 1 System fault notification Activators flashing red LED notification
none 2 System status notification Activation Deactivation

F481
“Auxiliary” operating mode

AUX MOD
none 3 Signalling with memory of the activation of any auxiliary Any AUX device of the system Pressure of the needle key on any technical
channel of the system. Typical example: signalling with memory alarm interface with AUX configurator from
of any technical alarm. 1 to 9
auxiliary channel. Typical example: signalling with memory of a corresponding AUX channel active technical alarm
specific technical alarm.
none 4 Signalling without memory of the activation of any auxiliary Any AUX device of the system Pressure of the needle key on any technical
channel of the system. Typical example: signalling without alarm interface with AUX configurator from
memory of any technical alarm. 1 to 9
auxiliary channel. Typical example: signalling without memory corresponding AUX channel active technical alarm
of a specific technical alarm.
6 Come modo 4 con relé normalmente non eccitato
NOTES - The “S” key of the 3 module flush-mounted central unit or the disabling of the central unit with display,
- Modes 5 and 6 give the same operating results of modes 3 and 4. Their difference is that the relay is which main function is that of silencing the sirens during a technical alarm, disables the relay if this
normally not excited. This enables an opposite behaviour in case of tampering (cutting of the wire has been activated by the technical alarm interface configured in mode “0” or “4” (technical alarm).
or BUS short circuit). In fact in mode 3 and 4 a tampering excites the device (modes indicated in
the case of actuation of alarms such as the siren, the telephone communicator, etc.); however, in - In all modes there is an auxiliary activation also in case of pre-alarm (IR detector and contact interface
mode 5 and 6 the same tampering does not cause any actuation (modes indicated in case of safety with AUX configurators). Attention must therefore be paid when using the relay actuator (in modes
actuations such as electrical door locks etc.). The selection of the appropriate mode ensures total with memory or with sensitivity to any auxiliary channel) to avoid unwanted activations.
system safety.

N° 1 N° 2
AUX 1 AUX 1
MOD 6 MOD 4
Wiring diagram
Transformer
Axolute Gas detector
Livinglight
Matix
Solenoid A - +
valve
12 Vac
BT00482-b-UK
Relay Technical alarm

actuator interface
Burglar alarm BUS

Contact interface F482
Description
These interfaces are used for connecting 2 independent contact lines - which can be
balanced with a resistance, delayed on operation - and a protection Tamper line.
1
Made in the modular version with 2 DIN modules these devices can be used as an
alternative to interfaces item L/N/NT4612 and item AM5792 in case it is necessary to
centralise all interfaces in a board or in junction boxes. T - C1 - C2
LED indicators inside the devices indicate proper operation of the interface when testing 2
8
the system and when the burglar-alarm starts operating while the system is on. AR T .F482
In order to install the interface item F482 safely, it is recommended to use protected DIN
switchboards on the opening of a tamper contact to be connected to the appropriate
clamps on the interface. 7 3
For level 2 systems (CEI 79-2) the central unit must also be protected from removal
(tearing protection). T C2 C1
4
6
Technical data
5
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C Front view

- Size: 2 DIN modules 1. Contact line 2;
2. Contact line 1;
3. Line 2 activated LED;
5. Configurator socket;
6. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS;
7. Tamper active LED;
8. Tamper line.
Configuration
This interface module requires - for each of the two contact lines separate from each
other - the allocation of the assigned zone Z, the progressive number N of the detectors
situated in the same zone, the setup of the MOD protection mode of the contact line.
You will not need to configure both lines if one is not used.
T - C1 - C2
Z1
This configurator assigns the number of the assigned zone of the NC/NO magnetic
ART.F482
contact connected to line 1.
Configurator 1 gives the contact the assignment to zone 1, configurator 2 gives the
assignment to zone 2 and so forth, up to a maximum of 8 zones.
Z2
BT00046-c-UK
T C2 C1
N1
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second, and so
forth, up to a maximum of 9 contacts for each of the 8 zones. Z1 MOD2
N1 N2
N2 MOD1 Z2

F482
Configuration
MOD1 and MOD2 Specific mode for connection to wired rolling shutter sensors
A configurator is connected to this position for selecting the operating mode of the Configurator Sensor connected Pulses (*)
interface according to the type of contact or detector connected to the two lines. It
is possible to have balanced and unbalanced protection lines with the possibility to 8 Flush detector for rolling shutters 12 (about 20 cm)
produce the alarm with a delay as with zone 1. For details concerning the different - delayed**
operating modes, please refer to the table below. 9 Flush detector for rolling shutters 25 (about 45 cm)
- delayed**
none NC contacts Note (*): impulses generated by the detector according to the opening range, in cm, of
1 NC contacts - balanced the window before producing the alarm.
2 NC contacts - delayed *
** Follows the delay set up in the central unit:
3 NC contacts - delayed * - balanced this function operates only on central units item 3486, 3485/B and item HC/HD/HS/L/N/
4 NC contact and AUX event generation NT4601. With central unit item L/N/NT4600/1 the interface must be allocated to ZONE 1
5 NC contacts - balanced and AUX event generation with a time delay set (see central configuration).
6 NC contacts - delayed and AUX event generation
7 NC contacts - balanced delayed and AUX event generation
* Follows the delay set up in the central unit:
this function operates only on central units item 3486, 3485/B and item HC/HD/HS/L/N/
NT4601. With central unit item L/N/NT4600/1 the interface must be allocated to ZONE 1
with a time delay set (see central configuration).

If the contact interface is used in conjunction with the temperature control system to - Use of a burglar-alarm system integrated with the Temperature control
optimise energy saving, two different types of configurations will be possible: system: in this case, the contact interface is connected to the burglar-alarm system
BUS only, and communicates with the temperature control system BUS through the
- Use in the temperature control system only: The contact interface is directly F422 interface.
connected to the temperature control BUS. It autonomously and independently The interface must be configured in Z1/2 and N1/2 following the requirements and
manages the two C1 and C2 lines. Only the line used must be configured, and features of the burglar alarm system; only configurators with values 4 to 7 must
not both of them. Follow by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD1 and/ be connected to the MOD1/2 position, corresponding to the management of NC
or MOD2 sockets. Then configure the [Z1/2] and [N1/2] sockets, in order to assign contacts with generation of AUX event (see tables above). Also in this case, the
the address from 1 to 99 to the device within the system.The coupling between the actual coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control
interface contact line and the temperature control zone must be performed using zone must be performed using the TiThermo application.
the TiThermo application. For more information refer to the MY HOME Temperature control guide.
For more information refer to the MY HOME Temperature control guide.
Wiring diagram
Note: It is recommended to install the

* N.C. N.C. N.C.
10 kΩ ±5% 1/4W balancing resistance in
Balance resistance correspondence with the last line contact.
BT00046-c-UK
10 kΩ ± 5% 1/4 W
ART.F482
C2 C1
T - C1 - C2
* N.C. N.C. N.C.

T
Balance resistance
10 kΩ ± 5% 1/4 W Twisted, unshielded cable with
maximum length 30 metres
Tamper line
* It is recommended that no more than 3 rope sensors are installed on each line

12 V contact interface F482V12
Description
This interface gives the possibility of connecting the alarm system to two sensor lines
(that can be balanced with resistance, and/or which intervention can be delayed)
requiring 12 V power supply. 1
Produced in the DIN modular version, the device can be used for centralizing all the
interfaces inside a cabinet. Two LEDs confirm the correct operation of the interface
during system testing, and the tripping of the burglar-alarm system, when the system 7 2
is armed. To ensure that the interface is installed safely the use of DIN switchboards is
recommended, with their opening protected by a tamper contact connected to another
interface.
Technical data 6 3
Power supply: 27 Vdc from the BUS
Max. absorption: 6 mA to which the absorption of the sensor
connected must be added 4
Output: 12 V Max 100 mA

Size: 2 Basic modules 1. Contact line 2 or tamper;
2. Contact line 1;
4. Configurator socket;
5. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS;
7. Output 12 V
Configuration
For each of the two contact lines, independent from each other, the interface requires
the assigning of the Z zone it belong to, the N progressive number of the sensors present
within the same zone, and the setting of the MOD protection mode of the contact line.
- If the address of contact 2 is not configured, a Tamper line can be connected to
clamps C2 and COM; If not required, the C2 clamp must be shorted at the COM
contact.
Z1
This configurator assigns the number of the assigned zone of the NC magnetic contact
BT00481-a-UK
connected to line 1.
Z2
N1
zone determined in position Z1. Z1 MOD2
N1 N2
N2 MOD1 Z2
F482V12
Configuration
MOD1 and MOD2 Specific mode for connection to wired rolling shutter sensors
In this position a configurator is inserted for selecting the operating mode of the interface Configurator Sensor connected Pulses (**)
according to the type of contact or detector connected to the two lines.
It will be possible to create both balanced and non balanced protection lines, with the 8 Rolling shutter rope sensor - 12 (approx 20 cm)
possibility of generating a delayed alarm as for zone 1. For the details of the various delayed*
operating modes, refer to the table below. 9 Rolling shutter rope sensor - 25 (approx 45 cm)
delayed*
none NC contact Note (*): Follows the delay set on the central unit:
this function is operative only with central units with display. With flush mounted 3
1 NC contact - balanced
module central units, the interface must be allocated to ZONE 1, with a time delay set
2 NC contact - delayed *
(see central unit configuration).
3 NC contact - delayed * - balanced Note (**): pulses generated by the sensor depending on the degree of opening of the
4 NC contact and AUX event generation window, in cm, before the alarm is generated.
5 Balanced NC contact and AUX event generation
6 Delayed NC contact and AUX event generation
7 Balanced delayed NC contact and AUX event generation

If the contact interface is used in conjunction with the temperature control system to - Use of a burglar-alarm system integrated with the Temperature control system: in this
optimise energy saving, two different types of configurations will be possible: case, the contact interface is connected to the burglar-alarm system BUS only, and
communicates with the temperature control system BUS through the F422 interface.
- Use in the temperature control system only: The contact interface is directly connected The interface must be configured in Z1/2 and N1/2 following the requirements
to the temperature control BUS e gestisce in modo autonomo ed indipendente le and features of the burglar-alarm system; only configurators with values 4 to 7
due linee C1 e C2. Non è obbligatorio configurare entrambe le linee ma solo quella must be connected to the MOD1/2 position, corresponding to the management of
utilizzata. Inserire poi nella sede MOD1 e/o MOD2 il configuratore AUX. Then configure NC contacts with generation of AUX event (see tables above). Also in this case, the
sockets [Z1/2] and [N1/2] to assign the address 1 to 99 of the device within the system. actual coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control zone
The coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control zone must be performed using the TiThermo application. For more information refer to the
must be performed using the TiThermo application. For more information refer to the MY HOME Temperature control guide.
MY HOME Temperature control guide.
Wiring diagram
N.C. N.C. N.C.

*
Twisted, unshielded cable, with 30 Balance resistance

metre maximum length. 100 k ± 5% 1/4 W
BT00481-a-UK
N.C. N.C. N.C.

*
Balance resistance
100 k ± 5% 1/4 W
NOTE: it is recommended that the

100 k ± 5% 1/4 W balancing resistance
is installed by the last line contact.
* Do not install more than 3 rope sensors on each line

F482V12
Connection with IR 3518 - 3518/50 - 3518/150 - 3519 barriers
RX TX
S1
13,8 13,8
GND GND
PT0 PT0
PT1 PT1
ALL0
ALL1
Reset
JP10
LED
T C +
If the max absorption of the system allows it, it will be possible to directly connect the barrier to the interface only.
NOTE: If Z1 and N1 are configured, while leaving sockets Z2 and N2 empty, contact C2 will operate as a tamper line.
WARNING: use a 30 m max twisted, unshielded cable. BT00481-a-UK

Technical alarm interface F483
Descriptione
The technical alarm interface is used to receive signals from the outside (normally
analogue signals, like the closing/opening of a contact), converting them into digital
information for the BUS.
This information gives the possibility of differentiating between alarm notifications, 5
like the activation of the siren, or the telephone dialler, or the closure of the gas/water
solenoid valve.
The functions described can be obtained using a dedicated communication line between
the devices of the burglar alarm system, called auxiliary channel.
Up to 9 auxiliary channels are available for each system. They are assigned by
configuration of the device(s).
Related items 4
Relay actuator: F481 and 3479 3
Technical data
1
Max. absorption: 6 mA 2
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules
The technical alarm interface module requires the allocation of the progressive number 1. Configurator socket
within the group of auxiliary devices (relay actuator and auxiliary channels interface), 2. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS
the auxiliary channel number, and the operating modes. 3. Operation indication LED
4. Reset key
N°
This configurator assigns the progressive number inside the auxiliary unit. 5. Clamp for the connection of external devices
Configurator 1 identifies the first auxiliary, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on
for a maximum of 9 auxiliaries.
AUX and MOD

In combination the configurators in the AUX and MOD sockets assign the operating mode
on the basis of the following table.
Configurators
Description
AUX MOD
none none Technical alarm with normally closed (NC) contact
BT00484-a-UK
c) Reset key on the device itself pressed.
none 2 Anti-panic alarm with normally closed (NC) contact
Generates a burglar-alarm even with the system switched off and in any division condition.
Is silenced with the remote control.
none 4 Technical alarm with normally open (NO) contact
c) Reset key on the device itself pressed.

F483

Configurators
Relay opertating mode (description)
AUX MOD
1-9 none Technical alarm with NC contact and activation of the auxiliary channel
a) there is no longer an alarm,
1-9 1 Anti-burglary automation with NC contact
It activates the corresponding auxiliary channel without interfering with the status of the burglar-alarm system, therefore without
generating signals or alarms.
1-9 2 Anti-panic alarm with NC contact and activation of the auxiliary channel
Generates a burglar-alarm even with the system switched off and in any division condition. Is silenced with the remote control.
1-9 3 Connection between burglar-alarm and auxiliary channels (LINK)
It generates and activation of the corresponding auxiliary channel following a burglary/tampering alarm.
1-9 4 Technical alarm with NO contact and activation of the auxiliary channel
a) there is no longer an alarm,
N° 1 N° 2
AUX 1 AUX 1
MOD 6 MOD 4
Wiring diagram
Transformer
Axolute Gas detector
Livinglight
Matix
A - +
Solenoid valve
12 Vac
BT00484-a-UK
Relay Technical alarm

actuator interface
Burglar alarm BUS

Signalling interface F80CMD
Description
Item F80CMD is a signalling and control interface for the associated device, for example 1
the Stop&Go device item F80/SG.
It consists of two signalling relays, two contacts for the connection of two pushbuttons,
and one mode selector. 4
5 3
3 2 1
Technical data
RL2 RL1
- Power supply: from the associated device ART. F80CMD
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C P1 P2
4 5 6
Dimensional data
2
Configuration 6
Front view
Warning: All the configuration operations must be performed with item F80CMD
disconnected.
Configuration
1 - Open item F80CMD.
2 - Select the desired mode using a flat screwdriver. 1 - Mode selector, from 0 to 9;
2 - Contacts of pushbuttons P1 and P2;
3 - Contacts of signalling relays RL1 and RL2
RL2 RL1 (A1 load; maximum voltage 230 Vac);
4 - Signalling LED flashing red: data transfer;
3 2 1 5 - Signalling LED green: interface ON.
6 - Stop&Go connector.
3 2 1
RL2 RL1
ART. F80CMD
Signalling
P1
relayP2
4 5 6
Relay status depending on the signalled event
Mode Relay 1 Relay 2

0 Faulty Blocked
1 Faulty Not faulty
BT00258-b-UK
2 Blocked Not blocked

3 Open Closed
NOTE: if the set configuration mode is different from the expected ones, Stop&Go enters
mode =0
3 - Close item F80CMD.

4 - Wire the relays and the pushbuttons.
5 - Connect item F80CMD to the associated device.

F80CMD
Wiring diagram
1 - Connection for use with Stop&Go device, item F80/SG; 2 - Connection for use with Stop&Go device, item F80/SG and alarm event signalling
through the burglar-alarm system.
ASSOCIATED
ASSOCIATED DEVICE
DEVICE
Control Burglar alarm BUS

interface Aux channel interface
item F80CMD item HC/hd/HS/L/N/NT4615
3 2 1
6 5 4 N°
ART. F80CMD RL2 RL1 AUX
MOD
P1 P2
ART. F80CMD T - 1 0 2
4 5 6
1 2 3
A
Normally Normally
Open Closed
pushbutton pushbutton
BT00258-b-UK

Base central unit L/N/NT/HD/HC/HS4601
Description
1
It is possible to save up to 16 activation scenarios and use them based on actual the
needs.
The device can manage up to 10 automations split as follows:
- 1 actuated using an internal relay and coupled with intrusion events, technical alarms,
or system status;
- 9 coupled with arming, disarming, date and time events to generate separation
scenarios.
1 2 3
4 5 6
6
Main functions 3 7 8 9 C OK
- System self-learning and configuration on-screen display; 0 P

5
- can be controlled by transponder and keypad (20 keys maximum); 2
- independent management of each sensor; 4
- local contact in addition to those already present on the system (configurable);
- possibility of updating the firmware using the PC;
- detailed event memory and alarm only memory; Front view
menu, if the wrong key is entered for three consecutive times;
- association of a set user name to scenarios (max. 4), sensors and zones;
Legend
- each individual sensor can be deactivated by sending a command from the central unit
keypad; 1 - Graphic display: displays the messages which guide the programming operations and
- signalling of failed connection with: sensors, with the system disarmed, a signalling the events which have occurred (more information on the following page).
icon is displayed, with the system armed, an alarm is generated; 2 - Transponder reader: receives the burglar-alarm system switching on and off commands
- division of the zones directly from the central unit keypad; directly from the transponder keys.
- presence of a local automation and signalling relay. 3 - Alphanumeric keypad: allows the manual switching on of all those programming
Management of burglar-alarm functions 4 - C key: exit the current menu and the programming.
The central unit manages a total of 6 zones: 6 - Navigation keypad: navigate the menu.
- zone 0 is reserved for the activators (max. 9);
- zone 9 is reserved for the technical alarms/ auxiliaries (gas detector etc.). Technical data
Performs the following functions: - Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc
- manages the events communicated by the sensors and can determine if and when to - Max. absorption: 50 mA
give the alarm; - Operating teamperature: 5 – 40°C
- zones from 1 to 4 can be separated as the user requires; - Installation: wall mounted
- all the customising phases are guided and shown by means of the display; Dimensional data
- an automation can be coupled to the detection of a certain alarm, using the local relay:
for example, the switching on of a light, to confuse the intruder. Size: 3+3 modules
BT00189-b-UK

L/N/NT/HD/HC/HS4601
Legend
1 - Serial connector for the update of the firmware using a PC;
1 2 - Reset key;
8 PROG
3 - Local contact;
RESET 5 - Burglar alarm BUS;
2 6 - Relay for automation in case of alarm;
7 - Socket for tamper device item L4630;
HC4601−HS4601
8 - Battery housing.
7 _
C BUS 3
_
NC NA
ON
6 4
OFF
5
Rear view
Configuration
The central units do not need configurators. The functions can be set directly on the device
itself (keypad and display), or using the appropriate software TiSecurity Basic. Example
For detailed information refer to the corresponding manuals supplied with the products. Example of configuration performed on the central unit.
- Detection of devices
Software configuration
MAINTENANCE
The program enables acquiring the configuration on the central unit, saving it in a file to Language
be used to reinstate the configuration of the same, or to configure other central units. It Key program
System test
is also possible to update the permanent software of the central unit using new versions Learning
published by BTicino.
Select
Learning
MAINTENANCE
Language
Key program
System test
Learning
Press OK to confirm
LEARNING
After pressing OK, the
zone: 0 num.: 1 following screen appears
type: not exist
tamper: OFF
automatic
Press OK to start learning

BT00189-b-UK
Learning
ended
no problem
Vuoi inviare la
c o n f i g uNEXT
razione a
dispositivi di
(See
v ithe
s umanual
a l i z zof
a zthe
i ocentral
n e ? unit)
invia = OK
non invia = CLEAR

Predisporre
l impianto
Radio flooding detector HA/HB/L4619
Description
This device generates an alarm signal when the contacts of the corresponding sensor
make contact with water.
The signal is then processed by the alarm central unit, which activates the siren and the
Telephone communicator (if installed), for sending a telephone message.
Better protection can be ensured by installing a relay actuator within the Burglar-Alarm
system, which will order an electrovalve to shut off the main water supply in case of
flooding.
Two front pushbuttons can be used to interrupt the alarm signalling and to test the
operation of the sensor. 1
2
Technical data
- Power supply: Battery 3 V type CR2032
Front view 4
- Radio frequency: 868 MHz
(metal, concrete walls and metal plates reduce coverage) 3
- Modulation: FSK
CONFORMITY DECLARATION Flooding detector item HA4619 with front cover plate
Items HA/HB4619 and L4619 comply with the essential requirement of directive
1999/5/CE as they meet the following standards:
- ETSI EN301 489-3 Legend
- ETSI EN300 220-3
Year of approval of the CE mark in accordance with the above directive: 2007 1 - Reset key;
2 - LED: If the TEST or RESET pushbutton is press for 1 second, the LED will normally flash
twice; if the battery is exhausted the LED will only flash once;
3 - Flooding probe;
Dimensional data 4 - TEST pushbutton.
4 4 10
70
item L4619
115
BT00056-b-UK
100 100 10
93
92
item HA/HB4619

HA/HB/L4619
Configuration
WARNING: The configuration operations must be performed with the battery disconnected
Z
MOD
AUX
N
Z
Configurator 1 assigns zone 1 to the detector, configurator 2 assigns zone 2 and so on to a
maximum of 8 zones Configurator 9 assigns the device to the group of auxiliary devices.
N
zone.
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on
Internal view Z N° MOD AUX
MOD
Do not configure.
AUX
Pairing remote controls
1. Switch the system to “maintenance” mode.
2. Press the programming pushbutton of the radio receiver for five seconds, until the red
LED comes on.
3. Press the RESET key for 5 seconds.
4. If the pairing of the device has been performed correctly, the red LED of the radio
receiver will go off.
If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED flashes, it means
that the device memory is full.
5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2.
6. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit.
Cancelling remote controls

BT00056-b-UK
1. Switch the system to maintenance mode.

2. Remove the power supply from the receiver.
3. Press and hold the programming pushbutton while reconnecting the power supply
to the radio receiver.
4. After 5 seconds the LED flashes orange. If the pushbutton is released at this time, only
the remote controls are cancelled.
5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
off, cancellation has been completed.
6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit “maintenance”
mode.

BUS cable L4669S

The red SCS-BUS cable has been purposely designed and produced for the installation of - Insulation voltage: 300/500 V
burglar-alarm systems This cable is used for the distribution of the power supplies and - Can be buried: NO;
the operating signals to all system devices. - Reference standards: it complies with the tests required by the following regulations:
The cable consists of a red external sheath and two twisted flexible conductors, with a EN60811, EN50289, EN50290, EN60228, 50265-2-1,
section of 0.35 mm2, one yellow and one red. EN50395, EN50396 as described in the document
IMQ CPT 062;
The cable has 300/500 V insulation. Using the clear clamp protections included in all the - External sheath colour: red;
devices, the systems can also be installed in the same boxes and conduits as the power - External sheath diameter: 5.5 +/- 0.1 mm;
lines (110 Vac, 127 Vac and 230 Vac). - External sheath thickness: 0.8 mm;
- External sheath material: PVC (RZ);
WARNING - Number of internal conductors: 2 unshielded twisted flexible conductors with sheath;
Although the construction of the cable ensures 300/500 V category electric insulation, - Colour of internal conductors: white and blue;
correct system operation is not guaranteed in the following cases, when installed - Sheath thickness of internal conductors: 0.60 mm;
together with the power cables: - Sheath diameter of internal conductors: PVC (R2);
• in industrial environments; - Conductor materials: red electrolytic copper;
• in residential/service sector environments, when the power cables provide power - Conductor section: 0.35 mmq (12 x 0.20 mmq);
supply to one of the following: - Operating temperature: 15 - 70°C;
• lifts - Maximum short circuit temperature: 150°C;
• inverter - Coil length: 100 m.
• pumps
• motors and controlled motors
• metal iodines lamps.
The SCS-BUS cable is not suitable for underground installation.

BT00256-b-UK

Passive IR detector N4640-N4640B
Description
The passive IR detector is of volumetric type and sensible to movement of warm bodies.
The volume of the protected zone is divided into 14 beams distributed on 3 levels. The
detector works in two different ways: instantaneous or with impulse calculation, in order
to reduce the possibility of false alarms.
It’s available in the version with reduced sizes and is suitable for wall mounted 1
installation in systems preset or not preset for traditional sensors. For the sensor item
N4640 the covering range can be adjusted on three levels (3, 6, or 9 metres), while the
sensor item N4640B has a fixed sensitivity level (6 metres). 2
Technical data
- Max. absorption: 4.5 mA Front view
Covering range Legend

30° 30° 1 - Alarm warning LED;
105° 2 - Fresnel lens.
A B A
B B
A A Dimensional data
B B
A A
35 23
12
10
8
6 C C
m 4 C
2
molla
tamper
60
1,20 A Surface

m
C B mounted
$ % $
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 % %
$ $
MA X MA X % %
$ $

$
%
Slanting P

&
& &
& installation
P

0$; 0$;
BT00038-b-UK


N4640-N4640B
Configuration N4640
Infrared ray detectors require assignment of the appropriate zones and the progressive Z
number of the sensors in the zone, setting of the detection mode and possibly N°
assignment of an auxiliary prealarm channel. MOD
AUX
Z
N°
zone.
Internal view
MOD
This configurator sets the sensor detection mode.
It can be used, for EXAMPLE, when the device is directed towards a possible source of
disturbance (window or radiator), and its position cannot be changed.
Configurator Mode
0 1st level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse)
1 1st level of sensitivity (2 high sensitivity impulses)
2 2nd level of sensitivity (1 medium sensitivity impulse)
3 3rd level of sensitivity (1 low sensitivity impulse)
4 1st level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse),
but with delay.
5 1st level of sensitivity (2 high sensitivity impulses),
but with delay.
6 2nd level of sensitivity (1 medium sensitivity impulse),
but with delay.
7 3rd level of sensitivity (1 low sensitivity impulse),
but with delay.
AUX Auxiliary function activation. The device, in any system
status (enabled or disabled), sends an auxiliary alarm
to the channel specified in the AUX position. If the
assigned zone is divided, the auxiliary command will
be disabled.
High sensitivity = maximum coverage 9 metres
Medium sensitivity = maximum coverage 6 metres
Low sensitivity = maximum coverage 3 metres
BT00038-b-UK
AUX
If the AUX configurator has been connected to the MOD position, the 1 to 9 value of
the configurator in this position activates the auxiliary function assigned to the 1 to 9
number of the auxiliary channel.
If no configurator, or one of the configurators from 1 to 7 is connected to the MOD

position, the device only activates the auxiliary function when the system is disarmed.

N4640-N4640B
Configuration N4640
AUTOMATION mode – Timed control:
Passive IR detectors can generate and send an ON timed control directly to one or more
actuators.
of the actuator to control respectively.
To the MOD position connect the ON configurator to enable the time delay function.
The switching ON period is set by connecting numerical configurators 1 to 9 to the AUX
position as shown in the following table:
AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Time 1 min. 2 min. 3 min. 4 min. 5 min. 15 min. 30 sec. 0.5 sec 2 sec.
Example of configuration
IR detector Actuator
5 ON 4 1
A
41
PL
M
G1
G2
L L1
item L4671/1
AUTOMATION mode – GENERIC CONTROL

USING AUXILIARY CHANNELS:
In this case, the actuator is managed by a control device, item H/L4651M2 or AM5831M2,
which, based on its own operating mode, set in its own M position, activates the actuator
with address set in A and PL.
The communication between the detector and the associated control device item H/
L4651M2 or AM5831M2 is established by defining an auxiliary channel that has been
configured in the IR detector by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD position,
auxiliary channel. Obviously, in order to univocally establish the auxiliary channel, also
the AUX position of the control must have the same configurator as the IR detector.
BT00038-b-UK

N4640-N4640B
Configuration item N4640B

This device is the model with preset sensor sensitivity level, item N4640 and it only
performs burglar-alarm system functions as it does not manage auxiliary channels Z
or automation modes; it requires allocation of the zone it belongs to, the progressive N°
number of the sensors within the zone, and the setting of the detection mode. MOD
Z
N°
zone.
MOD
Configurator Mode
0 1 pulse
1 pulse counter(1)
2 1 pulse with delay
3 pulse counter with delay
The sensor generates an alarm signal based on the detection performed during a
(1)
period of 30 seconds.
BT00038-b-UK

Indoor siren HC/HD/HS/N/NT4070
Description
This siren is fitted with battery (item 3507/6); up to a maximum of 3 indoor sirens can be
installed inside the protected area.
It can be installed in flush mounted boxes, item 506E. The indoor siren can be
programmed for signalling intrusion alarms through a continuous sound (frequency
1880Hz) and/or auxiliary alarms through a modulated sound.
This siren is self-protected against opening and rip-off by means of a self-adjusting
tampering device. Do not use batteries different from the ones indicated.
Technical data
- Self powering battery: item 3507/6
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C Front view
- Level of the signal emitted: 105 dB(A) at 3 metres
- Frequency: 1880 Hz.
Dimensional data
115 44
115
Configuration
The indoor siren requires assignment of the progressive number and the operating
mode. It gives an intermittent sound to signal the activation of any one of the auxiliary
channels generated by an auxiliary channel interface in mode 0 and 4 (technical alarm).
No.
N°
N°
MOD MOD
This configurator assigns the progressive number in the internal siren unit.
No configurator or configurator 1 identifies the first siren, configurator 2 the second and
configurator 3 the third.
NOTE: Systems with external siren 4072A:

If the system has an external siren 4072A, it must be considered as siren No. 1; if there
are two, they must be considered as No. 1 and No. 2.
The internal sirens will be counted in sequence. There must be a maximum of 3 sirens Rear view
BT00058-b-UK
(internal and external).
MOD
This configurator assigns the signalling mode based on the type of alarm received.
No configurator: anti-intrusion alarm and technical alarm enabled.
Configuratore 1: anti-intrusion alarm enabled and technical alarm disabled. Configurator 5: anti-intrusion alarm enabled and technical alarm disabled.System
Configurator 2: anti-intrusion alarm disabled and technical alarm enabled. ON/OFF sound signal.
Configurator 4: anti-intrusion alarm and technical alarm enabled. System ON/OFF Configurator 6: anti-intrusion alarm disabled and technical alarm enabled. System
sound signal. ON/OFF sound signal.

4-zone central unit L/N/NT4600/4
Description
The 4-zone central unit contains all system controlling functions and is contained in 3
modules only; in order to facilitate the comprehension of its functioning, it can ideally be IR receiver
divided into 3 separate sections: activation, dividing and system control.
Activation section
This section carries out the activation function; visible are the IR receiver and 2 LEDs that Indication armed/
report the system status as follows: disarmed system
- green LED on, system disarmed; Alarm warning
- red LED on, system has detected an alarm; Front view
- red LED flashing, the battery inside the external siren is down, not connected or
defective.
LED and pushbutton for LED and pushbutton for
Dividing section controlling of zone 1 controlling of zone 2
In this section, there are four pushbuttons and four LEDs for controlling those zones into which
the system can be divided.
By pressing one of the pushbuttons, the corresponding zone is armed/disarmed.
Within four seconds after the last pressure, the separation made must be confirmed by
transmitting an impulse by means of the remote control.
Should this not take place, then the previous condition is automatically restored.
Red LEDs on indicate that the zones are active, whereas red LEDs off show that they are disarmed.
No more than 3 zones at the same time can be excluded.
At least one zone must be enabled. LED and pushbutton for LED and pushbutton for
controlling of zone 3 controlling of zone 4
System control section

In this section are visible LEDs and pushbuttons used for monitoring the central unit Pushbutton for selection of functions
and the system. Warning “24H alarm” Indication
The green LED “~” on shows that the system is powered. The red LED “24h” on shows that “powered”
a tampering alarm (24H alarm) has been detected.
The red LED “Aux” on shows that an alarm has been detected from an auxiliary channels Indication “system
interface. in test phase”
The red LEDs “24h” and “Aux” flashing alternatively show that the central unit is in
maintenance condition and thus non active.
Indication “central unit
The yellow LED “Test” on shows that the system is in a test phase.
in remote controls
A yellow LED “Prog” on shows that the central unit is in the remote controls’ programming
programming phase”
phase. Microswitch for
The pushbutton “S” and the microswitch “P” in combination with the remote control are programming of remote controls
used for selecting the different functions.
Indication “auxiliary alarm”
Rear panel
On the back of the central unit are visible:
- connection clamps
BT00024-b-UK
- ON/OFF switch, that makes it possible to put the central unit in maintenance mode Alarm
- Configurator sockets for “ALARM” and “ZONE 1” times to adjust the alarm time and the Configurators
Zone 1
delay of the last output/first input.
Technical data Clamp for burglar alarm

BUS
- Max. absorption: 25 mA ON/OFF
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C switch
Rear view

L/N/NT4600/4
Dimensional data
4-zone central unit
Size: 3 modules
Configuration Alarm
By means of configurators the system central unit can set the following timings.
ALARM
This configurator sets the length of the alarm time (siren sound).
To select the times use the configurators as shown in the table below:
Configurator No. Alarm length

no configurator 0’ (only a short pulse)
1 1’
2 2’
3 3’ Zone 1
4 4’
5 5’
6 1’ 30”
7 2’ 30’’
8 3’ 30”
Example
9 10’
2
NotE: To choose the alarm time check the local regulations. 2
Zone 1 1
This configurator sets the delay times for activating the “ZONE 1” sensors (“Last output/ 1
first input” delay).
To select the time use the configurators as shown in the table below:
Configurator position Output time Input time

none 0” (instant) 0” (instant)
1 30” 7”
2 30” 15”
3 30” 30”
4 2’ 2’
Example
Alarm time (siren sound) 2 minutes and last output/first input delay time 30” and 7”
BT00024-b-UK
respectively.
Configurator position Value

ALARM 2
ZONE 1 1

IR divider
for zones 1 – 4 HS/HC/HD/L/N/NT4603/4
Description
1
The IR divider carries out the function of arming and disarming the system by means of the
IR remote control and to activate or disactivate the 4 zones.
It allows repeating the functions of the main central unit in several places of the installation,
in case of big houses.
It has the same functions described in the section “dividing” of the 4-zone central unit. N°
7 2
LED
BIP 6 3
Technical data
- Max. absorption: 15 mA Front view 5 4

Size: 2 modules 1 - IR receiverN°zone;
LED
2 - LED and pushbutton
BIP for controlling of zone 2;
3 - LED and pushbutton for controlling of zone 4;
4 - Indication “System ON/OFF”;
5 - Alarm warning;
7 - LED and pushbutton for controlling of zone 1.
Configuration
The zones 1 to 4 divider is part of the group of activators, and therefore requires setting of No.
N°N°
the progressive number, as well as the possibility of programming the special functions. LED
LED LED
BIP
BIP
BEEP
N°
This configurator assigns the progressive number to the activator within the group.
Clamp for burglar-alarm BUS
Configurator 1 will identify the first device, configurator 2 will identify the second and so
on to a maximum of 9 activators (expanders, dividers or activators).
Rear view
LED
This configurator sets the operating mode of the luminous signals given by the LED.
In fact, the signals can be concealed when, as an example, the device is installed in a Example
bedroom and the light emitted by the LED is unwelcome. N°
LED
3
No configurator – the LED will indicate the active zones by switching on permanently. BIP
N°
Configurator 1 – the LED will only light up when any one of the pushbuttons is pressed LED
BIP
for 4 seconds.
For more information concerning the indications given by the LED in the various modes 1
of operation consult the “Instructions for use” manual.
BEEP
This configurator enables or disables the audible signal the device gives when it receives
BT00027-b-UK
a signal from a remote control. Example

No configurator – the signalling is enabled. N°
Configuration
LED of zones 1 to 4 divider.
Configurator 1 – the signalling is disabled. BIP
Third connecting key device with optical signal permanently enabled and audible signal
disabled.

N° 3
LED none
BEEP 1
3
N°
LED
BIP
Expander 5 – 8 zones HS/HC/HD/L/N/NT4603/8-AM5783/8
Description
1 2
This device can be used with the 4 zone central unit item L/N/NT 4600/4. or with advanced
central units items 3485 and 3486, to ensure a total coverage of the system with 8 separable
zones. It performs the same functions of the dividing section of the “4-zone central unit”,
item L/N/NT4600/4. By pressing one of the pushbuttons, the corresponding zone is armed/
disarmed. Within four seconds from the last pressure, the separation performed must be
confirmed by moving a transponder or a remote control saved in the central unit to a zone 5 6
1-4 separator. Should this not take place, then the previous condition is automatically 7 8
restored. Red LEDs on indicate that the zones are active, whereas red LEDs off show that
they are disarmed.
Technical data
- Max. absorption: 10 mA Front view 4 3

Size: 2 modules 1 - LED and pushbutton for controlling of zone 5;
Configuration
The zones 5 to 8 expander is part of the group of activators ant therefore requires setting
of the progressive number with the possibility of programming the special functions.
N°
This configurator assigns the progressive number within the group of activators. N° No.
LED
Configurator 1 will identify the first device, configurator 2 will identify the second and so LED
on to a maximum of 9 connecting key devices (expanders, dividers or activators).
LED Clamp for burglar

This configurator sets the operating mode of the luminous signals given by the LED. alarm BUS
In fact, the signals can be concealed when, as an example, the device is installed in a
bedroom and the light emitted by the LED is unwelcome. Rear view
No configurator – the LED will indicate the active zones by switching on permanently.
Configurator 1 – the LED will only light up when any one of the pushbuttons is pressed
for 4 seconds. N°
LED
BT00029-b-UK

IR activator HS/HC/HD/L/N/NT4604
Description
The activator performs the function of arming and disarming the system by means of the
remote control and offers the same possibilities described for the connecting section of
the 4-zone central unit. 3
The luminous indications given by the LEDs on the front part and the audible signal given
on each system state change can be disabled. It can be enabled for the fixed division of
zones pre-set in the configuration stage.
The activator, configured as auxiliary device (configurator 1-9 in the AUX socket) works
in an alternative way to the burglar-alarm system, and therefore does not arm/disarm
the system.
In this mode, using the remote control, it activates the corresponding auxiliary control,
2 1
enabling to obtain actuations that are typical of access control systems.
Technical data

N°
Dimensional data MOD
P.N°
Size: 2 modules AUX
Configuration
4
The activator must be allocated a progressive number It can also program the special
functions.
N°
This configurator assigns the progressive number to the activator within the group.
Configurator 1 will identify the first device, configurator 2 will identify the second and so
on to a maximum of 9 activator devices (activators, dividers or expanders). Legend
1. LED indicating system status;
MOD 2. LED indicating the alarm system status;
This configurator sets the operating mode of the signals given by the LED (1) and enables 3. IR receiver zone;
or disables the audible signal emitted by the activator when it receives a signal from a 4. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS.
remote control.
Configurator value BEEP enabling LED ON

none YES YES
1 YES NO
2 4” YES
3 4” NO
P. N°
BT00030-b-UK
This configurator sets the activation of fixed system zones on the basis of the number
assigned.
The divider selected is activated or deactivated by using the remote control to operate
the activator.
In this way, for example, a system with many zones can be divided into “day zone” and
“night zone” which can be automatically divided by means of the connecting key.
Example
No configurator: system on/off.
Configurator 1: zone 1 active, remaining zones not active.
Configurator 6: zones 1 to 6 active, remaining zones not active.
When switched off by the remote control, the previous division is reset.
HS/HC/HD/L/N/NT4604
AUX
auxiliary channel. It therefore enables controlling auxiliary actuator devices, provided that
they have been configured using the same auxiliary channel.
WARNING: the AUX configurator, and in alternative the P.N° configurator, which assigns
instead a burglar-alarm function
Example
Example: configuration of an activator.
Third activator device with optical signalling enabled and audible signalling disabled,
with assignment, by the remote control, of fixed active zones (from 1 to 5 = day zone) of
the system and separation of the remaining zones (from 6 to 8 = night zone).

N° 3
MOD 1
P.N° 5
AUX none
Example
Example of activator with auxiliary configuration; third activator device with optic
signalling enabled and audible signal disabled, with allocation, both with the system
armed and disarmed, of auxiliary channel no. 4 (for example the opening of an electrical
door lock).

N° 3
MOD 1
P.N° none
AUX 4 BT00030-b-UK

Keylock disconnector HS/HC/HD/L/N/NT4605-AM5785
Description
This module makes it possible to disarm and block in the current state the burglar-alarm
system. It can be used in emergency situations, if the remote controls are lost. 1
The mechanical key is a safety key with 10,000 combinations and can be extracted from
the lock both in position ON and OFF.
This device requires no configuration. ON
2
Technical data OFF
- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 3

Front view
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
This device requires no configuration. 1 - Lock closing lid;
2 - Lock for safety mechanical key;
3 - LED indicating blocked and disarmed system.
BT00032-b-UK

Keypad activator HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4606-AM5786
Description
1 2 3
This device arms or disarms the system by keying a secret code previously stored in burglar-
alarm systems central units with display, or in three module flush mounted central units.
4 5 6
By pressing two pushbuttons (‘o¬’ and ‘P’) and entering the secret code, the system can be
disarmed, while at the same time sending a silent alarm (robbery function).
7 8 9
Indications supplied by the LED and the Buzzer 0 P 1

(sound signalling device) 2
Event Green LED Red LED Buzzer Front view
Keying-in Flashing - Active
Code entering - - Active
System armed OFF OFF -

5 3
System disarmed ON OFF -
Wrong code entered Flashing (5s) ON -
Intrusion alarm OFF ON -
4
24 hour alarm ON/OFF ON -
Rear view
Technical data
Legend
- Max. absorption: 5.5 mA
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C 1 - Red LED: alarm status;
2 - Green LED: system status
Dimensional data OFF: ON, ON: OFF;
Size: 2 modules 3 - Configurator socket;
4 - BUS;
Configuration 5 - Anti-tamper device socket.
Z
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone (from 1 to 8) in the “group” Configuration for use with central unit item L/N/NT4600/4
of devices (any free zone in the system). In order for the keypad to operate as activator of the system with three-module central
To configure it as belonging to the activator group, no configurator must be connected. unit, it will be necessary to first program the code in the central unit itself following the
Configurator 9 assigns the device to the “group” of auxiliary devices (Aux channel procedure below:
interface or Relay actuator). 1. Place the central unit in maintenance mode by moving the back slide switch to the
OFF position;
N° 2. Press P and check that the yellow LED comes on (PROG);
This configurator assigns the progressive number to the activator within the group. 3. Program the remote controls first (see chapter STARTING AND TESTING);
Configurator 1 identifies the first device, configurator 2 identifies the second, and so 4. Enter ‘o¬’ + the desired 5 digit code;
forth, up to a maximum of 9 activators (dividers, expanders or activators). 5. Ensure that a long beep is emitted by the keypad, and that the central unit responds
with a short beep;
MOD 6. To memorize further codes, or several keypads with different codes, repeat 4 and 5;
The configurator of this location specifies the type of control unit installed in the system. 7. Once the last code has been set, press S on the central unit (the yellow PROG LED goes
BT00026-b-UK
off) and move the central unit slide switch back to the ON position;
Central unit used Configurator value 8. Send a pulse signal using the IR remote control;
3486 - 3485/B 0 9. Perform some arming/disarming tests.
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601
L/N/NT4600/4 1 Disabling the keypad BUZZER when keys are pressed
Irrespective of the type of central unit installed, the keypad sound can be enabled/
NOTE: When used with central units with display, the secret code is the one saved in disabled. To do this press key 1 for 5 seconds, until the activator beeps and flashes
the central units themselves (maximum 25 or 50 codes depending on the type of central quickly twice.
unit). If used with the flush mounted central unit, item L/N/NT4600/4, the code must be To switch the sound back on repeat the same procedure.
programmed in the central unit itself. In this case, up to 29 codes must be saved.

1-4 zone transponder
divider HS/HC/HD/L/N/NT4607/4-AM5787/4
Description
1
This device is used to arm, disarm, and separate the zones of the system by placing a
transponder badge (item 3530S and item 3540 previously stored in the central unit) in
front of the zone transponder badge receiver.
When used in an automation system it performs the control function for the management
of scenarios. 7 2
By pressing one of the pushbuttons, the corresponding zone is armed/disarmed.
Within four seconds from the last pressure, the separation performed must be confirmed 6 3
by moving a transponder saved in the central unit close to the device.
Should this not take place, then the previous condition is automatically restored. Red LEDs
on indicate that the zones are active, whereas red LEDs off show that they are disarmed.
Front view 5 4

- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1 - Transponder badge receiver zone;
- Max. absorption: 15 mA 2 - LED and pushbutton for controlling of zone 2;
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C 3 - LED and pushbutton for controlling of zone 4;
4 - Indication “System ON/OFF”;
5 - Alarm warning;
Dimensional data 6 - LED and pushbutton for controlling of zone 3;
Size: 2 modules
Configuration
BURGLAR-ALARM mode:
Since this item belongs to the activator group, it needs to be set up with the number of Z
the “group” assigned and the progressive number of the devices in the “group”. It can also =
No.
1
be programmed to perform Automation functions (scenario management). 02'
MOD
$8;
See Automation “MY HOME” guide for details. AUX
Z Clamp for burglar
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone (from 1 to 8) in the “group” alarm BUS
of devices (any free zone in the system). To configure it as belonging to the activator
group, no configurator must be inserted. Rear view
N°
This configurator assigns the progressive number within the group of activators.
=
Configurator 1 identifies the first device, configurator 2 identifies the second, and so 1
Central unit Configurator
02' LED ON Enabling
forth, up to a maximum of 9 activators (dividers, expanders or activators). $8;
used value BEEP
NOTE: If all 9 permitted devices have already been assigned to the activator group,
it could be possible to assign to configurator Z (zone it belongs to) a value between 3486 none YES YES
1 and 9, taking into account the progressive number. 3485/B 1 NO YES
HD/HC/HS/L/N/
NT4601 2 YES NO
MOD
BT00028-b-UK
It assigns the modes of the audible signals (BEEP) and luminous signals (LED ON) 3 NO NO
provided by the divider when controlled by the transponder; it is used as a activators/ L/N/NT4600/1 4 YES YES
disconnector of the “Burglar-alarm” system. A/AM5780/1 5 NO YES
=
6 1
02'
YES NO
$8;
7 NO NO
AUX
Position not configurable for the “Burglar-alarm” function; configure only if it is
necessary to enable the device for Automation functions (management of the scenarios
stored in the unit or scenario module).
=
HS/HC/HD/L/N/NT4607/4-AM5787/4
Configuration
AUTOMATION mode – SCENARIO MANAGEMENT:
Z
=
1 No.
Z 02'
$8; MOD
This configurator with value 0-9 coincides with the A position of the scenario module.
AUX
N° Clamp for burglar
This configurator with value 1-9 coincides with the PL position of the scenario module. alarm BUS
MOD
Assigns the operating mode. Connect configurator 9.
AUX
It assigns one of the scenarios programmed on the scenario module to the four =
1
pushbuttons (SCE = 1-9) as per the table. 02'
$8;
Pushbutton no. Associated scenario no.

pushbutton 1 SCE
pushbutton 2 SCE + 1
Example
=
If configurator 3 is connected to AUX, use pushbutton 1 to recall scenario no. 3, pushbutton 1
02'
2 to recall scenario no. 4, pushbutton 3 to recall scenario no. 5, and pushbutton 4 to recall $8;
scenario no. 6
Pairing transponders Erasing the memory

1. Move the “programming block” switch to the open padlock and then: 1. Move the “programming block” to the open padlock.
2. Press pushbuttons 1 and 4 at the same time for more than 5 seconds until the alarm 2. Press pushbuttons 1 and 4 at the same time for more than 10 seconds and check that
LED status comes on for 0.5 second and an audible signal is heard. the LED flashes slowly 4 times, and that there is an audible signal.
=
3. Release pushbuttons 1 and 4. 3. Release pushbuttons
1 1 and 4.
02'
$8;
4. Move the transponder being programmed close to the device: 4. The transponder zones activator will remain in programming mode, ready for a new
- if the transponder has been correctly saved the alarm status LED will slowly flash programming sequence.
twice and an audible signal will be heard. Go to step 6.
- if the code is already in the memory there will be 2 audible signals and the led will 5. Move the switch back to the closed padlock position to exit the erasing procedure.
flash quickly twice.
- if the memory is full there will be 5 audible signals and the LED will flash quickly 5
times.
5. To store other transponders repeat the procedure in step 4, otherwise go to step 6.

BT00028-b-UK
6. Move the “programming block” switch back on the closed padlock to exit
programming. Otherwise the device will exit programming mode after 1 minute of
inactivity.

Transponder reader HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4607-AM5787
Description
The transponder reader is a device which activates when the Transponder badge is in its
immediate vicinity (1-2 cm). The signal generated by the approach of the badge is then
transferred to the bus (BUS cable item L4669S). The transponder reader is fitted in the
wire burglar-alarm system and works like a traditional activator; it is thus connected to
the BUS cable like any other burglar-alarm device.
The transponder does not need a power supply battery. When compared with the
1 2
traditional remote control, the “transponder reader/transponder system offers better
safety due to the code encryption system. Also, the possibility of saving up to 50 badges Front view
(depending on the central unit used) offers better flexibility in the management of
the system, particularly in those environments (companies, offices, shops), where the
number of people enabled to use the system is high and changes regularly.
Technical data

Size: 2 modules 1 - Three-colour LED for operation indications;
2 - Reset pushbutton (NOT ACTIVE).
Configuration
BURGLAR-ALARM mode:
The transponder reader used as burglar-alarm system activator/disconnector must Z Z
N°
be assigned to the group of activator; it thus requests the assignment of the “group” MOD No.
AUX
number attributed (see below) and the progressive number of the devices in the “group”. MOD
Z Clamp for burglar

This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone in the “group” of devices alarm BUS
(any free zone in the system). To configure it as belonging to the group of activators, no
configurator must be inserted. Rear view
- Configurators 1, 8 instead would assign the transponder reader to the sensor (IR
detectors or contact interface) “group” while configurator 9 would assign it to the
“group” of auxiliary devices (auxiliary channel interface or relay actuator). NOTE: when all the 9N°Z devices allowed have already been inserted in the group of
MOD
activators, a value between
AUX 1 and 9 could be assigned to configurator Z (appropriate
N° zone) taking account of the progressive No.
This configurator assigns the progressive number of the transponder reader inside the
zone attributed. Configurator 1 identifies the first reader-transponder, configurator 2
the second and so on until a maximum of 9 receiver devices for each of the zones.
MOD
BT00033-b-UK
Assigns the operating mode. It assigns the operating mode. In order for it to operate
as activator, use configurator 1 with flush mounted central units item 4600/4, and
configurator 0 for other central units. Z
N°
The transponder is saved in the burglar-alarm central unit. The maximum number that MOD
AUX
can be managed is:
- 29 with flush mounted central unit, item L/N/NT4600/4.
- 50 with central unit with display, item 3486 or 3485.
- 20 with central unit with display, item 3485B or HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601.
940 MY HOME Technical sheets – Burglar alarm Z

N°
MOD
AUX
Z
N°
MOD
AUX
Z
N°
MOD
AUX
Z
N°
MOD
AUX
Z
N°
MOD
AUX
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4607-AM5787
Configuration
Night function: when the system is disconnected, it is possible to activate the zones up
to the numeric value of the configurator in AUX position. This function can be enabled
with configurator 7 in MOD position if central units with a display are used or with
Z
configurator 8 if flush mounted central units item L/N/NT4600/4 are used. N°
MOD
AUX AUX
Z
Example: MOD = 7, AUX = 3 N°
MOD
In this case, when the burglar-alarm with the central unit and communicator are AUX
Z
activated, only the first three zones will be enabled. N°
MOD
AUX
Z
AUX N°
MOD
This configurator activates the activator auxiliary modes of operation, assigning an AUX
auxiliary channel.
To use the activator as auxiliary device, refer to the My Home application guide.
Example Example
configured in this way the transponder reader works as 4th device of the activator group. Z
N° 4
MOD
AUX
Z
N°Z
N°
4 1
MOD
MOD
AUX
Z none AUX
1
Z
N°
N 4 MOD
AUX
MOD 1
AUX none
Use with central unit item L/N/NT4600/4

Z
N°
The transponder (badge) programming operation is necessary in order for it to work as a 2) Program the IR remoteMOD controls first;
normal infrared remote control, item 4050. 3) Now, move the badgesAUXtowards
Z the transponder reader;
The initial programming - which is carried out when installing the Transponder reader – N°
4) Make sure that two short MOD
tones are emitted: the first is emitted from the transponder
AUX
shall be carried out with the central unit in MAINTENANCE mode (selector switch located reader, the second is emitted from the central unit.;
on the back in OFF position). 5) Repeat points 3 and 4 for all available badges;
Proceed as indicated below: 6) When you have finished programming the last badge, press the S pushbutton on the
1) With central unit in maintenance mode, press the P key and check if the yellow LED central unit (the yellow PROG LED turns off) and flip the back selector switch to ON.
PROG lights up.;
AUTOMATION mode – ON/OFF TIMED:

Z
It can be used for the actuation of an ON/OFF control lasting 1 second. N°
MOD
AUX
Z Z
Z N°
MOD N°
This configurator coincides with A (room) of the automation system; (it assigns the AUX
homogeneous room where the actuation is performed – from 1 to 9 -). MOD

AUX
N°
BT00033-b-UK
It coincides with the PL of the automation system (it assigns the point where the
actuation must be performed – from 1 to 9 -).
Example
MOD 3
Assigns the operating mode. For the automation functions connect configurator 2.
2
Z
N°
MOD
AUX AUX
No configurator. Z
N°
2 4
MOD
AUX
Example: If Z=3, N=2 and MOD=2 the device sends an ON/OFF control lasting 1 second 1
(e.g. electrical door lock release) to an actuator with address A=3 and PL=2.
Configuration
F420
AUTOMATION mode – SCENARIO MANAGEMENT:
Z
It coincides with the room of the scenario module item F420 where the actuation is
performed – from 0 to 9 – (reference socket A on the scenario module). Z 3
3
2
N° 2
MOD 2
4
N° AUX
It coincides with the PL position (configurator from 1 to 9) of the scenario module.

Transponder reader Scenario module
MOD
Assigns the operating mode. For the automation functions connect configurator 2.
Example: configured in this way the control activates scenario no. 4 of the scenario
AUX module item F420 with address A=3, PL=2.
It assigns the correspondence between the required scenario and the scenario module.
The configurators that can be used are those between 1 and 9 and coincide with the
corresponding scenario of the scenario module, item F420.

It enables the actuation of an ON timed control
Z =
This configurator coincides with A (room) of the automation system (it assigns the 1
02'
homogeneous room where the actuation is performed – from 1 to 9). $8;
N°
It coincides with the PL of the automation system (it assigns the point where the Transponder reader
actuation must be performed – from 1 to 9).
Example: configured in this way, the transponder reader sends to an actuator with
MOD
address A = 1 and PL = 3 an ON control with a delay of 5 minutes (e.g. switching on
It assigns the operating mode. To obtain an ON timed control connect configurator 6.
a service light).
AUX
It assigns the duration of the time delay based on the value of the configurator used, as SLAVE control
shown in the following table. It enables reproducing an enabled control on a “Master” transponder reader. The
transponder keys used must only be saved in the “Master” device.
Aux Time
Z
0 It coincides with the Z configurator of the master device.
1 1 min.
2 2 min. N°
It coincides with the N° configurator of the master device.
3 3 min.
4 4 min. MOD
5 5 min. Assigns the operating mode. To obtain SLAVE devices connect the SLA configurator.
BT00033-b-UK
6 15 min. AUX
7 30 sec. It coincides with the AUX configurator of the master device.
8 0.5 sec.
9 (not used) ---

Configuration
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4614
AUTOMATION mode – AUXILIARY CONTROL:
This mode can be obtained by connecting the AUX configurator to MOD. This will
generate a 1 sec. ON/OFF control on the assigned auxiliary channel. The difference
when compared with the auxiliary function generated with the reader connected to the Z Z 3 3 N N 1 1
burglar-alarm system (MOD=1) is that in this case the codes of the transponders are N° N° 1 1 AUX AUX 2 2
MOD MOD AUX AUX MOD MOD 6 6
saved in the reader itself, with the possibility of managing 120 badges at the same time. AUX AUX 2 2
Z
It assigns the no. of the zone it belongs to, form 0 to 9. Transponder reader Relay actuator
N°
It assigns the progressive no. inside the zone. Example: when configured in this way, as auxiliary device no. 1 (N=1) in zone 3 (Z=3),
the control sends an ON/OFF command on auxiliary channel 2 (AUX=2) intended for the
MOD relay actuator item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4614 configured with AUX = 2.
It assigns the operating mode. For the auxiliary functions connect the AUX configurator.
AUX
It assigns the auxiliary channel.
BT00033-b-UK

Display keypad HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4608
Description
1
Using the transponder key, or a secret code set on the central unit, this device with
display and digital keypad can be used to arm/disarm the system and separate the zones
with the same flexibility and using the same procedure as for burglar-alarm central unit
with display, or three module flush mounted central units.
In this way the central units can be installed in an appropriate equipment room, out of
sight.
All system status details are shown of the large backlit display.
Technical data 1 2 3
- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 4 5 6 6

3
- Max. absorption: 28 mA 7 8 9 C OK
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C 0 P

5
2
Dimensional data
Size: 3+3 modules
4
Front view
Legend
1 - Graphic display: displays the messages which guide the programming operations
and the events which have occurred.
2 - Transponder reader: receives the burglar-alarm system switching on and off
commands directly from the transponder keys.
3 - Alphanumeric keypad: allows the manual switching on of all those programming
4 - C key: exit the current menu and the programming.
6 - Navigation keypad: navigate the menu.
BT00025-b-UK

HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4608
Configuration
The activator with display must be configured by assigning a zone address (Z), indicating Selecting the central unit installed in the system
the activator group it belongs to, and a progressive number (N) within the group.
To configure it as belonging to the activators group, no value must be entered in Z. 1. Select “type of central unit”.
The configuration is performed using a specific menu shown on the display, following
the procedure below: 2. Select the type of burglar-alarm central unit installed:
- “Display” for central unit item 3486, item 3485/B and item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601 -
1. Ensure that the system is in “maintenance” mode. “No display” for central unit item L/N/NT4600/4 and AM5780/4.
2. Upon switching on the activator, the “SETTING” screen appears in Italian language. 3. Press OK to confirm.
3. Select “Address” (address). 4. Enter the other settings or return to the main page, and start the learning procedure
on the central unit.
4. Enter the Z and N address to assign to the activato and press OK to confirm.
For further device customisation procedures refer to the information on the CD supplied
5. Enter the other settings or return to the main page, and start the learning procedure with the product.
on the central unit.
Address configuration menu Address configuration menu
SETTINGS SETTINGS
Language Language
Address Address
Central unit type Central unit type
Address-- Display
SETTINGS SETTINGS
Language Language
Address Address
Address 12 No display
WARNING
Modified address
run system in progress...
learning
SETTINGS SETTINGS
Language Language
Address Address
BT00025-b-UK

Address12 No display

Passive IR detector HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4610-AM5790
Description
The passive infrared detector is a volumetric detector with fixed lens, sensitive to the
movement of warm bodies. The volume of the protected zone is divided into 14 beams
distributed on 3 levels. The detector works in two different ways: instantaneous or with
impulse calculation, in order to reduce the possibility of false alarms.
It can also be used in the automation system for timed ON/OFF functions, or to activate 1
auxiliary controls.
Technical data
- Max. absorption: 4.5 mA Front view 2

30° 30° 1 - Fresnel lens;
105° 2 - Alarm warning LED.
A B A
B B
A A
B B
A A
12
10
8
6 C C
m 4 C
2
A +2°
0°
B -6°
C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
BT00035-b-UK

Configuration
number of the sensors in the zone, setting of the detection mode and possibly Z
N° No.
assignment of an auxiliary channel. MOD
AUX MOD
AUX
Z
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone to the detector. Clamp for burglar
Configurator 1 assigns zone 1 to the detector, configurator 2 assigns zone 2 and so on to alarm BUS
Rear view
N°
zone. Z
N°
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on MOD
AUX
MOD
Configurator Mode Z
N°
MOD
0 1st level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse) AUX

but with delay.
but with delay. Z
N°
MOD
6 2 level of sensitivity (1 medium sensitivity impulse),
nd
AUX
but with delay.
but with delay.
AUX auxiliary function activation. The device, in any system
status (enabled or disabled), sends an auxiliary alarm
to the channel specified in the AUX position. If the
assigned zone is divided, the auxiliary command will
be disabled.
2
BT00035-b-UK
Z
Medium sensitivity = maximum coverage 6 metres N° 1
Low sensitivity = maximum coverage 3 metres MOD
AUX
1
AUX
If no configurator, or one of the 1 to 7 configurators, is connected to the MOD position,

the device only activates the auxiliary function when the system is disarmed.
For further information and advanced functions contact Technical Support Centre.
Configuration
actuators.
AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Time 1 min. 2 min. 3 min. 4 min. 5 min. 15 min. 30 sec. 0.5 sec. 2 sec.
Z A
1 4 NO 5
41
N° PL
MOD M
AUX G1
G2
L L1
item L4671/1

H/L4651M2 or AM5831M2 is established by defining an auxiliary channel that has been
BT00035-b-UK

Passive IR detector HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4611-AM5791
Description
The passive infrared detector is a volumetric detector with tilting lens, sensitive to the Horizontal adjustment
movement of warm bodies. The volume of the protected zone is divided into 14 beams
distributed on 3 levels. The detector works in two different ways: instantaneous or with 30° 30°
impulse calculation, in order to reduce the possibility of false alarms. It is available 1
for installation in the high sections of rooms, at heights between 1.2 and 2 metres. 28°
Vertical adjustment
The position of the lens should then be adjusted based on the characteristics of the room
to protect. 2
It is also possible to change the sensitivity threshold, and to generate auxiliary functions
when the system is disarmed. 25°
3
Technical data
Front view
- Max. absorption: 4.5 mA

1 - Fresnel lens;
Horizontal adjustment 2 - Covering reducing lid;
3 - Alarm warning LED.
30° 30°
105°
A B A
B B
A A
B B
A A
12
10
8
6 C C
m 4 C
2
0°
Vertical adjustment

C B A -25°
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A +2° 28°
BT00036-b-UK
0°
B -6° 25°
C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules

Configuration
number of the sensors in the zone, setting of the detection mode and possibly Z
N° No.
assignment of an auxiliary prealarm channel. MOD
AUX MOD
Z AUX
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone to the detector. Clamp for burglar
Configurator 1 assigns zone 1 to the detector, configurator 2 assigns zone 2 and so on to alarm BUS
Rear view
N°
zone. Z
N°
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on MOD
AUX
MOD
Configurator Mode Z
N°
MOD
0 1 level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse)
st
AUX

but with delay.
but with delay. Z
N°
MOD
6 2 level of sensitivity (1 medium sensitivity impulse),
nd
AUX
but with delay.
but with delay.
AUX pre-alarm function activation. The device, in any
system status (enabled or disabled), sends an auxiliary
alarm to the channel specified in the AUX position. If
the assigned zone is divided, the auxiliary command
will be disabled
2
BT00036-b-UK
Z
Medium sensitivity = maximum coverage 6 metres N° 1
Low sensitivity = maximum coverage 3 metres MOD
AUX
1
AUX
If no configurator, or one of the 1 to 7 configurators, is connected to the MOD position,

the device only activates the auxiliary function when the system is disarmed.
For further information and advanced functions contact Technical Support Centre.

Configuration
actuators.
AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Time 1 min. 2 min. 3 min. 4 min. 5 min. 15 min. 30 sec. 0.5 sec 2 sec.
Z A
1 4 NO 5
41
N° PL
MOD M
AUX G1
G2
L L1
item L4671/1

H/L4651M2 or AM5831M2 is established by defining an auxiliary channel that has been
BT00036-b-UK

Passive IR detector L/N/NT4611B-AM5791B
Description
Horizontal adjustment
These devices are the simplified version of sensors item L/N/NT4611 and item AM5791.
30° 30°
They have a fixed level of sensitivity (6 metres).
Also in this case, the passive infrared detector is a volumetric detector with tilting lens, 1
Vertical adjustment
sensitive to the movement of warm bodies. 28°
The volume of the protected zone is divided into 14 beams distributed on 3 levels.
The detector works in two different ways: instantaneous or with impulse calculation, in 2
order to reduce the possibility of false alarms. It is available for installation in the high
sections of rooms, at heights between 1.2 and 2 metres. 25°
The position of the lens should then be adjusted based on the characteristics of the room 3
to protect.
Front view

- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1 - Fresnel lens;
- Max. absorption: 4.5 mA 2 - Covering reducing lid;
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C 3 - Alarm warning LED.
Covering range
Horizontal adjustment
30° 30°
105°
A B A
B B
A A
B B
A A
12
10
8
6 C C
m 4 C
2
0°
Vertical adjustment
2,00
A
C B -25°
BT00037-b-UK
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A
+2° 28°
1,20
0°
B -6° 25°
C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
L/N/NT4611B-AM5791B
Configuration
They require that the zone they belong to and the progressive sensor number within the
zone are assigned. They also require setting of the detection mode. Z Z
N°
MOD
AUX
No.
Z MOD
Configurator 1 assigns zone 1 to the detector, configurator 2 assigns zone 2 and so on to Clamp for burglar
a maximum of 8 zones. alarm BUS
N° Rear view
zone.
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on Z
N°
to a maximum of 9 sensors (IR detectors and contact interface) for each of the 8 zones. MOD
AUX
MOD
Configurator Mode
Z
0 1 pulse N°
MOD
AUX
1 pulse counter (*)
2 1 pulse with delay
3 pulse counter with delay
(*) The sensor generates an alarm signal based on the detection performed during a
period of 30 seconds.
NOTE: Use the pulse counter function to avoid false alarms caused by thermal variations
(radiators etc.). Z
N°
MOD
AUX
2
BT00037-b-UK
Z
N° 1
MOD
AUX
1

Double technology
IR+MW detector HS/HD/HC/L/N/NT4613
Description
This device consists of two sensors: one infrared sensor (IR) to detect the presence of warm
bodies, and one microwave (MW) sensor to detect moving bodies.
The combination of these technologies guarantees greater immunity against false alarms.
In fact the device is programmed to give the alarm only if both the detection technologies
are activated, and this guarantees a high standard of safety.
The volume of the protected zone is split into 14 bands on 3 floors.
Due to the fact that the sensors do not operate correctly if their covering ranges overlap 1
those of double technology sensors, the installation of several sensors in the same room is
not recommended.
The detectors, configured in the AUX socket, activate the auxiliary operating modes,
2
assigning an auxiliary channel. The device performs all its burglar-alarm functions, but
when the system is disarmed it activates the corresponding auxiliary channel (unless
separated). The auxiliary function can therefore be excluded by separation of the zone it
belongs to. It also enables activating any auxiliary actuator devices, provided that they have
been configured using the same auxiliary channel.
Note: do not mount in places where there are moving metal parts (e.g. thermoconvectors
or air-moving blades). Z
Technical data N°
MOD
Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc AUX
Max. absorption: 35 mA for the first detector installed, 7 mA for all the others
3
Covering range
30° 30°
105°
A B A
B B
A A Legend
B B
A A 1. Fresnel lens;
12 2. Alarm warning LED;
10 3. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS.
8
6 C C
m 4 C
2
A
1,20
BT00034-c-UK
B
C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules

HS/HD/HC/L/N/NT4613
Configuration
Double-technology detectors require assignment of the appropriate zones and the AUX
progressive number of the sensors in the zone, setting of the detection mode and If the AUX configurator has been installed in the MOD position, the 1 to 9 value of the
possibly assignment of an auxiliary prealarm channel. configurator in this position activates the pre-alarm function, assigning the 1 to 9
Z If no configurator, or one of the 2 to 7 configurators, are present in the MOD position, the
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone to the detector. device only activates the pre-alarm function when the system is disarmed.
Note: to complete the activations using the relay actuator type F or 3479, see the
appropriate technical sheet.
N°
This configurator assigns the progressive number of the detector inside the appropriate EXAMPLE
zone. Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and First sensor belonging to zone 2.
so on to a maximum of 9 sensors (IR detectors and contact interface) for each of the 8 Configurator position Value
zones.
Z 2
MOD N° 1
This configurator sets the sensor detection mode. MOD none
It can be used, for example, when the device is directed towards a possible source of
AUX none
Configurator Mode Example

Example of IR detector with auxiliary configuration. First sensor belonging to zone 2, and
0 1st sensitivity level with high sensitivity, and pre-alarm on auxiliary channel no. 3 with the system
disarmed (e.g. activation of bell when someone goes through the area).
2 2nd sensitivity level With the system armed, the device only operates as burglar-alarm sensor.
3 3rd sensitivity level
4 1st sensitivity level with delay.
6 2nd sensitivity level with delay.
Z 2
7 3rd sensitivity level with delay.
N° 1
AUX Activation of the pre-alarm function, irrespective of
MOD none
the system status (armed or disarmed). The device
sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified AUX 3
separated, the auxiliary command is disabled.
High sensitivity (1st level) = maximum coverage 8 metres

BT00034-c-UK
Medium sensitivity (2nd level) = maximum coverage 6 metres

Low sensitivity (3rd level) = maximum coverage 3 metres

Alarm radio receiver HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4618
Description
The radio receiver, fitted in the MY HOME burglar-alarm system, allows the use of
devices which transmit radio wave signals (volumetric sensors, perimeter sensors,
technical alarm sensors, radio system remote control, radio remote control for remote
assistance) inside the burglar-alarm system, transferring the radio signal on SCS cable
(item L4669S). The radio receiver will thus be connected to the SCS cable like any
burglar-alarm device and must be configured depending on whether it is used with
radio sensors or remote control.
The connection between receiver and radio sensors or remote control does not
need conductors because each device is supplied by batteries and the information is
transmitted via radio. 1 2
Front view
NotE: for more information consult the manual supplied with the product.

- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1 - Operation indication LED;
- Max. absorption: 15 mA 2 - Reset or programming key.
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Configuration
Z - This configurator assigns the number of the zone it belongs to within the device
Z Z
group(any free zone in the system). N°
AUX No.
Configurators 1 - 8 assign the receiver zone within the group of sensors (IR detectors or
AUX
interface contacts);
configurator 9 assigns the receiver zone within the group of auxiliary devices (auxiliary
Clamp for burglar
channel interface or relay actuator);
alarm BUS
no configurator assigns the receiver zone within the group of activators (activator,
divider, zone expander).
Rear view
N° - This configurator assigns the progressive receiver number inside the zone attributed.
Configurator 1 identifies the first device, configurator 2 the second and so on up to a
maximum of 9 expander devices for each of the zones.
AUX - This configurator activates the prealarm (with volumetric and/or perimeter
sensors) or technical alarm function (with technical alarm sensors) and assigns an
auxiliary channel (AUX).
NotE: if the system is configured to have technical alarms, prealarms CANNOT be Z

N°
generated with the system switched off. AUX
BT00049-b-UK
Z
N°
AUX

CONTENTS
Technical sheets – Load control
Technical sheets – Load control MY HOME 957

Pulses counter interface 3522
Description
The device detects, counts and processes the information (water, gas, etc.) received from
meters with pulse outputs, and makes it available to the SCS Bus.
The processing and accounting functions are: Front view
- calculation of the instantaneous value (calculated as the average of two pulses received
during the time unit);
- hourly, daily and monthly pulse meter (one year memory).
The pulse meter may be installed in a MY HOME Automation/Temperature Control 7 1
system, or in a system only intended for the display of consumption levels. In this case a SCS IN
mini power supply will be required, to power the BUS, as well as a Touch Screen, for the
displaying of consumptions levels.
A1
The device may be installed in flush mounted boxes, behind traditional type devices, or A2
also inside distribution boards, but without taking up any DIN rail space. 6 A3
In order to allow the device to archive consumption information, the system must be G
M
3522
fitted with a device capable of supplying current date and time information (e.g. Touch SM OUT
Screen). If this is not available, the meter will be unable to archive the data, and will
5 2
continue to increase the meters of the totalizers, and to calculate the instantaneous
variables (number of pulses within the time unit).
The device has been designed to save the partial data in the memory in case of power
cut. The pulse counter interface is provided with socket for 6 configurators: A1, A2, A3,
G, M, SM.
4 3
NOTE: the meter cannot detect pulses of less than 50 ms, and cannot be connected to
sensors sending more than 5 pulses per second (minimum period 200 ms).
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 1. Pulse input

Stand-by absorption: 7.5 mA max 2. Opto isolated pulse input repetition
Operating temperature: 0 – 40 °C 3. Red LED: pulse detection
4. Green LED: device active
5. Virtual configuration pushbutton (for future applications)
Dimensional data 6. Configurator socket
Basic module: - Length: 40mm 7. SCS/BUS connection
- Width: 40 mm
- Height: 23 mm
Configuration
The device can be configured by connecting the physical configurators to their own
sockets (physical configuration).
The pulses counter interface is provided with socket for six configurators, which define:
- A1/A2/A3 device address (A1 for the hundreds, A2 for the tens, A3 for the units);
The maximum number of addresses is 255;
BT00359-a-UK
- G the group it belongs to (future developments);

- M type of value measured, 1-4;
- SM under 0-3 mode.
958 MY HOME Technical sheets – Load control

3522
The M configurator indicates the type of value measured by the sensor as shown in the The SM configurator indicates if the increases of the counted and saved variables, must
table: be performed every 1, 10, 100 or 1000, pulses as shown in the table:
Configurator in M Measured value Configurator in SM Splitter
1 Gas volume 0 1
2 Heat 1 10
3 Water volume 2 100
4 Generic sensor (for future uses) 3 1000
When configured in 1, 2, 3, 4 mode, it processes and/or saves the following variables: It is generally recommended to leave SM=0. In this case, the value shown coincides with
- Number of units/h: it calculates the number of pulses within the observation time, and the one released by the meter pulse output.
multiplies the result by a set multiplying coefficient.
- Total number of pulses: it calculates the total number of pulses.
- Unit count profile: it archives the unit meter information for each hour of each day of
the month, on the basis of the internal clock.
Explanatory table:
Unit of measur to display Meter pulses every Splitter Resolutions Full scale
Litres Litre 1 (SM=0) 1 Litre/hour 254 Litres/hour

1000 Litres=1m 3
1 (SM=0)
100 Litres 10 (SM=1)
Cubic metres 1 m3/ hour 254 m3/ hour
10 Litres 100 (SM=2)
1 Litre 1000 (SM=3)
Wiring diagrams
BUS SCS
BT00359-a-UK
SCS IN
A1
A2
A3 Pulse output meter
G
M
3522
SM OUT

Bus meter with 3 inputs
for toroids F520
Description
The SCS device measures currents and voltages of separate lines (up to 3), connecting Front view
maximum three toroids to the appropriate inputs (one toroid, item 3523 supplied as standard). 1
The meter processes and saves the following variables:
- instantaneous power in W;
- total energy accumulated in Wh.
The device has an internal memory that allows saving the following information:
- cumulative energy on an hourly basis for the last 12 months;
5 2
- cumulative energy on a daily basis for the last 2 years;
- cumulative energy on a monthly basis for the last 12 years.
In order to allow the device to archive consumption information, the system must be
fitted with a device capable of supplying current date and time information (e.g. Touch
Screen). If this information is not available, the meter will be unable to archive the data,
and will continue calculating the values of the instantaneous variables (power).
The space requirement for the device is equal to 1 DIN module. The device is provided
with socket for 5 configurators: A1, A2, A3-Ta, A3-Tb, A3-Tc.
Technical data

Absorption: 35 mA max 3
Rated current: 16 A
Maximum current: 90 A 4
Dimensional data
Top view
1 DIN module
Configuration
The device can be configured by connecting the physical configurators to the correct
sockets (Physical configuration). 6
The device is provided with socket for five configurators:
- A1 for the hundreds
- A2 for the tens
- A3Ta for the units 1
- A3 Tb for the units
- A3 Tc for the units
The combination of the configurators defines:
- A1/A2/A3-Ta address of meter A
- A1/A2/A3-Tb address of meter B
- A1/A2/A3-Tc address of meter C
The maximum number of addresses is 255.

WARNING: The A3-Ta configurator cannot be zero, differently from configurators A3-Tb Legend
BT00358-a-UK
and A3-Tc, which can have a zero value (if the corresponding input is not managed).
1. 230 Vac connection
The meter must be installed as close as possible to the power supply, to ensure a high
2. Pushbutton for the deletion of cumulative energy data
BUS voltage, and enable correct management of memory savings in case of voltage cut.
3. Configurator sockets closing door
If the supply voltage is insufficient (below 21 Vdc), the meter will cause the green
4. SCS/BUS connection
LED to flash to signal the installation error. The device will work regularly, but will not
5. User interface LED, SEE TABLE
guarantee correct saving and recovery of data in case of BUS failure.
6. Ta, Tb, Tc connectors for toroids, item 3523
Procedure for the deletion of the cumulative energy data:
1 Press the key; after 20 seconds the orange LED flashes quickly; release the key.
2 All the cumulative energy data are reset.

F520
LED notifications based on the status of the power meter:
Device status LED
Normal operation GREEN

BUS problem (BUS voltage insufficient, or voltage drop detected) GREEN flashing 500 ms/500 ms
Installation error (230 Vac not detected) RED flashing 100 ms/900 ms
Configuration error ORANGE flashing irregularly on GREEN
No configuration ORANGE flashing 128 ms/128 ms on GREEN
Wiring diagrams
Connection of the meter to the bus, the line, and the toroid
230 Vac
C16
F881NA/16
230V
C16
N L
BT00358-a-UK
BUS
BUS

Central unit for load management F521
Description
The central unit for load management is an SCS device that measures the power Front view
consumed by the electric system and controls the status of the Load Management 1
system actuators, to prevent the risk of tripping of the electric meter.
The device can manage up to 63 actuators (electric loads) per each phase.
The central unit is also capable of processing and saving currents and voltages,
to provide information on energy and power
- instantaneous power in W; 5 2
- total energy accumulated in Wh.
The device has an internal memory that allows saving the following information:
- cumulative energy on an hourly basis for the last 12 months;
- cumulative energy on a daily basis for the last 2 years;
- cumulative energy on a monthly basis for the last 12 years.
This information is then made available on the user interfaces, and is displayed through
instantaneous values, totalizers and graphs.
In order to allow the central unit to archive consumption information, the system must 3
be fitted with a device capable of supplying current date and time information (e.g.
Touch Screen). If this information is not available, the meter will be unable to archive
the data, and will continue calculating the values of the instantaneous variables (power).
4
Technical data
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc Top view

Rated current: 16 A
Maximum current: 90 A
Dimensional data
6
1 DIN module
BT00360-a-UK
The device can be configured by connecting the physical configurators to the correct 1. 230 Vac connection
sockets (Physical configuration) 2. Switch on and deletion of cumulative energy data procedures pushbutton
The central unit for load management is provided with socket for 5 configurators, which 3. Configurator sockets closing door
define: 4. SCS/BUS connection
- A1/A2/A3 central unit address (A1 for the hundreds, A2 for the tens, A3 for the units); 5. User interface LED, SEE TABLE
The maximum number of addresses is 255. 6. Toroid connection, item 3523
- P rated power Rpow
- TOL tolerance

F521
The P configurator is used to select the rated power (Rpow) as shown in the table: The TOL configurator is used to select the rated power tolerance as shown in the table:
P Rated power Rpow (kW) Approximate value in Ampere at 230 Vac(*) TOL Tolerance
0 3 13 0 0
1 1.5 6.5 1 -5%
2 4.5 20 2 -10%
3 6 26 3 -15%
4 9 40 4 -20%
5 10.5 46.5 5 +5%
6 12 52 6 +10%
7 14 61 7 +15%
8 15 65 8 +20%
9 18 78
NOTE (*): The reference value for the load control thresholds is the one of the rated power
in kW. The Ampere value can be used as general indication to help the installer in those
cases when the service manager supplies the current information.
Load control actuators acquisition

Once the installation stage has been completed, the central unit must acquire the actuators on the bus; unless this operation is carried out, the device will continue signalling lack of
information (fixed orange LED), and no load control function will be carried out.
The procedure for the acquisition of the actuators on the BUS is as follows:
1. Press the key; after approximately 10 seconds the red LED will turn on steadily; release the key.
2. The red LED flashes quickly and the central unit interrogates the system to identify the actuators installed.
3. Once the procedure has been completed, if no actuators have been found the acquisition failed notification (orange LED on steady) remains active, otherwise the LED turns green,
and the central unit starts operating correctly.
The procedure for the acquisition is inhibited if the central unit is not installed correctly (voltage of the bus too low, or 230 V missing), or if an overload is present; it is therefore only
possible to complete the acquisition procedure if the LED is orange steady (installation correct but no actuator acquired), or green steady (system already configured and actuators
acquired).
If the power supply voltage is insufficient (lower than 21 V approximately), the central unit causes the green LED to flash to indicate the installation error: the device works correctly,
but does not ensure the correct saving and recovery of the data in case of BUS error.
Procedure for the deletion of the cumulative energy data:

1. Press and hold down the key; after approximately 10 seconds, the red LED will turn on steadily; continue holding down the key.
2. After 10 seconds the orange LED flashes quickly. release the key.
3. All the cumulative energy data are reset.
BT00360-a-UK

F521
LED notifications based on the status of the Central unit for load management:
Device status LED
Normal operation (below threshold with all loads enabled) GREEN

Current threshold exceeded RED
System not acquired ORANGE
Current system acquisition RED flashing 100 ms/100 ms
BUS problem (BUS voltage insufficient, or voltage drop detected) GREEN flashing 500 ms/500 ms
Installation error (230 Vac not detected) RED flashing 100 ms/900 ms
Configuration error ORANGE flashing irregularly on GREEN
No configuration ORANGE flashing 128 ms/128 ms on GREEN
Wiring diagrams
Central unit for load management connection
230 Vac
C16
F881NA/16
230V
C16
N L
BT00360-a-UK
BUS

Actuator 16 A with current sensor F522
Description
The device is an actuator with 1 bistable relay sensor with zero crossing functionality, intended Front view
for the load control and/or automation functions.
The actuator is capable of assessing frequency (50 Hz) and voltage (230 Vac) in an isolated way. 1

the F521 central unit for load management (e.g. Priority 1 will be the first load disabled 6
if the threshold is exceeded). This priority coincides with the address that will be used
2
in all configuration software programs. The actuator is fitted with a current sensor for
the measurement of the controlled load consumptions, as well as for the display of the
3
instantaneous consumption, and 2 energy totalizers that can be reset independently.
In this mode the device can process the following functions:
- measure the input power of the controlled load;
- measure the total power;
- measure the earth leakage current and display on the Touch Screen the status of the 4
controlled load. This function is only available by connecting the optional external toroid,
item 3523, to the actuator.
Using the forcing pushbutton it will be possible to re-enable the load for 4 hours after
DISABLING by the central unit, or remove the load forcing previously set.
In automation mode, the actuator can perform the following functions: 5

- all operating modes that can be configured on the control devices, with the exception of
those requiring the use of two interlocked relays (shutters);
- additional modes using the M configuration socket. Top view Bottom view
- if the load is ENABLED or FORCED, the status of the relay follows the commands of the 7
Automation system.
- if the load is DISABLED by the central unit for load management, the status of the relay does
not follow the commands of the Automation system, but can only be re-enabled by a control, 8
ENABLING or FORCING, from the load control management.
During disabling, the actuator keeps the statuses requested by the Automation commands
1
in the memory. After RE-ENABLING the relay is placed in the status required by the last
automation command. 5
This function has been conceived for applications where the load control management
function is implemented, with the need of performing hourly load scheduling. If during
DISABLING stage the relay is switched OFF due to the scheduling settings, when re-enabling
takes place it will stay switched OFF.
The bistable relay enables preserving the status of the load also in case of lack of voltage from
the SCS bus (e.g. device reset).
The space requirement for the device is equal to 1 DIN module. The device is provided with
socket for 6 configurators: A, PL, M, P1, P2, PF . Legend
BT00361-b-UK
Technical data 1. 230 Vac connection

Operating power supply 2. Load forcing pushbutton
with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 3. Virtual configuration pushbutton (future application)
5. BUS connection
Measurement interval: 100 mA – 16 A
6. User interface LED, SEE TABLE
7. Toroid connection (Item 3523) for earth leakage current measurement
8. Load connection
Incandescent lamps and halogen lamp 10 A / 2300W
LED lamp and compact fluorescent lamp 500 W / Max. 10 lamps
Dimensional data
Linear fluorescent lamp and electronic transformer 4 A / 920 W
Ferromagnetic transformers 4 A cos 0.5 / 920 VA 1 DIN module
F522
Configuration
The device can be configured by connecting the physical configurators to the correct The PF is configured as shown in the table:
sockets (Physical configuration)
The device is provided with socket for six configurators, which define: PF Power Factor Typical loads
- A/PL/M local address (room, light point) and mode in the automation system.
- P1/P2 address/priority in the load control management system (P1= tens, P2= units). 0 0.925 (default) Hoover, Microwave, Television
- PF Power Factor for power calculation. Oven, iron, electric heaters, hair straightener, incandescence,
1 1
electronic transformers, toroid transformers,
2 0.85
CFL lamps
3 0.80
4 0.75
5 0.70 Washing machine, dishwasher, PC (desktop)
6 0.65
7 0.60
Other electronic devices
8 0.55 (Home theatre, DVD recorder, PC notebook, etc…)
9 0.50
The parameters listed in the table are only indicative
1) Automation Mode:
The actuator performs all the operating modes that can be configured on the control for this to be reached as automation actuator. In order to display the instantaneous and
devices, with the exception of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays. cumulative consumptions of the controlled load (saved inside the actuator), it will be
In addition, the following table lists the operating modes required for the configurator necessary to configure also P1 and P2. In this case P1 and P2 shall indicate the address to
connected to the M position of the actuator itself. be entered in the software programs in order to make it possible to display consumptions
In the A and PL positions it will be necessary to indicated the device addresses in order in the dedicated pages.
1)
In the Off delayed mode, the master sends the Off command after a period of time set Configurator in M Time (minutes)
1 1
2 2
3 3
BT00361-b-UK
4 4
Load OFF Fixed ON OFF GREEN

Load ON Fixed ON Fixed ON ORANGE

F522

In the P1 and P2 positions it will be necessary to indicate the priorities from 01 to 63, in
PF (see table), the A, PL and M positions must be configured equal to zero.
Enabled Fixed ON Fixed ON ORANGE

Enabled with consumption lower than Fixed ON Flashing 900 ms ON/100 ms OFF ORANGE flashing 900 ms ON/100 ms OFF
50 W on GREEN
Forced Fixed ON Flashing 1 s/1 s ORANGE flashing 1s/1s on GREEN

Enabled + ON Fixed ON Fixed ON ORANGE

Enabled + OFF Fixed ON OFF GREEN
Enabled + ON with consumption lower Fixed ON Flashing 900 ms ON/100 ms OFF ORANGE flahing 900 ms ON/100 ms OFF
than 50 W on GREEN
Forced + ON Fixed ON Flashing 1 s/1 s ORANGE flahing 1s/1s on GREEN
Forced + OFF Flashing 1 s/1 s Flashing 1 s/1 s ORANGE flahing 1s/1s
Installation error (230 Vac not detected) OFF Flashing Flashing 100 ms/900 ms RED flashing 100 ms/900 ms
Configuration error Fixed ON Irregularly flashing ORANGE irregularly on GREEN
No configuration Fixed ON Flashing 128 ms/128 ms ORANGE flashing 128 ms/128 ms on
GREEN
BT00361-b-UK

F522
Wiring diagrams
230 Vac
C16
F881NA/16
230V
C16
BUS
BT00361-b-UK
3523 (optional)
WARNING: Cables carrying high currents installed vertically

near the actuator (< 5 cm) may cause false measurements
of the integrated current sensor.
In this case move the cables away and keep the phase and LOAD
the neutral coupled.

Energy Data Logger F524
Description Lower view 1

The energy data logger is a device that can be used to:
- Display on the PC or other device (e.g. Smartphone) consumption/production data,
recalling the web pages using an Internet Browser.
- Concentrate and save data consisting of 10 separate energy lines maximum. The lines
can be the electric power lines, by connecting F520 meters, or an F521 Central unit for
load management, or lines for water, gas, or heat consumption, by connecting 3522
pulse counter interfaces. 5
- Have a more detailed recording of electric data (using the Web pages included in the
device it is possible to download an excel file to have in hand every 15 minutes details 2
of each single electric line).
- Set several time bands for a more detailed conversion of the electric power value
into an economic value (it is in fact possible to configure up to 8 different tariffs. E.g.
two-hourly tariff, three-hourly tariff). For water and gas lines there are monetary 3
conversion values without time bands.
- Export the data in excel file
- Have a simple data backup: the device features a housing for a micro SD memory card,
4
on which consumption details for each individual line are saved daily.
Technical data
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 - 27 Vdc

Absorption: 30 mA
4
Dimensional data
1 DIN module
The device is configured using the WEB pages in the device. For the activation and the 1. Ethernet cable connection
setup of the WEB pages refer to the CD supplied. 2. Pushbutton
WARNING: To activate the Energy Data Logger functions, the date and time must be set 3. Micro SD memory card housing door
(from WEB pages or other device). 4. SCS/BUS connection
5. Power line/device status LED
BT00521-a-UK

970 MY HOME Technical sheets – Temperature control
CONTENTS
Technical sheets – Temperature control
Technical sheets – Temperature control MY HOME 971

Radio outdoor
temperature probe 3455
Description
The outside temperature can be measured by means of this radio probe. The data 1
is then sent through radio waves to the receiving interface, and to the temperature
control system. Central units item HC/HS/L/N/NT4695, item AM5875 and item 3550 can
simply display this data. The automations are reserved just to the 99-zone central unit
item 3550 and can activate controls on the basis of exceeding particular temperature
2
thresholds set by means of the TiThermo software.
These automations also allow the management of enhanced systems with combination
boiler. Up to nine temperature probes can be installed in a system.
The radio probe is practically maintenance-free and is supplied by a small solar cell 3
installed on the device. Special care should be taken to install the solar cell in positions 4
which can guarantee sufficient irradiation.
For applications in badly lit or dark places, where the solar cell cannot supply the
device, power can be supplied by means of a Lithium battery (type LS14250/1/2AA), 5
to be inserted in the battery compartment. To guarantee the operation of the
Front view
battery-supplied probe the battery should be replaced at least every 5 years.
The effective battery lifetime depends on the “data updating time” setting (see
configuration section).
On the probe printed circuit there is a small key to be used during programming and
when the receiving interface is acquiring the radio probe details.
Legend
1. Temperature sensor: to measure the temperature
2. Transmission key: allows the association between radio probe and receiving interface 6
3. Compartment: for lithium battery
4. Solar cell: supplies the entire device
5. Jumpers: to set the temperature update interval
6. IP65 enclosure
Technical data
Side view
- Power supply: - solar cell
- 3.6 V / 1.1Ah type LS14250/1/2AA lithium battery
- Operating temperature: (-25)– (+40) °C
- Measurement field: (-20) – (+60) °C Probe installation
- Transmission power: < 10 mW
- Range: 70 m in free field (metal and reinforced concrete walls reduce the range);
- Protection index: IP65
CE CONFORMITY
89/336/EWG – Electromagnetic compatibility
R&TTE 1999/5/EC – Directive on radio and telecommunication devices
BT00182-b-UK
CONFORMITY TO REGULATIONS
ETSI EN 301 489-3
ETSI EN 300 220-3
EN 60669-2-1
EN 60950
EN 60065
EN 60529
NOTE: the probe must be installed in a position away from direct sunlight, as
this may cause a false temperature reading. Avoid both excessively shady and
excessively bright areas.

3455
Temperature display
4-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT for outdoor

temperature display
C OK
PROBE for temperature INTERFACE for

detection and transmission data reception
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
99-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT for outdoor

temperature display
Automation - threshold exceeded LED
T - C1 - C2
on
t < 3° C
ART.F482
OK
LED
1 2 3 T C2 C1
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 t > 3° C
off
Probe for temperature Interface 99-zone central unit Control implementation

detection and transmission for data reception actuator
BT00182-b-UK
TITHERMO for threshold setting

and automation

3455
Automations - system with integration boiler
RISCALDAMENTO
integration
boiler
switching
valve
chiller
T - C1 - C2
ART.F482
OK
T C2 C1 1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9 99-zone
0
central unit
interface actuator
probe
BUS
Setting the temperature update interval

Jumper sockets
}
The radio probe sends the “temperature” reading to the receiving interface at regular
intervals that can be manually set using the jumpers, which must be connected to the T1
T1 and T2 sockets. The update time is calculated following the formula below: T=T1xT2.
}
The correspondence between the settable times and the jumpers is shown on the
table. When the factory settings are used, the temperature will be updated every 1000
T2
seconds. A change in the factory settings will also entail a variation on the solar cell
recharging time, or the duration of the battery (if applicable).
Jumper/time table
BT00182-b-UK
Jumpers T1/T2
1 sec. Factory settings
10 sec.
100 sec. T = 10 x 100 = 1000 sec

3455
HC/HS 4577 and L/N/NT4577 receiving interface configuration

In order to use a receiving interface and radio probe, configuration must first be
performed, followed by the programming procedure. Only the interface needs
configuring. Up to 2 probes may be combined with each interface, therefore
providing the system with two detection points for each interface. Up to a
maximum of 9 temperature probes may be installed in one system. A/-
The configuration sockets on the interface identify the radio probes addresses. PL1/N1 Configurator
They are: A1/-, PL1/N1, M1 for the first address, and A2/-, PL2/N2, M2 for the M1 socket
second address. The two addresses must always be different from each other, A2/-
PL1/N1 ≠ PL2/N2. Only one radio probe may be associated to each address. Only PL2/N2
used addresses must be configured. The interface must be configured in M2
temperature control mode by connecting configurator 1 to M1 and M2.
With this mode the A1/- and A2/- sockets are not used, therefore no
configurator needs to be connected.
P back view
Interface
Programming of devices:
After performing the configuration, it will be necessary to associate the radio probe to If necessary repeat the operation to save the code of another probe. If on the other hand
the interface following the programming procedure: an address has already been associated and the procedure is repeated with another
probe, the interface performs an overwriting action, only keeping the last probe in
1) Press the pin pushbutton of the interface for 5 seconds. The red LED turns on. memory. During normal operation, the sending of information from the probe is
Release the pushbutton. The interface LED will flash every two seconds to confirm confirmed by the flashing of the red LED of the interface. A single flashing indicates that
that programming mode is active on the first address (group of configurators PL1/ the radio message has been received, and the “temperature” data has been sent through
N1, M1). If the second address of the interface is not configured (no configurator is the BUS by a probe associated to the PL1/N1, M1 address. A double flashing indicates
connected to the PL2/N2, M2 positions), go to step 2 of the procedure. that the radio message has been received, and the “temperature” data has been sent
However, if also the second address must be configured (group of configurators PL2/ through the BUS by a probe associated to the PL2/N2, M2 address. To delete all codes
N2, M2), simply press the pin pushbutton of the interface again. from the interface press the pin pushbutton for 12 seconds. After 5 seconds from pressing
The LED will flash twice in succession every two seconds. the key, the LED will turn on steadily, and after a further 7 seconds, it will start flashing
Every time the pin pushbutton is pressed, the system will switch from the first to the quickly, confirming that all programs have been deleted.
second address and vice versa.
NOTES:
2) After choosing the address, The radio probe should be associated to, within 20 - If the interface configuration is wrong, the red LED will flash. Correct the configuration.
seconds press the transmission key of the probe itself. Pressing the transmission key - If the second interface address has not been configured (no configurator connected to
will send the probe serial code. After receiving the code through the radio signal, the the PL2/N2, M2 sockets), during the programming procedure it will not be possible to
red LED of the interface will quickly flash for 2 seconds, confirming that programming switch to this address, which therefore cannot be programmed.
is complete, and the procedure has been terminated.
BT00182-b-UK

Air conditioning units control IR emitter 3456
Description
The air conditioning units control IR emitter is a device capable of controlling the air
conditioning units of the air conditioning system by sending infrared controls. All the
controls are sent to the splitter using the Touch Screen, or Multimedia Touch Screen, of Bottom view
the MY HOME system.
The device may be installed inside flush mounted boxes, behind traditional devices, in 1
distribution boards, without using a DIN rail space, or inside the splitter. It is fitted with
an IR transmitter with a two metre wire, for connection to the splitter receiver.
The IR transmitter has sockets for 4 configurators: ZA/A, ZB/PL, N, M. 6
3
Technical data
Operating power supply

with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
Absorption: 15 mA in stand-by 5 4
25 mA during transmission peak
Basic module 1. BUS connection

3. Remote control IR receiver
4. IR transmitter connector
5. Software programming USB connector
6. Virtual configuration pushbutton (future use)
Configuration
The device can be configured in two separate ways:

1. Physical configuration: by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets.
2. Virtual configuration: the device is configured remotely, when no physical configurators
are connected (future use).
1) Basic mode M = 1 2) Advanced mode M = 0

In this mode the device can learn up to 20 controls from the air conditioning unit remote In this mode the IR emitter provides control of the main functions of the air conditioning
control. These can be recalled by all the devices controlling the scenarios (scenario units (temperature, mode, speed and swing) from the Touch Screen and the Multimedia
BT00357-a-UK
control, Local Display, Touch Screen, Multimedia Touch Screen, MH200, MHVisual, Web Touch Screen.
server). This mode is available for the air conditioning units listed in the database supplied with
In this mode, the device fully becomes part of the automation system, with A/PL the product.
address (the N configurator must be equal to 0). Acquisition of the control is ensured by If used with the right air conditioning unit model, the following controls are possible:
connecting the device to the PC with the dedicated software. - temperature: adjustment 16 – 30 °C
Using the IR emitter it is possible to acquire the IR controls from the remote control, - mode: auto, heating, cooling, dry and fan
which can then be saved in a personal database. - speed: auto, minimum, medium, maximum
Using the software, each control can be associated to a number from 1 to 20, and then - fins oscillation (swing): on - off
downloaded on the IR emitter.

3456
Wiring diagrams
IR transmitter connected to the PC for the acquisition of the remote control using the dedicated software
IR transmitter connected to the splitter and the BUS
BUS
BT00357-a-UK

99-zone central unit 3550
Description
This central unit can manage temperature control systems up to 99 zones, set the
system and modify the system operating mode. It is more complete than the 4-zone
flush mounted version; in fact just with item 3550 it can manage the magnetic contacts
installed on the window frames to activate the energy-saving function (switching OFF
the zones affected by any changes of air).
Equipped with management software with guided menus shown on the display, it
allows the user to chose the operating mode, display the temperatures of the various
zones and display and modify the daily temperature profiles and the weekly programs,
while the maintenance menu, reserved for the installer (password protected), allows 1
access to the system settings (zone configuration, system test, total reset, etc.).
The Central unit can provide both heating and cooling and can manage up to 99 different 1 2
zones (with one Master probe for each zone plus possible Slave sensors) and up to 9 OK
circulation pumps.
A contact can be connected in input for remote control by means of a telephone actuator
to switch from the anti-freeze mode to the automatic mode and vice versa (function not 1 2 3
available with item HC/HS4695 and item L/N/NT4695 and AM5875). 4 5 6
3
By using the serial connector and the TiThermo software, it is possible to program the 7 8 9
unit from a PC. 0
Legend Front view

1. Graphic display: shows the messages which guide the programming operations
and the system state.
2. Navigation keypad: allows navigation within the menus and confirms or deletes
programming operations.
3. Alphanumeric keypad: allows manual entry of all those programming operations
which require the use of numbers and/or symbols.
4. Battery compartment: housing for battery item 3507/6. 4
5. Reset pushbutton: pushbutton to reset the hardware. 5
6. Serial connector: connects to a PC via cable item 335919 (for RS232) or item 3559
(for USB).
7. Remote control: connection clamp. 6
8. BUS: BUS connection clamp.
7
Technical data
- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 8
- Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
- Temperature adjustment range: 3 - 40 °C +/– 0.5 °C
- Size: L=140 mm, H=210 mm, D=35 mm
Rear view
BT00187-b-UK

OK
CLEAR
1 2 3 OK
ABC DEF
OK
CLEAR
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO CLEAR
1 2 3
7 8 9 2
ABC
3
DEF
PQRS YUV WXVZ 1
4 5 6
ABC DEF
0 4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
3550
8 9
GHI
7
JKL MNO
7 8 9
PQRS YUV WXVZ
PQRS YUV WXVZ

Graphic display 0
0 information
In normal working conditions the Central unit display shows the following Operating mode
on the initial page:
Name of the program
Weekly
being run
Example
Winter
Settimanale
Weekly
State:
Wed. 01 Oct 00:01 Esempio
Example
Weekly
Winter (heating)
Inverno
Winter
Example
Summer (Cooling)
Mer. 01Winter
Date Hour Wed. 01Ott
Oct00 :00:01
01
Wed. 01 Oct 00:01
MODE
1 : Weekly
Navigation keypad OK
The scroll keys scroll through the list of items in the menu. 2 : Manual MODE
3 : Scenarios 11:: Weekly
Settimanale
MODE
CLEAR OK
OK
4 : Holiday 12:: Manual
2 Manuale
Weekly
OK 23:: Scenarios
3 Scenari
Manual
CLEAR 4 : Festivo
CLEAR 3 : Scenarios
4 Holiday
CLEAR 4 : Holiday
MANUAL
The selection keys can select the functions in the menu. ALL ZONES
MANUALE
OK 1 : Zone 1 MANUAL
TUTTE LE ZONE
2 : Zone 2 ALL ZONES
MANUAL
OK
OK 11:: Zone
ZonaZONES
ALL 11
CLEAR
Manual
OK 1 : Zone 22
22 : Zona 1
CLEAR 2 : ZoneManuale
2
CLEAR
Manual
CLEAR
Manual
OK Key to confirm the selection or data entered.
CLEAR Key to delete the selection and return to the previous screen; OK
if kept pressed quits the Temperature control menu. OK
OK
CLEAR OK
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
BT00187-b-UK

3550
Programming
To complete the learning procedure of all zones within the system, use the item menu item, also select the type of load to control, choosing between: ON/OFF, OPEN/
“Configure Zone” of the “Maintenance” menu. It will be necessary to define if the zone CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL, and GATEWAY, and indicate which pumps the zone must control,
should manage a heating system, a cooling system, or a combined one. Using the same and the delay. When performing programming operations from the central unit, refer to
the installation manual supplied with the central unit itself.
Circulation pump
In addition to controlling the zone valves, for some types of systems it will also be If necessary, it is also possible to set a “pump switch-on delay”, in relation to the opening
necessary to control one or more water circulation pumps. of the zone valves. In the following cases, pump control is not necessary, or needed:
When programming the operating mode of the circulation pumps is not necessary to - in systems where the pump is always in operation (thanks to water recirculation
connect any special configurators: it will be sufficient to use the central unit through the hydraulic systems, or the presence of three-way valves);
“Pump” item; inside the “Maintenance” menu, select the zones that must be served by - in systems where the pump is managed automatically (it comes on by itself when
a circulation pump. water is required, and turns off again when all valves are closed);
Using the programming procedure, set a logic link between the zones, and the pump - in system where the pump has simply not been installed (for example for air
that hydraulically supply them. conditioning units or electric heating control).
To complete the programming procedure, the pump management mode must also be
selected, thus defining if the pump supplies a heating, a cooling, or a combined system. NOTE: for details of the programming operations to be performed from the central unit
Depending on the needs of the hydraulic system, one “circulation pump” or “several refer to the installation manual supplied with the central unit itself.
circulation pumps” may be installed, to supply one or more zone groups.
System with one circulation pump

The system shown only has one circulation pump, that only supplies two zones,
controlled by two solenoid valves. The pump is managed by a dedicated actuator
configured in zone 00. In the same way as the pump, also the two valves are controlled
by two different actuators. The circulation pump will remain active until at least one of
the two valves remains open and will stop when both valves are closed.
BUS
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART.F430/2 ART.F430/2
C1 C2 C1 C2
2 4
1 3
ZONE 1
BT00187-b-UK
1 2 3 4
Legend
1 2 3 4
ART.F430/2
1. circulation pump
C1 C2
2. pump actuator
6 3. zone 1 solenoid valve
5 4. zone 1 actuator
5. zone 2 solenoid valve
ZONE 2 6. zone 2 actuator

3550
System with two circulation pumps

The system shown requires two circulation pumps that serve two different zone groups but the actuator controlling the pump of zones 3 and 4 is configured in zone 00 with
controlled by their own solenoid valves. The first group pump is managed by a dedicated progressive number equal to 2 (N=2). Although belonging to the same system, the two
actuator configured in zone 00 with progressive number equal to 1 (N=1). Also the two pump/solenoid valve groups are totally independent from each other (see also actuator
valves that control ZONE1 and ZONE2 are managed by their own actuators. configuration).
The circulation pump will remain active until at least one of the two valves remains open
and will stop when both valves are closed. The second group is similar to the first one,
2 6
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
BUS
ART.F430/2 ART.F430/2
C1 C2 C1 C2
1 5
Legend
ZONE 1 1. zone 1 and 2 circulation pump
2. pump actuator
3. zone 3 and 4 circulation pump
8
1 2 3 4
4. pump actuator
1 2 3 4
ART.F430/2
6. zone 1 actuator
C1 C2

7
8. zone 2 actuator
ZONE 2 10. actuator zone 3
12. actuator zone 4
4 10
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART.F430/2 ART.F430/2
C1 C2 C1 C2
3 9
ZONE 3
12
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
BT00187-b-UK
11
ZONE 4

3550
TiThermo software
TiThermo is the tool used for creating or changing, through a simple and logic graphic - customise the configuration parameters and the operating programs of the central unit
interface, the configuration to be sent to the temperature control system central unit, (e.g. weekly programs, holiday programs)
defining and customising the parameters of the temperature control system and the profiles - create up to 16 scenarios for each operating mode of the system (Heating and Cooling).
of the various operating programs. In each scenario also set different temperatures for each area
Thanks to a dedicated function, the software may also be used to update the central unit - export and/or import profiles and collections (as XML files).
firmware.
The software can be used to: NOTE: for more information on the operation of the application see the manual supplied
- customize the zones with the products.
- manage the actuators, selecting the type of function to be assigned (heating, cooling,
heating+cooling, no function) and the type of load for the selected function (ON/OFF, The central unit is connected to the PC using cable item 335919 or with item 3559
Open/ Close, Fan-Coil, Gateway) (see figure). This accessory is not included with the central unit, and must therefore be
- manage the circulation pumps, selecting the type of function to be assigned (heating, purchased separately.
cooling, heating+cooling, no function) and the tripping delays
TiThermo screenshots
BT00187-b-UK

Actuator 2 relays F430/2
Description
By means of internal relays, this device executes the controls received from the central
unit or the probe. It is needed to control loads such as motorised valves, pumps and
electric radiators.
It has two independent relays which can be used to control two distinct loads with
1 2 3 4
ON/OFF function and to control a single load with open/close function. 1 2 3 4
To manage open/close loads the actuator must be configured with the logical interlock
ART. F430/2
of the two relays and contact C1 must be considered for the opening control and contact
C2 for the closing control.
C1 C2
1
2

3
4
C1 C2
Front view

- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1. C1 clamps 1 - 2 relay forcing pushbutton
- Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc C2 clamps 3 - 4 relay forcing pushbutton
- Maximum absorption relays activated individually): 25.5 mA The forcing pushbuttons do not operate if the OFF configurator is connected to the
- Absorption (relays activated with interlock): 14 mA ZB1 or the ZB2 configurator sockets.
- Absorption in stand-by: 9 mA 2. Yellow LEDs for notification of activation of the corresponding relays.
- Current load of individual relays: 6 A (resistive) e.g. electric radiators 3. Configurator socket.
2 A (inductive) e.g. solenoid valves, pumps 4. Removable clamp for BUS connection SCS.
- Maximum power consumption: 1.7 W
- Size: 2 DIN modules
Configuration configurator ZA 1 C1 contact

The item must be configured by connecting the two configurators identifying the socket ZB1 RL1
RL1 N1 2
actuator address and the number of the zone they belong to the ZA and ZB sockets.
In practical terms, the operation is the same as the one performed for the probe, during configurator ZA 3 C2 contact
the definition of the zone. socket ZB2 RL2
A probe and an actuator belonging to the same zone will require the same numeric RL2 N2 4
configurators in the ZA and ZB sockets. On the front of the two-relay actuator are five
sockets dedicated to the configurators: The operation of one of the two relays may be excluded. To do this, connect the OFF
ZA, ZB1, N1, ZB2, N2. The configuration sockets are distributed on the two relays in configurator to the socket corresponding to ZB1 or ZB2. The two relays may also be
the following way: used to control a single load with OPEN/CLOSE function, such as, for example, solenoid
BT00184-b-UK
ZA ZB1 Relay 1 zone address valves with opening and closing control. For the management of these loads, it will be
N1 Relay 1 progressive zone address necessary to configure the actuator with logic relay interlocking, connecting the same
ZA ZB2 Relay 2 zone address numeric configurator both to ZB and N, therefore ZB1=ZB2 and N1=N2. In using the
N2 Relay 2 progressive zone address contacts, consider contact C1 for the opening control and C2 for the closing control. A
The two relays on the device are independent, and may be used to activate two separate relay configured in zone 00 operates as a circulation pump actuator; for this function,
loads with ON/OFF function, such as: pumps, on/off type motorized valves, and electric the two relays cannot be configured as interlocked.
radiators. The diagram shows the correspondence between the configurator sockets and
the relay contacts.

F430/2
Configurator summary table:

Socket Function Configurator
ZA zone address 0–9
ZB1 Zone address - ON/OFF contact management - Open/Close contact management - 0 – 9 – OFF
circulation pump mode - OFF zone
N1 progressive zone number - Open/Close contact management - 1–9
circulation pump progressive number
ZB2 Zone address - ON/OFF contact management - Open/Close contact management - 0 – 9 – OFF
circulation pump mode - OFF zone
N2 progressive zone number - Open/Close contact management - 1–9
circulation pump progressive number
Example 1
Configuration and connection of the 2-relay actuator, for the control of the solenoid valves (ON/OFF type) in two different zones (zone 1 and zone 2). The progressive zone number is 1.
3
Legend
1. actuator
2 4. zone 1 radiator
5. zone 2 radiator
5
4
C1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
BT00184-b-UK
ART.F430/2
N
C1 C2
C2
L
BUS Actuator configuration

ZA ZB1 N1 ZB2 N2 RL1/C1 RL2/C2
0 1 1 2 1 ON/OFF ON/OFF

F430/2
Example 2
Configuration and connection of the 2-relay actuator, for the control of two electric radiators within the same zone (zone 4). The progressive zone numbers are 1 and 2.
2 2 Legend
1. actuator
2. electric radiators, zone 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 C1
ART.F430/2
N
C1 C2
C2
L
Actuator configuration
BUS
0 4 1 4 2 ON/OFF ON/OFF
Example 3
Configuration and connection of the 2-relay actuator, for the control of a zone pump (in zone 7). The progressive zone numbers is 1. As relay RL2 is not used, it is excluded.
2 3
4 Legend
1. actuator
2. check valve
3. zone 7 pump
4. radiant panels
1
N
C1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ART.F430/2
L
C1 C2
BT00184-b-UK
C2 DISCONNECTED

0 7 1 OFF - ON/OFF Excluded

F430/2
Example 4
Configuration and connection of the 2-relay actuator, for the control of two circulation pumps (zone 00). The progressive zone numbers are 1 and 2.
2 4 6
Legend
1. actuator
2. boiler
3. refrigerator (chiller)
4. heating circulation pump
HEATING 5. cooling circulation pump
1 6. radiator
N 7. fan-coil
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
C1
ART.F430/2
L
C1 C2
C2 0 0 1 0 2 Pump 1 Pump 2
3 5 7
BUS
COOLING
Example 5
Configuration and connection of the 2 interlocking relays actuator, for the control of a solenoid valve with opening and closing control in zone 16.
1 2 3 4
C1 OPEN
1 2 3 4
ART.F430/2 N
C1 C2
C2 CLOSE
BUS M 2
3 4
BT00184-b-UK
Legend
1. actuator
Actuator configuration 2. solenoid valve with open/close control
ZA ZB1 N1 ZB2 N2 RL1/C1 RL2/C2 3. zone 16 radiator
1 6 2 6 2 OPEN CLOSE 4. zone 16 radiator

Actuator 4 relays F430/4
Description
By means of internal relays, this device executes the controls received from the central
unit or the probe. It is needed to control loads such as 3-speed fan-coils, motorised
valves, pumps and electric radiators.
It has four relays,with independent control but common contacts, which can be used to
control two distinct loads with ON/OFF function and to control a single load with open/
1 2 3 4 5
close function. 1 2 3 4 5
To manage open/close loads the actuator must be configured with the logical interlock
ART. F430/4
of the two relays and contacts C1/C2 respectively must be considered to open and close
the first valve and contacts C3/C4 to open and close the second valve.
The contacts assume different functions when the actuator is used to control fan-coils.
Contact C1 is an ON/OFF contact and controls the valve. Contacts C2, C3 and C4 control C1 C2 C3 C4
the ventilation minimum, average and maximum speed respectively. The fan speed is 1
selected automatically depending on the difference between the temperature set by the 2
user and the room temperature.
3
4

Front view
C1 C2 C3 C4

- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1. C1 clamps 1 - 2 relay forcing pushbutton
- Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc C2 clamps 1 - 3 relay forcing pushbutton
- Maximum absorption relays activated individually): 37.5 mA C3 clamps 1 - 4 relay forcing pushbutton
- Absorption (relays activated with interlock or Fan Coil control): 20.5 mA C4 clamps 1 - 5 relay forcing pushbutton
- Absorption in stand-by: 9 mA The forcing pushbuttons do not operate if the OFF configurator is connected to the
- Current load of individual relays: 4 A (resistive) e.g. electric radiators ZB1, ZB2, ZB3 or the ZB4 configurator sockets.
1 A (inductive) e.g. solenoid valves, pumps 2. Yellow LEDs for notification of activation of the corresponding relays.
- Maximum power consumption: 3.2 W 3. Configurator socket.
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40 °C 4. Removable clamp for BUS connection SCS.
Configuration
In the same way as for the 2-relay actuator, it is necessary to connect the two the OFF configurator to the ZB socket corresponding to the relay not being used.
configurators that identify the item address, and the number of the zone the item However, RL1 cannot be excluded.
belongs to, to the ZA and ZB sockets. A probe and an actuator belonging to the same The actuator may also be used to control two single loads with Open/Close function,
zone will require the same numeric configurators in the ZA and ZB sockets. such as, for example, solenoid valves with opening and closing control. For the
On the front of the 4-relay actuator are six sockets dedicated to the configurators: ZA, management of these load it will be necessary to configure the actuator with logic
ZB1, ZB2, ZB3, ZB4, N. The configuration sockets are distributed on the four relays in relay interlocking, connecting two consecutive identical configurators in the ZB socket,
BT00185-b-UK
the following way: therefore ZB1=ZB2 and ZB3=ZB4. For the use of the contacts consider C1 and C2 for
ZA ZB1 Relay 1 zone address the opening and the closing of the first valve respectively, and contacts C3 and C4 for the
ZA ZB2 Relay 2 zone address opening and the closing of the second valve.
ZA ZB3 Relay 3 zone address The contacts of the relays perform different functions if the actuator is used to control
ZA ZB4 Relay 4 zone address fan-coils. To activate this function, connect 4 identical configurators to the ZB position,
N progressive zone number therefore ZB1=ZB2=ZB3=ZB4.
The relays on the device are independent and may be used to activate four separate The C1 contact is an ON/OFF type contact and controls the valve, controls C2, C3 and C4
loads with ON/OFF function. Therefore, if all ZB configurators are different from each control the minimum, medium and maximum ventilation speeds respectively.
other, the four relays are configured to control four loads in four different zones. The
diagram shows the correspondence between the configurator sockets and the contacts
of the relays. The operation of one or more relays may be excluded. To do this, connect
F430/4
The ventilation speed is selected automatically by the temperature control function common
1
based on the difference between the user set temperature and the room temperature. configurator ZA
This actuator cannot be used to control the system circulation pump (configurator in socket RL1 ZB1 2 C1 contact RL1
zone 00), and to control separate loads belonging to the same zone.
configurator ZA
socket RL2 ZB2 3 C2 contact RL2
configurator ZA
socekt RL3 ZB3 4 C3 contact RL3
configurator ZA
socket RL4 ZB4 5 C4 contact RL4
ZB1 zone address - ON/OFF contact management - Open/Close contact management - Fan-Coil management - OFF zone 0 – 9 – OFF
N progressive zone number 1–9
Example 1
Configuration and connection of the 4-relay actuator, for the control of four solenoid valves (ON/OFF type) in four different zones (zone 11, zone 12, zone 15 and zone 18).
The progressive zone number is 1.
4 9
3 8
Legend
2 7 1. actuator
1 C1
C2 5. zone 18 solenoid valve
1 2 3 4 5
6. zone 11 radiator
BT00185-b-UK
1 2 3 4 5
C3 7. zone 12 radiator
ART.F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
8. zone 15 radiator
C4 9. zone 18 radiator
N
L
ZA ZB1 ZB2 ZB3 ZB4 N RL1/C1 RL2/C2 RL3/C3 RL4/C4
1 1 2 5 8 1 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

F430/4
Example 2
Configuration and connection of the 4 interlocking relays actuator for the control of two solenoid valves, with opening and closing control in zones 2 and 3.
The progressive zone number is 2.
Legend
1. actuator
2
M 4. zone 2 radiator
4 5. zone 3 radiator
1 C1 OPEN
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
C2 CLOSE
C3 OPEN
ART.F430/4
C1 C2 C3 C4
C4 CLOSE 3
M 5
L N
BUS
0 2 2 3 3 2 OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE
Example 3
Configuration and connection of the 4-relay actuator, for the control of a 3 speed fan-coil in zone 69. The progressive zone numbers is 4.
2 Legend
1. actuator
2. 2-pipe 3-speed fan-coil
Note
If a fan-coil is used in a heating system, it should be
ensured that the fan does not operate when the water
L N
is cold, to avoid cooling the room rather than heating it.
1 Some fan-coils are fitted with a water temperature probe
C1 SOLENOID VALVE M for this function. If a fan-coil without fitted sensor is used,
C2 MIN. SPEED an effective solution is to install an immersion thermostat
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
ART.F430/4
on the water return pipe. The contact of the thermostat

BT00185-b-UK
C1 C2 C3 C4
C3 MEDIUM SPEED controls a remote switch, to which the fan-coil power
C4 MAX. SPEED supplies are connected.
BUS ZA ZB1 ZB2 ZB3 ZB4 N RL1/C1 RL2/C2 RL3/C3 RL4/C4
6 9 9 9 9 4 Valve Minimum Medium Maximum
speed speed speed
fan fan fan

F430/4
Example 4
Configuration and connection of two 4-relay actuators (one for the cooling, and one for The C1 contact of each actuator controls the corresponding solenoid valve, selected by
the heating system), for the control of a 4-pipe, 3 speed fan-coil. For both actuators the the temperature control function based on the system setting (summer or winter). The
corresponding zone is 28. The progressive number for the cooling actuator is 5, while for C2, C3 and C4 contacts of the two actuators must be connected in parallel, to control the
the heating actuator is 6. switching on and the speed of the ventilation system electric motor.
1 5
COOLING
HEATING
RISCALDAMENTO
L N M
3
C1 SOLENOID VALVE Legend

1 2 3 4 5 1. refrigerator (chiller)
C2
1 2 3 4 5
BUS ART.F430/4
MIN. SPEED 2. boiler
3. cooling actuator
C3
C1 C2 C3 C4
MEDIUM SPEED 4. heating actuator

5. 4-pipe fan-coil
C4 MAX. SPEED
Note
4 If a fan-coil is used in a heating system, it should be
ensured that the fan does not operate when the water
C1 SOLENOID VALVE is cold, to avoid cooling the room rather than heating it.
1 2 3 4 5 Some fan-coils are fitted with a water temperature
C2
1 2 3 4 5
BUS ART.F430/4 MIN. SPEED sensor for this function. If a fan-coil without fitted
sensor is used, an effective solution is to install an
C3
C1 C2 C3 C4
MEDIUM SPEED immersion thermostat on the water return pipe.

The contact of the thermostat controls a remote switch,
C4 MAX. SPEED to which the fan-coil power supplies are connected.
BT00185-b-UK
Cooling actuator configuration

2 8 8 8 8 5 Valve Minimum Medium Maximum speed
speed fan speed fan fan
Heating actuator configuration

2 8 8 8 8 6 Valve Minimum Medium Maximum speed
speed fan speed fan fan

Gateway
Description
This device represents the interface between the MY HOME Temperature control system
1
and the Climaveneta IDRORELAX system.
The item allows the passage of the controls produced by the bus system toward the
fan-coil. It is necessary to consider one for each fan-coil, thus correctly scaling the bus
system as regards absorption and configuration.
As a matter of fact, the item is housed inside the fan-coil during the production phase
thus it is already connected to it by means of the connector located at the top of the front
side. Basically, after performing the hydraulic and electrical connection, you will only
need to connect the bus using the appropriate clamp.
Legend
1. Connector: for Climaveneta fan-coil connection
2. Configurator socket: socket for the configurators 5
3. Removable connector clamp for SCS BUS connection 4
4. LED: not used.
5. Key: not used.
3 2
Technical data
- Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc Front view
Configuration
The item is the interface that can be found on the Climaveneta Chiller and the Fan-Coil. It Depending on needs, temperature control automations may activate certain actions with
is necessary for the connection to the temperature control BUS. As for the actuators, also certain temperature conditions. For example, in case thresholds that may be manually
for this device it will be necessary to connect to the ZA and ZB sockets two configurators set are exceeded, the temperature control system may automatically switch the settings
that identify the address, and the number of the zone it belongs to. from summer to winter, and vice versa. On the front of the interface are four sockets
In practical terms, the operation is the same as the one performed for the probe, during dedicated to the configurators:
the definition of the zone. A probe and a Gateway belonging to the same zone will ZA ZB zone address
require the same numeric configurators in the ZA and ZB sockets. N progressive zone number
The TYPE socket must be configured to indicate the type of load to be managed. TYPE type of load to control (Fan-Coil or Chiller)
If the Gateway manages a Fan-Coil, the numeric configurator 0 must be connected to the
TYPE socket, If it manages a Chiller, numeric configurator 1 will be required. NOTE: Gateway is a Climaveneta product that can already be found on fan-coils. For
When the Gateway is configured for the management of the Chiller, it will be possible to further information and for the technical documentation of the Climaveneta IDRORELAX
read the external temperature coming from the Climaveneta Chiller. system, contact the Customer Service Toll Free number 800.019.190 (8.30-12.30
This information may be simply displayed, or , in case the system is managed by the and 14.00-18.00 Monday to Friday - calls are free of charge).
99 zone central unit, item 3550, it may be used to program and activate temperature
control automations.
BT00186-b-UK

ZA Zone address 0–9
ZB Zone address 0–9
N Progressive zone number 1–9
TYPE Fan-Coil management 0
Chiller management 1

Radio interface for outdoor HD4577 - HC4577 - HS4577
temperature probes L4577 - N4577 - NT4577
Description
The radio interface is indispensable to receive the temperature data transmitted by the
radio probe. Up to two probes can be associated with each interface thus giving the
system two measuring points for each interface. Up to nine temperature probes can be
installed in a system.
Both the interface and the communication probe use radio waves with a frequency of
868 MHz. The maximum distance of communication between the receiving interface
and the temperature sensor is 70 m in free air. This distance is less if there are walls in LED
cement, metal or other material between the devices. programming
pushbutton
Technical data
- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc Front view
- Range: 70 m in free field (metal walls and surround plates A
PL1/N1 configurator
and reinforced concrete walls reduce the range); M1
- Size: 2 flush mounted modules A2/- socket
PL2/N2
M2
Configuration
P BUS
In order to use a receiving interface and radio probe, configuration must first be performed,
followed by the programming procedure. Only the interface needs configuring. Up to 2 probes
may be combined with each interface, therefore providing the system with two detection
points for each interface. Up to a maximum of 9 temperature sensors may be installed in one Rear view
system.
The configuration sockets on the interface identify the radio probes address.
They are: A1/-, PL1/N1, M1 for the first address, and A2/-, PL2/N2, M2 for the second address.
The two addresses must always be different from each other, PL1/N1 ≠ PL2/N2. Only one
radio probe may be associated to each address. Only used addresses must be configured.
The interface must be configured in temperature control mode by connecting If necessary repeat the operation, to save the code of another probe. If on the other hand
configurator 1 to M1 and M2. With this mode the A1/- and A2/- sockets are not used, therefore an address has already been associated and the procedure is repeated with another
no configurator needs to be connected. probe, the interface performs an overwriting action, only keeping the last probe in
the memory. During normal operation, the sending of information from the probe is
Programming of devices: confirmed by the flashing of the red LED of the interface. A single flashing indicates
that the radio message has been received, and the “temperature” data has been sent
After performing the configuration, it will be necessary to associate The radio probe to through the BUS by a probe associated to the PL1/N1, M1 address. A double flashing
the interface following the programming procedure below: indicates that the radio message has been received, and the “temperature” data has
been sent through the BUS by a probe associated to the PL2/N2, M2 address. To delete
1) Press the pin pushbutton of the interface for 5 seconds. The red LED turns on. all codes from the interface press the pin pushbutton for 12 seconds. After 5 seconds
Release the pushbutton. The interface LED will flash every two seconds to confirm from pressing the key, the LED will turn on steadily, and after a further 7 seconds, it will
that programming mode is active on the first address (group of configurators start flashing quickly, confirming that all programs have been deleted.
PL1/N1, M1). If the second address of the interface is not configured (no configurator
is connected to the PL2/N2, M2 positions), go to step 2 of the procedure. NOTES:
BT00183-b-UK
However, if also the second address must be configured (group of configurators - If the interface configuration is wrong, the red LED will flash. Correct the configuration.
PL2/N2, M2), simply press the pin pushbutton of the interface again. - If the second interface address has not been configured (no configurator connected
The LED will flash twice in succession every two seconds. to the PL2/N2, M2 sockets), during the programming procedure it will not be
Every time the pin pushbutton is pressed, the system will switch from the first to the possible to switch to this address, which therefore cannot be programmed.
second address and vice versa.
2) After choosing the address the radio probe should be associated to, within 20 seconds
press the transmission key of the probe itself. Pressing the transmission key will send
the probe serial code. After receiving the code through the radio signal, the red LED
of the interface will quickly flash for 2 seconds, confirming that programming is
complete, and the procedure has been terminated.
HD4692 - HC4692 - HS4692 - L4692
Probe with selector N4692 - NT4692 - AM5872
Description
The device can adjust the room temperature in both winter and summer, varying the
settings locally with respect to those received from the central unit.
The item has a knob for the local temperature selection (limited to ± 3°C with respect to 1
the value set by the central unit), the antifrost mode and the OFF mode. There are two
LED, one green and one yellow, on the front of the item. The green LED indicates that -2 -1
-3
the device is working correctly and the activation of the antifrost mode and OFF of the OF
2
+1
corresponding area. The yellow LED indicates the actuator state and any faults. F
+2
+3
OFF mode
This mode has the maximum priority, whether selected by the probe or set by the central 3
unit; to quit the OFF mode use the device which set it.
4
Antifrost/thermal protection mode Front view
In this position if the Temperature control system is set as heating the probe works in
antifrost mode; if it is set as cooling it works as thermal protection. The probe can also
work in collaboration with other probes in “master” configuration to allow the Central
unit to calculate an average of the temperature over several measuring points. This
function is useful for managing very large rooms, inside which the temperature can vary
appreciably. ZA
ZB
If there is a fault on the central unit, the probe works with the last settings received, SLA
thus continuously maintaining the last temperature determined with summer or winter configurator
setting. socket
If the probe selects the OFF mode this has priority even if the central unit is faulty, thus
the zone controlled by the probe will remain OFF.
The probe can be used to control a zone with up to 9 actuators of the same type, and 8 BUS
slave probes (4693).
Rear view
Legend
1. Key in the low position to enable virtual configuration
2. Knob: for manual temperature setting (± 3°C), to select the antifrost/thermal NOTE: compared with the previous version, the P, MOD and DEL
protection ( ) mode and the OFF state (forced zone off). configurator sockets have been removed.
3. Yellow LED: when it shines steadily or it is OFF it signals the state of the devices in
the corresponding zone, when it flashes it signals a fault.
4. Green LED: when it shines steadily it indicates that the device is active, when it
flashes it indicates that the OFF or antifrost modes are set locally.
Technical data
- Operating power supply with SCS BUS cable: 18–27 Vdc
- Absorption: 6 mA
BT00179-b-UK

- Size: 2 modules
- Installation height: 1500 m from the floor

HD4692 - HC4692 - HS4692 - L4692
N4692 - NT4692 - AM5872
Configuration
The probe must always be configured by connecting two configurators to the ZA and by the probe itself. The actuators controlled by the probes must be configured with the
ZB sockets, which identify the device address, and the number of the zone controlled same zone address.
Socket Function Configurators

ZB zone address 0–9
SLA Master/Slave mode 0–8
The probe can be configured remotely with “Virtual Configuration”. When no physical
configurators are available, a PC with Virtual Configurator software version 2.1 must be
used.
Programming
Using the “Configure zones” item of the “Maintenance” menu of the temperature control type of load to control, among the following: ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL. When
system central unit, it will be possible to define if the zone should manage a heating performing programming operations from the central unit, refer to the installation
system, a cooling system, or a combined one.Using the same menu item, also select the manual supplied with the central unit itself.
Master and Slave probe

A probe can operate in conjunction with other probes so that an average temperature number of Slave probes within the zone (8 max). To configure a Slave probe, connect
calculation can be performed, based on measurements taken from several points within the configurator marked as SLA to the MOD socket. Use the SLA socket to progressively
the same zone. This function is useful for the management of very large areas, throughout assign a number to all Slave probes of the zone. During this numbering procedure, it
which the temperature may change consistently. To activate this function, one probe must is essential to start from no. 1, and that the sequence is respected, without missing
be configured as “Master”, and one or more probes must be configured as “Slave”(max 8). The any numbers. The HC/HS/L/N/NT4692 and AM5872 probe can only operate as
Master probe calculates the average between its own temperature, and the temperatures “MASTER” probes. Therefore only the probe without knob, item 4693, may be
measured by the Slave probes, and then performs the appropriate operations. Configure used as a “SLAVE” probe.
the Master probe by connecting to the SLA socket a numeric configurator indicating the
Example of configuration of a zone (address 47), with one Master, and three
Slave probes.
To define the probes as belonging to ZONE 47, connect configurators 4 and 7 to the ZA Connect configurator no. 3 to the SLA socket of the Master probe (there are three Slave
and ZB sockets of the 4 devices. The SLA configurator must be connected to the MOD probes inside the zone); Connect configurators no. 1, 2, and 3 to the SLA sockets of the
sockets of the three Slave probes (definition of Slave probes). three Slave probes respectively (progressive number of the probe within the zone).
MASTER SLAVE 1 SLAVE 2 SLAVE 3

-2 -1
PROBE PROBE PROBE PROBE
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
t ROOM = 20°C t ROOM = 18°C t ROOM = 19°C t ROOM = 21°C

BT00179-b-UK
AVERAGE t = 19.5°C
Master probe Slave 1 probe Slave 2 probe Slave 3 probe

(HC/HS/L/N/NT4692 and AM5872) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
Socket Configurators Socket Configurators Socket Configurators Socket Configurators
ZA 4 ZA 4 ZA 4 ZA 4
ZB 7 ZB 7 ZB 7 ZB 7
SLA 3 SLA 1 SLA 2 SLA 3
MOD SLA MOD SLA MOD SLA
HD4692 - HC4692 - HS4692 - L4692
N4692 - NT4692 - AM5872
Circulation pump Pump switch-on delay

In addition to controlling the zone valves, for some types of systems it will also be If necessary, it is also possible to set the circulation pump to activate after a certain time
necessary to control one or more water circulation pumps. When programming the delay, in relation to the opening of the zone valves. This selection depends on the type
operating mode of the circulation pumps is not necessary to connect any special of valve installed, and enables the pump to only activate once the valve is fully open. If a
configurators: it will be sufficient to use the central unit through the “Pump” item; inside time delay of 4 minutes is set, after closing the relay controlling the opening of the zone
the “Maintenance” menu, select the zones that must be served by a circulation pump. valve, the probe will wait 4 minutes before switching the pump on. A maximum delay
Using the programming procedure, set a logic link between the zones, and the pump of 9 minutes can be set, depending on the time needed for the valve to open. For the
that hydraulically supplies them. To complete the programming procedure, the pump opening times refer to the official technical specifications issued by the solenoid valve
management mode must also be selected, thus defining if the pump supplies a heating, manufacturer.
a cooling, or a combined system. Depending on the needs of the hydraulic system, one
“circulation pump” or “several circulation pumps” may be installed, to supply one or more Probe calibration
zone groups. If necessary, it is also possible to set a “pump switch-on delay”, in relation Probes don’t normally require calibration; however, in particular installation situations
to the opening of the zone valves. In the following cases, pump control is not necessary: (perimeter walls, north or south facing walls, when close to heat sources, etc.), the
• in systems where the pump is always in operation (thanks to water recirculation temperature value measured may be corrected using the appropriate calibration
hydraulic systems, or the presence of three-way valves); function, which can be found in the central unit menu.
• in systems where the pump is managed automatically (it comes on by itself when Before performing the calibration operation, ensure the following:
water is required, and turns off again when all valves are closed); • leave the probes connected and powered with the hydraulic system off for at least 2
• in systems where the pump has simply not been installed (for example for air hours. During this time, avoid any changes in the room temperature (e.g. by opening
conditioning units or electric heating control). or closing windows, doors, etc.), and avoid standing near them;
• for the calibration use a calibrated sample thermometer, correctly positioned inside
the room.
Note: For more details on the calibration procedure and the programming operations
using the central unit, refer to the installation manual of the central unit.
BT00179-b-UK

Fan-coil probe HD4692FAN - HC4692FAN - HS4692FAN
with selector L4692FAN - N4692FAN - NT4692FAN
Description
The device can adjust the room temperature in both winter and summer, varying the 6
settings locally with respect to those received from the central unit. 5
The item has a knob for the local temperature selection (limited to ± 3°C with respect to
the value set by the central unit), the antifrost mode and the OFF mode. There are two 4
LED, one green and one yellow, on the front of the item. The green LED indicates that
the device is working correctly and the activation of the antifrost mode and OFF of the -3
-2
corresponding area. The yellow LED indicates the actuator state and any faults.
-1
OFF
1
+1
+2
+3
OFF mode
This mode has the maximum priority, whether selected by the probe or set by the central
unit; to quit the OFF mode use the device which set it. 3
Antifrost/thermal protection mode 2

In this position if the Temperature control system is set as heating the probe works in Front view
antifrost mode; if it is set as cooling it works as thermal protection. The probe can also
work in collaboration with other probes in “master” configuration to allow the Central
unit to calculate an average of the temperature over several measuring points.
This function is useful for managing very large rooms, inside which the temperature can
vary appreciably.
If there is a fault on the central unit, the probe works with the last settings received, ZA
ZB
thus continuously maintaining the last temperature determined with summer or winter SLA
configurator
setting.
socket
If the probe selects the OFF mode this has priority even if the central unit is faulty, thus
the zone controlled by the probe will remain OFF.
The probe can be used to control a zone with up to 9 actuators of the same type, and 8
slave probes (4693). BUS
Legend Rear view

1. Knob: for manual temperature setting (± 3 °C), to select the antifrost/thermal
protection ( ) mode and the OFF state (forced zone off).
2. Green LED: when it shines steadily it indicates that the device is active, when it
flashes it indicates that the OFF or antifrost modes are set locally.
3. Yellow LED: when it shines steadily or it is OFF it signals the state of the devices in
the corresponding zone, when it flashes it signals a fault.
4. Key used to enable virtual configuration, and for the switching of the mode and
speed of the fan-coil. Use this key to select between “Automatic” (fan speed
managed by the probe) and “Manual” (fan speed selected among minimum,
medium, and maximum) mode.
5. Red LED: when on, it indicates that “Automatic” mode is active, when off, it
indicates that “Manual” mode is active.
6. Red LEDs: they indicate the fan speed settings: from left to right, the speeds are:
minimum, medium, maximum.
BT00181-b-UK

HD4692FAN - HC4692FAN - HS4692FAN
L4692FAN - N4692FAN - NT4692FAN
Configuration
This probe has been specifically designed to manage 3-speed fan-coils and Climaveneta identifying the address of the device, and the number of the zone controlled by the
fan-coils. The probe only has 3 configurator sockets: ZA, ZB, SLA. The ZA and ZB sockets probe itself.
must always be used for the configuration operations, connecting two configurators, The actuators controlled by the probes must be configured with the same zone address.

SLA Master mode 0–8
The probe can be configured remotely with “Virtual Configuration”.
When no physical configurators are available, a PC with Virtual Configurator software
version 2.1 must be used.
Programming
Using the “Configure zones” item of the “Maintenance” menu of the temperature control Using the same menu item, also select the type of load to control, among the following:
system central unit, it will be possible to define if the zone should manage a heating ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL and GATEWAY. When performing programming
system, a cooling system, or a combined one. operations from the central unit, refer to the installation manual supplied with the
central unit itself.

A probe can operate in conjunction with other probes so that an average temperature operations. The 4692FAN probe can only operate as Master. Therefore only probe 4693
calculation can be performed, based on measurements taken from several points may be used as Slave. To configure the Master probe, in addition to the zone address, it will
within the same zone. This function is useful for the management of very large areas, be sufficient to connect to the SLA socket a numeric configurator indicating the number
throughout which the temperature may change consistently. To activate this function, of Slave probes installed within the zone (max 8). To configure a Slave probe, connect the
one probe must be configured as “Master”, and one or more probes must be configured as configurator marked as SLA to the MOD socket. Use the SLA socket to progressively assign
“Slave” (max 8). The Master probe calculates the average between its own temperature, a number to all Slave probes of the zone. During this numbering procedure, it is essential
and the temperatures measured by the Slave probes, and then performs the appropriate to start from no. 1, and that the sequence is respected, without missing any numbers.
Slave probes.
To define the probes as belonging to zone 59, connect configurators 5 and 9 to the ZA be connected to the MOD sockets of the three Slave probes (definition of Slave probes).
and ZB sockets of the 4 devices. Connect configurator no. 3 to the SLA socket of the Connect configurators no. 1, 2, and 3 respectively to the SLA socket of the three Slave
Master probe (there are three Slave probes inside the zone). The SLA configurator must probes (progressive number of the probe within the zone).

-3
-2 PROBE PROBE PROBE PROBE
-1
+1 OFF
+2
+3
t ROOM = 17°C t ROOM = 19°C t ROOM = 21°C t ROOM = 20°C

BT00181-b-UK
AVERAGE t = 19.25°C
Master Probe Slave 1 probe Slave 2 probe Slave 3 probe

(HC/HS/L/N/NT4692FAN) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
ZA 5 ZA 5 ZA 5 ZA 5
ZB 9 ZB 9 ZB 9 ZB 9
SLA 3 MOD SLA MOD SLA MOD SLA
SLA 1 SLA 2 SLA 3
HD4692FAN - HC4692FAN - HS4692FAN
L4692FAN - N4692FAN - NT4692FAN
Circulation pump
When programming the operating mode of the circulation pumps is not necessary to In the following cases, pump control is not necessary:
connect any special configurators: it will be sufficient to use the temperature central - in systems where the pump is always in operation (thanks to water recirculation
unit. Through the “Pump” item, inside the “Maintenance” menu, select the zones that hydraulic systems, or the presence of three-way valves);
must be served by a circulation pump. Using the programming procedure, set a logic - in systems where the pump is managed automatically (it comes on by itself when
link between the zones, and the pump that hydraulically supplies them. To complete water is required, and turns off again when all valves are closed);
the programming procedure, the pump management mode must also be selected, thus - in systems where the pump has simply not been installed (for example for air
defining if the pump supplies a heating, a cooling, or a combined system. Depending on conditioning units or electric heating control).
the needs of the hydraulic system, one “circulation pump” or “several circulation pumps”
may be installed, to supply one or more zone groups. If necessary, it is also possible to set
a “pump switch-on delay”, in relation to the opening of the zone valves.
Probe calibration
Probes don’t normally require calibration; however, in particular installation situations
(perimeter walls, north or south facing walls, when close to heat sources, etc.), the
temperature value measured may be corrected using the appropriate calibration
function, which can be found in the central unit menu.
Before performing the calibration operation, ensure the following:
• leave the probes connected and powered with the hydraulic system off for at least 2
hours. During this time, avoid any changes in the room temperature (e.g. by opening
or closing windows, doors, etc.), and avoid standing near them;
the room.
BT00181-b-UK

HD4693 - HC4693 - HS4693
Probe without selector L4693 - N4693 - NT4693
Description
The device can be used to control the room temperature, based on daily rhythms, both in
winter and in summer. On the front of the device are a green and a yellow LED. The green
led indicates that the device is working correctly. 1
The yellow LED indicates the status of the actuators, and any possible fault on the same.
The front of the item does not have any controls. This makes the device ideal for
installation in public places, so that any improper intervention may be prevented. The
anti-freeze/thermal protection and OFF modes can only be selected from the central
unit.
OFF mode 2
Set this mode to turn the corresponding zone off.
3
Antifrost/thermal protection mode Front view
By selecting this mode, if the temperature control system is set for heating, the probe
operates in anti-freeze mode. If the system is set for cooling, the probe operates in
thermal protection mode. The probe can also operate together with other probes of the
same type in “slave” or “master” configuration, to enable the central unit to calculate an
average of the temperatures taken from several detection points. This function is useful
for the management of very large areas, throughout which the temperature may change ZA
ZB
consistently. In case of central unit fault, the probe will continue to work implementing MOD
the last settings received, and therefore the last temperature set in the summer or SLA configurator
winter programs. However, the OFF mode also has priority in case of central unit fault. socket
Therefore, in this case the zone controlled by the probe will stay off. The probe can be
used to control a zone with up to 9 actuators and 8 slave probes of the same type.
BUS
Legend
Rear view
1. Key in the low position to enable virtual configuration
2. Yellow LED: when it shines steadily or it is OFF it signals the state of the actuators
in the corresponding zone, when it flashes it signals a fault. NOTE: compared with the previous version, the P and DEL configurator sockets
3. Green LED: when it shines steadily it indicates that the device is active. have been removed.
Technical data
- Absorption: 6 mA
- Size: 2 modules
- Installation height: 1500 m from the floor
BT00180-b-UK

HD4693 - HC4693 - HS4693
L4693 - N4693 - NT4693
Configuration
The probe must always be configured by connecting two configurators to the ZA and by the probe itself. The actuators controlled by the probes must be configured with the
ZB sockets, which identify the device address, and the number of the zone controlled same zone address.
MOD Master/Slave mode 0 - SLA
SLA Master/Slave mode 0–8
The probe can be configured remotely with “Virtual Configuration”. When no physical
configurators are available, a PC with Virtual Configurator software version 2.1 must be
used.
Programming
Using the “Configure zones” item of the “Maintenance menu” of the temperature control Using the same menu item, also select the type of load to control, among the following:
system central unit, it will be possible to define if the zone should manage a heating ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL. When performing programming operations from
system, a cooling system, or a combined one. the central unit, refer to the installation manual supplied with the central unit itself.

A probe can operate in conjunction with other probes so that an average temperature operations. The 4693 probe can operate as Master if configurator 0 is connected to the
calculation can be performed, based on measurements taken from several points MOD socket, and a configurator indicating the number of SLAVE probes present inside
within the same zone. This function is useful for the management of very large areas, the zone (max 8) is connected to the SLA socket. The same probe can operate as Slave if a
throughout which the temperature may change consistently. To activate this function, configurator marked as SLA is connected to the MOD socket, and a configurator with the
one probe must be configured as “Master”, and one or more probes must be configured as progressive SLAVE probe number within the ZONE is connected to the SLA socket. During
“Slave” (max 8). The Master probe calculates the average between its own temperature, this numbering procedure, it is essential to start from no. 1, and that the sequence is
and the temperatures measured by the Slave probes, and then performs the appropriate respected, without missing any numbers.
Slave probes.
To define the probes as belonging to ZONE 47, connect configurators 4 and 7 to the ZA the Master probe (there are three Slave probes inside the zone); connect configurators
and ZB sockets of the 4 devices. Connect configurator no. 0 to the MOD socket of the no. 1, 2, and 3 to the SLA socket of the three Slave probes respectively (progressive
Master probe. The SLA configurator must be connected to the MOD socket of the three number of the probe within the zone).
Slave probes (definition of Slave probes). Connect configurator no. 3 to the SLA socket of
SLAVE 3
MASTER SLAVE 1 SLAVE 2 PROBE
PROBE PROBE PROBE
t ROOM = 21°C
t ROOM = 20°C t ROOM = 18°C t ROOM = 19°C
BT00180-b-UK
AVERAGE t = 19.5°C
Master Probe Slave 1 probe Slave 2 probe Slave 3 probe

(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
ZA 4 ZA 4 ZA 4 ZA 4
ZB 7 ZB 7 ZB 7 ZB 7
MOD 0 MOD SLA MOD SLA MOD SLA
SLA 3 SLA 1 SLA 2 SLA 3
HD4693 - HC4693 - HS4693
L4693 - N4693 - NT4693
Circulation pump Pump switch-on delay

In addition to controlling the zone valves, for some types of systems it will also be If necessary, it is also possible set the circulation pump to activate after a certain time
necessary to control one or more water circulation pumps. When programming the delay, in relation to the opening of the zone valves. This selection depends on the type
operating mode of the circulation pumps is not necessary to connect any special of valve installed, and enables the pump to only activate once the valve is fully open. If a
configurators: it will be sufficient to use the central unit through the “Pump” item; inside time delay of 4 minutes is set, after closing the relay controlling the opening of the zone
the “Maintenance” menu, select the zones that must be served by a circulation pump. valve, the probe will wait 4 minutes before switching the pump on. A maximum delay
Using the programming procedure, set a logic link between the zones, and the pump of 9 minutes can be set, depending on the time needed for the valve to open. For the
that hydraulically supplies them. To complete the programming procedure, the pump opening times refer to the official technical specifications issued by the solenoid valve
management mode must also be selected, thus defining if the pump supplies a heating, manufacturer.
a cooling, or a combined system. Depending on the needs of the hydraulic system, one
“circulation pump” or “several circulation pumps” may be installed, to supply one or more NOTE: for details of the programming operations to be performed from the central unit
zone groups. If necessary, it is also possible to set a “pump switch-on delay”, in relation refer to the installation manual supplied with the central unit itself.
to the opening of the zone valves. In the following cases, pump control is not necessary:
- in systems where the pump is always in operation (thanks to water recirculation
hydraulic systems, or the presence of three-way valves);
- in systems where the pump is managed automatically (it comes on by itself when
water is required, and turns off again when all valves are closed);
- in systems where the pump has simply not been installed (for example for air
conditioning units or electric heating control).
Probe calibration
Probes don’t normally require calibration; however, in particular installation situations
(perimeter walls, north or south facing walls, when close to heat sources, etc.), the
temperature value measured may be corrected using the appropriate calibration
function, which can be found in the central unit menu.
Before performing the calibration operation, ensure the following:
• leave the probes connected and powered with the hydraulic system off for at least 2
hours. During this time, avoid any changes in the room temperature (e.g. by opening
or closing windows, doors, etc.), and avoid standing near them;
the room.
BT00180-b-UK

HD4695 - HC4695 - HS4695 - L4695
4-zone central unit N4695 - NT4695 - AM5875
Description
1
This central unit can manage MY HOME temperature control systems with up to 4 zones,
with a maximum of 9 circulation pumps. It can control heating or cooling systems and
can set the system and modify the system operating mode.
The central unit is made up mechanically of two parts: a base to fasten on the supporting 6 2
frame for wall mounted boxes to which the bus is connected and a removable front
cover for easy programming with the settings required. The device communicates
with and is supplied by the bus, while the two AA batteries supply power when the
removable part is not inserted in the supporting frame. The central unit has a probe 5 C OK 3
which already represents a system zone and the configuration sockets are in fact on the
back part. Another three probes can be connected to reach the absolute number of zones
Plug-in section 4
which the system can manage in this case (a maximum of 4 zones in total). Coming
front view
with management software with guided menu shown on the display, it lets the user
select the operating mode, display the temperatures of the various zones and display
and modify the daily temperature profiles and the weekly programs; the maintenance
7
menu, reserved to the installer and code protected, allows access to the system settings
(zone configuration, system test, total reset, etc.).
The temperature central unit has a graphic display with blue back-lighting in the
AXOLUTE series and green back-lighting in the LIVING, LIGHT, LIGHT TECH and Màtix
series. By means of the six keys on the device front cover all the functions can be used 8
interacting with the various menu items. The complete programming of the central unit
by PC can be activated through the serial connector and the TiThermo BASIC software.
9
Legend
Plug-in section
1. Graphic display: displays the system state and guides the programming operations. back view
2. Selection keys: can set the operating mode and select the functions.
3. OK key: to access the main menu or confirm the selection displayed.
4. Sensor: to measure the room temperature.
5. C key: to cancel the selection. 10
6. Scroll keys: to modify the temperature using the main screen; ZA
ZB 11
to scroll the menu items. SLA
7. Connector: connection to the electronics in the back base.
8. Serial connector: for connection to the PC and use of TiThermo BASIC.
9. Battery compartment: socket for 2 AA 1.5V batteries.
10. Screw: to block central unit extraction. 12
11. Configurator socket: socket of the configurators for the combined probe.
12. BUS: connection for cable bus.
Fixed section
back view
Technical data
- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc and 3 Vdc (2 AAA type, 1.5 V batteries)
- Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc Summer/Winter
- Absorption: 30 mA with the light on system state
BT00178-b-UK
- Absorption: 8.5 mA with the light off 18.0°C

- Operating temperature: 0 – 35 °C measured
- Size: 2 modules weekly 20.6°C temperature
- Installation height: 1500 m from the floor program
daily profile
02 : 45 Mar 22 Ago
Graphic display
During normal operation the central unit graphic display shows the system basic hour date
information, while the screen light stays off. When a key is pressed, the display illuminates
and the central unit is ready to implement any instructions entered by the user.

HD4695 - HC4695 - HS4695 - L4695
N4695 - NT4695 - AM5875
Removable system
The central unit is made up of a base for the connection to the system bus cable and a
removable front cover with batteries. The system so formed lets the user perform the
programming operations and replace the batteries easily.
Configuration
Differently from the 99 zone version, the 4 zone flush mounted central unit must be
Base
configured. This central unit is fitted with an integrated temperature probe, and
therefore it must be configured. The configuration sockets on the back of the central
unit are in fact intended and reserved for the integrated probe. They are: ZA, ZB and SLA.
The ZA and ZB sockets must always be used for the configuration operations, connecting
two configurators that identify the address, and the number of the zone controlled by
the probe itself. It is not necessary to start with zone 01, although it is fundamental
that the values of the subsequent zones are immediately after those of the central unit
itself. The configuration procedure requires the completing of the operations using the
“Configuration” menu of the central unit, and the activation of the “Learning” function.
In fact, the search within the system is performed on 3 zone addresses that follow the
one assigned to the central unit itself. The actuators controlled by the probes must be
configured with the same zone address. Removable
front cover

SLA Master mode 0–8
Zone 12
central unit Zone 13 Zone 14 Zone 15
18.0°C
probe probe probe
23.7°C
+2
+2
+2
+3
+3
+3
+1 +1 +1
OFF OFF OFF

13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
-1 -1 -1
-2
-2
-2
-3
-3
-3
C OK
Power supply
BUS
BT00178-b-UK
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2 ART. F430/2
C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2
Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Zone 15

actuator actuator actuator actuator

HD4695 - HC4695 - HS4695 - L4695
N4695 - NT4695 - AM5875
Programming 4 zone central unit calibration

The central unit must be used to set the operating mode of the integrated probe fitted The 4 zone central unit does not normally require calibration: however, in particular
inside. Using the “Configuration” item of the “Maintenance” menu, define if the zone installation situations (perimeter walls, north or south facing walls, when close to heat
should manage a heating system, a cooling system, or a combined one. sources, etc.), the temperature value measured may be corrected using the appropriate
Using the same menu item, also select the type of load to control, choosing between: calibration function, which can be found in the central unit menu.
ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL and GATEWAY. When performing programming Before performing the calibration operation, ensure the following:
operations from the central unit, refer to the installation manual supplied with the • leave the 4 zone central unit connected and powered with the hydraulic system off
central unit itself. for at least 2 hours. During this time, avoid any changes in the room temperature (e.g.
by opening or closing windows, doors, etc.), and avoid standing near it;
Master and Slave probe • for the calibration use a calibrated sample thermometer, correctly positioned inside
A probe can operate in conjunction with other probes so that an average temperature the room.
calculation can be performed, based on measurements taken from several points
within the same zone. This function is useful for the management of very large areas, Note: For more details on the calibration procedure and the programming operations
throughout which the temperature may change consistently using the central unit, refer to the installation manual of the central unit.
To activate this function, one probe must be configured as “Master”, and one or more
probes must be configured as “Slave” (max 8). The Master probe calculates the average
between its own temperature, and the temperatures measured by the Slave probes, and
then performs the appropriate operations. The integrated probe fitted inside the central
unit can only operate as Master. Therefore, for the slave function, only probe item 4693
may be used. In addition to the zone address, in order to configure the integrated probe
as Master it will be sufficient to connect a numeric configurator to the SLA socket, which
should indicate the number of Slave probes within the zone, up to 8 maximum.
To configure a Slave probe, connect the configurator marked as SLA to the MOD socket.
Use the SLA socket to progressively assign a number to all Slave probes of the zone.
During this numbering procedure, it is essential to start from no. 1, and that the
sequence is respected, without missing any numbers.

PROBE PROBE PROBE PROBE
CENTRAL
UNIT
C OK
t ROOM = 21 °C t ROOM = 18 °C t ROOM = 19 °C t ROOM = 20 °C
AVERAGE t = 19.5 °C
BT00178-b-UK
Central unit/Master Probe Slave 1 probe Slave 2 probe Slave 3 probe

(HC/HS/L/N/NT4695, AM5875) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
ZA 4 ZA 4 ZA 4 ZA 4
ZB 7 ZB 7 ZB 7 ZB 7
SLA 3 MOD SLA MOD SLA MOD SLA
SLA 1 SLA 2 SLA 3

HD4695 - HC4695 - HS4695 - L4695
N4695 - NT4695 - AM5875
Circulation pump System with a circulation pump

In addition to controlling the zone valves, for some types of systems it will also be The system shown only has one circulation pump, that only supplies two zones,
necessary to control one or more water circulation pumps. When programming the controlled by two solenoid valves. The pump is managed by a dedicated actuator
operating mode of the circulation pumps is not necessary to connect any special configured in zone 00. In the same way as the pump, also the two valves are controlled
configurators: it will be sufficient to use the central unit through the “Pump” item; inside by two different actuators. The circulation pump will remain active until at least one of
the “Maintenance” menu, select the zones that must be served by a circulation pump. the two valves remains open and will stop when both valves are closed.
Using the programming procedure, set a logic link between the zones, and the pump
that hydraulically supplies them. To complete the programming procedure, the pump
management mode must also be selected, thus defining if the pump supplies a heating, 4 zone central unit calibration
a cooling, or a combined system. Depending on the needs of the hydraulic system, one The 4 zone central unit does not normally require calibration: however, in particular
“circulation pump” or “several circulation pumps” may be installed, to supply one or more installation situations (perimeter walls, north or south facing walls, when close to heat
zone groups. If necessary, it is also possible to set a “pump switch-on delay”, in relation sources, etc.), the temperature value measured may be corrected using the appropriate
to the opening of the zone valves. In the following cases, pump control is not necessary, calibration function, which can be found in the central unit menu.
or needed: Before performing the calibration operation, ensure the following:
- in systems where the pump is always in operation (thanks to water recirculation • leave the 4 zone central unit connected and powered with the hydraulic system off
hydraulic systems, or the presence of three-way valves); for at least 2 hours. During this time, avoid any changes in the room temperature (e.g.
- in systems where the pump is managed automatically (it comes on by itself when by opening or closing windows, doors, etc.), and avoid standing near it;
water is required, and turns off again when all valves are closed); • for the calibration use a calibrated sample thermometer, correctly positioned inside
- in systems where the pump has simply not been installed (for example for air the room.
conditioning units or electric heating control).
BUS
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART.F430/2 ART.F430/2
C1 C2 C1 C2
2 4
1 3
ZONE 1
BT00178-b-UK
1 2 3 4
Legend
1 2 3 4
ART.F430/2
1. Circulation pump
C1 C2
6 2. pump actuator
4. zone 1 actuator
ZONE 2 5. zone 2 solenoid valve
6. zone 2 actuator

HD4695 - HC4695 - HS4695 - L4695
N4695 - NT4695 - AM5875
System with two circulation pumps

The system shown requires two circulation pumps that serve two different zone groups The second group is similar to the first one, but the actuator controlling the pump
controlled by their own solenoid valves. The first group pump is managed by a dedicated of zones 3 and 4 is configured in zone 00 with progressive number equal to 2 (N=2).
actuator configured in zone 00 with progressive number equal to 1 (N=1). Also the two Although belonging to the same system, the two pump/solenoid valve groups are totally
valves that control ZONE1 and ZONE2 are managed by their own actuators. The circulation independent from each other (see also actuator configuration).
pump will remain active until at least one of the two valves remains open and will stop
when both valves are closed.
2 6
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
BUS
ART.F430/2 ART.F430/2
C1 C2 C1 C2
1 5
Legend
ZONE 1 1. zone 1 and 2 circulation pump
2. pump actuator
3. zone 3 and 4 circulation pump
8
1 2 3 4
4. pump actuator
1 2 3 4
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
6. zone 1 actuator
7
8. zone 2 actuator
ZONE 2 10. actuator zone 3
12. actuator zone 4
4 10
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ART.F430/2 ART.F430/2
C1 C2 C1 C2
3 9
ZONE 3
12
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
BT00178-b-UK
ART.F430/2
C1 C2
11
ZONE 4

HD4695 - HC4695 - HS4695 - L4695
N4695 - NT4695 - AM5875
TiThermo Basic software

TiThermo Basic is the tool used for creating or changing, through a simple and logic - manage the circulation pumps, selecting the type of function to be assigned (heating,
graphic interface, the configuration to be sent to the temperature control system central cooling, heating+cooling, no function) and the tripping delays
unit, defining and customising the parameters of the temperature control system and - customise the configuration parameters and the operating programs of the central
the profiles of the various operating programs. unit (e.g. weekly programs, holiday programs)
Thanks to a dedicated function, the software may also be used to update the central - export and/or import profiles and collections (as XML files).
unit firmware.
The software can be used to: NOTE: for more information on the operation of the application see the manual supplied
- customize the zones with the products.
- manage the actuators, selecting the type of function to be assigned (heating, cooling,
heating+cooling, no function) and the type of load for the selected function (ON/OFF, The central unit is connected to the PC using cable item 335919 or with item 3559
Open/ Close, Fan-Coil, Gateway) (see figure). This accessory is not included with the central unit, and must therefore be
purchased separately.
item 3559
ART. 3559
TiThermo Basic screenshots

BT00178-b-UK

1008 MY HOME Technical sheets – Sound system
CONTENTS
Technical sheets – Sound system
Technical sheets – Sound system MY HOME 1009

Insulator for sound sources 3495
Description
The insulator for sound sources is a device which can adapt the audio signal from the
external sound sources to the Sound system keeping the BUS with SELV features. The 3495
insulator for sound sources must always be used when the sound source is not battery
powered. The device is made up of 4 female RCA clamps divided between “IN” and “OUT”. L L
Connect the external sound source on the “IN” clamps, and connect the stereo interface 1 2
to the “OUT” clamps, (RCA input item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4560 - AM5740). R R
IN OUT

“IN” clamps: RCA female impedance 680 Ω 1. RCA female connectors for stereo audio input
“OUT” clamps: RCA female impedance 680 Ω 2. RCA female connectors for stereo interfaces (inputs RCA).
Response in frequency at mW/600 Ω: 60 Hz-20 kHz RCA-RCA cable supplied.
Response in frequency at mW/600 Ω: 30 Hz-20 kHz
IN/OUT insulation: 1500 Vrms
BT00001-c-UK

IP Touch Screen
adapter 3496
Description
This accessory, to be used in conjunction with L4684, H4684, HW4684 or AM5864 TOUCH
SCREENS can be used to play remote audio files found on the server (e.g. on the PC
connected to the local network), or audio IP Contents (e.g. radio streaming), through
2 wire stereo sound systems. By using the RJ45 connection of the TOUCH SCREEN, and
connecting this to the local network linked to the PC, server etc., the TOUCH SCREEN
adapter sends the audio files of the various devices towards the Sound System.
3496
Installation mode
H4684
HW4684
L4684
AM5864
3496
Ethernet (1) BUS (2) (3)

F441
F441M
BT00007-b-UK
NOTE: (1) cable connection to the local LAN network.

(2) the BUS line output must be connected to the mixers item F441 or item F441M, or to the power supply line of the BUS themselves. In case of integration with the
Automation system, it may be connected to the automation BUS.
(3) when connected to the F441M matrix, the device cannot be wired to the “S1” clamp of the sound sources.

Radio tuner F500N
Description
The radio tuners item F500N can receive FM radio stations. The front pushbuttons and
the backlit display adjust the device locally, save 15 radio stations and display RDS
messages and the tuned frequency. 1
It is also capable of performing two types of station searches: manual and automatic.
2
The device can be managed (switching ON and OFF, frequency change, etc.) both locally
and remotely (via the SCS BUS) using the flush mounted amplifier, or the MY HOME
control devices (e.g. Touch Screen and Local Display).
In order to receive the radio channels correctly the type of antenna used must be
selected: if the F500N is installed in a zone of the building with sufficient signal 3
8
strength, the wire antenna can be used. If the signal strength inside the building is not
sufficient, the external antenna can be used (e.g. antenna installed on the roof), using
the coaxial connector and the appropriate adapter cable. The type of antenna is selected 4
using the configurator.
7
Technical data
Max. absorption: 20 mA @27 V – 25 mA @18 V 5
Absorption in stand-by: 5 mA @27 V – 9 mA @18 V 6
Dissipated power: 0.5 W
FM reception band: 87.5 – 108 MHz
Antenna to be connected
Maximum level (*): 70 dBμV Legend
Minimum level (*): 40 dBμV (mono) - 50 dBμV (stereo) 1. Wire antenna
(*) The maximum and minimum levels that must be guaranteed at the antenna socket 2. MCX connector for the outdoor antenna (e.g. roof antenna) (*)
for correct FM band reception. 3. Green LED on steady: good quality signal reception
4. Red LED on steady: stereo reception (mono reception when off)
Dimensional data 5. Configurator socket
4 DIN modules 6. Removable 2 pole connector for the connection to the SCS BUS of the sound system
7. Radio tuner programming and radio program scanning keys
Configuration
Frequency decrease
Frequency increase
Selection/storage of stations (short/extended pressure)
S MEM ANT
Frequency scanning mode: manual/automatic
Press at the same time for 5 seconds to store the station in the memory
S: 1 – 4 local address of the source 8. LED backlit display for the display of frequency, RDS messages, and stored stations
MEM: number of stations that can be stored (*) Cable with MCX-F connector supplied as standard.
BT00391-a-UK
Configurator No. of stations

– 5
2 10
3 15
ANT: this indicates the type of antenna used by the radio

Configurator Type of antenna
– Indoor (wire)
1 Outdoor (Coax)

Amplifier for DIN rail F502
Description
1 2
This amplifier, fitted with hooking device for installation on DIN rail, is particularly suited
for non residential applications, or in more general terms, where there are no space
constraints inside distribution boards/switchboards. Directly powered by the power line
voltage, the low level of current consumption on the BUS makes multiple installations
possible (max. 40 amplifiers and 80 loudspeakers). Depending on its configuration, a
stereo or a mono signal can be set on the output towards the loudspeakers. Loudspeakers
with both 8 Ω and 16 Ω impedance may be connected to the amplifier. The device may be
controlled using either its own keys, the TOUCH SCREEN, or special controls.
6
Technical data 5
BUS voltage: 18-27 Vdc

Power supply: 110-230 Vac (50 – 60 Hz)
Absorption on the BUS: 5 mA
Absorption on the line: 110 mA (at 110 Vac) – 56 mA (at 230 Vac)
Dissipated power: 2W
4 3
Power (on 8 Ω): 2 Wrms (1 Wrms+1 Wrms)
16 Wpmpo (8 Wpmpo+8 Wpmpo)
Legend
TYP channel balancing: ± 0.5 dB
MIN channel balancing: ± 1.5 dB 1. clamp for connection of the power supply
Frequency range @ -3 dB: 20 Hz–20 kHz (su 8 Ω) 2. clamps for loudspeaker connection
Dimensional data 4. removable clamp for BUS connection
5. the LED under “ON/OFF” indicates the amplifier state: if it is off there is no BUS, if it is
Size: 4 DIN modules green the device is in Stand-By, if it is orange the amplifier is on. The LED under “PO-
WER” indicates: when off, no power line voltage is detected, if it is RED the amplifier
Configuration is powered.
A: 1-9 address of the amplifier room 6. pushbuttons for local switching on or off of the amplifier (simple touch), and for
PF: 0-9 amplifier address volume adjustment (prolonged pressure).
M1*: - (no configurator) volume level equal to 20% and “MUTE” mode:
in this mode, when the video door entry system is being used the volume
of the sound sources will be decreased
1 volume level equal to 20% but “MUTE” mode not available”
2 volume level equal to 50% and “MUTE” mode: in this mode, when the
video door entry system is being used the volume of the sound sources will
be decreased
3 volume level equal to 50% but “MUTE” mode not available
4 volume level equal to 100% and “MUTE” mode: in this, mode, when the
video door entry system is being used the volume of the sound sources stereo cable
110–230 Vac
will be decreased
(50–60 Hz)
M2: - (no configurator) when the amplifier is switched on, the last source which
was on is activated, “FOLLOW ME” mode
1-4 when the amplifier is switched on, the source with the same configuration
BT00015-d-UK
as that set on the device itself switches on (example amplifier with M2=2,
in this case the source with S=2 will switch on), “NO FOLLOW ME” mode.
M3 - (no configurator) working correctly
1 both the outputs reproduce the signal received on the LEFT channel
2 both the outputs reproduce the signal received on the RIGHT channel
3 the amplifier reproduces a monophonic signal on both the loudspeaker
outputs
* this mode can only be activated when the Sound System is integrated with the 2-wire
BUS
audio and video door entry system. This combination allows the “pager” function and
the volume level is set via the configurators.

Power amplifier F503
Description
1 2 3 4 5
The stereo amplifier, item F503, ensures accurate reproduction of the sound signal, both
from the SCS/BUS and, in alternative, from the AUX input (MP3 or CD player, etc.). The
wide range of adjustments of high and low tones available, the 10 preset equalisation
levels, as well as the additional 10 levels that can be customised by the customer, the
virtual surround, to name a few, ensure pleasurable listening in each room, following + − + − AUX
PRI LEFT RIGHT OUT
the taste of the user. Each parameter can be displayed on the OLED graphic display.
All the adjustments are performed using the keys of the amplifier, or remotely using the
Touch Screen devices. F503
OK C
Technical data
BUS voltage: 18 – 27 Vdc
Power supply (PRI): 110 – 240 Vac @ 50 – 60 Hz
Absorption on the BUS: 12 mA
Absorption on the line: 85 mA (at 110 Vac) – 45 mA (at 230 Vac) SCS AUX
IN
Dissipated power: stand-by 3.5 Wmax - ON: 13 Wmax @ 1 kHz

input tone
Potenza (su 8 Ω): 60 Wrms (3 Wrms + 30 Wrms) 480 Wpmpo
(240 Wpmpo + 240 Wpmpo) 10 9 8 7 6
Low tones adjustment: ±20 dB max A
High tones adjustment: ±20 dB max
PF
Frequency range @ -3 dB: 20 Hz–20 kHz (on 8 Ω) M1
AUX input: 1 Vrms max M2
M3
AUX Output: 1 Vrms max, @Rout = 600 Ω
Equalisation adjustment: ±8 dB max

10 DIN modules 1. 110 – 230 Vac power supply clamps
2. Graphic OLED display
3. Left channel loudspeaker connectors
4. Right channel loudspeaker connectors
5. AUX audio output (for the connection use a 3.5 mm stereo jack)
6. AUX audio input (for the connection use a 3.5 mm stereo jack)
7. Selection and navigation keys
9. SCS audio input (sound system BUS/SCS)
10. Status LEDs*
* The LEDs are under the plastic front cover plate, and can only be seen when the device is on:
- Upper LED (power supply status), blue for STAND BY/ purple for ACTIVE
- Lower LED (110 to 230 Vac power supply), blue for power supply PRESENT
BT00271-b-UK

F503
Description
To access the configurator sockets remove the protection cover. A description of the 4
volume level equal to 100% and “MUTE” mode: in this, mode, when the
configurators is printed on the inside of the cover. video door entry system is being used the volume of the sound sources
will be decreased
SLA amplifier slave operation mode:
A PF M1 M2 M3
A: 1-9 address of the amplifier room M3 - (no configurator) working correctly
PF: 1-9 address of the amplifier sound source: 1 both the outputs reproduce the signal received on the LEFT channel
M1**: - (no configurator) volume level equal to 20% and “MUTE” : 2 both the outputs reproduce the signal received on the RIGHT channel
mode: this mode, when the video door entry system is being used the 3 the amplifier reproduces a monophonic signal on both the loudspeaker
volume of the sound sources will be decreased outputs
1 volume level equal to 20% but “MUTE” mode not available”
2 volume level equal to 50% and “MUTE” mode: in this mode, when the ** This mode can only be activated when the Sound System is integrated with the 2-wire
video door entry system is being used the volume of the sound sources will audio and video door entry system. This combination allows the “pager” function and
be decreased the volume level is set via the configurators.
Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagram with SCS BUS connected (the power amplifier plays back Wiring diagram with SCS BUS disconnected (the power amplifier is independent
the sources from the 2-wire sound system). from the SCS BUS and plays back the source connected to the AUX IN input).
110 – 230 Vac 110 – 230 Vac

(50 – 60 Hz) (50 – 60 Hz)
OUT PRI + LEFT − + RIGHT − AUX
OUT
OUT PRI + LEFT − + RIGHT − AUX
OUT
BT00271-b-UK
F503
F503
F503
F503
Sound source
(CD player, iPOD)
OK C OK C
OK C OK C
AUX AUX
SCS IN SCS IN
AUX AUX
SCS IN SCS IN
Note: The desired input, SCS or AUX IN, must be selected using the local keys (see the installation manual for the correct procedures).
Flush mounted loudspeakers H4570
Description
100 W, 8 Ω impedance, flush mounted loudspeaker, for installation inside MULTIBOX boxes,
item 16104, with AXOLUTE series finish.
Preset for back installation of a DIN amplifier, item F502.
Technical data
Type: 2 separate ways
Power: 50 Wrms/100 W musical
Impedance: 8Ω
Frequency range: 50 - 20 kHz
Sensitivity: 88 dB (1 W/1 m)
Feature: loudspeaker to be installed in flush mounted boxes
item16104. The loudspeaker has a compartment for
the installation of the DIN item F502 amplifier.
Weight: 1.74 kg H4570
Dimensional data
Size: 256x347x82 mm (lxhxd)
Depth of the flush mounted box: 80 mm
Dimensions and installation mode
256
230Vac
347
230Vac
item 16104
BT00011-b-UK

L4560 - N4560 - NT4560
RCA input HC4560 - HD4560 - HS4560 - AM5740
Description
1 2
The device allows the interfacing and adaptation of the signal level of an external
stereo audio source. It is connected with the audio signal by means of two RCA female
connectors (red = right channel; white = left channel) on the front of the device. There
is also a knob to adjust the input signal sensitivity and two LEDs to indicate the device
state (ON/STANDBY) and the correct adjustment. S
M1 5
Connections: M2
- directly to the RCA input, if the sound source is battery powered

- through the sound source insulator (item 3495), if the sound source is powered by the
mains network (230 Vac or 127 Vac).
6
Technical data
4 3
Power supply: 18-27 Vdc from BUS
Absorption in stand-by: 12 mA
Operating temperature: 5 °C-45 °C Legend
RCA input impedance: 14 kΩ 1. RCA female connectors for stereo audio input
Input sensitivity: 100 mVrms-1 Vrms 2. sdjustment knob for the audio output to the BUS
TYP channel balancing: ± 0.5 dB 3. LED for audio adjustment on the BUS:
MIN channel balancing: ± 1.5 dB • off: no audio signal
Frequency range @ -3 dB: 20 Hz-20 kHz • green: signal with minimum level
• flashing orange: best adjustment
Dimensional data • steady orange: signal too high
Size: 2 DIN modules 4. dtate indication LED:
• green: standby
• orange: device ON
Configuration
S: 1-4 local address of the source 6. removable clamp for BUS connection
BT00018-c-UK

HC4565 - HD4565 - HS4565
Flush mounted loudspeakers L4565 - N4565 - NT4565
Description
Flush mounted loudspeakers to be used with the AXOLUTE, LIVING, LIGHT and LIGHT
TECH series. The loudspeakers must be installed inside item 506E, PB526 boxes. They do
not need support and are supplied complete with all that’s needed.
Technical data
Type: wide band
Impedance: 16 Ω
Frequency range: 160 -16 kHz
Feature: loudspeaker for installation inside flush mounted boxes, item
506E, PB526
Dimensions
120,5 120,5
115 115
120,5
120,5
115
115
L/N/NT4565 HC/HD/HS4565
BT00003-b-UK

Stereo control L4561N
Description
The device manages and interfaces an external stereo audio source
(e.g. Hi-Fi system) with infrared remote control and only one IR detector.
The device can save and reproduce the controls given by the stereo source remote control.
The controls saved by the stereo control are sent to the external stereo control through
L4561N
a cord with infrared transmitter (supplied). In this way one can, by means of the various 6
L R
control devices (special controls and Touch Screen, etc...) and the amplifiers, manage the
switching on of the saved stations and activation of a CD reader and change the CD track. 5 1
TX-IR
On the front of the stereo control there are pushbuttons which, with the aid of an
indication Led, adjust the audio signal entering the device. 2
Stereo control must be programmed using the configuration software supplied with the
product. During normal operation of the stereo control, when the device activates the
Hi-Fi, the loudspeakers directly connected to the system also come on. When the last
amplifier goes off, following an OFF control, the loudspeakers also go off, but the HI-FI
system remains active for one minute.
4 3

Power supply: 18-27 Vdc 1. RCA female connectors for stereo audio input
Max. absorption: 40 mA 2. Keys, LED and sensors to adjust the output audio on the BUS
Absorption in stand-by: 12 mA 3. configurator soket
Operating temperature: 5 °C - 45 °C 4. Mini-USB input for device programming
Signal learning capacity: 20 kHz–80 kHz 5. Jack input for connection of cable with IR detector (supplied)
RCA input impedance: 14 kΩ 6. Clamp for connection of the stereo control to the BUS by patch cord
Input sensitivity: 20 mVrms-1 Vrms
MIN channel balancing: ± 1.5 dB
Frequency range @ -3 dB: 20 Hz-20 kHz
Dimensional data
Size: 4 DIN modules
Configuration
S1: 1-4 local address of the source
M1: 1-4 Configuration of how many devices must be controlled inside the same
device, Max 4 (example HI-FI systems with radio, cd reader etc...). L
L4561N
M2: 1-6 time which elapses between a control and the next during the source TX-IR
switching on sequence (see instruction sheet).
When using the multichannel matrix, item F441M, the configuration must
be M=1 (management of one source only).
BT00014-d-UK
LH
RH

Flush mounted stereo amplifier L4562 - H4562 - AM5742
Description
This device amplifies the stereo signal on the BUS and controls up to two loudspeakers
with impedance between 8-16 Ω. On the front the amplifier has two pushbuttons which 1 2 7
can: switch the loudspeakers ON/OFF, adjust the volume in output, change the audio
source and cycle the saved stations (for the radio) or change the CD tracks. Correctly
configured the amplifier can have two modes:
LEFT
- “FOLLOW ME” mode: function which allows the same music in another room after - +
A
PF
M1
the amplifier of the room previously occupied has been switched off and switching M2
on the amplifier on the room you are now in.

- “NO FOLLOW ME” mode: when another amplifier is switched on, on changing room,
- +
the source configured the same as the configurator (inserted on M2) inserted on the RIGHT
amplifier switches ON, not necessarily the source which was being listened to before.
The device is completed by appropriate 1 module key covers, item L/N/NT4911... (item
L4562) or item HC/HD/HS4911... (item H4562). By using the “+” input of one channel
and the “-” input of the other channel, it is possible to install only one loudspeaker and 4 3 5 6
create a monophonic system.

Power supply: 18-27 Vdc 1. control to switch on the amplifier (simple touch) and increase the volume
Max. absorption: 250 mA with 8 Ω loudspeaker on 2 L-R outputs (extended pressure)
130 mA with 8 Ω loudspeaker on 1 L-R output 2. control to cycle and activate the available stereo sources
130 mA with 16 Ω loudspeaker on 2 L-R outputs 3. control to scan the stations saved (for the radio)
90 mA with 16 Ω loudspeaker on 1 L-R outputs 4. control to switch off the amplifier (simple touch) and decrease the volume
40 mA (MUTE)* (extended pressure)
Absorption in stand-by: 6 mA 5. screw clamps for connection of the loudspeakers
Operating temperature: 5 °C - 45 °C 6. removable clamp for BUS connection
Power (on 8Ω): 2 Wrms (1 Wrms+1 Wrms) 7. configurator socket
16 Wpmpo (8 Wpmpo+8 Wpmpo)
MIN channel balancing: ± 1.5 dB
Frequency range @ -3 dB: 20 Hz–20 kHz
TYPS distortion: 0.1%
Noise signal ratio: 68 dB
* take into account this value when the Sound system is integrated with the 2-WIRE
video door entry system.
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Configuration
BT00008-b-UK
A: 1-9 address of the amplifier room

PF: 0-9 amplifier address

False ceiling mounted loudspeakers L4566/10
Description
20 W ceiling mounted loudspeakers. Thanks to its small size (diameter 10 cm) and easy
hooking (by springs) the loudspeaker can be installed with just a few operations.
Technical data
Type: wide band
Impedance: 8Ω
Sensitivity: 86 dB (1 W/1 m) L4566/10
Feature: loudspeaker to be installed on the ceiling
Weight: 400 g
Dimensional data
Mounting hole diameter: 90 mm
External diameter: 100 mm
Depth: 57 mm
Dimensions
133 100
52
66
57
68
BT00006-b-UK

False ceiling mounted loudspeakers L4566
Description
100 W loudspeaker for false ceiling installation, suitable for installation in large rooms.
Technical data
Type: 2 way coaxial
Impedance: 8Ω
L4566
Feature: loudspeaker to be installed on the ceiling
Weight: 1.7 kg
Dimensional data
Mounting hole diameter: 210 mm
External diameter: 240 mm
Depth: 140 mm
Dimensions
Ø 240 mm 157 mm
Ø 205 mm
BT00010-b-UK

Wall mounted loudspeakers L4567
Description
Reduced thickness loudspeakers (37 mm thickness only), for direct wall installation.
Technical data
Type: 2 ways
Impedance: 8Ω
Feature: shallow loudspeaker to be installed on the wall
(complete with fastening screws and 4 m of cable)
Weight: 1 kg
L4567
Dimensions
184 37
271
BT00005-c-UK

False ceiling mounted loudspeakers L4568
Description
The dimensions, the same as a false ceiling panel (60x60 cm), make it particularly
suitable for rooms of the service sector. This ultra-flat (only 5 mm thickness) and light
loudspeaker has a power of 50 W.
Technical data
Type: acousticPanel® DML
Impedance: 8Ω L4568
Feature: loudspeaker to be installed on the false ceiling,
replacing the false ceiling panel (60x60 cm)
Weight: 1.74 kg Dimensions
593 593 5 5
593
593
L4568
BT00004-b-UK

Outdoor loudspeakers L4569
Description
2 way loudspeaker with IPx4 protection index, black colour, impedance 8 Ω, power
140 W. This particular loudspeaker may be installed outdoor using the brackets provided.
Technical data
Type: 2 separate ways
Impedance: 8Ω
Feature: outdoor loudspeaker
Weight: 4.4 kg
Protection index: IPx4 L4569
Dimensional data
Size: 300x215x208 mm (lxhxd)
Dimensions
265 208
60
100 215
50 300 BT00009-b-UK

1026 MY HOME Technical sheets – Video door entry system
CONTENTS
Technical sheets – Video door entry system
Technical sheets – Video door entry system MY HOME 1027

SCS AV cable 336904
Description
The white BUS-SCS cable has been purposely designed and produced for the installation
of Video door entry systems and Sound Systems. However, it is also suitable for use in
Automation, Temperature Control and Burglar Alarm Systems.
This cable is used for the distribution of the power supplies and the operating signals to
all BUS system devices.
The cable consists of a white external sheathing and two twisted flexible conductors
with a section of 0.5 mm2, one brown and one brown/white.
The cable is sold in 200 m coils.
It is thus suitable to be used:
- in the open air, inside trunkings, passage-ways and pipes
- laid underground by means of suitable pipes
- inside walls with suitable pipes.
Installation notes
Technical data Underground cable installation
The 336904 BUS SCS cable can be installed underground (protected using appropriate
Insulation voltage: 450/750 V
piping), together with other signalling cables, provided the voltage is <50V.
Can be buried: YES (see installation notes)
it is however strictly forbidden to install the 336904 cable in the same conduit as power
External sheath colour: white (RAL 9010)
supply cables with voltages >50V. Failure to comply with the installation requirements
External sheath diameter: 5.0 +/- 0.1 mm
will relieve BTicino of all responsibilities for the operation of the system installed.
External sheath thickness: 0.7 mm
External sheath material: PVC (RZ)
Installation together with other cables
Number of internal conductors: 2 unshielded twisted flexible conductors
Although the construction of the white cable guarantees the necessary electrical
with sheath
insulation level for installation together with 450/750 V system cables, it is however
Colour of internal conductors: brown – brown/white
not capable of guaranteeing immunity from any electromagnetic disturbances that may
Sheath thickness of internal conductors: 0.40 mm
occur when installed in the same conduits used for the power supply cables.
Sheath diameter of internal conductors: 1.70 mm
It is therefore strongly recommended that the white BUS/SCS cable and the power
Sheath material of internal conductors: XLPE polyethylene
supply cables are installed in separate conduits.
Conductor material: red electrolytic copper
Conductor section: 0.50 mm2 (16 x 0.20 mm2)
Coil length: 200 m

Reference standards: - It complies with the tests required by the following standards:
EN60811, EN50289, EN50290, EN60228, EN50265-2-1, EN50395, EN50396 as described
in the IMQ CPT 062 document.
Marks obtained:
BT00159-b-UK

SFERA speaker module
with 2 call pushbuttons 342170
Description
Speaker module for 2 WIRE system.
The following devices can be connected to the speaker module:
- Colour camera module to realize the video systems item 342550
- Black and white camera module to realize video systems item 342510
1
- Nameplate module item 342200
- Pushbuttons module item 342240
- Numeric digital call module item 342610 2
- Alphanumeric digital call module item 342600
All the described modules are connected to the speaker module by means of the
appropriate multi-cables. The speaker module allows to make systems of up to 100 3 4 5
handsets and the opening of an electric door lock directly connected between clamps
S+ S- (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding current). The door lock can be locally supplied
by a transformer or using the actuators item 346230 or item 346260.
Related items Legend

332111 (speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allmetal) 1 - Socket for configurators and potentiometers to adjust the microphone and
332112 (speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - White) loudspeaker volume, jumper for adaptation to the type of door lock and the
332113 (speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - Alugray) alphanumeric call module.
332121 (speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Allmetal) 2 - Connection socket for the camera connector.
332122 (speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - White) 3 - Socket for the connection of the nameplate module, the pushbuttons module or the
332123 (speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Alugray) digital call module
4 - Removable connector for the connection of the BUS, the electrical door lock, and the
For the use of monobloc front covers refer to the catalogue. entrance hall door lock release pushbutton.
5 - Removable connector for the connection of the additional power supply
Technical data
Stand by absorption: 25 mA
Max. operating absorption: 75 mA
Operating temperature: (-25)-(+70)°C
Dimensional data
100 mm
89 mm
BT00130-b-UK

342170
Configuration S - type of call signal

The configuration of S determines the call tone of SPRINT handsets.
The device must be configured as follows: One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
P - entrance panel number
The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number Table for SPRINT handset call signal
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0. Configurator 0 1 2 3
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel. Type of bell 2-tone 2-tone 2-tone One-tone
1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz
N - call number 600Hz 0 Hz 2400Hz
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons and the audio
handsets or video handsets. In common entrance panels made using pushbutton
For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, the S configurator associates the
modules, 1 must be inserted in N of the speaker module. The number of the first riser
Entrance panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose
handset must be inserted in the local entrance panels. When the entrance panel is
between 16 different bells. In one-family systems S=9 to configure the general call.
made with speaker module and digital call module (item 342630 or item 342610) no
configurator must be inserted in N.
JUMPERS (JMP1) and ( JMP2) - Critical door lock power supply:
Remove the JMP1 and JMP2 jumpers to connect to the speaker module a door lock with
T - door lock relay timing
independent power supply.
configurator number
0= No JUMPER (JMP3) - EP local power supply
1 2 3 4* 5 6 7 Remove the JMP3 jumpers when the speaker module is powered by an additional power
configurator
as supply.
4 sec. 1 sec. 2 sec. 3 sec. 6 sec. 8 sec. 10 sec.
pushbutt.
* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max, after which standby mode is activated.
To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured with JMP 3 JMP 1
MOD=5.
= disconnected jumper JMP 4 JMP 2
= connected jumper
BT00130-b-UK

342170
Installation and connection

Supplied as standard with the speaker module is a closing accessory with connector.
The accessory must be fitted in the last pushbutton module of the pushbutton panel,
after connecting the modules to each other using the multicables with connectors.
It must not be used if the pushbutton panel only consists of a 1 or 2 pushbutton speaker
module, in addition to a camera module that may be installed. Camera module
Speaker module
Camera module
Pushbuttons module
Speaker module
Accessory
Accessory Example: speaker module consisting of camera module, speaker module and
4-pushbutton module; the accessory supplied as standard must also be used.
Example: entrance panel consisting of camera module and speaker module. It

does not require the accessory supplied with the product.
346902
- With entrance panels with less than 26 calls, it is necessary to connect the modules
in a vertical position on several columns using item 346902, and to fit in the last
pushbutton module the accessory supplied as standard.
- For entrance panels with more than 26 calls it is necessary to connect the modules
in a vertical position on several columns using item 346902 . After the sixth key
module (or after 26 calls), fit item 346903 and invert the flat supplied as standard.
In the last key module fit the accessory supplied as standard.
Accessory Example - Connection of

pushbutton panel with less
than 26 calls
2
346902 346902
BT00130-b-UK
346903
1
180° 3
Accessory
Connection item 346903 and flat inversion. Example - Connection of pushbutton panel with more than 26 calls.

SFERA
Nameplate module 342200
Description to the speaker

module or to other
SFERA nameplate module which can be used to enter the street number or any other
pushbuttons or
information. Can be used to enter a caption in pushbutton panels with numerical call
nameplate module
module item 342610. To be used with the “Nameplate” modular front cover.
Nameplate lighting by green LEDs.
A flat-cable for the connection to other modules is supplied.
The device must not be configured.
Related items
332201 (Allmetal nameplate front cover)
332202 (White nameplate front cover) to other
332203 (Alugray nameplate front cover) pushbuttons
or nameplate
module
Technical data 1 2 3
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18-27 Vdc
Stand by absorption: 15 mA Legend
1 - Namecard for address number, legend of call addresses or other information.
2 - Input socket for connection with other modules.
Dimensional data 3 - Connector socket for output connection with other modules, and housing for the
electronic card supplied as standard with the speaker module (to be used on the last
nameplate module only)
100 mm
89 mm
BT00124-b-UK

SFERA,
Colour camera module 342550
Description
SFERA swivel colour camera module
CCD technology, fitted with white LEDs so that it can be used in
poorly lit surroundings. To be used together with 2-wire speaker modules (connection 3
using a multicable). 1
During installation it is possible to swivel the lens horizontally and vertically. 2
1
Related items
342170 (Speaker module with 2 call pushbuttons)
342350 (Speaker module with 4 call pushbuttons)
342630 (Speaker module with Graphic display)
332511 (modular camera front cover - Allmetal)
332512 (modular camera front cover - White)
332513 (modular camera front cover - Alugray)
1 2
For the use of monobloc front covers refer to the catalogue.
Technical data 4
Legend
Camera sensor: 1/4”
Lens: f : 2.8 mm; F : 3 mm 1 - White LEDs for night lighting
Interlace: 2:1 2 - Lens
Horizontal resolution: > 330 lines 3 - Lens slant adjustment
Vertical resolution: 400 lines 4 - Multicable for connection to speaker module
Night lighting: white LEDs
Brightness adjustment: automatic (linear) Lens adjustment
Dimensional data
100 mm 1
3
89 mm
(-15) - (+15)°
BT00122-b-UK
(-15) - (+15)°
1 2

SFERA audio video
speaker module 342560
Description
1
Audio/video speaker module for 2 wire system fitted with colour camera with LED
lighting for night viewing.
Camera with slant adjustment horizontally and vertically by ±20°.
The connections to the system are made by wiring the removable clamp supplied; the
nameplates are illuminated by green LEDs. A closing card to be inserted in the last
pushbutton module is supplied. 3 3
To be completed with the modular “Audio/video” front covers.
8 4
The speaker module allows to make systems of up to 100 handsets and the opening of
7 5
an electric door lock directly connected between the clamps S+ S– (18 V 4 A impulsive,
250 mA holding current). The door lock can be locally supplied with a transformer, or
using the actuators item 346230 or item 346260. 6 6
Related items Front view 2
342461 (modular A/V front cover without call pushbuttons - Allmetal)

342462 (modular A/V front cover without call pushbuttons - White)
342463 (modular A/V front cover without call pushbuttons - Alugray) Legend
342471 (modular A/V front cover with 1 call pushbutton - Allmetal)
1 - Loudspeakers
342472 (modular A/V front cover with 1 call pushbutton - White)
2 - Colour camera
342473 (modular A/V front cover with 1 call pushbutton - Alugray)
3 - White LEDs for night lighting
342481 (modular A/V front cover with 2 call pushbutton - Allmetal)
4 - Green LED for door status notification
342482 (modular A/V front cover with 2 call pushbutton - White)
5 - Microphone
342483 (modular A/V front cover with 2 call pushbutton - Alugray)
6 - Call pushbuttons
7 - Green LED: put through call notification
Technical data Red LED: busy system notification
8 - Green LED: active communication notification
Max. operating absorption: 160 mA 1 2 3 4
Lens: F: 1.5 mm ; f: 4.3 mm
Sensor: 1/3”
Interlace: 2:1 ART.342560
10
Horizontal resolution: 330 lines USB
J1
J2
P
Night lighting: white LEDs 9

N
TS
Brightness adjustment: automatic

2 1 BUS PL S+ S−
Dimensional data
40° Rear view 8 7 6 5
Legend
BT00133-b-UK
1 - Microphone volume adjustment

100 mm 2 - Loudspeaker volume adjustment
3 - J1: remove to enable additional power supply
4 - J2: when connected, two columns of call pushbuttons are active, when disconnected
only one column is active
5 - Door lock connection and local open door pushbutton
89 mm
40° 6 - Connection to the 2 wire BUS

7 - Connection to the additional power supply
8 - Connection to the additional pushbuttons
9 - Configurator socket
10 - USB connector for PC connection
342560
Configuration
(J1) (J2)
The device must be configured as follows:

The configurator in seat P of the speaker module assigns to it a recognition number
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0. ART.342560
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel. USB
J2
J1
P
N - call number
N
TS
handsets or video handsets. In the common entrance panels made with pushbutton
audio and video handset must be inserted in the local entrance panels in N. 2 1 BUS PL S+ S−

configurator number
0= No
1 2 3 4* 5 6 7 J1 - EP local power supply
configurator
as Remove the JMP1 jumpers when the speaker module is supplied by a dedicated power
4 sec. 1 sec. 2 sec. 3 sec. 6 sec. 8 sec. 10 sec. supply.
pushbutt.
J2 - activation of pushbutton columns
To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured with When connected, two columns of call pushbuttons are active, when disconnected only
MOD=5. one column is active.
S-type of call signal with entrance panel door lock opening notification beep
The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets. One can thus
differentiate the calls from different entrance panels. ART.342560
USB
P
N
TS
2 1 BUS PL S+ S−
Table for SPRINT handset call signal

Configurator 0 1 2 3
Type of bell 2-tone 2-tone 2-tone One-tone
1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz
600Hz 0 Hz 2400Hz
between 16 different bells. In one-family systems, S=9 configures the general call and
the handsets ring, the same as with the S=0.
S-type of call signal without entrance panel door lock opening notification beep Supplied as standard with the audio and video speaker module, is a closing accessory
The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets. with connector. The accessory must be fitted in the last pushbutton module of the
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels. entrance panel, after connecting the modules to each other using the multicables.
BT00133-b-UK
Table for SPRINT handset call signal Camera installation notes

Configurator 4 5 6 7 The camera must not be installed facing strong light sources, or in locations where the
Type of bell 2-tone 2-tone 2-tone One-tone area being shot is strongly backlit. In order to resolve these problems, we recommend
1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz that the camera is installed at a height of 180 cm, instead of the usual 160-165 cm,
600Hz 0 Hz 2400Hz with the lens pointing down. This will improve image quality. In low light situations,
the colour rendition of the image displayed by the colour camera may decrease.
For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, the S configurator associates the This is to ensure that the person being displayed can be better recognised. To ensure
Entrance panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose optimum vision in low light conditions, the installation of an additional light source is
between 16 different bells. In one-family systems, S=8 configures the general call and recommended.

Wall mounted
LINEA 2000 METAL entrance panel 342991-342992
Description
Wall mounted 2-wire pushbutton panel with Zamak front cover, colour camera, and 8
night viewing white LED light. One and two-family version available.
The camera can be swivelled by +/-15°, both horizontally and vertically.
It provides the possibility of opening an electrical door lock connected directly to clamps
S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding current). Blue LED backlit name plate 5
Related items
346250 (gate release relay module)
4
7 2
Technical data
6
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 - 27 Vdc
Stand by absorption: 20 mA 1
Operating temperature: (-25) - (+70)°C
PI against mechanical impact: IK07
Dimensional data 3
106 Legend
mm
1 - Call keys
3 - Microphone
4 - Loudspeaker
5 - Colour camera with camera slant adjustment horizontally and vertically by ±15°
6 - Clamps for BUS and door lock connection: the module allows to control an electric
185 160 ÷ 165 door lock directly connected to the clamps S+ S- (18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA
mm cm holding current 30 Ohm max)
7 - Microphone and loudspeaker volume adjustment
35
mm
BT00115-b-UK

342991-342992
Configuration T - door lock relay timing
The device must be configured as follows: configurator number

0= No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
P - entrance panel number configurator
The configurator in seat P of the speaker module assigns to it a recognition number as
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0. 4 sec. 1 sec. 2 sec. 3 sec. 6 sec. 8 sec. 10 sec.
pushbutt.
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
S - type of call signal
N - call number The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets.
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons, and the audio One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
or video handsets. Table for SPRINT handset call signal
In common entrance panels made using pushbutton modules, 1 must be inserted in N of
the speaker module. In secondary entrance panels, the number of the first riser handset Configurator 0 1 2 3
must be inserted in N. Type of bell 2-tone 2-tone 2-tone One-tone
1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz
600Hz 0 Hz 2400Hz
between 16 different bells. In one-family systems S=9 configure the general call.
BT00115-b-UK

1
Flush mounted
LINEA 2000 METAL entrance panel 3 3
343001-343002
8 4
Description 7 5
1
Flush mounted 2-wire audio and video speaker module with Zamak front cover, colour
camera and night viewing white LED light. One and two-family version available. 6 6
The camera can be swivelled by +/-20°, both horizontally and vertically.
It provides the possibility of opening an electrical door lock connected directly to clamps
S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding current). Flush mounted box supplied 2
as standard.
3 3
Related items 8 4
346250 (gate release relay module) 7 5
Technical data 6 6
Max. operating absorption: 160 mA Zamak front without panel 2
Operating temperature: (-20) - (+70)°C
PI against mechanical impact IK10
Sensor: 1/3”
Lens: f: 4,3 mm; F: 1.5 mm 9 10 11
Interlace: 2:1
Resolution: 330 horizontal lines
Night lighting: white LEDs
Brightness adjustment: automatic
J2
Dimensional data 14
P
N
TS
136 mm
BUS PL S+ S−
9 10 11
163 mm
Rear view 13 12
J2
14
P
N
TS
Legend
1 - Loudspeakers BUS PL S+ S−
2 - Colour camera
4 - Green LED for door status notification
5 - Microphone
6 - Call keys
BT00117-b-UK
13 12
7 - Green LED: put through call notification
Red LED: busy system notification
8 - Green LED: active communication notification
9 - Microphone volume adjustment
10 - Loudspeaker volume adjustment
11 - J2: when connected, two columns of call pushbuttons are active, when disconnected
only one
12 - Door lock connection and local open door pushbutton
13 - Connection to the 2-wire SCS BUS.

343001-343002
Configuration
The device must be configured as follows:

The configurator in seat P of the speaker module assigns to it a recognition number
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0.
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
N - call number 1
handsets or video handsets. In the common entrance panels made with pushbutton
handset must be inserted in the local entrance panels in N.

configurator number
0= No
1 2 3 4* 5 6 7
2
configurator
as
pushbutt.
To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured with
MOD=5.
S-type of call signal with entrance panel door lock opening notification beep
The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets. Installation
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels. The camera must not be installed in front of intense light sources, or in locations where
the subject might be backlit. To avoid these problems try to change the installation
Table for SPRINT handset call signal height of the camera, normally from 160-165 cm, to a height of 180 mm, and to
direct the lens downwards so that the shooting quality may be improved. In low light
Configurator 0 1 2 3 conditions, the picture of the colour camera may be reproduced with a lower colour
Type of bell 2-tone 2-tone 2-tone One-tone rendition, in order to ensure the possibility to better identify the subject. For optimum
1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz rendition, it is however recommended that an extra light sources is installed in scarcely
600Hz 0 Hz 2400Hz illuminated locations.
the handsets ring, the same as with the S=0. Flush mounted box
S-type of call signal without entrance panel door lock opening notification Frame
beep
The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels. Speaker module
Table for SPRINT handset call signal
BT00117-b-UK
Configurator 4 5 6 7
Type of bell 2-tone 2-tone 2-tone One-tone
1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz
600Hz 0 Hz 2400Hz
For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, the S configurator associates the Protrusion from
Entrance panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose the wall: 21 mm

Audio Polyx 344082
Description
2 WIRE handsfree handset for wall mounted installation. 9
It’s fitted with keys for: EP activation/cycling, door lock release, staircase light switching
on and 4 programmable keys, which operating mode is set through the configuration.
Specific audible and visual signals mean that it is also suitable for use by disabled people.
Fixing bracket supplied.
Technical data 1 5
Stand by absorption: 5 mA 2 10
Operating temperature: 5 - 40°C 3 6
4 7
Dimensional data
30 mm Front view 8
124.5 mm
11 13
128 mm
ON
BUS OFF 5 1
12
N
N
P M
P M
14 ART.344082
Rear view
Legend
1 - 4 programmable keys (through configuration)
2 - EP Activation/cycling
3 - Bell volume adjustment and exclusion + LED
BT00138-b-UK
4 - Door lock key + LED

5 - Loudspeaker
6 - Loudspeaker volume adjustment
7 - Connection key+ LED
8 - Microphone
9 - Call signalling LED
10 - Staircase light key
11 - Clamps for the connection to the 2 WIRE BUS
12 - Clamps for the connection of the Floor call auxiliary services and extra bell
13 - Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch

344082
Configuration Configurator in P key ( ) function

0-9 Entrance panel audio activation
N - handset number (configured with P=0÷9)
Assigns to each handset an identification number within the system. The handsets
must be configured in progressive order. Handsets with parallel connection (max 3 are
allowed inside apartments without item 346850) must be configured using the same Configurator in P key function
N configurator. 0-9 Opening of the EP door lock
(configured with P=0-9)
P - entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the entrance panel associated, or the first entrance panel
The handset offers the possibility to select among 16 types of bells with pre-programmed
on which the audio is activated when the ( ) key is pressed, as well as which door lock
ringtones, which can be associated to the following type of calls:
is activated when the key is pressed while the handset is idle.
- Calls from the entrance panel (configured with S=0)
M - Operating mode of the keys
- Calls from the entrance panel (configured with S=1)
In addition to the door lock opening key and the staircase light key ( ), the
- Intercom call
handset also has 4 programmable keys ( - - - ). These keys may be associated
- Call to the floor
to different operating modes (e.g. activation of external actuators, intercom, activation
(See the bell programming table in the following pages)
of additional EPs, etc., based on the type of configurator connected to M).
BT00138-b-UK

344082
Configuration
Below are the various operating modes that can be assigned to the 4 programmable
keys:
MODE KEY FUNCTION NOTES
MOD =
1 Intercom on itself, it sends the call to all handsets with the same address.
EP activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the

2 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)
EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of
3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)
MOD = 1
1 Intercom on itself, it sends the call to all handsets with the same address.
N=1 N=2 N=2 N=3 N=3 N=2
Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
2 or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.
2 2 2

MOD = 2 N=1 N=3 N=2 N=1 N=3 N=1
1 1 1
N=1 N=2 N=2 N=3 N=3 N=2

BT00138-b-UK
2 2 2
1042 MY HOME Technical sheets – Video door entry system NEXT >>
344082
MOD = 3 N=1 N=5 N=2 N=1 N=3 N=1 N=4 N=1 N=5 N=1
1 1 1 1 1
N=1 N=2 N=2 N=5 N=3 N=2 N=4 N=2 N=5 N=2
2 2 2 2 2
N =1 N =3 N=2 N=3 N=3 N=5 N=4 N=3 N=5 N=3
3 3 3 3 3
N=1 N=4 N=2 N=4 N=3 N=4 N=4 N=5 N=5 N=4
4 4 4 4 4
MOD = 4 EP activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the
N=1 N=2 N=2 N=1
2 2
MOD = 5 EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of
BT00138-b-UK
<< PREVIOUS Technical sheets – Video door entry system MY HOME 1043
344082
MOD = 6 1 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module (SCENARIO 1)
2 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module (SCENARIO 2)

N=1 N=3 N=2 N=1 N=3 N=1
MOD = 7
1 1 1
N=1 N=2 N=2 N=3 N=3 N=2
2 2 2
MOD = 1 1 General Intercom, sends a call to all the handsets of the system.
N=1
MOD = 12
1 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850
1
BT00138-b-UK
N=2

2
1044 MY HOME Technical sheets – Video door entry system NEXT >>
344082

N=1
MOD = 13
1
N=2

2
N=3

3
N=4

4
3 General Intercom, sends a call to all the handsets of the system.
<< PREVIOUS
BT00138-b-UK

344082
Configuration
A B C D E
0 0 20 40 60 80
1 0 30 50 70 90
0 1 21 41 61 81
0 2 22 42 62 82
1 2 32 52 72 92
20 = B
0 3 23 43 63 83
40 = C
1 3 33 53 73 93
+ 60 = D
0 4 24 44 64 84
80 = E
0 5 25 45 65 85
0 6 26 46 66 86
1 6 36 56 76 96
0 7 27 47 67 87
0 8 28 48 68 88
A Configuration selected for the operation of the keys (see previous pages)
B Configuration selected for the operation of the keys + OFFICE function
C Configuration selected for the operation of the keys + PAGING function
D Configuration selected for the operation of the keys + HANDSFREE function
E Configuration selected for the operation of the keys, OFFICE and PAGING function
BT00138-b-UK

344082
OFFICE function detail
With the function active, when a call is received from

the entrance panel, the video handset rings and the
associated door lock is automatically released, without
the need for pressing the door lock release key on the
handset.
3
1
CLAK
To ENABLE the function EXIT

Led ON EXIT
Led ON EXIT
EXIT
BEEP
>3s BEEP
BEEP
>3s BEEP
>3s
>3s
To DISABLE the function Led ON
Led ON EXIT
Led ON EXIT
Led ON EXIT
EXIT
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
>3s BEEP
>3s BEEP
BEEP
>3s BEEP
BT00138-b-UK
>3s BEEP
WARNING: the “OFFICE” function cannot be activated together with the “DOOR STATUS” function.

344082
DOOR status function PuSH TO TaLK function

This function notifies the status of the door lock. If open, the “door lock LED” flashes, if If the entrance panel is in a particularly noisy position, during the conversation it will
closed, the LED stays off. be possible to enable the “PUSH TO TALK” function, which will provide a better quality
NOTES: it can only be enabled if the enabling option is included in the system; It of communication.
CANNOT be activated together with the OFFICE function. To enable the PUSH TO TALK function during the conversation proceed as follows:
- Press the Connection key for at least 2 seconds, to enable the communication with the
PaGING function entrance panel.
This function can be used to send voice messages using the microphone of the device The LED stays green.
through the speakers of the sound system. To activate briefly press the ”Connection” key - Release the key to listen to the entrance panel. The LED turns red.
while the device is in the idle condition. The activation of the function is confirmed by the - To end the connection press the Connection key briefly. The LED turns off.
green LED coming on. To DISABLE the function press the ”Connection” key again.
HaNDSFREE function
The HANDSFREE function automatically activates the microphone and the loudspeaker
when a call is received, without the need for pressing the Connection key to answer (the
connection is automatically established when the call is received).
To ENABLE the function

BEEP
BEEP EXIT
EXIT
BEEP
BEEP EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
To DISABLE the function BEEP

BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP EXIT
EXIT
BEEP
BEEP EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
Enable/disable key sound
In the base configuration, when a key is pressed, a beep is emitted. This function may be
disabled/enabled with the following procedure:
To ENABLE the function BEEP

BEEP
BT00138-b-UK
>3s
>3s
To DISABLE the function BEEP

BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
>3s
>3s
344082
Programming of bells
OK
1 1 OK
Bell selection from MAIN ENTRANCE PANEL (S=0) 1 1 OK
OK
OK
1 1 OK
11 21 OK
11 12 OK
11 121 EXIT
11 22 OK
>3s
11 EXIT
OK
>3s
11 16 21 EXIT
OK
OK
>3s 16 12 EXIT
OK
>3s 111 12211
16 OK
EXIT
>3s 111 16
17
12 OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
1111 17 EXIT
OK
>3s 1 OK
>3s 112111 21122
17 EXIT
OK
>3s 121 17
211 OK
EXIT
OK
>3s 111212 172211 EXIT
OK
EXIT
Bell selection from SECONDARY ENTRANCE
>3s PANEL (S=1) 112 17 EXIT
>3s
>3s 2 212 EXIT
OK
>3s 12112 17
17
17 OK
EXIT
221 EXIT
OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s
>3s
122 17 21 EXIT
EXIT
OK
>3s 1122 17 EXIT
>3s
>3s 112 17 21 EXIT
OK
EXIT
>3s 17 12 OK
OK
>3s 22 17
17 21
EXIT
OK
>3s 21122 1
17 2 1 EXIT
>3s 222 16
17
12 OK
EXIT
OK
OK
>3s 222 16 OK
EXIT
OK
1
21122
>3s EXIT
OK
>3s 22322 16
16 OK
EXIT
OK
>3s 232 211
17 OK
OK
EXIT
>3s 222333 17 22111 OK
EXIT
EXIT
2233 OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s 17 21 OK
INTERCOM CALL bell selection
>3s 2323 17
17 2221 EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s 233 17 2112 EXIT
EXIT
OK
>3s
>3s
>3s 22333 17 2 EXIT
EXIT
OK
>3s
>3s 223
33 17
1712 EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
17 1 EXIT
3223333 1221
>3s
>3s 17 OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s 333 17
17 OK
EXIT
17
12
17
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
>3s
>3s 333 12 EXIT
>3s 33433 17
2112
17
OK
OK
EXIT
343 16 OK
OK
>3s 211 EXIT
OK
>3s 33344 16 22111 EXIT
OK
EXIT
>3s 3343 16 OK
EXIT
>3s
16 21 OK
>3s 343 17 2211 OK
EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s 3444 17 212 EXIT
OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s
>3s 3344 17 21 EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXTERNAL INTERCOM CALL bell selection
>3s
>3s 334
44
17
17 21 OK
EXIT
OK
(only with interface item 346850) >3s
>3s
>3s 43344 17
1
17 221 EXIT
EXIT
OK
>3s 444 17
12
17 EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
>3s 444 17 1122 OK
EXIT
>3s 17
>3s 4444 2
17 1 EXIT
OK
>3s 44 17
21 OK
OK
EXIT
17 OK
EXIT
OK
>3s
>3s 444 2211 EXIT
>3s 444 17
17 121 OK
EXIT
OK
OK
>3s 4 16 2211 EXIT
EXIT
OK
>3s 4 1612 EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s 44
44 1712
16
16
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
BT00138-b-UK
>3s 172121 EXIT

OK
122
>3s
>3s 4 17 EXIT
OK
FLOOR CALL bell selection >3s 4 17
17 EXIT
OK
>3s 12
17 OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
>3s
>3s 17 12 EXIT
>3s 211
17
17 OK
EXIT
OK
>3s 21
17 EXIT
>3s 17 221 EXIT
>3s 17 2 EXIT
>3s 17 22 EXIT
EXIT
>3s 17 EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s
>3s 17
16
17 EXIT
>3s 16 EXIT
>3s 16
16
Polyx Memory Display 344163

2 WIRE wall mounted speaker phone video handset with audio and video memory.
With 3.5” colour LCD display with PC customisable icons OSD navigation menu for
the management of the following MY HOME applications: Video door entry system, 1
temperature control, sound system, scenarios, burglar alarm. With video door entry 12
system answering machine with call memory function.
LED signalling for: call exclusion, door status, connection with entrance panel, and
answering machine status. It can be wall mounted using the appropriate bracket 2
(supplied).
3
Programming and configuration using the TiPolyxMemoryDisplay software supplied
with the product. 11
10 4
Related items 9 5
346020 (additional 2 DIN modules power supply) - optional, for local powering of the
video handset, when maximum installation distances are necessary.
8 7 6
Retro
Technical data
Power supply dal SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
Stand by absorption: 10 mA 13
Max. operating absorption: 330 mA 14
Operating temperature: 0 - 40 °C 17 15
16
Dimensional data
168 mm 30 mm
Legend
1. Microphone
150 mm 2. 3.5 “ LCD colour display
3. Navigation and confirmation keys in the icon menu
4. Entrance panel/camera cycling activation key
5. Audio connection activation/deactivation key
6. Connection status LED
7. Loudspeaker
8. Door lock status LED
BT00385-a-UK
9. Door lock activation key

10. Audio video answering machine status LED
11. Answering machine key: enable/disable the answering machine function
(if enabled by the menu)
12. Bell exclusion notification LED
13. Mini USB connector for connection to the PC
15. Additional power supply connector (1-2)
16. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
17. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection
344163
Configuration
Polyx Memory Display can be configured in two different modes:
- Quick configuration (with physical configurator connection);

- Advanced configuration (using the TiPolyxMemoryDisplay software supplied).
The quick configuration enables the user to access the video door entry system function The PC advanced configuration using the software (CD supplied), provides the user with
menu. This is the standard configuration with configurators to be connected to their own the highest degree of customisation, with the possibility of:
sockets on the back of the device itself.
- create customized menus;
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed inside the apartment, configuration - customize text messages;
of the video handset using the software supplied is recommended. - access all home automation functions.
Connection to the PC
To transfer the configuration performed using the TiPolyxMemoryDisplay software
or to update the firmware, connect POLYX MEMORY DISPLAY to the PC using the
USB-miniUSB cable.
PM
N
N – handset number
The N configurator assigns to each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive order.Handsets with parallel
connection (max 3 are allowed inside apartments without item 346850) must be
configured using the same N configurator. In parallel with the main video handset,
additional handsets, video handsets and/or bells may be installed. USB-miniUSB
P – entrance panel association

The P configurator identifies the entrance panel associated, or the first entrance panel
to activate before pressing the key and which door lock is activated when the key
a is pressed while the video handset is idle.
M – Operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu page and therefore the preset functions
BT00385-a-UK
that may be used (see manual supplied with the product).
To ensure that the communication is successful, the POLYX MEMORY DISPLAY must be
powered and not physically configured.

Inductive LOOP module 344165
Description
2 WIRE inductive LOOP module to be used with Polyx Memory Display 344163 video
handset, to enable use by people wearing hearing aids (fitted with T selector).
The device must be configured with the same address (N) of the corresponding video
handset. Wall mounted installation without the need of accessories.
WARNING: The inductive loop module must only be activated AFTER establi- 1
shing the connection of the associated video handset to the entrance panel.
Technical data 2
Dimensional data
88 mm 24.5 mm
3
N
122 mm
8 4
ON
OFF 5
7
ON OFF 6
1. Activation key
2. Status signalling LED: green flashing = call notification
green steady = connection established
N * 3. Configurator socket
4. Jumper, to be removed to enable additional power supply connection
BT00384-a-UK
5. Additional power supply connection clamps

N = associated video handset number 6. Microphone
The N configurator assign to the device the same number of the handset of the associa-
ted video handset (configure with the same N of the video handset).
8. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps
(*) = Not used

AV Power supply 230 V 346000
Description
2-wire system power supply to be used in audio systems with 2-wire speaker modules or
with the universal speaker unit item 346991, for the creation of systems with up to 100
handsets (up to 56 when using item 346991), and in video systems with item 346830, 346000
with the audio/video node item F441, or the matrix item F441M.
The power supply must also be used for powering the sound systems. It can be used
as local power supply - additional power supply (output 1 – 2) – for video door entry
system advanced handsets.On the output it supplies 27 Vdc continuous low voltage,
with a maximum current of 1.2 A. It’s electronically protected (without fuses) against BUS 2 1
short circuit and overload. It is a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI
The power supply unit is inside a 8 DIN modules rail enclosure, and its installation must
be in accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
1 2 3

PRI (Power supply Vac input): 1 - 230 Vac input connection clamps
2 - SCS BUS output connection clamps
Rated voltage: 220 – 240 Vac 3 - Output 1—2 connection clamps
Rated current: 230 – 250 mA
Working voltage range: 207 – 253 Vac Assembly, Installation
Working frequency range: 50 – 60 Hz
Input power at full load: 44.9 W (max) Comply with the following installation requirements:
Dissipated power: 11 W (max)
Input power without load: 4.2 W (max) - The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures.
Operating temperature: 5 – 40 °C - It must be kept away from water drips and sprays.
Protection index: IP30 - Do not to obstruct the air vents.
- A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least 3
SEC (Vdc output): mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used both
to disconnect the power supply from the electric network, and to protect it.
Rated voltage (BUS): 27 Vdc +/- 0.1 Vdc
Rated voltage (1-2): 27 Vdc +/- 0.1 Vdc
Rated current: 0 – 1.2 A
Rated power: 32.4 W

Standards: CEI EN60065 - CEI 64-8-4 (par. 411.1.2.5)
Marks obtained:
Dimensional data
8 DIN modules
BT00153-b-UK

Additional power supply
230 V 346020
Description
2 DIN module devices which allows to: 1
- locally supply the single video door entry handsets and entrance panels.
- supply some accessories of the Communication and MY HOME catalogues (ex: Web
server, A/V server, scenario programmers, 2 WIRE/IP interface, switch 10/100, ADSL
modem router, Hub-TV and SCS modulator).
It is a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI.
The power supply is enclosed by a 2 DIN module plastic rail enclosure, and its installation PR I
must be in accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
Technical data 346020

PRI: 220 - 240V~
PRI (AC power supply input) 175-165mA
Rated voltage: 220 – 240 Vac 50/60Hz
Rated current: 180 – 190 mA 1-2: 27Vdc

600mA
Working voltage range: 187 – 265 V
3
Input power at full load: 20 W max
Dissipated power: 3.8 W (max.) 1- 2
Performance at full load: 80% typ.
Power in stand by: <1W
Integrated fuse (PRI side): F1 T2A 250V (CANNOT BE REPLACED)
1 - 2 (DC output):
Rated voltage: 27 V +/- 100 mV 2
Rated current: 0 – 0.6 A
Rated power: 16.2 W
Standards, Certifications, Marks Legend

Standards: CEI EN60065 1 - 230 Vac input connection clamps
2 - Output 1 – 2 connection clamps
3 - Operating status notification LEDs:
Dimensional data
(GREEN ON) – normal operation of the power supply
2 DIN modules (RED ON) – output current overload
Comply with the following installation requirements:
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures

- It must be kept away from water drips and sprays.
- Do not to obstruct the air vents.
mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used to
BT00156-b-UK
disconnect the power supply from the mains, and to protect it.

Mini power supply 230 V 346030
Description
1
2 DIN module device for:
- basic video door entry systems (e.g. apartment intercom)
- mini SOUND SYSTEMS (absorption up to 600 mA).
It is a double insulation safety device.
The power supply is inside a module plastic rail enclosure, and its installation must be in
accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
The device must not be configured. PRI
Technical data
PRI (power supply input AC):
Rated voltage: 220 – 240 Vac
Rated current: 200 - 190 mA
Working voltage range: 187 – 265 V
Input power at full load: 21.5 W max 4
Dissipated power: 5.3 W (max.)
Performance at full load: 80% typ.
Power in stand by: <1W SCS A-V SCS
Integrated fuse (PRI side): F1 T2A 250V (CANNOT BE REPLACED)
SCS A-V; SCS:

Rated voltage: 27 V +/- 100 mV 2 3
Rated current: 0 – 0.6 A WARNING: THE (SCS A-V) AND (SCS) OUTPUT CANNOT BE USED AT THE
Rated power: 16.2 W SAME TIME

Standards: CEI EN60065 - CEI 64-8-4 Legend
1 - 230 Vac input connection clamps 50-60 Hz
Dimensional data 2 - SCS AV output connection clamps (27 V)
2 DIN modules 3 - SCS output connection clamps (BUS 27V)
4 - Operating status notification LEDs:
(GREEN ON) - normal operation of the power supply
(RED ON) - output current overload
Comply with the following installation requirements:
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures.

- It must be kept away from water drips and sprays.
- Do not to obstruct the air vents.
BT00155-b-UK
mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used both
to disconnect the power supply from the electric network, and to protect it.

Actuator 346200
Description
Relay actuator for digital systems. It allows to switch on lights, to open gate door locks,
to control other devices and to repeat call on bell (badenia type). MOD M N/P T
4
Technical data
Contact output: 230 Vac - 6 A resistive - 2 A inductive (cosϕ = 0.5)
SELV device 1 1
3 2
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
Legend
1 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire BUS and power supply 1 - 2
2 - Clamps for the connection of the load to be controlled
3 - Clamps for the connection of an additional pushbutton
BT00160-b-UK

346200
Configuration
MOD M N/P T
The device must be physically configured in terms of: 4
MOD = Operating mode

The configurator in MOD establishes the operating mode of the actuator (see following
5
tables)
M = number of the riser

In systems with several risers, it identifies on which riser the actuation must be
performed
N/P = Handset/Entrance panel number

It defines the association with the Handset or the EP address from which the actuation
must be performed.
T = relay closure time delay

The configurator connected to T sets the relay closing time delay (see corresponding
table).
MOD = 0 - Staircase light from any handset and EP

- The actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of the handset and the light MOD M N/P T
key on the entrance panel

- Customize the time through the configurator T. T = 0 closes the contact for 30”
MOD = 1 - Sundry services (door lock/open the gate/staircase light) from

handset unit Example
- The actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of the handset belonging to MOD M N/P T MOD M N/P T
a group
- Customize the time through the configurator T. 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
- Insert in M the ten and the units of the first handset of the group
Tens Unit Door lock control from the light key of the
- Insert in N/P the ten and the units of the last handset of the group handsets configured from 1 to 12
Unit Tens
NOTES: a group is a sequence set of handsets. T = 1 closes the contact for 1”
MOD = 2 - Staircase lights from all riser handsets

- The actuator is enabled by pressing the staircase light key of all riser handsets Example
- Customize the time through the configurator T. MOD M N/P T MOD M N/P T
- Connect the M configurator of the system expansion interface, item 346851
(configured with MOD = 5) to M 2 2 1 9
Tens Staircase light control from all handsets of
Unit the riser 19
T = 0 closes the contact for 30”
BT00160-b-UK
MOD = 2 - Staircase lights from all entrance panel (if fitted with the
corresponding key) MOD M N/P T
- With (MOD = 2) the actuator activates when the light pushbutton of any (preset)
entrance Panel is pressed 2
Not inserting the configurator
- Customize the time through the configurator T. corresponds to insert 0

346200
MOD = 3 - Sundry services from single handset

- The actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of only one handset. Example
- Put in N/P the ten and the units of the handset that controls the relay
3 1 3 1 5 1
Unit Door lock control from the light key of the
Tens handset configured with 15
T=1 closes the contact for 1 s
MOD = 4 - Staircase light from EP

- With (MOD = 4) the actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of only one Example
entrance panel. MOD M N/P T MOD M N/P T
- Customize the time through the configurator T.
- Put in N/P the ten and the units of the handset that controls the relay 4 5 4 3 5
Unit Door lock control from the light key of the
Tens handset configured with P=3
T=5 closes the contact for 1 min
MOD = 5 - Door lock control from all handsets

- Direct door lock opening with handset in pause. The actuator is enabled by pressing Example
the door lock pushbutton of all handsets. MOD M N/P T MOD M N/P T
- Put in N/P the ten and the units of the associated entrance panel that controls the door 5 1 5 2 1
lock.
Door lock control of the entrance panel
Unit
configured with P=2 from the door lock
Tens pushbutton of all the associated handsets
MOD = 5 - Door lock control from PIVOT/SWING/POLYX handsets additional keys

- Direct door lock opening with handset in pause. Example
- Insert in N/P the address that the actuator must take inside the system.
The N/P value inserted in the actuator must be between P + 1 and P + 4 of 5 1 5 21
the P configurator P inserted in the handset which controls the door lock.
Door lock control by pressing the key
For further information on the configurations of the SWING/POLYX handsets and the 4 2 of the 4 keys set for PIVOT (PIVOT
additional keys set for PIVOT make reference to the relating technical sheets. P+1
configured with P = 0)
P+2
P+3
P+4
MOD = 7 - Light on for illumination of the viewing field

At the same time as sending a call from the entrance panel or activating a camera (N/P
BT00160-b-UK
Example
configuration), the actuator also closes the contact, keeping it closed until: MOD M N/P T MOD M N/P T
- if the call is answered, the contact opens when the communication is terminated or
the conversation timeout activates (<1 min.) 7 7 2
- if the call is not answered, the contact opens after 30 seconds (at the end of the call
forwarding timeout). Closing of contact upon call from the
The number of the EP or camera to EP configured with P=2.
associate to the actuator The contact opens after the call is
terminated or after 30 seconds
(if there is no answer)

346200
MOD = 9 - Sundry services (door lock/open the gate/staircase light) from

PIVOT/SWING/POLYX handsets additional keys Example
- Direct door lock opening with handset in pause. MOD M N/P T MOD M N/P T
- Insert in N/P the address that the actuator must take inside the system. 9 2 9 3 2
The N/P value inserted in the actuator must be between P + 1 and P + 4 of the P
Device control by pressing the key 2 of the 4
configurator P inserted in the handset which controls the service. keys set for PIVOT (PIVOT congured with P = 2)
P+1
For further information on the configurations of the SWING/POLYX handsets and the T=2 closes the contact for 3 s
P+2
4 additional keys set for PIVOT make reference to the relating sections configurations. P+3
P+4
MOD = SLA - Call repetition on Badenia bell

- Repeat the calls coming from the entrance panel on Badenia bell. Example
- Customize the time through the configurator T. (with configurators O (-), 5, 6, 7, 8, the MOD M N/P T MOD M N/P T
bell rings for 30 s max) S S
- Insert in N/P the tens and units of the handset associated to the function. L
A
3 L
A
1 6 3
* The SLA configurator must be bought separately from the configurator kit Unit The Badenia bell rings for 6 seconds each
(item 3501K). Item code for SLA configurator: item 3501/SLA. time there is a call addressed to the handsets
Tens configured with N=16
T =3 the Badenia bell rings for 6 s and stops
when the call is answered
T configuration (timing)
The T values mentioned in the examples are only an indication of the times commonly T configurator Time
used for the different applications.
By inserting in the T socket a configurator (as mentioned in the table) the relay door none 3 min.
locking time can be customized. 1 1 sec.
2 3 sec.
3 6 sec.
4 10 sec.
5 1 min.
6 6 min.
7 10 min.
8 pushbutton
9 cyclic (ON/OFF)
BT00160-b-UK

346200
Wiring diagram
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
BUS IN BUS OUT

NC C NO
230V~
6A
A A 2A
= 0,5
SELV
2-wire standard wiring diagram
HANDSET Bus
2
TK Bus 2
346000 346200
BUS BUS
TK PI
PS
BUS 2 1
5 6 7 8 NC C NO
346830 1 2 3 4
230 Vac
~
C NO
2
BT00160-b-UK

Door lock actuator 346230
Description
2-wire system door lock actuator.
It can be used to actuate an electrical door lock without the need for a local transformer, 1
activated by a dedicated handset key.
In systems with handsets with specific LED, it enables to perform the “LOCK STATUS” 1 2 PL S+ S-
function when a CISA ELETTRIKA door lock is used.
346230
Related items
346240 CISA ELETTRIKA door lock accessory
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc P
J J
T M M M 2
P P
Contact load (PL/S+): 6 A – 24 Vac max (cosϕ=1)

2 DIN modules 1 - Clamps for the connection of door lock and additional pushbutton
3 - 2 WIRE BUS connection clamps
Configuration
The device must be physically configured in terms of:
P - Associated entrance panel number J J

A configurator like the one connected to P of the entrance panel must be connected to P T M M M
this socket. When the actuator is associated to the main entrance panel, no configurator P P
must be connected to P.
T - Door lock relay timing

The configurator connected to T sets the relay closing time delay as shown in the
18V 4A The accessory item 346240
following table:
must be fitted inside the
configurator number door lock.
0= No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
configurator
as 1 2 PL S+ S-
ELETTRIKA
pushbutt.
M - Operating mode
M=0 - Door lock relay standard operation
J J
M=1 - Door lock relay operation + “door lock status control” – only with handsets fitted P T 1 M M
P P
with door lock status LED and specific CISA ELETTRIKA door lock with Accessory item
J J
BT00161-b-UK
J M
J
P T M1 M
1 2
P P
346240. M=1
M=4 - With interface 349410 only it enables:
- with analogue system and audio Tersystem, the direct control of the electrical door lock
- with videoporter 2000, the call to the switchboard
JMP - Jumpers to be removed when an auxiliary transformer is used (4A max.)

346230
Wiring diagram - 2-wire standard Wiring diagram - with auxiliary transformer
SCS-BUS SCS-BUS
*A 18 V - 4 A impulsive
250 mA holding current *A
*A = door lock release

pushbutton
1 2 PL S+ S-
1 2 PL S+ S-
346230
346230
J J
J J P T M M M
P T M M M P P
P P
346000 V~
346000
Remove the jumpers

J J
*A= door lock release M M
pushbutton P P
BT00161-b-UK

Door lock relay 346250
Description
Relay module for gate opening to be used only with audio/video SFERA item 342560,
LINEA 2000, LINEA 2000 METAL and MINISFERA entrance panels.
It allows to open door locks (NOT managed by BUS) by means of the above mentioned S- S+ C NC NO
entrance panels (NOT fitted with relay). The device must not be configured.
Related items
342560 (SFERA audio/video speaker module)
342702 (MINISFERA audio speaker module) 1 2
342708 (MINISFERA video speaker module)
342911/21 (LINEA 2000 audio EP)
342951/61 (LINEA 2000 video EP)
Legend
342971/72 (LINEA 2000 METAL audio EP)
342981/82 (LINEA 2000 METAL b/w video EP) 1 - Clamps for connection to the entrance panel
342991/92 (LINEA 2000 METAL colour video EP) 2 - Clamps- contacts for connection to the electrical door lock
343001/02 (LINEA 2000 METAL flush mounted EP)
Connection example
BUS
PL
S+ 346250
S-
A
S- S+ C NC NO
NO 24 Vac/24 Vdc
NC 24 Vac
C 24 Vac
D - EP - relay distance
Max. distance (D) depending on the cable used
TYPE OF CABLE mm² BTicino BTicino mm²

CABLE SECTION 0.28 Item 336904 Item L4669 1
D 30 m 50 m 30 m 100 m
A = door lock release pushbutton
BT00172-b-UK

Timed door lock
actuator 346260
Description
Timed door lock actuator for 2 WIRE system.
2 3
It can be used for switching the lights on, opening gates, or manage electromagnetic
door locks, timed door opening, and door status (with NC contact).
The DOOR STATUS function can only be used with door entry systems and video door
- TMP PL RC C NC NO/S+ S-
entry systems fitted with signalling LEDs, and when a magnetic door status contact is
present. ART. 346260
It may also be used in systems integrated with an appropriately configured ACCESS T= -5 +45°C
IP 30
CONTROL system.
5
Technical data 6
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 1 SCS J J
M M 4
P P
Operating temperature: 5 – 40 °C - TMP PL RC
Dimensional data 7
4 DIN modules WARNING: if the TMP and RC contacts are not used,
short circuit TMP and RC with (-)
Legend
2 - Door status connection clamps:
(-) Common
(TMP) Anti tamper line contact (normally closed on -)
(PL) Door opening pushbutton contacts (normally open on -)
(RC) Door status magnetic contact (normally closed on -)
3 - Electromagnetic door lock connection clamps:

(C) Common
(NC) Normally closed contact
(NO/S+) Normally open contact
(S-) Contact for door lock power supply from BUS (to be used with NO/S+)
5 - Door opening local pushbutton
6 - Notification red LED: flashing in case of system tampering
7 - Notification orange LED: on when the relay is active
(flashing orange + red LEDs for open door notification)
BT00165-b-UK

346260
Configuration
P M R T J1 J2
P - Associated entrance panel number J J
A configurator like the one inserted in P of the entrance panel must be connected to A B C M M
P P
this socket. When the actuator is associated to the main entrance panel, no configurator
must be connected to P.
A = DO NOT USE (access control only)
B - C = P CONFIGURATOR SOCKETS
M = Operating mode
Assigns the operating mode to the internal relay of the actuator, based on the following
table:
M= 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Management of Signal
YES YES repetition YES YES NO NO
access control
Management of 2 WIRE NO NO NO YES YES YES YES
Normally Normally closed. Signal Normally Normally closed. Normally Normally

Actuator relay status open Electromagnetic repetition open Electromagnetic open closed
door lock door lock
R = Enabling/disabling of the anticipated relay switching function(1)
Configurator 0 1
Advance of closing Enabled (2 sec.) Disabled
T = Door lock relay timing
Configurator
Configurator 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Time
Time sec.
sec. 44 11 10
10 20
20 40
40 60
60 90
90 180
180
J1 - J2 = Jumpers for the selection of the door lock power supply

CONNECTED = DOOR LOCK POWERED BY THE BUS
DISCONNECTED = DOOR LOCK POWERED BY AN EXTERNAL DEVICE
NOTES:
(1) If enabled, 2 seconds after the opening of the entrance, anticipated relay switching (3) In this mode, the software forces the relay to perform the opposite operation
occurs, irrespective of the T time set (this function can be used with door status (positive safety). The NO contact stays in the closed status, and is opened in order to
magnetic contact and for T = s). open the door (passage). In case of power cut from the main power line (230 Vac),
the relay opens, and the door lock opens, even if the power supply line of the door
BT00165-b-UK
(2) The device supplies the NC and NO contacts of the internal relay. It is therefore locks is fitted with a back-up battery.
possible, also with M = 0, to use the internal relay as normally closed.
It must be NOTESd that in case of power cut from the power line (230 Vac), the relay (4) Operation as signal repeater. In case of system intrusion or opening of a door,
stays normally closed and, if the power supply of the electric door lock is fitted with the relay output can also activate an external notification device (sound or visual
a back-up battery, the door lock stays closed. notification), based on the time value set in T.
(5) Integration mode between video door entry system and access control (see
instructions of item 348000).

346260
Connection example
S2
A 18 V 4 A
EP: P=1
P N T S
1
BUS - TMP PL RC C NC NO/S+ S-
H
TK BUS
ART. 346260
T= -5 +45°C
IP 30
*
A = Door lock pushbutton in the entrance-hall
*S+ S- = 18V 4A impulsive 250mA
BUS BUS
holding current
346000 TK PI
J J
BUS PL S+ S- SCS M M P M R T J1 J2
P P
J J
BUS 2 1
PS
15 M M
P P
A
S1 230 Vac 346830
BT00165-b-UK

Video adapter 346830
Description
2 WIRES video adapter that must be used wih the power supply item 346000 in the 2 3
installation of video systems (or audio/video combined), video door entry systems and
sound systems.
Allows the connection to its 3 BUS clamps. Hence it is possible to realize installations
with 2 video entrance panels and 1 riser and installations with 1 video entrance panel
and 2 risers. BUS BUS
TK PI
The device must be installed next to the system power supply item 346000.
Related items
PS
346000 (2 WIRE system power supply)
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 - 27 Vdc 1
Operating temperature: 5 - 40°C

2 DIN modules. 1 - BUS PS input from the power supply (removable clamp)
2 - BUS TK output towards the EP (fixed clamp entrance panels)
3 - BUS output towards the handsets (fixed clamp handsets)
BT00170-b-UK

Floor call
interface 346833
Description
Floor call interface which allows, by means of a traditional pushbutton, to make the
following functions:
- general floor call
- addressed floor call 1
- staircase light switching on
- Door lock opening (with specific actuator)
- associate the video image to the call to the floor
WARNING: the maximum connection distance between the interface and the
connected pushbuttons must not exceed 3 metres.
Technical data
2 3

1 - Configurator socket (to access remove the upper plastic protection cover)
BASIC plastic enclosure 2 - Clamps for the connection to the 2-wire BUS
40 mm 18 mm
3 - Clamps for the connection of the pushbuttons / contacts (connect a pushbutton
between PL1 and C and one between PL2 and C)
40 mm
Configuration
N = address of the handset to call

(To be used only with MOD = 0)
P = address of the entrance panel associated to the door lock to open

(To be used only with MOD = 2 and MOD = 3)

the configurator connected to MOD assigns the operating modes to the pushbuttons
connected between (PL1 and C) and (PL2 and C), as shown in the table:
BT00167-b-UK
MOD N P PL1 PL2

0 Handset address (00-99) - Addressed floor call Staircase lights from Handset with 00
1 - - General floor call Staircase lights from Handset with 00
2 - Door lock address (00-95) Door lock opening Staircase lights from Handset with 00
3 - Door lock address (00-95) Door lock opening Door lock opening (P+1)
4(*) Handset address (00-99) Camera address (00-95) - -
(*): see installation notes on next page.

346833
Installation notes
The MOD = 4 configuration mode enables associating the video image of a camera to the
call to the floor generated by the off-door pushbutton.
To use this function correctly, the following must be taken into account:
- The involved handsets, the 346833 interface, and the camera must be physically
connected on the same SCS BUS.
- In multi-family systems connect the involved devices downstream the apartment
interface item 346850 - (cameras and handsets are local resources of the individual
user).
- The active function keeps the SCS BUS busy for approximately 30”, during which no
other call can be forwarded. If the handset connects, the BUS will be busy until the
TIME OUT period elapses, or the handset itself is disconnected.
- Only the following 2-wire BTicino cameras that can be used for this function: 391670
– 391657 – 391658 – 391659 – 391667 – 391668 - 391669 – 391661 – 391662 –
391663.
BT00167-b-UK

Floor shunt 346841
Description
The floor distribution block can be used for video door entry systems with a star 1
distribution of the wiring.
The distribution block is in a plastic enclosure with much reduced dimensions for easier
positioning (above all during the refurbishments) even with the installation inside flush ART. 346841
mounted boxes.
It is also possible to install systems with combined wiring risers, where a part can be of
IN/OUT type and the other part is used for the floor distribution block.
The device automatically adapts the video signal.
Max. 3 devices (handsets, bells or additional bells) can be connected on the same output. 2

Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 1 - 4 outputs (P1, P2, P3, P4) - handset BUS
Stand by absorption: 15 mA 2 - Input/output of riser (IN-OUT) on the same pair of clamps
Dimensional data
BASIC plastic enclosure
40 mm 18 mm
ART. 346841
40 mm
BT00164-b-UK

Apartment interface 346850
Description
Interface to be used to install a dedicated 2-wire system inside the home, isolated from 6
the riser.
The system downstream the interface may include local CCTV, sound system, and MY
HOME applications control.
It can be used for calls within the building, as well as outside calls.
346850
INT
Technical data
2
Operating temperature: 5 - 40°C EXT 3
ON
4
Stand by absorption: 7 ON OFF
from the INT 15 mA connection

from the EXT 5 mA connection
Operating Maximum absorption:

5 1
from the INT 50 mA connection
from the EXT 30 mA connection

4 DIN modules 1 - Configurator socket: N = interface address, M = 3 (connected at the factory)
2 - Interface status notification LED:
Flashing green LED = STAND BY
Fixed green LED = EXT-INT connection active
3 - Video signal status notification LED:

Green LED = OK
Green/red LED = operation close to the limit
Red LED = no video signal or limits exceeded
4 - Not used
5 - Clamp for the connection to the 2 WIRE riser
6 - Clamp for the connection of the apartment 2 WIRE system
BT00168-b-UK

346850
Installation
example
N = device ID number
The configurator assigns to the interface a unique handset number inside the system.
M = Operating mode
factory configuration with 3
IN T 346850
N = 13 EXT
ON
ON OF F
N M N = 12
2
N
3M
system identification 3 operating mode
number on the
handsets side
N M NO
Example of configuration N = 12
1N 2 3M No handset within the system can be
N=1 2 WIRE riser
configured with N = 12
123
the interface must
be considered as
handset number 12
BT00168-b-UK

System expansion
interface 346851
Description
Interface for the installation of independent audio risers, to double the length of 6
the riser line, or to increase the performance of the 2-wire system in one-family, or
apartment systems.
Technical data 346851

2
3
ON
Absorption:
4
IN clamp (MOD=0)
Stand by absorption: 30 mA 7 ON OFF
IN clamp (MOD=5)
Stand by absorption: 5 mA 5 1
OUT clamp (MOD=0)

Stand by absorption: 50 mA Legend
Max. operating absorption: 50 mA 1 - Configurator socket
2 - Interface status notification LED:
OUT clamp (MOD=5) - flashing green = STAND BY
Stand by absorption: 15 mA - fixed green = active IN-OUT connection
3 - Video signal level notification LED:
Dimensional data - fixed green = operation OK
- green/red = operation close to the limit
4 DIN modules
- fixed red = no video signal or limits exceeded
4 - Not used
5 - Clamps for BUS connection in input
6 - Clamps for BUS connection in output
BT00169-b-UK

346851
Configuration
The device must be physically configured in terms of: M MOD
M = progressive number inside the system

It identifies the interface number within the system

MOD = 0 (Galvanic separation mode)
MOD = 5 (Independent risers mode)
NOTES: with (MOD =5) and (MOD = 0), with the same progressive no. it is possible to
have inside the same system no. 2 interfaces item 346851, configured, for example, one
with (M=1) and (MOD=0) and the other with (M=1) and (MOD=5).
Galvanic separation mode (MOD=0):

used to double the length of the line, or to increase the performance of the system.
M = progressive number of the interface inside the system (from 1 to 99)
Independent risers mode (MOD=5):

M = number of the riser (from 1 to 39)
M MOD The handsets connected to the single riser will be identified at the main entrance
panel by the M configurator of 346851 x 100 + the N configurator of the single
5 handset.
Riser 7
No. of the riser interface for
independent
risers
Handset 18
2
N = 18
riser riser riser

1 2 3
2 2 2 718 2
M=1 M=2 M = 39
346851 346851 346851 346851
MOD = 5 MOD = 5 MOD = 5 M=7
ON ON ON
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

346851
MOD = 5
2 2 2 2 ON OFF
ON
2 wire backbone 2 2
BT00169-b-UK
Main entrance
panel 2 wire backbone
As far as the main EP is concerned, the handset is number 718: this is the M of 346851
(7) x 100 + N of the handset connected to the riser (18).
(7 x 100) + 18 = 718

Coaxial - 2 WIRE
interface 347400
Description
Interface used for connecting the cameras with 12 Vdc power supply (max. absorption 3
150 mA) and coaxial video output (1 Vpp @ 75 ohm) to the 2-wire video BUS.
The interface provides direct power supply to the camera.
the device can be used as an interface for the separate camera; to associate a camera to
an audio entrance panel simply configure both the camera and the entrance panel using
the same configurator in P. 4
Technical data
Max. operating absorption: 210 mA - see NOTES (*)
Operating temperature: (-20) – (+70)°C
Distance
347400 - COAX cameras
(*) NOTES: max. 150 mA when the interface supplies power to the 12 V camera 2 1 max. 3 m

1 - Clamps for the connection of the camera power supply (12 Vdc - 150 mA max.)
BASIC plastic enclosure 2 - Clamps for the connection of the camera video signal output
40 mm 18 mm 4 - Configurator socket (to access remove the upper plastic protection cover)
40 mm
BT00162-b-UK

347400
Configuration
P N Z M A PL
P = camera address
The configurator in seat P of the interface assigns to it a recognition number inside
the system. The interface is considered as a video entrance panel, therefore it must be
configured with a progressive number in relation to (P) of the entrance panel.
N = address of the handset called in case of alarm

In those systems integrated with Bticino burglar alarm systems, the configurator
connected to N of the interface, determines which handset must be called in case of
alarm occurred in the Z zone configured in the interface. Then, the handset will display
the images of the interface associated to the Z zone.
Z = zone of the burglar-alarm system associated to the camera
M = Operating mode
M = 0 - standard operation
M = SLA - Configuration for association to several audio EP PI M= SLA
A/PL = Address of the SCS light actuator connected to the camera PI - PN = Range of audio EP associated
S
Address of the scenarios module associated to the camera to the camera (max 5).
P N Z L A PL
In systems integrated with BTicino automation applications, the configurator connected A
to A/PL of the interface associates the switching on of the camera with the activation of
a SCS actuator configured with the same A/PL. PN
(Example: switching on of lights to illuminate the field of view, only with camera active).
BT00162-b-UK

347400
Configuration
Interface Interface
EP 1 EP 2 CAM. 1 CAM. 2
P N T S P N T S P N Z M A PL P N Z M A PL
1 2 3
System with 2 video EP and 2 cameras.
EP 1
Interface Interface
CAM. 1 CAM. 2
P N T S P N Z M A PL P N Z M A PL
1 1 2
System with audio EP and 2 camera (CAM. 1 associated to the EP)
P N Z M A PL
S P N Z M A PL
1 2 L S
A PI PN L
A
Pi: address of the first audio EP

Pn: address of the last audio EP
BT00162-b-UK
BUS BUS
TK PI
346000
346000
PS
BUS 2 1
P=0 P=1 P=2 346830
Coupling the switching on of the camera with several audio EP (max. 5)

AXOLUTE Outdoor
entrance panel 349140
Description
Front view
Axolute outdoor entrance panel suitable for connection to the 2-WIRE system BUS or to 1
be used in BTicino IP systems. It’s fitted with capacitive soft touch control backlit keypad,
motorised colour camera (which swivelling operation can be controlled from the preset 2
handsets), colour display with home page that can be fully customised by the installer,
and transponder reader for the release of the door lock, which may also be activated
using a numeric code for residents. Module to be completed with flush mounted box
3
and surround plate. Programming, residents directory, and the configuration are
completed using the appropriate software supplied with the product.
Related items
339313 (Steel flush mounted box with tearing protection)
331130 (SFERA plastic flush mounted box) 4
339213 (Surround plate + frame, steel finish)

339223 (Surround plate + frame, brass finish)
5
6
Technical data
Max. operating absorption: 420 mA Rear view
Connections: 2-WIRE SCS BUS
Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/sec
PI against mechanical impact: IK07
7
8
Dimensional data
9 12
104 mm 50 mm 84 mm 35.5 mm 10 11
300 mm
253 mm
Flush mounted box Electric module Legend
27.5 1 - Loudspeakers
139 mm mm 139 mm 30 mm
2 - Colour camera that can be swivelled
3 - LCD colour display
4 - Capacitive alphanumeric keypad: to search for the extension and for sending the
BT00134-b-UK
call, as well as for enabling the installer to complete the programming procedure
5 - Transponder reader: to open the door lock using the transponder
330 mm
355 mm
6 - Microphone
8 - Mini-USB connector: for PC connection, for programming or firmware update
9 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire SCS BUS
10 - Additional power supply connection clamps
Steel surround plate + frame Brass surround plate + frame 11 - Cable fastener
Protrusion from the wall: Protrusion from the wall:
11 mm 13.5 mm 12 - Ethernet connector: for connection to the IP BTicino system and for programming
and firmware update from PC

349140
Configuration
The device can be configured in three different modes:
1) Physical connection fo the configurators to their sockets:

Entrance panel Ring tone selection /
The configurator connected to P socket assigns an identification number within the address general call
system to the EP. The numbering of the EP must always start from P=0.
The EP configured with P=0 must be the main one.
S - selection of the ring tone to send to the Handset and general call
When a call is received: S=0 (RING TONE 1 - Default)
S=1 (RING TONE 2)
S=2 (RING TONE 3)
S=3 (RING TONE 4)
S=9 (GENERAL CALL TO ALL THE HANDSETS)
2) Directly from the keypad of the electronic module:

Using the installer menu (Password protected function)
Configuration
Configuration of the
SCS address of the
entrance panel
WARNING: the presence of physical configurators in the configurator sockets

WILL PREVENT keypad configuration.
BT00134-b-UK

349140
Configuration
3) Using the TiAxoluteOutdoor Software supplied:
For the connection to the PC use an USB-mini cable or an Ethernet cable (cross cable).
The dedicated application can be used for configuration, programming, device Firmware
update, fill the residents list, save all information, and download to the device.
USB connection
BUS
Ethernet connection
Cross cable
BUS
BT00134-b-UK
If the Axolute EP is installed and has Ethernet connection, remote connection is also possible.
WARNING: in order for the communication to take place, the EP must be powered and not physically configured.

349140
Wiring diagrams
2-WIRE SCS BUS connection
349140
230 Vac
346000 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4

346830 346230
346020
or 1 2 PL S+ S- or 35,
OUT F441 346230 346260

PRI: 220 - 240V~
175- A
IN 50/60
165m z
H
1- 27Vdc
2: 600 A
m
3 7

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SCS
BUS 2 1
BUS 1 2 2 1
230 Vac
OPTIONAL
NOTES (*): needed for lines (SCS power supply - EP) > 50 m (with cable item 336904)
IP Ethernet connection
349140
230 Vac
12 Vac 1 A
346230 346000 346020

1 2 PL S+ S- or 35,
346230 346260

PRI: 220 - 240V~
175-
50/60
165m z
A
H
1- 27Vdc
2: 600 A
m
3 7
SWITCH C9455 BUS 2 1 2 1
230 Vac OPTIONAL

BT00134-b-UK
'&,Q
1 2 BUS
IP
NOTES (*): needed for lines (SCS power supply - EP) > 50 m (with cable item 336904)

AXOLUTE
VIDEO STATION 349310
Description
2-wire speaker phone video handset for wall mounted installation.
With 5.6” colour LCD display with PC customisable OSD navigation icon menu for
1
the management of the following MY HOME applications: video door entry system,
temperature control, sound system, automation (scenarios) and anti-intrusion.
In systems integrated with the sound system, the VIDEO STATION behaves as an amplifier,
enabling playback of all audio/video sources connected to the system. 2
LED signalling for: call exclusion, door status, and connection to the entrance panel.
Suitable for wall mounted installation using the special bracket (supplied as standard).
3 3
Programming and configuration using the TiAxoluteStation software supplied with the
10
product. 4
9 5
Related items Front view 8 7 6
349210 - Surround plate (satin-finished aluminium)

349211 - Surround plate (KRISTALL glass)
Legend
349212 - Surround plate (TEAK wood)
1 - 5.6” colour LCD display
2 - Navigation keypad and confirmation inside the menu
Technical data 3 - Loudpspeakers; for the diffusion of voice and stereo sound
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 4 - Connection key; enable/disable the connection
Stand by absorption: 10 mA 5 - Microphone
Max. operating absorption: 410 mA 6 - Connection status LED
Operating temperature: 5 - 40°C 7 - LED for call exclusion notification
8 - Door lock status LED
9 - Door lock opening key
Dimensional data 10 - Keys for video door entry functions
161 mm
307 mm
257 mm
5 1
2
4
226 mm 35
105.5 mm 120.5 mm
Rear view
BT00137-b-UK
165 mm
Legend
4 - Mini-USB connector for PC connection
140 mm

349140
The advanced PC configuration using the TiAxolutestation software (CD supplied),

Configuration
provides the user with a higher degree of customisation, with the possibility to:
AXOLUTE VIDEO STATION can be configured in 2 different modes:
- create flexible menus
- Fast configuration (through the connection of physical configurators) - customize text messages
- Advanced configuration using the TiAxoluteStation software supplied with the - access all home automation functions
product.
Fast configuration enables the user to access the menu of the video door entry To transfer the configuration performed using the TiAxolutestation software,
functions. This is the standard configuration using configurators to be connected to the or to update the firmware, connect Axolute Video Station to the PC using the
appropriate socket on the back of the device itself. USB-mini cable.
Warning: If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed in the apartment,
configuration of the video handset using the software supplied is recommended.
USB-miniUSB
To ensure that communication is successful, Axolute Video Station

must be powered and not physically configured.
1
WARNING
The device configuration 2 3
made using configurators
CANNOT BE MODIFIED using
the software.
N P M
N - numero del Handset

The N configurator assigns each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive mode. Handsets with parallel
connection (max 3 are allowed inside the apartment without item 346850) must be
configured with the same N configurator. Additional audio handsets, video handsets
BT00137-b-UK
and/or bells can be installed in parallel to the basic video handset.

The P configurator identifies the associated EP, or the first entrance panel that switches
itself on when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed the first time, as well as which door lock
with idle video handset is activated, when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed.
M - Operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu of the device and therefore all the usable
preset functions (see manual supplied with the product).

AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY 349311-349312-349313
Description
2-wire speaker phone video handset for flush mounted installation. With 2.5” colour LCD
display with PC customisable OSD navigation icon menu for the management of the
following MY HOME applications: video door entry system, temperature control, sound
system, automation (scenarios) and anti-intrusion. LED signalling for: call exclusion,
door status, and connection to the entrance panel. 1
Suitable for flush mounted installation using item 506 boxes. To be completed with front
cover plate (all those suitable for item 506E of the AXOLUTE series). 10
Programming and configuration using the TiAxoluteDisplay software supplied with the
product. 9
2
3
Related items 8 4
item 506E 3+3 modules flush mounted box
item PB526 3+3 modules plasterboard box
item HA/HB4826... 3+3 modules front cover plate (see AXOLUTE finishes) Front view 7 6 5
item 349319 VIDEO DISPLAY table-top base

Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 1 - 2.5” colour LCD display
Stand by absorption: 10 mA 2 - Loudspeaker
Max. operating absorption: 320 mA 3 - LED for call exclusion notification
Operating temperature: 5 - 40°C 4 - Connection key; enable/disable the connection
5 - Connection status LED
6 - Entrance panel and cycling activation key
Dimensional data
7 - Door lock status LED
8 - KEY Door lock opening
105.5 mm 9.5 mm 9 - Navigation keys and confirmation inside the menu
10 - Microphone
2,5”
118 mm
1
2
30.2 mm AXOLUTE
127 mm
5 1 2 BUS 3
OFF
ON 4
BT00136-b-UK
141.5 mm
Rear view
Legend
Maximum space requirement with front cover plate 2 - Configurator socket
3 - 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps
4 - Line termination ON/OFF micro switch
5 - Clamp for connection of the additional power supply

349311-349312-349313
Configuration
AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY can be configured in 2 different modes: The advanced PC configuration using the TiAxoluteDisplay software (CD supplied),
provides the user with a higher degree of customisation, with the possibility to:
- Fast configuration (through the connection of physical configurators) - create customized menus;
- Advanced configuration using the TiAxoluteDisplay software supplied with the - customize text messages;
product. - access all home automation functions.
Fast configuration enables the user to access the menu of the video door entry To transfer the configuration performed using the TiAxoluteDisplay software, or to
functions. This is the standard configuration using configurators to be connected to the update the firmware, connect AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY to the PC using an USB-miniUSB
appropriate sockets on the back of the device itself. cable.
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed in the apartment, configuration of
the video handset using the software supplied is recommended.
WARNING: The configuration of the device is performed using configurators and

cannot be changed from the menu.
1
BUS
To ensure that the communication is successful, AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY must be

powered and not physically configured.
3
P M
N


with idle video handset is activated, when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed.
BT00136-b-UK
M - Operating mode
functions (see manual supplied with the product).

AXOLUTE
Nighter & Whice VIDEO STATION 349320-349321
Description
2-wire speaker phone video handset for wall mounted installation. With 8” colour LCD
display, backlit capacitive keypad with soft touch controls and PC customisable OSD
navigation icon menu for the management of the following MY HOME applications:
video door entry system, temperature control, sound system and multimedia,
automation (scenarios) and anti-intrusion. 1
In systems integrated with the sound system, the VIDEO STATION behaves as an
amplifier, enabling playback of all audio/video sources connected to the system.
LED signalling for: call exclusion, door status, and connection to the entrance panel. 2
It can be integrated with MY HOME, also in combination with the Multimedia interface,
item 3465 - (in this case, allow for a local video door entry system power supply). 3
Suitable for wall mounted installation using the special bracket (supplied as standard).
Programming and configuration using the TiNighterandWhiceStation software supplied
with the product. 4
Technical data
Max. operating absorption: 520 mA Front view
Operating temperature: 5 - 40°C

1 - 8“ LCD colour display
25 mm 2 - Microphone
230 mm 3 - Navigation keys and confirmation inside the menu
4 - Led and video door entry function keys
Rear view
305 mm
7 1
6
5
3 3
BT00135-b-UK
3 3
4
Legend
3 - Loudpspeakers; for the broadcasting of voice and stereo sound
4 - Screw used to fasten the Video Station to the metal base
7 - Line termination ON/OFF micro switch
349311-349312-349313
The advanced PC configuration using the TiAxoluteNighterAndwhiceStation

Configuration
software (CD supplied), provides the user with a higher degree of customisation, with
AXOLUTE Nighter & Whice VIDEO STATION can be configured in 2 different modes: the possibility to:
- create flexible menus
- Fast configuration (through the connection of physical configurators) - customize text messages
- Advanced configuration using the TiAxoluteNighterAndWhiceStation - access all home automation functions
software (CD supplied)
Fast configuration enables the user to access the menu of the video door entry functions. To transfer the configuration performed using the
This is the standard configuration using configurators to be connected to the appropriate TiAxoluteNighterAndwhiceStation software, or to update the firmware,
housing on the back of the device itself. connect Axolute Video Station to the PC using the USB-mini cable.
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed in the apartment, configuration of the
video handset using the software supplied is recommended.
WARNING
The device configuration made using configurators
CANNOT BE MODIFIED from the software.
BUS
To ensure that communication is successful, Axolute Video Station

must be powered and not configured physically.


with idle video hanset is activated, when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed.
BT00135-b-UK
M - Operating mode
functions (see manual supplied with the product).

Axolute Etèris Video Display 349340

2 WIRE speaker phone video handset for flush mounted installation.
With 2.5” colour LCD display with PC customisable icons OSD navigation menu for
the management of the following MY HOME applications: Video door entry system,
temperature control, sound system, scenarios, burglar alarm. LED signalling for: call
exclusion, door status, connection with entrance panel.
Flush mounted / plasterboard installation using the appropriate boxes.
To be completed with dedicated front cover and front cover plate available in the Axolute
10 1
white, anthracite, and tech colour variants.
Programming and configuration using the TiAxoluteDisplay software supplied with the 9
product. 2
3
Related items 8 4
528W Flush mounted box
PB528W Plasterboard box
349243 White front cover
349241 Axolute tech front cover
349242 Anthracite front cover 7 6 5
HW4826HD White front cover plate Rear view
HW4826HC Axolute tech front cover plate
HW4826HS Tech front cover plate
346020 (additional 2 DIN modules power supply) - optional, for local powering of
the video handset, when maximum installation distances are necessary. 11
12
Technical data
14
Dimensional data
128 mm 29 mm
Legend
1. 2.5 “ LCD colour display
2. Loudspeaker
3. Bell exclusion notification LED
4. Audio connection activation/deactivation key
5. Connection status LED
128 mm 6. Entrance panel/camera cycling activation key
BT00386-a-UK
7. Door lock status LED

8. Door lock activation key
9. Navigation and confirmation keys in the icon menu
10. Microphone
11. Mini USB connector for connection to the PC
31 mm
13. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps
15. Additional power supply connection clamps (1-2)
349340
Flush mounted box 528W Plasterboard box PB528W
128.5 mm 58 mm 116.5 mm 58 mm
TOP TOP TOP
128.5 mm 116.5 mm
TOP TOP TOP
Configuration
Axolute Etèris Video Display can be configured in 2 different modes: The PC advanced configuration using the software (CD supplied), provides the user with
the highest degree of customisation, with the possibility of:
- Fast configuration (through the connection of physical configurators)
- Advanced configuration (using the TiAxoluteDisplay software supplied) - create customized menus;
- customize text messages;
The quick configuration enables the user to access the video door entry system function - access all home automation functions.
menu. This is the standard configuration with configurators to be connected to their own
Connection to the PC
housing on the back of the device itself.
To transfer the configuration performed using the software, or to update the firmware,
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed inside the apartment, configuration
connect Axolute Etèris Video Display to the PC using the USB-miniUSB cable.
of the video handset using the software supplied is recommended.
3
2
USB-miniUSB
N – numero del Handset

The N configurator assigns to each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive order.Handsets with parallel
BT00386-a-UK
connection (max 3 are allowed inside apartments without item 346850) must be
configured using the same N configurator. In parallel with the main video handset,
additional handsets, video handsets and/or bells may be installed.
P – entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the entrance panel associated, or the first entrance panel to
activate before pressing the key and which door lock
with video handset at rest is activated, when the key is pressed.
M – Operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu page and therefore the preset functions To ensure that the communication is successful, the video handset must be
that may be used (see manual supplied with the product). powered and not physically configured.

Flush mounted 391657-391658-391659
2 wire indoor colour camera 391661-391662-391663
Description
2 wire indoor colour camera for video monitoring system functions. Flush mounted
or wall mounted installation using the dedicated accessories of the AXOLUTE, LIVING,
LIGHT, LIGHT TECH residential series.
WARNINGS : do not point the camera towards the sun or towards light sources.
3
Related items
The device must be completed with the accessories and the front cover plates of the
AXOLUTE, LIVING, LIGHT, LIGHT TECH residential series.
Refer to the corresponding catalogues.
P
N 1
Z
M
A
PL
Technical data
2
Sensor: from 1/3” colour CCD
Lens: “semi pin-hole” 3.7 mm
Interlace: 2:1
Legend
Scanning: Standard CCIR
Horizontal frequency: 15625 Hz 1 - Configurator socket
Vertical frequency: 50 Hz 2 - 2 WIRE BUS connection clamp
Image elements: 537 (H) x 597 (V) 3 - Microphone
Horizontal resolution: 380 TV lines at the image centre
Video signal: PAL compatible
Minimum illumination: 5 lux
Dimensional data Camera adjustment
65 mm 43 mm
+ 30°
43 mm
+ 25°
- 30°
- 25°
BT00174-b-UK

391657-391658-391659
391661-391662-391663
Configuration
P – Camera address
The configurator assigns to the camera the address inside the apartment.
NOTES (*) : connect an OFF configurator here to disable the microphone

(function available for cameras configured from 0 to 9, for other cameras the
microphone cannot be excluded).
N – Address of the handset called in case of alarm
Z – Zone of the alarm system the camera is associated to
M – Mode of operation when a camera is switched on

Each time a camera is switched on (call, selfswitching on, alarm) the MY HOME
actuator and the scenario configured in A and PL are activated. When the camera is
switched off, the associated actuator also switches off, while the scenario remains
active.
If an actuator used by the automation system is also associated to the camera, the
actuator will switch itself off when the camera is switched off, even if it was already
on when the camera came on. To avoid this problem, the load should be activated
using an actuator item F411/2, configuring different PL and setting the contacts
with parallel connection.
M A/PL
M = 0 Address of the SCS control device associated to the camera
M = 1 - 9 Address of the scenarios module associated to the camera
P N Z M A PL
BT00174-b-UK

Outdoor 2-wire
colour camera 391670
Description
2-wire compact outdoor (IP65) colour camera.
It can be used for video monitoring system installations, or for turning audio systems
into video systems, using a separate camera.
WARNINGS : do not point the camera towards the sun or towards light sources.
Technical data P N Z M A PL
Enclosure: aluminium
Sensor: 1/3” CMOS colour
Max. operating absorption: 65 mA Configuration
Lens: f: 6 mm; F: 2.3 mm
Image elements: 628 (H) x 586 (V) The device must be physically configured in terms of:
Horizontal resolution: 330 TV lines at the image centre
Minimum illumination: 2 Lux F=2.0 P – Camera address
Operating temperature: (-20) – (+70) °C; RH 95% max The configurator assigns to the camera the address inside the apartment.
N – Address of the handset called in case of alarm
Dimensional data Z – Zone of the alarm system the camera is associated to
M – Mode of operation when a camera is switched on

38 mm 98 mm
Each time a camera is switched on (call, selfswitching on, alarm) the MY HOME
actuator and the scenario configured in A and PL are activated. When the camera is
switched off, the associated actuator also switches off, while the scenario remains
active.
If an actuator used by the automation system is also associated to the camera, the
actuator will switch itself off when the camera is switched off, even if it was already
on when the camera came on. To avoid this problem, the load should be activated
using an actuator item F411/2, configuring different PL and setting the contacts
85 mm
with parallel connection.

M A/PL
M = 0 Address of the SCS control device associated to the camera
M = 1 - 9 Address of the scenarios module associated to the camera
M = SLA Configuration of the audio entrance panel associated to the camera
(see following details)
M = SLA
S
PI PN L A PL
A
BT00173-b-UK
Pi - Pn = range of audio EP associated to the camera (max.5)
PI - PN = Audio entrance panels associated to the camera (max. 5)

PI = Address of first associated EP
PN = Address of last associated EP
A/PL = Address of the SCS control associated to the camera

Audio/video node F441
Description
The audio/video node is a mixer device enabling distribution of up to 4 sound sources or
1
2-wire audio/video risers.
The 4 outputs will all have the same signal coming from the input selected among the
4 available.

WARNING : Connections using both screw clamps and patch cords at the same
time are NOT possible.
2
Technical data
Absorption from BUS: 20 mA
Number of inputs available: 4 4 3
Number of outputs available: 4

6 DIN modules 1 - Output clamps (OUT1 - OUT2 - OUT3 - OUT4) for the connection of 2-wire video risers
or amplifiers
2 - Sockets for patch cord connection
3 - Clamps for the connection of the SCS BUS
4 - Input clamps (IN1 - IN2 - IN3 - IN4) for the connection of sound sources or entrance
panels / cameras
BT00017-b-UK

Multi-channel matrix F441M
Description
The multi-channel matrix is a device which can distribute up to 4 stereo sound sources
1
and a video signal from entrance panels or cameras simultaneously.
The matrix is made up of 8 inputs and 8 outputs (to wire 8 rooms). OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 OUT 8
Video entrance panels and cameras (first 4 inputs) and stereo sound sources (last 4
inputs) can be wired in input.
On each output of the matrix there is a clearly separate room.
The rooms must be set in ascending order (room 1 - OUT, room 2 - OUT 2 etc.).
The stereo signals are distributed at the same time and independently on any output.
However, it is not possible for the audio signals of two separate sound sources to be
mixed on the same output branch.
The stereo signal of a sound sources and the video signal of one of the 2-wire video TK1 TK2 TK3 TK4 S1 S2 S3 S4 BUS
door entry sources can travel at the same time on the same branch (entrance panel or
camera).
The device must not be configured. 4 3 2

Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 - 27 Vdc 1 - Clamps for the connection of the amplifier and the video door entry system handsets.
Absorption da BUS: 46 - 60 mA 2 - Clamps for the connection of the SCS BUS
Dissipated power: 1.5 W 3 - Clamps for the connection of the input sound sources (S1-S2-S3-S4)
Operating temperature: 5 – 45 °C 4 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire cameras / entrance panels (TK1-TK2-TK3-TK4)
Number of inputs available: 8
Number of outputs available: 8
Dimensional data
10 DIN modules
BT00016-b-UK

CONTENTS
Technical sheets – Structured cabling system for the
home sector
Technical sheets – Structured cabling system for the home sector MY HOME 1095
SCS/TV
modulator F442
Description
The SCS/TV modulation device is a device that can be installed on DIN 35 rail, giving the
possibility of displaying on the home television set the video signal from the entrance 1 2
panel of the 2-wire video door entry system. In this way, the caller can be displayed
directly on the television set. This device (which can be used on one-family systems)
must be connected to the terrestrial or satellite antenna, on the specific “F” type input, OUT IN
and to the television set, on the specific output connector. On the bottom are two screw
clamps, for the connection of the 2-wire BUS, shunted from the entrance panel of the
video door entry system.
In order to display the call on the television set, this must be set to the correct video F442
channel, which must be the same as the one selected on the modulation device using the RS 1 RS 2 3
P 5 6 5 6
front adjustments (the left one for the tenths, and the right one for the units).
234
234
7
7
4
8 9
8 9
The television set must be enabled for the selection of the S band channel, to be selected 10
01 01
between S11 and S41.

It will be necessary to associate to the channel of the selected S band for the display of
the SCS signal the Video CH program that can be selected using the television remote
control. This is the one that can be accessed using the remote control to display the SCS
video output. DC - In PWR SCS
The SCS/TV modulation unit is preset with a selector that must be positioned near the
letter A if the device is the last one of the SCS chain. In addition to a green LED confirming
9 8 7 6 5
the presence of the power supply, a red alarm LED is also present: if the red ALARM LED
turns on, check the wiring and the connections.
Related items
Legend
Power supply 346000
1. Output for TV + SAT jacks distributed around the room, or to the TV HUB
Technical data 2. Television antenna + SAT input
3. Selector for the selection of the tenths of the SCS channel
Power supply: 10 - 35 Vdc
4. Selector for the selection of the units of the SCS channel
Absorption: 210 mA at 12 Vdc
100 mA at 24 Vdc 5. SCS BUS input
90 mA at 27 Vcc 6. Selector for the selection of the device as the last one (A) of the SCS chain
Dissipated power: 3W 7. Alarm LED
Operating temperature: 5 - 45 °C 8. Power supply
OUTpresent signalling IN
LED
Rated frequency: 40 W- 2150 MHz 9. Power supply clamps
Output power (S band): 88 dBμV/750 Ω
10. Push-button for the selection of the SCS video band
No. of F type outputs: 1
Dimensional data
6 DIN modules
Configuration
F442
It will be necessary to configure the device in order to assign the number of the S band RS 1 RS 2
BT00019-a-UK
video channel used for transmitting the signal to send to the television set.
P
This operation is performed using the two front adjustment controls (units and tenths). 5 6 5 6
234
234
7
The same video channel number must be set on the television set.
8 9
8 9
01 01
Tenths setup Units setup
1096 MY HOME Technical sheets – Structured cabling system for the home sector
F442
Wiring diagram
TV
SAT
OUT IN (TV-SAT)
OUT IN
F442
RS 1 RS 2
P 5 6 5 6
2 34
2 34
7
7
89
89
0 1 0 1
DC - In PWR SCS
10 – 35 Vdc
Entrance panel
Handset
3
2
1
0
BT00019-a-UK
SCS Video door entry system
Patch module F550C6
Description
Patch module fitted with Toolless connector for the capping of the cable from the user 1
socket. Possibility of device rotation to accept wiring cables coming either from the top
or the base of the electric distribution board.
Fitted with visual indicator, for the identification of the service transmitted.
Connects to other data network devices using patch cords L4665L20 and L4665L40.
Related items
FLAT L4665L20 and L4665L40 patch cords
Technical data
2
Category: 6
Dimensional data
1 DIN module
Fitting and installation
Device rotation for best positioning based on the side the wiring is coming 3
from. legran
d
Legend
legran
d
1. RJ45 input port

2. Visual indicator
3. RJ45 output port
180°
180° 180°
180°
180°
BT00321-a-UK
180°
180°
F550C6
Wiring
OK
1
NO
OK
2
NO
OK 4 NO
5
BT00321-a-UK
5 port switch F551
Description
Front view
Device use for distributing the data network to several points of the home.
It has 5 RJ45 ports (1 input and 4 outputs) and supports 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet
connections, automatically adapting to the maximum speed supported by the network
terminals connected to each port. Should It be necessary to extend the home data
network to more than 4 terminals, a port may be connected to a second switch.
For the connection use patch cords L4665L20 and L4665L40.
Related items
Power supply F552
Technical data
Power supply voltage: 9 Vdc

Absorption: 220 mA
Transmission speed: 10/100 Mbit/s
Side view 1
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
2
Bottom view
5 4
Legend
BT00322-a-UK
1. RJ45 output ports

2. Orange LED: - OFF: speed 10Mbit/s
- ON: speed 100Mbit/s
3. Green LED: - flashing: data transmission
- ON: device active
4. Electric power supply connector (F552)
5. RJ45 input port
F551
Wiring diagram
Patch module
F550C6
Patch cords
L4665L20 L4665L40
Switch Power supply

F551 Power
F522
LAN input
Connection of the switches in series, to increase the number of LAN lines available on the output
BT00322-a-UK
LAN input
Power supply F552
Description
DIN modularity device for providing power supply to the Switch, item F551.
1
Related items
Switch F551
Technical data
Power
Power supply voltage: 115 - 230 Vac 50 - 60 Hz
Output voltage: 9 Vdc 2
Maximum current delivered: 1.6 A
Dimensional data
1.5 DIN modules
Fitting and installation
The installation must be performed in accordance with current local regulations.

- The device must be installed inside appropriate containers;
- It must not be exposed to water drips or sprays;
- Do not obstruct the air vents; 3
- In order to ensure overload and direct contact protection, it must be powered using a
two-pole circuit breaker with contact separation of at least 3 mm, located nearby the
device.
Legend
1. Clamps for the connection of the device power supply
2. 230 V network present LED
3. Power line voltage connection clamps
BT00323-a-UK
TV/SAT distribution frame F553
Description
1
This device, which does not require electric power supply, is used for the distribution of
the television signal to 6 TV/SAT jacks. Front view
It is fitted with an F type input connector for the signal from the TV switchboard, and of
six output connectors, for the connection of the TV/SAT jacks, which must have electric
features compatible with the device, and be of the “shunted” type.
The distribution frame is supplied with 3 plugs in case protection of the unused outputs
is required.
Related items
Shunted TV/SAT jacks HC/HS/L/N/NT4202D, HC/HS/L/N/NT4269F, A/AM5173D,

A/AM5175D, C4202D
Technical data
Frequency range: 5 - 2400 MHz

Impedance: 75O Ohm
1 2 1
Direct loss (db): Top view
Frequency (MHz) Type Max.
5 - 470 13 13.5
470 - 862 13 14
950 - 2150 16 17
Return loss- (db):

Frequency (MHz) Type Max.
5 - 40 11 10
40 - 1000 13 14
1000 - 2150 15 14
2150 - 2400 15 14
Standards, Certifications, Marks Bottom view

EN 50083
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
BT00324-a-UK
Legend
1. F type output connector
2. F type input connector
F553
Wiring diagram
TV TV
SAT
Shunted TV/SAT jack
Type 4214D
Distribution
frame
BT00324-a-UK
Television
SAT antenna
Telephone distribution frame F555
Description
Front view
Device with two input ports and eight RJ45 output ports for the distribution of one or 2
telephone lines in the following way:
- one telephone line can be shunted on all the output ports;
- two telephone lines can be shunted on two groups of output ports.
The selection of the mode of shunting is made using the changeover switch, as shown
in the following table:
IN OUT
1 2 3 4
L1+L2
5 6 7 8 L1
L1 L2 L1 L2
L1+L2 1 x x x x
2 x x x x
1
1 x x x x x x x x
L1 Top view
In alternative to the connection using the RJ45 connector, the input line cables may also
be connected using traditional screw clamps.
Should it be necessary to distribute more than eight telephone lines, a second similar
device may be connected in cascade to the main distribution frame.
Related items
L4665L20 and L4665L40 patch cord
Technical data
Operating temperature: 5 – 40 °C Bottom view
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
5 4 3 2
BT00325-a-UK
Legend
1. RJ45 ports, output telephone line
2. RJ45 port, line 2 input
3. RJ45 port, line 1 input
4. Screw clamp, line 2 input
5. Screw clamp, line 1 input
F555
Wiring diagram
Diagram for the shunting of one telephone line Diagram for the shunting of two telephone lines
Line 2
To tel. No. 5, 6, 7 and 8
Telephone No. 4 To tel. No. 1, 2, 3 and 4
Telephone No. 3 Telephone No. 4
Telephone No. 1
Line 1
L1+L2
L1 L1+L2
L1+L2 L1
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L1+L2
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
Input telephone
line Telephone line Telephone line
1 input 2 input
“In series” connection of the distribution frames to increase the number of available
telephone lines
To the telephones To the telephones
L1+L2
L1
L1 L2 L1 L2
BT00325-a-UK
L1+L2
L1
L1 L2 L1 L2
Input telephone line
xDSL filter with telephone distribution frame F558
Description
Front view
This device, with one input port and four output ports, RJ45 type, performs a double
action:
- it makes the ADSL signal intended for a modem available to an output port;
- it makes the telephone signal intended for the other three telephone lines available to
the other three output ports.
In alternative to the RJ45 connector, the input telephone line can also be connected
using a traditional screw clamp.
The filter is compatible with ADSL, ADSL2+, VDSL and VDSL2 standards.
If more than three telephone lines are required, it will be possible to use the device
in conjunction with the F555 telephone distribution frame using patch cords L4665L20
and L4665L40.
LINE
Related items
Telephone distribution frame F555

Top view
L4665L20 and L4665L40 patch cord
PHONE 2 PHONE 3
Technical data
1 1
Audio frequency range: 0.3 - 3.4 kHz
Bandwidth splitter from continuous current up to 16 kHz

1 2
DSL frequency range: 32 kHz - 30 MHz
PHONE 1 MODEM
Input signal rated voltage: 21 mV pp - 5.4 Vpp
Telephone call voltage: 40 - 150 Vrms

Line impedance: 250 - 75O Ohm
Bottom view
DSL loss (db):
Frequency Type
32 kHz - 138 kHz > 45
138 kHz - 30 MHz > 55
3
4
BT00326-a-UK
2 DIN modules 1. RJ45 port, output telephone line

2. RJ45 port, output ADSL line to the modem
3. Screw clamp for input telephone line
4. RJ45 port for input telephone line
1108 MY HOME Technical sheets – Control and integration
CONTENTS
Technical sheets – Control and integration
Technical sheets – Control and integration MY HOME 1109

Audio/Video Web Server F454
Description
1 2 3
Audio/Video Web Server for local and remote control of MY HOME applications using
dedicated web pages. ETHERNET
The Web Server can also be used as a gateway for the management of the system using
devices like PCs and Smartphones, and for virtual configuration, using a dedicated
software.
Technical data

Absorption: 125 mA max (with active video interface)
SCS AI SCS AV
Dimensional data
6 DIN modules 5 4
The audio/video web server is configured using the TiF454 software thanks to a LAN 1. RJ 45 for 10/100Mbit Ethernet LAN
connection (with cross-over cable if the connection between PC and F454 is direct, 2. Under the door are:
without using a HUB/SWITCH) or using a standard USB and mini USB cable. - USB ports for PC configuration and Firmware update
- RESET pushbutton
- Serial connector RS232
3. User interface:
- Speed: Connection speed; ON = 100 Mbit;
OFF = 10 Mbit
- Link: ON it indicates the presence of the Ethernet network
- System: when the power supply is connected, it comes on, goes off, and then
comes on again, to indicate that the web server is working
4. 2-wire BUS for video door entry system connection
5. 2-wire BUS for burglar alarm system
BT00519-a-UK

Telephone actuator F461/2
Description
The telephone actuator enables remote control of two users (e.g. boilers, garden
watering, staircase light, garden light, rolling shutters, etc.) using the fixed, or the Front view
mobile telephone line. 11 1
Remote control and programsng are protected by a password consisting in a 4 digit
code that can be customised by the customer; the default code is 1234. During the
programsng procedure, it is possible to select three operating modes:
- LIGHTING 2
10
It can be used to enable/disable users such as staircase lights, garden lights, boilers, etc. 3
- AUTOMATISMS 9
It can be used to activate the rolling shutter motors (up/down movement), as well as 4
other motors.
- TEMPERATURE CONTROL 8 5
To enable or disable the boilers; used together with the BTicino timer thermostat.
The activation, deactivation, check and programsng controls must be sent from the
actuator using only a DTMF telephone; if other types of telephones are used, the
actuator does not work. In order to control more than two users, it is possible to install
on the same telephone line up to four actuators, in parallel on the line. 7 6
The operation of the actuators is guaranteed even if an answering machine is installed
on the telephone line.
Network Power supply: 230 Vac ± 10 % 50Hz 1. Screw clamps (C2): uscita contatti in scambio del relè 2
Dissipated power: 11 VA 2. Yellow LED: relay (C2) status. ON = relay active
Absorption: 50 mA 3. RJ8 female connector: to connect the actuator to the telephone using the cable
Operating temperature: 0 – 35 °C supplied, and activate the programming procedure
Telephone network: analogue (PSTN) 4. Pushbutton (C2) for local activation of relay 2
Weight: 270 grams 5. PROG/LINE selector:
Connection to the - in PROG position: operation in programming mode
telephone network: two-wire with telephone pair - in LINE position: normal operation
Connection to the PABX two-wire with telephone pair 6. Screw clamps (LU): telephone line input
Dialling system: only with touch tone dialling (DTMF) 7. Screw clamps (PRI): power supply 230 Vac
Relay number: 2 with independent control and changeover contacts 8. Green LED : operating mode:
Relay output contacts: 230 Vac 6A resistive, 2A inductive both between N-NC and N-NO OFF = actuator faulty or incorrectly powered
On steady = powered and normal operation
Dimensional data ON flashing = powered and in programming mode operation
9. Pushbutton (C1) for local activation of relay 1
3 DIN modules.
10. Yellow LED: relay (C1) status. ON = relay active
11. Screw clamps (C1): output of changeover contacts of relay 1
BT00380-a-UK

F461/2
Configuration
The programming procedure is performed using a standard touch tone telephone, connected LIGHTING MODE
to the RJ8 socket of the actuator, using the appropriate cable, supplied as standard. In this mode the two relays can be enabled independently, and can also be programmed
with different functions.
A user can be activated with “impulsive” monostable operation using relay 1 (Example
1: timed switching on of the staircase light), and with “ON/OFF” bistable operation using
relay 2 (Example: boiler activation/deactivation).
1.............. 4.............. 7..............
TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODE

2.............. 5.............. 8..............
3.............. 6.............. 9..............
To program the telephone actuator move This mode enables to combine the telephone actuator to the operation of the BTicino
the selector (3) to “PROG”, and enter the timer thermostat, item HC/HS/HD/L/N/NT4451 and item AM5721.
commands on the telephone connected to Using this mode, it is possible to remotely change the operation of the timer thermostat.
the connector (4). The programming cable If the timer thermostat is in any AUTO, MAN, ANTIFREEZE, PARTY, HOLIDAY, or OFF
is supplied as standard. condition, by activating the following controls on the actuator:
- ANTIFREEZE, the timer thermostat will switch to the antifreeze condition, until an
unlocking command is received;
- AUTO, the timer thermostat will switch to the automatic condition.
The actuator can be programmed to operate in three different modes:
AUTOMATISM MODE
- lighting: to enable or disable lights, boilers, etc.;
In this mode, the two relays are both controlled using the same command and cannot be
- automation: to activate the rolling shutter motors (closing – opening), or other motors;
activated independently from each other.
- temperature control: to activate or deactivate the heating or the air conditioning
Therefore, when relay 1 is programmed, the actuator will automatically also manage
system to be used with the BTicino timer thermostat item HC/HS/HD/L/N/NT4451 and
relay 2.
item AM5721.
The AUTOMATISM mode is recommended for controlling users interlocked with each other,
Also, in the three operating modes the two relays can themselves be programmed to
such as the operation of a rolling shutter (up/down), motors (forward/backwards), etc.
operate with the monostable function (once timed, the relay closes for the programmed
time; ideal, for example, when timed switching on of the staircase lights is required), or
For more details see the instruction leaflet supplied with the device.
bistable (ON - OFF, at every command the relay changes its status and keeps it until a new
command is received, behaving as a switch).
The actuator can also be connected to an internal telephone extension (shunted), when
a PABX BTicino telephone switchboard is present (to expand the number of relays that
can be selected remotely); it is also possible to connect in parallel to each other on the
same telephone line up to 4 actuators, even if an answering machine is also installed.
At the end of each programming operation the actuator sends to the telephone receiver a
confirmation (programming correct) or an error (programming failed) tone.
BT00380-a-UK

F461/2
Wiring diagrams
max. 230 V
6 A resistive
2 A inductive U
User 2 Telephone line
max. 230 V
6 A resistive
2 A inductive U
User 1
a b
IN
Telephone PLT1
actuator Telephone
protection
OUT It is possible to connect up to 4 devices on the same

a b telephone call. The devices must be numbered
progressively. It is very important that each device
has its own unique identification number.
230 Vac
50 Hz
NOTE:
The devices must be numbered
progressively during the programming
V˜ V˜
procedure. It is very important that each V˜
device has its own unique identification
Telephone line
number.
U1 U2 U7 U8
C1 C2
Actuator No. 1 Timer thermostat

a b 230V 0,5A 5A cos=0,5
IN (main) 2A 6A
Telephone
protection
OUT NA C NC
PLT1 a b
Actuator No. 4 230V 50 Hz
50 mA
Remote ext NTC
(secondary)
BT00380-a-UK
PRI
LU
a b
To the loads
2 2
230 Vac to be controlled
50 Hz
Remote Contact open
activation automatic program
(last one selected)
Contact closed
manual antifreeze
program

GSM telephone actuator F462
Description
The F462 GSM actuator is a GSM terminal suitable for the remote management of all the
heating systems, particularly if there is no fixed telephone line. Front view 1 2 3
It is also possible to control two remote inputs and one remote output.
The communication is between a mobile phone and the GSM modem of the device,
using an SMS message.
The F462 GSM actuator connected to a timer thermostat, item L/N/NT4450 enables,
using appropriate SMS messages, to read the status of the timer thermostat (measured
room temperature, program set, etc.), to change the set program, and change certain 4
5
temperature control parameters; In alternative, it can be used with the timer thermostat, 6
item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4451 , with the ON-OFF function only. 7
1 2
The device is capable of sending an SMS message to the telephone numbers saved inside
the device itself, when an alarm situation caused by the closing/opening of the contacts
occurs.
F462
Technical data
Power supply: 10 – 20 Vac/Vdc

Absorption: Idle 30mA 500mA MAX
Contact output: 4(2)A-250Vac
Contacts free from voltage 11 10 9 8
Quad band: E GSM850/900/1800/1900 MHz
Output power: Class 4 (2W) for 850/900 MHz
Class 1 (1W) for 1800/1900 MHz
Legend
Sensitivity: 107dBm@ 850/900MHz
106dBm@ 1800/1900MHz 1. Outdoor antenna connector
Protection index: IP40 (when correctly installed) 2. Alarm input connections
3. Relay or HC/HS/L/N/NT4451 timer thermostat output connections
Dimensional data 4. Network status LED: OFF = Not powered
FLASHING QUICKLY = Searching for network
4 DIN modules
FLASHING SLOWLY = Standby
5. Input 1 (alarm 1) status LED, and field intensity notification
6. Relay status LED, and field intensity notification
7. Input 2 (alarm 2) status LED, and field intensity notification
8. L/N/NT4450 timer thermostat connections
9. Power supply input
10. Battery connector
11. SIM card housing (remove the bottom cover)
BT00379-a-UK

F462
Configuration
The device configuration operations consist in defining the coded SMS messages
following several criteria depending on the control to actuate remotely, or remote status
information for the managed devices. As a coding example here is the message for the
control of the timer thermostat (item L/N/ NT4450).
– #STATUS to know the status of the timer thermostat, the alarms and the relays
– #FROST to set the antifreeze program
– #ECONOMY to set the MANUAL program with temperature T1
– #COMFORT to set the MANUAL program with temperature T3
– #AUTO to set the automatic program
– #RESUME to return to the program set on the timer thermostat.
For the full list of codes see the instruction manual supplied with the device
Wiring diagrams
ALARM
NOTIFICATIONS
ELECTRIC USER
OR ITEM
HC/HS4451
L/N/NT4451
EXTERNAL BATTERY
Power supply
Timer thermostat
Item L/N/NT4450
*NC = NOT CONNECTED
BT00379-a-UK

Multimedia Touch Screen HC/HS 4690

Multimedia Touch Screen is a device that enables controlling all the functions of the
1 2
MY HOME system by means of simple and intuitive icons displayed on the 10” 16:9 LCD
Touch Screen.
In addition to the management of the automation functions, lights, temperature
control, sound system, burglar alarm, and scenarios, by using the device it is also 3
possible to answer to video door entry system calls, and display the images transmitted
by the entrance panel, or the connected cameras. Thanks to the USB device and SD card
inputs, Multimedia Touch Screen can manage multimedia files, allowing the users to
listen to their favourite music or to view films and images.
When integrated with a domestic LAN network with internet connection, the device
enables (following the activation of specific icons) receiving RSS services such as “news”
and weather information, displaying images transmitted through webcams, and
listening to internet radio channels.
Related items 5 4
Surround plate: HA4690XC, HA4690VBB, HA4690LTK, HA4690VNB, HA4690VSW Rear view
Power supply: 346020 6 7 8 9 10 11
Technical data
Local power supply (1 – 2): 18 – 27 Vdc 17 PSTN BUS 2 1
Max. local absorption (1 – 2): 600 mA ON
12
16 ETH
OFF
Absorption from SCS BUS: 50 mA

SCS AUDIO OUT
13 15 14 13

1. 10” Touch Screen colour LED display
2. Microphone
17 mm 3. USB connection
305 mm
4. Mini USB PC connection
5. SD card connector
6. Sound system source output connector
7. RJ45 connector for Ethernet connection
8. LAN connection signalling LED
BT00318-a-UK
228 mm 9. PSTN telephone line connector (future application)

10. 2 wire video BUS/SCS connector
11. 1-2 power supply connector
12. End of line ON/OFF micro switch
13. Loudspeaker
14. Bracket fixing screw
15. Factory configuration reset pushbutton
16. NiMh 7.2 V battery compartment; 160 mAh
17. RS232 PC connector
HC/HS 4690
Configuration
Multimedia Touch Screen must be configured using the TiMultimediaTouchScreen
software supplied as standard. In order to receive/transfer the configuration performed,
or to update the firmware, connect Multimedia Touch Screen to the PC using one of the
three solutions:
- USB-miniUSB cable;
- serial connector (3559);
- Ethernet cable.
USB connection
Serial connection Ethernet connection
PSTN BUS 2 1
PSTN BUS 2 1
ON
ON
OFF
ETH
3559
SCS AUDIO OUT
OFF
ETH
SCS AUDIO OUT
BT00318-a-UK
Switch

HC/HS 4690
Wiring diagram
Ethernet cable
230 Vac
PSTN BUS 2 1
PR I
346020
PRI: 220 - 240 V~
175 - 165 mA
47 / 63 Hz
1-2: 27 Vdc
600 mA
ETH
SCS AUDIO OUT
1-2
F441M
346020
Multichannel matrix
Power supply
Audio SCS BUS

BT00318-a-UK

HC/HS 4690
Installation
Before fixing the device to the wall apply the surround plate item HA4690...
HA4690...
Connect Multimedia Touch Screen to the system and fix it to the wall using the bracket To complete the installation rotate the fixing screws at the back of Multimedia Touch
supplied with the product. Screen clockwise.
BT00318-a-UK

Touch Screen H4890 - HW4890 - LN4890 - LN4890A - AM5890
Description
Touch Screen is a device that enables controlling the MY HOME and Lighting
Management functions, by means of simple and intuitive icons displayed on a 3.5”
touch screen LCD display.
The device can be used to manage the automation, lights, temperature control, sound
system, burglar-alarm, energy management, and scenario functions.
For each application, it is possible to manage up to 20 actuations (for example 20
actuators, 20 amplifiers, etc.). 1
Technical data
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 18 – 27 Vdc
Absorption: 80 mA
Dimensional data
Size: 3+3 flush mounted module
Installation
Touch Screen can be installed very easily on the wall using a box, item 506E, and
integrates perfectly with any domestic room thanks to its compatibility with all cover
plates of the Axolute, Living and Màtix civil series.
506E (AM4890 - LN4890 - LN4890A - H4890)

528W (HW4890)
Touch screen
2 3
Legend
1. USB connector for programming and firmware update

2. RJ45 Ethernet connector
3. Clamp for SCS BUS connection
BT00518-a-UK

H4890 - HW4890 - LN4890 - LN4890A - AM5890
Configuration
Touch Screen is programmed by connecting it to a PC using the interface cable, Based on the requirements of the customer, it is possible to create a new configuration,
item 335919 (RS232 version), 3559 (USB version), or an Ethernet cable, and the or manage an existing one. The program also gives the possibility of configuring extra
TiTouchScreen software. Touch Screen functions, such as scenarios with logic or time conditions, the display of
the time and the date, and the setup of a protection password.
The software creates a link between the preconfigured icons, which will be shown on It is also possible to define the graphic style of the icons to complement the look of the
the Display, and the functions that must be managed and performed by the devices device. For further information refer to the software documentation.
of the Automation and lighting, Sound, burglar-alarm, temperature control, energy
management and scenario systems.
Connection to the Personal Computer for AM4890 - LN4890 - LN4890A - H4890
USB/mini USB
Crossover type
Ethernet cable
Connection to the Personal Computer for HW4890

BT00518-a-UK
USB/mini USB

Scenario programmer MH200N
Description
This device can be used to manage up to 300 simple and advanced scenarios.
Thanks to the scenario programmer, the MY HOME system can perform certain actions,
not only following a command from the user, but also when external events occur, such Bottom view
as the opening of a door, or a signal generated by light or temperature sensors.
1
The execution of an advanced scenario based on a set time and date, or the arming/
disarming of the burglar alarm system, may initiate, for example, the simulation of a
presence inside the home, by automatically activating the rolling shutters or the lights
at certain preset times, when no one is in fact at home.
The scenarios are programmed on the device using the TiMH200N software that can be
found in the CD supplied. The installation of the scenario programmer, item MH200N
only requires the connection to the power supply and to the MY HOME automation BUS. Front view 2
Thanks to the possibility of connection to the Ethernet network, the device is also
suitable for advanced applications, like:
- Use as SCS/LAN Gateway device for: 3 3

- Managing or configuring the MY HOME system with the MHVisual program and
Virtual Configurator respectively, installed on PCs connected to the network; 1 2 1
- Displaying the status of a scenario through web pages (enabled/disabled);
- Managing new functions relating to the 4 zone temperature control system and
current sound system and automation devices (new F503 amplifier, 100 level
dimmer, lighting sensor);
- Managing the burglar alarm system (arming and disarming) based on events.
Top view
Related items
Power supply 27 Vdc 346020
4
Technical data
5
Power supply: 27 Vdc 6
6 DIN modules 1. Connection to the PC serial port

2. Reset key
3. Status LED
4. Power supply (Item 346020)
5. BUS
6. Ethernet network RJ45 connector
BT00319-a-UK

MH200N
Configuration
Personal Computer
For the configuration of the device the TiMH200N program must be used, for creating with TIMH200N software
scenarios (actuation of light points, rolling shutters, etc.) of different degrees of
complexity, based on time events or events detected on the system (alarms, pushbuttons
pressed, etc.). If the scenario is activated by a control device (configured with M=CEN), it
will be possible to associate the corresponding key to the scenario itself.
The scenarios are grouped in a collection directly saved in the project.
The collection enables saving several scenarios, with only the required ones being
activated.
The project created must then be transferred (downloaded) to the scenario programmer.
This is done by connecting the device to the PC using a crossover type Ethernet cable (see
figure). In alternative, it is also possible to update MH200N remotely. To do this, both
the IP address and the OPEN password must be known (see manual found inside the CD
supplied with the device).
3559
In the same way, it is possible to upload the files from the device to check the saved
configuration. The TiMH200 program also enables updating the unit permanent base
MH200 software, by downloading any new versions published on the Bticino website
(Update Firmware).
CEN operating mode
This special mode is used for managing MH200N scenario programmers, by manually
activating the control device or the MY HOME automation range set by connecting the
CEN configurator in M.
The association between the key (upper or lower) of the control device and the scenario
to be activated, is obtained using the MiMH200N software. For example, it is possible to
activate two independent scenarios using the special H/L4651M2, AM5831M2 control,
using the T1 (upper) and T2 (lower) pushbuttons. For the correspondence between the
control keys and the scenarios to activate see the table below. MH200N scenario
In addition to the listed devices, the CEN operating mode may be managed using the programmer
Touch Screen, item H/L4864 and item AM5864, the Multimedia Touch Screen, item
HC/HS4690, the Multimedia Interface, item 3465, the Web Server, item F453AV, and a
Personal Computer with the MHVisual supervision software installed.
NOTE: The control devices configured with M=CEN mode can be connected to any point
of the system; The address specified in the A and PL positions must be different from the
addresses assigned to the actuators.
Type of control Configuration Identification of scenario activation keys
T1
H/L4651M2 and AMS831M2 special control A=0-9; PL=0-9; M=CEN; LIV1/AUX=-; LIV2=-; SPE=-;I=-
T2
Basic control for 2 independent loads, H/L4652 and A=0-9; PL1=0-9; M1=CEN; A2=-; PL2=-; M2=- T1
AM5832/2
BT00319-a-UK
T2
A=0-9; PL1=0-9; M1=CEN; A2=-; PL2=-; M2=CEN T2
T1
T4
T3
Basic control for 3 independent loads, H/L4652 and A=0-9; PL=0-9; M=CEN; LIV1/AUX=-; LIV2=-; SPE=-;I=- T2 T3
AM5832/2 T1
T6
T3 T4

MH200N
Assembly, installation Configuration
Install the wiring in an ordered way. Note: connect the E46ADCN power supply of the automation system and the 346020
power supply of the Scenario Programmer to a standard double-pole switch.
230 Vac
PRI
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
OK
PRI
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
E46ADCN
600 mA
NO
Automation BUS
Do not place devices that may generate electromagnetic interferences near

the Scenario Programmer.
346020
PRI
NO NO
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
BT00319-a-UK
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

CONTENTS
MY HOME – Glossary
Glossary MY HOME 1125

GLOSSARY
Extended descriptions and operating modes of

Automation devices with virtual configuration
Extended configuration devices have 2 configuration levels:

Functions

Operating modes

The functions identify what the device must do, while the operating modes identify how the device must operate to
perform the preselected function. Below is a technical glossary explaining the terms used, to identify the functions
and the modes.
glossarY OF FUNCTIONS
SensorS Actuators/Dimmers
Local lighting/presence detector Light actuator Double disable control

Manages the presence of people and ON/OFF management of the load Mode for disabling the control
the lighting level. To be set when the connected. functions.
sensor is not managed by the central
unit. Dimmer Double scenario control
Management of the load dimmer It cannot be managed using the
Local lighting sensor adjustment. Lighting Management system.
Manages the lighting level only. To be
set when the sensor is not managed by Rolling shutter actuator Double PLUS scenario control
the central unit. Function for the management of the Recalling of advanced scenarios stored
rolling shutter up/down movement. in the devices (actuators, dimmers,
Local presence sensor room controllers). It does not use any
Manages the presence of people Curtain actuator address.
only. To be set when the sensor is not Function for the management of the It cannot be managed using the
managed by the central unit. shutter opening/closure. Lighting Management system.
Central lighting/presence detector Double video door entry system control

Manages the presence of people and Controls It cannot be managed using the
the lighting level. To be set when the Lighting Management system.
sensor is managed by the central unit. Double light control
Management of the lighting system. Double sound system control
Central lighting sensor It cannot be managed using the
Manages the lighting level only. To be Double rolling shutter control Lighting Management system.
set when the sensor is managed by the Function for the management of the
central unit. rolling shutter up/down movement.
Central presence sensor Double CEN control

Manages the presence of people only. Recalling of scenarios saved in the
To be set when the sensor is managed central unit item BMNE500. Addresses
by the central unit. from 1 to 175.
IR PLUS SCENARIO CONTROL Double CEN PLUS control

Manages the recalling of scenarios Like the “CEN double control” but with
set on the IR remote controls, item addresses extended from 1 to 2047.
BMGE1001 and item BMGE1003.
Double AUX control
Management of auxiliary channels.
1126 MY HOME Glossary

OPERATING MODE
GLOSSARY
SensorS
Type of addressing Control cycle Slave and PUL

In point-point mode the sensor Always closed. The device receives a control sent by
manages a single load. Indicate the the actuator with the same address
address of the load by entering the Initial presence identified as Master. Pulse mode
values in the menu on the right. In It’s used to set the detection mode of operation.
Group mode, it is possible to select the initial presence.
the management of several loads Local pushbutton mode
belonging to different addresses. Re-trigger This functions offers the possibility
This functions switches the light back of managing a load using the device
Main group on in case of unwanted switching off pushbutton (cyclical ON/OFF, ON/OFF,
It identifies a main group of sensors/ due to a presence not being detected. Pushbutton, Timed ON); when used for
actuators/dimmers/room controllers to the management of rolling shutters, the
be managed. Daylight factor following modes can be set: bistable
It expresses the ration between the and monostable.
Reference address lighting produced by natural light on
It indicates the address of the actuator/ a plane inside the room, and the level STOP time
dimmer of which the sensor must of lighting produced on the plane itself This function enables setting the
follow the status. from the unobstructed sky (max 255). final time after which the actuator is
automatically disabled when in rolling
Sensor group Lighting adjustment shutter or curtain mode.
It identifies the secondary groups to To be set depending on the type of
which sensors/actuators/dimmers/ load management, ON/OFF or Dimmer. Delay between the doors
room controllers belong to, in addition In curtain mode, this function enables
to the main one to manage. Operating mode setting a time delay (60 sec. maximum)
It identifies how the lighting system before the rabbeted window starts
Main group control managed by the relevant sensor must opening or closing.
Enabling/disabling of the main group operate.
management. Controls
Preserve the presence
Detection mode It’s used to set the presence Cyclical standard
It identifies the technology to use for preservation mode for the For point-point controls, in non-tilting
the detection (PIR/US). management of the lighting system. mode, a short pressure of the control is
used to performs the ON/OFF function,
Load control Alarm while an extended pressure is used for
In case of groups with several sensors, It identifies how the sensor can detect the adjustment function For group,
the Master sensor is activated, which the imminent switching OFF of the room, and general controls, it only
manages the load directly. The other lighting system. performs the OFF function.
sensors must be disabled, as they
operate in Slave mode. ACtuatorS/dimmerS ON timed
The load managed switches OFF
PIR sensitivity Master – standard mode after a preset time, to be set in the
This is used to set the number of beams ON/OFF load management. Possibility corresponding item.
emitted by the sensor during the of setting a time delay (240 sec.
detection process. maximum) for the delayed switching Cyclical with adjustment
OFF of the SLAVE actuator (if the case). The same as the cyclical standard,
US sensitivity but the adjustment is possible for all
This is used to set the number of waves Slave controls, point-point, group, room, and
emitted by the sensor during the The device receives a control sent by general.
detection process. the actuator with the same address
identified as Master.
Reference light
Entering of the lux value that the sensor Master PUL
must maintain in the room. Pulse mode ON/OFF load management.
It does not take into account Room and
Hours/Minutes/Seconds General controls. Possibility of setting a
The switch off time delay from the time time delay (240 sec. maximum) for the
a presence was detected. delayed switching OFF of the SLAVE
actuator (if the case).
Glossary MY HOME 1127

GLOSSARY
Extended descriptions and operating modes of

Automation devices with virtual configuration
OPERATING MODE
GLOSSARY
O/I with adjustment Extended cyclical standard adjustment

The same as standard I/O, but the As for cyclical standard mode, but the
adjustments are also possible with soft start/stop, dimming, and switching
group, room and general controls. on level can also be set.
Cyclical without adjustment Extended standard O/I adjustment

It only performs ON/OFF, for all As for standard I/O mode, but the soft
point-point, group, room, and general start/stop, dimming, and switching on
controls. level can also be set.
O/I without adjustment Extended cyclical adjustment

For controls, in tilting mode, it performs As for cyclical mode with adjustment,
the ON functions when the upper key but the soft start/stop time, dimming
is pressed, and the OFF function when time , and switching on level can also
the lower key is pressed. be set.
Standard O/I Extended adjustment with O/I

For point-point controls, in tilting As for I/O mode with adjustment, but
mode, when the upper key is pressed, the soft start/stop time, dimming time ,
with a short pressure it performs the and switching on level can also be set.
ON function, and with an extended
pressure the adjustment function; Extended non-cyclical adjustment
when the lower key is pressed, with As for cyclical mode without
a short pressure it performs the OFF adjustment, but the soft start/stop
function, and with an extended time, dimming time , and switching on
pressure the adjustment function. For level can also be set.
group, room, and general controls it
only performs the ON/OFF function. Extended adjustment without O/I
As for I/O mode without adjustment,
OFF but the soft start/stop time, dimming
The device only sends OFF controls to time , and switching on level can also
the load. be set.
ON Monostable control
The device only sends ON controls to In rolling shutter mode the duration of
the load. the command corresponds to the time
the key is pressed.
PULL
The device operates as a pushbutton. Bistable Control
In rolling shutter mode, with the simple
Flashing pressure of the control, the motor
The device sends a flashing command connected stays ON until the end of the
to the load. The time indicates the stroke.
flashing speed.
Dimmer level
It defines the percentage value of the
power on the load.
1128 MY HOME Glossary

Notes
Notes MY HOME 1129

Notes
1130 MY HOME Notes

BTicino SpA
Via Messina, 38
www.bticino.com
20154 Milano - Italia
BTicino SpA reserves at any time the right to modify the contents of this booklet and to
AD-EXMH12GT/GB - Edition 06/2012 communicate, in any form and modality, the changes brought to the same.
Technical guide 2012 MY HOME

MY HOME
GUIDE
AND INSTALLATION
DESIGN

Complete Guide PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Complete Guide PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

BTicino SpA

Technical guide 2012 MY HOME

Energy management Temperature Control – Air Conditioning

Video door entry and home video surveillance system

Structured cabling system for the home sector

System integration and control

SOFTWARE AND SERVICES – CATALOGUE

TECHNICAL SHEETS - GLOSSARY

General Contents MY HOME

General Contents MY HOME

MY HOME General Contents

General Contents MY HOME

Load control management

MY HOME General Contents

Video door entry and home video

General Contents MY HOME

Structured cabling system

System integration and control

MY HOME General Contents

Software and services

General Contents MY HOME

MY HOME General Contents

General Contents MY HOME

MY HOME General Contents

General Contents MY HOME

MY HOME General Contents

General Contents MY HOME

MY HOME General Contents

General Contents MY HOME

MY HOME General Contents

General Contents MY HOME

ADVANCED ELECTRIC SYSTEMS SELECTION OF

COMFORT SAFETY ENERGY MANAGEMENT AUDIO VIDEO

INTEGRATION AND CONTROL

Physical configuration using plug-in

Radio control Actuator

When it is not possible to extend/modify a system with BUS wiring

Push and Learn mode; without using tools and software

TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLS

MULTIMEDIA TOUCH SCREEN

TOUCH SCREEN configured for real time

MY HOME pays a lot of attention

CONTROL AND INTEGRATION INTERFACES

provides supervision and monitoring

MY HOME Web is a virtual platform Customer area:

Project guidelines MY HOME 15

functional diagram of a MY HOME system

automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo

Telephone line Grey cable (BUS)

Video door entry system call

White cable (BUS)

16 MY HOME Project guidelines

the systems can be set individually, home TV/SAT

IPTV TV/SAT IPTV LIGHT/SHUTTER AUTOMATION

automazione diffusione sonora antifurto termoregolazione videocitofonia controllo

Project guidelines MY HOME 17

Video door entry system entrance panel

18 MY HOME Project guidelines

IPTV Light/shutter automation

controllo carichi energia luci tvcc

Energy management powering of the burglar-alarm the automation system

Telephone line 10. aDSl modem/router for the

controllo carichi energia luci tvcc www irrigazione